Free Essay

Body Systeem

In: Business and Management

Submitted By cmselvan72
Words 218741
Pages 875
How to go to your page This eBook set contains two volumes. The main content pages are contiguously numbered: use the Table of Contents to find those page numbers. The front matter pages and indices are labeled with the Volume number and page separated by a colon. For example, to go to page vi of Volume 1, type Vol1:vi in the “page #” box at the top of the screen and click “Go”. To go to page vi of Volume 2, type Vol2:vi in the "page #" box… and so forth.

Encyclopedia of Human Body Systems

This page intentionally left blank

Encyclopedia of Human Body Systems
VOLUME 1

Julie McDowell, Editor

Copyright 2010 by ABC-CLIO, LLC All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, except for the inclusion of brief quotations in a review, without prior permission in writing from the publisher. Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data McDowell, Julie. Encyclopedia of human body systems / Julie McDowell. p. cm. Includes bibliographical references and index. ISBN 978–0–313–39175–0 (hard copy : alk. paper) 1. Human physiology—Encyclopedias. I. Title. QP11.M33 2011 612.003—dc22 2010021682 ISBN: 978–0–313–39175–0 EISBN: 978–0–313–39176–7 14 13 12 11 10 1 2 3 4 5

This book is also available on the World Wide Web as an eBook. Visit www.abc-clio.com for details. Greenwood An Imprint of ABC-CLIO, LLC ABC-CLIO, LLC 130 Cremona Drive, P.O. Box 1911 Santa Barbara, California 93116-1911 This book is printed on acid-free paper Manufactured in the United States of America

Contents

VOLUME ONE About the Editor and Contributors, vii Introduction, ix CHAPTER 1 The Building Blocks of the Human Body, 1 Julie McDowell CHAPTER 2 The Circulatory System, 23 Leslie Mertz CHAPTER 3 The Digestive System, 85 Michael Windelspecht CHAPTER 4 The Endocrine System, 151 Stephanie Watson and Kelli Miller Stacy CHAPTER 5 The Integumentary System, 207 Julie McDowell CHAPTER 6 The Lymphatic System, 223 Julie McDowell and Michael Windelspecht v vi Contents

Glossary, 273 Select Bibliography, 317 Index, I-1–I-30

VOLUME TWO CHAPTER 7 The Muscular System, 323 Amy Adams CHAPTER 8 The Nervous System, 379 Julie McDowell CHAPTER 9 The Reproductive System, 453 Kathryn H. Hollen CHAPTER 10 The Respiratory System, 497 David Petechuk CHAPTER 11 The Skeletal System, 547 Evelyn Kelly CHAPTER 12 The Urinary System, 599 Stephanie Watson Glossary, 619 Select Bibliography, 663 Index, I-1–I-30

About the Editor and Contributors

About the Editor
Julie McDowell is a science and health care journalist based in Washington, D.C. She is the author or coauthor of several books in the sciences, including The Nervous System and Sense Organs, The Lymphatic System, and Metals. She holds an MA in nonfiction writing from Johns Hopkins University in Baltimore, Maryland.

About the Contributors
Amy Adams has written science news and features for publications including The Scientist, Discovery Channel Online, CBS HealthWatch, and Science, among others. She holds an MS in developmental genetics from Cornell University and is a graduate of the Science Communication Program at the University of California, Santa Cruz. Kathryn H. Hollen is a science writer who has worked extensively with the National Institutes of Health, especially the National Cancer Institute, as well as many other organizations devoted to the life sciences. Evelyn Kelly is an independent scholar and adjunct professor at Saint Leo University, Florida Southern College, and Nova University. She has written more than 10 books and over 400 journal articles. She is a member of the National Association of Science Writers and past president of American Medical Writer’s Association, Florida chapter.

vii

viii About the Editor and Contributors

Leslie Mertz is a biologist at Wayne State University. She is the author of Recent Advances and Issues in Biology (2000), and former editor of the research magazine New Science. David Petechuk is an independent scholar. He has written on numerous topics including genetics and cloning and has worked with scientists and faculty in areas such as transplantation and psychiatry. Kelli Miller Stacy is a board-certified life sciences editor and the founder of NEWScience Inc. where she is a feature writer on health and medicine for clients such as The Scientist and Popular Science. She is the winner of the American Medical Writers Association’s Eric Martin Award for excellence in medical reporting. Stephanie Watson is a professional medical writer and editor. She is the author of Medical Tourism: A Reference Guide (2011). Michael Windelspecht is Associate Professor of Biology at Appalachian State University. He is the author of two books in Greenwood’s Groundbreaking Scientific Experiments, Inventions, and Discoveries through the Ages series and editor of Greenwood’s Human Body Systems series.

Introduction

The Encyclopedia of the Human Body Systems provides an overview of the physiology of the major organ systems of the body. For the purposes of this book, a system is defined as an organ group that works to perform a function for the body. This book looks at 11 systems, with each chapter dedicated to exploring a specific system. The first chapter of the book provides an overview of the human body, including a look at its cellular foundation, chemical composition, and how the body is organized as well as an explanation of anatomical terms used to describe different areas of the human body. The subsequent chapters then focus on each of the systems. The purpose of this organization is so that readers can understand the basics of the human body and then go on to learn about each system. The primary organs and functions of each system that are covered in this book’s chapters are outlined below, as well in Table A. It’s important to note that while each system does have its own distinct function, the systems interact with each other and rely on the organs of other systems to function properly. • The Circulatory System: The major organ is the heart, which functions with the help of blood vessels. The circulatory system’s major responsibility is to ensure that the blood transports vital substances like oxygen throughout the body to the heart and other systems’ organs, including the liver, stomach, and brain. The Digestive System: The major organs of this system are the mouth, esophagus, stomach, and small and large intestine, while the secondary organs are the liver, pancreas, salivary glands, and the gall ix •

x Introduction

bladder. The digestive system’s primary role is to turn substances coming into the body—such as through food and water—into fuel for its cells. This process is called metabolism, and is part of the larger, more comprehensive digestive process. • The Endocrine System: The primary organs of this system (more commonly called glands in the case of the endocrine system) are the hypothalamus, pituitary, thyroid, parathyroids, adrenal, pancreas, and sex glands. The endocrine system is one of the body’s two communication hubs, the other being the nervous system. In this system, the communication is carried out through hormones, which are chemicals that travel through the bloodstream that prompt stimulation and inhibition of nerve impulses. The Integumentary System: Major organs are the skin and accessory organs, including hair and nail follicles. The primary job of this system is to protect the body, as well as detect changes that affect the body using its sensory receptors. The Lymphatic System: The primary organs of this system are the bone marrow and thymus, while the secondary organs are the spleen, tonsils, adenoid, Peyer’s patches, and appendix. The lymphatic system’s job is to protect the body against toxins and other potentially harmful substances that can cause illness and disease. While not an organ, one of this system’s most important components are lymphocytes. These specialized cells detect organisms that might be harmful to the body and then prompt an immune response to drive them out of the body. The Muscular System: Three types of muscles make up this system: the skeletal muscle, which helps the body to move; the smooth muscle, which is associated with the internal muscles; and cardiac, which works to help the heart to function. The movement of each of these muscles is determined by direction they receive from different areas of the body. Specifically, the autonomic nervous system controls the smooth and cardiac muscles and the central nervous system controls the central nervous system.







Introduction xi



The Nervous System: The primary organs of the nervous system are the brain and spinal cord. Through the nervous system’s two divisions, the central nervous system (CNS) and the peripheral nervous system (PNS), stimuli and other information is processed into the form of reaction and activity. In addition to the endocrine system, the nervous system is known as one of the body’s key communication centers. This communication is done through nerve impulses that travel through the body’s nerve fiber system. The Reproductive System: The role of this system is to carry out the process of sexual reproduction, which is necessary to continue the human species that contains genetic information that determines a person’s physical characteristics, but also their resistance to certain mutations also ensures the future of the species. This system is unique because there are distinct sets of organs for females and males. In addition, there are internal and external organs in the male and female, with the internal organs located inside the body and external organs located outside the body. Some examples of the internal female reproductive system include the cervix, vagina, and fallopian tubes; external organs include the mammary glands or breasts. For males, internal organs include the ejaculatory ducts and urethra; external organs include the penis and testicles. The Respiratory System: The primary organs are located in two areas: the upper and lower respiratory tracts. The upper tract contains the nose and nasal cavity (also known as the nasal passage), the pharynx (or throat), and the larynx (or voice box). The lower respiratory tract contains the trachea (windpipe), the bronchi, the alveoli, and the lungs. This system’s major responsibility is to control and regulate the breathing process, which involves moving air into and out of the lungs. The Skeletal System: The main components of the skeletal system are the body’s 206 bones, as well as the tendons, ligaments, and joints that connect the bones to the muscles, controlling their movement. The skeletal system is similar to the integumentary system in that it plays a protective role. Like the skin, skeletal bones







xii Introduction
TABLE A Human Body Systems
System Circulatory Digestive Endocrine Lymphatic Muscular Nervous Reproductive Respiratory Skeletal Urinary Integumentary Some examples of organs Heart Stomach, small intestine Thyroid Spleen Cardiac muscle, skeletal muscle Brain, spinal cord Testes, ovaries Lungs Bones, ligaments Bladder, kidneys Skin, hair

Note: This organ list just provides some examples and is not meant to be complete.

protect tissues and organs, as well as the other important internal organs from the body’s other systems. • The Urinary System: This system’s primary organs are the kidneys, ureters, bladder, and urethra. The urinary system’s primary job is to rid the body of waste, through producing urine and other elimination processes. In addition, this system ensures that the body’s fluid system is balanced in terms of acidity.

Each chapter in this volume opens with a listing of interesting facts pertaining to each system, as well as the topics or highlights that will be covered in each chapter. Do not feel the need to memorize these highlights; it is just a way of alerting the reader to the focus of the chapter. Each chapter also contains a “Words to Watch For” section. This listing is an overview of the important terms that the reader can expect to learn about in each chapter. Many of these terms are also highlighted in bold in the chapter and then defined in the glossary, which is located at the back of both volumes for the reader’s convenience. Throughout the book, tables and appropriate graphics will be used to help illustrate some concepts in a visual manner.

Introduction xiii

This book will be useful for students with various backgrounds in understanding human biology. Presented in a clear and concise manner, this book explains basic concepts of the human body—such as cell and blood composition—and then builds on this foundation to explore more complex concepts, such as nerve impulse transmission and respiratory processes. Whether readers open this book with no grasp of or a firm comprehension about the workings of the human body, they will broaden and deepen their understanding about a subject that has confounded some of the greatest minds in history, including Hippocrates, Aristotle, and Michelangelo. The mysteries of the human body continue to perplex scientists, medical experts, and the general public. However, these minds—from the past and present—found learning about the human body exhilarating and vital in order to improve the quality of life and find cures and treatments for diseases and disorders. But the one thing necessary to explore these mysteries is learning and studying not only the complexities of each of the human body systems, but also the basics—what are they composed of, and how do they function? The Encyclopedia of the Human Body Systems is a key resource for this information, and therefore, an important tool in gaining a comprehensive understanding of the human body. Julie McDowell Washington, D.C.

This page intentionally left blank

1
The Building Blocks of the Human Body
Julie McDowell

Interesting Facts
• It’s estimated that over a lifetime, humans produce a total of 10,000 gallons of saliva. While saliva is necessary for us to taste our food, we cannot taste it before some food dissolves in it. There are approximately 100 trillion cells in the adult human body. There are approximately 31 billion base pairs in the human genome. In a single cell, there are six billion “steps” of the DNA or body’s genetic code. If stretched out, it would measure six feet, but it is twisted up in a coil in the nucleus of the cell, where its diameter measures only 1/2500 of an inch. A mammal’s lifespan is typically determined by its size. But because humans have developed ways to protect themselves, their lifespan is longer. More specifically, a man’s lifespan should be 10 to 30 years— somewhere between a goat and a horse—but it’s actually an average of 74.7 years in the United States. Thanks to the body’s complex and extensive circulatory network, between 40 and 50 percent of body heat is lost through the head. This is why hats keep the body warm in winter—they keep the heat in the body.

• • •





1

2 Julie McDowell

• • • •

Compared to other cells in the body, brain cells live the longest, with some living an entire lifetime. Every second, the human body destroys—as well as produces—15 blood cells. Approximately 90 percent of the body is made up of four elements: oxygen, carbon, nitrogen, and hydrogen. The brain is especially reliant on oxygen to function. In fact, it uses more than 25 percent of the body’s oxygen supply.

Chapter Highlights
• • • • • • • Levels of the human body Chemical elements of the body Cells and tissues Organs and organ groups Body cavities How is the body organized? Key anatomy terms

Words to Watch For
Adiopose tissues Cells Cell membrane Cell organelles Cell respiration Cranial cavity Cytoplasm Dorsal cavity Enzymes Frontal plane Homeostasis Hormones Inorganic chemicals Median sagittal plane Meninges Mesentery Nucleus Organic chemicals Organs Organ systems Pelvic cavity Peritoneum Plane Serous membranes Solvent Spinal cavity Tissues Transverse plane Ventral cavity

The Building Blocks of the Human Body 3

Introduction
The human body is a composed of a complicated organizational structure that becomes increasingly complex. As the complexity increases through the various levels of the human body, the behavior of each level is by the function and operation of the previous—or simpler—level of the body. But just because the human body is complicated and complex does not mean that many aspects cannot be studied and understood. While many mysteries still surround the human body, there is much that we know and understand. The key to this understanding is starting at the most basic level, and that is the chemicals of the human body. This chapter will begin with a brief overview of the levels—from the chemical to the organ system level—and then go into more details about certain aspects of each of the levels, such as cells, tissues, and membranes (see Table 1.1). Of course, more details on all of these levels are incorporated throughout The Encyclopedia of Human Body Systems.

Chemical Components of the Body
The human body is often described as a large vessel containing chemicals that are constantly reacting with one another. There are two kinds of chemicals that make up the human body: inorganic and organic chemicals. Although there are some exceptions, inorganic chemicals are primarily molecules that are made up of one or two elements that are not carbon. Water (H2O) and oxygen (O2) are examples that are important for the human body to function, as are iron (Fe), calcium (Ca), and sodium (Na). One exception is carbon dioxide (CO2)—even though this contains
TABLE 1.1 The Structural Organization of the Human Body
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Chemical Cellular Tissue Organ Organ system Organism

4 Julie McDowell

SIDEBAR 1.1

Atoms: Chemical Foundation of the Body
The simplest chemical, in living as well as nonliving matter, is the element, and the simplest element is the atom. In fact, the atom is the smallest unit in the body’s chemical system, which is its simplest level. Therefore, the atom really is the most basic element of the human body. The four most common elements in the human body are carbon (C), oxygen (O), hydrogen (H), and nitrogen (N). Each atom is made up of a center or nucleus. The nucleus also contains protons and neutrons. Floating around the nucleus at rapid speeds are electrons. While each proton is positively charged, the neutrons are neutral. The electrons, however, are negatively charged. In a regular atom, the number of protons and neutrons are equivalent, therefore the electrical charge is neutral. One example is the carbon atom, which has six protons and six neutrons in its nucleus, while six electrons are in orbit around the nucleus on paths known as energy levels. Electrons are also the way that atoms bond to one another to form molecules. A molecule is made up of tightly bound atoms that behave as a unit. However, the number of electrons in the body will determine how the atoms will bond. The bonding also depends on the arrangement of the electrons.

carbon, it is inorganic. Information about the body’s chemical components is also covered in detail throughout this book, but below is a brief introduction. (See Sidebar 1.1 for a brief explanation of the importance of atoms in the chemistry of the body.) The other category of chemicals important to the body is organic chemicals, which contain the two elements hydrogen and carbon. These chemicals include fats, proteins, carbohydrates, and nucleic acids.

Key Inorganic Compounds
As noted earlier, water, oxygen, and carbon dioxide are among the body’s most important chemical compounds.

The Building Blocks of the Human Body 5

Water Water, which scientists estimate comprises approximately 60 to 75 percent of the human body, is important for three primary reasons: it acts as a solvent, it acts as a lubricant, and because it changes temperature slowly, it is vital in regulating the body’s temperature. The first reason—because it is a solvent—means that many substances can dissolve in it, which allows nutrients and other vital components to be transported throughout the body. This is because the body’s main transportation systems, blood, are largely composed of water. Therefore, substances like glucose (which comes from food) that are needed for energy in the body can be dissolved in the blood and then delivered to the heart and cells. Another important function is the elimination of waste. Materials that the body does not need, called waste products, are dissolved in the water component of urine and then flushed out of the body through the urinary system. In addition to acting as a solvent, water is a lubricant, which means it prevents friction between the various surfaces inside the body, such as bones and blood vessels. One example of water acting as a lubricant is in the digestive system. One of the fluids present in this system is the fluid mucus, which, like blood, is primarily made up of water. Mucus enables food to move through the intestines and be digested, providing the body with fuel. The third function of water in the body is that of a temperature regulator. The temperature of water does not change quickly—it has to absorb a lot of heat or lose a lot of heat before the temperature increases or drops. This property enables the body to stay at a fairly constant temperature. In addition, water does an important cooling job for the body in the form of perspiration. When the body is absorbing an excess amount of heat, sweat forms on the skin, which allows the heat to escape the body without damaging any cells. While water is always moving throughout the body, it is categorized into two types, depending on its location. The two types are intracellular fluid (ICF) and extracellular fluid (ECF). ICF is the water located within the cells. This water makes up approximately 65 percent of the body’s total water supply. ECF is the remaining 35 percent of the body’s water and is the water outside of the cells. There are three types of ECF— plasma, lymph, tissue fluid (also known as interstitial fluid), and specialized fluid. Plasma is water found within the blood vessels; lymph is water found in lymphatic vessels; and tissue fluid is water found in the small

6 Julie McDowell

spaces that exist between cells. Specialized fluids include water that performs a specific function, depending on the system in which they are located; examples include cerebrospinal fluid around the spinal cord in the nervous system, and aqueous humor in the eye. Oxygen and Carbon Dioxide We are continuously inhaling the gas known as oxygen—without it, we would die. Oxygen plays a vital role in breaking down nutrients such as glucose that need to be transported to various locations to provide the body with energy. This process is known as cell respiration. The energy produced through cell respiration is contained in a molecule that is called ATP, which stands for adenosine triphosphate. ATP can be thought of as the fuel required for various cellular processes to occur throughout the body. In addition to producing ATP, cell respiration also produces carbon dioxide. So while oxygen is inhaled, carbon dioxide is exhaled, and is considered a waste product. It is exhaled because it is a waste product of cell respiration. Like other waste products that are covered throughout this book, carbon dioxide must leave the body. If carbon dioxide builds up in the body, it can disrupt the chemical balance in the body. This can cause acidosis, when fluid becomes too acidic, which can result in calcium deposits in the body’s soft tissue. Carbon dioxide buildup in the body is toxic to the heart (see Sidebar 1.2).

Key Organic Compounds
As indicated earlier in this chapter, some of the most important organic compounds in the body include carbohydrates, lipids, proteins, and nucleic acids. These compounds are explained in detail in Chapter 3, which covers the digestive system, but below is a brief introduction. Carbohydrates These compounds are made up of carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen, and its main function is to be the body’s energy source. There are four types of carbohydrates, all of which are forms of saccharide, which means sugar. The four types are monosaccharides, disaccharides, oligosaccharides, and polysaccharides. The prefixes refer to how many sugars are in the compound.

The Building Blocks of the Human Body 7

SIDEBAR 1.2

Cell Respiration: How the Body Produces Energy
The body relies on the chemical reaction known as cell respiration to produce energy, and involves both oxygen and carbon dioxide. The chemical reaction is spelled out in the following equation: Glucose (C6H12O6) + 6O2 ! 6CO2 + 6H2O + ATP + heat Glucose comes from food, which is broken down with the help of oxygen. This reaction results in carbon dioxide, which, because it is a waste product, is exhaled. Water, energy (ATP), and heat are also produced. In addition to carbon dioxide, these other substances perform key functions in the body. Water becomes part of the body’s fluid system, acting like a solvent and lubricant, while the heat helps to maintain the body’s temperature. ATP is energy used for processes vital for the body to function, including digestion and muscle contraction.

Monosaccharides are the simplest sugar compounds, because they only contain one sugar. Disaccharides are composed of two monosaccharide compounds, while oligosaccharides are made up of anywhere between 3 and 20 monosaccharides. Finally, polysaccharides are composed of thousands of monosaccharide compounds. Lipids Like carbohydrates, lipids are also composed of carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen. Some lipids also contain phosphorus. Three types of lipids include true fats (or just fat), phospholipids, and steroids. True fats are made up of a molecule called glycerol, and between one and three fatty acid molecules. These fats are where the body stores excess energy produced by food in the form of calories. If a body does not use all of the calories, it is then converted to fat and stored in the body’s adipose tissues. These tissues are located between the skin and muscles. Triglyceride is one type of true fat. It is when one glycerol is bound to three fatty acid molecules. This is the type of fat often found in highly processed foods, and often found in two forms—saturated and unsaturated

8 Julie McDowell

SIDEBAR 1.3

Saturated versus Unsaturated Fat
There are two types of true fats—saturated and unsaturated fats, with a diet high in saturated fats, as well as cholesterol, getting a lot of blame for contributing to heart disease. Heart disease, or atherosclerosis, occurs when there are deposits of cholesterol on the walls of the coronary arteries that supply blood to the heart muscle. These deposits cause the arterial walls to narrow, which then inhibits blood flow through the arteries. If the deposits become too great and blood is blocked from the heart, a clot forms and can result in a heart attack. Saturated fats are typically in a solid form, and are found in food derived from animals such as beef and pork, chicken, eggs, and cheese, as well as some oils, including coconut and palm oils. Unsaturated fats are also found in oils, but those that are plant-based, including corn, sunflower, safflower, and certain fish oils. When saturated fats are broken down by the liver, they are used to synthesize cholesterol, which cause the blood cholesterol level to increase. But unsaturated fats behave differently; when they are broken down by the liver, they do not increase the body’s cholesterol. In fact, there is evidence that some unsaturated fats may actually help lower cholesterol and prevent atherosclerosis in the body by inhibiting cholesterol from being produced by the liver. This is why a diet that is high in unsaturated fats and low in saturated fats is believed by scientists and medical experts to help prevent heart disease. However, there are other contributing factors to atherosclerosis, including heredity and risk factors such as smoking, as well as being overweight. Therefore, eliminating these contributing factors, through quitting smoking, and exercising to lose weight, help to reduce the risk of heart disease. It certainly helps to eat a healthy diet—to help us maintain a reasonable weight.

The Building Blocks of the Human Body 9

fats—on nutrition labels. (See Sidebar 1.3 for more information about saturated and unsaturated fats). Another type of lipids is phospholipids, which are diglycerides that are bonded to a phosphate molecule. Unlike fats, phospholipids do not store energy. They are a part of a cell’s structure; they form part of the cell membrane known as lecithin. They also are an integral part of the body’s nervous system, in that they help to form the cell’s myelin sheath that protects neurons. Like phospholipids, steroids form part of the cell membranes. But they also have other functions. One of their primary functions is that they are processed by the liver into bile salts, which are used during the digestion to process fats. In addition, steroids are also involved in hormones related to male and female reproductive organs—testes (men) and ovaries (women). Proteins Comprised of building blocks known as amino acids, proteins contain carbon, hydrogen, oxygen, nitrogen, and sometimes sulfur. One of the most important functions of proteins is their role as enzymes or catalysts. Enzymes accelerate chemical reactions in the body without additional energy, such as heat. There are specific enzymes for specific reactions. The digestive system provides some excellent examples. The enzymes that react to digest starches are different from those that digest lipids in food. Because there are many thousands of different chemical reactions going on in the body at one time, there are many thousands of different enzymes. Nucleic Acids There are two types of nucleic acid—DNA, which stands for deoxyribonucleic acid, and RNA, which stands for ribonucleic acid. Nucleic acids are large molecules that are made up of nucleotides. Each nucleotide has four components: sugar, phosphate group, and a nitrogenous base. Here is more detail on each of these molecules (see Figure 1.1):

DNA
Sugar: deoxyribose Bases: adenine, guanine, cytosine, or thymine

10 Julie McDowell

RNA
Sugar: ribose Bases: adenine, guanine, cytosine, or uracil As evident in the illustration, DNA looks similar to two ladders twisted together. These strands are the nucleotides, and their twisted form

Figure 1.1 DNA and RNA Structure. A small portion of the RNA and DNA molecules, with some of the different nucleotides identified, including cytosine, adenine, and uracil. The synthesizing of RNA produces a complementary copy of half of the DNA strand. (National Human Genome Research Institute)

The Building Blocks of the Human Body 11

is called a double helix. Phosphate and sugar molecules alternate to form each nucleotide, or the upright length of the ladder. The rings that connect the strands are formed by the nitrogenous base pairs. It’s important to note that in terms of the nitrogenous pairs, adenine is always with thymine, while guanine is always with cytosine. DNA contains information on hereditary characteristics, and therefore is the body’s genetic code. The code is determined in how the bases are arranged, and determines the various kinds of proteins produced by the body. While these bases make up the protein, the sequence of these bases is called a gene. While DNA is a double strand of nucleotides, RNA is just a single strand. Uracil is in place of thymine in the nucleous bases. It is produced through synthesis from DNA in a cell’s nucleus. RNA’s primary function is to carry out protein synthesis, and it performs this duty in the cytoplasm.

Cells
The next level of complexity in the human body is cells, which are the smallest units in the body. There are numerous types of cells in the body, and different cells perform specific functions depending on their chemical reaction. However, in order for the body to be stable and function normally—also known as a state of homeostasis—cells must work together. While the specific functions of cells will be discussed throughout The Encyclopedia of Human Body Systems, it’s important to have a basic understanding of the structure of a cell and some of their basic functions. In addition to varying by function, cells also come in all shapes and sizes, although most are very small and can only be viewed under a microscope. They are measured in units called microns, and each micron is approximately 1/25,000 of an inch. Some exceptions to this are nerve cells, which can be very long, although very narrow in diameter. Some nerve cells are at least two feet long. Despite their different shapes and measurements, most cells have four common structural features: a cell membrane, a nucleus, and cytoplasm and cell organelles (see Figure 1.2). The one exception is mature red blood cells—they have no nuclei (the plural form of nucleus).

12 Julie McDowell

Figure 1.2 Human Cell. Some important elements of a cell, including the nucleus, cytoplasm, mitochondrian, lysosome, and ribosomes. (Mark Rasmussen/Dreamstime.com)

Cell Membrane
The cell membrane is the outermost part of the cell, and is composed of phospholipids, cholesterol, and proteins. This membrane is permeable, which means that certain substances and fluids are allowed to enter and exit. In fact, the phospholipids allow other lipids or substances that are soluble in lipids to leave and enter the cell membrane through a process called diffusion. But the fluid movement into and out of the membrane is controlled by cholesterol in the cell, making the cell stable. It’s important to note that while certain substances are allowed into the cell through its membrane, the membrane is selectively permeable. Part of the job of the

The Building Blocks of the Human Body 13

membrane is to keep out dangerous substances that will harm the cell, and therefore the body. Proteins are also involved in allowing substances to flow in and out of the membrane. Some cell proteins form openings known as pores that allow the stream of materials in both directions. Other proteins act as enzymes that enable substances to go in and out of the membrane. Finally, some proteins act as receptor sites for hormones. Once these hormones come into contact with these receptor sites, certain chemical reactions begin.

Nucleus
Located within the cytoplasm is the nucleus, which is protected by the twolayered nuclear membrane. Each nucleus has at least one nucleoli, as well as the cell’s chromosomes. The nucleolus is made up of three substances: DNA, RNA, and protein. Chromosomes are made up of DNA and protein. There are 46 chromosomes in a nucleus, and they are in the form of long threads called chromatin. As discussed earlier in this chapter, DNA is the body’s genetic code. While the DNA in a nucleus does contain all of the body’s genetic traits, there are only a few genes that are active. It is these active genes that code the proteins that determine the specific type of the cell.

Cytoplasm and Cell Organelles
Cellular chemical reactions take place in the cytoplasm, which is the watery liquid between the cell membrane and nucleus. Cytoplasm is a concoction of minerals, gases, and other organic molecules as well as cell organelles. Each of these organelles has a specific job to do in order to enable cells to function. One type of cell organelle is the ribosomes, made up of protein and ribosomal RNA, that is the location of protein synthesis. Also present in the cytoplasm is the Golgi apparatus. These are flat, circular membranes arranged in a stack. Inside these sacs, materials such as carbohydrates are synthesized, and leave the cell by secretion. This secretion occurs when a single sac breaks from the Golgi membrane, becomes part of the cell membrane, and ultimately leaves the cell. In addition to the ribosomes and the Golgi apparatus, another cell organelle is the mitochondria, which are oval in shape. The mitochondria

14 Julie McDowell

have a double membrane, with the inner membrane containing folds known as cristae. Mitochondria are where cell respiration takes place, and the location of ATP, or energy, production. Another type of organelle is lysosomes, which contain digestive enzymes and help white blood cells to destroy bacteria. These lysosomes also digest dead cells and damaged cellular parts, which has to occur before a cell can be repaired. The last three types of organelles are centrioles, cilia, and flagella. Centrioles are located immediately outside the nucleus, and play an important role in organizing spindle fibers during the division of a cell. Cilia and flagella can be thought of as sweepers; they are responsible for sweeping certain materials along the surface of the cell.

Tissues
Following the cellular level, the next level is tissues, which is a cell group with a similar structure that performs a function. There are four types of tissue groups: • Epithelial tissues: These cover or serve as lining on certain body surfaces, including the outer layer of the skin; some of these cells produce secretions that have a specific function. Connective tissues: These connect as well as support certain parts of the body. Some connective tissues transport and/or store materials. Examples include blood, bone, and adipose tissue. Muscle tissues: These are responsible for contraction, which enables movement. Examples include skeletal muscles as well as the heart. Nerve tissues: These are responsible for regulating body functions through generating and transmitting electrochemical impulses. Examples include the brain and optic nerves.



• •

Organs
Groups of tissues arranged to perform specialized functions are called organs. Some examples include the stomach, kidneys, and lungs. The organs all work in concert with other each other. For example, the

The Building Blocks of the Human Body 15

epithelial tissue in the stomach secretes juices that allow food to digest. The wall of the stomach contains muscle tissue that contracts, allowing food to mix with gastric juice. This digesting concoction then moves into the small intestine. Along the way, nerve tissue is transmitting an impulse that controls the contracting of the stomach.

Organ System
Just like organs are a group of tissues that perform a specific function, an organ system is a group of organs that together perform a specific function. Just like the organs work together, so do the organ systems to ensure the proper function of the human body. There are 11 organ systems, and each with their own chapter in this book. The body’s organ systems are integumentary, skeletal, muscular, nervous, endocrine, circulatory, lymphatic, respiratory, digestive, urinary, and reproductive (see Table 1.2) for a more

TABLE 1.2 Organ Systems of the Human Body
Organ system Circulatory Digestive Endocrine Integumentary General function Movement of chemicals through the body Supply of nutrients to the body Maintenance of internal environmental conditions Protection against pathogens and chemicals, as well as excessive loss of water Immune system, transport, return of fluids Movement Processing of incoming stimuli and coordination of activity Production of offspring Gas exchange Support, storage of nutrients Removal of waste products Some examples Heart Stomach, small intestine Thyroid Skin, hair

Lymphatic Muscular Nervous Reproductive Respiratory Skeletal Urinary

Spleen Cardiac muscle, skeletal muscle Brain, spinal cord Testes, ovaries Lungs Bones, ligaments Bladder, kidneys

16 Julie McDowell

detailed description of the functions of each organ system. It’s important to understand that the organ systems work together in order for the body to function properly.

The Body’s Cavities
Another important method to describe the human body is according to cavities. There are two major cavities in the body: the dorsal cavity and ventral cavity (see Figure 1.3). It’s important to note that when describing

Figure 1.3 Body Parts and Areas. The anterior (left) and posterior (right) views of the human body, including body parts and areas. (Linda Bucklin/Dreamstime.com)

The Building Blocks of the Human Body 17

these and related locations, it’s assumed that the body is in an anatomical position, which means that the body is standing up and facing forward. The arms are at the side and facing up. Based on this anatomic position, the dorsal cavity is the posterior view. This cavity includes the cranial cavity, which is comprised of the skull and the brain. The dorsal cavity also includes the spinal cavity, which includes the spine and spinal cord. Both the cranial and spinal cavities contain all of the nervous system organs. Membranes known as meninges line the dorsal cavity systems. The ventral cavity includes organs and organ system in the anterior view. The thoracic and abdominal cavities are part of the ventral cavity system. Located in the abdominal cavity is the pelvic cavity. The abdominal and thoracic cavities are divided by the diaphragm. The thoracic cavity’s organs include the heart and the lungs, which are covered by pleural membranes. The pleural membranes include the parietal, which cover the walls of the chest and visceral, which cover the lungs. Pericardial membranes cover the heart. Within the heart, there are parietal and visceral pericardium membranes that cover various areas of the heart. These membranes are known as serous, which means they cover organs. In the abdominal cavity are located the liver, stomach, and intestines. There are two types of serous membranes in the abdominal cavity—the peritoneum and mesentery. The abdominal wall is lined by the peritoneum, while the outer surfaces of the organs located in the abdominal cavity are covered by the mesentery membranes. The third cavity, the pelvic cavity, is below the abdominal cavity. The peritoneum is also present in this cavity, because it covers some of the surfaces of the pelvic organs, which include the body’s reproductive organs, as well as the urinary organs such as the bladder.

Planes, Sections, and Areas
In addition to cavities, there are other important ways to describe how the body is organized. These include learning certain terms that refer to certain areas of the body (Table 1.3), as well as terms that refer to specific locations

18 Julie McDowell
TABLE 1.3 Key Anatomy Terms: Body Parts
Name of body part/area Axillary Brachial Buccal Cardiac Cervical Cranial Cutaneous Deltoid Femoral Frontal Gastric Gluteal Hepatic Iliac Lumbar Mammary Nasal Occipital Orbital Parietal Patellar Pectoral Plantar Pulmonary Renal Sacral Temporal Umbilical Refers to Armpit Upper arm Mouth Heart Neck Head Skin Shoulder Thigh Forehead Stomach Buttocks Liver Hip Small area of the lower back Breast Nose Back of the head Eye Crown of head Kneecap Chest Sole of the foot Lungs Kidney Spine base Side of head Navel

in the body (Table 1.4). You might recognize some of these terms, such as visceral, which have already been mentioned in reference to cavities and membranes.

The Building Blocks of the Human Body 19
TABLE 1.4 Key Anatomy Terms: Location
Location/position in the body Superior Inferior Anterior Posterior Ventral Dorsal Medial Lateral Internal External Superficial Deep Central Peripheral Proximal Distal Parietal Visceral Refers to Above, higher Lower, below Towards the front of the body (chest) Towards the back of the body (lumbar) Towards the front of the body (breasts, mammary glands) Towards the back of the body (buttocks) Towards the body’s midline (lungs) Facing away from the midline (shoulders, in comparison to neck) Within (brain in the skull) Outside (ribs are located outside of the lungs) Towards the body’s surface (skin) Within (various vein systems) Primary portion of the body (brain in relation to the nervous system) Rooted in the main part of the body and extending outward (nerves in the arms, legs, and face) Near the origin (knee, in relation to foot) Removed from the origin (bicep in relation to hand) Related to the cavity walls (membranes that line the chest cavity) Related to the organs within a cavity (membranes that cover the lungs)

One way the body is described—particularly the internal anatomy—is by separating different parts of the body into sections, planes, and areas (Planes are also discussed in Chapter 11, “The Skeletal System”). There are three primary planes in body: the median sagittal plane, the transverse plane, and the frontal plane (see Figure 1.4). The plane is an imaginary flat surface intersecting the body that separates the body into two separate sections of the body or of an organ, such as the brain or the spinal cord. It’s important to note that the right and left refer to that of the person being described, not how it looks on the printed page. The median sagittal plane is longitudinal and divides the left and right parts along the

20 Julie McDowell

Figure 1.4 Planes of the Body. The left graphic represents a cross section of the spinal cord. The terms indicating directions of the body are indicated. The right graphic identifies the terms for the different planes of the body. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

midline of the body. The transverse plane divides a person into upper and lower sections, while the frontal plane divides the body in dorsal (posterior or lumbar side) and the ventral (anterior or abdominal side) portions. Two other sections/planes are the cross section and the longitudinal sections. The cross section is a plane that runs perpendicular to the long portion of an organ. Examples include the cross section of the spinal cord or even a small intestine. A longitudinal section runs along the long axis of the organ.

Abdomen Areas
The abdomen—what is known as the lower trunk of the body—is divided into four quadrants, as well as nine areas that are based on the planes and sections that were just described (see Figure 1.5). These quadrants are

The Building Blocks of the Human Body 21

Figure 1.5 Areas of the Abdomen. The “A” graphic represents the four quadrants of the body. The “B” graphic depicts the abdomen’s nine quadrants. (Sebastian Kaulitzki/Dreamstime.com)

evident when a transverse plane and a midsagittal plan intersect around the umbilical area. The four quadrants of the abdomen are the right upper quadrant, left upper quadrant, right lower quadrant, and left lower quadrant. But to describe the different abdominal areas in more detail, the abdomen call be further divided into nine areas if two transverse planes and two sagittal plans divide the body. The nine regions can actually be organized according to three groups: the upper areas, middle areas, and lower areas. The upper areas include the hypochondriac and epigastric regions, while the middle areas include the lumbar and umbilical regions. The lower areas encompass the iliac and hypogastric regions.

Summary
Before understanding each of the body’s complex organ systems, it’s important to have an understanding of how the body is organized, as well

22 Julie McDowell

as to get an overview of how the body’s key building blocks function. This includes understanding that the body is divided into levels—beginning with the simplest structures like the chemical, cellular, and tissue levels, and moving up to more complex levels, including the organ, organ system, and organism levels. The body is made up of organic and inorganic chemicals, but its smallest unit is the cell. In addition to levels, the body is also organized according to cavities, as well as planes, sections, and areas.

2
The Circulatory System
Leslie Mertz

Interesting Facts
• • • At any given time, the veins and venules typically hold about twothirds of the blood flowing through the body. As the heart contracts and blood rushes into the aorta, it is traveling at a speed of about 8 inches (20 centimeters) per second. Even in a person who is resting, blood issuing from the heart can travel down to the person’s toes and back to the heart in just a minute. When a person is exercising heavily, that trip can take just 10 seconds. On average, every red blood cell completes the heart-to-body-to-lungs circuit 40–50 times an hour. If all of the blood vessels in an average adult were strung together end to end, they would reach at least 60,000 miles long, more than twice the distance around the Earth’s equator. The capillaries alone make up 60 percent of that total. Every second, 10 million red blood cells die in the normal adult. The body replaces them just as quickly, however, so the total number remains constant. In the average adult, the heart weighs less than three quarters of a pound—about 11 ounces (310 grams). In any given person, it’s about the size of his or her fist.
23







24 Leslie Mertz



The heart beats an average of 72 times a minute with a typical atrest volume of 75 ml of blood pumped with each beat. Using those figures, a 75-year-old’s heart has contracted more than 2.8 billion times and pumped more than 212 million liters of blood in his or her lifetime. When a person is resting, the left ventricle pumps about 4–7 liters of blood every minute. In a well-trained athlete who is doing strenuous exercise, that amount can rise to almost 30 liters per minute. Heart rate changes greatly during child development. The typical heart rate in a newborn is 130 beats per minute (bpm). It drops to 100 bpm by the time the child reaches 3 years old, 90 at 8 years old, and 85 at 12 years old. In an increasingly common practice, people are donating blood for use in their own upcoming surgeries. Called autologous blood donation, it helps patients ensure safe transfusions.







Chapter Highlights
• • • • • Blood: red blood cells, white blood cells, plasma Blood vessels: systemic and pulmonary circulation, arterial and venous systems Capillary system The heart: muscle, blood flow, electrical function Organs that depend on the circulatory system: digestion, liver and hepatic circulation, kidneys and renal circulation, spleen, cerebral circulation and the blood-brain barrier

Words to Watch For
Agglutination Albumins Amino acids Anions Annulus fibrosus Antigens Aortic arch Arterial baroreceptor reflex

The Circulatory System 25

Arterial system Arteriovenous anastomoses Atrioventricular node Atrium B lymphocytes (B cells) Baroreceptor Basophils Bayliss myogenic response Blood Blood pressure Blood sugar level Blood type Blood vessels Bowman’s capsule Brachiocephalic artery Bundle of His Capillaries Cations Chordae tendineae Circle of Willis Circulatory system Colic artery Common carotid arteries Complement

Concentration gradient Coronary arteries Coronary circulation Diastole Diffusion End-diastolic volume Endocardium Endothelium Eosinophils Epitope Femoral artery Femoral vein Fibrinogen Fibular vein Gastric Gastroepiploic Globulins Glomerulus Granulocytes Heart Heme group Hemoglobin Hemolysis Hypertension Immunoglobulins In-series blood circulation Intestinal villi Involuntary muscle

Lymph Lymphocytes Macrophages Microvilli Monocytes Nephrons Neutrophils Osmosis Pacemaker Partial pressure Pericardium pH level Phagocytosis Plasma Plasminogen Platelets Portal circulation Prothrombin Protozoa Purkinje fibers Red blood cells Septum Sinoatrial node Solutes Stroke Systemic circulation Systole T lymphocytes (T cells) Terminal arterioles

26 Leslie Mertz

Thrombocytes Thromboplastin Tunica adventitia Tunica intima Tunica media

Type A, B, AB, and O blood Ureter Vasoconstrictor nerves

Vena cava Ventricle Voluntary muscle White blood cells

Introduction
Animals possess an array of internal circulatory systems for transporting materials through the blood and to every part of the body. Depending on the type of animal, the system may be quite simple or very complex. Earthworms, for example, have a series of “hearts” that are little more than pulsating blood vessels to assist the transit of blood through other vessels and to body organs. Insects and some other invertebrate animals have what is known as an open circulatory system that forgoes the network of vessels and instead usually delivers blood through one long, dorsal vessel that empties into a large cavity, or sinus. In that flooded cavity, the body organs are actually bathed in blood. As organisms become more complex and larger, a closed circulatory system is the norm. In a closed system, the blood makes its route through the body and to the tissues in vessels. Earthworms have a closed circulatory system, and so do all vertebrates, including humans. The purpose of this chapter is to examine the structure and function of the human circulatory system, which is also known as the cardiovascular system because it includes the heart, or cardium from the Greek word for heart, and the blood vessels, or vasculature. The blood and all of its cells are also part of this system. The circulatory system serves as the body’s delivery method, picking up oxygen from the lungs and dropping it off at tissue and organ cells around the body, then gathering carbon dioxide from the tissues and organs, and shipping it off to the lungs. It also distributes nutrients from the digestive system, transports chemical messages from the brain and other organs to various sites in the body, and provides the route and means for the body to mount a defense against bacterial infection. It even maintains the internal temperature by shuttling excess heat from the core of the body to the outside.

The Circulatory System 27

A Living River: Foundations of the Human Circulatory System
An amazing river system flows through the human body. After a person takes a breath of air, the oxygen is swept into the current and rushes to muscles, the brain, or another part of the body. Shortly after a Sunday dinner, nutrients begin to make their way into this same system for dispersal throughout the body. Alongside them, bacteria-fighting cells race to the site of an infection. This remarkable river is the circulatory system: the heart, blood vessels, and blood. In a river system, water flows with a current between banks. A typical river system comprises tiny creeks, usually with a very slow current; larger, faster-moving river branches; and the main river with its strong flow. Likewise, the circulatory system has a liquid that flows with a current within a confined space. Blood replaces water. Instead of a riverbed, the blood flows inside of tubes, the blood vessels. Here and there, smaller branches separate from or connect into the main bloodstream. Blood from these branches eventually flows into or collects from even tinier vessels, which have a much slower current than the main bloodstream. This chapter will provide an introduction to the various components of the circulatory system, primarily the heart, the blood vessels, and the blood.

The Blood
Blood is more than just a simple, red liquid. It is actually a clear, somewhat gold-colored, protein-rich fluid crowded with red and white cells. The preponderance of red cells gives it the scarlet cast. When separated from the rest of the blood, the clear fluid, called plasma, has a more watery consistency. The reason that blood is more like syrup than water is the addition of red and white cells, and platelets, which combine to make up 40 to 45 percent of blood volume. Just as a glass of mud is more difficult to pour than a glass of water, because mud is actually a mixture of water plus dirt particles, blood is thicker because its plasma is laden with red and white blood cells. From this standpoint, blood truly is thicker than water. The “thickness” of a liquid is known as its viscosity. The slower something flows, the more viscous it is. Blood, for example, is three to four times more viscous than water.

28 Leslie Mertz

All of the various components of blood have vital functions. As an example, the plasma serves as the liquid that suspends the red and white blood cells, along with all of the other chemical compounds and various materials that use the bloodstream to travel throughout the body. It also regulates the movement of heat from the body’s core to the skin, the head, and the extremities. The red blood cells have a primary role of transporting oxygen from lungs to cells, while the white blood cells help defend against infection from invading organisms and foreign proteins. Table 2.1 describes some of these components in greater detail.

Red Blood Cells
Of the 5.5 quarts (5.2 liters) of blood in an average person, the red blood cells are, by far, the most prominent cellular component. Red blood cells, or erythrocytes, number about 28.6 trillion in the average male and 24.8 trillion in the average female. It follows, then, that red blood cells are microscopic. Ranging in size from 2.6 to 3.5 × 10−4 inches (6.5–8.8 m), red blood cells are disk-shaped cells with concave depressions in the centers of both sides. Red blood cells must be flexible, too. The flexibility is critical, because they have to bend, twist, and otherwise deform to squeeze through the tiny capillaries that serve as gateways to the tissue. Another identifying

TABLE 2.1 Components of the Blood
Size Red blood cellsa (Erythrocytes) White blood cells (Leukocytes) Platelets a Lifespan 120–180 days

Number 5.5 × 1012/L in males 4.8 × 1012/L in females 4–11 × 109/L 150–400 × 109/L

6.5–8.8 µm

7–18 µ about 3 µ

Variable 4–10 days

The number of red blood cells increases among persons living at high altitudes. In extreme altitudes, individuals may have 50 percent more red blood cells than the amounts shown here.

The Circulatory System 29

feature of red blood cells is the lack of nuclei, a characteristic that sets them apart from other blood cells. The primary duty of red blood cells is to transport oxygen and carbon dioxide. After a human breathes in oxygen, the red blood cells deliver it to the tissues. As tissue cells use the oxygen, carbon dioxide begins to accumulate. The red blood cells then pick up the carbon dioxide waste product and transport it back to the lungs, where it is discharged during exhalation. The jobs of picking up and delivering oxygen and carbon dioxide are accomplished through a large chemical compound known as hemoglobin (Figure 2.1). Located within red blood cells, hemoglobin also gives red blood cells their red color. The more oxygen the hemoglobin is carrying, the brighter red the blood. When the blood is carrying carbon dioxide rather than oxygen— when deoxygenated blood is returning from the tissues back to the lungs—blood takes on a dark maroon hue. The change in color is actually a result of a slight change in the three-dimensional configuration of hemoglobin when it is carrying oxygen. Hemoglobin itself is a combination of a simple protein and an organic structure that contains Figure 2.1 A Hemoglobin iron ions. The protein, called a Molecule. Hemoglobin is made up globin protein, contains four polyof four globin chains: two beta and peptide chains, which are short two alpha chains. Within each globin strings of amino acids, the build- chain sits one iron-containing heme ing blocks of proteins. In adults, group. The heme group binds oxygen the four chains normally come in for transport from the lungs to the two varieties: a pair of alpha body tissues. (Sandy Windelspecht/ chains and a pair of beta chains. Ricochet Productions)

30 Leslie Mertz

Such hemoglobin is designated hemoglobin A. Each polypeptide chain is coupled with a separate iron ion, which is bound in a ringlike chemical structure known as a heme group. This heme group is the part of hemoglobin that actually binds oxygen for transport through the bloodstream. Each red blood cell contains approximately 300 million molecules of hemoglobin, and every one of those units can bind with a total of four oxygen molecules—one oxygen for each of the four heme groups. Hemoglobin does not always bind oxygen, however. It has a differential ability to bind oxygen, which means that it picks up oxygen when the oxygen content in surrounding tissues is high, as it is in the lungs, and drops off oxygen when the oxygen content in the surrounding tissues is low, as it is in the tissues. This relative oxygen concentration is known as partial pressure. This property makes hemoglobin an ideal oxygen transportation vehicle. The high partial pressure existing in the lungs stimulates hemoglobin to load up with oxygen, and the low partial pressure in tissues triggers hemoglobin to release it. Sometimes, particularly under conditions of high acidity in the blood or elevated temperature, the red blood cells’ affinity for oxygen can drop. This can cause oxygen delivery to tissues to similarly drop. (The relationship between pH and oxygen is discussed further in the section on plasma.) The blood is also an excellent carrier for carbon dioxide, a by-product of cell metabolism. As carbon dioxide enters the red blood cells at a tissue site, it lowers the hemoglobin’s affinity for oxygen, which further facilitates the discharge of oxygen into the tissues. Once in the blood, the carbon dioxide mostly travels either bound to hemoglobin or as bicarbonate ions (HCO3−) that form when carbon dioxide is hydrated (combined with water). The majority of CO2 takes the latter form. Once the blood arrives at the lung, the bicarbonate ions revert to their original CO2 state and depart through the lungs. The hemoglobin drops off its carbon dioxide for a similar exit, and the hemoglobin is ready to accept oxygen once again. Besides oxygen, hemoglobin can lock onto dangerous gases like carbon monoxide (CO), a molecule that contains only one oxygen molecule, monoxide (carbon dioxide has two). Carbon monoxide is hazardous to human health because hemoglobin binds with carbon monoxide

The Circulatory System 31

molecules 200 times more readily than it does with oxygen molecules. Therefore, it preferentially binds carbon monoxide instead of oxygen, which can severely reduce oxygen flow to tissues and can quickly become fatal. Cigarette smoke, as well as emissions from automobiles and many home heating systems, contains carbon monoxide. The potential for carbon monoxide poisoning from this gas, which is colorless and odorless, has prompted health professionals to warn people against running a car in a closed garage and to recommend the use of carbon monoxide detectors to check for a buildup of the gas in a heated home.

White Blood Cells
White blood cells have a completely different function than red blood cells. White blood cells, or leukocytes, are part of the body’s defense team and can actually move out of the bloodstream to do their work in the tissues (Figure 2.2). Adults may have anywhere from 20 to 60 billion white cells

Figure 2.2 White Blood Cells. White blood cells come in three main types: granulocytes, monocytes, and lymphocytes. The granulocytes, so called because of their grainy appearance, include the neutrophils, eosinophils, and basophils. White blood cells are part of the body’s defense system against foreign materials and invading microorganisms. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

32 Leslie Mertz

in the bloodstream, far fewer than the 25 trillion red blood cells in the human body. White blood cells come in three main types: • • • Granulocytes, including neutrophils, eosinophils, and basophils Monocytes Lymphocytes

Granulocytes are the most abundant type of white blood cell, comprising 7 out of every 10 leukocytes. They are named granulocytes based on the grainy appearance of the cytoplasm, the part of the cell outside the nucleus but inside the membrane. All granulocytes also have distinctive lobed nuclei. Depending on which type of biochemical dye best stains them, granulocytes are further subdivided into neutrophils, eosinophils, or basophils. Neutrophils stain with neutral dyes, basophils stain with basic dyes, and eosinophils readily stain with the acid dye called eosin. In addition to their different staining properties, the three types of granulocytes have separate functions. Neutrophils, the most common granulocyte with up to about 5.2 billion cells per quart (5 billion cells per liter) of blood, engulf and destroy small invading organisms and materials, which are collectively known as antigens. Averaging about twice the size of red blood cells, neutrophils are a main bodily defense mechanism against infection and are particularly suited to consuming bacteria. This process of engulfing and destroying bacteria and other antigens is called phagocytosis (Figure 2.3). The sequence of events begins with the human body recognizing that a foreign material has invaded. Antigens are different from the body’s own cells and trigger the body to enter its defense mode. If the infected site is within the bloodstream, the neutrophils remain there, but if the site is in the tissues, the neutrophils will flow out through the capillaries to flood the area of infection directly. Each neutrophil at the infected site stretches a bit of its tissue, called a pseudopod, toward and then around the invader. Once the invader is contained inside the neutrophil, an organelle called a lysosome finishes the job by using its internal battery of enzymes and hydrogen peroxide to digest the material. Usually, the neutrophils are able to kill the bacteria quickly, but sometimes the toxins in the bacteria are

The Circulatory System 33

Figure 2.3 Phagocytosis. Leukocytes are primary players in the body’s defense mechanism. Here, a leukocyte protrudes from a blood vessel and surrounds an invading bacterium. Once the bacterium is engulfed, it is destroyed. This process of engulfing and destroying materials is called phagocytosis. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

fatal to the neutrophil. The result is pus, a mixture of mostly dead bacteria and leukocytes that perished during the battle. Basophils, which are the smallest and least common type of white blood cells, appear to be active in the inflammatory process. While basophilic activity is not fully understood, scientists do know that basophils release substances like histamine and serotonin. Histamine helps maintain a free flow of blood to inflamed tissues, particularly by dilating blood vessels. Serotonin is similarly vasoactive. Basophil granules also contain heparin, which helps prevent blood from clotting. The third group of granulocytes, the eosinophils, likewise demands additional study. Evidence indicates that they engage in minimal phagocytosis. Their primary tasks are to moderate allergic responses and to help destroy parasites. They accomplish the latter by using unique proteins that are toxic to specific invading organisms. Although they are not quite as

34 Leslie Mertz

motile as the basophils and neutrophils, eosinophils do slowly travel through the body. The second major type of white blood cell is the monocyte, the largest cell in the bloodstream. Monocytes are much larger than red blood cells, and have diameters of 3.9–11.8 × 10−4 inches (10–30 m). They are, however, only temporary residents in the bloodstream, remaining in the blood for about three days before moving into tissues where they become macrophages, large cells that engage in phagocytosis. Just as the neutrophils do, the highly motile monocytes latch onto invading organisms, then literally devour them with a mixture of highly reactive molecules. The neutrophils typically target smaller organisms, like bacteria, while the macrophages take on larger invaders, even protozoa, and also remove old cells and other detritus from the bloodstream. Lymphocytes, the third major type of leukocyte, are the second most common white blood cell, but they frequently are not in the bloodstream, either. They usually reside in the lymph, a clear, yellowish fluid that exists around and between cells in the body tissues. This fluid, which is about 95 percent water, enters the bloodstream mainly through one of two ducts, and carries lymphocytes into the blood with it. Lymphocytes come in two main varieties: B lymphocytes, or B cells, and T lymphocytes, or T cells. Both B and T cells have antigen receptors on their cell surfaces. These receptors are highly specific. In other words, one particular form of lymphocyte can only bind to one type of foreign material, much as different keys fit different locks. The specific area of an antigen to which the B cell receptor binds is called an epitope. (For more information on the functions of B cells and T cells, see Chapter 6 on the lymphatic system.)

Plasma
The circulatory system reaches just about everywhere in the human body, so the volume of plasma is fairly high. In fact, plasma makes up about 5 percent of a normal human’s body weight. Plasma itself is a solution of about 90 percent water, 7–9 percent proteins, and roughly 1 percent ions, which are either positively or negatively, charged molecules of such chemicals as sodium, calcium, and potassium. The remainder includes dissolved organic nutrients, gases, and waste products. Some textbooks

The Circulatory System 35

refer to the plasma as the extracellular matrix of blood. In other words, it is the portion of blood that lies outside the red and white blood cells, and that provides the blood’s liquid “structure.” Plasma is mostly water, but it is the smaller ion and protein components that draw biologists’ interest. Their roles include regulating the blood’s volume and viscosity; maintaining the steady pH level required by the muscular, nervous, and other major physiological systems; facilitating the transport of various materials; and assisting in bodily defense mechanisms, including the immune response and blood clotting. Plasma proteins consist of albumins (the most abundant plasma protein), globulins, and fibrinogen, most of which are synthesized in the liver. The ions in plasma include both positively and negatively charged varieties. Sodium (Na+), calcium (Ca2+), potassium (K+), and magnesium (Mg2+) carry positive charges and are called cations (pronounced “cat-ions”). Anions (“ann-ions”) are negatively charged, and in the plasma include chloride (Cl−), bicarbonate (HCO3−), phosphate (HPO42− and H2PO4−), and sulfate (SO42−). Most of the ions in the plasma of humans and other mammals are sodium and chloride. The general public is familiar with the two ions in their combined form of NaCl, or normal table salt. Because blood vessels are permeable to water, water can move freely into and out of the blood. The more water in the blood, the greater the overall blood volume. A change in the concentration of different ions or proteins can play havoc with the amount of water in the blood, and too much or too little water can have damaging effects on a person’s health. The body’s ion and protein concentrations keep the blood volume from plummeting too low or rising too high. Plasma proteins and ions make up 10 percent or less of the plasma volume, but they are critical in regulating how watery the plasma, and thus the blood, is. Sodium chloride (NaCl) and sodium bicarbonate (NaHCO3) are the key ion regulators of the amount of water in the plasma, while the albumins are the primary proteins involved in the water content of the plasma. This system is based on a balance between the liquid inside the blood vessels and the liquid outside. Osmosis is a process that seeks to equalize the water-to-solute ratio on each side of a water permeable membrane. In other words, if the water on one side of the membrane has twice as many dissolved materials, called solutes, additional water will move by osmosis across the membrane and

36 Leslie Mertz

into the side with the higher solute concentration. This action adjusts the solute concentration so that the ratio of water to solutes on each side of the membrane is the same. In blood vessels, water likewise moves in and out based on the relative solute concentrations within and beyond the vessels. As it turns out, the water content in the circulatory system sometimes falls too low, because the sheer force of blood rushing away from the heart literally pushes water out of the smallest blood vessels, the capillaries. The system remains stable because plasma proteins and the albumin proteins, in particular, diffuse very poorly through capillary walls and therefore allow the osmotic pressure gradient to draw water back into the capillaries. Osmosis alone is not enough to maintain the proper solute concentration in blood. Blood carries all kinds of solutes, including organic molecules like food, cholesterol and other fats, waste products, and hormones, yet the blood is not continually flooded with water. The reason is that ions, specifically sodium, use pumps that reside in the membranes of the cells within the blood vessel to actively drive sodium molecules out of the vessels, leaving behind a lower concentration of solutes and, in turn, requiring less water to enter by osmosis. This balance between osmosis and ion pumps is vital to regulating blood volume. While the total amount of ions and proteins is important, the levels of individual ions and proteins are also significant. For example, muscles and nerves respond to even slight changes in potassium and calcium ion concentrations. Likewise, cell membranes rely on the right combination of calcium, magnesium, potassium, and sodium in their immediate environments. As mentioned, plasma proteins include albumins, globulins, and fibrinogen. Fibrinogen makes up only 0.2 percent of plasma proteins, with the remaining 99.8 percent split as 55 percent albumins and 44.8 percent globulins. As previously described, the albumins are involved in maintaining blood volume and water concentration, and some of the globulins serve as transportation vehicles for a variety of molecules. Other important activities for globulins include blood clotting and immune responses. The immune response of plasma proteins will be discussed here, and blood clotting in the next section. (More details are available in Chapter 6 on the lymphatic system.) Globulins come in three types: alpha, beta, and gamma globulins. The transferrin used in iron transport is a beta globulin. A variety of other beta globulins is collectively termed complement, and assist in the immune

The Circulatory System 37

system by binding to passing potential antigens. Beta globulins identify invaders by telltale structures on the cell surface that are different than those of the body’s own cells. Beta globulins are designed to grab onto these unusual structures, and they basically put a plug in the antigen’s active site that renders it harmless. Similarly, beta globulins can ferret out cells that have antibodies already attached. In this case, another part of the body’s immune response has already begun to mount a defense to the invading organism or foreign protein by creating the antibody. The beta globulins recognize the antibodies and attach to them. The captured cell then proceeds to the white blood cells for destruction. Some plasma proteins, called immunoglobulins (Ig), go a step further and act as antibodies themselves. The five main types of these immunoglobulin antibodies are: • • • • • IgA, which is found in bodily secretions, like saliva, tears, milk, and mucosal secretions IgE, which causes the sniffing and sneezing associated with hay fever and asthma, and also defends against parasites IgG, which helps battle infections and also confers mother-to-fetus immunity IgM, common to almost every early immune response IgD, which has an unknown function

Proteins within each type of immunoglobulin are similar in basic structure, but have a variable region specific to a particular antigen. (Details are available in Chapter 6 on the lymphatic system.) Another of the body’s lines of defense depends in part on plasma proteins. Blood clotting requires fibrinogen, a soluble plasma protein; the beta globulins called prothrombin and plasminogen; platelets; and a slew of other molecules. The process is discussed in the next section.

Platelets and Blood Coagulation
Platelets, plasma proteins, vitamin K, and calcium all take their place in a quick-acting series of chemical reactions that result in blood coagulation,

38 Leslie Mertz

or clotting. Clotting begins almost immediately after the wound occurs as platelets congregate at the site of the injury. Platelets, also known as thrombocytes, are not cells. Rather, they are sticky, disk-shaped fragments of large blood cells called megakaryocytes that reside solely in the bone marrow. These small cell fragments exist throughout the circulatory system, with tens of millions in every droplet of blood. Their primary role is blood-clot formation. Because so many exist in the blood, a good supply of platelets usually is not far from the wound site. The first step in blood clotting is the release by the damaged tissue of a substance known as thromboplastin. As platelets arrive at the wound site, they disintegrate and release additional thromboplastin. Thromboplastin and calcium are both required to trigger the beta globulin called prothrombin to produce the enzyme thrombin. For the next step, the thrombin, platelets, and fibrinogen, a soluble plasma protein, work together to help make a tight web of insoluble fibrin threads that stick together and to the blood vessel wall. When blood cells encounter the web, they become trapped and form a blood clot. A scab is a dry, external clot. A bruise is a blood clot, too, but an internal one. Although the coagulation process may seem complex, it happens very quickly. Small cuts are usually sealed within a couple of minutes, with an external scab hardening in place not long afterward. The yellowish fluid sometimes remaining at the injury site is called serum. Although the term serum is sometimes used interchangeably with plasma, serum actually refers to plasma that no longer contains fibrinogen or other clotting factors. Normally, blood clots promote injury recovery by stopping blood loss, but that is not always the case. Clots that form within the blood vessels can be dangerous, because they can block blood flow and oxygen transport. A stroke, for example, is the result of a blood clot in the brain. Fortunately, platelets normally do not stick to the smooth walls of healthy, undamaged vessels. Other fail-safes are heparin, which is found in basophils, and substances called antithrombins that turn off thrombin activity, effectively shutting down the coagulation machinery and preventing unnecessary blood clotting.

Blood Type
The preceding introduction to blood cells may give the impression that blood in all individuals is alike. It is not. The most obvious differences are

The Circulatory System 39

blood type and Rh factor: Human blood types, or groups, are type A, type B, type AB, or type O, and Rh factors are defined as either positive or negative. Blood type refers to the presence or absence of chemical molecules on red blood cells. These molecules can instigate antibody reactions and are therefore antigens. Red blood cells can have one, both, or neither of the two antigens named “A” and “B.” Blood with only A antigens or only B antigens is called type A or type B, respectively. Blood with both A and B antigens is called type AB, and blood with neither is type O. People with type A blood are also born with beta (or anti-B) antibodies, which are designed to detect and eliminate B antigens. Likewise, people with type B blood have alpha (or anti-A) antibodies that assail A antigens. Type AB blood has both antigens but neither antibody, and type O blood has neither antigen but both antibodies. This confusion of letters means that type A blood donors can safely give their blood to any person who does not have antibodies to the antigens in their blood, namely A. As noted in Table 2.2, the type A donor’s blood is compatible with the blood of recipients with type A or type AB. On the other hand, a person who has type A blood can receive blood donations from any person whose blood does not trigger a response from their own antibody contingent, beta. The table shows that type A persons can receive blood donations of type A and type O, because neither adversely reacts with the beta antibody in type A blood.
TABLE 2.2 Blood Types
Blood type A B AB O Antigens present A B A, B Neither Antibodies present Beta Alpha None Alpha, beta Can be donated to Type A, type AB Type B, type AB Type AB Type O, type A, Type B, type AB Can accept donations from Type A, type O Type B, type O Type AB, type A, Type B, type O Type O

Blood type refers to the presence or absence of chemical molecules on red blood cells. These molecules, called antigens, can instigate antibody reactions. For this reason, medical professionals check blood compatibility before performing transfusions.

40 Leslie Mertz

Reactions between mismatched blood can be severe. If type A blood from one person is given to another person with type B blood, the blood will clump due to a process called agglutination, as the alpha antibodies battle the B antigen. After clumping, the red blood cells will rupture in a process called hemolysis, which can lead to serious consequences, such as kidney dysfunction, chills, fever, and even death. For this reason, medical professionals compare blood type and Rh factor from a patient and a donor before proceeding with a transfusion. Type AB-positive blood is frequently called the “universal recipient.” Type AB blood has neither alpha nor beta antibodies, which means that any blood can be introduced without the chance of an antibody attack by the recipient’s blood. The recipient does not have to worry about antibodies from the donor blood, because the amount of donated blood is small, becomes diluted in the recipient’s blood, and presents no threat. At the opposite end of the spectrum, type O blood is known as the “universal donor.” It has neither the A nor B antigens, and therefore can be administered with little fear of agglutination. Nonetheless, medical professionals still take precautions to ensure blood-transfusion compatibility by mixing donor and recipient blood and watching it closely for adverse reactions. The reason for the wariness is that A and B are not the only antigens. Sometimes, blood contains less common antigens that can bring about agglutination and cause problems for the patient.

Blood Vessels: The Transportation System Within
As previously described, the blood is not just red liquid. It is filled with millions of cells, each with a specific job to do. Likewise, blood vessels are much more than a simple series of pipes to contain and route blood. Blood vessels are living, dynamic tissues with complexities all their own. The circulatory system in a single adult human being comprises some 60,000 miles of blood vessels. Most people can see at least a few of them just under the skin of the wrist. The vast majority is much smaller than those visible vessels, and has diameters of less than one three-thousandths of an inch (about 10 microns). Blood vessels are associated with one of three major groups: the arterial system, the venous system, or the capillary system.

The Circulatory System 41

Whenever blood is moving away from the heart, either to the body tissues (systemic circulation) or to the lungs (pulmonary circulation), the arterial system is involved. The capillaries take over when the blood reaches its destination, and serve as the exchange vessels between the blood and the lungs, or between the blood and the body tissues. When the exchange is complete, the blood moves from the capillaries into the vessels of the venous system, which directs the blood back to the heart to begin another route either to and from the lungs, or to and from the body tissues. All three types of vessels, then, participate in the circuitous path of the blood from the heart to the lungs and back to the heart, and from the heart to the other body tissues and back. The heart-to-lungs-to-heart path is called the pulmonary circulation and serves to allow the blood to pick up oxygen. The heart-to-body tissues-to-heart circuit is called the systemic circulation and allows tissues to take up oxygen and other materials transported in the blood. Overall, the blood travels more or less in two loops, one from the heart to the lungs and back, and a second from the heart to the body tissues and back to the heart.

Arterial System
The main function of the arterial system is to carry blood away from the heart and either to the lungs to pick up oxygen, or to other body tissues to drop off nutrients, oxygen, hormones, or other needed substances. Like a river system that has main branches from which diverge many smaller side creeks, the arterial system has main branches called arteries and many diverging, smaller vessels called arterioles (Figure 2.4). The major arteries provide quick, direct routes to major body areas, and smaller arteries divert blood to more specific sites. Separating from the arteries, the arterioles bring blood to specific target tissues. The arterial system works much as a road system does: travelers use superhighways to get quickly to a general region, then take smaller freeways and finally side roads to reach a specific destination. In the case of the arterial system, the blood moves along main arteries, then into smaller arteries and even smaller arterioles. The specific destination of the blood cells is a set of capillaries in the lungs or in some other body tissue. For more information on a dangerous condition associated with the arteries, please read Sidebar 2.1.

42 Leslie Mertz

Figure 2.4 Arteries and Arterioles. Arteries and arterioles have three layers. The outer layer, called the tunica adventitia, is made of fibrous connective tissue and loosely holds the vessel in place. The middle, or tunica media, is a thick, muscular, elastic layer. The inner layer, or tunica intima, is a one-cell-thick layer of endothelial cells. Many of the larger blood vessels contain valves that open when blood is pulsing forward and close against any back flow. This ensures a unidirectional blood flow. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

The Circulatory System 43

SIDEBAR 2.1

Reducing the Risk Factors for Coronary Artery Disease
The leading cause of death in the United States is coronary artery disease (CAD), according to the National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute. It is estimated that every year, over 500,000 Americans die from this disease. CAD, also known as coronary heart disease, occurs when plaque builds up inside the arteries that supply the muscles of the heart with blood. This plaque buildup makes it harder for blood to get to the right areas of the heart. Plaque is composed of substances found in the blood, like fat and cholesterol. Plaque buildup results in a condition called atherosclerosis. Certain factors increase the risk of developing CAD:

Overweight or obesity: Extra body weight from bone, fat, and/or water (overweight), or a high amount of extra body fat (obesity). Unhealthy cholesterol levels: High LDL cholesterol (also known as bad cholesterol) and/or low HDL cholesterol (good cholesterol). High blood pressure: Blood pressure that stays at or above 140/ 90 mmHg over a period of time is considered too high. Smoking: Smoking can cause numerous risk factors. It can damage and tighten blood vessels, increase cholesterol levels, and inhibit oxygen from reaching certain tissues in the body. Diabetes: In people with diabetes, the body’s high blood sugar level means that it cannot use the hormone insulin properly or produce enough insulin. A sedentary lifestyle: Lack of physical activity can exacerbate these and other risk factors, such as obesity and overweight. Age: The risk of CAD increases with age. For men, this risk increases after age 45, and for women, the risk increases after age 55. During middle age, signs or symptoms of CAD can begin to present, particularly if there are genetic and lifestyle risk factors. Genetic risk factors: Having a family history of CAD increases the risk of CAD.

44 Leslie Mertz

Vessel Composition
Arteries and arterioles are more complicated than they might seem at first, and that complexity begins with the structure of the vessels themselves. Arteries and arterioles are made of three concentric layers: the tunica adventitia, the tunica media, and the tunica intima. The tunica adventitia coats the outside of an arterial vessel and is made of fibrous connective tissue that loosely holds the vessel in place. In the larger arteries, the adventitia also holds a number of small blood vessels of its own. These small vessels, called vaso vasorum, provide nourishment to the thick vessel walls. The thickest of the three layers is the tunica media, which is the muscular and elastic middle layer of vessel walls. This layer allows the large arteries to expand and contract in tune with the waves of blood accompanying each beat of the heart. Widening slows the blood flow and narrowing quickens it, so the combined action helps to moderate the blood’s speed. Elastin, a protein that has six times the spring of rubber, provides the vessels’ elasticity and allows the vessels to stretch wide as a pulse of blood arrives. A much stiffer protein, called collagen, prevents the vessels from expanding too much. Stretching is essential for arteries lying close to the heart, where the force of the heart’s pumping on blood flow is most strongly felt. Here, arteries distend to take the brunt of each blood rush, then recoil to create a more even blood flow to subsequent areas of the circulatory system. As might be imagined, these arteries contain a higher percentage of elastin than other vessels further down the line in the systemic circulation. For the contraction of arteries, the spindle-shaped, smooth muscle cells of the tunica media take over. Overall, the body has three types of muscle: smooth, striated, and cardiac. Striated muscles are those that a person can consciously control. Leg muscles are an example. A jogger or walker can control the muscles to speed the pace or to slow down. Smooth muscle, on the other hand, is controlled mainly by the autonomic nervous system, which means that these muscles work involuntarily or outside of a person’s will. Unlike striated muscle that tires rather quickly (as any jogger will attest), smooth muscle can continue working for long periods of time. The tunica media, or middle layer of the vessels, has smooth muscle, which wraps around the vessel rather than running its length and is responsible for contracting arteries.

The Circulatory System 45

When the smooth muscle tightens and decreases a vessel’s diameter, blood pressure rises because the blood is forced through a narrower opening. The effect is similar to that achieved by holding the thumb partially over the water flow at the end of a garden hose. The decreased diameter of the hose at the point of constriction (the thumb) increases the water pressure. As stated earlier, the arteries closest to the heart have the most elastin to slow the strong pulses of blood leaving the heart. They also have the least smooth muscle. In contrast, vessels farther away from the heart have a higher proportion of smooth muscle to control vessel diameter and help keep the blood moving. The innermost layer of the blood vessel is the tunica intima, which is also known as the endothelium. This layer has direct contact with the blood that runs through the artery or arteriole. Although it is only one cell thick, the tunica intima’s flat and smooth cells are important in imposing a barrier of sorts and preventing the passage of plasma proteins out of the blood. In arteries that connect with the heart, the tunica intima has a thin, fibrous layer that blends seamlessly with the heart’s inner lining, known as the endocardium.

Systemic Circulation
The blood entering the aorta from the heart has just been to the lungs, so it is fully oxygenated and bright red. As just described, the aorta is highly elastic and can distend greatly to accept the powerful rush of blood pumped from the heart. As the aorta returns to its original size, the blood moves out in a more even flow. Although the blood eventually flows very smoothly, the pulse can be felt by pressing on some areas of the body where main arteries run close to the skin surface. For example, nurses typically determine a patient’s heart rate by feeling the wrist, or the radial pulse site, and counting the number of pulses over a set period of time. A normal resting adult’s heart rate is about 70 beats per minute. The rate is typically lower in adult athletes and higher in children. Other major arterial pulse sites include: • • Temporal, in front and slightly above the ear Facial, along the lower jaw

46 Leslie Mertz

• • • • • •

Carotid, beside the windpipe in the neck Brachial, on the inside of the elbow Femoral, on the upper thigh beside the groin Popliteal, on the back of the knee Posterial tibial, on the inner ankle Dorsal pedal, just above the toes on the upper foot

The aorta is a large, arched artery that originates at the heart, where it connects to the lower left heart chamber, called the ventricle. From there, it continues down the trunk of the body. All of the major arteries in the human body branch off of the aorta. Using the analogy of a road system, the aorta would be the main superhighway through which all outgoing (systemic) traffic has to pass. The highways that divert from it would represent the major arteries. These major arteries supply blood to all of the main body regions, including the limbs, head, and body organs. The arterioles are the side roads that bring the blood to specific locations throughout the body. Two major arteries parting from the aortic arch are the right and left coronary arteries, which provide blood to an important body organ, the heart. These two arteries further subdivide. The left coronary artery splits into a circumflex branch that runs behind the heart and an anterior descending branch that curves forward over the heart. These two branches mainly supply the left ventricle and left atrium, which is the heart’s left, upper chamber. The right coronary artery and its posterior descending branch deliver blood mainly to the right side of the heart, which has its own ventricle and atrium. In addition, both the left and right coronary arteries supply blood to the septum. The septum is the interior wall between the right and left ventricles. All of the blood pumped from the heart into the aorta in one contraction is called the total cardiac output or stroke volume. Because the heart is such a hard-working organ, it receives a rather large portion, about 5 percent, of the total cardiac output even when a person is resting. As will be discussed later, that proportion can change if a person is active or under some form of psychological or physical stress.

The Circulatory System 47

Blood travels to the head via two major vessels called the left and right common carotid arteries. The left carotid splits directly from the aortic arch between the bases of the two coronary arteries. The right carotid indirectly branches from the aorta via a short vessel, called the brachiocephalic (or innominate) artery. The brachiocephalic artery also feeds the right subclavian artery, which is discussed below. Each of the two carotids splits into internal and external carotid arteries, which are the principal arterial vessels of the head and neck. Other arteries that branch from the aorta soon after it leaves the heart include the right and left subclavian arteries. Like the right carotid artery, the right subclavian artery divides off of the brachiocephalic artery. Each subclavian artery supplies an arm. They earned the name subclavian because their paths to the arms run beneath the collarbone, or clavicle. Blood flow continues down the length of the arm through the brachial artery and into the ulnar arteries and radial arteries of the forearm. As the aorta travels down the spine, it is called the thoracic aorta in the chest, or thorax, and then becomes the abdominal aorta. Along the way, it supplies blood to various internal organs, such as the kidneys, spleen, and intestines. Each of the two kidneys, for example, gets its arterial blood supply from a renal artery that separates from the aorta. The renal artery splits into smaller and smaller vessels, eventually leading to a round cluster of capillaries, which is called the glomerulus. Fully 25 percent of the total cardiac output goes through the renal arteries to the pair of kidneys. These two organs not only excrete waste products through the urine but also have important roles in regulating the amount of water in the blood, as well as its pH level (a measure of acidity/alkalinity) and electrolyte content. Some of the other major organs and systems receiving blood from the aorta—in this case, the abdominal artery—are the spleen, which is fed by the splenic artery; the liver, which gets its blood via the hepatic artery; and the digestive system, which is supplied by a number of arteries, including the gastric, gastroepiploic, superior and inferior mesenteric, sigmoidal, and colic arteries. Many of the arteries’ names come from the medical names of their destination. The renal artery is named for the renal, or kidney, system; the ulnar and radial arteries ship blood to the area surrounding the ulna and radius, which are bones in the forearm; and the superior mesenteric

48 Leslie Mertz

artery supplies the region around the intestinal membrane, which is known as the mesentery. The abdominal artery ends when it bifurcates into the left and right common iliac arteries, each of which soon divides again into internal and external iliac arteries (sometimes called hypogastric arteries). From each of the internal iliac arteries come various arteries that supply blood to the pelvic area, including the reproductive organs. The external iliac artery becomes the femoral artery when it enters the thigh. Continuing with the leg, the femoral artery of the thigh becomes the popliteal artery at the knee (popliteal is a medical term for the back of the knee), then divides into the posterior and anterior tibial arteries (the tibia is a bone in the lower leg). As described previously, the arterioles-to-capillaries-to-venules route is the most common pathway for blood. However, the arterioles in a few tissues never connect with capillaries, instead attaching to venules by way of wide vessels called arteriovenous anastomoses. These muscular vessels, which range from 7.9 × 10−4 to 5.3 × 10−3 inches (20–135 µm) in diameter, are common in the skin and in the nasal mucosa (in the nostrils), and regulate body temperature. Heat from the body’s core is transported via the blood to these areas for release to the outside.

Pulmonary Circulation
Pulmonary circulation is less complex than systemic circulation because the only target organ for the arterial system is the lungs. There, the blood picks up the oxygen that it will eventually deliver to the body through the systemic circulation, which was just discussed. Unlike the systemic arterial circulation, which heralds from the heart’s left ventricle at the aorta, the pulmonary arterial circulation begins with the right side of the heart and the pulmonary artery. The pulmonary artery connects to the right ventricle, which is the smaller of the heart’s two ventricles. As the right ventricle contracts, it pushes blood into the pulmonary artery. The artery soon splits, and its two branches lead to either the right or left lung. Just as blood in the systemic circulation moves from major to smaller arteries, and then to arterioles and capillaries, the blood in the pulmonary

The Circulatory System 49

system diverts into smaller and smaller vessels, ultimately ending at the capillaries. Once the blood enters these tiny vessels, it picks up the molecules of oxygen that are so important for cellular function. That process will be described in the section on the capillary system.

Venous System
On many levels, the venous system is the opposite of the arterial system. On the systemic side, the arterial system delivers blood away from the heart and to the tissues, and the venous system goes the other way, bringing the blood back to the heart. On the pulmonary side, the arterial system sends blood from the heart to the lungs for oxygenation, and the venous system sends the now-oxygen-rich blood back to the heart. Revisiting the road analogy, a traveler might leave a major city (the heart) via a superhighway (the aorta), then take a smaller highway (the arteries) and finally side roads (the arterioles) to get to a small town (the tissues) or other destination. To return to the city, the traveler would go in the opposite direction, beginning by taking the side roads, which are analogous to the venules; then the highways, or the veins; and finally the superhighway that leads into the city, or the heart. The venous system has two superhighways, which are two large veins called the superior vena cava and the inferior vena cava, which will be described later. (The plural of vena cava is venae cavae.) Besides its role in returning blood to the heart, the venous system is a blood reservoir. Typically, about two-thirds of the body’s circulating blood supply is in the venous system. The veins and venules temporarily store blood that can be immediately transported to the other areas of the body as necessary. Exercise, for example, initiates a series of responses within the body that affect the circulatory system. One occurs when vasoconstrictor nerves send messages primarily to the veins that tell them to constrict. As they do, blood moves from the venous system to the heart, which in turn sends added oxygenated blood to the arterial system and facilitates the increasing need for oxygen in the working muscles. Similarly, when a person loses a large volume of blood through a serious wound, nerves signal a reorganization of the blood from tissues that are less important to immediate survival to those tissues that are vital in maintaining life. The venous vessels constrict in some areas, such as the skin or

50 Leslie Mertz

the digestive tract. This forces blood to vessels in vital organs, such as the heart. The action not only preserves oxygenation to critical tissues, but also helps maintain the body’s overall blood flow and helps ensure that the blood reaches its destination without delay. Another important difference between the venous and arterial systems is the movement of the blood. Blood efficiently flows through veins and venules even though the driving blood pressure is lower than it is in the arterial system. Blood pressure is measured in a unit abbreviated as mmHg. It refers to millimeters (mm) of mercury (Hg), the standard method of measuring pressures. Scientists measure pressure by watching its effect on mercury—the silver liquid in old-fashioned thermometers. If mercury is placed in a tube, an increase in pressure will cause the mercury to expand and rise. A pressure decrease results in a drop of the mercury level. A reading of 120 mmHg means that the pressure in the aorta is enough to raise a column of mercury by 120 mm above the zero point, which is normal atmospheric pressure. In the venous system, just 10–15 mmHg pressure is enough to force blood all the way from the venules back to the heart. This is about half of the average pressure of 30 mmHg seen even in the small arteries. The venous system can function on the lower pressure, which nears 0 mmHg (atmospheric pressure) by the time it gets to the heart, in part because the branching of the venous system is going in a direction opposite to that of the arterial system. Instead of an aorta that branches into smaller arteries and then miniscule arterioles—and slows as it goes—the venous “river” does the opposite. Blood from perhaps dozens of tiny venules merges into a slightly larger venule. When it does, the blood rate increases because the overall lumen (interior diameter) of the larger venule is still less than the combined lumens of all the smaller venules feeding into it. In other words, blood from a bigger space is squeezing into a tighter space. The same thing happens when venules merge into one small vein, or when numerous veins merge into the vena cava. The flow accelerates along the way much as a river’s current hastens as new creeks join it. The elasticity of the large and small venous vessels is also opposite to that of the arterial vessels. Whereas the largest arteries are the most elastic to tame the pulses of blood from the heart, the largest veins are the most rigid to help maintain or boost the blood flow. Conversely, the most

The Circulatory System 51

distensible vessels on the venous side are the venules, which readily expand to serve as blood reservoirs. The venous and arterial systems have other similarities and dissimilarities, too, and these will be discussed in the next sections.

Vessel Composition
Veins and venules have a three-layered structure much like that of arteries and arterioles (Figure 2.5). Each of these vessels has the same three layers: the tunica adventitia on the outside, the tunica media in the middle, and the tunica intima lining the inside. Just as in the arterial vessels, the muscular and elastic tunica media is the thickest layer in veins and venules and includes both elastin and muscle tissue to allow the vessel openings to expand and constrict. The elastin protein gives the vessels their stretch and slows the blood moving through them, while the smooth muscle cells contract and narrow the vessels’ openings to urge the blood’s pace.

Figure 2.5 Veins. Veins and venules have a three-layered structure: the tunica adventitia on the outside, the tunica media in the middle, and the tunica intima lining the inside. The main difference between these vessels and those of the arterial system is in the middle layer. The veins and venules have a thinner tunica media with a higher collagen content and with fewer muscle cells that are commonly in a less-ordered arrangement. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

52 Leslie Mertz

Collagen in this middle layer helps to rein in the vessels’ elasticity and yields structural strength. The tunica adventitia, or outer layer, of veins and venules is a covering of connective tissue. Its job is to hold the vessel in place. The innermost of the three layers, or the tunica intima, is a one-cell-thick sheet of endothelial tissue. So far, this description of the composition of veins and venules is the same as that for arteries and arterioles, but differences do exist. In the arterial system, the delineations between the three layers are much more distinct than they are in the venous system. The transition in venules and veins is rather gradual. In the arteries and arterioles, the smooth muscle cells of the tunica media wrap around the vessels in a very regularly arranged fashion. The veins and venules have a thinner middle layer with fewer muscle cells that are commonly in a less-ordered arrangement. This would result in a severe lessening of their mechanical strength were it not for their high collagen content. The additional collagen typically seen in veins and venules also limits the vessels’ elasticity somewhat. As seen in the arterial system section, arterial vessels, especially the larger arteries, must distend to even out the strong blood pulses from the heartbeat and regulate the blood flow. There is no similar demand on veins and venules, but they do need to stretch out enough to accommodate the temporarily stored blood they are holding. In effect, veins and venules are striking a balance between stretching to hold up to 70 percent of the body’s blood and remaining inelastic enough so that they can maintain a sufficient flow to transport the blood back to the heart. Venous blood faces other challenges on its way back to the heart. The force of gravity discourages blood flow. In a standing individual, the blood in the feet has to overcome the gravitational pull to flow up the leg and back to the heart, and it does it without the heart’s pumping action to help it along. While fighting gravity, the blood also must flow into increasingly bigger vessels, which would seemingly have the effect of slowing blood flow. In large part, blood can overcome these obstacles for the same reason that venules develop a flow with the influx of capillaries: Blood is still moving from a larger space to a smaller space. Because so many smaller vessels feed a larger vessel, the combined cross-sectional area of the

The Circulatory System 53

smaller vessels is greater than that of the larger vessel, and blood flow actually speeds up as it approaches the heart. In addition, venous vessels become stiffer as they get closer to the heart, because their collagen content is greater. This ensures that the vessels will not distend and therefore will not create a larger space for blood or slow the blood rate.

Systemic Circulation
The systemic side of the venous system begins at the capillaries and ends at the heart. The capillaries are the site of blood-to-tissue transfer of nutrients and other materials, including oxygen. Once that oxygen and nutrient transfer has occurred at the tissues, the venous system takes over to collect the blood from the capillaries and convey it back to the heart. Oxygenated blood in the arterial system is bright red, because oxygen causes a change in the three-dimensional configuration of the large compound called hemoglobin that is found in red blood cells. Without the oxygen, the blood appears dark maroon. For this reason, blood leaving the capillaries—after the oxygen drop-off—is more blue than red. The venules are the first vessels in the return of blood from the capillaries to the heart. A typical venule has a lumen of about 7.9 × 10−4 inches (20 µm) with a vessel wall that is about 7.9 × 10−5 inches (2 µm) thick. This compares to the average arteriole, which has a like-sized lumen but a wall thickness of 5.9 × 10−4 inches (15 µm). Many capillaries, which are about a quarter of the size of a venule, may empty into a venule, and, as already described, this onslaught helps to generate an increased flow. From there, smaller venules merge into larger and larger venules, and eventually into small veins. Although the size varies considerably, a typical vein has a lumen of around 0.197 inches (5 mm or 5,000 µm). Its wall thickness averages about 0.02 inches (0.5 mm or 500 µm). When looking at the circulatory system as a whole, the venous vessels often have arterial counterparts, with blood flowing out to the tissue in an artery and back to the heart in a nearby, sometimes adjacent, vein. This chapter will now provide a closer view of some of the major veins in different body areas, beginning with the leg. Blood from the foot may ascend into the anterior tibial vein, which is named for the tibia (one of the lower leg

54 Leslie Mertz

bones). Veins in the ankle and numerous capillaries in the leg empty first into peroneal veins, which are also known as fibular veins because of their location in the region of the fibula (the other lower leg bone), and then into the posterior tibial vein, which eventually unites with the anterior tibial vein. Both the anterior and posterior tibial veins, which also accept blood from numerous other capillaries in the lower leg, flow into the popliteal vein at the back of the knee. The popliteal vein, in turn, empties into the femoral vein, a large vessel in the thigh (alongside the large upper leg bone, or femur). Blood from the foot can also take a more direct route to the femoral vein by way of the great saphenous vein, the longest vein in the human body. Regardless of how it reaches the femoral vein, all of this blood flows into the external iliac vein. Now in the abdomen, blood from the external iliac vein joins with the internal iliac vein, which carries blood from the pelvis to form the common iliac vein. This vein joins the large inferior vena cava, one of the two “superhighways” in our road system bringing blood back to the heart. Many other major veins in the abdominal cavity empty directly or indirectly into the inferior vena cava. Within the blood supply for the reproductive system, for example, the female body has a pair of ovarian veins, and the male body has a pair of spermatic veins. Both the right ovarian vein and the right spermatic vein connect directly to the inferior vena cava, but the left ovarian and spermatic veins first merge with the left renal (kidney) vein, which then unites with the inferior vena cava. The female’s uterine veins take a more convoluted route to the inferior vena cava, first merging with the internal iliac vein that unites with the common iliac vein, and finally joining the inferior vena cava. Other major body areas that use the inferior vena cava include the kidneys, liver, spleen, digestive system, and pancreas. The renal veins of the kidneys and the hepatic veins of the liver empty directly into the inferior vena cava. The liver performs a vital function because it absorbs products that the blood has gained from the digestive system. For example, the liver absorbs glucose (a sugar that results mainly from starch digestion) and uses much of it to make glycogen, which is basically a storable form of glucose. When the body needs extra energy, the glycogen transforms back into glucose. Blood from the spleen takes a less direct route to the inferior vena cava. It drains from the spleen via the splenic vein, which joins the

The Circulatory System 55

superior mesenteric vein to create the portal vein. The portal vein empties into the liver. Venous blood leaves the liver through the hepatic veins, as previously described, and discharges into the inferior vena cava. The digestive system has many veins emptying the intestines, rectum, stomach, and other specific areas. These veins include the rectal, pudendal, lumbar, superior and inferior mesenteric, gastric, gastroepiploic, and epigastric veins. Each has its own path to the inferior vena cava. As an example, the rectal veins number three: the inferior, middle, and superior rectal veins. The inferior rectal vein joins the internal pudendal vein, which flows into the internal iliac vein, while the middle rectal vein connects directly to the internal iliac vein. The internal iliac vein then continues to the common iliac vein, which finally unites with the inferior vena cava. The superior rectal vein avoids the internal iliac vein altogether and instead drains into the inferior mesenteric vein, which flows into the splenic vein, then to the superior mesenteric vein and portal vein, through the liver, into the hepatic vein, and to the inferior vena cava. As the inferior vena cava returns blood from the lower body to the heart, another superhighway is doing the same for the upper body. This large vein is the superior vena cava, which gathers blood from the arm, chest, head, and neck regions. The arm’s arrangement is somewhat similar to that of the leg. The veins, of course, are named differently to reflect the specific body area in which they are found. Veins in the hand flow into the radial vein, the ulnar vein, or the basilic vein. The radial vein eventually merges into the ulnar vein, which then continues into the brachial vein in the upper arm. The basilic and brachial veins flow into the axillary vein that carries blood into the chest. Just as some blood from the foot can patch nearly directly into the femoral vein via the long saphenous vessel, some of the blood from the hand can drain through a long cephalic vein right to the axillary vein of the upper arm. The axillary vein flows into the subclavian vein and then the brachiocephalic vein (also called the innominate vein) of the upper chest. The head and neck region have several major veins, but the most well known are the jugular veins, which accept blood from the brain, face, and neck. These veins flow into either the subclavian or brachiocephalic veins. One of the three jugular veins, the internal jugular vein, is the largest venous vessel in the head and neck. This vessel actually merges with the subclavian vein to form the brachiocephalic vein of the upper chest. Blood

56 Leslie Mertz

from tissues of the chest muscles, from the thyroid gland, and from the diaphragm also either directly or indirectly release into the brachiocephalic vein. The brachiocephalic vein drains into the superior vena cava. The ultimate destination of both superhighways—the inferior vena cava and the superior vena cava—is the heart. Specifically, they deliver blood to the right atrium of the heart.

Pulmonary Circulation
Like the arterial system, the pulmonary side of the venous system is much simpler than the systemic side. Just two major veins are involved: the bronchial vein and the pulmonary vein. Most veins are single or paired, but the pulmonary veins are actually four vessels that flow directly from the lungs to the left atrium. These veins return newly oxygenated blood from the lungs to the heart. The bronchial veins, on the other hand, drain blood of the bronchi and a portion of the lungs, then travel through one or more smaller veins to reach the superior vena cava, which brings blood into the heart’s right atrium.

Capillary System
Although the capillaries are the smallest vessels in the circulatory system, they represent the main exchange site between the blood and the tissues (Figure 2.6). They can be viewed as both the ultimate destination of the arterial system and the starting point of the venous system. From the heart, blood travels through the arteries to the arterioles, and then to the capillaries, where exchange occurs. Nutrients, oxygen, and other materials carried by the blood are traded for waste products from tissue cells. Blood continues down the capillaries, soon entering the venules and then the veins on its return trip to the heart.

Vessel Composition
Capillaries have a composition that is somewhat different from that of other circulatory vessels. As already described, arteries, arterioles, veins, and venules have a three-layered construction, including elastic tissue

The Circulatory System 57

Figure 2.6 Capillaries. Capillaries have an important function in exchanging gases and materials between blood and tissues, but their composition is quite simple. A capillary is basically a tube comprised of a single layer of epithelial cells. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

and smooth muscle. Capillaries, in contrast, are composed of just a single layer of endothelial cells, which gives them a wall thickness of just 2.0 × 10−5 to 3.9 × 10−5 inches (0.5–1 µm). Their internal diameter, or lumen, is about 1.6 × 10−4 to 3.9 × 10−4 inches (4–10 µm). That is a tight fit for red blood cells, which range from 2.6 × 10−4 to 3.5 × 10−4 inches (6.5– 8.8 µm) in diameter. To squeeze their way through these tiny vessels, red blood cells travel in single file (a so-called bolus pattern), and when that is not enough, they bend, twist, partially fold, and otherwise deform. At the same time, the capillaries distend to allow the blood cells to pass through them. It is a tortuous pathway, but it is a short one: Capillaries are typically just 0.02–0.039 inches (about 0.5–1 mm) long. Capillaries come in three types: • • • Continuous Fenestrated Discontinuous or sinusoidal

Continuous capillaries are constructed of epithelial cells that overlap tightly, leaving no gaps between them. They are present in the skin, muscles, and

58 Leslie Mertz

lungs as well as the central nervous system (the brain and spinal cord), and are the least permeable type of capillary. Only those substances with molecular weights of less than 10,000 can easily cross them. They are particularly important in what is known as the blood-brain barrier. This barrier prevents damaging substances from being transmitted from the circulating blood to brain tissue and to the watery cerebrospinal fluid that cushions and protects the brain and spinal cord. Although continuous capillaries generally permit only small molecules to traverse them, even large molecules with molecular weights of up to 70,000 can make their way across, given enough time. Scientists believe this is accomplished through temporary openings that may occasionally form between epithelial cells. Unlike continuous capillaries, fenestrated capillaries are always full of holes. The endothelial cells overlap much less tightly, creating gaps. In addition, they have numerous pores, or fenestra (literally, “little windows”), of 2.0 × 10−6 to 3.9 × 10−6 inches (50–100 nm) in diameter. These openings greatly increase the capillaries’ permeability, making them particularly useful in tissues that exchange a great deal of fluid and metabolites with the blood. Fenestrated capillaries are common in such tissues as the kidney and the intestinal villi, which are tiny projections that serve as the nutrient exchange point for the intestines. Discontinuous or sinusoidal capillaries are large capillaries with apertures so wide that bulky proteins and even red blood cells can pass through them. Of the three types of capillaries, they are the most permeable to water and solutes. They are found in such tissues as the liver, spleen, and bone marrow.

Exchange Function
The exchange of water, oxygen, nutrients, hormones, drugs, waste products, and other chemicals occurs primarily at the capillaries. Oxygen and carbon dioxide, which are gases, move by passive molecular flow, a process called diffusion, right through the wall. An individual endothelial cell, like other cells in the human body, is surrounded by a thin membrane made of two fatty layers, the lipid bilayer. Substances that can pass through this layer are termed lipophilic (fat-soluble). Besides oxygen and carbon dioxide, other substances that can readily cross the membrane include some

The Circulatory System 59

drugs, like the general anesthetic a person receives before surgery. Actually, oxygen and other materials do not move directly from capillary to cell or vice versa. Instead, they first enter a region just outside the cell. This fluid-filled extracellular area is called the interstitial space. The direction of diffusion is determined by the concentration gradient, which means that molecules travel from an area of high concentration to one of low concentration. Transport from high to low concentration is described as moving down the concentration gradient. Therefore, if an arteriole delivers oxygen-laden blood to a capillary near oxygen-poor tissue, the oxygen (O2) will pass from the blood to the tissue, or from an area of high concentration to an area of low concentration. The same thing happens with the waste product carbon dioxide (CO2), which accumulates in tissue. The carbon dioxide moves from the cell to the blood, or from an area of high concentration to an area of low concentration. The reverse likewise occurs in the lungs, when oxygen-poor blood arrives to pick up oxygen from and drop off carbon dioxide to the alveoli, the tiny air sacs in the lungs. In this case, the alveoli gather oxygen with every breath a person takes, then deliver it to the blood in the pulmonary circulation. Oxygen in the blood is carried by the large hemoglobin molecule, also known as a respiratory pigment. Each hemoglobin molecule can carry four oxygen molecules. Because red blood cells in the average adult number from 24.8 to 28.6 trillion, and each red blood cell contains about 300 million molecules of hemoglobin, the potential for oxygen transport by the blood is immense. (See Chapter 10 on the respiratory system for more information about this process.) The oxygen exchange between the capillaries and the alveoli, as well as other tissue cells, is possible because of their proximity to one another. The time it takes for a molecule to move is proportional to the square of the distance moved. The time quickly escalates as oxygen has farther to go. For this arrangement to work in the human body, an enormous number of capillaries is required—enough to place capillaries within 3.9 × 10−4 to 7.9 × 10−4 inches (10–20 m) of just about every cell—just one, two, or three cells’ diameter away. Some organs even have special networks or clusters of capillaries. In the kidney, the cluster is known as the glomerulus and facilitates the considerable volume of blood that flows to and from this organ. The capillaries in the glomerulus are typically fenestrated.

60 Leslie Mertz

(See Chapter 12 on the urinary system for more details.) Other tissues and organs that have a higher density of capillaries include the heart and skeletal muscles, which are both very metabolically active and demand a highly proficient transfer of gases and nutrients. In organs and tissues, such as joint cartilage, that are less active and less oxygen-demanding, fewer capillaries are necessary. Of course, the body cannot rely solely on diffusion to get oxygen all the way from the lungs to every tissue cell. The pumping of the heart does much of the transportation, forcing the blood along the arteries, then more slowly into the arterioles, and, slower yet, into the capillaries. Blood is progressing so slowly in the capillaries that each red blood cell commonly takes 1–2 seconds to traverse it, ample time for diffusion to occur.

The Blood Circuit
Now that the basic components and functions of the arterial, venous, and capillary systems have been described, this section will take a closer look at how the blood makes the transit through those vessels.

One-Way Valves
Blood valves are located throughout the circulatory system. Just as a door marked “push” or “pull” only opens in one direction, these valves swing strictly one way. In the arterial system, blood rushes from the left side of the heart through a valve and into the aorta. As the heart beats, the valve swings wide to let the blood pass into the aorta. The blood flow naturally slows when the contraction ends, and the valve swings shut. This prevents the blood from streaming back into the heart chamber. Other large blood vessels have similar valves that open in just one direction. In the legs, for example, a pair of semilunar valves swing outward to the vessel walls, allowing blood to move past. Any reverse flow causes the valves to close. Just as wind from outdoors may cause a door to swing open, but a breeze from indoors can quickly slam it shut, the valves allow blood to move one way, but not the other. This simple system ensures that deoxygenated and waste-filled venous blood doesn’t flow backward and mix with the oxygenated, nutrient-filled arterial blood.

The Circulatory System 61

Blood Pressure
Systemic Circulation Blood pressure is a key force driving the blood through the arterial system. Blood leaves the heart in the systemic circulation under a very high pressure caused by the heart’s contraction. On average, the blood pressure in the aorta reaches 120 mmHg following a heartbeat, then falls back down to 80 mmHg before the next heartbeat. This is often written as 120/80 mmHg. The 120 mmHg reading in the aorta immediately following a heartbeat is the highest pressure that blood reaches in the circulatory system. As the heart’s contraction ends, the blood pressure quickly drops. As seen earlier, the aorta and other large arteries have a high percentage of elastin, the protein that permits stretching. When the pulse of blood enters the aorta, that large vessel quickly distends, then slowly returns to its normal size. By doing so, it eases the blood pressure. Subsequent arteries do the same thing, although they become less and less elastic as blood moves farther from the heart. Every time a vessel widens, the pressure drops a bit. By the time the blood reaches the junction between the small arteries and arterioles, it has diminished to about 60–70 mmHg. At the arteriolecapillary border, the blood pressure is just 35 mmHg. Pulmonary Circulation The pulmonary circulation begins with the beat of the right side of the heart, which is smaller and less powerful than the left side that drives the systemic circulation. Here, the pressure of the blood leaving the heart and entering the pulmonary artery is just 25 mmHg, which is still sufficient to force the blood the small distance from the heart to the lungs. Between heartbeats, the pressure drops to about 10 mmHg. As in the systemic circulation, the pressure continues to decline as the blood travels from arteries to arterioles to capillaries. The Return Trip If the arterial system requires the force of the heartbeat to drive blood to the lungs and body tissues, what does the venous system use to propel the blood back to the heart? The answer has several parts. As shown in the section on the venous system, the veins and venules greatly outnumber the arteries and arterioles. They are also oriented in

62 Leslie Mertz

the opposite direction with blood flowing from the smallest and most plentiful vessels into ever-larger but fewer vessels. In the arterial system, the total cross-section of the vessels (the sum of their lumens) increases as they get farther from the heart, which results in a slower blood velocity. This reliance of the flow rate on cross-sectional area is illustrated in the mathematical equation: velocity of the blood (mm/sec) = blood flow (mm3/second)/ cross-sectional area (mm2) The velocity is the overall speed of the blood through a vessel, the blood flow is the volume of blood that moves through a vessel, and the cross-sectional area is the size of the vessel’s lumen. The mathematical formula shows that velocity is inversely proportional to the cross-sectional area, so as cross-sectional area increases, the velocity decreases. In the venous system, the vessels increase in size closer to the heart, but their number decreases dramatically, until the two large venae cavae are accepting blood from thousands of vessels throughout the entire venous system. The sum total of cross-sectional areas of smaller vessels greatly surpasses the area of larger vessels, which results in an increase in blood velocity. In summary, both the vessels of the arterial and venous systems are largest and least numerous near the heart, and smaller and more numerous away from the heart. The difference is in the direction of flow. On the arterial side, blood is moving away from the heart and slows as it goes. On the venous side, blood is returning to the heart and speeds up as it approaches the heart. In addition, venous blood gets a little help in its return trip from the structure of the vessels, from muscles, and even from arteries. By the time blood makes its way through the arterial system and the capillaries, its pressure in the venules is just 15 mmHg and is nearly nonexistent by the time it reaches the venae cavae. With such little impetus to return to the heart, gravity would influence the blood to pool wherever the body is closest to the ground. This usually does not present a debilitating problem because venous vessels have the ability to deflate and reinflate with very little pressure applied to them, so even the small 15 mmHg gradient from venules to heart is sufficient to urge the blood along. The arteries also help. Because arteries and veins are usually in close proximity, the strong pulses of blood that move from the heart and down the arteries put some

The Circulatory System 63

pressure on the adjacent veins and help circulate the blood. In addition, the venous blood near the heart gets an added incentive from the heart itself. As the heart’s valves open to allow in venous blood, suction results and actually draws the approaching blood into the waiting chamber. The body’s skeletal muscles also help by contracting and relaxing, and pressing on venous vessels. This action squeezes the blood back to the heart through the re-inflated veins. This type of muscle action produces obvious results in an exercising person, but even when a person is quietly standing, these muscles are continually contracting and relaxing, and pushing blood into veins. Valves in the larger veins assist as well. Once the blood makes its way partially up the leg, the valves prevent it from rushing back down. In the large leg veins, valves occur about every half inch (1.25 cm) along the vessel. The legs are not the only parts of the body that have to contend with the effects of gravity. When a person stands up, about 16.9 ounces (500 ml) of blood shifts to the lower legs, so some pooling does occur. The volume of liquid lowers as plasma from the blood filters out of the vessels and into adjacent tissues. This causes an overall drop in blood volume, and the body responds by lowering cardiac output. As a result, less blood reaches other parts of the body, including the brain. Usually the body responds by quickening the heart rate, constricting the venous vessels in the legs, or using nervous control to decrease the amount of blood reaching the legs. When these steps are not enough, a person begins to feel light-headed. By putting the head between the knees—or, in extreme examples, by fainting—the head is lowered, making it much easier for the blood to fight gravity and reach the head.

Effect of Velocity on Capillaries
The blood’s flow rate is also an important consideration in the blood-totissue exchange that occurs in the capillaries. Because of capillaries’ distance from the heart and the distance of the arterial vessels, as well as the large cross-sectional area of the capillaries, the blood’s velocity is so slow that blood cells barely creep through the capillaries. In fact, the blood’s velocity in the capillaries is less than 1/200th its speed in the aorta. The sluggishness provides ample time and optimal conditions for

64 Leslie Mertz

diffusion of oxygen and other materials to occur. In most cases, blood cells take 1–2 seconds to traverse a capillary, a considerable time for a vessel that is just 0.02–0.039 inches (about 0.5–1 mm) long.

Control of Blood Flow
Although the circulatory system is similar to a road system in some regards with the vessels analogous to the highways and streets, the cardiovascular system is hardly passive. The blood vessels are alive and dynamic structures that can change diameter and alter the flow of the blood within them. As previously shown, the blood vessels contain smooth muscle. When contracted, these muscle cells can narrow blood vessels. When the contraction ends, the blood vessel returns to its larger diameter, which is driven by the pressure of the passing blood. Even when the smooth muscle cells are not contracting, however, they are imparting muscle tone to the vessels. The mechanism for the control of this tone is called the Bayliss myogenic response. Without this response to counteract the force of the blood pressure, the vessels would continue to stretch wider and wider, which would affect flow. Besides those in the peripheral venous system, other blood vessels change diameter to meet the needs of the body. These types of adjustments occur continually. For example, the brain requires a constant, sufficient blood flow. Oversight and maintenance of this flow is the job of the arterial baroreceptor reflex, which responds to slight changes in blood pressure. In this case, the baroreceptors, which are pressure detectors located in the major arteries, sense a dip or spike in blood pressure. When pressure increases, the baroreceptors reflexively send a message that shuts down the vasoconstrictor center in the brain’s medulla, which is responsible for constricting blood vessels. With the vasoconstrictor center offline, the blood vessels dilate and pressure drops. At the same time, cardiac output changes to meet demands and venous vessels likewise dilate. These actions collectively return blood pressure to normal. If, however, the blood pressure remains elevated, as occurs in a person with hypertension (high blood pressure), the baroreceptors become accustomed to the new, higher average pressure and stop sending messages to the vasoconstrictor center. As a result, the body no longer tries to rectify the higher blood pressure.

The Circulatory System 65

The arterioles play a vital role in controlling blood flow. These vessels are often called resistance vessels because they offer resistance to and therefore regulate the flow of blood from the heart. Due to the considerable smooth muscle in the walls of these vessels, the lumen can change diameter to allow more or less blood to reach the tissues. In addition, the arterioles that feed capillaries, called terminal arterioles, take their cues from local metabolic factors rather than nerves. Each terminal arteriole serves as a door to its own little network of capillaries. Based on metabolic needs, the arteriole can close tight or open wide to regulate blood flow. Venous muscle tone is also important in peripheral venous vessels, which regulate blood volume by adjusting the amount of liquid in the plasma and in such tissues as the skin, muscles, and kidneys. These peripheral vessels can thus act as blood reservoirs that can temporarily hold unneeded blood, which has a regulating effect on the overall blood supply. Hormones regulate blood flow, too. Adrenaline is perhaps the most wellknown hormone in this regard. When a person is under physical or mental stress, the body boosts adrenaline production. This hormone, as well as angiotensin II and vasopressin, helps to maintain a healthy blood pressure even under the most dangerous conditions, like severe blood loss. (Hormones are discussed further in the endocrine system chapter in this encyclopedia.) In addition to controlling blood flow through muscles, hormones, and nerves, the body has fail-safes in certain organs, including the brain. Here, arteries and arterioles merge to create what are called arterial anastomoses. These are alternative sites where the organ can obtain blood if a supplying artery becomes blocked. The anastomoses essentially serve as backup blood sources for use in emergencies. (The arterial anastomoses are not to be confused with arteriovenous anastomoses, which are wide vessels found especially in the skin and nasal mucosa. These vessels bypass capillaries and attach arterioles and venules directly.)

The Heart: A Living Pump
Although it is only as big as a fist, the heart drives the circulatory system. This organ works constantly over the course of a lifetime, pumping blood to the lungs in the pulmonary circulation and to all other body tissues in the systemic circulation. Even a short pause in its functioning can result

66 Leslie Mertz

in death. This section will take a closer look at this amazing organ and how it carries out its job.

Anatomy and Blood Flow
The heart is truly a pump made of muscle tissue. Blood moves in and out of this pump through four chambers inside (see Figure 2.7). The two, smaller, top chambers are called atria (atrium is the singular form) and two bottom

Figure 2.7 The Heart. The heart has two upper chambers, called the atria, and two lower chambers, or ventricles. The right and left sides of the heart are separated by a thick wall, known as the septum, and the atrium and ventricle on each side are divided by valves that open to allow the passage of blood. The superior and inferior venae cavae are the main blood vessels that return deoxygenated blood from the upper and lower body, respectively, to the heart’s right atrium. The right and left pulmonary arteries deliver blood from the right ventricle to the lungs for oxygenation, and the newly oxygenated blood returns to the left atrium through pulmonary veins. Newly oxygenated blood leaves the heart by way of the aorta, the largest artery in the body. Near the heart’s right ventricle, the aorta bends. This is known as the aortic arch. (Sandy Windelspecht/ Ricochet Productions)

The Circulatory System 67

chambers are called ventricles. It actually works like a double pump, with the right half taking in blood returning to the heart from the body tissues, and then sending it over to the lungs to drop off carbon dioxide and pick up oxygen. The newly oxygenated blood then heads back to the other side of the heart, where it gets the added boost it needs to propel it to the body tissues again. This double pump springs into action an average of 70–80 times every minute, all day and all night, for a person’s entire lifespan.

Cardiac Muscle
The heart is made out of cardiac muscle (also known as myocardium), a tissue that is unlike the smooth or striated muscle seen elsewhere in the human body. Striated muscle is the tissue that a person uses to move his or her legs or fingers. Because the individual can control it, it is also known as voluntary muscle. This tissue has light and dark bands, called striations, which give skeletal muscle yet another name: striated muscle. Smooth muscle, like that in blood vessels, is known as involuntary muscle, because a person cannot direct its movements like he or she can control skeletal muscle. Instead, the autonomic nervous system controls its action. Falling somewhere in the middle of these two types of tissue is cardiac muscle. Cardiac muscle has the striations seen in skeletal muscle, but it takes its direction from the autonomic nervous system like the smooth muscle does. Unlike either striated (also known as skeletal) or smooth muscle, cardiac muscle cells are very closely linked to one another and have fibers that interconnect one cell to the next. As will be shown in the section on electrical activity later in this chapter, this is vital in making the heart beat as a unit. In addition, cardiac muscle does not tire out like skeletal muscle does, and it requires a shorter resting time between contractions. It is easy to assume that skeletal muscle can contract for a very long time, especially when considering how a body maintains muscle tone. A closer look reveals that different groups of skeletal muscle alternately shorten to give the appearance of constant contraction, even when the muscle cells are individually contracting and relaxing. In the heart, conversely, all of the cardiac cells contract at the same time. (For an in-depth discussion of cardiac muscle, see Chapter 11 on the musculoskeletal system.)

68 Leslie Mertz

This muscle tissue of the heart surrounds all four of its chambers, completely enclosing them. The muscular walls of the atria do not require the kind of force that the ventricles do, and they are considerably thinner. All of the chambers are lined with endocardium, a thin membrane that provides a smooth, slick surface for the blood to slide along. This membrane is similar to the endothelium that coats the inside of blood vessels. The entire heart is enclosed in a fluid-filled fibrous sac, called the pericardium, that attaches to the diaphragm. Actually a double sac with fluid between the two layers, the pericardium supports, lubricates, and cushions the heart. The diaphragm, which is a large muscle that separates the chest and abdominal regions, pulls downward during inhalation and consequently tugs the heart into a more upright position. As mentioned, the atria sit at the top of the heart and the ventricles at the bottom. The word atrium means “entrance hall” in Latin. These chambers got their name because the blood enters the heart through the atria. At one time, atria were known as auricles because they somewhat resemble ears, and auris is Latin for ear. Ventricle is Latin for “little belly,” and one might say they look like ministomachs. If the atria are considered the entrances to the heart, the ventricles are the exits, and blood drains from them via the pulmonary artery and aorta. The right and left sides of the heart are completely separated by a thick muscular wall called the septum. This ensures that deoxygenated and oxygenated blood do not mix. In addition, the heart has a ring of fibrous connective tissue, called the annulus fibrosus, that serves as an anchor for the heart muscle and as an almost continuous electrical barrier between the atria and ventricles. Electrical charge plays a key part in proper heart functioning and will be discussed later in this chapter. The right atrium is separated from the right ventricle by a valve. The same holds true for the left atrium and left ventricle. This arrangement allows blood to move from one to the other, but only when the valve is open. Like the valves in the blood vessels, the heart valves permit blood flow in only one direction. Between the two right chambers, the valve has three flaps, or cusps, and is known as a tricuspid atrioventricular valve. It is commonly called the AV valve. A bicuspid (two-cusped) mitral valve (also known as the mitral valve) divides the two left chambers. The ventricles have additional valves to seal off flow between them and the arteries. The

The Circulatory System 69

valve between the right ventricle and pulmonary artery is called the pulmonary semilunar valve, and the valve between the left ventricle and aorta is called the aortic semilunar valve. Both have three cusps. The AV, mitral, and semilunar valves all work the same way. When blood is rushing through a valve, each of which is about 0.004 inches (0.1 mm) thick and made of fibrous connective tissue lined with membranous tissue, its cusps open with the flow. As the blood tapers off, the cusps fall back to their original closed positions. Tiny tendinous cords, appropriately called chordae tendineae, attach to adjacent muscles (papillary muscles) and prevent the valve’s cusps from falling back too far and letting blood seep through.

Blood Flow and the Heart
The valves, chambers, and muscle tissue are all involved in blood flow through the heart. Venous blood returning from the body tissues enters the heart through the two large venae cavae. The anterior vena cava carries blood from the head, neck, and arms, and the posterior vena cava conveys the blood from the rest of the body tissues (except the lungs). The right atrium fills with blood from the venae cavae, as well as the coronary sinus, which is the main vein carrying blood from the heart (details of the coronary circulation are included in the next section). When it contracts, the pressure of the blood builds, forcing open the tricuspid AV valve and allowing the blood to flood the right ventricle. When the atrium relaxes, the blood’s pressure drops, and the AV valve falls back to its original position. The now-filled ventricle contracts. The only way out for the blood is through the pulmonary semilunar valve, which opens outward into the pulmonary artery. Blood rushes out of the heart and into the pulmonary artery, where it branches and eventually reaches the lungs and alveoli to pick up oxygen. Following the ventricle’s contraction, the blood pressure in the pulmonary artery is 35 mmHg. The newly oxygenated blood returns to the left side of the heart and enters the atrium. It contracts, forcing blood through the bicuspid mitral valve in the left ventricle. Now that the blood is in the left ventricle, the mitral valve closes, the ventricle contracts, and blood flows through the aortic semilunar valve and into the aorta. The force of the

70 Leslie Mertz

contraction boosts the blood pressure in the aorta to 120 mmHg, more than three times the pressure of a similar volume of blood in the pulmonary artery. To accomplish this feat, the muscular wall of the left ventricle is about three to four times as thick as the right ventricle’s wall. The increased thickness gives the left ventricle the power it needs to drive blood throughout the body. Normally, the amount of blood in a completely filled adult ventricle is about 0.12 quarts (120 ml). This amount is called the end-diastolic volume. The heart typically only ejects about two-thirds of this blood, retaining 0.04–0.05 quarts (40–50 ml). That yields a total stroke volume—the amount of blood that exits the heart—of 0.07–0.08 quarts (70–80 ml). When the body needs to increase stroke volume, such as during periods of heavy exercise, it calls on the heart to begin pumping the residual 0.034 quarts (40–50 ml). As it turns out, both atria fill simultaneously, so the right side of the heart is taking in deoxygenated blood from the systemic circulation at the same time that the left side is admitting newly oxygenated blood from the pulmonary circulation. The ventricles likewise fill at the same time. When either the ventricles or the atria contract, the chambers get smaller. When the atria relax following a contraction, they go back to their normal, larger size. The ventricles have an effect on the size of the atria, because they contract when the atria are resting. As the ventricles contract or shorten, they actually pull down on the bottom of the atria to further expand these upper chambers. This enlargement creates suction in the atria and serves to draw in blood from the venae cavae and begin preparing the way for the next heartbeat. Cigarette smoking can have a damaging effect on the circulatory system, as detailed in Sidebar 2.2. The heart spends about as much time resting as it does contracting, with each contractile and resting period lasting less than half of a second. The contractile period is known as systole, and the resting period is known as diastole. Although each contraction lasts only about 0.4 seconds, that is enough time for the atria and the ventricles to contract. Careful observation reveals that the atria contract slightly before the ventricles during systole, so that blood travels from the atrium to the ventricle and to the aorta or pulmonary artery with every contraction. The heartbeat’s familiar “lubb-dupp” sound is actually the valves vibrating when they flap shut rather than the heart muscles expanding

The Circulatory System 71

SIDEBAR 2.2

The Damaging Impact That Smoking Has on the Circulatory System
It is estimated that cigarette smoking leads to one out of every five deaths every year in the United States. It damages nearly every organ of the body, particularly the organs and components of the circulatory system, such as the heart and blood vessels. Cigarettes contain tobacco, and there are chemicals in tobacco that shrink the blood vessels, leading to a condition know as atherosclerosis, which can lead to coronary artery disease (CAD). CAD occurs when plaque builds up in the blood vessels, making it difficult for blood to get to the heart. Smoking is also a risk factor for peripheral arterial disease (PAD), which occurs when plaque builds in the vessels and prevents blood from traveling to the head, limbs, and other organs in the body. It is not only heavy smokers who are doing damage to their bodies. Research has shown that even occasional smoking can cause significant damage to the circulatory system, as well as the rest of the body. Female smokers who take oral contraceptives are at greater risk for developing CAD, as are patients who have certain chronic conditions such as diabetes. Secondhand smoke—inhaling smoke from nearby cigarettes, cigars, or pipes—can also be harmful to the heart and blood vessels. In fact, it is estimated that secondhand smoke can lead to approximately 50,000 deaths every year in the United States. Most of these deaths are due to heart disease. How to reduce this risk? Avoid tobacco smoke. Because tobacco has addictive properties, medical experts recommend that people never start smoking or quit immediately. In addition, secondhand smoke should be avoided, given the damage that this exposure can do to the body. While quitting smoking can be hard, there are numerous strategies, programs, and medicines that can help with the quitting process.

and contracting as many people think. These vibrations (about 100 cycles per second, or 100 hertz) result when the heart’s contraction ends and the blood starts to slosh back toward the valves. As the liquid hits the valves, they shudder slightly. That shudder is the vibration that is audible to a

72 Leslie Mertz

doctor with a stethoscope pressed to a patient’s chest. The “lubb” half of the heartbeat is the closing of the tricuspid AV and mitral valves that separate the atria and ventricles. The “dupp” is the sound made by the semilunar valves located between the ventricles and either the aorta or pulmonary artery.

Coronary Circulation
The heart is a hardworking muscle that demands its own arteries and veins to maintain its operation. In fact, some textbooks and medical articles even describe the human body as having three circulatory systems: the systemic, the pulmonary, and the coronary circulations. The two major arteries feeding the entire heart muscle are the right and left coronary arteries that stem from the base of the aorta. The right coronary artery primarily delivers oxygen-rich blood to the two right chambers: the right atrium and the right ventricle. The left coronary artery mostly feeds the left side. Unlike the right artery that remains as a single, large vessel, the left almost immediately splits into two vessels, known as the transverse and descending branches. Each artery also ships a little blood to the opposite side, but the right artery mainly concentrates on the right side, and the left artery on the left side. Strangely, the amount of blood delivered by the two sides differs in individuals. About half of all people have a dominant right artery, 3 in 10 have equal delivery in the two arteries, and about one out of five have a dominant left artery. As mentioned, the heart demands a strong blood flow to supply the oxygen it requires. The body will even respond to a blockage in a coronary artery by rerouting blood through nearby collateral arteries and around the compromised area. Heart patients frequently refer to this phenomenon as “growing new arteries.” In addition, the heart has more than 2,000 capillaries per 0.00006 inch (mm3) that help ensure an ample oxygen supply to this active muscle.

Electrical Activity
How does the heart keep pumping? What triggers a heart to beat? Electrical activity is the answer. In the human body, the nervous system controls

The Circulatory System 73

the overall electrical activity, including that in the heart, and is thus its primary regulator. In skeletal muscle, nerves outside the muscle direct its contraction. In the heart, small and weakly contractile modified muscle cells serve as the initiation point for the heart’s electrical system. These cells, located in a 0.8 × 0.08 inch (2 cm × 2 mm) area in the atrial wall near the entrance of the superior vena cava, are collectively known as the sinoatrial node (SA node), or the pacemaker. These cells are electrically connected, so when one “fires”—delivers an electrical impulse—they all do. The pacemaker fires spontaneously and needs no nervous system input to continue to deliver regular electrical impulses. In fact, the heart will continue to beat for a while even if it is completely removed from the body. On the other hand, the nervous system is important in that it can override the pacemaker’s regular firing rate and either slow it down or quicken it. The heart also has backup regions that can take over if the pacemaker is compromised. These regions, called ectopic pacemakers, are capable of initiating the heartbeat when necessary. When the pacemaker fires, the electrical impulse spreads at a rate of about 3.29 feet (1 m) per second to the left and right atria and causes them to contract. As noted earlier, the fibers in each cardiac muscle cell are connected to fibers in adjoining cells. This connection allows the cells to contract nearly in unison. As the atria contract, the blood flows past the respective valves and into the left or right ventricle. At the bottom of the septum dividing the atria is a small group of cells and connective tissue known as the atrioventricular node, or AV node. The AV node is the only conducting path through the annulus fibrosus that divides the atria and ventricles. This node gets the electrical impulse from the pacemaker at about the same time as the atria do, but forwards it much more slowly to the ventricle, resulting in a delay of about a tenth of a second. This allows time for the atria to contract and squeeze the blood into the ventricles. The AV node then relays the impulse not directly to the ventricle, but to two structures. The first of the two is the bundle of His (pronounced “hiss”), a thick conductive tract that transmits the signal to a mesh of modified muscle fibers, called the Purkinje fibers (pronounced “purrkin-gee”), in the base of the ventricle wall. It is these fibers that pass the impulse to the ventricle (at a speed of 5.5 feet [1.6 meters] per second!).

74 Leslie Mertz

The ventricle contracts beginning at the bottom. As the wave of contraction progresses upward, it efficiently forces the blood upward to the exit valves.

Normal Heart Function Variations
Although the heart beats about 70–80 times per minute in a resting adult, that rate can vary considerably depending on whether the person is sitting down or standing up, walking or running, relaxed or under stress—activity of nearly any sort, as well as various medical conditions and medications, can cause the heart to speed up or slow down. In addition, stroke volume (the amount ejected from the left ventricle to the aorta with each beat) can also change to meet demands. This formula is used to obtain the cardiac output, which is the volume of blood pumped over a certain period of time (typically the amount of blood ejected by one ventricle in one minute): (stroke volume) × (heart rate) = cardiac output On average, the stroke volume of an adult at rest is about 0.08 quarts (75 ml). When multiplied by the average male’s heart rate of 70 beats per minute (a female’s is about 78 beats per minute), the cardiac output comes to 5.5 quarts (5.2 liters) per minute. Cardiac output varies greatly among individuals, and while 5.5 quarts per minute is the approximate overall average, a healthy individual can fall within the range of about 4.2–7.4 quarts (4–7 liters) per minute. Generally, an individual’s cardiac output at rest is 3.2 quarts (3 liters) per minute for every 3.3 square feet (or 1 square meter) of body surface area. Using that calculation, an adult weighing 150 pounds (68 kg) and having a body surface area of about 5.9 square feet (1.8 square meters) would have a cardiac output of 5.4 quarts (5.1 liters) a minute. That cardiac output is distributed to the body more or less on the following principle: the higher the metabolic rate of the tissue, the higher the percentage of the cardiac output it receives. Muscles use about a fifth of the oxygen a person breathes, so they receive about a fifth of the blood. Two of the most notable exceptions to the rule are the kidneys and the heart. The kidneys receive as much blood as the muscles, even though the kidneys use less than a third of the oxygen. High blood flow to the kidneys

The Circulatory System 75

is necessary because these organs are the body’s blood filters, removing waste products and excess water. The heart, on the other hand, receives proportionately less blood than it should, if figured according to the rule. It compensates, however, by drawing more oxygen from its limited supply than other organs do, thanks to its particularly dense capillary network. For the most part, the autonomic nervous system rules the variations of the heart rate, which in turn affects cardiac output. The autonomic system, which controls involuntary activities, has two major divisions: the sympathetic nervous system and the parasympathetic nervous system. (See Chapter 8 on the nervous system for more information.) The former stimulates the pacemaker and boosts the heart rate, while the latter inhibits the pacemaker and lowers the heart rate. The sympathetic and parasympathetic systems also have opposite effects on the arteries, with the former causing them to contract and the latter causing them to dilate. In effect, the sympathetic side prepares a person to respond to stressful situations by heightening blood flow, and the parasympathetic (also known as vagal) side brings a person back to normal. Besides the autonomic nervous system, other factors can influence cardiac output, including various hormones, baro- and chemoreceptors, and the fitness level of the individual.

Receptors
Every time the heart beats, the blood pressure increases in the aorta and in the carotid sinuses, which are swellings or expansions at the base of the internal carotid arteries. When the heart’s contraction ends, the pressure decreases. Detectors in the walls of major arteries perceive those pressure changes by sensing the tension in the vessel walls. The detectors, neurons called baroreceptors, pass this information to the parasympathetic nervous system, which responds as necessary by lowering the heart rate and decreasing its contractility, which together cause a dip in blood pressure. The sympathetic nervous system also heeds the call by reducing arterial tone and making arteries more elastic, which also serves to decrease blood pressure. The major baroreceptors are the aortic baroreceptors that keep track of blood pressure in the ascending aorta, and the carotid sinus baroreceptors in the neck that track blood

76 Leslie Mertz

flow to the brain. In addition, atrial baroreceptors at the venae cavae and right atrium check blood pressure as blood enters the heart from the venous system. When more blood is entering the heart than is being pumped out, the body rectifies the imbalance by heightening cardiac output until the incoming and outgoing blood are equalized again. In summary, the baroreceptor system is an effective means for evening out the short-term spikes and dips in blood pressure. Besides pressure detectors, the body has chemoreceptors to monitor the levels of oxygen and carbon dioxide in the blood. These receptors, located near the carotid sinus and the aortic arch, also detect acidity, or pH, levels. The amount of carbon dioxide in the blood can alter its acidity level, because carbon dioxide dissolves in the water of the blood plasma and makes carbonic acid. The more acidic the blood, the lower the pH. When chemoreceptors sense a rise in carbon dioxide levels, a fall in oxygen levels, or a drop in pH, they trigger a hike in cardiac output, which leads to higher arterial blood pressure. Other chemoreceptors in the medulla oblongata (lower brain stem) keep track of blood composition going to the brain and respond to reduced oxygen by initiating the dilation of cerebral vessels while constricting vessels to other parts of the body. The body, then, works to maintain blood flow to the brain at the expense of other organs and systems.

Blood-Demanding Organs and Circulation-Related Systems
Blood is almost everywhere in the human body. It flows to all of the tissues, moves in and out of organs, and participates in all sorts of bodily functions. This section will introduce some of the organs that put a high demand on blood flow, as well as the lymphatic system that has a close bond with circulation.

Digestion
The main arteries feeding the stomach include the celiac, gastric, gastroduodenal, and gastroepiploic arteries. The celiac artery, or celiac trunk, stems from the abdominal aorta, which is the portion of the aorta that lies in the

The Circulatory System 77

abdomen (as opposed to the thoracic aorta that runs through the chest cavity). The celiac artery branches into the left gastric, common hepatic, and splenic arteries. For the digestive system, the left gastric artery supplies blood to the stomach and the lower part of the esophagus, which is the feeding tube extending from the pharynx at the back of the mouth to the stomach. The gastroduodenal artery separates from the common hepatic artery, which itself continues on to the liver as the hepatic artery. The gastroduodenal artery, the right gastroepiploic artery that branches from it, and the left gastroepiploic artery that arises from the splenic artery all provide blood to the stomach and duodenum (the first part of the small intestine). The right gastric artery arises not directly from the celiac artery like the left gastric artery does, but from the hepatic artery proper. It eventually connects with the left gastric artery and supplies blood to the stomach. Blood to the colon comes from the left, middle, and right colic arteries, all of which branch from either the inferior or superior mesenteric arteries. Both mesenteric arteries separate from the abdominal aorta. The mesenteric arteries also supply blood to the rest of the intestinal system through the intestinal, ileocolic, and other arteries. How does the food a person eats wind up in the blood? The answer lies in tiny outgrowths, called villi (the singular is villus), that line the inside of the wall of the small intestine (Figure 2.8). These villi are, in turn, coated with even smaller outgrowths, called microvilli. By the time digested food reaches the small intestine, it has already been broken down into molecules small enough to cross the capillary walls. Each of the villi has a set of capillaries, thus providing ample opportunity for the uptake of food from inside the small intestine into the blood system. Although the work of the villi might seem inconsequential, they are so numerous throughout the small intestine and are covered by such a large number of microvilli that they actually increase the surface area of the interior small intestine by about 600 times. This puts the blood into close contact with much of the digested material, or chyme, before it makes the approximately two-hour journey through the small intestine. The mesenteric veins and other feeder arteries serve as the exit route for blood from the intestines and colon. Gastric and gastroepiploic veins drain the stomach into a number of other veins that ultimately unite—along with the mesenteric veins—at the large portal vein. Thus, nutrient-laden

78 Leslie Mertz

Figure 2.8 Villi. A multitude of tiny outgrowths, called villi, line the inside of the wall of the small intestine. These villi are, in turn, coated with even smaller outgrowths, known as microvilli (not shown). Each villus has its own set of capillaries, thus providing ample opportunity for the uptake of food from inside the small intestine into the blood system. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

blood leaves the digestive system through the portal vein, but before it begins its return trip to the heart, it heads to the liver.

Liver and Hepatic Circulation
The liver is a large, broad organ (sometimes referred to as a gland) that sits below the lungs and diaphragm, but above the stomach. Measuring about 8–9 inches (20–23 centimeters) long and 6–7 inches (15–18 centimeters) high, this two-lobed, wedge-shaped organ plays an important part in the use and storage of food energy.

The Circulatory System 79

About a quarter of the entire cardiac output passes through the liver, but unlike many organs, the liver gets only 25–28 percent of this blood directly from the aorta or its primary branches. That amount, however, is enough to support the organ and its functions. Most of the remaining 72–75 percent of the blood arriving at the liver has already been through the digestive system, where it picked up nutrients from food. This indirect type of blood distribution is termed in-series blood circulation because the blood goes from one organ to another in a series. It is also called portal circulation. As soon as the blood arrives in the liver from the portal vein, the liver gets to work removing the food molecules, including fats, the amino acids from proteins, and sugars, and converts them into a carbohydrate called glycogen for storage as a reserve energy supply for the body to use later as the need arises. The sugars, called glucose, switch readily to glycogen, but the fats and amino acids must first be converted to glucose before they make the change to glycogen. Because the liver is capable of converting glycogen back into glucose, it serves as a regulator of the blood-sugar level. The liver is also one of the body’s lines of defense against drugs, alcohol, poisons, pollutants, and other chemical threats. Just as it filters out sugar, the liver selectively removes these substances via the urine or the bile. In addition to its responsibilities in metabolism and detoxification, the liver makes other compounds, including cholesterol. Blood exits the liver through the hepatic vein that joins the inferior vena cava for the return trip to the heart.

Kidneys and Renal Circulation
As described previously, the kidneys are the body’s blood filters and the site where urine is produced. The two kidneys, shaped appropriately like kidney beans, are each about 4 inches (10 centimeters) long and 2 inches (5 centimeters) wide, and are located in about the middle of the back, with one on either side of the backbone. Blood is approximately 80 percent water, so the body requires a competent system to maintain a proper water balance. The kidneys provide that service, removing excess water and also filtering out waste products. The water and waste products, including soluble materials like salts, are

80 Leslie Mertz

all eliminated via the formation of urine, which exits each kidney through a long tube, called a ureter, that flows into the bladder. The filtering process begins when blood—about a fifth of the total cardiac output—arrives at each kidney from a separate renal artery. Interlobar arteries branch from the renal artery to disperse the blood throughout the kidney and to networks of capillaries, called glomeruli (glomerulus is the singular). The glomeruli come into contact with the kidney’s filtering units, called nephrons, which are each composed of a twisting epithelial tube. On one end, the epithelial tube eventually empties into the ureter, and on the other end, terminates in a bulb. The bulb, known as a Bowman’s capsule, surrounds the glomeruli and provides an efficient transfer site for water and waste products to move from the blood to the urinary system. Blood leaves the Bowman’s capsule in one vessel, but that vessel quickly branches into a second set of capillaries. This time, the capillaries form a web that weaves around the nephron tubules, which participate in returning much of the water and many of the solutes to the blood through the capillaries. Excess water and solutes continue through the nephron to the ureter. Blood exits each kidney through a renal vein. In a single day, a single person’s kidneys can filter out some 40 gallons (151 liters) of water. Reabsorption returns about 39.6 gallons (150 liters). The difference, 33.8 ounces (1 liter), is about the same as the amount of water ingested by that person in a 24-hour period. Thus, the body neither adds nor loses water in a typical day. Right and left renal veins drain the kidneys. These veins also transport blood from the adrenal glands that sit atop the kidneys. (See Chapter 12 for more information on the kidneys.)

Spleen
The spleen is a mainly red, heart-sized organ that sits to the left and below the stomach. As noted in the section on the digestive system, one of the branches from the celiac artery is the splenic artery. This artery supplies blood not only to the stomach, but also to the spleen. This organ has two primary functions: assisting in the removal of foreign materials and aging red blood cells from circulation, and storing red blood cells and platelets.

The Circulatory System 81

To spot and eliminate the threat from invading organisms, the spleen relies on the immune system. The organ contains many branching blood vessels that are enveloped with B lymphocytes and T lymphocytes (B cells and T cells). The T cells have a mission of surveillance and scan the slowly flowing blood for the foreigners, like bacteria. They report invaders to the B cells. Any B cell that has previously encountered the bacterium rapidly multiplies and then begins producing antibodies to weaken or destroy the invader. The spleen is also armed with many macrophages, the white blood cells that ingest and digest bacteria, other foreign organisms, platelets, and old or deformed red blood cells. In addition, the spleen can swell to hold blood in storage. This ability provides a reserve supply that can be tapped when necessary. Besides the filtration and storage functions, the spleen has another job in the human embryo: It makes red blood cells, a function that shifts to the bone marrow after birth.

Cerebral Circulation and the Blood-Brain Barrier
As discussed previously, the maintenance of blood flow to the brain is one of the circulatory system’s highest priorities. This is because the brain is key to so many vital physiological processes. The main arteries to the head include the left common carotid that branches directly off of the aortic arch, and the right common carotid that branches indirectly from the aortic arch by way of a short brachiocephalic (also called innominate) artery. The two carotid arteries traverse almost straight up, branching again at about chin level into internal and external carotids. Other arteries feeding the head include the vertebral arteries. These two arteries, one on each side of the neck, arise from the right and left subclavian arteries that divert from the aorta. The vertebral arteries unite at the basilar artery, and this artery joins with other cerebral arteries to form what is known as the circle of Willis. Blood supply to the brain comes from numerous major arteries, as well as smaller, branching arteries and arterioles. For example, the internal carotid artery supplies blood to the anterior brain, and one of its branches, called the anterior cerebral artery, feeds the cerebrum. The cerebrum comprises the two large hemispheres of the brain. In some cases, several

82 Leslie Mertz

arteries may supply the same area of the brain. The cerebrum also receives blood from the posterior cerebral artery, which derives from the basilar artery that arises from the vertebral artery. Blood flow to the brain, then, emanates from numerous arteries and arterioles. Similarly, blood drains from the brain via a large number of venules and veins that empty into several large veins. These include the vertebral vein, and the internal and external jugular veins. The internal jugular is by far the largest of the three, and runs almost down the middle of the neck. It serves as the primary collector for deoxygenated blood, which it delivers to the subclavian vein and eventually to the superior vena cava for its return to the heart. Although the brain accounts for only 2 percent of an average person’s weight, it demands approximately one-fifth to one-sixth of the cardiac output, or a flow of about 0.74 quarts (700 ml) per minute in an adult. The kidney and liver both require a high percentage of the cardiac output for such maintenance functions as water filtration or waste removal. The brain, on the other hand, needs the large quantity of blood for the oxygen. This heightened demand stems from the extreme rate of oxidative metabolism seen in the nerve cells, or neurons, of the brain. These neurons, collectively called gray matter, account for about 40 percent of the brain and use almost 20 percent of the oxygen that a resting person breathes. Just 1 square millimeter of gray matter can have up to 4,000 capillaries. In addition, the gray matter is damaged very quickly if the oxygen supply drops off. Fainting is one of the body’s responses to this condition of hypoxia (low oxygen levels). This brings the head closer to the ground, which serves to take advantage of gravity and allow blood to flow more readily to the brain. Continued hypoxia lasting more than a couple of minutes can cause permanent brain damage.

Blood-Brain Barrier
The blood-brain barrier is actually a collection of tightly enmeshed cells and other obstacles that effectively serve as a boundary, allowing only oxygen, certain nutrients, and a few other items to pass into brain tissues via the blood (Figure 2.9). Researchers Paul Ehrlich and Edwin Goldman saw in the late 1800s to early 1900s that dyes injected into the brain and

The Circulatory System 83

Figure 2.9 Blood-Brain Barrier. The blood-brain barrier is a protective boundary that allows only certain gases, nutrients, and other materials to pass from the blood into the brain tissues. In some cases, special molecules help to transport materials across the barrier. Scientists are now learning more about these transportation avenues and other ways to circumvent the barrier to allow beneficial materials, like drugs, to enter the brain. They are also studying why such dangerous entities as bacterial meningitis are able to circumvent the barrier. (Sandy Windelspecht/ Ricochet Productions)

cerebrospinal system would only color blood there, and dyes injected elsewhere would color all the blood except that in the brain and cerebrospinal system. A barrier existed that selectively prohibited various toxins and other substances from entering the brain. This is now known to protect the brain and its myriad nerve cells from diseases and chemicals that might impair its function. It also, however, prevents many helpful

84 Leslie Mertz

medications from penetrating into the brain, and researchers have been studying how to circumvent the barrier for several decades.

Summary
This chapter provides a brief overview of the very complex circulatory system. The system’s primary organ is the heart, which continuously forces blood into and out of the body’s blood vessels. The blood is another vital component of this system, and is responsible for transporting important materials throughout the body, including oxygen to the lungs and the heart. The blood is made up of red and white cells, as well as plasma and platelets, all of which have important roles in ensuring the blood performs its duties. Another important component of the circulatory system consists of the blood vessels, which are tissues that transport the blood to where it is needed. While the vessels allow the blood to travel throughout the body, the capillary system facilitates the exchange between the blood and various tissues, including the vessels. Since all of the body’s systems are interconnected and depend on one another, it is not surprising that organs from other systems rely on the blood and circular system to function. These include the liver, stomach, and other organs of the digestive system; the kidneys and renal organs; as well as the brain—the primary organ of the nervous system.

3
The Digestive System
Michael Windelspecht

Interesting Facts
• • • • • • • • • The salivary glands can produce up to 1.5 quarts (1,500 milliliters) of saliva daily. Food remains in the esophagus for as little as five seconds before entering the stomach. The human stomach can hold as much as 2.1 quarts (2 liters) of food. The stomach produces 2.12 quarts (2 liters) of gastric juice daily. Gastric juice is 100,000 times more acidic than water and has about the same acidity as battery acid. The small intestine in an adult can reach 3.28 yards (3 meters) in length, while the large intestine is only about 1.64 yards (1.5 meters) long. Every square millimeter of the small intestine can contain 40 villi and 200 million microvilli. Food remains in the small intestine for three to five hours on average, during which most nutrients are removed. The intestines receive over 10 quarts (9 liters) of water daily, of which almost 95 percent is recycled back into the body.

85

86 Michael Windelspecht



As little as 10–15 percent of the iron we eat in food is absorbed into the human body.

Chapter Highlights
• • • • • • • The mechanics of digestion Different types of energy nutrients Vitamins, minerals, and water Upper gastrointestinal tract (oral cavity, esophagus, and stomach) Lower gastrointestinal tract (small intestine and colon) Large intestine Accessory organs (salivary glands, liver, gall bladder, pancreas)

Words to Watch For
Alkaline Amphipathic molecules Antioxidants Autocatalytic process Bilirubin Binucleate cells Bioavailability Bolus Buccal cavity Cholesterol Deglutition Dehydration synthesis Dentin Diaphragm Diploid cells Electrolytes Epithelial cells Exocrine gland Facilitated diffusion Hemoglobin Hepatic portal system High-density lipoproteins (HDL) Hormones Hydrolysis Hydrophilic Hydrophobic Ions Kilocalorie Lacteals Lipoproteins Low-density lipoproteins (LDL) Lumen Mesentery Metabolism Organic molecules Peristaltic action Pharynx Phospholipids Polyploid cells

The Digestive System 87

Introduction
One of the unifying characteristics of all living organisms is their ability to process nutrients from the environment into the chemical compounds found within the cells. This processing of nutrients is commonly called metabolism. Plants, animals, fungi, and bacteria have all evolved different strategies for supplying the energy and chemical needs of the organism. Simply stated, digestion is the breakdown of food particles into their fundamental building blocks. As heterotrophic organisms, or those that rely on others as a source of energy, animals have evolved a wide range of digestive systems to accommodate their environmental needs. The internal body plan of an animal species is frequently defined by its digestive system. The purpose of this chapter is to examine the structure and function of the digestive systems in the species Homo sapiens, or humans. The digestive system is not a stand-alone system. The primary digestive organs—the mouth, esophagus, stomach, and small and large intestine— not only interact to some degree with each other, but also receive signals from other organs of the body. The accessory organs—the liver, pancreas, salivary glands, and gall bladder—supply chemicals necessary for the nutrient processing. The liver and pancreas are active with other systems of the body as well, such as the endocrine and circulatory systems. The digestive system is partially under the control of the nervous system, but also is influenced by the hormones secreted by the endocrine system. Because nutrients absorbed by the digestive system must be transported throughout the body, the gastrointestinal tract interacts with the circulatory and lymphatic system for the transport of water-soluble and fat-soluble nutrients, respectively. Finally, the urinary system removes some of the waste products of nutrient metabolism by the liver. The purpose of digestion is to process food by breaking the chemical bonds that hold the nutrients together. This is necessary so that the body has an adequate source of energy for daily activity, as well as materials for the construction of new cells and tissues. Since these nutrients arrive in the digestive system as the tissues of previously living organisms, they are rarely in the precise molecular structure needed by a human body. For example, the blood of cows and chickens has evolved over time to meet the precise metabolic needs of the organism. When the tissues of these

88 Michael Windelspecht

animals are consumed, our bodies must chemically alter the proteins and other nutrients found in the animal’s blood to form human blood proteins such as hemoglobin. As is the case with almost all the nutrients (with the exception of water, minerals, and some vitamins), the body breaks down the nutrient into its fundamental building blocks, transports the digested nutrient into circulatory and lymphatic systems, and eventually uses these nutrients in the cells of the body for either energy or metabolic processes. Before proceeding into how these reactions occur, it is first necessary to provide an overview of the digestion process, as well as to discuss the basic nutrient classes.

Digestion at the Cellular and Molecular Level
When the term digestion is mentioned, it is natural to think about the actions of the mouth, stomach, and small intestine in the processing of food for energy. While these actions are no doubt important in the breakdown of food, they actually are the result of complex processing mechanisms at the cellular level. This chapter will examine the physiology of the digestive system at the organ level. However, to effectively understand the structure and function of the digestive system, we must first understand the cellular and molecular basis of nutrient processing. The purpose of digestion is to process food by breaking the chemical bonds that hold the nutrients together. This is necessary so that the body has an adequate source of energy for daily activity, as well as materials for the construction of new cells and tissues. Since these nutrients arrive in the digestive system as the tissues of previously living organisms, they are rarely in the precise molecular structure needed by a human body. For example, the blood of cows and chickens has evolved over time to meet the precise metabolic needs of the organism. When the tissues of these animals are consumed, our bodies must chemically alter the proteins and other nutrients found in the animal’s blood to form human blood proteins such as hemoglobin. As is the case with almost all the nutrients (with the exception of water, minerals, and some vitamins), the body breaks down the nutrient into its fundamental building blocks, transports the digested nutrient into circulatory and lymphatic systems, and eventually uses these nutrients in the cells of the body for either energy or metabolic processes.

The Digestive System 89

Classes of Nutrients
There are six general classes of nutrients: carbohydrates, fats, proteins, water, vitamins, and minerals. Carbohydrates, fats, and proteins are characterized as energy nutrients. These organic (or carbon-containing) molecules are responsible for providing our bodies with the majority of the energy needed for daily metabolic reactions. This does not mean that the remaining nutrient classes are not important in energy reactions within the body. In fact, many of these, such as some of the B vitamins and water, are crucial to the efficient operation of the energy pathways. However, our bodies do not get energy from these nutrients directly. Carbohydrates, proteins, and fats all contain energy in the carboncarbon bonds of their molecules. The energy of these bonds is measured in a unit of heat measurement called the calorie. A calorie is the amount of energy required to raise 1 gram of pure water by 1 degree Celsius at sea level. However, this is a relatively small unit of measurement, and thus for nutritional analysis the term kilocalorie (1,000 calories) is frequently used. When one examines the ingredient label of a prepared food, such as a soft drink, the listed calorie value is actually in kilocalories, also called kcals. Organic molecules contain a large number of carbon-carbon bonds, and are therefore an excellent source of metabolic energy.

Energy from Energy Nutrients
Cells have a variety of mechanisms for releasing the energy contained within the carbon-carbon bonds of organic molecules. Some cells are anaerobic and can obtain small amounts of energy without the assistance of oxygen. However, the majority of the cells of the body utilize a complex metabolic pathway called aerobic respiration. Aerobic respiration consists of three main series of reactions: glycolysis, the Krebs cycle, and the electron transport chain (ETC). The Krebs cycle and ETC occur in the mitochondria of the cell and use oxygen to regenerate a cellular energy molecule called adenosine triphosphate (ATP). In the Krebs cycle, the carbon-carbon bonds are broken and a small amount of ATP is generated. The remaining carbon is combined with oxygen to form carbon dioxide, a waste product. The details of aerobic respiration will be covered in greater detail in Chapter 10 on the respiratory system.

90 Michael Windelspecht
TABLE 3.1 The Energy Nutrients
Energy nutrient Carbohydrates Proteins Fats and lipids Monomer Monosaccharides Amino acids N/A Polymer Polysaccharides Proteins N/A General enzyme Amylases Proteases Lipases Energy per gram 4 kcal 4 kcal 9 kcal

This table lists some important facts regarding the energy nutrients. The “N/A” under fats and lipids reflects the fact that these molecules do not form complex structures in the same manner as carbohydrates and proteins. The energy per gram is an approximation and varies depending on the metabolic properties of the cell and individual.

The aerobic respiration pathways are capable of utilizing most organic molecules as an energy source. However, in order for the nutrients to enter the pathway, they must first be broken down into their fundamental building blocks. Proteins and carbohydrates are actually long repetitive chains of individual building blocks called monomers. These monomers are linked by chemical bonds into long polymers (see Table 3.1), which first must be broken down. Water is used to break the bonds linking the monomers in a process called hydrolysis. Cells use the reverse of this process, called dehydration synthesis or condensation reactions, to form more complex molecules from the monomers.

Carbohydrates
In the study of nutrition, carbohydrates are frequently abbreviated as CHO, which reflects the fact that this nutrient class contains the elements carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen. All carbohydrates possess carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen in a 1:2:1 ratio, respectively. For example, the molecular formula for glucose is C6H12O6. Carbohydrates are the short-term energy molecules of the human body and are the preferred fuel of the aerobic respiration pathways. All carbohydrates are made up of one of three building blocks, or monosaccharides. The most common of these is glucose, with the other two being fructose (the monosaccharide associated with the sweet taste) and galactose (sometimes called a milk sugar). Glucose is the preferred

The Digestive System 91

energy molecule for aerobic respiration, and the human digestive system is well adapted to extracting this nutrient from foods and delivering it to the cells. All of the monosaccharides are water-soluble and easily transported by the circulatory system. Monosaccharides are linked together in pairs by chemical bonds to form the disaccharides. All disaccharides contain at least one glucose unit in their structure. There are three different disaccharides: maltose (glucose-glucose), sucrose (glucose-fructose), and lactose (glucose-galactose). Together, the monosaccharides and disaccharides all are commonly called the simple sugars. Complex carbohydrates, or the polysaccharides, are composed of long chains of glucose units. The different classes of polysaccharides vary in the physical structure of the chemical bonds that link the glucose units. In some cases, such as starch, the chemical bonds are easily digested by the human digestive system and thus provide a useful source of glucose for energy. However, a slight change in the configuration of the chemical bonds between the glucose units makes the bonds inaccessible by human digestive enzymes. These molecules are called fibers, and even though they are not digestible by human enzymes, they play an increasingly important role in human digestion. Since they are basically indigestible, fibers provide bulk to food. This bulk helps move materials through the system and provides resistance to muscles of the gastrointestinal tract. This resistance acts as a form of workout for the muscles, which keeps them strong, allowing for the efficient movement of food in the system. Fibers exist in one of two general categories: soluble and insoluble. The soluble fibers, which are readily dissolved in water, are found primarily in fruits. These fibers slow down the movement of food through the gastrointestinal tract as well as the absorption of glucose. In contrast, the insoluble fibers, which are found in bran material and whole grains, increase the rate at which material is moved through the gastrointestinal tract, as well as provide bulk to the fecal material.

Fats and Lipids
While the carbohydrates are regarded as short-term energy sources for the human body, the fats and lipids are involved with more long-term energy processes within the body. There are exceptions to this, but in general the fats and lipids take more time to process by the digestive system and are

92 Michael Windelspecht

associated with developing the long-term energy stores of the body. Technically, the term lipid is used to represent the entire class of these molecules, with the term fat primarily being reserved for a group of lipids called the triglycerides. However, frequently in nutritional analysis and on consumer products, the terms are used interchangeably. In this volume, the term fat will be reserved for the triglycerides, with lipids indicating the entire class of molecules. Two major classes of lipids are of interest in understanding the physiology of the digestive system of humans: the triglycerides and the sterols. A third class, the phospholipids, plays an important role in the structure of cell membranes. For the most part, the lipids are hydrophobic molecules, meaning that they do not dissolve readily in water. Because the digestive system is a water environment, as is the circulatory system, this physical characteristic of the lipids means that the digestive system will have to handle the lipids differently than most other nutrients. Chemical secretions such as bile, and specialized proteins called the lipoproteins, will assist the processing and transport of these important energy nutrients. The triglycerides make up the majority (95 percent) of the lipids in food. The structure of these molecules, with its high number of carbon-carbon bonds, makes them an excellent source of energy for aerobic respiration. The long chains, called fatty acids, can vary in length and their degree of saturation. It is these chains that make the triglycerides hydrophobic. The level of saturation of the fatty acid chains has also been associated with human health. Saturated fats, found typically in animal products, are known to increase the risk of heart disease, while the unsaturated fats of plant products produce less of a risk. While the words triglyceride and fat have a negative connotation in today’s society, in fact they are necessary and useful molecules in human metabolism when they are consumed in correct quantities. Some fats, called the omega-3 and omega-6 fatty acids due to their structure, actually help regulate the lipid biochemistry of the blood. Fats and lipids also provide insulation for the body. Because the fats give texture to food, release a pleasing aroma when cooked, and provide a fullness to the meal, they can be easily over-consumed during eating. A second major class of lipids is the sterols, of which the most common is called cholesterol. As is the case with the triglycerides, the word cholesterol does not have a positive image in today’s society. However, just like

The Digestive System 93

the triglycerides, cholesterol is an important molecule for our bodies. It serves as the starting material for the manufacture of important hormones such as testosterone and estrogen, is a component of the membranes of our cells, used by the liver to manufacture bile, and is the starting material for the synthesis of vitamin D in our bodies. In fact, cholesterol is such an important molecule to our bodies that our liver has the capability of manufacturing all of the body’s daily requirements of cholesterol. Like the triglycerides, cholesterol is a hydrophobic molecule, and thus the body can have some problems moving it around. To remedy this, cholesterol as well as triglycerides are packaged into a group of special transport molecules called lipoproteins. Think of these lipoproteins as balloons. When the balloons are empty of cholesterol, they are compact and small and are called high-density lipoproteins (HDL). When there is an abundance of cholesterol in the system, the balloons are full, and they are called low-density lipoproteins (LDL). Unfortunately, these lipoproteins have been given the names “good” (HDL) and “bad” (LDL) cholesterol, but that really is not correct. Because the body has the ability to manufacture all of its cholesterol, an overabundance in foods, called dietary cholesterol, will fill the balloons creating LDLs. A diet low in fat and cholesterol will leave the balloons empty, which are the HDLs. Scientists and nutritionists are still debating the effects of dietary cholesterol on the body. The amount of cholesterol does not directly influence the operation of the digestive system (although the foods that cholesterol is associated with do), but it does affect the health of the circulatory system. There are additional classes of lipids, such as the waxes and phospholipids. Although important to the overall operation of the human body, they have little influence on the physiology of the digestive system and are processed in the same manner as the triglycerides and sterols.

Proteins
While the body primarily uses lipids and carbohydrates for energy, proteins are involved in a wide variety of functions other than supplying energy. To put it simply, proteins are the working molecules of the cell and, as such, are involved in the majority of all cellular functions. Proteins may have structural functions, such as those found in muscles; others work as

94 Michael Windelspecht

signaling molecules in the nervous system or as hormones for the endocrine system. This list of protein functions in the human body is almost too numerous to mention, but a specialized group of proteins, called the enzymes, are an important component of the digestive system and are covered in the next section. The building blocks of proteins are the amino acids. Twenty different amino acids are needed to construct the proteins of the human body. Each of these amino acids has a slightly different molecular structure, which gives each of them a unique chemical characteristic. Within each cell, using instructions from the genetic material (deoxyribonucleic acid, or DNA), amino acids are linked together by the process of dehydration synthesis to form proteins. Like other molecules, these bonds are broken by the process of hydrolysis. However, unlike the carbohydrates, when the amino acid chains are formed, they fold into complex three-dimensional structures that inhibit digestion in the body. Furthermore, the peptide bonds that hold the amino acids together are exceptionally strong, thus requiring the assistance of enzymes to break them down. Because the proteins in food are the product of the original organism’s body, and were constructed by the organism for a specific purpose, few proteins that are brought into the human digestive system are usable in their current form. Instead of absorbing whole proteins into the body, the role of the digestive system is to break down the protein bonds into their amino acid building blocks. The individual amino acids are then absorbed into the body and used as raw materials for the building of human-specific proteins. The digestion and absorption of proteins will be covered in more detail later in this chapter.

Enzymes
For the most part, the metabolic reactions of the body, including the dehydration synthesis and hydrolytic reactions mentioned previously, do not occur spontaneously. Instead, they require a catalyst to accelerate the rate of the reaction to a point that is efficient for the cells of the body. These catalysts are called enzymes. While the human body has a wide array of enzymes, which control everything from the operation of the nervous system to the process of cell division, they all share some common characteristics.

The Digestive System 95

First, the vast majority of all enzymes are proteins. The three-dimensional shape of enzymatic proteins enables them to interact with other molecules. Second, enzymes are very specific to the molecules, or substrates, with which they interact. Third, enzymes all serve to increase the efficiency of metabolic reactions by lowering the amount of energy needed to initiate the reaction. Finally, enzymes themselves are not consumed or destroyed during the course of an enzymatic reaction, allowing them to be reused over and over again for the same process. The activity of an enzyme may be regulated by a variety of mechanisms. First, enzymes all have a specific environment in which they are the most efficient. The temperature and pH (or acid/base level) of the enzyme’s environment act as a switch to regulate its activity. Since within the digestive system of humans, the temperature remains a relatively constant 98.6°F (37°C), digestive enzymes are primarily regulated by the pH of their environment. The level of compartmentalization in the human digestive system helps to establish zones of enzyme activity. Throughout this chapter, we will examine how the stomach and small intestine regulate the pH of their environments to control enzyme activity. The digestive system utilizes a large number of enzymes to break down the nutrients within food into units small enough to be transported by the circulatory or lymphatic system. In this volume, we will usually refer to the enzymes by their general function. For example, enzymes that assist in the processing of lipids are called lipases, and those that process proteins are called proteases. The prefix “amyl-” means sugar. Other enzymes and their mechanism of regulation will be discussed in the next several chapters.

Vitamins, Minerals, and Water
The action of the digestive system is not confined solely to the processing of the energy nutrients. The human body requires a daily input of other nutrients to meet its metabolic requirements. The processing of vitamins, minerals, and water differs from that of the energy nutrients in that these nutrients are usually not broken down by the digestive system, but rather are absorbed intact and then transported by the circulatory system to the other systems of the body. While is it beyond the scope of this encyclopedia to describe all of the vitamins and minerals, some basic

96 Michael Windelspecht

characteristics of these nutrients are described in the following paragraphs so as to provide an overview of how these nutrients interact with the digestive system. The bibliography of this encyclopedia provides a list of useful sources for additional information on specific nutrients.

Vitamins
Vitamins are similar to the energy nutrients in that they are organic molecules, but differ in the fact that the body does not get energy directly from these molecules. Instead, vitamins serve as enzyme assistants, or coenzymes. Some vitamins, specifically the B-complex vitamins, are directly involved in the processing of energy nutrients, specifically lipids and carbohydrates. Certain vitamins serve as protectors of the delicate cellular machinery. These are called the antioxidants and are best represented by vitamins C and E. Others aid in the vision pathways (vitamin A), or in the building of healthy bones (vitamins D and A). Nutritionists divide the vitamins into two groups based upon how they interact with the body. The first are the water-soluble vitamins, a group that consists of vitamin C and the B vitamins. These vitamins are readily absorbed by the digestive system and, with a few exceptions, do not require special processing. The other class, known as the fat-soluble vitamins (vitamins A, D, E, and K), are frequently treated in the same manner as the triglycerides, meaning that they are packaged into specialized lipoproteins and transported by the lymphatic system. In general, both classes are required in relatively small quantities (micrograms or less) daily by the body. There are two vitamins that we will focus on in some detail. The first is vitamin D, which is produced by the body using the cholesterol in the skin as a starting material. When the skin is exposed to sunlight, specifically ultraviolet radiation, the chemical structure of the cholesterol is modified to create a precursor of vitamin D. This chemical is then transported to the liver and adrenal glands for additional processing. Vitamin D acts like a hormone, in that it regulates the calcium absorption properties of calcium in the small intestine. The second vitamin of interest in the study of the digestive system’s physiology is vitamin K. Vitamin K is a vitamin that is involved in a wide variety of body functions, most notably the clotting response of the blood.

The Digestive System 97

Some vitamin K is produced by the naturally existing bacteria of the large intestine, or colon. As with many of the nutrients, there is a significant amount of misinformation in the popular media regarding the ability of some vitamins to prevent disease, enhance performance, increase memory, and so on.

Minerals
Minerals are inorganic nutrients that play an important role in the regulation of many of the body’s metabolic functions. Like the vitamins, many minerals function as assistants to metabolic pathways. Still others help regulate body fluid levels, and some serve as structural components of bones. Minerals are also the major electrolytes in the circulatory system. Nutritionists divide minerals into two broad classes: the trace minerals and the major minerals. It is important to note that the terms trace and major do not reflect the importance of the mineral in the body, but rather the abundance of the mineral in the human body. For example, iron is considered to be a trace mineral, but it is crucial to the development of hemoglobin in the blood. The digestive system handles minerals in a variety of ways. Some minerals, such as sodium and potassium, are quickly absorbed from food and transported by the circulatory system. However, some minerals, such as calcium, are poorly absorbed by the gastrointestinal (GI) tract. This level of potential availability of minerals is frequently called bioavailability and reflects not only the physical interaction of the digestive system with the mineral, but also the presence of certain chemicals in foods that may bind the mineral and make it unavailable to the digestive system. In addition, the ability of the GI tract to extract minerals from food is dependent on the overall health of the system, the age of the person, their sex, and other factors, such as pregnancy. The role of some of the more important minerals, such as iron, calcium, sodium, and potassium, will be discussed throughout this volume of the encyclopedia. By examining these minerals in detail, one can gain an appreciation of how the GI tract processes minerals in general.

Water
While the average person may not consider water to be a nutrient, in fact it is probably one of the most important nutrients for the digestive system. Like the circulatory, respiratory, and urinary systems, the digestive system is a

98 Michael Windelspecht

water-based system that uses water to move nutrients, deliver digestive enzymes, lubricate the length of the gastrointestinal tract, and facilitate the absorption of nutrients into the circulatory and lymphatic systems. The average human requires about 2.65 quarts (approximately 2.5 liters) of water per day to meet the metabolic requirements of the body. The majority of this comes from liquids and foods that are consumed throughout the day. A smaller amount is derived from chemical reactions within the body, such as dehydration synthesis reactions. The movement of water between the digestive system and the tissues of the body, most commonly the circulatory system, is highly regulated. The digestive system must simultaneously retain enough water for its own operation and supply the body with the water it needs to function. This is a complex task and frequently involves the use of minerals such as potassium and sodium to establish concentration gradients to efficiently move water. The large intestine, or colon, is the major digestive organ responsible for this process.

The Upper Gastrointestinal Tract: Oral Cavity, Esophagus, and Stomach
The human digestive system is actually a series of organs that form a long, enclosed tube. This organ system of the human body is specialized for breaking down incoming food into the needed nutrients for the body’s vast array of metabolic functions. The majority of the organs in the human body are either directly or indirectly associated with the process of digestion. The organs of the GI tract are those that physically comprise the tube, also called the alimentary canal, which the food physically passes through. These include the oral cavity, esophagus, stomach, small intestine, and large intestine (also called the colon). Figure 3.1 gives the location of these organs in the human body. Associated with the organs of the gastrointestinal tract are the accessory organs. The accessory organs, which will be covered in detail later in this chapter, contribute needed materials for the breakdown and processing of the food entering the system. In many cases, the accessory organs have multiple functions that are highlighted in other volumes of this series. For convenience, the GI tract is frequently divided into two major sections for study. The upper GI tract consists of the oral cavity, esophagus,

The Digestive System 99

Figure 3.1 Gastrointestinal Tract. This diagram gives the general arrangement of the digestive and accessory organs. (Sandy Windelspecht/ Ricochet Productions)

and stomach, as well as associated valves and accessory organs. The lower GI tract consists primarily of the small intestine and colon. This division, while practical from the standpoint of a reference book, also has some basis in physiological function. As this chapter will explore, the role of the upper GI tract is primarily in the processing of food material. The majority of the digestion and nutrient processing, as well as the preparation of waste material, occurs in the lower GI tract.

The Oral Cavity
The human mouth, also called the oral cavity or buccal cavity, is the entry point into the human digestive system. The oral cavity represents an area of intense activity for the body. Not only are nutrients initially processed

100 Michael Windelspecht

in this location, but is also serves as the connecting point between the respiratory system and the outside environment, as well as the location of a significant amount of sensory input from chemical receptors, most notably taste (Figure 3.2). The human mouth is the site of both mechanical and enzymatic digestive processes.

Salivary Glands
Vital to the digestive functions of the oral cavity are the secretions of three pairs of accessory glands collectively called the salivary glands. These

Figure 3.2 Oral Cavity. The structures of the oral cavity, including the relationship to the nasal cavity and respiratory passages. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

The Digestive System 101

glands are identified by their location in the oral cavity. Two pairs are located along the bottom of the oral cavity. The sublingular glands are located just below the tongue, and the submandibular glands are positioned just beneath these, near the mandibula (jawbone). A third set, called the parotid glands, are located just in front of, and slightly below, the ears. The childhood disease called mumps frequently infects the parotid glands, although the other pairs may become infected as well. A duct carries the secretions of each salivary gland into the oral cavity. Saliva, the chemical secretion of the salivary glands, is actually a complex mixture that performs a variety of functions for the digestive system. Saliva is primarily water (99.5 percent), which serves to lubricate and moisten the digestive system. However, it is the remaining 0.5 percent of the volume that contains some of saliva’s most important functions. This small fraction contains important ions, such as potassium, chloride, sodium, and phosphates, which serve as pH buffers and activators of enzymatic activity. Since salivary glands are similar in structure to sweat glands found within the skin, they also secrete urea and uric acid as waste products. Saliva also contains a small amount of an enzyme called lysozyme, which inhibits, but does not eliminate, the formation of bacterial colonies in the oral cavity. Mucus, a watery mixture of complex polysaccharides, helps lubricate and protect the oral cavity. Also found in saliva is another enzyme, called salivary amylase, which initiates the process of carbohydrate digestion (discussed at length in the following section). The composition of the saliva varies slightly depending on the salivary gland in which it originates. The salivary glands of an adult can secrete a combined volume of 1.58 quarts (1,500 milliliters) of saliva daily. The amount of saliva secreted at a specific time is dependent on a number of factors. For example, when the body is dehydrated, the production of saliva is decreased, which in turn contributes to a thirst response by the body. An increase in saliva production is under direct control of the brain and is usually the result of a response to a chemical stimulus. The sight or smell of food typically serves to increase saliva production. Memories can also result in an increase of saliva production, such as the memory of a favorite food or food-related event. Increased saliva production can continue for some time after eating to cleanse the mouth of food, eliminate harmful bacteria, and restore the normal pH of the oral cavity.

102 Michael Windelspecht

Mechanical Digestion
In the oral cavity, the process of mechanical digestion serves several functions. First, the action of the teeth and tongue break the food into small portions so that it may be sent to the stomach via the esophagus. Second, the process of mechanical digestion increases the surface area of the food, allowing the secretions of the salivary glands to mix freely with the food and stimulating the action of the taste buds. The action of chewing, or mastication, is the first stage of mechanical digestion. Chewing involves the action of both the teeth and the tongue. While there are three major types of teeth in a human adult mouth (molars and premolars are frequently classified as one type), all teeth have the same fundamental structure (Figure 3.3). It is the shape of the tooth that determines its function in mechanical digestion (Table 3.2). The combination of different types of teeth in the mouth allows for the processing of a large variety of foods, from protein-rich meats to nutritious vegetables and fruits. The shape and structure of the human jaw is designed to provide a large physical force to the teeth, which can be used to grind both plant tissue and bones to release nutrients.

Figure 3.3 The Teeth. The internal structure of a typical human tooth. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

The Digestive System 103
TABLE 3.2 The Teeth of an Adult Human
Class Incisors Cuspids (canines) Premolars Molars Function Cutting food Tearing and shredding Crushing and grinding food Crushing and grinding food Number 8 4 8 12

The teeth absorb the brunt of this force. To prevent damage, each tooth is located in a socket of the jawbone. Connecting each tooth to the socket is the periodontal ligament, which also acts as a shock absorber. The socket and lower portions of the tooth are covered by the gums, or gingivae. (A common inflammation of this tissue is called gingivitis.) Teeth are made from a calcified form of connective tissue called dentin, which is covered with a combination of calcium phosphate and calcium carbonate commonly called enamel. (Dental caries typically erode this area of the tooth.) Within the center of each tooth is an area called the pulp cavity, which contains nerves, blood vessels, and ducts of the lymphatic system. Without teeth, humans would be required to swallow food whole in much the same manner as snakes. As organisms with a high metabolic rate, we require a relatively rapid processing of incoming nutrients. The importance of the teeth in increasing the surface area of the food for later enzymatic digestion should not be underestimated. The second stage in the mechanical processing of the food involves the action of the tongue. The tongue is comprised of skeletal muscle, which is under the voluntary (but not always conscious) control of the body. The movement of the tongue is controlled by two separate sets of muscles. The extrinsic muscles enable the movement of the tongue that is important for digesting food. These muscles move the food from the area of the teeth to the back of the mouth, where it is formed into a small round mass of material called a bolus. This area at the rear of the oral cavity is commonly called the pharynx. The pharynx serves as the junction between the respiratory system and digestive system, and thus all activity in this area must be highly coordinated by the body. By the action of the tongue, the food is lubricated with saliva to facilitate swallowing and to mix in the enzymes

104 Michael Windelspecht

of the salivary glands. The tongue also participates in the swallow reflex (see the “Swallowing Reflex” section) through the action of the intrinsic muscles. This muscle group also controls the size and shape of the tongue and is involved with speech. Located on the tongue are a series of papillae, which are small projections of the tissue. It is the papillae that give the tongue its rough texture. The papillae are sometimes mistakenly referred to as the taste buds, but the taste buds are actually specialized receptors located at the base of certain types of papillae. There are three different forms of papillae, which differ in their appearance and location on the tongue. The circumvallate papillae are the largest and are located in a V-shaped region at the rear of the tongue (Figure 3.4). All of the circumvallate papillae contain taste buds. The fungiform papillae are knoblike in appearance and are dispersed across the entire tongue. Depending on their location, some fungiform papillae contain taste buds. The last group is the filiform papillae. These have a

Figure 3.4 The Tongue. The external structure of the tongue showing the relationship between papillae types and taste zones. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

The Digestive System 105

filament-like appearance and are also uniformly distributed across the surface of the tongue. However, unlike fungiform papillae, filiform papillae rarely contain taste buds. The tongue is divided into four different taste zones—sour, bitter, sweet, and salty. The taste buds in each area are sensitive to a unique chemical signature. Depending on the origin of the signal, the brain interprets the different tastes. The number of receptors that fire and the duration of the signal determine the intensity of the taste.

Enzymatic Digestion
Enzymatic digestion is responsible for breaking organic material into smaller subunits that can be absorbed into the circulatory system. The amount of enzymatic digestion within the oral cavity is small in comparison to the activity of the lower GI tract. However, there is some initial digestion of both carbohydrates and lipids in the oral cavity. The salivary glands, primarily the submandibular and sublingual glands, secrete an enzyme called salivary amylase. Recall that the nutrients are primarily absorbed from the digestive system in their simplest structure, or monomers. Salivary amylase belongs to a class of enzymes that digest complex carbohydrates, such as starch, into monosaccharides. The monosaccharides are easily absorbed into the circulatory system, although little absorption occurs in the oral cavity. The salivary amylase is mixed into the food by the action of the tongue and cheeks and continues to break down the starches in the food for about an hour until deactivated by the acidic pH of the stomach. A second enzyme of the oral cavity is lingual lipase. Lingual lipase is secreted from glands on the surface of the tongue. This enzyme acts on triglycerides in the food, breaking them down into monoglycerides and fatty acids. However, the action of this enzyme is relatively minor and it does not make a major contribution to overall lipid digestion.

Swallowing Reflex
As the bolus forms in the rear of the oral cavity, or pharynx, the swallowing reflex begins. Swallowing, or deglutition, is a staged process that is partly under voluntary control and partly a reflex action. While most people do not consciously think of swallowing, in fact it represents a complex, highly

106 Michael Windelspecht

coordinated activity. The tongue, through the action of the intrinsic muscles, forces the food to the back of the mouth. The pressure of the bolus on the pharynx activates a series of receptors that send a signal to the swallowing center of the medulla oblongata and pons in the brain. The swallowing center then temporarily deactivates the respiratory centers of the brain to ensure that the bolus will be directed into the digestive, and not the respiratory, system. As the bolus prepares to enter the esophagus, a series of events is initiated to direct the food into the digestive system. Once the swallowing reflex has begun, the following four events occur in rapid succession: 1. The tongue moves upward against the roof (hard palate) of the mouth to prevent the food from reentering the oral cavity. 2. The uvula, an inverted-Y-shaped flap of skin at the rear of the mouth, moves upward to block the nasal passages. 3. The vocal cords in the larynx tightly close over the opening of the windpipe, or glottis. 4. As the bolus passes into the esophagus, it forces a flap of cartilaginous tissue called the epiglottis downward over the glottis as an added precaution to protect against the food entering the respiratory system.

Layers of the Digestive System
Before following the bolus on its brief journey through the esophagus, it is necessary to discuss the tissue structure of the digestive tract. From the esophagus to the anus, the walls of the digestive tract have the same general structure, with minor variations in each organ to enable specific functions. Within the wall of the digestive tract are four major tissue layers. From outermost to innermost, they are the serosa, muscularis externa, submucosa, and muscosa. The serosa is the outermost layer of the digestive tract and is comprised of connective tissue. The serosa is important in that it forms a connection between the digestive tract and the mesentery that suspends the organs of the digestive tract within the abdominal cavity. To prevent friction between the organs of the system, the serosa secretes a water-based mixture that

The Digestive System 107

lubricates the exteriors of the organs. Directly under the serosa is a double layer of smooth muscle, the muscularis externa. These two muscle layers are the inner circular muscle and the outer longitudinal muscle. Since these layers are composed of smooth muscle, they are not under voluntary control of the brain. However, a nerve network called the myenteric plexus allows for regulation of activity from the involuntary control centers of the brain. The muscles contract in different directions, with the circular layer controlling the diameter of the digestive tract and the longitudinal layer controlling the length. The human digestive system does not rely on gravity to move nutrients through it; instead, the action of these two muscle layers rhythmically moves food through the system by a series of coordinated contractions called peristaltic action. The next layer inward is a dense section of connective tissue called the submucosa. Located within the submucosa are the major blood and lymphatic vessels, as well as another series of nerves called the submucous plexus that provides involuntary regulation of the layer. The innermost layer is the mucosa. This layer lines the interior of the digestive tract and thus is in direct contact with the nutrients passing through the system. The epithelial cells of the mucosa serve several functions, depending on the region of the gastrointestinal tract. In some cases, these cells secrete a mucus layer that serves to lubricate the passage and protect the cells. Other cells may secrete digestive juices, while still others may release hormones that regulate the activity of the region. Epithelial cells are arranged into folds to increase the surface area. The amount of folding is dependent on the region of the gastrointestinal tract. Also within the mucosa, usually just underneath the epithelial cells, is a thin layer of smooth muscle, as well as blood vessels, lymphatic vessels, nerves, and cells of the immune system.

Esophagus
Once the bolus leaves the oral cavity, it enters into a muscular tube called the esophagus. The esophagus is not a major digestive organ, because the only enzymes that are active here are the salivary amylase and lingual lipase from the oral cavity. Furthermore, since the bolus spends only a brief amount of time in the esophagus (between five and nine seconds), and since the mucosa tissue layer does not contain a large number of folds, there is almost

108 Michael Windelspecht

no absorption of nutrients through the walls of the esophagus. Instead, the esophagus serves as a conduit from the oral cavity, through the thoracic region of the body and to the stomach. The thoracic region houses the heart and lungs and is bordered on the bottom by a muscular barrier called the diaphragm. The esophagus passes through the diaphragm and connects to the upper portion of the stomach. The bolus moves through the esophagus by peristaltic action. To aid the movement of the bolus, the cells of the mucosa tissue layer secrete mucus to lubricate the tube. To ensure the one-way movement of food, the esophagus is regulated by two sphincters, or valves. At the upper end of the esophagus is the pharyngoesophageal sphincter, which also serves to limit the flow of air into the gastrointestinal tract during breathing. At the lower end of the esophagus is the gastroesophageal sphincter, sometimes called the cardiac sphincter, which connects the esophagus to the stomach. The gastroesophageal sphincter also inhibits the reflux, or backup, of gastric juices from the stomach into the esophagus. Without this valve, the highly acidic gastric juices would damage the delicate mucosa layer of the esophagus.

Stomach
The stomach is commonly recognized as a muscular sac that functions as a holding site for food before it enters into the small intestine, as well as the location where the food is mixed and partially digested by mechanical processes. However, while the stomach does perform these functions, in actuality, its physiology and role in the digestive process is much more complex. The stomach is an elastic, J-shaped organ whose boundaries are defined at the upper end by the gastroesophageal sphincter, and at the lower end by the pyloric sphincter (Figure 3.5). When empty, a human stomach may have a volume as little as 0.05 quarts (50 millimeters). In comparison, when full, the stomach may contain almost 1.06–2.11 quarts (1–2 liters) of food, depending on the individual. The stomach contains the same tissue layers as are found in the esophagus, small intestine, and colon, with some important variations in the secretions and structure of the mucosa layer. The J-shaped interior of the stomach is divided into regions based on slight differences in the secretions of the mucosa layer, thickness of the muscle layers,

The Digestive System 109

Figure 3.5 The Stomach. This diagram not only shows the location of the sphincters that define the boundaries of the stomach, but also the peristaltic contractions that are responsible for moving forward toward the duodenum. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

and overall function in digestion. The uppermost part, located above the level of the gastroesophageal sphincter, is the fundus. Below this is the main region of the stomach, called the body. The lower portion of the stomach, which connects to the small intestine, is called the antrum. A fourth region, called the cardia, is located around the area of the gastroesophageal opening and plays only a limited role in digestion. The physiological differences of the fundus, body, and antrum will be covered within the following sections.

Composition of Gastric Juice
The stomach produces about 2.12 quarts (2 liters) of gastric juice per day. Recall that in the general structure of the digestive tract, the mucosa tissue layer may contain folds. In the stomach, these folds are called gastric pits (Figure 3.6). Located in each of these pits are specialized cells that are

110 Michael Windelspecht

Figure 3.6 The Gastric Pits. The gastric pits of the stomach showing the location of chief and parietal cells. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

responsible for generating the secretions of the stomach. At the top of the gastric pit are the mucous neck cells. Together with the surface epithelial cells, they are responsible for secreting the mucus coating that protects not only the cells within the gastric pit, but also the mucosa layer of the stomach. The mucus has an alkaline, or basic, pH, and thus serves to neutralize any stomach acid before it comes in contact with the stomach mucosa. The mucus also serves to lubricate the interior of the stomach for mechanical digestion. Located within the gastric pits are the chief cells and parietal cells. The chief cells secrete an inactive enzyme called pepsinogen, which is involved in the chemical digestion of proteins (as described in the next section). The parietal cells are responsible for manufacturing hydrochloric acid. The manufacture of hydrochloric acid is an energy-intense process, and thus the parietal cells have an exceptionally high concentration of

The Digestive System 111

mitochondria to generate the needed energy. Hydrochloric acid has a pH of 2.0, making it 100,000 times more acidic than water. The hydrochloric acid serves a number of functions in the stomach. First, it distorts, or denatures, the structure of proteins, making them easier to digest. Second, the low pH of the hydrochloric acid activates the pepsinogen enzyme secreted by the chief cells. Finally, the low pH of the hydrochloric acid acts as a deterrent against bacterial contaminants in the food. In this regard, the gastric juice of the stomach acts as a physical barrier of the immune system. In addition to hydrochloric acid, the parietal cells secrete an intrinsic factor that aids in the absorption of vitamin B12 in the small intestine. While the gastric pits of the fundus, body, and antrum may look fundamentally the same, there are some important variations in the secretions from these areas. Gastric juice, containing hydrochloric acid, pepsinogen, some mucous, and intrinsic factors, is secreted primarily by the cells of the fundus and body. In comparison, the cells of the antrum are responsible for secreting a large amount of mucus. Specialized cells in this area, called G cells, release a hormone called gastrin. Gastrin is released directly into the bloodstream and regulates the activity of the parietal and chief cells in the body and the stomach.

Enzymatic Digestion
The food was mixed in the oral cavity with saliva, which contains salivary amylase. The chemical digestion of complex carbohydrates in the bolus continues down the esophagus. After the bolus passes through the gastroesophageal sphincter and enters the stomach, it comes in contact with the highly acidic hydrochloric acid. While hydrochloric acid deactivates salivary amylase, the lack of a significant amount of mechanical digestion in the fundus and upper regions of the body of the stomach allows the salivary amylase to continue carbohydrate digestion within the bolus. However, once mechanical digestion begins lower in the stomach, the salivary amylase is quickly inactivated. The thick mucus coating of the stomach prohibits the absorption of digested carbohydrates into the bloodstream. In the oral cavity, the enzyme lingual lipase initiated a limited digestion of triglycerides in the food. In the stomach, the chief cells also release a gastric lipase, which serves much the same function in breaking down triglycerides.

112 Michael Windelspecht

As was the case with the carbohydrates in the oral cavity and stomach, this is not a major contribution to the overall digestion of these nutrients, and there is no appreciable absorption of triglycerides through the stomach lining. The prime nutrient target of enzymatic digestion in the stomach is protein. Recall from earlier in this chapter that proteins may be large molecules, and all contain multiple levels of complex organization. This threedimensional structure of proteins, and the presence of peptide bonds holding the amino acids together, makes proteins a difficult class of nutrients to digest. The purpose of protein digestion in the stomach is to initialize the process by destabilizing the structure of the protein. Thus, the mechanisms of protein digestion in the stomach are very general, and not directed at one specific type of protein. As was the case with carbohydrates, there is no absorption of peptides or amino acids through the lining of the stomach. Enzymes that are involved in protein digestion belong to the general class called proteases. The pepsinogen secreted by the chief cells in the gastric pits is initially inactive, so as to protect the cells of the gastric pit from unintentional digestion. After being secreted, the pepsinogen makes its way through the protective mucus coat and into the main cavity, or lumen, of the stomach (Figure 3.7). The hydrochloric acid in the lumen activates the pepsinogen by cleaving off a small fragment from one end of the molecule. This active form of the enzyme is called pepsin. Pepsin also has the ability to activate pepsinogen in what is frequently called an autocatalytic process. Once activated, pepsin breaks down some proteins into smaller peptide fragments for further digestion later in the small intestine.

Mechanical Digestion
The stomach is primarily an organ of mechanical digestion, whose purpose is to thoroughly mix the incoming food material with gastric juice, forming a semi-solid mixture called chyme. This process occurs in three distinct stages: (1) the filling of the stomach with food and the temporary storage of food, (2) the mixing of the food with gastric juice, and (3) the emptying of the stomach. The purpose of these processes is to manipulate the chyme to the correct consistency, so that it can pass through the pyloric sphincter into the upper region of the small intestine, also called the duodenum, for digestion. A series of complex signals between the stomach and small intestine controls

The Digestive System 113

Figure 3.7 Digestive Enzymes. The autocatalytic activation of digestive enzymes in the stomach. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

the final movement of materials into the duodenum. As was the case with enzymatic digestion, each of the three regions of the stomach has slightly different roles in mechanical digestion. Certain surgical procedures can also alter a body’s digestion patterns and are used as a means to treat severe obesity (Sidebar 3.1). After passing through the gastroesophageal sphincter, the bolus enters into the body of the stomach. With a normal volume of about 1.5 fluid

114 Michael Windelspecht

SIDEBAR 3.1

Treating Severe Obesity through Surgery
Diet and exercise are important approaches to treating overweight and obesity. However, in the case of severe obesity, diet and exercise are not possible and are not enough. Another treatment option is bariatric surgery, which assists weight loss and has been shown to reduce chronic health conditions associated with obesity—such as type 2 diabetes—through restricting food intake and blocking the digestive system’s absorption of calories and nutrients. Of course, healthy eating and exercise must follow the bariatric surgery for optimum results. There are three primary bariatric surgeries commonly offered in the United States. Below are some details on each of these procedures:

Adjustable Gastric Band: Also known as AGB, this surgery works primarily by reducing food intake by placing a small band around the top of the stomach. This produces a small pouch that is about the size of a thumb. The size of the pouch is controlled by a balloon located inside the band. It can be inflated or deflated with saline solution, based on the needs of the patient. Roux-en-Y Gastric Bypass: This surgery—RYGB—works by decreasing food intake, in addition to decreasing food absorption. Similar to the AGB surgery, a pouch is created about the same size to the one using the adjustable band. Absorption of food is reduced by directing food directly from the pouch to the small intestine, bypassing the stomach and upper intestine. Biliopancreatic Diversion with a Duodenal Switch: Also known as BPD-DS or the duodenal switch, this surgery has three parts. The procedure removes a large part of the stomach to reduce portion sizes, routes food away from the small intestine to diminish absorption, and re-routes bile and other digestive juices, which impair digestion. When a large portion of the stomach is removed, a gastric sleeve in a tubular shape is created. This is known as a vertical sleeve gastrectomy, or VSG. This sleeve is connected to a short segment of a part of the digestive system known as the duodenum,

The Digestive System 115

which is directly connected to a lower part of the small intestine. The smaller portion of the duodenum remains available for food intake, as well as vitamin and mineral absorption. But in fact, the majority of food bypasses duodenum. The surgery reduces the distance between the stomach and colon, which encourages malaborption. The result can be significant weight loss, although there are risks of long-term complications due to the reduced absorption of vitamins and minerals.

ounces (50 milliliters), this region of the stomach would quickly fill with food if it were not for the elastic nature of the stomach lining. Located along the inside of the stomach are deep folds of tissue called rugae. The purpose of the rugae is to allow the gradual expansion of the stomach, eventually allowing a liter or more of food to enter into the cavity. This process is called receptive relaxation, since it involves the gradual relaxation of the rugae to accommodate the incoming food. This allows the stomach to easily expand its volume to about 1.06 quarts (1 liter), after which the tension of the stomach may cause discomfort. The volume at which this occurs varies with the individual, dietary habits, emotional state, and a number of other factors. The peristaltic contraction of the smooth muscle that is responsible for mixing the food with gastric juice to produce chyme is initiated in the fundus. However, the areas of the stomach differ in the strength of the smooth muscle and thus the intensity of the peristaltic action. The contraction in the fundus is relatively weak, but becomes progressively stronger as it moves through the body and antrum. In the body of the stomach the contractions are not sufficiently powerful enough to provide a significant amount of mixing, allowing the continued digestion of carbohydrates in the bolus by salivary amylase. Thus in many regards the body of the stomach acts primarily as a storage site for incoming food. As the contractions continue, the gastric juice mixes with the food to form chyme. This chyme is propelled downward into the narrower regions of the antrum, where the force of the peristaltic actions increases significantly. At the terminal end of the antrum is the pyloric sphincter, which serves to isolate the stomach from the small intestine. The pyloric sphincter is never completely closed, allowing for an almost continuous passage of water and other fluids into the duodenum. As the peristaltic contraction of the antrum

116 Michael Windelspecht

approaches the phyloric sphincter, a small amount of chyme is moved through the opening and into the duodenum. However, the majority of the chyme is blocked from passing and is forced backed into the antrum for further mixing.

Regulating Stomach Motility
The emptying of the stomach contents, also called motility, usually takes between two to four hours following completion of a meal and is dependent on a large number of factors. These factors either inhibit or stimulate the movement of the chyme and are summarized in Table 3.3. For the most part, actions of the stomach increase motility into the duodenum, while feedback from the duodenum inhibits movement of chyme through the pyloric sphincter. There are three distinct phases to stomach motility: the cephalic phase, gastric phase, and intestinal phase. The prefix ceph- means “head,” and the cephalic phase refers to the interaction of the brain with the stomach. If chemical receptors detect the smell or taste of food, a signal is sent to the medulla oblongata in the brainstem, which relays a signal along the vagus nerves to the submucosal plexus in the stomach. The submucosal plexus then stimulates the activity of chief and parietal cells, thus preparing the stomach for incoming food. A similar event occurs when a person thinks about food, especially those foods that that the individual enjoys. The emotional state of the individual, such as anger or anxiety, may inhibit these stimuli by activating the sympathetic nervous system. The sympathetic nervous system is involved with the

TABLE 3.3 Factors Influencing the Movement of Chyme into the Duodenum
Stimulation Distention of the stomach Presence of partially digested proteins in stomach Gastrin Fluid chyme Presence of alcohol or caffeine in stomach Inhibition Distention of the duodenum Presence of fatty acids and carbohydrates in the duodenum Cholecystokinin (CCK) Gastric inhibitory peptide (GIP) Viscous chyme

The Digestive System 117

fight-or-flight response, one aspect of which is to reduce activity in the gastrointestinal system so that blood may be redirected to muscles. As its name implies, the gastric phase involves the activity of the stomach. Two factors influence its activity. First, the amount of distention, or stretching of the stomach lining, acts as an indicator of the fullness of the stomach. As the stomach fills, and the rugae relax, stretch receptors in the lining stimulate the release of gastrin by G cells in the mucosal lining of the antrum. Gastrin is released into the blood stream, where it returns to the stomach to stimulate the generation of gastric juice by the parietal and chief cells. The gastric juice has a normal pH of around 2.0; if this becomes more basic (or alkaline), then the secretion of gastrin is increased. (A reverse reaction occurs if the pH level of the stomach increases above 2.0.) The stretch receptors also stimulate the peristaltic contractions of the stomach. As noted in the section on mechanical digestion, these contractions are responsible for mixing the incoming food with gastric juice. As the contractions increase in strength, more of the chyme passes through the pyloric sphincter. The amount varies with the consistency, or fluidity, of the chyme. Under the ideal conditions, around 0.01–0.02 quarts (10–15 milliliters) of material may pass through the pyloric sphincter with each wave of contractions. The duodenum of the small intestine may also regulate the activity of the stomach during the intestinal phase. Since the small intestine represents the major organ of digestion and absorption in the body, the duodenum must be ready to receive the incoming chyme for processing. The duodenum primarily has an inhibitory effect on stomach motility (see Table 3.3). Distention of the duodenum, due to the presence of a large volume of chyme, initiates a neural response called the enterogastric reflex, which through the action of the medulla oblongata decreases the strength of peristaltic contractions in the stomach, thus reducing the amount of chyme entering the duodenum. The presence of partially digested carbohydrates and fats in the duodenum also activates an inhibitory pathway, but this pathway is based on the action of hormones. The action of salivary amylase, lingual lipase, and gastric lipase had previously started digestion of both carbohydrates and fats in the stomach. When these breakdown products reach the duodenum, they signal the release of gastric inhibitory peptide (GIP), secretin, and cholecystokinin

118 Michael Windelspecht

(CCK) by the mucosa layer of the duodenum. These hormones are released directly into the bloodstream and influence the activity of a number of organs of the digestive tract, including the stomach. The secretions of the stomach are inhibited by secretin and GIP, while CCK and GIP reduce gastric motility. When this occurs, fewer breakdown products are generated, less chyme enters the duodenum, and thus fewer hormones are produced. When the gastric and intestinal regulatory mechanisms are combined, it allows a fine-tuning of the gastrointestinal system to ensure that the optimal amount of material is being processed by the small intestine at all times.

Absorption of Nutrients
As mentioned previously, very few nutrients are absorbed through the lining of the stomach, primarily due to the presence of the mucus layer, which isolates the mucosa tissue from the hydrochloric acid. However, water and some ions are able to be absorbed directly into the circulatory system. In addition, both ethyl alcohol (the form found in alcoholic beverages) and acetylsalicylic acid (commonly known as aspirin) are able to penetrate the mucus layer and enter into the circulatory system.

The Lower Gastrointestinal Tract: Small Intestine and Large Intestine (Colon)
The previous section described how the upper gastrointestinal (GI) tract, consisting of the stomach, esophagus, and oral cavity, was involved with the processing of food for digestion. While there were some examples of enzymatic digestion in the upper gastrointestinal tract, the majority of the activity was associated with mechanical processing. The primary purpose of this mechanical digestion was to increase the surface area of the food so that the enzymes of the lower gastrointestinal tract can efficiently break down the nutrients into chemical forms that are able to be rapidly absorbed by the small intestine. The lower gastrointestinal tract consists of two digestive organs called the small intestine and large intestine. Assisting with the operation of the small intestine are three accessory organs, the liver, gall bladder, and pancreas (Figure 3.8). The lower gastrointestinal tract serves two primary functions. First, the small intestine functions as the main organ of digestion

The Digestive System 119

Figure 3.8 The Lower Gastrointestinal Tract. The lower gastrointestinal tract, giving the locations of the digestive organs and accessory glands. The large intestine is frequently called the colon. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

and absorption in the human body. It is here that the bulk of nutrient processing is performed. The large intestine, or colon as it is commonly called, is primarily involved in the reabsorption of water and salts back into the body, and the preparation of the fecal material for excretion. This section covers the physiology of the small and large intestine and their interaction with the accessory organs of the digestive system.

Small Intestine
The name of the small intestine is derived from its diameter, and not its overall size. The small intestine averages only approximately 1 inch (2.5 centimeters)

120 Michael Windelspecht

in diameter, but in an adult can be over 10 feet (3 meters) in length. Although it may be of a small diameter, the small intestine represents the major site of digestion and absorption in the human body and is thus one of the more important organs of the digestive system. The small intestine connects to the stomach at the pyloric sphincter and empties into the colon through the ileocecal valve, also called the ileocecal sphincter. For the purpose of study the small intestine is divided into three segments, although there is little difference in the physical appearance or structure of the regions. The first 7.8–9.8 inches (20–25 centimeters) of the small intestine, starting at the pyloric sphincter, is the duodenum. The next 2.7 yards (2.5 meters) of the small intestine is called the jejunum, and the last section, about 2 yards (2 meters) in length and ending at the ileocecal valve, is the ileum. This chapter previously examined the structure of the tissue layers in the gastrointestinal tract. As was the case with the stomach, the physical characteristics of these tissue layers vary in the lower gastrointestinal tract. The most significant of these differences occur in the mucosa and submucosa layers, the two innermost tissue layers. These layers interact directly with the interior cavity, or lumen, of the small intestine. The most notable difference in the structure of the mucosa layer is the presence of numerous fingerlike projections called villi. Unlike the folds in the mucosa layer of the stomach, which enable it to expand in response to an incoming volume of food, the villi of the small intestine are involved in increasing the surface area to facilitate the absorption of nutrients. There may be as many as 40 villi per square millimeter of mucosa, effectively increasing the surface area of the small intestine by a factor of 10. Within each villi are capillaries and portions of the lymphatic section called lacteals (Figure 3.9). As nutrients are absorbed into the villi (see the following section), they pass into either the capillaries or lacteals and are transported away from the small intestine. Along each of the villi are located four types of specialized cells. At the base of each villi, in pits ¨ called the intestinal glands (also known as the crypt of Lieberkuhn), are the Paneth cells. These cells release lysozyme, an enzyme that protects the small intestine from bacteria. They also may move larger nutrient particles out of the lumen by the process of phagocytosis. Also located within the intestinal glands are enteroendocrine cells. As their name implies, these cells are actually part of the endocrine system and are

The Digestive System 121

Figure 3.9 Villi of Small Intestine. Notice that each villi contains both capillaries and lymphatic vessels. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

responsible for releasing hormones such as gastric inhibitory peptide (GIP), secretin, and cholecystokin (CCK). Further up the villi are located the goblet cells, which are responsible for secreting the protective mucus coating of the small intestine. While this mucus coating is not as thick as that found in the stomach, it serves to lubricate and protect the mucosa of the small intestine. Located along the length of the villi, but primarily above the region of the intestinal glands, is a layer of epithelial cells. These cells, also called absorptive cells, are the major site of nutrient absorption in the small intestine. These cells are unique in that the plasma membrane on the lumen side of the cell contains a large number of small projections called microvilli. Each of these projections is about 1 micrometer (µm) long and a typical absorptive cell may have as many as 6,000 microvilli on its surface. A square millimeter of small intestine may contain up to 200 million microvilli. This increases the surface area of the small intestine by an additional factor of 20. When combined, the villi and microvilli of the small intestine increase the overall surface area in this organ by 600 times, further disproving the idea that this is a “small” intestine.

122 Michael Windelspecht

Under a microscope, the microvilli appear as a thin, fuzzy barrier on the lumen side of the absorptive cells. This is sometimes called the brush border, and it represents a region that is not only involved in nutrient absorption, but also in nutrient digestion by a group of enzymes called the brush border enzymes (see the following sections on the individual nutrient classes). In the submucosa, a group of specialized cells called the duodenal glands, also known as the Brunner’s glands, release additional mucus into the lumen. This mucus is alkaline in pH, which helps to neutralize any hydrochloric acid from the stomach remaining in the food as it moves through the small intestine.

Movement of Nutrients
It takes approximately three to five hours for nutrients to transit the small intestine from the pyloric sphincter to the ileocecal valve. In the stomach, the incoming food was mixed with gastric juice to form chyme. This chyme is moved along the length of the small intestine by two different types of contractions, peristalsis and segmentation. The peristaltic contractions in the small intestine are similar to those found in the stomach and esophagus. However, the contractions in the small intestine are much lower in intensity than those in the upper gastrointestinal organs. The primary mechanism by which the chyme is moved through the small intestine is by segmentation. Unlike peristalsis, which is the rhythmic, sequential contraction of the smooth muscle layers of the gastrointestinal tract, the process of segmentation involves the localized contraction of small segments of the small intestine. These circular contractions squeeze the chyme against the mucosa layer of intestine, bringing the nutrients into direct contact with the microvilli of the absorptive cells. These contractions also serve to further mix the chyme with the secretions of the small intestine, gall bladder, and pancreas (see the following section on the role of the accessory glands). As the chyme is mixed by segmentation, it is slowly propelled along the length of the small intestine toward the ileocecal valve. Since the contractions of segmentation are not directional, as is the case with peristaltic contractions, some of the material will actually back up into the previous segment of the intestine. To ensure that the chyme has an overall movement toward the large intestine, the duodenum contracts more

The Digestive System 123

frequently (around 12 per minute) than either the jejunum or ileum (approximately nine per minute). After the processing of a meal is complete, the small intestine enters into a “housekeeping” mode to remove the remnants of the chyme from the lumen. This consists of a series of weak peristaltic contractions that begin in the duodenum and contract for a short length of the intestine before ending weakly. The next contraction begins a little further down the intestine, and so on. The process is analogous to a sweeping action and is called the migrating motility complex. The entire process can take several hours to complete. Although the small and large intestine are linked by similarities in their names, in reality the internal environments and physiology of these organs are vastly different. As will be described later in this chapter, the large intestine possesses a natural population of bacteria. If allowed into the small intestine, these bacteria could wreak havoc with the delicate tissues present there. The ileocecal valve is well designed to prevent the movement of materials into the small intestine from the large intestine. The folds of the valve are arranged to open easily as the chyme moving through the ileum of the small intestine exerts pressure against the valve. However, if material in the large intestine presses against the valve, the pressure forces the folds tightly closed, preventing contamination of the small intestine. The valve is also under hormonal control. As food enters the stomach, special cells release a hormone called gastrin. Gastrin serves to relax the ileocecal valve, allowing for the emptying of the small intestine in response to an incoming meal.

Role of Accessory Glands
The digestive functions of the small intestine are assisted by the secretions of three accessory glands—the liver, gall bladder, and pancreas. This section will introduce the digestive roles of these glands. One of the most important organs in the human body is the liver. The largest organ by weight, the liver coordinates activity between a number of body systems. The liver not only provides chemicals to assist in the digestive process, but it also filters and stores nutrients coming from the digestive system. As an accessory organ to the small intestine, the liver provides a compound called bile, which assists in the process of lipid digestion. Bile is synthesized in the small intestine from a number of chemicals, including cholesterol,

124 Michael Windelspecht

phospholipids, bile acids, and water. Another ingredient is bilirubin, a waste product from the breakdown of worn-out red blood cells in the liver. Bilirubin does not play a role in digestion, but does give bile and the fecal material their color. Bile is continuously excreted into the bile duct, which connects the liver to the duodenum via the hepatopancreatic ampulla. The gall bladder is a small sac, roughly pear-shaped, that is located just beneath the liver. The sole purpose of the gall bladder is the storage of the bile salts from the liver between meals. Before entering the duodenum, the bile duct links up with the pancreatic duct to form the hepatopancreatic ampulla. At the duodenum end of this structure is a small valve called the Sphincter of Oddi. This sphincter is normally open when chyme is present in the duodenum, but closes between meals. Since bile production by the liver is a continuous event, the bile leaving the liver backs up and enters the gall bladder to be stored. As food enters the duodenum, CCK is released from the enteroendocrine cells in the mucosa of the small intestine. This hormone signals the gall bladder to contract, releasing its contents, as well as acting as a signal for the Sphincter of Oddi to relax. The third major accessory organ is the pancreas. It is located just below the stomach, adjacent to the small intestine. Like the liver, the pancreas performs a variety of functions in the human body. As an accessory organ for the digestive system, the pancreas is responsible for providing the majority of the digestive enzymes needed for nutrient processing in the small intestine. The cells of the pancreas produce a colorless liquid called pancreatic juice. This colorless, watery mixture is collected into the pancreatic duct, which later joins the bile duct to form the hepatopancreatic ampulla, which empties into the duodenum. The major enzymes present in the pancreatic juice are listed in Table 3.4. In addition to these enzymes, pancreatic juice contains a compound called sodium biocarbonate. This compound is slightly alkaline and serves to neutralize the acid in the chyme from the stomach. This establishes the correct pH for optimal enzyme activity in the small intestine (Sidebar 3.2).

Overview of Nutrient Processing
As mentioned previously, the small intestine is the primary organ of digestion and absorption in the human body. In general, the small intestine has

The Digestive System 125
TABLE 3.4 The Sources of the Digestive Compounds of the Small Intestine
Target nutrient Carbohydrates Lipids Proteins Compound Pancreatic amylase Bile Pancreatic lipase Chymotrypsin Trypsin Carboxypeptidase Elastase Nucleic acids Deoxyribonuclease Ribonuclease Source Pancreas Liver Pancreas Pancreas Pancreas Pancreas Pancreas Pancreas Pancreas

to process two very broad classes of nutrients. The hydrophilic (“waterloving”) molecules, which include the monosaccharides and many of the amino acids, are easily transported, digested, and absorbed by the small intestine. The second class is the hydrophobic (“water-fearing”) molecules, of which fats and cholesterol are the major examples. Due to their chemical properties, hydrophobic molecules will require more elaborate processing and transportation systems. For each of the four major classes of organic nutrients, the carbohydrates, lipids, proteins, and nucleic acids, the job of the small intestine is to first break down the large complex structures of these nutrients into units that are small enough to be transported into the villi. The following sections will detail the digestion and absorption of each of the major classes of nutrients. It is important to remember that, for the most part, the processing of nutrients occurs simultaneously throughout the length of the small intestine. Carbohydrate Digestion and Absorption Carbohydrate digestion began in the oral cavity with the activity of the salivary amylase enzyme. While this enzyme only acts on the incoming food for a brief period of time before becoming inactivated by the hydrochloric acid of the stomach, it does initiate the breakdown of starches and other polysaccharides into disaccharides and monosaccharides. The majority of

126 Michael Windelspecht

SIDEBAR 3.2

Alcohol’s Negative Impact on the Liver
The disease of alcohol has many negative health impacts, but it is especially harsh on the liver. One of the digestive system’s secondary organs, the liver breaks down alcohol so it can be eliminated from the body. When the body consumes excessive amounts of alcohol, the liver has a hard time processing it fast enough. This leads to an imbalance—too much alcohol in the liver—which interferes with how the organ breaks down protein, fat, and carbohydrates. This can lead to alcohol-induced liver disease. There are three primary types of alcohol-induced liver disease:

Fatty Liver Disease: This condition occurs when there is an accumulation of fat cells in the liver. The liver may be enlarged, and discomfort may be felt by patients in the upper abdomen. Alcoholic Hepatitis: This occurs in up to 35 percent of heavy drinkers, and is characterized by inflammation of the liver. Patients may experience nausea, vomiting, fever, and jaundice. While this disease can cause progressive liver damage over a period of years, it can be reversed if drinking is stopped. Severe forms of alcoholic hepatitis can lead to life-threatening complications. Alcoholic Cirrhosis: This is the most serious type of alcohol-induced liver disease, and occurs when normal liver tissue is replaced with scar tissue. It is the most serious type of alcohol-induced liver disease. An estimated 10–20 percent of heavy drinkers develop this condition, typically after drinking for more than 10 years. Symptoms are similar to alcoholic hepatitis. Cirrhosis is a life-threatening disease, and cannot be reversed, although damage can be minimized upon abstaining from alcohol.
Complications of these and other alcohol-induced liver diseases include a buildup of abdominal fluid, an enlarged spleen, bleeding from esophageal veins, high blood pressure in the liver, kidney failure, and liver cancer.

The Digestive System 127

the polysaccharide digestion is conducted in the small intestine by a secretion of the pancreas called pancreatic amylase. Pancreatic amylase is active in the lumen of the small intestine. Like salivary amylase, this enzyme can break down starch and glycogen, but not plant polysaccharides such as cellulose, commonly called fiber. These remain undigested and unprocessed until they reach the large intestine and provide much of the bulk of the food. To be absorbed into the villi, carbohydrates must be in their simplest form, as monosaccharides. In most cases, the action of the salivary and pancreatic amylases generates a compound called dextrin, a short chain of glucose molecules. The final breakdown of the carbohydrates into monosaccharides is performed by a group of enzymes physically embedded in the brush border of the small intestine. These enzymes are named by the specific carbohydrate substrate that they recognize. For example, the dextrinase enzyme breaks down the short-chains of glucose (dextrins) into single glucose units. The maltase enzyme digests the disaccharide sugar maltose into two glucose units. Sucrose, another of the disaccharides that consists of glucose and fructose, is digested by the sucrase enzyme, and lactose, a sugar commonly found in milk, is broken into the monosaccharides galactose and glucose by the action of the lactase enzyme. Once the carbohydrates in the chyme have been digested into one of the three monosaccharides (fructose, glucose, or galactose), they are ready for absorption into the villi of the small intestine (Figure 3.10). The molecules themselves are too large to pass directly through the membranes of the intestinal cells. Fructose is absorbed by a process called facilitated diffusion, in which a protein channel in the membrane of the epithelial cells aids in the movement of the fructose into the villi. The movement of glucose and galactose is slightly different. To move these molecules into the epithelial cell, the cell couples their movement with the transport of sodium ions (Na+) into the cell. This is a form of active transport, and as such requires energy. Once these monosaccharides are in the cytoplasm of the epithelial cell, they are rapidly moved into the capillaries of the villi by the process of facilitated diffusion. There they enter the circulatory system and proceed to the liver for additional processing. The rapid movement of these molecules out of the epithelial cells ensures that the interior of the cell has a low concentration of the monosaccharides, thus aiding in the absorption of sugars from the lumen.

128 Michael Windelspecht

Figure 3.10 Small Intestine Nutrient Absorption. Nutrient absorption in the small intestine. Note how monosaccharides and most amino acids proceed directly to the liver, while the triglycerides enter in the lymphatic system. Triglycerides are first disassembled in the lumen and then reassembled into chylomicrons for transport in the lymphatic system. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

Proteins The digestion of proteins was initiated in the stomach with the activity of the enzyme pepsin. Recall that pepsin is a general enzyme, which serves to disrupt the complex three-dimensional structure of the proteins in the chyme. Thus, when the proteins reach the small intestine, they are primarily in the form of small chains called peptides. In general, protease enzymes are powerful catalysts and thus are secreted in an inactive form until needed by the body. This prevents the unwanted digestion of the mucosal lining. For example, in the stomach, the pepsin enzyme was generated from a molecule called pepsinogen under the correct pH conditions. A similar event occurs in the small intestine. The pancreas releases a protoenzyme called trypsinogen into the lumen of the duodenum via the pancreatic duct. Trypsinogen is

The Digestive System 129

inactive and cannot begin the breakdown of proteins until it is first activated by enterokinase, an enzyme that is present in the brush border region of the villi. The enterokinase cleaves off a small portion of the trypsinogen molecule, forming the enzyme trypsin. In turn, trypsin activates three reactions with chymotrypsinogen, proelastase, and procarboxypeptidase to produce chymotrypsin, elastase, and caboxypeptidase, respectively. These molecules are all proteases that are active in the lumen of the small intestine. While each targets a different structural part of the protein, their overall function is to digest the proteins into smaller peptides, at times releasing individual amino acids. Present in the brush border region are two other enzymes. The first are the aminopeptidases, which are responsible for removing the terminal amino acid from the end of the peptide chain. The second is an enzyme called dipeptidase, which breaks the remaining peptide bond holding two amino acids together. The end result of this activity is free amino acids, which may now be absorbed into the villi. The absorption of the individual amino acids is very similar to the process outlined previously for carbohydrates. In most cases, the movement of amino acids across the membrane is an active process that is coupled to the movement of sodium ions (Na+), although in some cases the process is coupled to the transport of hydrogen ions (H+). Once in the epithelial cells, the amino acids diffuse into the capillaries of the villi, to be transported by the hepatic portal system to the liver for processing. There are two additional aspects of protein digestion to be mentioned. While we previously noted that the three regions of the small intestine are fundamentally the same, there are some minor differences with regards to protein digestion and absorption. The majority of protein digestion occurs in the duodenum and jejunum, with only minimal activity in the ileum. Also, any protein that enters the small intestine is subject to the digestive process outlined above. This includes not only proteins from food sources, but also the proteins found in worn-out mucosal cells, enzymes such as pepsin and salivary amylase, bacterial proteins, and miscellaneous proteins such as bilirubin that are excreted from the liver and pancreas. Lipids The processing of lipids by the small intestine differs significantly than that described previously for carbohydrates and proteins. This is primarily due to

130 Michael Windelspecht

the fact that lipids are hydrophobic molecules, and as such are not easy to work within the hydrophilic environment of the lumen of the small intestine. Prior to the entry of lipids into the small intestine, there was a small amount of processing performed by the lingual lipase in the oral cavity. This enzyme primarily serves to initiate triglyceride digestion, but is active only for a relatively short period of time before entering the stomach. In the stomach, gastric lipase may act on short-chain fatty acids, such as those found in milk products. However, this enzyme does not make a significant contribution to lipid processing. Thus, the real first level of lipid digestion and absorption occurs in the small intestine. As the chyme passes the pyloric sphincter, it is mixed with secretions of the liver, gall bladder, and pancreas. Recall from the previous section that the liver produces bile salts, which may be temporarily stored and concentrated within the gall bladder. Bile emulsifies, or breaks down, droplets of fats in the chyme into smaller particles. This is not enzymatic digestion, since the individual lipid molecules are not the target, but rather the interaction between the fat molecules. The result is small droplets of lipids with a diameter of about 0.039 inches (1 millimeter). This drastically increases the surface area for digestion, speeding the overall processing of the lipids. The enzyme responsible for the digestion of lipids is pancreatic lipase. Pancreatic lipase enters the small intestine through the duct called the hepatopancreatic ampulla, along with bile from the gall bladder and liver. This lipase breaks down triglycerides into small fatty acid chains and monoglycerides, which consist of a single fatty acid chain connected to the glycerol backbone. In these forms, the molecules can then be absorbed directly into the epithelial cells of the villi by the process of diffusion. However, most of the triglycerides that enter into the small intestine contain long-chain fatty acids, which due to their size cannot diffuse into the villi. For the long-chain fatty acids, and similar hydrophobic molecules such as cholesterol, a different process exists to move the nutrients out of the lumen and into the body. When combined with the bile salts released from the liver, the lipids and cholesterol form spheres called micelles. Each micelle consists of an outer shell of approximately 30 to 50 bile salt molecules. Micelles are amphipathic molecules, meaning that they have both polar and nonpolar regions, enabling them to interact with both hydrophobic and hydrophilic molecules. The hydrophobic lipids are carried within the

The Digestive System 131

center of the micelle. When the micelle reaches the cell membrane of the epithelial cells in the villi, the lipids and other hydrophobic molecules in the core of the micelle are able to diffuse across the membrane. The sphere of bile salts is then able to return to the lumen to pick up more hydrophobic lipids. In other words, the micelle acts as a shuttle by providing a hospitable environment for the movement of large hydrophobic molecules. Since bile salts represent a reusable resource for the digestive system, they are recycled in the small intestine. The bile salts that were initially released in the duodenum are reabsorbed in the ileum of the small intestine. There they enter into the portal circulatory system and are returned to the liver. This circular recycling of bile salts is sometimes called the enterohepatic circulation. One more important aspect of lipid processing occurs in the small intestine. With hydrophobic nutrients, such as sugars, the nutrients that are absorbed by the small intestine quickly diffuse into the capillaries of the villi, where they then enter the circulatory system. However, lipids by nature do not interact well with an aqueous environment, and their large size would quickly clog the narrow capillaries contained within the villi. Instead, lipids are packaged into a special form of lipoprotein called a chylomicron. Chylomicrons are protein-covered balls of lipids, cholesterol, and phospholipids. The role of the chylomicron is to move the lipids into the lacteal of the villi, where it then enters into the lymphatic system. Nucleic Acids Recall that nucleic acids represent the genetic material of living organisms, and thus are present in most of the material being processed by the small intestine. Since DNA and RNA (ribonucleic acid) both consist of long chains of nucleotides, they are digested in a similar manner by the small intestine. The fact that the DNA is double-stranded, and typically a longer polymer, has little influence on the properties of nucleic acid digestion. Along with its previously mentioned enzymes, the pancreas secretes pancreatic ribonuclease and deoxyribonuclease, which act on RNA and DNA, respectively. The purpose of these enzymes is to cleave individual nucleotides from the polymer. In many ways these enzymes function similarly to the pancreatic proteases mentioned earlier. Once a nucleotide is removed from the polymer, it is further digested by brush border enzymes called nucleosidases and phosphatases. These enzymes break the nucleotide

132 Michael Windelspecht

down into its constituent sugars, phosphates, and nitrogenous bases for absorption into the villi by active transport. Once there, they move into the capillaries by diffusion and enter the portal circulatory system. Water While water is an integral part of the digestive tract, and one of the more important nutrients in the human body, it is not “digested” in the same manner as the organic nutrients just mentioned. Instead, it is absorbed by the villi of the small intestine into the circulatory system, and to a lesser extent the lymphatic system. Most physiologists believe that water moves from the lumen of the intestine into the epithelial cells by the process of osmosis, or the diffusion of water. This passive process is dependent on the concentration of solutes and has long been recognized as the prime mechanism of water movement by biological systems. However, researchers have begun to discover that many organisms possess specialized channel proteins, called aquaporins, that allow for the rapid movement of water across a plasma membrane. The small intestine processes a tremendous volume of water daily. Almost 10 quarts (close to 9.3 liters) of water enter the small intestine daily, most of it (7.4 quarts, or approximately 7.0 liters) comes from the secretions of the accessory glands (4.2 quarts, or about 4 liters), stomach (2.1 quarts; 2 liters), and small intestine (1.06 quarts; 1 liter). The remainder (2.4 quarts; an average of 2.3 liters) is obtained from the ingested food and liquids. The small intestine reabsorbs almost 90 percent of this volume, with the remainder passing into the large intestine. Vitamins Vitamins are frequently assigned to two general classes, those that are water soluble (vitamin C and the B-complex vitamins) and those that are fat-soluble (vitamins A, D, E, and K). These general classes also apply to the approach that the small intestine takes in absorbing these important compounds. The water-soluble vitamins are treated in much the same manner as monosaccharides and amino acids, meaning that they are actively transported into the epithelial cells and then move by diffusion into the capillary of the villi. Fat-soluble vitamins may either move into the epithelial cells by diffusion, or through the action of the micelles. They are typically then loaded

The Digestive System 133

into chylomicrons for transport into the lymphatic system. Some vitamins have special processing in the small intestine. Vitamin B12, sometimes also called cobalamin, is typically found in protein-rich foods. The pH of the stomach releases the vitamin, which then binds with an intrinsic factor before entering the small intestine. In the small intestine, vitamin B12 is absorbed into the epithelial cells, where it then returns to the liver via the enterohepatic circulation. The liver continuously secretes both vitamin B12 and folate into the bile. Since folate is associated with the health of rapidly dividing cells, and vitamin B12 is needed to activate folate, this mechanism ensures that the rapidly dividing epithelial cells of the small intestine are provided with a source of these important vitamins. Minerals Minerals, like water, are not organic nutrients and thus are not digested by the small intestine. However, the small intestine does represent an important location of absorption for many of the minerals in a human diet. Unlike the other nutrient classes, mineral absorption in the small intestine is not guaranteed. Many foods contain chemicals that actively bind nutrients, reducing their ability to be absorbed. Thus, for minerals, it is often more correct to refer to their bioavailability, and not necessarily the total quantity in the food. Examples of these binders are oxalic acid, found in leafy vegetables such as spinach, and phylic acid, a compound frequently found in grains and beans (legumes). There are many different minerals, each with its own unique absorption properties. For nutritional purposes, minerals are classified as being either trace or major, depending on the quantity that is required in the diet. However, since minerals are not digested enzymatically, as was the case with the organic nutrients, the activity of the small intestine is confined to absorption only. Most of the minerals behave as hydrophilic molecules (such as potassium and sodium), but a few display hydrophobic characteristics. In most cases, minerals are absorbed by active transport into the villi. Two minerals of special interest in examining the physiology of the small intestine are calcium and iron. Calcium is an important nutrient for muscle contraction, and has the secondary function of providing strength to bone (see Chapters 7 and 11 of this encyclopedia for more information). Calcium is usually brought into the digestive system in the form of a salt,

134 Michael Windelspecht

and is kept in a soluble form by the acidic nature of the stomach. The efficiency of the small intestine in absorbing calcium is based upon a number of factors. In general, an adult human is able to absorb about 30 percent of the calcium found in food, although this value may vary depending on age, sex, gastrointestinal tract health, and emotional state. For example, young children frequently absorb up to 60 percent of ingested calcium, and the value in pregnant women can reach 50 percent. (Other factors that influence calcium absorption are listed in Table 3.5.) However, the greatest factor that influences the absorption of calcium is the presence of vitamin D. Vitamin D, a fat-soluble vitamin, actually functions as a hormone, in that it is manufactured by one organ of the body to influence the activity of a second organ. Vitamin D may also be found in some foods, such as milk products, where it is frequently added to enhance calcium absorption. Once activated, vitamin D stimulates the small intestine to produce a calcium-binding protein, which in turn facilitates the movement of calcium into the villi. The absorption of iron is slightly more complex. As was the case with calcium, all of the iron that is ingested is not absorbed. In fact, as little as 10 percent of the available iron is absorbed in an adult male, and only 15 percent in an adult female (Table 3.6). Iron may exist in one of two ion forms: ferrous iron (Fe2+) or ferric iron (Fe3+). Of these, ferrous iron is more easily absorbed. The source of the iron also plays a role in iron absorption. Iron that is present in animal flesh, called heme iron, is more easily absorbed that iron that originates in plant material (non-heme iron). As was the case with calcium, several environmental factors contribute to the absorption of iron from the chyme. Recently it has been discovered that vitamin C, a watersoluble antioxidant vitamin, has the ability to keep iron in its ferrous form,

TABLE 3.5 Factors Influencing Calcium Absorption in the Small Intestine
Inhibitory factors Presence of oxalates and phylates High fiber diets High phosphorus intake Enhancing factors Presence of growth hormones Presence of lactose in the chyme Equal concentrations of phosphorus vitamin D

The Digestive System 135
TABLE 3.6 Factors Influencing Iron Absorption in the Small Intestine
Inhibitory factors Presence of phylates High fiber diets Presence of phosphorus and calcium Food additives such as EDTA (ethylenediamene tetra acetate) Enhancing factors Citric acid and lactic acid Some sugars Vitamin C MFP factor

thus increasing its bioavailability. In addition, many meat products contain a substance called MFP factor that increases iron absorption. However, the iron processing by the small intestine can also be inhibited by the presence of a number of compounds. One additional interesting feature of iron physiology is the ability of the small intestine to act as a temporary storage site. Unlike most nutrients, which quickly move through the absorptive cells of the villi into the circulatory or lymphatic systems, the mucosal layer may actually store iron using a special protein called mucosal ferratin. This protein binds iron and releases it to mucosal transferrin when needed by the body. Transferrins are iron-transport proteins. Mucosal transferrin then transfers the iron to blood transferrin (sometimes just called transferrin) for movement into the body.

Large Intestine
The name large intestine is derived from its diameter (2.5 inches; 6.5 centimeters), not its length (1.37 yards; 1.5 meters). The large intestine begins at the ileocecal valve, which serves as the boundary between the small and large intestines. The terminal portion of the large intestine, and the entire gastrointestinal tract, is the anus. The large intestine is vastly shorter than the small intestine and differs significantly both in anatomy and function. The large intestine is often mistakenly considered the location in the body where waste material is generated. In reality, this organ is more of a recycling center and temporary storage location than a waste disposal site. The large intestine is comprised of three distinct regions: the cecum, the colon, and the rectum (see Figure 3.11). The colon is subdivided into four zones,

136 Michael Windelspecht

Figure 3.11 The Large Intestine. Commonly called the colon, the large intestine consists of three major sections, named for their orientation in the abdominal cavity. The large intestine terminates in the rectum. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

called the ascending colon, transverse colon, descending colon, and sigmoid colon, based on their orientation and position in the body cavity. The physiology of these zones is fundamentally the same, and the names are used for descriptive purposes only. Because the majority of the large intestine is comprised of the colon, the term colon is frequently used as a common name for the large intestine. While the appendix has historically been considered a part of the large intestine, and often thought of as a vestigial organ, it is actually made from the same type of tissue as the lymph nodes and thus is now considered to be part of the lymphatic and immune systems. Lymphocytes housed in this area help protect the digestive system from pathogenic microorganisms, and thus the appendix serves as an important first line of defense for the lower GI tract. However, ailments of the appendix are frequently caused by problems with the digestive system.

The Digestive System 137

Movement of Material
The large intestine receives approximately 15 fluid ounces (500 milliliters) of material daily from the small intestine. Under normal conditions, the majority of this material is the undigested remnants from the small intestine (see the following section on digestion and absorption). The colon regions of the large intestine are structured differently from the small intestine. Whereas the small intestine utilized circular and longitudinal patterns of smooth muscle to power the contractions necessary to move the food, the colon instead possesses three bands of smooth muscle. Rather than surrounding the GI tract, these muscles are arranged to run the length of the intestine, called the taeniae coli. The arrangement of the taeniae coli causes the exterior surface of the large intestine to resemble a series of small pouches, called haustra. The haustra are not permanent structures, but actually change position slightly based upon the contractions of the taeniae coli. The movement of the material through the large intestine is a much slower process than in the small intestine. This gives ample time for the sections of the colon to reabsorb important nutrients such as water. In the small intestine, the contractions of the smooth muscle (segmentation) occurred at a rate upwards of 12 times a minute. In the large intestine, the contractions may occur several times an hour. These contractions are called haustral contractions, and the entire process is called haustration. Also, unlike the small intestine, in which the contractions were controlled to move the chyme through the length of the intestine, in the colon, the haustral contractions are more regional. This causes the material to move back and forth between haustra, further increasing the time that the material is in the system. Several conditions may cause a synchronization of these haustral contractions, resulting in a uniform movement of material toward the rectum and anus. The first of these is called a mass movement. Mass movements occur several times daily, usually following meals, and are characterized as synchronous contractions of the first two sections of the colon (ascending and traverse). This contraction propels the food into the descending colon, moving the material there into the sigmoid colon and rectum. Although a mass movement can occur without food entering the stomach, the body does possess a mechanism to clear the intestines to prepare for incoming

138 Michael Windelspecht

food. As food enters the stomach, it triggers the gastrocolonic reflex. This reflex action causes contractions along the entire length of the intestines, moving food from the small intestine into the colon, and driving the undigested material in the colon into the rectum. The gastrocolonic reflex is often accompanied by an urge to defecate. The final movement of material out of the gastrointestinal tract is called defecation and the factors that cause it to occur are called the defecation reflex. Defecation is actually a complex process since it involves both voluntary and involuntary actions of the anus. The anus, the terminal sphincter of the gastrointestinal tract, consists of both smooth and skeletal muscle. The internal anal sphincter is comprised of smooth muscle and thus is under involuntary control. During the defecation reflex, the smooth muscle of this sphincter relaxes. At the same time, the rectum and sigmoid colon contract, moving the contents toward the external anal sphincter. This sphincter is made of skeletal muscle, and thus is under voluntary control. If the external anal sphincter is relaxed, defecation occurs. If not, then the urge can be controlled, although this may result in excess water being absorbed from the feces, causing constipation. Although the external anal sphincter may be closed, it is still possible to force intestinal gas (flatus) out through a narrow opening in the anus, thus partially relieving pressure in the rectum.

Digestion and Absorption
Of the quarts of material that enter the digestive tract each day, only about 0.53 quarts (0.5 liters) actually ends up in the large intestine. The small intestine is highly effective as an organ of digestion and absorption; thus, the material reaching the large intestine usually contains only undigested material, such as cellulose, some water, salts, and bilirubin from the liver. Since the amount of usable nutrients is severely limited by the time the food material reaches the large intestine, there is no enzymatic digestion conducted by the cells of the large intestine. While no digestive enzymes are secreted by the large intestine, the mucosal cells along the length of the organ secrete an alkaline mucus, which serves to lubricate the internal lining of the large intestine and protect it from any acids produced by fermenting bacteria in this region. There is some minor breakdown of

The Digestive System 139

the bilirubin from the liver, and this accounts for the characteristic color of the fecal material. The large intestine also lacks the complex internal structure found in the small intestine. Instead of a network of villi and microvilli, the interior surface of the large intestine is for the most part smooth. This reduced surface area limits the ability of the large intestine to be a major organ of absorption. However, the decreased surface area is slightly compensated for by slowing the movement of material through the organ. The relative lack of segmentation and peristaltic contractions in the large intestine means that the material is present in the intestine for a longer period of time, allowing for more (although slower) absorption of selected nutrients. The action of the haustral contractions also serves to move the material back and forth within the colon, further slowing the movement of material. Dietary factors, namely the amount and types of fiber, also influence the rate of movement. In addition, health factors such as age, stress, and disease all contribute to the speed at which the material transits the large intestine. Of the 15 fluid ounces (500 milliliters) of the material that enters the large intestine, about 10.5 fluid ounces (350 milliliters) is reabsorbed, with the remaining volume exiting through the anus as feces. The colon primarily absorbs water and salts, although it may also take in other nutrients, such as glucose and vitamins, that may be present (see the following section). Salts in the colon normally consist of both sodium and chloride ions, both of which are essential nutrients, and are reabsorbed. In addition, water is reabsorbed by osmosis, but a significant amount remains in the feces to lubricate it. The final daily fecal volume of 4.5 fluid ounces (150 milliliters) usually is two-thirds water and one-third solid material. Most of the solid material is actually bacterial mass, with bilirubin from the liver and cellulose accounting for the remainder. The slower movement of material also gives microorganisms, such as bacteria, the opportunity to establish populations. However, unlike the remainder of the gastrointestinal tract, where the presence of bacteria causes problems, the colon actually contains a natural flora of bacteria that make a positive contribution to human physiology. The bacteria of the large intestine are in a symbiotic relationship with their human host.

140 Michael Windelspecht

The Accessory Organs
The previous two sections have examined the movement of food through the gastrointestinal system. As noted previously, there are two types of organs in the digestive system. Digestive organs, such as the stomach and small intestine, form the conduit through which food is moved and processed in the body. Associated with the operation of these organs are the accessory organs. In general, the accessory glands contribute important lubricants, enzymes, and chemicals that are required for the operation of the digestive organs. There are four accessory organs: the salivary glands, liver, gall bladder, and pancreas (see Table 3.7).

Salivary Glands
The salivary glands consist of three major pairs of glands that are located within the oral cavity. As previously mentioned, these are called the parotid, sublingual, and mandibular glands. There are also minor salivary glands, called the buccal glands, located in the linings of the cheek. Located under the tongue, along the base of the mouth, are the sublingual glands. Excretions from these glands are moved into the oral cavity by a short duct called the lesser sublingual duct. Located just below the sublingual glands, along the jawbone (mandibula), is the submandibular gland, which is connected to the oral cavity by the submandibular duct. Just in front of each
TABLE 3.7 Summary of Accessory Gland Contributions to Digestion
Organ Salivary glands Role in digestion Provides salivary amylase for CHO digestion Provides mucus to lubricate oral cavity and esophagus Liver Manufactures bile for lipid digestion Central role in carbohydrate, fat, and protein metabolism Gall bladder Pancreas Stores bile Manufactures sodium bicarbonate Manufactures pancreatic digestive enzymes

The Digestive System 141

ear are the parotid glands. These are connected to the oral cavity via the parotid duct, which enters close to the molars in the rear of the mouth. The salivary glands play several important roles in the overall physiology of the oral cavity. First, they actively moisten the oral cavity, which greatly aids not only in the swallowing of food, but also in the process of speech. The mucus content of saliva serves to protect the tissues of the tongue and cheeks from the action of the teeth. In addition, saliva contains an antimicrobial compound called lysozyme, which serves to reduce, but not completely eliminate, bacterial growth in the mouth. Saliva is slightly alkaline in pH, and thus helps to buffer the oral cavity to the correct pH. The salivary glands also release an enzyme called salivary amylase, which initiates carbohydrate digestion. Each of the salivary glands varies slightly in the content of the saliva, although the saliva from each contains ions, mucus, water, and salivary amylase. Combined, the salivary glands secrete an average of 1.06 quarts (1,000 milliliters) of saliva daily. The level of saliva production is dependent on a number of factors. In response to dehydration, the body limits saliva production, producing the thirst response. However, it is important to note that the feeling of a dry mouth lags the actual need for water, meaning that a dry mouth signals an advanced stage of dehydration. Most people are aware of increased saliva production in response to the sight or smell of food. This is due to the action of the nervous system, which has the ability to stimulate saliva production based on chemical signals from taste buds or olfactory (smell) glands, or by the touch of food on the tongue. It is also possible to invoke salivation by the memory of food, especially when hungry. The body may also increase or decrease saliva production during illness. In the case of fever or other illnesses, the body may reduce saliva production to conserve water (Sidebar 3.3). During times of nausea, saliva production may be increased.

Gall Bladder
The gall bladder is a small sac-like organ, 3.1–3.9 inches (8–10 centimeters) in length, located just under the liver (Figure 3.12). It is connected to the duodenum of the small intestine by the common bile duct. The gall bladder represents the simplest of the accessory glands in the fact that it primarily

142 Michael Windelspecht

SIDEBAR 3.3

Not to Be Underestimated: The Importance of Clean Water
Access to clean, safe water can not be undervalued when it comes to the maintaining the health of the digestive system on a global level. Proper sanitation and hygiene is vital to the health of societies everywhere in the world. According to the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC), eating contaminated food and drinking contaminated water can lead to developing certain infectious diseases related to certain germs, such as Cryptosporidium, Giardia, Shigella, and norovirus. Below are some important facts from the CDC about the importance of global access to safe water, adequate sanitation, and proper hygiene: • Clean water as well as proper sanitation and hygiene have the potential to prevent at least 9.1 percent of the world’s disease burden and 6.3 percent of all global deaths. Improved sanitation could save the lives of 1.5 million children every year who otherwise succumb to diarrhea-related diseases, according to the World Health Organization (WHO) and UNICEF. Over 800 million people around the world do not have access to an improved water source. An estimated 2.5 billion people—more than 30 percent of the world’s population—do not have access to adequate sanitation. By improving water sources, deaths from diarrhea can be reduced by 21 percent worldwide. Improved sanitation can reduce deaths related to diarrhea by 37.5 percent; and simple hand washing at certain critical times can reduce the incidence of diarrhea by 35 percent. Improvement of drinking-water quality, including disinfection efforts, would lead to a 45 percent reduction of diarrhea cases. Millions of people around the world are infected with neglected tropical diseases (NTDs). NTDs are related hygiene-related, and are often found in locations with unsafe drinking water and poor



• • •



The Digestive System 143

sanitation. Examples of these diseases include Guinea Worm Disease (GWD), buruli ulcer, trachoma, and schistosomiasis. GWD, for example, is a rare but extremely painful parasitic infection spread through contaminated drinking water. Symptoms of GWD include thread-like worms slowly emerging from the human body through blisters. • According to the United Nations and UNICEF, one in five girls worldwide who are of primary-school age are not in school, compared to one in six boys. One reason cited for this is lack of sanitation facilities for girls reaching puberty, or who are already going through menstruation. In addition, girls are also often responsible for collecting water for their family, making it difficult for them to attend school during school hours. For these reasons, installation of toilets and latrines may enable more schoolchildren, especially menstruating girls, to remain committed to getting an education.

Figure 3.12 The Accessory Glands of the Lower GI Tract. The relationship of the accessory glands of the lower gastrointestinal tract to the stomach, small intestine, and large intestine (colon). (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

144 Michael Windelspecht

serves as a storage location for secretions of the liver (see the next section). Unlike the pancreas, liver, and salivary glands, the gall bladder does not produce any chemicals necessary for digestion. Its sole purpose is the storage of bile between meals. Bile is produced by the liver and aids the small intestine in the digestion of hydrophobic molecules such as triglycerides. The common bile duct is actually a conduit from the liver to the duode num. At the junction of the small intestine is the sphincter of Oddi. When chyme is present in the duodenum, the sphincter of Oddi is open and the bile produced by the liver proceeds directly into the lumen of the small intestine. However, when chyme is absent, the sphincter is closed and the bile being continuously produced by the liver backs up in the bile duct and enters the gall bladder via a small duct called the cystic duct. Once stored in the gall bladder, the bile is concentrated and readied for the next meal. When the next meal enters the duodenum, the hormone CCK stimulates the gall bladder to contract, releasing the concentrated bile into the bile duct and into the duodenum.

Liver
The liver represents one of the most important and unique organs of the human body. From a genetic perspective, the cells of the liver are interesting in that some are polyploid and binucleate. Normally, cells of the body have a single nucleus and are diploid, meaning that they contain two copies of each chromosome. However, about 50 percent of the hepatocytes in the liver are polyploid cells, meaning that they contain additional copies of each chromosome, while others contain an extra nucleus. There are examples of hepatocytes that have eight or more copies of each chromosome. This arrangement most likely explains the large numbers of organelles found in these cells. Hepatocytes have some of the most abundant endoplasmic reticulum and Golgi bodies of any human cells, which enable them to manufacture large quantities of many biologically important molecules for export. The chromosomal and nuclear state of these cells may also explain regenerative properties of the liver. With the exception of the skin, the liver is the largest organ in the human body. In an adult, the liver may weigh up to approximately 3 pounds (1.4 kilograms). The liver consists of two primary lobes, called the right and

The Digestive System 145

left lobes. The right lobe, the larger of the two, is sometimes subdivided for study into two additional lobes, called the quadrate and caudate lobes. The lobes are separated by a ligament called the falciform ligament. The falciform ligament not only defines the two major lobes, but together with other minor ligaments, it helps suspend the liver from the diaphragm. Despite the large size and fairly complex shape of the liver, its tissue is relatively homogenous, which plays an important role in liver physiology. The liver is also a special organ in that it has the ability to regenerate itself in case of injury or disease. This is primarily due to the redundant structure of liver tissue. Each lobe of the liver consists of self-sufficient subunits called lobules (Figure 3.13). Within each lobule are liver cells called hepatocytes and phagocytic cells called Kupffer’s cells. The purpose of the Kupffer’s cells is to engulf worn-out blood cells and invading pathogens, such as bacteria and viruses, arriving from the digestive tract. Thus, these cells technically belong to the immune, and not the digestive, system.

Figure 3.13 Lobule of the Liver. The liver is a redundant structure, meaning that each lobe of the liver contains numerous identical lobules. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

146 Michael Windelspecht

The hepatocytes are the cells where the work of the liver is conducted. On one side of each hepatocyte is a sinusoid. Blood from the digestive system, arriving via the portal circulatory system, enters into the sinusoid cavities. Sinusoids are not the same thing as capillaries, but rather represent open spaces from which the hepatocytes can extract nutrients from the digestive system. The phagocytic Kupffer’s cells are located along the lining of the sinusoids to protect the liver from pathogens arriving from the digestive tract. On the other side of the hepatocyte are small vessels called the bile canaliculi (bile canals). The hepatocytes continuously produce bile from cholesterol, lecithin (a phospholipid), and bile salts and secrete it into the bile canaliculi. Within each lobe, these vessels merge into larger structures called the left and right hepatic ducts, which in turn combine to form the common hepatic duct. The common hepatic duct carries bile to the gall bladder, where it then becomes the common bile duct. The common bile duct connects with the duodenum of the small intestine through the sphincter of Oddi. Due to the liver’s central role in digestive system physiology, there is a minor deviation in normal blood flow with regard to digestion. Typically, blood leaves the heart via arteries and proceeds to an organ of the body where it enters a capillary bed. The blood then returns to the heart by way of veins. However, in the processing of nutrients, there is a minor deviation in this path. Blood leaving the stomach, small intestine, and colon proceeds directly to the liver via the hepatic vein (Figure 3.14). This minor detour, sometimes called the portal, or hepatic, circulatory system, ensures that nutrient-rich blood from the digestive tract is first processed and screened by the liver, thus establishing the status of the liver as the master control organ for human digestion. Since the blood from the digestive system is low in oxygen, the oxygen needed for the metabolic functions of the liver cells is delivered by the hepatic artery. The liver plays many important roles in human physiology. Since all of the blood leaving the digestive tract first passes through the sinusoids of the liver, the hepatocytes have the ability to screen and filter nutrients and other materials from the blood before it is delivered to the remainder of the body tissues. In addition to screening, the liver secretes several important compounds. As previously noted, the hepatocytes manufacture bile salts from

The Digestive System 147

Figure 3.14 Hepatic Circulatory System. Blood leaving the heart may proceed directly to the liver (a) or to the intestines (b) by way of arteries. However, nutrient-rich blood from the intestines first returns to the liver (c) where nutrients are filtered before the blood returns to the heart (d). (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

cholesterol. This bile is either secreted into the duodenum, or stored in the gall bladder. In addition, the liver excretes a compound called bilirubin, which is derived from the destruction of worn-out red blood cells. It is bilirubin that gives bile its characteristic yellow color. In the small intestine, bacteria break down bilirubin into stercobilin, giving the fecal material its brown color. However, a small amount is reabsorbed by the blood system and eventually excreted by the kidneys. This small amount of bilirubin is responsible for urine’s yellow color.

148 Michael Windelspecht

Pancreas
The pancreas is an irregular-shaped gland that is located just below the stomach and adjacent to the duodenum of the small intestine. It averages between 4.7 and 5.8 inches (12 and 15 centimeters) in length, and a little over 0.8 inches (2 centimeters) in thickness. For descriptive purposes, it is divided into three major sections, although there is little difference in the physiology of the sections. The head is located closest to the duodenum and is connected to the digestive tract by two ducts. The hepatopancreatic duct is a common duct formed by the linking of the bile duct and pancreatic ducts. A second duct, called the duct of Santorini, directly connects the pancreas to the duodenum. Moving away from the duodenum and the head of the pancreas are the regions called the body and tail. The pancreas actually represents two separate organs, both of which contribute to digestion, which are integrated into a single structure. A portion of the pancreas is an exocrine gland, meaning that it secretes compounds into a cavity. The second major area of the pancreas is the endocrine tissue, which secretes chemicals into the bloodstream. In general, the exocrine functions of the pancreas can be described as those directly involved with the processing of nutrients in the duodenum, while the endocrine is best described as those functions that involve hormones and the regulation of glucose homeostasis in the body. Both types of tissue exist throughout the pancreas. Two types of cells make up the endocrine portions of the pancreas (Figure 3.15). Duct cells secrete what is formally called the aqueous alkaline solution. This solution is primarily sodium bicarbonate (NaHCO3), and its purpose is to neutralize hydrochloric acid coming through the pyloric sphincter along with the chyme. These cells are named due to their close proximity to the pancreatic ducts. Deeper within the pancreas are groups of cells called acinar cells. These cells are responsible for generating the enzymatic secretions of the pancreas and together may excrete 1.6–2.12 quarts (1–2 liters) of fluid per day into the duodenum. The enzymatic secretions produced by the acinar cells of the pancreas contain three basic classes of enzymes. These are the proteolytic enzymes (proteins), pancreatic lipase (lipids), and pancreatic amylase (carbohydrates). It is these enzymes that enable the small intestine to conduct its physiological function as the major

The Digestive System 149

Figure 3.15 The Pancreas. Diagram of the internal exocrine structure of the pancreas showing the relationship between acinar and duct cells. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

organ of digestion and absorption. The pancreatic amylase and lipase enzymes hydrolyze carbohydrates and fats, respectively, into their monomers, which are then absorbed by the small intestine. However, the actions of the proteolytic secretions are a little more complex. The proteolytic enzymes released by the pancreas are initially inactive. This protects the pancreatic cells from being damaged. The proteolytic excretions of the pancreas contain a mixture of enzymes: trypsinogen, chymotrypsinogen, proelastase, and procarboxypeptidase. Once released by the acinar cells, these inactive enzymes proceed through the pancreatic duct into the duodenum. Once in the lumen of the small intestine, rypsinogen is activated by an enterokinase enzyme located in the mucosal layer of the duodenum. The active form of trypsinogen is trypsin. Activated

150 Michael Windelspecht

trypsin is an autocatalytic enzyme, meaning that it has the ability to react with additional trypsinogen to produce trypsin. Trypsin also activates chymotrypsinogen, proelastase and procarboxypeptidase to produce chymotrypsin, elastase, and carboxypeptidase, respectively. Together, these enzymes are responsible for digesting proteins in the food into individual amino acids or short chain peptides for absorption by the small intestine.

Summary
All living organisms, including human beings, take nutrients from the environment and process them into chemical compounds to fuel their cells. This is called metabolism, and is part of the larger process of digestion, which is when food is broken down into its essential elements and components. Although some compounds behave differently (such as water, minerals, and some vitamins), the body transports most of the digested food particles throughout the body. The digestive system is made up of primary and secondary organs. The primary organs are the mouth, esophagus, stomach, small intestine, and large intestine. The secondary or accessory organs are the liver, pancreas, salivary glands, and gall bladder. The primary organs communicate with other organs of the body, while the accessory organs enable the chemical interactions necessary for digestion. Digestion is a vital function of the body, because it ensures there is an adequate source of energy available at all times. In addition, digestion provides the necessary materials to create and repair cells and tissues.

4
The Endocrine System
Stephanie Watson and Kelli Miller Stacy

Interesting Facts
• Ancient peoples called the pineal gland the “third eye” because they ´ believed it held mystical powers. French philosopher Rene Descartes (1596–1650) thought that the pineal gland was the point at which the human soul met the physical body. The endocrine pancreas contains about one million small endocrine glands called the islets of Langerhans. Special fluid sensors in the brain, called osmoreceptors, are so sensitive that they can detect a 1 percent fluctuation in the body’s water concentration. The adrenal cortex produces more than 60 different steroid hormones, but only a handful of these hormones are important to body function. Aldosterone, a steroid hormone produced in the adrenal cortex, acts upon the sweat glands to reduce the amount of sodium lost in the sweat. After a few days in a hot climate, sweat becomes virtually salt-free. During times of stress, the adrenal cortex can produce up to 10 times the normal amount of cortisol.

• •

• •



151

152 Stephanie Watson and Kelli Miller Stacy

• •

The fetal adrenal gland is larger than the adult gland in relation to body mass. In recent years, scientists have discovered that many industrial chemicals, pesticides, and heavy metals interfere with the endocrine systems of humans and wildlife by mimicking natural hormones. Endocrine disruptors have even been found in the breast milk of Inuit women in the remote Arctic, where known endocrine-disrupting chemicals are neither used nor produced. Scientists say that some deli wrap, food can linings, teething rings, vinyl toys, medical IV bags, and plastic bottles may seep small amounts of potential endocrine disruptors.





Chapter Highlights
• • • • • • Hormones and how they behave Target cells and receptors Second messenger systems Hormone regulation and secretion Feedback loops Glands of the endocrine system: hypothalamus; pituitary gland; anterior pituitary, posterior pituitary, pineal gland, thyroid, and parathyroid glands; adrenal glands; pancreas; ovaries; and testes

Words to Watch For
Adrenocorticotropic hormone Agonists Androgens Antagonists Anterior pituitary Antidiuretic hormone Autocrine Calcitonin Catecholamines Chondrocytes Corpus luteum Corticotroph Cortisol Cytokines Dopamine Eicosanoids Electrolytes

The Endocrine System 153

Epinephrine Erythropoietin Estrogen Exocrine glands Extracellular fluid Follicle-stimulating hormone Gastric inhibitory peptide Gastrin Gene transcription Glycogenolysis Glycoprotein Gonadotroph Gonadotropins Growth factors Growth hormones High-density lipoproteins Homeostasis Hypocalcemia Hypophsis Hypothalamichypophyseal portal system Hypothalamicpituitarytarget organ axis Hypothalamus Inhibin

Insulin Insulin-like growth factor Intermediate pituitary Intracellular fluid Islets of Langerhans Ketone bodies Lactrotroph Leptin Low-density lipoproteins Luteinizing hormone Luteolysis Mineralocorticoids Motilin Neurohormones Neurosecretory cells Norepinephrine Oogenesis Osmoreceptors Pancreatic polypeptide Paracrine Parathyroid hormone Polyunsaturated fatty acids Posterior pituitary

Pregnenolone Preprohormone Progesterone Progestins Proglucagon Proinsulin Prolactin Prostaglandins Receptor Seminiferous tubules Sertoli cells Somatostatin Somatotroph Substance P Target cells Testosterone Thyroid-stimulating hormone Thyrotroph Thyrotropinreleasing hormone Thyroxine Triiodothyronine Tyrosine Vasopressin Zona fasciculate Zona glomerulosa Zona reticularis

154 Stephanie Watson and Kelli Miller Stacy

Introduction
For all of the various cells and tissues in the human body to work in harmony, they must communicate and coordinate with one another. Communication is essential in the human body. Without a network to integrate functions of the organs, muscles, nerves, and all other tissues, the body would virtually shut down. Ingested food would not be properly absorbed and utilized for energy, fluids and electrolytes would swing wildly up and down, and disease would easily set in, all with devastating effects. To avoid these scenarios, the body has not one, but two integrated command centers. These centers—the nervous system (which is covered in Chapter 8 of this encyclopedia) and the endocrine system—act as the body’s control towers, sending out messages that coordinate the function of every cell. The nervous system sends out its messages via electrical impulses, which travel within nerve cells (neurons); and chemical signals (called neurotransmitters), which transmit those impulses across small gaps (called synapses) between the neurons. The endocrine system sends out its messages via chemical messengers called hormones, which travel through the bloodstream to act on cells in other parts of the body. Together, the two systems regulate every essential function, from metabolism to growth and development. The parts and functions of the endocrine and nervous systems are closely connected and synchronized. Nerves oversee the release and inhibition of endocrine system hormones, as well as blood flow to and from endocrine glands. Hormones, in turn, direct the nervous system by stimulating or inhibiting the release of neural impulses. To comprehend the role of the endocrine system and the pathways by which hormones affect biologic processes, it is first necessary to understand the chemical makeup of hormones, to learn how they are secreted and by what mechanisms they reach and interact with their target tissues, and to discern the complex relationship between the endocrine and nervous systems. In this chapter, the anatomy of the glands will be discussed. These glands are the hypothalamus, pituitary, thyroid, parathyroids, adrenal, sex glands (testes and ovaries), and the endocrine pancreas. It is important to note that there are also tissues throughout the body that are not considered

The Endocrine System 155

classic endocrine organs but that secrete hormones or hormone-like substances.

Fundamentals of the Endocrine System: Hormones and Their Actions
The process by which the endocrine system coordinates bodily functions is complex, consisting of many interrelated parts and systems that oversee hormone production, secretion, and delivery. At the core of the system are the hormones—the messengers that transport endocrine commands throughout the body. Hormones are the chemical signals by which the endocrine system coordinates and regulates functions such as growth, development, metabolism, and reproduction. The word “hormone” comes from the Greek word meaning “to set in motion.” When a hormone is released into the bloodstream, it does just that: It sets in motion a chain of events that ultimately results in a desired reaction within cells that are receptive to its influence. The reaction is generally designed to either trigger or inhibit a physiological activity. Hormones are produced by various tissues and secreted into the blood or extracellular fluid. According to the traditional definition, hormones travel through the bloodstream to work on tissues in distant parts of the body. But some hormones act locally without ever entering the bloodstream. They may exert their effects on cells close to where they were produced (called paracrine action), or they may act on the same cells that produced them (autocrine action). Some hormones act upon just one type of cell; others influence many different cells. Similarly, some cells are receptive to only one hormone, while others respond to several hormones. Hormones are not the only substances in the body that exert physiologic control on cells. A number of other chemical messengers act much like hormones. These include: • Neurotransmitters: The nervous system, like the endocrine system, transmits messages to target tissues. But nervous system messages are made up of chemical signals called neurotransmitters.

156 Stephanie Watson and Kelli Miller Stacy

Unlike endocrine cells, which release their hormones into circulation, neurotransmitters are released into the gap where two neurons (cells in the brain that receive and transmit nerve impulses) meet (called a synapse). At the synapse, they bind to receptors on the receiving neuron. Some substances (such as epinephrine, norepinephrine, dopamine, gastrin, and somatostatin) serve double duty, acting as both hormones and neurotransmitters. • Growth factors: Not to be confused with growth hormones produced by the endocrine system, growth factors are proteins that bind to receptors on the cell surface and stimulate or inhibit cellular division and proliferation. Some growth factors act on many different kinds of cells; others target one specific cell type. Examples include plateletderived growth factor (PGDF), epidermal growth factor (EGF), transforming growth factors (TGFs), and erythropoietin. Cytokines: Cytokines are signaling peptides secreted by immune cells (as well as by other types of cells) in response to stress, allergic reaction, infection, or other potentially harmful stimuli. Much like endocrine hormones, cytokines either travel through the bloodstream or act locally on target cells. Once cytokines bind to their receptors, they trigger a biological effect within cells. Cytokines may influence cell growth, cell activation, or cell death (i.e., in the case of cancer cells). They also act directly upon the hypothalamic-pituitarytarget organ axis of the endocrine system by increasing or decreasing hormone synthesis as part of the body’s stress response. There are four major categories of cytokines: interleukins, interferons, colony stimulating factors, and tumor necrosis factors (TNF). Eicosanoids (fatty acid derivatives): These compounds are produced from polyunsaturated fatty acids, most commonly from the precursor arachidonic acid. Depending upon which enzymes act on arachidonic acid, it may be converted into one of several classes of hormone-like substances, including prostaglandins, prostacyclines, and thromboxanes. Although they are not technically hormones, eicosanoids act in much the same way to influence a variety of physiological processes, including smooth muscle contraction; kidney, immune system, and





The Endocrine System 157

reproductive function; and calcium mobilization. Eicosanoids primarily exert a paracrine influence on nearby cells or an autocrine influence on the cells that produced them. Just as a hormone does not always have to fit the classic definition, a hormone-producing tissue does not always need to reside within the endocrine system. Although hormones are primarily associated with the endocrine glands, tissues in other parts of the body (kidneys, liver, and heart, for example) can also produce and release them.

Hormone Modes of Action
Hormones are grouped according to their chemical structure (see Table 4.1). The structure of a hormone (i.e., whether it is water soluble or fat soluble) determines how it will travel through the bloodstream (alone or attached to a protein) and how it will bind to its receptor (fat-soluble hormones can travel through the membrane to receptors on the inside of the cell, while water-soluble hormones cannot pass through the membrane and must bind to receptors on the outside of the cell).

Steroid Hormones
Steroid hormones (including estrogen, testosterone, and cortisol) are fat-soluble molecules produced from cholesterol. Because they generally repel water, steroid hormones travel through the blood attached to carrier proteins. Once they reach their target cell, steroid hormones pass through the cell membrane and bind to receptors in the cytoplasm and genes in the nucleus to regulate protein production.
TABLE 4.1 Examples of Hormones within Each Class
Protein and peptide hormones Antidiuretic hormone (ADH), follicle-stimulating hormone (FSH), glucagon, growth hormone (GH), insulin, luteinizing hormone (LH), oxytocin, prolactin (PRL), thyroid stimulating hormone (TSH), thyrotropin releasing hormone (TRH) Aldosterone, cortisol, estrogen, testosterone Epinephrine, norepinephrine, thyroxine, triiodothyronine

Steroid hormones Amino acid derivatives

158 Stephanie Watson and Kelli Miller Stacy

Amino Acid Derivatives
Amino acid derivatives (such as epinephrine and norepinephrine) are water-soluble molecules derived from amino acids (compounds that form proteins). These hormones travel freely in the blood, but they cannot pass through the cell membrane, so they bind to receptors on the surface. Binding activates second messengers inside the cell that trigger enzymes or influence gene expression.

Protein and Peptide Hormones
Protein and peptide hormones (including insulin, prolactin, and growth hormone) are water-soluble hormones made up of amino acid chains. Like amino acid derivatives, peptide hormones circulate alone and bind to receptors on the cell surface. Protein and peptide hormones consist of chains of amino acids. These chains may number only a few amino acids in length, as is the case with many peptide hormones (thyrotropin-releasing hormone [TRH] contains only three amino acids); or they may contain more than 200 amino acids, as do many protein hormones (follicle-stimulating hormone [FSH] contains 204 amino acids). A glycoprotein is a special type of protein hormone consisting of a protein connected to a glucose (sugar) molecule. Examples include luteinizing hormone (LH), follicle-stimulating hormone, and thyroidstimulating hormone (TSH). Peptide and protein hormones are produced in the endocrine cell under the direction of mRNA (messenger ribonucleic acid). The mRNA contains information that dictates the amino acid sequence of the protein. mRNA originates in the cell nucleus, then moves out into the cytoplasm, where it serves as a template for the amino acids to form an inactive molecule called a preprohormone (or prohormone). The prohormone is packaged into a secretory granule, which carries it to the cell surface. When the granule meets the cell membrane, an enzyme processes the prohormone to release the active hormone from the cell into circulation. Steroid hormones are synthesized from cholesterol, about 80 percent of which comes from food and is transported through the blood plasma as highdensity lipoprotein (HDL) particles. Included among the steroid hormones are the sex steroids (estrogen, androgens [testosterone], and progesterone)

The Endocrine System 159

produced by the ovaries and testes, and the glucocorticoids (cortisol), mineralocorticoids, and androgens produced by the adrenal cortex. To produce steroid hormones, enzymes convert cholesterol into a precursor molecule, called pregnenolone, in the cell mitochondria. Pregnenolone is then transported out of the mitochondria to the endoplasmic reticulum, where enzymes break it down further to produce either another precursor(s) or the active steroid hormone. Unlike protein hormones, which require granules to transfer them to the cell surface, steroid hormones can make the trip on their own and exit the cell via diffusion across the membrane. Unlike protein and peptide hormones, which consist of several linked amino acids, amino acid derivatives contain just one or two amino acids. Two major groups of hormones, both derived from the amino acid tyrosine, fall within this category: thyroid hormones (thyroxine [T4] and triiodothyronine [T3]) and catecholamines (epinephrine and norepinephrine, which are both hormones and neurotransmitters). Tyrosine reaches the endocrine cell via the bloodstream. Once inside the cell, enzymes transform the tyrosine into the active hormone. In the case of thyroid hormones, iodine is added to the modified tyrosine molecules. Amino acid hormones, like steroid hormones, can travel on their own across the cell membrane.

Hormone Transport
Once a hormone is released from the cell, it travels through the bloodstream to the cell upon which it will act. To get there, a hormone may either circulate alone (free) or bound to a carrier protein in the blood. As mentioned above, amino acid, peptide, and protein hormones typically circulate free because they are water soluble; steroid and thyroid hormones, which are fat soluble, circulate bound to proteins. The advantage to binding is that the carrier protein helps the hormone navigate through all of the cellular traffic in the body to reach its target tissue. A bound hormone also stays longer in the blood than a free hormone, because its carrier protein holds it back from crossing a cell membrane. The level of bound and free proteins in the blood usually remains stable, because the proteins are in a concentration equilibrium, so each time a newly produced hormone is released into circulation, a hormone that is bound to a protein is freed.

160 Stephanie Watson and Kelli Miller Stacy

Figure 4.1 The Hypothalamus. Hormones released from the hypothalamus travel through blood vessels in the pituitary stalk to the anterior pituitary. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

Although most hormones travel through the bloodstream to reach their target cells, there are exceptions. One example is the hypothalamichypophyseal portal system (Figure 4.1), through which releasing hormones secreted by nerve cells in the hypothalamus travel (via capillaries in the hypothalamus and veins in the pituitary stalk) directly to the anterior pituitary without ever entering the general circulation.

Target Cells and Receptors
A hormone cannot trigger a physiological reaction in just any cell—it is specifically designed to act upon only those cells that are receptive to it, which are called target cells. How does a hormone find its target cell? Each target cell comes complete with receptors—proteins that lie either on the surface of the cell or within the nucleus. The receptors exhibit specificity and bind only to the right hormone—or hormones—from a sea of other molecules. A cell’s response depends upon the concentration of the hormone and the number of receptors to that hormone that it contains.

The Endocrine System 161

When the hormone binds to its receptor, it initiates a chain of events that ultimately alters the cell’s function. The activated hormone-receptor complex can have one of three main effects: It can instruct cells to either make or stop making RNA from DNA (by the process of gene transcription), thus starting or stopping protein production; it can turn enzymes in the cell on or off, thus altering the cell’s metabolism; or it can change the permeability of the cell membrane to allow in or shut out certain chemicals. If an individual lacks receptors for a particular hormone (or hormones), that hormone will not be able to do its job, and disease will often result. Hormones not only trigger production of certain proteins within a cell; they may also block protein production or even block other hormones from binding to the cell receptor. Based on their effect, hormones are assigned to one of four classifications: • Agonists: Agonists are hormones that bind to their receptor and elicit a specific biological response. For example, a glucocorticoid is an agonist for the receptor that binds cortisol. Antagonists: Antagonists are hormones that bind to the receptor but do not trigger a biological response. By occupying the receptor, the antagonist blocks an agonist from binding and thus prevents the triggering of the desired effect within the cell. For example, an antiandrogen is used to block the function of androgens in hormone therapy. Partial agonist–partial antagonist: A hormone that, when bound to the receptor, initiates a lesser biological response within the cell. By occupying the receptor, the partial agonist–partial antagonist blocks the potential action of an agonist, which could have generated a more significant biological response within the cell. Mixed agonist–antagonist: A hormone that exerts a different action on the receptor, acting as either an agonist or antagonist, depending upon the situation.







There are two types of receptors. Water-soluble hormones are unable to cross the membrane on their own because they are repelled by the fatty membrane that surrounds each cell, so they bind to receptors on the cell

162 Stephanie Watson and Kelli Miller Stacy

surface. Hormones that are fat soluble (such as steroids) are able to cross the membrane, so they bind to receptors inside the cell.

Cell Surface Receptors and Second-Messenger Systems
Glucagon, catecholamines, parathyroid hormone (PTH), adrenocorticotropic hormone (ACTH), thyroid-stimulating hormone (TSH), and luteinizing hormone (LH) are water soluble and therefore cannot cross into the cell. Instead, they bind to receptors on the surface of the cell membrane and trigger a cascade of events that leads to the desired biological response within the cell. For the message to pass from the hormone into the cell requires the efforts of second messengers (Figure 4.2), which activate enzymes or other molecules inside the cell. The hormone’s actions are similar to those of a witness to a car accident. The witness acts as a first messenger, calling 911 and alerting the

Figure 4.2 Second messenger system. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

The Endocrine System 163

operator to the problem. The 911 operator is the receptor, taking the message and passing it along to the emergency crew, which acts as the second messenger, coming to the aid of the accident victims. One of the primary second-messenger systems involves G proteins. G proteins are like chemical “switches” that have to be triggered before the hormonal message can be passed into the cell. When a hormone binds to its receptor, the receptor changes shape and activates a G protein inside the cell. The G protein releases a guanine nucleotide it had been holding called guanine diphosphate (GDP), then grabs another, similar nucleotide called guanine triphosphate (GTP). Then the G protein goes to work, activating enzymes such as adenylyl cyclase. These enzymes produce a second messenger called cyclic adenosine monophosphate (cAMP). cAMP relays messages to effectors (molecules that regulate a series of chemical reactions) inside the cell, which lead to the desired biological reaction (for example, releasing glucose from cells when the body needs it for energy).

Intracellular Receptors
Receptors for steroid and thyroid hormones, as well as for vitamin D (a vitamin with hormone properties), are located inside the cell nucleus or cytoplasm. These hormones are fat soluble and can therefore cross the cell membrane on their own via simple diffusion. When they enter the cell, they meet up with and bind to their receptors, forming a hormone-receptor complex. The complex binds to parts of DNA in the cell nucleus called hormone response elements. Binding alters the DNA, resulting in the synthesis of a new protein.

Hormone Regulation and Secretion
Hormones are so potent that just a tiny amount can exert powerful influences throughout the body. If too much or too little of a hormone is in circulation, the body can fall prey to serious disease. The effects of a particular hormone are related to its concentration in the bloodstream. Concentration is affected by the rate of production, the speed of distribution to target cells, and the speed at which the hormone is degraded after it is released from its receptor. All of these elements are strictly controlled by feedback loops or mechanisms, which measure and respond to changes within the

164 Stephanie Watson and Kelli Miller Stacy

body. Feedback loops ensure that enough hormones are produced to complete necessary tasks and keep the endocrine system tightly integrated with the nervous and immune systems. Some endocrine cells secrete their hormones at set times every day, every month, or even every year. Other cells secrete hormones following stimulation by other hormones, or in response to internal or external stimuli. Some hormones are released in regular patterns that follow a 24-hour cycle (called circadian rhythms). Cortisol release, for example, rises in the early morning, gradually drops during the day, and stays very low during sleep. Other hormones follow a monthly, or even a seasonal, pattern. The pituitary gland, for example, releases luteinizing hormone and folliclestimulating hormone in response to variations in a woman’s monthly menstrual cycle.

Hormonal Influences
The majority of hormones are regulated by other hormones (called tropic hormones), which either stimulate or inhibit their release based on the body’s needs. The hypothalamus-pituitary control system is an example of tropic influence. The hypothalamus secretes several neurohormones, which signal the pituitary to release its own hormones. Pituitary hormones, in turn, direct the functions of several target organs.

Internal and External Influences
Many endocrine glands have their own mechanisms for sensing whether they need to release hormones. The endocrine-producing islet cells of the pancreas detect glucose levels in the blood, and release or inhibit insulin production as necessary. Sometimes, external factors are involved in hormone secretion. When a baby nurses from its mother’s breast, the suckling action stimulates secretion of the hormones prolactin and oxytocin. Prolactin causes milk production in the mammary glands and maintains lactation. Oxytocin stimulates the release, or let-down, of milk into the nipple.

Feedback Mechanisms
Hormones regulate one another through feedback loops. The most basic feedback systems involve only one closed loop. More complex systems

The Endocrine System 165

consist of a series of interrelated loops. Two main types of feedback systems exist. Negative Feedback The most common type of feedback works much like a home air conditioning unit. When the temperature in the home rises to a preset level, a sensing mechanism turns on the air conditioner. After the air conditioning has run long enough to drop the temperature to a comfortable level, the shut-off mechanism is activated. Thanks to the feedback mechanism, the home is never allowed to get too cold or too warm. In the body’s negative feedback loop, a physiological change triggers the release of a particular hormone. Once the level of this hormone rises in the blood, it signals the endocrine cells that secreted it to stop producing it. Negative feedback prevents the overproduction of hormones, which could lead to disease. An example of a simple negative feedback loop occurs after a person eats a piece of cake. After the cake is ingested, glucose (sugar) levels in the blood rise. In response to rising glucose levels, the endocrine cells of the pancreas release insulin. Insulin helps the cells take in and use glucose, lowering the amount of the sugar in the bloodstream. When blood glucose levels fall back to a normal level, insulin release is inhibited. Positive Feedback As the name implies, a positive feedback loop stimulates, rather than inhibits, the production of a particular hormone. One example involves the release of oxytocin from the pituitary gland during childbirth. Oxytocin stimulates uterine contractions, which help push the baby out of the uterus. As levels of oxytocin in the blood rise, they trigger the pituitary to secrete even more of the hormone. Uterine contractions continue to increase until the child is finally born. Positive feedback is far less common than negative feedback, because it has the potential to contribute to dangerously high hormone levels. More complex feedback systems involve several interrelated loops. One example is the hypothalamic-pituitary-target organ axis, a multi-loop system that coordinates the efforts of the hypothalamus in the brain, the pituitary gland, and the target gland.

166 Stephanie Watson and Kelli Miller Stacy

The hypothalamus, in response to reduced hormone levels in the bloodstream, stimulates pituitary hormone secretion. The pituitary hormone travels through the bloodstream to act on its target tissue(s). As the level of pituitary hormone in the blood rises, the hypothalamus stops secreting its releasing hormone. Consequently, the pituitary stops producing its own hormone, and blood levels of the hormone return to normal. The hypothalamus has the ability to override the system, increasing or reducing hormone levels to adjust to physical and emotional stresses. Hormones from the target gland bind to nerve cells in the hypothalamus, which inhibit or trigger production of releasing hormones that influence pituitary hormone secretion. Without this mechanism, hormone levels would remain constant, even when they were needed in greater amounts to mediate a stress response.

Hormone Elimination
After hormones interact with their target cells and produce the desired result, they are no longer needed by the body. Most hormones are either converted to less active molecules or degraded by enzymes into an inactive form before being excreted in the urine or feces. Very few hormones are eliminated intact. Peptide hormones, catecholamines, and eicosanoids are all degraded by enzymes in the cell. Steroid hormones are metabolized into inactive forms and eliminated by the kidneys.

Endocrine Glands: Anatomy and Function
The endocrine system is made up of a complex network of glands (Figure 4.3), each of which secretes hormones that coordinate and regulate functions throughout the body. The pituitary, thyroid, parathyroids, adrenals, gonads (testes and ovaries), and endocrine pancreas are considered traditional endocrine glands with the primary purpose of secreting hormones into the bloodstream. But other, nonendocrine organs—including the heart, brain, kidneys, liver, skin, and gastrointestinal tract—can also secrete hormones. By definition, endocrine glands release their hormones into the bloodstream to act upon target tissues elsewhere in the body. Endocrine glands should not be confused with exocrine glands, which secrete their substances to the outside of the body, to internal cavities such as the lumen of the

The Endocrine System 167

Figure 4.3 The endocrine system: female and male. (Sandy Windelspecht/ Ricochet Productions)

intestines, or to other tissues through ducts (for example, the salivary and sweat glands). The endocrine system is assigned several critical responsibilities, the most important of which are to maintain a constant internal environment (homeostasis); aid in growth, development, reproduction, and metabolism; and coordinate with the central nervous and immune systems.

Water and Electrolyte Balance
For the body to function properly, it needs to maintain an internal balance of fluids and electrolytes (electrically charged chemical ions such as sodium, potassium, chloride, calcium, magnesium, and phosphate). More than 40 quarts (37 liters) of water circulate throughout the body. About two-thirds

168 Stephanie Watson and Kelli Miller Stacy

is intracellular fluid, located within the cells. About 75 percent of the remaining extracellular fluid is found in the tissue outside of the cells, and the other 25 percent is contained within the fluid portion of blood (plasma). A rise in blood fluid volume (overhydration) can force the heart to work harder and dilute essential chemicals in the system. Too little water, or dehydration, can lead to low blood pressure, shock, and even death. The kidneys help to balance the fluid in the body by reabsorbing liquid into the bloodstream when levels get too low, or by eliminating excess fluids when levels rise too high. These processes occur under the direction of the endocrine system. If the concentration of water drops too low (because not enough liquid was ingested or because fluid was lost through sweating, vomiting, or diarrhea), neurons called osmoreceptors send a message to the hypothalamus in the brain, which in turn tells the pituitary gland to secrete antidiuretic hormone (ADH) (also known as vasopressin) into the bloodstream. This hormone increases the permeability of the distal convoluted tubules and the collecting ducts in the nephrons of the kidneys, thus returning more fluid to the bloodstream. When more water is reabsorbed, the urine becomes more highly concentrated and is excreted in smaller volume. When the fluid concentration in the body is too high, ADH is not released. The distal convoluted tubules and collecting ducts are less permeable to water, and the kidneys filter out excess fluid, producing a larger volume of more dilute urine. The kidneys must also maintain a balance of sodium, potassium, and other electrolytes in body fluids. To do this, they separate ions from the blood during filtration, returning what is needed to the bloodstream and sending any excess to the urine for excretion. Electrolyte levels are also directed by the endocrine system. Sodium and potassium are two of the most important electrolytes, because without them, fluids would not be able to properly move between the intracellular and extracellular spaces. Sodium is the most abundant electrolyte in the extracellular fluid, and it also plays an important role in nerve and muscle function. The presence of too much sodium (a condition called hypernatremia) will send water from inside the cells into the extracellular region to restore balance, causing the cells to shrink. If nerve cells are affected, the result can be seizures and, in rare cases, coma. Too little sodium (called hyponatremia)—lost from excessive diarrhea,

The Endocrine System 169

vomiting, or sweating—can send water into the cells, causing them to swell. Hyponatremia can lead to weakness, abdominal cramps, nausea, vomiting, or diarrhea. The swelling is even more dangerous if it occurs in the brain, where it can cause disorientation, convulsions, or coma. Potassium assists in protein synthesis and is crucial for nerve and muscle function. Too little potassium can lead to a buildup of toxic substances in the cells that would normally pass into the extracellular fluid. To prevent a sodium-potassium imbalance, the cells use a mechanism called the sodium-potassium pump. This pump is a form of active transport (as opposed to the passive transport used in osmosis), which means that fluid can pass from one side of a semipermeable membrane to another, even if the concentration is already high on that side. But active transport requires energy to push molecules across the membrane. That energy is derived from adenosine triphosphate (ATP), a by-product of cellular respiration. Once activated by ATP, the sodium-potassium pump pushes potassium ions into the cell while pumping sodium ions out of the cell until a balance is reached. Endocrine hormones regulate the amount of sodium and potassium in the bloodstream. In the case of a sodium imbalance, an enzyme secreted by the kidneys, called renin, stimulates the production of the hormone aldosterone by the adrenal glands, which are located just above the kidneys. Aldosterone forces the distal convoluted tubules and collecting ducts in the kidneys to reabsorb more sodium into the blood. It also maintains potassium homeostasis by stimulating the secretion of potassium by the distal convoluted tubule and collecting ducts when levels in the bloodstream get too high. Parathyroid hormone (PTH), produced by the parathyroid glands, regulates levels of bone-building calcium and phosphate. When calcium concentrations in the body drop, PTH pulls calcium from the bones, triggers the renal tubules to release more calcium into the bloodstream, and increases the absorption of dietary calcium from the small intestine. When too much calcium circulates in the blood, the thyroid gland produces another hormone, calcitonin, which causes bone cells to pull more calcium from the blood, and increases calcium excretion by the kidneys. PTH decreases phosphate levels in the blood by inhibiting reabsorption in the kidney tubules, and calcitonin stimulates the bones to absorb more phosphate.

170 Stephanie Watson and Kelli Miller Stacy

The following sections will provide a closer look at the function of each of the endocrine glands.

The Hypothalamus and Pituitary Gland
The hypothalamus and pituitary gland together serve as the command center of the endocrine system, and the core of the relationship between the endocrine and nervous systems. Together, they regulate virtually every physiological activity in the body. As mentioned earlier, the nervous and endocrine systems also regulate each other: neurohormones from the hypothalamus direct the release of endocrine hormones, and hormones from the endocrine system regulate nervous system activity.

The Hypothalamus
The tiny, cone-shaped region at the base of the brain (Figure 4.4) called the hypothalamus coordinates the neuroendocrine system, helps regulate metabolism, and controls the part of the nervous system that oversees a number of involuntary bodily functions (sleep, appetite, body temperature, hunger, and thirst). It also serves as the link between the nervous and endocrine systems. The hypothalamus projects downward, ending at the pituitary stalk, which connects it to the pituitary gland. Together, the hypothalamus and pituitary (known collectively as the hypothalamic-pituitary axis [HPA]) direct the functions of the endocrine system. Although the pituitary has been termed the “master gland,” the hypothalamus is the real control center behind the operation. The hypothalamus sends out messages (releasing or inhibiting hormones), which signal the pituitary to release— or stop releasing—its hormones. Pituitary hormones control the functions of virtually every endocrine gland in the body. The hypothalamus is made up of clusters of neurosecretory cells, which both transmit electrical messages (impulses) and secrete hormones. Electrical impulses are transmitted from one nerve cell to another via chemical messengers called neurotransmitters. The impulses travel across junctions called synapses and bind to receptors on the receiving neuron. Neurotransmitters are chemical compounds that are made up of simple or more complex amino acid sequences or peptides. Examples of

The Endocrine System 171

Figure 4.4 The Pineal Glands. The hypothalamus, pituitary, and pineal body. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

neurotransmitters include epinephrine, norepinephrine, serotonin, acetylcholine, dopamine, and histamine. The hypothalamus also secretes a number of hormones that are referred to as neurohormones, which either travel through the body via the general circulation or go directly to the anterior pituitary gland through a portal network of blood vessels (called the hypothalamic-hypophyseal portal system) and signal it to release or stop releasing its hormones. Hypothalamic hormones are called releasing or inhibiting hormones, depending upon how they influence the pituitary gland. As their names suggest, releasing hormones trigger hormone secretion, and inhibiting hormones halt hormone secretion. One of the neurohormones is the growth hormone-releasing hormone (GHRH), which is a large peptide hormone that stimulates the secretion of growth hormone from the anterior pituitary gland. Release of GHRH is triggered by stress (such as exercise) and is inhibited by somatostatin, which is also released by the hypothalamus. Negative feedback is largely

172 Stephanie Watson and Kelli Miller Stacy

controlled by compounds known as somatomedins, growth-promoting hormones made when tissues are exposed to growth hormone.

The Pituitary Gland
The pea-shaped pituitary gland (also known as the hypophsis) sits nestled in a cradle of bone at the base of the skull called the sella turcica (“Turkish saddle”). It is attached to the hypothalamus by the pituitary (hypophyseal) stalk, through which run the blood vessels and nerves (axons) that deliver hypothalamic hormones to the anterior pituitary. As previously noted, the pituitary (Figures 4.5 and 4.6) is often referred to as the “master gland” because it directs the functions of most other endocrine glands (including the adrenals, thyroid, and gonads [ovaries and testes]). In addition to stimulating other endocrine glands to release their hormones, the pituitary secretes several of its own hormones: growth hormone (GH), prolactin, and oxytocin.

Figure 4.5 The anterior and posterior pituitary gland. (Sandy Windelspecht/ Ricochet Productions)

The Endocrine System 173

The pituitary gland is made up of three lobes: the anterior, intermediate, and posterior. Anterior pituitary: The anterior pituitary is composed of endocrine cells, which secrete hormones in response to stimulation by hypothalamic hormones. Anterior pituitary hormones, in turn, stimulate the adrenal glands (adrenocorticotropic hormone [ACTH]), thyroid gland (thyroid-stimulating hormone [TSH]), and ovaries Figure 4.6 The pituitary gland. and testes (follicle-stimulating (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet hormone [FSH] and luteinizing Productions) hormone [LH]). The anterior pituitary also produces growth hormone (which stimulates growth of bone and muscle) and prolactin (which initiates milk production following childbirth). • Intermediate pituitary: The intermediate pituitary exists as a separate entity in animals, but only vestiges of this lobe remain in humans. Cells within the intermediate pituitary produce melanocytestimulating hormone, which controls skin pigmentation. Posterior pituitary: Although the posterior pituitary is situated next to the anterior pituitary, it has very different functions. The posterior pituitary is an extension of the nervous system, made up primarily of axons and nerve endings that reach down from the hypothalamus. The posterior pituitary stores and releases hormones that are actually produced within the hypothalamus: antidiuretic hormone (ADH), which helps the body conserve water by increasing reabsorption in the kidney tubules; and oxytocin, which stimulates uterine contractions during childbirth and triggers the letdown of milk from the mother’s breast when her infant nurses. •



174 Stephanie Watson and Kelli Miller Stacy

The pituitary gland is divided into two separate units: the anterior pituitary and posterior pituitary, each of which functions independently and secretes its own set of hormones.

The Anterior Pituitary
The anterior pituitary is made up of five different types of cells, each of which secretes one or more different hormones: • • • • • Thyrotroph: Thyroid-stimulating hormone (TSH) Gonadotroph: Luteinizing hormone (LH) and follicle-stimulating hormone (FSH) Corticotroph: Corticotropin (ACTH) Somatotroph: Growth hormone Lactotroph: Prolactin

Hormones are synthesized in the cytoplasm of the cell as larger, inactive molecules called prohormones. Neurohormones from the hypothalamus travel to the anterior pituitary via a closed system of veins (the hypothalamichypophyseal portal system) and signal the anterior pituitary to either release or stop releasing its hormones. When the signal is to release hormones, the hormone is activated from the prohormone as it is sent out from the cell into circulation. If the hypothalamus were destroyed, the anterior pituitary would be unable to secrete any of its hormones, with the exception of prolactin, which the hypothalamus primarily inhibits. The anterior pituitary affects growth and metabolism in most other endocrine glands, as well as in other areas of the body. It also stimulates other endocrine glands to produce and secrete their hormones: Thyroid-stimulating Hormone (TSH) TSH, also called thyrotropin, is a large glycoprotein that affects cell growth and metabolism in the thyroid gland, and signals the gland to produce and release its hormones thyroxine (T4) and triiodothyronine (T3). Thyrotroph cells in the anterior pituitary release TSH after being

The Endocrine System 175

stimulated by TRH from the hypothalamus. TSH release is inhibited by negative feedback involving thyroid hormones. When blood levels of thyroid hormones are high, somatostatin inhibits the production of TRH from the hypothalamus, which then inhibits TSH release. Glucocorticoids and estrogens also serve an inhibitory function by making the pituitary less responsive to TRH.

Gonadotropins Luteinizing hormone (LH) and follicle-stimulating hormone (FSH) are gonadotropins secreted by cells called gonadotrophs in the anterior pituitary. These hormones promote egg and sperm development and control gonadocorticoid hormone (androgens and estrogen) release by the ovaries and testes. The secretion of both hormones remains very low from shortly after birth until puberty, when levels rise dramatically. In females, the rate of secretion varies at different times during the menstrual cycle. Secretion of both LH and FSH is controlled by gonadotropin-releasing hormone (GnRH) from the hypothalamus. Luteinizing hormone: This hormone was given its name because it stimulates the conversion of the ovarian follicle to the corpus luteum following egg release. In the middle of a woman’s menstrual cycle, estrogen levels rise, causing the release of GnRH from the hypothalamus. GnRH causes LH levels to surge, triggering ovulation. That surge allows the egg to rupture from its follicle and travel down the fallopian tube toward the uterus. Once the egg has been released, LH stimulates the conversion of the ovarian follicle to the corpus luteum, which produces progesterone, a hormone necessary to maintain pregnancy. LH also stimulates estrogen and progesterone production. In men, the hormone stimulates the growth of—and testosterone production in—the Leydig cells of the testes. Follicle-stimulating hormone: In women, FSH stimulates the maturation of the ovarian follicles, in which the eggs develop. With the help of LH, FSH also increases estrogen secretion by the ovaries. In men, FSH acts upon the Sertoli cells (cells that line the seminiferous tubules, which nourish the germ cells from which

176 Stephanie Watson and Kelli Miller Stacy

sperm develop) of the testes, facilitating sperm maturation and development. Like LH, the release of FSH is stimulated by GnRH from the hypothalamus. FSH is inhibited by the hormone inhibin, which is secreted by the ovaries and testes. Adrenocorticotropic Hormone (ACTH) ACTH, also called corticotropin, is a small peptide hormone that stimulates cell development and hormone synthesis in the adrenal cortex (glucocorticoids, mineralocorticoids, and gonadocorticoids). In the fetus, ACTH also stimulates secretion of an estrogen precursor called dehydroepiandrosterone sulfate (DHEA-S), which prepares the mother for labor. Stress stimulates the release of CRH from the hypothalamus. CRH then activates the secretion of ACTH. ADH (vasopressin) also plays a role in ACTH release. High circulating levels of cortisol in the blood inhibit ACTH in two ways: by directly suppressing ACTH synthesis and secretion in the pituitary gland, and by acting on the hypothalamus to decrease CRH release. ACTH may also inhibit its own secretion. Growth Hormone Growth hormone, also called somatotropin, is a large polypeptide hormone produced by somatotroph cells in the anterior pituitary that plays a significant role in growth and metabolism. It primarily affects bone, muscle, and tissue growth. Without sufficient growth hormone, an individual would suffer from short stature. Too much growth hormone would result in gigantism. For normal growth to occur, the body requires energy, which growth hormone provides through protein synthesis and the breakdown of fats. Growth hormone has two types of effects: direct and indirect. Direct effects: Growth hormone acts directly upon protein metabolism, fat metabolism, and carbohydrate metabolism to help the body more efficiently use and conserve energy. It moves amino acids from the blood into cells and stimulates protein synthesis within the cells; it moves fats out of storage (in adipose tissue) for use in energy production to conserve proteins; and it decreases carbohydrate use and impairs glucose uptake into cells, thus sparing glucose for the brain.

The Endocrine System 177

Indirect effects: Growth hormone stimulates bone, muscle, and cartilage growth indirectly, by triggering the production of insulin-like growth factor 1 (IGF-1, or somatomedin). Insulin-like growth factors are synthesized in the liver and other tissues and act much like insulin, stimulating glucose uptake by cells. They also influence protein and DNA synthesis. IGF-1 stimulates proliferation of cartilage cells (called chondrocytes), causes muscle cell differentiation and proliferation, and initiates protein synthesis in muscle tissues.

Regulation of Anterior Pituitary Hormones
Hormones from the anterior pituitary can be regulated in one of three ways: 1. Hormones such as LH and FSH are released in pulses that follow a regular cycle. The strength and frequency of these pulses is set, in part, by the hypothalamus. Pulsatile release may follow a daily rhythm (circadian), or it may occur more frequently (ultradian) or less frequently (infradian) than once a day. 2. Most hormones are regulated by feedback loops, in which circulating hormone levels act upon the hormones that triggered their release. Three types of feedback loops exist: • Long-loop system: After being stimulated by a releasing hormone from the hypothalamus (CRH), the anterior pituitary signals its target organ (for example, the adrenal cortex) to produce its hormone (cortisol). When that hormone reaches a certain level in the system, it acts upon the hypothalamus via negative feedback, inhibiting its releasing hormone (CRH). When the hypothalamus stops or decreases production of the releasing hormone, the anterior pituitary subsequently stops releasing its hormone (ACTH). Short-loop system: Some hormones (for example, LH and FSH) can suppress their own release without entering the bloodstream. Ultrashort-loop system: A releasing hormone (for example, LHRH or GHRH) can act directly on the hypothalamus to regulate its own secretion.

• •

178 Stephanie Watson and Kelli Miller Stacy

3. Finally, hormone release can be influenced by external factors, such as stress (for example, the fight-or-flight release of corticotropin from the adrenal cortex), diet, and illness.

The Posterior Pituitary
The posterior pituitary is not a classic endocrine organ because it is composed primarily of extensions of axons and nerve endings from the hypothalamus. Its two hormones, antidiuretic hormone (ADH, or vasopressin) and oxytocin, are actually produced in the neurons of nuclei in the hypothalamus. These hormones travel down nerve fibers to the posterior pituitary, which merely stores and releases them. Antidiuretic Hormone Antidiuretic hormone (ADH, or vasopressin) is a small peptide hormone whose primary role is to conserve water in the body by signaling the kidneys to excrete less fluid. The hormone is synthesized as a preprohormone in the hypothalamic neurons. The preprohormone is converted into a prohormone, which contains an attached protein called neurophysin that is removed as the hormone is secreted. The human body contains about 60 percent water. Significant fluctuations in water balance (i.e., dehydration or overhydration) can be extremely dangerous to the system. When the concentration of liquid in the blood drops, special sensors (called osmoreceptors) in the hypothalamus alert the neurons that produce ADH. Osmoreceptors are extremely sensitive and can respond to tiny changes (as small as 1 percent) in water concentration. Whereas a diuretic increases urine output, an antidiuretic conserves fluid in the body by reducing urine output. When ADH is released, it binds to receptors in the distal or collecting tubules of the kidneys and increases their permeability, thus stimulating the reabsorption of liquid back into the blood (normally, these tubules are virtually impermeable to water). When more water is absorbed into the bloodstream, blood volume and pressure increase. Conversely, when the fluid level in the body gets too high, ADH release is suppressed, and the kidneys excrete more liquid into the urine. ADH also constricts blood vessels (vasoconstriction), the role for which it was given its alternate name, vasopressin.

The Endocrine System 179

Thirst, the body’s physical indicator that fluid levels are low, is also regulated by osmoreceptors in the hypothalamus, although not the same ones that trigger ADH release. The body first sends in ADH to try to regulate water balance; then, if that measure fails to increase fluid volume, it invokes thirst. Changes in blood pressure also stimulate ADH release. Two pressure sensors—one in the carotid artery in the neck, and the other in specialized cells in the atrium of the heart—discern changes in blood pressure and volume. They send a message, via nerves, to the hypothalamus. When these sensors are stretched by expanding blood volume, they shut off ADH secretion so that more water is excreted by the kidneys. When they sense reduced blood volume (for example, when a person is hemorrhaging from a severe injury), they trigger ADH production. Oxytocin Oxytocin is similar in structure to ADH, and it is also synthesized from preprohormones in the hypothalamus and transported to the posterior pituitary for secretion into the blood. In addition to being secreted by the pituitary, oxytocin is also released by tissues in the ovaries and testes. The primary function of oxytocin is to stimulate the mammary glands in a mother’s breast during lactation—to let down the milk so that her baby can nurse. Oxytocin (which is derived from the Greek word meaning “swift birth”) also stimulates uterine contractions during labor. The release of oxytocin into a new mother’s brain also helps forge a bond between her and her new baby. The hormone normally circulates in low levels in both men and women, but it rises in women during ovulation, birth, and lactation, as well as in times of stress.

Pineal Gland
The small, cone-shaped pineal gland was once called the “third eye” and ascribed supernatural powers. It extends downward from the third ventricle of the brain, above and behind the pituitary gland. The pineal gland is composed of parts of neurons, but otherwise has no direct neural connection with the brain. Scientists know very little about the gland and what it does, but they do know that it secretes the hormone melatonin, which responds to light

180 Stephanie Watson and Kelli Miller Stacy

and dark, and communicates that information to the rest of the body. Melatonin influences circadian rhythms (the body’s daily biological clock) and thus plays a role in functions regulated by night/day cycles, including reproduction and sleep/wake patterns. Melatonin synthesis begins with the amino acid tryptophan, which is then converted into serotonin and finally into melatonin. Melatonin release is regulated by the sympathetic nervous system and is stimulated primarily by darkness, but it can also be triggered by hypoglycemia (low blood sugar). Melatonin concentration is highest at night and falls to almost undetectable levels during the day. Although its function is still not completely clear, melatonin is believed to act upon suprachiasmatic nuclei (tightly packed groups of small cells) in the hypothalamus (which have receptors to it) to influence the body’s daily biological rhythms. Synthetic versions of the hormone have been used to treat everything from jet lag to insomnia.

The Thyroid and Parathyroid Glands
The thyroid and parathyroid glands in the neck have several life-sustaining functions: The thyroid gland produces hormones that affect growth, development, metabolism, calcium homeostasis, and cell differentiation; and the parathyroid glands regulate calcium and phosphorous levels.

The Thyroid Gland
The largest endocrine gland in the body sits just below the larynx (voice box) and wraps around the trachea (windpipe). The thyroid gland (Figure 4.7) resembles a butterfly, with its two lobes reaching out like wings on either side of a narrow strip of tissue called the isthmus. In a healthy adult, the thyroid weighs about 20 grams, but it can grow to several times this size. The thyroid gland is the largest endocrine organ and is crucial to nearly all of the body’s physiological processes. It produces thyroid hormones, which are needed for growth, development, and a variety of metabolic activities. The thyroid is composed of two types of cells: follicular and parafollicular. Follicles are sacs filled with the prohormone thyroglobulin. Thyroglobulin breaks apart to produce the two thyroid hormones, thyroxine (T4)

The Endocrine System 181

Figure 4.7

The thyroid gland. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

and triiodothyronine (T3). Lining the sacs are follicular cells, which synthesize and then either secrete or store these hormones. Parafollicular (or C) cells fill the spaces in between follicles. They secrete the hormone calcitonin. Inside the follicles is a substance called colloid, which consists primarily of the glycoprotein thyroglobulin.

Thyroid Hormone Synthesis
What makes the thyroid gland unusual among endocrine organs is that it requires iodine to produce its hormones. Iodine enters the body through food (i.e., iodized salt and bread) and water in the form of iodide or iodate ion. The thyroid gland captures this iodide, and the enzyme thyroid peroxidase activates it. The follicular cells produce thyroglobulin, which is deposited in the colloid. Tyrosine is bound to the thyroglobulin molecule. Iodine diffuses into the colloid and is added to the thyroglobulin. Enzymes break down the thyroglobulin, releasing thyroid hormones into the bloodstream.

182 Stephanie Watson and Kelli Miller Stacy

Without sufficient iodine, the thyroid reduces its hormone output. Decreased levels of thyroid hormones in the blood stimulate the anterior pituitary to secrete more thyroid-stimulating hormone (TSH) to make up for the deficit. The thyroid gland swells in size as it tries to increase its output, a condition called goiter. Unlike most other endocrine organs, which produce and immediately secrete their hormones, the thyroid can store its hormones for several weeks. It releases its hormones when acted upon by TSH from the pituitary gland. TSH stimulation leads to the activation of thyroxine (T4). It splits from the thyroglobulin molecule as it leaves the cell and enters the bloodstream. T4 is the more plentiful of the two hormones, making up about 90 percent of the total thyroid hormones. Triiodothyronine (T3) is secreted in much smaller concentrations than thyroxine, but it is the more active of the two hormones. T3 is produced (usually in the peripheral tissues, especially the liver and kidney) when thyroxine loses one of its iodine molecules. Because thyroid hormones are not water soluble, they generally travel through the bloodstream attached to carrier proteins (most often thyroxine-binding globulin, but also to a lesser extent to thyroxine-binding prealbumin and albumin). Virtually every cell in the body contains thyroid hormone receptors. Once the thyroid hormone reaches its target cells, it travels through the membrane via diffusion or with the help of carriers, and it binds to receptors in the nucleus. Thyroid hormones affect gene transcription, which either stimulates or inhibits protein synthesis.

Regulation of Thyroid Hormone Secretion
The hypothalamic-pituitary axis is the primary regulator of thyroid hormone production and secretion (Figure 4.8). Thyrotropin-releasing hormone (TRH) from the hypothalamus travels to the anterior pituitary and stimulates it to release thyroid-stimulating hormone (TSH). TSH influences every step of the thyroid production process, from thyroid cell growth to iodide uptake and metabolism. Finally, TSH triggers hormone secretion. TSH release is stimulated and inhibited by positive and negative feedback, based on circulating levels of T4 and T3. When these hormones are in short supply, the pituitary and hypothalamus act on the thyroid to increase its production. Conversely, when too much of these hormones circulate in

The Endocrine System 183

Figure 4.8 Thyroid Hormone Regulation. (1) TRH from the hypothalamus triggers TSH secretion from the pituitary, (2) TSH stimulates thyroid hormone release, and (3) circulating levels of T4 and T3 influence the hypothalamus and pituitary to regulate thyroid production. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

the blood, the pituitary and hypothalamus slow or stop thyroid production. Feedback ensures that hormone levels remain at an appropriate level. Also controlling thyroid hormone secretion is the conversion of T4 into T3. As more T4 is converted into T3, rising T3 levels make the pituitary less responsive to TRH. But as more T4 is lost because of this conversion, the pituitary once again becomes more sensitive to TRH stimulation.

The Parathyroid Glands
Most healthy adults have two pairs of oval-shaped parathyroid glands, which lie next to the thyroid gland in the neck (the word “parathyroid”

184 Stephanie Watson and Kelli Miller Stacy

means “beside the thyroid”). In some instances, individuals may have fewer than or more than four parathyroid glands. Inside the glands are clusters of epithelial cells that produce and secrete parathyroid hormone, which is the most significant regulator of calcium levels in the blood. Calcium is essential for cell function as well as for bone formation. The parathyroid glands produce only one major hormone: parathyroid hormone (PTH). PTH (also called parathormone), a polypeptide, opposes the actions of calcitonin by increasing blood calcium levels. Without this hormone, calcium concentrations in the blood would drop to life-threatening levels (hypocalcemia). Another effect of PTH is to reduce blood levels of phosphorous. The parathyroids synthesize PTH from a larger, inactive prohormone in the parenchymal parathyroid cell. As PTH is released from the cell, it is split from the prohormone. PTH increases blood calcium by acting upon the bones, the kidneys, and (indirectly) the small intestine: • • Bone: PTH releases calcium from bone by stimulating the formation and activity of bone-dissolving cells called osteoclasts. Kidneys: PTH increases calcium reabsorption in the kidney tubules, reducing the amount of calcium that is lost in the urine. Because the kidneys filter a large volume of calcium each day, even a slight adjustment in excreted calcium can have a big effect on body chemistry. PTH also decreases phosphorous reabsorption, so the kidneys excrete a greater amount. Small Intestine: The effects of PTH on the small intestine are indirect. PTH increases production of vitamin D metabolites (the active form of vitamin D) in the kidneys (more on vitamin D later in this chapter). These metabolites increase the rate at which ingested calcium is absorbed in the small intestine, providing more calcium to circulate in the bloodstream.



PTH Regulation
Because blood calcium levels are so crucial to normal body function, cells of the parathyroid contain special receptors that can sense minute changes in calcium concentration. When calcium binds to these receptors, it results

The Endocrine System 185

in reduced PTH secretion, which lowers calcium concentration in the blood. Without the influence of bound calcium, the receptors continue to stimulate PTH secretion. In the event that blood calcium levels remain depressed, PTH secretion can increase to 50 times its normal levels.

Parathyroid Hormone-related Protein (PTHrP)
PTHrP is similar in structure and function to parathyroid hormone (it too affects calcium and phosphorous balance), but it is produced in many tissues throughout the body. PTHrP binds to PTH receptors and has several of its own receptors as well. PTHrP can either act upon cells in other parts of the body or influence the nucleus of the cell(s) in which it was produced (called intracrine action). Like PTH, it releases calcium from bone into the blood and increases reabsorption in the kidneys.

The Adrenal Glands and Endocrine Pancreas
The adrenal glands are often referred to as the fight-or-flight glands because they secrete hormones involved in the body’s stress response (Figure 4.9). The small, triangular glands sit on top of each kidney, surrounded by a capsule of connective tissue. When the body is confronted with stress—a serious car accident or a career-ending confrontation with one’s boss, for example—the two adrenal glands kick into gear. The substances they produce (the catecholamines from the adrenal medulla and the steroid hormones from the adrenal cortex) orchestrate the stress response, making the body more alert, more energy efficient, and ready to face the daunting task at hand. Adrenal hormones are also involved in a number of other functions: regulating electrolyte balance, blood sugar levels, and metabolism; and influencing sexual characteristics. Like the pituitary gland, the adrenals are essentially two glands in one: an outer cortex and an inner medulla. Each region originates from a separate embryological source, functions separately, and produces its own distinct hormones.

Adrenal Medulla
Hormones produced in the central, medullary region of the adrenal gland are referred to as the catecholamines. They are both hormones and

186 Stephanie Watson and Kelli Miller Stacy

Figure 4.9 The fight-or-flight response. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

neurotransmitters, because they are produced and secreted by sympathetic nerves (including neurons in the brain). The primary catecholamines are epinephrine (adrenaline), norepinephrine (noradrenaline), and dopamine. Catecholamines are produced in a multistep process that begins with the amino acid tyrosine. First, an enzyme converts tyrosine into the chemical L-dopa. A second enzyme converts L-dopa to dopamine. Dopamine is then converted to norepinephrine by yet another enzyme. Finally, epinephrine is synthesized from norepinephrine before being released into the blood. Epinephrine makes up the bulk (80 percent) of catecholamines released from the adrenal medulla; the remaining 20 percent is norepinephrine. Catecholamine release is part of what Harvard physiologist Walter Cannon (1871–1945) termed the body’s fight-or-flight response. When confronted with stress, the body shifts into overdrive. It becomes more

The Endocrine System 187

alert and refocuses energy as it prepares to either stay and fight the danger or run away as quickly as possible. As soon as the physical or emotional trauma occurs, the hypothalamus sounds the alarm. It sends out nerve impulses, which race to the adrenal medulla and signal it to release epinephrine and norepinephrine. These substances course through the blood attached to carrier proteins such as albumin, and they bind to adrenergic receptors on the surface of their target cells. Two types of adrenergic receptors exist: alpha-adrenergic and betaadrenergic. The response elicited depends on the type of receptor stimulated. Alpha receptors are involved in smooth muscle contractions, pupil dilation, and blood vessel contraction. Beta receptors stimulate the heart and lungs, and relax the uterus. Once the hormones are bound to their receptors, the body undergoes a rapid and dramatic transformation. The heart beats faster and stronger, the pupils dilate, the skin breaks out in a sweat, and the breathing becomes more intense as the body reaches a new level of alertness. Under the surface, a number of important physiological changes occur, directed by the adrenal catecholamines: • The heart beats faster and more forcefully (primarily as a result of epinephrine), rushing additional blood throughout the body (especially to the brain and muscles). At the same time, the arteries constrict (primarily as a result of norepinephrine), increasing blood pressure. Stored glucose and fatty acids are freed to be used for energy. Catecholamines release glucose from the liver and muscles by stimulating the breakdown (glycogenolysis) of glycogen—the stored form of glucose. They also release fatty acids from adipose tissue by breaking down fatty compounds called triglycerides. The catecholamines oppose the action of insulin by preventing glucose movement into muscle and adipose tissue. Glucose is therefore preserved for use by the brain, which needs it most. The metabolic rate increases. Oxygen consumption and body heat rise. In the lungs, small tubules called bronchioles dilate, increasing the flow of air.



• •

188 Stephanie Watson and Kelli Miller Stacy

• •

Smooth muscles in the gastrointestinal tract and sphincters contract, while muscles in the uterus and trachea relax. Motor activity, gastrointestinal secretion, and other nonessential activities slow to conserve energy for other, more crucial functions.

Dopamine, a neurotransmitter, is similar to epinephrine. It influences the brain processes controlling emotion, movement, and the sensations of pleasure and pain. When dopamine is not produced in large enough quantities (for example, in patients with Parkinson’s disease), the body grows rigid, and movement becomes difficult.

Adrenal Cortex
The large outer region of the adrenal gland, the cortex is made up of three layers or zones, each of which produces its own group of steroid hormones: • • • Zona glomerulosa, the outermost layer, is where the mineralocorticoids (aldosterone) are produced. Zona fasciculata, the middle layer, is where the glucocorticoids (cortisol) are produced. Zona reticularis, the innermost layer, is where the gonadocorticoids (sex hormones androgens and estrogens) are produced.

The adrenal cortex is separated into two functional regions, each regulated by a separate entity. The fasciculata and reticularis layers depend upon adrenocorticotropic hormone (ACTH) stimulation from the anterior pituitary. Without ACTH, these two regions would atrophy. The zona glomerulosa is under the control of the renin-angiotensin system, which regulates blood pressure. Mineralocorticoids, glucocorticoids, and gonadocorticods are all steroid hormones derived from cholesterol. Most of the cholesterol that enters the adrenal gland comes from low-density lipoproteins (LDLs) circulating in the blood. Upon stimulation of the adrenal cortex, cholesterol that splits off from the LDL is converted into pregnenolone, the precursor molecule for steroid hormones. The adrenal gland can also synthesize a small amount of its own cholesterol.

The Endocrine System 189

Mineralocorticoids
The principal mineralocorticoid, aldosterone, is produced and secreted by the zona glomerulosa. Aldosterone acts upon the kidneys to regulate sodium, potassium, and water reabsorption. It stimulates the distal tubules to reabsorb more sodium and excrete more potassium (as well as hydrogen) in the urine. As sodium is reabsorbed, more water is also reabsorbed, increasing blood fluid volume. Aldosterone also acts upon the salivary glands, sweat glands, and colon to reduce the amount of sodium lost in saliva, sweat, and feces. Sodium and potassium balance is crucial, because these fluids regulate fluid movement between the cells and the extracellular fluid. Without aldosterone, a deadly fluid imbalance could result. When too much sodium is present, water from inside the cells crosses over into the extracellular region to restore balance, causing the cells to shrink—a situation that could lead to shock and death. Too little sodium can send water into the cells, causing them to swell and potentially leading to nausea, vomiting, diarrhea, convulsions, or coma. Aldosterone release is primarily under the control of the reninangiotensin system, which helps regulate blood volume and blood pressure. Inside the blood vessels of the kidneys are tiny receptors that can detect changes in blood pressure and extracellular fluid volume. When these sensors notice a drop in pressure and volume, they release the enzyme renin into the blood. Renin travels to the liver, where it converts the protein angiotensinogen into another protein, called angiotensin I. Once angiotensin I reaches the lungs, it is converted by angiotensinconverting enzyme (ACE) into the much more potent hormone, angiotensin II, which constricts the blood vessels and stimulates the zona glomerulosa to synthesize aldosterone, raising blood pressure.

Glucocorticoids (Corticosteroids): Cortisol (Hydrocortisone)
The principal glucocorticoid, cortisol, is produced in the zona fasciculata and is sometimes referred to as the “stress hormone.” Like the catecholamines from the adrenal medulla, it helps the body respond during times of stress (for example, injury or emotional trauma). Cortisol is essential because of

190 Stephanie Watson and Kelli Miller Stacy

its effects on metabolism: It maintains the body’s energy (glucose) supply and regulates fluid balance. Without it, the body could overreact to stress and disrupt the fragile homeostatic balance that it needs to stay alive. The testes, erythrocytes, kidney medulla, and especially the brain rely on glucose as their sole energy source. Without it, they cannot function properly. After a meal, blood levels of glucose are typically high and the body is able to store whatever it does not immediately use. But glucose stores are not everlasting. Glycogen, the form of glucose stored in the liver, can run out within 24 hours after a meal. During periods of fasting, cortisol maintains blood glucose levels by affecting a number of metabolic processes.

Glucose, Fat, and Protein Metabolism
In the muscles and other tissues, cortisol increases the breakdown of protein into amino acids. Those amino acids are used to produce additional glucose (via a metabolic pathway called gluconeogenesis) in the liver. Cortisol also conserves glucose for the brain and spinal cord by blocking the actions of insulin (which will be discussed later in this chapter)— inhibiting glucose absorption into other tissues. Cortisol also stimulates the release of fatty acids and glycerol from adipose tissue. Glycerol is used in gluconeogenesis, while fatty acids are made available for energy to other tissues to preserve glucose for the brain. Cortisol reduces protein reserves everywhere except in the liver. As proteins continue to be broken down in muscles and in other tissues, blood levels of amino acids rise. The additional amino acids are used for gluconeogenesis, glycogen formation, and protein synthesis in the liver.

The Pancreas
The pancreas has two roles: It functions both as an endocrine and as an exocrine organ. As an exocrine organ, the pancreas releases digestive enzymes via a small duct into the small intestine. These enzymes break down carbohydrates, fats, and proteins from food that has been partially digested by the stomach. The exocrine pancreas also releases a bicarbonate to neutralize stomach acid in the duodenum (first portion) of the small intestine. In its role as an endocrine organ, the pancreas secretes the hormones insulin and glucagon, which help the body use and store its primary source

The Endocrine System 191

of energy—glucose (sugar). The endocrine pancreas also secretes somatostatin, which is a primary regulator of insulin and glucagon release. The pancreas is long and soft, and stretches from the duodenum of the small intestine almost to the spleen. It is divided into a head (its widest point), neck, body, and tail. The endocrine pancreas is made up of clusters of cells called the islets of Langerhans, in which the hormones insulin and glucagon are produced. There are about one million islets, but they make up only about 1 percent of the endocrine pancreas’ total volume. The islets also contain parasympathetic and sympathetic neurons, which influence insulin and glucagon secretion. The islets also produce the hormones somatostatin and pancreatic polypeptide.

Energy Metabolism
Why are insulin and glucagon so crucial? Because the body needs energy to survive, and these two hormones regulate the distribution of energy to tissues. Energy enters the body in the form of food. As food passes through the mouth, esophagus, and stomach, enzymes break it down into tiny pieces. Once the partially digested food reaches the intestines, more enzymes go to work, breaking it down into molecules small enough to enter the bloodstream and be transported to cells. Starches are broken down into glucose (sugar), proteins are broken down into amino acids, and fats are broken down into fatty acids and glycerol. Food metabolism occurs in two distinct phases: During the anabolic phase, which occurs after a meal, enzymes convert nutrients from food into substances the body can use. Blood levels of glucose, fatty acids, and amino acids rise. Because the body has more energy than it needs at the moment, it stores the excess for later. Glucose is stored as glycogen in the liver and muscles, fat is stored in adipose tissue, and amino acids are stored in muscle. About four to six hours after a meal, the catabolic phase begins. Stored energy from the liver, muscles, and adipose tissue is mobilized to sustain the body until its next meal. The liver produces glucose from stored glycogen and by converting amino acids via gluconeogenesis. When the body has gone for some time without food, the liver converts free fatty acids into ketone bodies. The brain normally uses only glucose

192 Stephanie Watson and Kelli Miller Stacy

for energy, but it can use ketone bodies as a backup energy source when glucose supplies are low. Without this alternative energy source, the brain and nervous system would starve and suffer permanent damage. The hormones insulin and glucagon from the endocrine pancreas regulate these stages of energy metabolism. Insulin primarily regulates the anabolic phase, while glucagon influences the catabolic stage.

Insulin
After a meal, the body converts carbohydrates from foods into simple sugars in the intestine. Glucose is carried to the tissues through the bloodstream. When blood glucose levels rise, the beta cells in the endocrine pancreas produce and release insulin. Insulin is formed from a larger, inactive molecule, called proinsulin. Before insulin is released into the bloodstream, the inactive molecule splits off. For a look at diabetes, a chronic condition involving insulin production, see Sidebar 4.1. Insulin levels rise 8–10 minutes after a meal, reaching their peak concentration 30–45 minutes after the meal. Nearly every cell in the body has insulin receptors. When insulin binds to its receptors on the cell surface, it triggers other receptors that help the cells take in glucose. The body uses and stores glucose in the liver, muscles, and adipose tissues. Without insulin, an individual could eat three meals a day and still starve to death because the cells would be unable to use the energy. In the liver, insulin promotes glucose storage in the form of glycogen. It also inhibits the breakdown of glycogen and the production of glucose from other, noncarbohydrate sources (gluconeogenesis), and it decreases overall glucose release by the liver. Insulin helps transport glucose to muscle cells and stimulates the incorporation of amino acids into protein, which is used to sustain and repair muscles. It promotes glycogen synthesis to replace glucose the muscles have used. Insulin also promotes glucose uptake in adipose tissue, promotes its conversion to fatty acids, and inhibits the release of stored fatty acids. As insulin moves glucose into the tissues for energy use and storage, blood glucose levels fall. Between 90 and 120 minutes after a meal, blood glucose concentration returns to its original, pre-meal levels. To help the

The Endocrine System 193

SIDEBAR 4.1

Understanding Diabetes: The Key to Staying Healthy
Diabetes is a serious, chronic condition involving the endocrine system. It is defined as a disease where patients have elevated levels of blood glucose or sugar that results from defects in either or both insulin production and action. According to the most recent estimates from the National Institute of Diabetes and Digestive and Kidney Diseases (NIDDK), 23.6 million people—over 7 percent of the population—have diabetes. Of particular concern is that of these over 20 million people with diabetes, almost 6 million are undiagnosed. This is especially dangerous because diabetes can lead to serious complication—even premature death—if patients do not control the disease and lower the risk of complications. There are three primary types of diabetes, and below is a brief explanation of each of these types: • Type 1 Diabetes: Formerly known as insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus or juvenile-onset diabetes, type 1 diabetes occurs when the body’s immune system destroys the cells in the body—called pancreatic beta cells—that produce insulin that regulates blood glucose levels. Patients with this type of diabetes use either a pump or injection device to deliver insulin into their body. While type 1 diabetes typically develops in children and young adults, it can develop in people of any age. In fact, type 1 diabetes accounts for 5–10 percent of all diagnosed cases of diabetes. There is currently no known way to prevent this type the diabetes. Some risk factors are believed to be linked to autoimmune, genetic, or environmental factors. Type 2 Diabetes: Formerly known as non-insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus, this type of the disease is estimated to comprise 90–95 percent of all diagnosed cases of diabetes in adults. Diagnosis is typically preceded by an inability of the cells to properly produce insulin—a condition known as insulin resistance. The need for insulin steadily increases while the pancreas generally loses the ability to produce it. This type of diabetes has several known risk factors: older age, obesity, family history of the disease, and lack of physical activity. In



194 Stephanie Watson and Kelli Miller Stacy

addition, experts believe that race/ethnicity can be a risk factor. Medical experts believe that African Americans, Hispanic/Latino Americans, Native Americans, and some Asian Americans and Native Hawaiians or other Pacific Islanders have an increased risk for type 2 diabetes. • Gestational Diabetes: This type of diabetes is related to glucose intolerance and is diagnosed in pregnant women—occuring more frequently among African American, Hispanic/Latino American, and Native American women. Obesity and family history are also risk factors for diabetes. During pregnancy, treatment is focused on normalizing glucose levels to protect the infant. After pregnancy, however, an estimated 5–10 percent of women with gestational diabetes are diagnosed with type 2 diabetes. In addition, women with gestational diabetes are at an increased chance—40–60 percent—of developing type 2 diabetes over the next 5–10 years.

If not treated and controlled properly, diabetes can lead to serious complications, including blindness, kidney damage, cardiovascular disease, and amputations of lower limbs. The risk of these complications can be lowered by controlling blood glucose, blood pressure, and blood lipid levels. As mentioned earlier, many type 1 and 2 diabetes patients need insulin delivered by injection or a pump. Some patients also have to take other medications to control related conditions, such as high blood pressure. However, some patients take little or no medications—even insulin—by following a healthy meal and exercise plan. According to the NIDDK, among adults with type 1 or 2 diabetes, an estimated 14 percent take only insulin, 13 percent take both insulin and oral medication, 57 percent take oral medication only, and 16 percent do not take either insulin or oral medication. The treatment regimen for each individual will often change over the course of the disease. Among diagnosed diabetics—type 1 or type 2—14 percent take insulin only, 13 percent take both insulin and oral medication, 57 percent take oral medication only, and 16 percent do not take either insulin or oral medication. Medications for each individual with diabetes will often change over the course of the disease.

The Endocrine System 195

body maintain a constant blood glucose level, insulin and glucagon release are synchronized on an alternate schedule. When glucose concentrations in the blood rise during the anabolic phase, insulin is released. As insulin pulls glucose from the blood for tissue use and storage, blood glucose concentrations drop, stimulating glucagon release. Insulin release may also be triggered by signals from the nervous system in response to external stimulation; for example, the sight and/or smell of food. The gastrointestinal hormones cholecystokinin (CCK), secretin, gastrin, gastric inhibitory peptide (GIP), and acetylcholine are thought to play a role in this response, preparing the pancreas to release insulin. Insulin release is inhibited not only by low glucose levels, but also by low levels of amino acids and fatty acids in the blood, as well as by the hormones somatostatin, epinephrine, and leptin.

Glucagon
Following a meal, insulin pulls glucose from the blood to be used and stored by cells. When several hours have passed without additional food being ingested, blood sugar is eventually depleted (a condition called hypoglycemia). The body still needs energy, much of which it gets from fatty acids until the next meal is available. But the brain, which cannot directly use fatty acids and other alternative energy sources, still relies on glucose. In response to dropping blood glucose levels, the alpha (α) cells of the endocrine pancreas begin to secrete the hormone glucagon from the large precursor molecule proglucagon. The same prohormone is found in cells of the gastrointestinal system, although it produces different secreted products. Glucagon has the opposite effect of insulin. Whereas insulin lowers blood glucose levels by promoting glucose usage and storage, glucagon raises blood glucose levels. It acts primarily upon the liver to increase glucose output. When it binds to receptors on liver cells, glucagon activates the enzymes that break down stored glycogen (glycogenolysis) to release glucose and increases production of glucose from amino acid precursors (a process called gluconeogenesis). In adipose tissue, glucagon promotes the breakdown and release of fatty acids (lipolysis) into the blood, which are used by the cells for energy in the absence of glucose. By raising the

196 Stephanie Watson and Kelli Miller Stacy

level of fatty acids in the blood, glucagon indirectly prevents glucose uptake by the muscles and adipose tissue. The main trigger for glucagon release is low blood sugar, but it may also be stimulated by other hormones, namely the catecholamines (in stressful situations); cholecystokinin, gastrin, and gastric inhibitory peptide (GIP) from the gastrointestinal system; and the glucocorticoids. Sympathetic nerve stimulation can also lead to glucagon release. Rising blood glucose levels, high circulating levels of fatty acids, as well as the hormones insulin and somatostatin inhibit glucagon secretion.

Somatostatin
The hormone somatostatin is produced in the delta () cells of the pancreatic islets as well as in the gastrointestinal tract and hypothalamus. Somatostatin is primarily an inhibitory agent. In the pancreas, it acts in a paracrine manner, suppressing production of insulin and glucagon. It also acts upon the gastrointestinal tract, inhibiting secretion of the hormones gastrin, secretin, and cholecystokinin; prolonging gastric emptying time; decreasing gastric acid and gastrin production; and slowing intestinal motility. Together, these actions reduce the rate of nutrient absorption. When secreted from the hypothalamus, somatostatin acts upon the pituitary to inhibit growth hormone secretion. Somatostatin release is triggered by rising levels of glucose, fatty acids, and amino acids in the blood. Gastrointestinal hormones like secretin and cholecystokinin can also stimulate its release. Insulin inhibits somatostatin secretion.

Gastrointestinal Hormones
The intestinal tract not only digests food and absorbs nutrients; it also produces and secretes a number of hormones that aid in the digestive process. Gastrointestinal hormones, which are primarily peptides, are produced in specialized endocrine cells in the stomach and small intestine, as well as in neurons scattered throughout the gastrointestinal tract. Most gastrointestinal hormones either act upon nearby cells (paracrine delivery) or act as neurotransmitters within neurons (neurocrine delivery). Endocrine and

The Endocrine System 197

neural cells in the intestinal tract are referred to collectively as the enteric endocrine system. The central nervous system and gastrointestinal tract are linked by pathways known as the brain-gut axis. Neurotransmitters located in both the brain and the gut regulate and coordinate such functions as satiety, nutrient absorption, gut motility, and intestinal blood flow. Any disruption of this system is believed to result in gastrointestinal disorders such as irritable bowel syndrome (IBS).

Gastrin
This hormone, produced by specialized cells in the stomach, regulates stomach acid secretion. When partially digested proteins, peptides, and amino acids are present in the stomach, gastrin stimulates the release of gastric acid and the digestive enzyme, pepsin, into the stomach cavity to aid digestion. Beer, wine, and coffee can also stimulate gastrin release. As the stomach becomes more acidic, gastrin production declines.

Cholecrystokinin (CCK)
Food entering the small intestine must be broken down into smaller molecules (such as amino acids and fatty acids) in order to be absorbed. When partially digested proteins and fats enter the duodenum (first portion) of the intestine, cells in that region secrete the peptide hormone CCK. This hormone triggers the release of pancreatic enzymes and stimulates gallbladder contractions to release stored bile. Pancreatic enzymes and bile are sent to the intestines, where they aid in digestion. As proteins and fats are digested and absorbed, a drop in their levels shuts off CCK release. CCK is also released as a neurotransmitter by the central nervous system. Scientists believe that it may help regulate food intake by signaling the feeling of satiety.

Secretin
The stomach regularly secretes acid, which could potentially burn and damage the small intestine. When acid enters the duodenum, cells lining the region release secretin. This hormone stimulates the pancreas to

198 Stephanie Watson and Kelli Miller Stacy

release acid-neutralizing bicarbonate and water. As acid in the intestine is neutralized, the rising pH level shuts off secretin release. Somatostatin also inhibits secretin production.

Gastric Inhibitory Peptide (GIP)
Gastric inhibitory peptide (GIP), also called glucose-dependent insulinotropic peptide, is part of the secretin family of hormones, and like secretin, it is released by cells in the duodenum. It blocks gastrin and gastric acid secretion into the stomach and inhibits gut motility. Following a meal, GIP responds to increased glucose levels, enhancing the insulin response to glucose.

Vasoactive Intestinal Polypeptide
This peptide is found throughout the body but is secreted in greatest concentration by cells in the intestinal tract and nervous system. VIP increases secretion of water and electrolytes by the intestine, increases blood flow within the gut, and inhibits gastric acid secretion.

Ghrelin
This peptide hormone, secreted by epithelial cells in the stomach, stimulates growth hormone secretion from the pituitary gland. In the gastrointestinal system, ghrelin stimulates the sensation of hunger by communicating the body’s energy needs to the brain. Ghrelin levels in the blood are highest during the fasting state several hours after a meal, and lowest just after food consumption. Scientists are investigating ghrelin’s role in obesity, in the hope of one day discovering more effective weight control methods.

Motilin
As its name suggests, motilin controls movement (smooth muscle contractions) in the gut. In between meals, cells in the duodenum secrete small bursts of motilin into the blood at regular intervals. Motilin contracts and releases smooth muscles in the intestine wall to clean undigested materials from the intestine.

The Endocrine System 199

Substance P
The neuropeptide substance P, found in both the brain and gastrointestinal system, stimulates smooth muscle contractions and epithelial cell growth. It may also be involved in inflammatory conditions of the gut. In the brain, substance P has been linked to both the pain and pleasure responses. It is released from enteric neurons in response to central nervous system stimulation, serotonin, and CCK, and it is inhibited by somatostatin.

Endocrine Functions of the Sex Glands
Sex Glands
The sex glands (ovaries in the female and testes in the male) serve as both reproductive and endocrine organs. They produce the eggs and sperm that form the basis of human life. They also synthesize and secrete the sex steroids—testosterone, estrogen, and progesterone. These hormones give males and females their individual sexual characteristics, and play a key role in reproduction. The two bean-shaped ovaries (Figure 4.10) sit on either side of the female uterus, just below the openings to the fallopian tubes. Like the adrenal glands, the ovaries contain an outer cortex and an inner medulla. The medulla consists primarily of connective tissue containing blood vessels, smooth muscle, and nerves. The real activity occurs in the larger outer cortex, which holds the follicles in which the eggs develop. Eggs are stored inside these follicles until they are ready to be released on their journey through the fallopian tubes, where they may ultimately be fertilized by sperm. Also inside the cortex are specialized cells that produce and secrete the steroid hormones estrogen and progesterone, as well as less potent male hormones (androgens). Ovarian sex hormones are produced and released in response to follicle-stimulating hormone (FSH) and luteinizing hormone (LH) from the anterior pituitary. Once released, estrogens and progestins influence the development of the female reproductive organs and sexual characteristics. On the side of each ovary is a small notch, called the hilum, through which blood vessels and nerves enter and exit. The ovaries and testes are necessary for reproduction: Without them, the human species could no longer reproduce. Along with their central

200 Stephanie Watson and Kelli Miller Stacy

Figure 4.10

The ovaries. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

functions—producing and sustaining the eggs and sperm—the sex glands have a number of other crucial tasks. As part of the endocrine system, they produce and secrete the sex hormones, which are involved in sexual maturation, differentiation, and function, as well as metabolism and bone growth.

The Ovaries
The ovaries are the female reproductive organs. Inside the ovaries, the eggs, or ova, develop and are nourished until they are ready to be released into the fallopian tubes. The eggs form and develop by a process known as oogenesis. In the developing female embryo are primordial germ cells, from which the fundamental egg cells develop. These cells remain dormant until a girl reaches puberty, then develop into the mature eggs,

The Endocrine System 201

which are released one at a time in a process known as ovulation. Like the adrenal gland, each ovary is constructed of an outer cortex and an inner medulla. The cortex contains tiny sacs called follicles. Ovarian follicles consist of two types of cells: theca and granulosa. Nestled inside each follicle is an immature egg, surrounded by a layer of granulosa cells. A woman is born with every egg (about a million of them) that she will ever possess. Once these eggs are used up, she will no longer be able to conceive. The ovarian follicles normally remain in an inactive state. These socalled primordial follicles lie in wait for hormonal stimulation that will help them mature and prepare them for possible fertilization. During each menstrual cycle, follicle-stimulating hormone (FSH) from the pituitary stimulates a few of these eggs. Typically, only one egg completes the ovulation process.

Follicular Phase
During this phase, which lasts 10–16 days, gonadotropin-releasing hormone (GnRH) from the hypothalamus triggers the release of folliclestimulating hormone (FSH) and luteinizing hormone (LH) from the anterior pituitary. FSH and estrogen stimulate the development of between 6 and 12 primary follicles. LH causes the follicles to produce estrogen. Between days 5 and 7 of the cycle, one of the follicles ripens (in the case of a multiple pregnancy, more than one follicle has ripened) and becomes ready for ovulation. As the dominant follicle develops, estrogen levels rise, inhibiting FSH secretion. Without FSH stimulation, the other follicles begin to wither away.

Ovulatory Phase
At the end of the follicular cycle, estrogen levels peak. Estrogen normally suppresses gonadotropin production, but in this case, rising estrogen levels trigger a surge in LH and FSH (usually around day 13 of the cycle). The hormonal surge lasts between 24 and 36 hours, at the end of which the dominant follicle ruptures and releases its egg from the ovary. This is called ovulation.

202 Stephanie Watson and Kelli Miller Stacy

Luteal Phase
Following ovulation, the erupted follicle transforms into a body called the corpus luteum. The corpus luteum begins to secrete estrogen and progesterone under the influence of luteinizing hormone from the pituitary. Estrogen and progesterone prepare the uterus for implantation and are necessary to maintain a pregnancy. If the egg is fertilized, the corpus luteum remains intact and continues to secrete estrogen and progesterone throughout the first trimester of pregnancy. The luteal phase lasts for about 14 days.

Menstrual Phase
If the egg is not fertilized, production of progesterone and estrogen in the corpus luteum diminishes. The uterine lining, which has become rich with blood vessels to nourish the growing embryo, is no longer needed. Small arteries in the lining constrict, cutting off oxygen and nutrients. The cells die and slough off (known as menstruation). The corpus luteum undergoes a process known as luteolysis. It degenerates, becomes unable to produce hormones, and is finally replaced by scar tissue. As steroid production by the corpus luteum decreases, FSH secretion increases, stimulating the development of new follicles and initiating a new menstrual cycle. Menstruation lasts for four to five days. In addition to providing a site for egg development, the ovaries produce several steroid and peptide hormones. Steroid hormones (estrogens, progesterone, and androgens) are produced in the follicular cells. Like all steroid hormones, they are produced from cholesterol, which is both present in the ovaries and transported to the ovaries in the form of lowdensity lipoproteins (LDLs). Peptide hormones (relaxin, inhibin, oxytocin, and vasopressin) are produced in the follicular cells and within the corpus luteum.

Estrogen
The primary female sex hormones produced in the ovaries, estrogens play a role in the development of sexual characteristics and help regulate the reproductive cycle. The three estrogens—estradiol, estriol, and estrone— are produced in the thecal and granulosa cells in the developing follicles.

The Endocrine System 203

Estradiol is the most powerful—and most plentiful—of the three estrogens. It is made from the androgens testosterone and androstenedione, which are produced in the thecal cells under the influence of luteinizing hormone. In the granulosa cells, follicle-stimulating hormone helps convert these androgens into estradiol (and estrone). At the onset of puberty, estradiol influences maturation of the reproductive organs (uterus, fallopian tubes, cervix, and vagina) and redistributes fat to the hips, buttocks, thighs, and breasts to produce a more feminine, curvy shape. Estradiol also influences the menstrual cycle by stimulating and inhibiting the release of LH and FSH. Normally, estradiol acts upon the hypothalamus to inhibit GnRH secretion, which prevents the release of LH from the anterior pituitary. But at the end of the follicular phase of the menstrual cycle, rising estradiol concentrations trigger the surge of LH that initiates ovulation. Most of the estriol in a woman’s body is produced not in her ovaries but in her liver, where it is converted from estrone and (by a more indirect route) estradiol. This relatively weak hormone may actually act as a partial agonist–partial antagonist by blocking receptors that would otherwise be occupied by the stronger estrogen, estradiol. During pregnancy, estriol is secreted in large quantities by the placenta. Doctors test a mother’s urine for this hormone to assess the viability of her pregnancy. Estrone, the weakest of the three estrogens, is primarily converted from estradiol or androstenedione (from the adrenal cortex). It is similar in function, although not as potent, as estradiol. Following menopause, estrone production increases due to increased conversion of androstenedione. When the estrogens are secreted into the bloodstream, they travel bound to proteins—mainly albumin and sex hormone-binding globulin (SHBG). Once they arrive at their target cells, estrogens bind to an intracellular protein, which carries them to the nucleus. There, they influence protein synthesis.

Progestins
Progestins are primarily designed to maintain and support a pregnancy. Synthetic versions can also prevent a pregnancy. The most significant progestin is progesterone. It is produced by the corpus luteum after the egg

204 Stephanie Watson and Kelli Miller Stacy

has been released from the follicle. If the egg is fertilized, the corpus luteum continues to produce progesterone for the first trimester of pregnancy until the placenta takes over production. Progesterone prepares the mother’s body for pregnancy by thickening the uterine lining to nourish the growing embryo. It then maintains the viability of the pregnancy by stopping additional follicles from becoming mature and by preventing uterine contractions. Progesterone travels through the blood bound to corticosteroidbinding globulin (CBG) and albumin. Its other actions are to stimulate breast growth and development (along with estrogen); influence carbohydrate, protein, and fat metabolism; and decrease the body’s responsiveness to insulin (as sometimes occurs during pregnancy).

The Testes
The testes, like the female ovaries, serve both reproductive and endocrine functions (Figure 4.11). They are made up of a network of tubules

Figure 4.11

The testes. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

The Endocrine System 205

(seminiferous tubules) that produce and carry sperm, interspersed with cells in which androgens (male hormones) are produced. The testes contain two types of cells: Sertoli cells: These cells, which line the seminiferous tubules, surround and nourish the germ cells from which sperm develop, and they facilitate the journey of sperm out of the testes. Sertoli cells also produce androgen-binding protein, which maintains high levels of androgens in the testes and seminal fluids, as well as many peptides (inhibin, activin, and follistatin) that regulate testicular function. Leydig cells: In between the seminiferous tubules are the cells in which testosterone, the primary androgen, is produced.

Sperm Production
Production of sperm in the Sertoli cells depends upon stimulation by follicle-stimulating hormone (FSH) from the anterior pituitary and by testosterone. When FSH binds to androgen receptors on Sertoli cells, it stimulates the production of androgen-binding protein. This protein keeps levels of testosterone in the seminiferous tubules high. FSH stimulates sperm production and maturation. As androgen levels rise, Sertoli cells begin to secrete inhibin, which inhibits FSH release from the pituitary.

Testicular Hormones
The testes produce a number of hormones, including testosterone, dihydrotestosterone, androstenedione, and estradiol. Testosterone is by far the most plentiful, and most important, of these hormones. Like other steroid hormones, testosterone is synthesized from cholesterol. Its release is initiated by gonadotropin-releasing hormone (GnRH) from the hypothalamus, which stimulates the release of luteinizing hormone (LH) from the pituitary. LH stimulates the Leydig cells to produce and secrete testosterone. In a classic negative-feedback loop, elevated testosterone levels in the blood inhibit secretion of LH by acting on the hypothalamus and the anterior pituitary, both of which contain androgen receptors.

206 Stephanie Watson and Kelli Miller Stacy

Testosterone travels through the blood bound to carrier proteins— typically either sex hormone–binding globulin (SHBG) or albumin. When it reaches its target cell, it binds to the androgen receptor.

Summary
The human body must have certain communications in place that coordinate the function of all of its organs, muscles, nerves, and tissues. There are actually two communication centers in the human body—the nervous system and the endocrine system. While the nervous system communicates through electrical impulses traveling throughout the body as part of a nerve network, the endocrine system communicates through chemicals called hormones, which travel through the bloodstream. In fact, hormones actually control how the nervous system behaves through stimulation or inhibition. Hormones are secreted through the glands of the endocrine system. The glands are the hypothalamus, pituitary, thyroid, parathyroids, adrenal, pancreas, and sex glands.

5
The Integumentary System
Julie McDowell

Interesting Facts
• • • • • • • The entire body is covered with skin. This surface area is between 1.5 m2 and 2 m2. Skin makes up approximately 7 percent of the body’s weight. It weighs approximately 4 kg. It’s estimated that approximately 70 percent of household dust is made up of shed human skin. Between 30,000 and 40,000 dead skin cells drop off the body every minute. Nails grow an average of two centimeters every year, and fingernails grow almost four times as fast as toenails. There are approximately 10,000 hairs on a human head, with each hair growing a rate of five inches a year. Human hair is virtually impossible to destroy; it is resistant to extreme cold and heat (except for burning), water, and many types of acids and chemicals. Over the course of a lifetime, each human will shed an average of 40 pounds of skin.



207

208 Julie McDowell

• •

On average, each person loses between 80 and 100 hairs every day. Each human scalp has an average of 100,000 hairs.

Chapter Highlights
• • Skin: epidermis, dermis Skin’s accessory organs: hair and hair follicles, nail follicles

Words to Watch For
Blister Callus Cerumne Ceruminous glands Collagen Elastin Encapsulated nerve endings Eponychium Free nerve endings Hair Hair root Hair shaft Hyponchium Keratin Langerhans cells Lunula Melanin Melanoctyes Papillary layer Phagocytize Pore Sebaceous duct Sebaceous glands Skin Skin grafts Stratum corneum Stratum germinativum Sweat glands

Introduction
The integumentary system is made up of skin and the subcutaneous tissue, which is located right below the skin’s surface (Figure 5.1). This system also includes the skin’s two accessory structures, the hair and sweat glands, as well as glands and sensory receptors. Because it covers the entire surface of the body, it is an important protector of the body by keeping out substances that could be harmful. In fact, the skin is actually the body’s largest organ, and has many important roles, including helping to regulate the body’s temperature. (For more details on some of the jobs that the skin and subcutaneous tissue performs for the body, see Sidebar 5.1. Some of the jobs will be discussed in more detail throughout this chapter, as well as this encyclopedia.)

The Integumentary System 209

Figure 5.1 The Body’s Skin Structure. The body’s subcutaneous tissue. (Andreus/Dreamstime.com)

Skin
Epidermis
The skin has two primary layers: the epidermis (outer) and the dermis (inner). The epidermis has two important sublayers—the stratum germinativum and the stratum corneum. The epidermis is made up of cells called keratinocytes; these cells make up the epithelial tissue. It is in the epidermis layer where blisters and calluses can form. Blisters occur when friction—such as what might develop between the skin and the inside of a shoe—causes layers to separate within the epidermis or between the epidermis and the dermis. As these layers separate, tissue fluid may build up, leading to a blister. While blisters often result because of friction, calluses result from pressure. When exposed to increased amount of pressure, mitosis will occur at a rapid rate, causing the epidermis to thicken.

210 Julie McDowell

SIDEBAR 5.1

Skin: The Body’s Best Protector, and More
In addition to protecting the body from dangers related to the environment, the skin also has a number of other important jobs: • Regulating Body Temperature: The blood vessels in the dermis layer of the skin widen (vasodilate) and narrow (vasoconstric), allowing the production of sweat that cools the body. Sensing Pain: There is a thick collection of nerve endings located in the dermis that is sensitive to pain as well as pressure. These nerves communicate with the brain through the nervous system, informing the brain when danger is imminent, such as in the form of a hot surface (heat). Losing Too Much Water: Within the dermis layer, glands secrete a substance known as sebum. This spreads across the skin, enabling it to become waterproof. The dermis also has collagen fibers that soak up water. UV Protection: The skin produces a pigment called melanin, which filters the sun’s dangerous ultraviolet (UV) radiation. Manufacture of Vitamin D: Produced by the skin as a result of exposure to sunlight, vitamin D plays an important role in regulating how the body metabolizes calcium.





• •

Calluses can occur anywhere on the skin, although they are most often found on the palms of the hands and soles of the feet. Of the two epidermal sublayers, the innermost layer is the stratum germinativum. This is the surface where mitosis occurs, meaning that new cells are always being produced while older cells are forced to the skin’s surface. These new cells are producing a protein called keratin. As the older cells are pushed farther away from the dermis, they eventually die. These dead skin cells eventually make their way to the outer sublayer, the stratum corneum.

The Integumentary System 211

While the cells are dead by the time they get to the outer layer of the skin, they do still contain keratin. This protein is important to the skin— it is waterproof, prevents evaporation of water inside the body, and prevents water from entering the body through the skin. If the body did not have a waterproof statum corneum layer, we would not be able to take a bath or shower, or even swim without risking serious damage to our bodies. In addition to its waterproofing functions, the stratum corneum also protects the body from dangerous substances such as pathogens, like bacteria, and chemicals that could be dangerous. Of course, if skin is broken, then some of these substances can enter the body, which could lead to an infection. The body is even more vulnerable if it is burned, especially if the burn is so bad that the stratum corneum is destroyed (see Sidebar 5.2 for more information on the impact that burns can have on the body). The epidermis also contains two types of cells that are important protectors: the Langerhans cells and the melanoctyes. Langerhans cells originate in the bone marrow and are known for their ability to travel fast within the body. They need to be mobile, because they are an important part of the body’s immunity response. When a bacteria or other foreign substance enters the body through broken skin, the Langerhans cells ingest or phagocytize the pathogen, and then deliver it to the lymph nodes. There, a type of white blood cell called a lymphocyte prompts the start of the body’s immune response and antibodies are produced to neutralize any danger presented to the body by the pathogen. (For more detail on the body’s immune response, see Chapter 6 on the lymphatic system.) The second type of important cell in the epidermis, the melanocytes, produces a kind of protein called melanin (also known as pigment) that plays an important role in skin color. Skin color is genetic or hereditary, and is determined by how fast and how much melanin is produced by the body’s melanocytes. In dark-skinned people, their bodies are constantly producing a large amount of melanocytes, while light-skinned people’s bodies produce much less of this protein. But regardless of one’s skin color, exposure to the sun’s ultraviolet (UV) rays causes melanin production to ramp up. Change in a skin’s color—sunburn or tanning—is the result of excess melanin making its way from the epidermal cells to the skin’s surface. Another result of prolonged sun exposure is freckles, which

212 Julie McDowell

SIDEBAR 5.2

Burns
The skin can be burned by sources of heat, such as fire, steam, hot water, or sunlight. But it can also be burned by electricity or certain chemicals that are corrosive. Burn injuries can be minor or fatal. They are classified in three categories, according to the resulting damage: • First-degree Burns: While a first-degree burn can be painful (think of a bad sunburn), it is minor because only the superficial or outermost layer of the epidermis is affected. First-degree burns do not result in blisters on the skin’s surface. The skin will appear red, indicating an inflammatory response. The inflammation means that vasodilation is occurring, bringing additional blood to the burn site. Second-degree Burns: Blisters occur as a result of second-degree burns, which affected the deeper layers of the epidermis. In a second-degree burn, the inflammation prompts the release of histamine, causing the blood capillaries to release plasma. This plasma then becomes tissue fluid, which form into blisters as it collects on the skin’s surface. Third-degree Burns: These burns destroy the entire epidermis, including its outermost layer, the stratum corneum, that is a barrier from pathogens and other dangerous chemicals from entering the body. Ironically, because the epidermis is gone, so are the pain receptors, so victims of these burns often do not initially feel much pain. But because the protection of the stratum corneum is lost, the victims are at serious risk of developing infections, as well as dehydration, because the skin is not there to keep the water in the body.





represent concentrated areas of cells that produce melanin. The darkening of the skin actually protects the stratum germinativum from overexposure to UV rays. As a result, dark-skinned people have some natural defense against the sun’s harmful effects, such as skin cancer, as opposed to light-skinned people.

The Integumentary System 213

Dermis
As mentioned earlier in this chapter, the epidermis is the skin’s outer layer, while the dermis is the inner layer. While the epidermis is an important protector of the body from dangers of the outside environment, the dermis is notable for its strength and flexibility. The tissue of the dermis is fibrous. It is made of two fibers: collagen and elastin. The collagen fibers are strong, while the elastin fibers are flexible and can return to their original shape after being stretched. But this elasticity does not last forever. With age, the elastin fibers break down, meaning that this elasticity undergoes deterioration, which results in wrinkles. Located between the epidermis and the dermis is a layer called the papillary layer, which contains a large population of capillaries. Since there are no capillaries in the epidermis, the papillary layer is the epidermis’ only access to oxygen and nutrients from the body’s blood supply. These capillaries also provide oxygen and other nutrients to the dermis. Before describing the accessory organs of the skin, such as hair follicles and nails, it is important to understand the skin’s ability to repair itself. If the skin is cut—whether from an injury or surgical incision—it will automatically grow back together, even without stitches. What is really happening, however, is new skin is formed or regenerated. At the site of the cut, the skin cells located right next to the wound site enlarge, while the cells surrounding the wound multiply at a rapid pace to replace cells that have been destroyed. Healing begins as all of these cells eventually converge and epithelial cells continue production. Eventually, skin will be replaced at its original thickness. This repair process also allows skin grafts—or transplanting of the skin—to be successful. Skin grafts are often necessary when a person has third-degree burns, because the skin is so damaged that it cannot regenerate. The skin to be transplanted is typically taken from a fleshy place on the body, such as the thighs or buttocks. Once this transplanted skin is applied to the wound, the cell regeneration process hopefully will occur, helping to cover the wound.

The Skin’s Accessory Organs
Located in the dermis are the skin’s accessory organs. These include the hair and nail follicles, sensory receptors, and various glands.

214 Julie McDowell

Hair and Hair Follicles Hair follicles are composed of epidermal tissue, but their base is the hair root (Figure 5.2). It is at the hair root where mitosis occurs, and these new cells produce keratin. Melanin is involved because it determines the hair color. But these cells quickly die, and then become part of the hair shaft. The end of the hair follicle is called a bulb. In this bulb is located a supply of capillaries that feed the needs of the growing hair shaft. Hair type is also determined by the shape of this hair shaft. If the cross section of the shaft is round, the hair is curly, and the rounder the shaft, the curlier the hair. Along with the hair root, the follicle also contains certain glands and nerve endings, as well as muscle. When hair follicles are located on the skin’s surface, such as on the scalp, they are adjacent to oil or sebaceous glands. These glands produce an oily liquid called sebum that travels through the hair shaft to the body’s surface. Sebum is important because it moisturizes the skin to keep it from drying out. It also is composed of bacteria-fighting substances that protect the follicles from infection. Sebum travels to the hair shaft by draining through a sebaceous duct in the hair follicle. The volume of sebum that the sebaceous duct produces depends not only on the actual size of the duct, but also the amount of hormones circulating, particularly the male sex hormones called androgens. The largest sebaceous ducts are located on the head, neck, and front and back of the chest. (For information on one of the most common skin disorders of the sebaceous glands, acne, read Sidebar 5.4 at the end of this chapter). In addition to the sebaceous glands, nerve endings are located around the hair follicle’s bulb. These nerves are affected by any movement near the hair shaft, meaning that if there is any pressure on or around the hair shaft (such as pulling of the hair), then these nerve endings will send signals to the brain. One example is when there is a bee or other insect flying on or around the hair on the top of the head. The nerve endings in the hair shaft will let the brain know that this insect is near, causing the person to swat it away, before it lands on the head and possibly plants its stinger, in the case of a bee. As noted earlier, there are also muscles in the hair follicle. This muscle is called the arrector pili, which means “raiser of the hair” and is attached to the follicle. The contraction of the arrector pili forces the hair to move

The Integumentary System 215

Figure 5.2 The Hair Follicle. Each hair root sits in a follicle, which is located about 4 or 5 mm below the skin surface. The sebaceous glands produce oil that lubricates the hair. (Legger/Dreamstime.com)

216 Julie McDowell

from its normal position—which is angled—and become vertically erect. In humans, the contraction of a significant number of these muscles occurs during times when the body is chilled or a person is afraid. It is also known as “goose pimples.” This feature is an important source of protection for mammals with a lot of fur, because it allows them to insulate themselves by trapping air within their fur. While hair is not as important to humans in comparison to other mammals, it does serve certain functions. It insulates the head and, as mentioned earlier, has nerves that sense when small objects or insects are close to the head. There are millions of hair strands covering the body, but the most concentrated amounts of hair are on the head, surrounding the external genitalia, and under the armpits. The hair on our head—as well as our eyelashes and eyebrows—is actually these dead cells. Each strand contains the protein keratin, which is produced in the dermis. However, the actual strand is produced by a process called “inpouching,” which occurs in the epidermis. There are three layers to each hair strand: the medulla, cortex, and cuticle. The medulla is the central core, while the central cortex is the next layer. The cortex is made up of layers of flattened cells containing melanin that determines hair color. The outermost layer is the cuticle, which is made up of one layer of overlapping cells. This layer tends to break away at the end of hair strands, causing what is known as “split ends.” (For information on hair thinning and loss, please see Sidebar 5.3.) Nail Follicles The primary function of nails is to protect the fingers and toes, and make it easier for the fingers to pick up small objects (Figure 5.3). While the nails themselves do not have nerves, they are rooted in the nail bed, which does have nerves. Nail and hair follicles are similar in that mitosis takes place in both of these areas. For nails, this mitosis takes place in the nail root. These new cells also produce the protein keratin—similar to new hair cells. However, the keratin is stronger in nails. Once these cells produce keratin, they die. These dead cells make up the nail body; however, the nail bed underneath is a living tissue. The nail bed is under the entire nail.

The Integumentary System 217

SIDEBAR 5.3

Thinning and Baldness: Follicles Slow Down as They Age
Hair follicles slow down their growth around the age of 40; therefore, hair production also slows down. This means that hair is not quickly replaced when it naturally falls out, leading to thinning and some patches of baldness. Baldness, also known as male-pattern baldness, is caused by certain conditions, which include aging. Scientists are not exactly sure what causes baldness, but heredity and androgen (male sex hormone) levels appear to play a role, as well as certain medical conditions. There is evidence that baldness is linked to a gene that begins behaving in a way that changes how the hair follicle responds to circulating hormones.

In addition to the root and the nail bed, there are six other important parts of the nail anatomy: • • Body: the main part of the nail, also known as the nail plate Free edge: the portion of the nail that extends beyond the fingertip

Figure 5.3

Anatomy of a fingernail. (Legger/Dreamstime.com)

218 Julie McDowell

• • •

Eponychium: Also known as the cuticle, this is a row of dead skin located between the nail plate and the matrix Lunula: Located right above (and sometimes covered by) the cuticle, this is the crescent shaped, opaque area at the base of the nail plate Hyponchium: This is the portion of skin located right below the free edge of the nail; this area has an abundant supply of nerve cells, which means it is sensitive to pressure, heat, and other potential sources of pain

Sensory Receptors This chapter has already included some discussion on the sensory receptors in the integumentary system, particularly in the hair root and nail bed, as well as the skin. It is important to note that in the skin’s dermis layer, there are sensory receptors for the cutaneous senses, including touch, pressure, pain, and temperatures, including cold and heat. Receptors are specific to the senses that they detect, based on their structure. Sensory receptors for pain are called free nerve endings, while receptors for the other senses are called encapsulated nerve endings. These encapsulated nerve endings are surrounded by a sensory nerve ending. These receptors communicate with the nervous system about any impact or changes that the environment is having on the skin and its sensory organs. Areas with a high concentration of receptors are the most sensitive. For example, fingertips have a large amount of these receptors in a small area, especially compared to the upper portion of the arm, where the receptors are more spread out. This means that the fingertip will be more sensitive. Because these receptors detect changes and communicate with the brain, they work closely with the nervous system, which is the focus of Chapter 8. Glands In addition to sebaceous glands, which were discussed earlier in this chapter, there are some other important glands in the integumentary system: ceruminous and sweat glands.

The Integumentary System 219

SIDEBAR 5.4

Acne
Acne is one of the most common skin disorders, and is related to hormone and other substances plugging the skin’s sebaceous glands—also know as oil glands—as well as hair follicles. The plugging of the pores can cause outbreaks of lesions called pimples or “zits.” Typically, lesions develop on the face, neck, back, chest, and shoulder. Medical experts do not routinely describe acne as a disease related to lesions as pimples or zits, but rather as a disease of the pilosebaceous units (PSUs). These PSUs are made up of a sebaceous gland connected to a follicle. While PSUs are found all over the body, they are most populous on the face, upper back, and chest. These glands produce an oily substance known as sebum. This substance typically makes its way to the skin’s surface through the follicle’s opening, called a pore. Lining the follicle are cells called keratinocytes. Acne occurs when the sebum, hair, and keratinocytes that occupy the narrow follicle form a plug in the pore, which prevents the sebum from being released to the surface of the skin through the follicle. When the oil from the sebum mixes with the keratinocyte cells, it causes the formation of bacteria known as Propionibacterium acnes (P. acnes). These bacteria produce various chemicals and also attract white blood cells that cause inflammation. Eventually, the wall of the plugged pore will break down. When this happens, the sebum and bacteria spill on to the surface of the skin, which causes pimples to form. There are a number of different kinds of pimples or lesions. The basic and most common is called the comedo. This lesion is a plugged hair follicle that is often inflamed. If it stays beneath the skin, a white bump often appears that is called a whitehead. If the comedo reaches the surface of the skin, it is called a blackhead, referring to its appearance on the skin’s surface. This black appearance is often thought to be because of dirt, but because of changes in the sebum when it is exposed to air. Some other acne lesions the following: • • Papules: These lesions are inflamed pink bumps that are tender. Pustules: Also called pimples, these lesions contain a head of white or yellow pus and an inflamed base.

220 Julie McDowell

• •

Nodules: These are large and solid lesions rooted deep in the skin and painful to the touch. Cysts: These lesions are also deep-rotted, and filled with pus. Cysts can often cause scarring.

Ceruminous glands are type of sebaceous gland found in the dermis layer of the ear canal. These glands produce a secretion called cerumen, more commonly known as ear wax. While cerumen helps to moisturize the eardrum’s outer surface, it can impact the hearing if it builds up and becomes impacted in the ear canal. This impacting can inhibit the eardrum’s ability to vibrate and function properly. There are two types of sweat glands in the body: apocrine and eccrine. The apocine glands respond primarily during times of stress and heightened emotion. They are primarily found in the underarm or axillae areas, as well as the genital areas. The eccrine glands are located all over the body, particularly in the forehead, upper lip, palms, and soles of the feet. These glands secrete through a duct that is in the form of a coiled tube, located in the dermis. This duct connects to a pore on the skin’s surface. The eccrine gland and the sweat it produces are important in maintaining the body’s temperature. When the body temperature rises, such as during exercise or when in warm temperatures, sweat production is increased, and sweat makes its way to the skin surface. The sweat then evaporates, ridding the body of excess heat. However, this can be dangerous if too much heat is lost. Excess loss of body water through sweat can lead to dehydration, which is a form of heat exhaustion. This is why medical experts recommend that people increase their fluid intake during periods of intense heat and exercise.

Summary
This chapter explored the integumentary system, which is composed of the skin and its accessory organs, which include hair and nail follicles as well as glands and sensory receptors. One of the skin’s most important

The Integumentary System 221

roles is to protect the body from harmful substances, as well as detect changes in the body through sensory receptors. The two layers of the skin are the epidermis (outer) and the dermis (inner). There are two types of glands, the ceruminous glands, which are related to the skin surrounding the ear, and the sweat glands. Sweat glands play an important role in keep the body at a normal temperature.

This page intentionally left blank

6
The Lymphatic System
Julie McDowell and Michael Windelspecht

Interesting Facts
• • • • • • • The lymphatic system returns about 3.17 quarts (3 liters) of fluid each day from the tissues to the circulatory system. The average macrophage can engulf 100 bacteria a second. A plasma cell (B cell) can produce over 2,000 antibodies per second. The thymus gland, the site of T cell maturation, reaches its maximum size when a person is age 12, then decreases in size with age. A cubic millimeter of blood can contain up to 10,000 leukocytes, of which up to 70 percent are neutrophils and 25 percent lymphocytes. In patients with leukemia, the total white blood cell content per 0.03 ounces (1 cubic millimeter) of blood may reach over 500,000. Vaccinations against smallpox have been in use since the time of the ancient Chinese civilizations.

Chapter Highlights
• • Lymphatic system’s cells and chemicals Lymphatic fluid

223

224 Julie McDowell and Michael Windelspecht

• • • • • • • • • •

Lymphocytes White blood cells Cellular signals and markers in the lymphatic system Lymph nodes and circulation Lymph vessels Bone marrow and thymus Spleen, tonsils, adenoids, Peyer’s patch, and appendix Immune response Genetic and acquired immunity Vaccines

Words to Watch For
ABO group Acquired immunity Afferent vessels Agglutination Alleles Anemia Appendectomy Appendicitis Autoimmune disease Biomolecules Bone marrow Chemotaxis Complement fixation Cytokine Efferent vessels Erythropoietin Extrinsic factor Genetic immunity Glycoproteins Hemolysis Hydrophilic Hydrophobic Hypoxia Immunity Immunoglobulins Intrinsic factor Lipoproteins Lymph Lysozyme Malignant Medullary cords Monocytes Neutrophils Normoblast Opsonization Osmosis Phagocytic cells Plasma Protease Reticulocyte Rh factor Tonsils Toxoid Triglycerides Vasodilation Virus

The Lymphatic System 225

Introduction
The natural world is an exceptionally hostile place, with pathogenic and parasitic organisms waiting to exploit any weakness in an organism. Fungi, bacteria, parasitic worms, protistans, and viruses abound in the natural world. The concept of survival of the fittest extends from the lowest life forms to the complex environments of primates. In order to survive, all organisms must possess some mechanism of combating invaders. Humans are no exception to this rule. They are in a biological arms race with the microscopic world. Luckily, humankind possesses one of the most elaborate defensive systems on the planet—the lymphatic system. The primary task of defending the approximately 100 trillion cells of the body against this onslaught of invaders rests with the lymphatic system. While other systems do provide some protection, such as the acids of the stomach and the structure of the skin, it is the job of the lymphatic system to initiate an immune response against invading pathogens. The lymphatic system is the system of the body that is responsible for the immune response. This tiered system of defense utilizes physical barriers, such as the skin, and general defense mechanisms, such as the white blood cells. But perhaps the most significant weapon in its arsenal is the specific defense system. In this aspect of the immune response, specialized cells called lymphocytes detect specific invaders (such as fungi, bacteria, and viruses) and eliminate them from the body. This response can be directed against both free pathogens in the body or against cells that have become infected. As an added protection, the specific response has the ability to “remember” an infection, practically ensuring that you will never be infected by the same organism or virus twice. The lymphatic system does have other roles in the body. First, it acts as a second circulatory system. The lymphatic system is responsible for returning the fluid from the tissues of the body, called interstitial fluid, to the circulatory system. In this regard, the lymphatic system helps regulate water balance, ensuring not only that the tissues have proper fluids, but that excess fluids do not accumulate in the extremities. The second—often overlooked—role is that of a transport system. The lymphatic system moves fat-soluble nutrients from the digestive system to the circulatory system using a special class of molecules called the lipoproteins.

226 Julie McDowell and Michael Windelspecht

Unlike other body systems, such as the digestive system and endocrine system, the lymphatic system does not have a large number of organs dedicated to the role of immune response. While there are some, such as the thymus and spleen, the majority of the lymphatic system consists of small ducts, minor glands, and specialized cells located in other body systems, which will be discussed in this chapter.

The Chemicals and Cells of the Lymphatic System
The lymphatic system is a complex group of cells, tissues, and organs that are widely dispersed throughout the human body (Figure 6.1). The lymphatic system has three primary functions. First, its cells are primarily

Figure 6.1 Location of the Lymphatic System Organs. In many cases, the organs of the lymphatic system have dual roles in the body. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

The Lymphatic System 227

responsible for the immune response of the body. For this reason, the lymphatic system is frequently called the immune system. Most people are familiar with the immune system as it provides resistance to disease. Modern diseases such as acquired immunodeficiency syndrome (AIDS) and sudden acute respiratory syndrome (SARS) greatly challenge the capabilities of our immune system. Second, the vessels of the lymphatic system actually represent a separate circulatory system in the human body. Unlike the cardiovascular circulatory system, the lymphatic system does not directly supply nutrients or oxygen to the tissues of the body, but rather is primarily involved in the return of fluids from the tissues. Finally, the lymphatic system is involved in the transport of select nutrients from the digestive system to the circulatory system. These initial sections of this chapter provide an overview of the molecules, cellular components, and chemical signals of the lymphatic system. It focuses primarily on those aspects that are associated with the immune response, although some transport molecules are also discussed. The interaction of these cells, signals, and molecules to create an immune response will be covered later in the chapter.

Subcellular Components of the Lymphatic System
Complement Proteins As the name suggests, these proteins complement or assist in the function of the immune response. These are nonspecific components of the lymphatic system, meaning that they do not recognize specific types of pathogens entering the body, but instead target any form of invading bacteria or fungus. From an evolutionary perspective, complement proteins probably represent the simplest and oldest form of immune system. Forms of complement proteins are found in all animals. There are approximately 20 different types of complement proteins in humans; collectively, they are called the complement system. Complement proteins move throughout the circulatory system in an inactive form, commonly called a zymogen. The mechanism by which they are activated is dependent upon the class of the complement protein. Although complement proteins are found in the circulatory system, they are considered to be part of the lymphatic system due to their association with the immune response.

228 Julie McDowell and Michael Windelspecht

The complement proteins may either target invading fungal and bacterial cells directly, or they may be recruited by antibodies or other cells of the immune system. The proteins have a variety of functions. Some classes are involved with attacking the membrane of the invading pathogen causing it to lyse, or break. Other classes interact with the antibodies secreted by the B lymphocytes (see the “Lymphocytes” section later in this chapter). This is often called the classical pathway, because it is the most common mechanism of complement system activation. Once activated by an antibody, the complement proteins form a pore in the membrane of the invading cell, causing it to lyse. Some complement proteins act as molecular flags. This class sticks to the surface of the pathogen, but rather than causing the membrane to rupture, these proteins signal macrophages and other phagocytic cells of the immune system to envelop the invading cell and destroy it. Other classes of complement proteins are involved in the inflammatory response or in activating enzymes in the blood. The complement proteins that directly lyse the membrane of the pathogen do so by what is called the alternative pathway. In this case, the inactive proteins are activated by some component of the bacterial or fungal cell wall. Once activated, the proteins congregate on the invading cell and form a pore through the membrane, disrupting the membrane barrier of the cell and causing it to lyse. While complement proteins may appear to be an effective mechanism of immune response, they lack the ability to target specific types of cells that are invading the body. The task of targeting specific invaders falls to the cells of the immune system. Chylomicrons and Lipoproteins One aspect of the lymphatic system that is not involved in the immune response is the transport of fat-soluble material from the digestive tract. This includes not only triglycerides, but also the fat-soluble vitamins. These hydrophobic molecules are packaged within the small intestine into spherical structures called lipoproteins. Lipoproteins are a combination of fats and proteins. Following enzymatic digestion in the lumen (cavity) of the small intestine, fatty acids are

The Lymphatic System 229

reassembled into triglycerides in the epithelial cells of the small intestine. They are then packaged into chylomicrons. Chylomicrons represent one form of lipoprotein that is manufactured within the lining of the small intestine. Due to their size and hydrophobic characteristics, chylomicrons cannot pass into the capillaries within the villi of the small intestine, and thus are unable to be transported to the liver in the same manner as the majority of nutrients. Instead, they enter into the lacteals of the digestive tract. Once in the lacteals of the intestines, the chylomicrons utilize the lymphatic system to bypass the liver and travel to the heart via the thoracic duct, where they enter into the bloodstream. At this point the vitamins and energy-rich nutrients within the chylomicron are removed by the tissues, and the chylomicron becomes an empty shell. The other lipoproteins, such as low-density lipoproteins (LDLs) and high-density lipoproteins (HDLs), are manufactured by liver tissue and do not enter the lymphatic system. Antimicrobial Proteins The surface cells of the body, called the epithelia, are most often the first to experience an attack by an invading organism. For this reason, many of the body’s surfaces secrete antimicrobial proteins or enzymes. An enzyme is a chemical compound (usually a protein) that accelerates a chemical reaction. Although enzymes are most often thought of in association with the digestive or nervous systems, in fact they are active in all of the systems of the body. The surfaces of the eyes and mouth, because they are moist environments and warmer areas of the body, represent an ideal location for a microbial attack. At these locations, the body secretes an enzyme called lysozyme in the saliva and tears. Lysozyme acts by degrading the cell walls of invading bacteria. Because animal cells lack cell walls, they are not disturbed by the presence of the enzyme. This is not the only example of antimicrobial compounds in the body. Technically, the protease enzymes of the stomach may be considered a part of the immune response, because, in cooperation with the hydrochloric acid of the stomach, they inhibit the activity of pathogenic organisms. In the small intestine, specialized cells called Paneth cells secrete

230 Julie McDowell and Michael Windelspecht

an antimicrobial compound called cryptidin. Even the bacteria located within the large intestine assist with patrolling against incoming pathogens. Escherichia coli (commonly called just E. coli), frequently considered to be a pathogen itself, helps protect the large intestine by secreting a chemical called colicin that prevents growth of pathogenic organisms. These antimicrobial systems are not designed to completely prevent an attack by a pathogenic organism. Instead, like the complement proteins, the antimicrobial substances noted in this section act to slow the growth of an invader and give the specific defense mechanisms (lymphocytes) time to prepare. In this regard, antimicrobial systems are very effective in their mode of action.

Lymphatic Fluid
The fluid content of the lymphatic system is actually derived from the circulatory system. In the circulatory system, the capillaries represent the location where gas and nutrient exchange is most likely to occur with the surrounding tissue. Capillaries are fragile structures, whose walls are typically only one cell thick. However, these cells, called endothelial cells, do not form a solid structure, like that of a hose. Instead, there are small pores between the cells that form the lining of the capillaries. These pores are too small to allow the cells and plasma proteins of the circulatory system to pass, but large enough to allow a free exchange of fluid with the surrounding tissues. This fluid represents the medium through which nutrients and gases may be exchanged. The fluid, called interstitial fluid, bathes most tissues of the body. Cells typically deposit waste in the interstitial fluid for pickup by the circulatory system, and receive nutrients and gases to conduct their metabolic processes. The majority of this fluid is reabsorbed back into the capillaries. However, this process is only about 85 percent effective. Each day, about 3.17 quarts (3 liters) of fluid is not reabsorbed back into the capillaries, but instead remains in the tissue. This amount may not sound significant, but in an average adult, there is only 5.28 quarts (5 liters) of blood. It would seem that the loss of fluid from the capillaries would represent a severe challenge for the circulatory system, and the organism as a whole.

The Lymphatic System 231

The lymphatic system makes up the difference by recycling the interstitial fluid and returning it back to the circulatory system. In most people, the lymphatic system returns around 3.17 quarts (3 liters) of fluid daily. In other words, the output of the circulatory system to the tissues is matched by the input of interstitial fluid from the lymphatic system. Lymphatic fluid does not contain red blood cells, and in general lacks any pigmentation. However, despite its lack of color, there are plenty of ions, molecules, and cells in lymphatic fluid. These include ions such as sodium (Na+) and potassium (K+), chylomicrons, and a host of cells associated with the immune response (see next section).

Cells of the Lymphatic System and Immune Response
The immune system utilizes a number of different cell types to protect the body from infection. The major classes of cells are listed in Table 6.1.
TABLE 6.1 Cells of the Immune System
Cell class Lymphocytes Type Natural killer (NK) T cells B cells Specific or nonspecific defense Nonspecific Specific Specific General function Targets virusinfected cells Attacks antigenpresenting cells Produces antibodies to attack free antigens General phagocytic cells One-time-use cells that contain powerful chemical reactions Destroys parasitic organisms Releases histamine Releases histamine

White blood cells Neutrophils

Macrophages

Nonspecific Nonspecific

Eosinophils Basophils Mast cells

Nonspecific Nonspecific Nonspecific

232 Julie McDowell and Michael Windelspecht

These cell types may either be generalists (nonspecific defense mechanisms) or specialize in the destruction of certain identified invaders of the body. Cells of this second class belong to the specific defense mechanism of the body. The lymphatic cells are derived from the same type of cell in the bone marrow as the cells of the circulatory system. The common name for this type of cell is called a stem cell. While stem cells are commonly thought of as being able to form any type of cell in the body, in reality they vary in this ability. Some stem cells, such as those in early embryonic development, are totipotent, meaning that they have the ability to form virtually any cell type. However, shortly after the embryo starts to develop, stem cells lose their potency, and thus their ability to form certain types of cells. The stem cells in the bone marrow are pluripotent cells, indicating that they are limited in what types of cells they can differentiate into. The type of stem cell that gives rise to the immune cells, as well as the majority of cells in the circulatory system, is called a hematopoietic stem cell. From this stem cell are derived progenitor cells, which possess an additional layer of specialization. Two different types of progenitor cells are involved with the formation of lymphatic cells. The lymphocytes are derived from the lymphoid progenitor cell, while the leukocytes and macrophages are derived from the myeloid progenitor cell. The cell types also differ in where they mature in the body and their contributions to the function of the lymphatic system and immune response. Natural Killer Cells Natural killer (NK) cells are another example of a nonspecific defense mechanism in the body. While the complement system acts nonspecifically against invading fungal and bacterial cells, the role of the NK cells is to eliminate cells of the body that have either been invaded by viruses or are cancer cells. It is important to note the difference between NK cells and a form of T cells called the cytotoxic T cells (see the next section). While both attack viral infected cells and cancer cells, cytotoxic T cells are specific in their targets, meaning that they will destroy only cells that have been infected with a specific virus. NK cells are generalists and will destroy any viral infected cell that they come in contact with. Natural killer cells are not phagocytic cells, but rather destroy the target cell by lysing the membrane.

The Lymphatic System 233

Natural killer cells belong to a class of cells called the lymphocytes, of which the T and B cells are the most commonly recognized. NK cells are formed in the same manner as T and B cells (see the next section), but do not mature in the thymus, as is the case with the T cell. Lymphocytes The term lymphocyte is most commonly used to describe two groups of lymphatic cells, the B cells and T cells, although, as noted in the preceding section, the NK cells also belong to this class. Lymphocytes start as hematopoietic stem cells in the bone marrow of the long bones of the body. The hematopoietic stem cells form progenitor lymphoid cells, which then divide into the cell lines that will form the B cells, T cells, and NK cells. Unlike B and T cells, NK cells do not require additional processing and instead proceed directly into action as nonspecific defense mechanisms. B and T lymphocytes are named for the location in the body in which they complete their maturation process. An immature T cell migrates to the thymus to finish its development; a B cell completes its maturation in the bone marrow. The “B” does not actually stand for “bone,” but rather a structure called the bursa of Fabricus. This structure is only found in birds, but is where the B cells were first discovered. Since the B cells of all other vertebrates mature in the bone marrow, the B is commonly considered to refer to “bone.” Although both B cells and T cells are lymphocytes and are involved in the defense of the body against specific pathogens, their modes of action are very different. T and B cells both respond to specific antigens in the human body. An antigen is a molecule that invokes an immune response. All cells and viruses have unique antigens present on their surface. What distinguishes the cells of our body from invading viruses and the cells of invading bacteria, fungi, protistans, and parasitic worms is the presence of selfmarkers. In other words, if a cell cannot identify itself as a normal part of the human body, it runs the risk of initiating an immune response. The role of the B cells is to develop antibodies against antigens that present themselves in the tissues and fluids of the body. Antibodies are proteins that target the antigen and either mark it for destruction by

234 Julie McDowell and Michael Windelspecht

nonspecific mechanisms or physically destroy the molecule. (The action of antibodies will be covered in greater detail later in this chapter). Because almost anything may be an antigen (proteins, cellular debris, chemicals, etc.), it is possible for a B cell to mistakenly identify a cell of the body as an antigen. Therefore, immature B cells are screened while in the bone marrow before maturing and being sent to secondary lymphoid tissues, such as the appendix and lymph nodes. This process is often called self-tolerance, because the B cell must be able to tolerate the wide range of potentially false antigens that are produced by the cells of the body. However, sometimes this screening is not completely effective, resulting in an autoimmune disease. Each B cell of the body will recognize—and produce antibodies against— one specific antigen. Antibodies are proteins, and are manufactured in the same manner as other proteins in the body. The instructions for producing the antibody are stored as genes in the deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA). When needed, these genetic instructions are transcribed into a message (called messenger ribonucleic acid, or mRNA), which proceeds to the cytoplasm of the cell to be translated into a functional protein. All antibodies have a characteristic structure (Figure 6.2). Each antibody contains two light chains and two heavy chains. They are called the light and heavy chains based upon the number of amino acids in the peptides that make up their structure. The chains are held together by disulfide bonds, forming a “Y”-shaped molecule. There is very little variation in the constant regions (or C regions) of the heavy chains in the antibody. In humans, there are just five major variations in this area of the heavy chain, which correspond to the five major classes of antibodies. This combination of light and heavy chains is responsible for the tremendous variation in antibody specificity. At the terminal end of each chain is an area called the hypervariable segment, which is ultimately responsible for targeting a specific antigen. The mechanism by which these hypervariable regions in the chains are generated is one of the amazing features of the immune system. The structure of the antibody, and thus its effectiveness in recognizing the correct antigen, is determined by the sequence of genetic information that is used to construct the protein. Even though the human genome

The Lymphatic System 235

Figure 6.2 Antibody Structure. This diagram illustrates the basic structure of an antibody protein. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

contains over three billion pieces of information, organized into over 30,000 genes, there is still not enough information or room to have a single gene for each antibody that a human being may require over an entire lifetime. It is believed that the immune system has the potential to produce between one million and one billion different types of antibodies. It is simply not possible that each antibody is the result of a single dedicated gene in the DNA. It is now known that there are only a few hundred genes that are responsible for generating the diverse array of antibodies. These genes are grouped into four major types: • • • Genes grouped into the C regions are responsible for generating the protein sequences in the constant regions of the heavy and light chains. The J genes are responsible for generating the small peptide segments that link portions of the antibody together. The D group of genes encodes for a small diversity region found only in the heavy chain.

236 Julie McDowell and Michael Windelspecht



The V genes provide the information for generating the hypervariable segments of the light chains.

It is important to note that the following process of selecting the genes that will form an antibody occurs before the B cell encounters an antigen. In other words, as the B cell matures, it becomes specific in what type of antigen it will respond to. It is extremely possible that a B cell may never come in contact with its antigen, and thus never be involved in an immune response. However, the large number of B cells in circulation, and the mechanism of the specific immune response, means that the body needs only one B cell that recognizes the antigen to mount an effective immune response. Because many invading pathogens, such as bacteria and viruses, may present multiple antigens, it is possible that more than one B cell may be producing antibodies for the same pathogen at the same time. To construct a light chain, it is necessary to have a single V, J, and C gene segment (there are no D segments in the light chain). There are 30 to 40 V segments, four to five J segments, and a single C segment in the area of DNA responsible (located on human chromosomes 2 and 22) for the formation of the light chain. This alone produces around 200 different combinations. Furthermore, the regions are subject not only to mutation, but also to minor variations in the reading and processing of the genetic information. These mistakes serve to increase the variation in the segments. Thus, it is highly unlikely that two B cells will be identical in the types of antibodies that they produce. Before maturation, the lymphocyte possesses all of the gene segments. By a process called somatic recombination, a single V and J region are selected and then matched up to the one C region. After translation, the result is a protein (also called a peptide) that will become the light chain of the antibody. The synthesis of a heavy chain is slightly different, but follows the same general pattern. There are 65 V segments, 27 D segments, and 5 J segments available on chromosome 14 to construct a single heavy chain, resulting in 10,530 possible combinations. Once again, a single V, D, and J segment are combined, and then linked to a C segment. The same errors that produced variation in the light chains may also play a role in the formation of the heavy chains, resulting once again in an almost endless source of variation in heavy chain structure. Following processing,

The Lymphatic System 237

transcription of the information, and translation into a functional protein, the result is the heavy chain of the antibody. The light chains and heavy chains are then linked together, forming an antibody. Although all B cells undergo a similar maturation process, there are minor variations in their form and function in the immune system. Once activated by a specific antigen, a B cell rapidly divides, forming a large number of effector B cells, or plasma cells. These cells actively combat the antigen in the body in what is called the primary immune response. As the primary response progresses, some of the activated B cells are retired, forming memory B cells. These cells are responsible for the secondary immune response that occurs when the body is exposed to the same antigen later in time. All B cells are involved in the humoral response, which targets free antigens in the system. As noted, T cells complete their maturation in the thymus, one of the primary lymphoid organs of the body. The thymus is located just above the heart. In the thymus, the immature T cells undergo a series of modifications. The most important of these changes occurs as specific genes within the T cells are activated, which enables the production of unique proteins, called glycoproteins, on the surface of these cells. These proteins, examples of which are called CD4 and CD8, play an important role in the function of the immune system. As was the case with the B cells, the maturing T cells in the thymus are screened to ensure that they are not recognizing any of the tissues or cells of the body as invading antigens. Those T cells that display an affinity for self are targeted for cell death and usually do not mature. While T cells are specialized for the targeting of antigen-presenting cells of the body, there are actually several different forms of T cells, each of which has a specific function in the immune response: • Helper T cells. Helper T cells serve as the liaison between the nonspecific and specific defense mechanisms. They are responsible for activating both the humoral and cell-mediated responses in the body, by interacting with both mature T and B lymphocytes. Cytotoxic T cells. These cells destroy infected body cells under the direction of the helper T cells.



238 Julie McDowell and Michael Windelspecht

• •

Inducer T cells. Cells located in the thymus that are responsible for T cell maturation. Suppressor T cells. The task of these cells is to shut down the immune response once the infection is complete. These cells divide much slower than other T cells, producing a natural delay mechanism. Memory T cells. As was the case with the B cells, some T cells are held in reserve for future exposures to the antigen. These are called memory cells, because they originated with the initial exposure to the antigen.



The activity of T cells is highly dependent on cell-to-cell signaling using proteins embedded in the plasma membrane. T cells not only serve to identify cells of the body, but also to distinguish between infected and healthy cells so as to prevent unnecessary tissue damage. This identification is made possible by specific receptors on the surface of the T cell. The antigen identification portion of these receptors is highly variable. T cells use a similar method of generating variation, as do the B cells with antibody formation. Within the genome of the T cell are the same variable (V), diversity (D), joining (J), and constant (C) families of genes that are present in the B cells. These genes are rearranged in much the same way as in the B cells to produce a receptor that is specific for one type of antigen recognition. As is the case with the B cell, each T cell is specific in what it can recognize. The difference is that while the antibodies of the B cell recognize free antigens, such as what might be found in the fluids of the body, the receptors of the T cells are designed to identify cells that are presenting a specific antigen as the result of being infected by a pathogen, such as a virus. This is a complex interaction, which involves a number of cellular markers and proteins. White Blood Cells The term white blood cell is used as a general description for a wide variety of cells in the immune system, including macrophages, neutrophils, eosinophils, and basophils (the general function of each is provided in Table 6.1). A white blood cell begins as a hematopoietic stem cell in the bone marrow. This cell then begins to differentiate into a myeloid

The Lymphatic System 239

progenitor cell, which then becomes basophils, eosinophils, neutrophils, and a precursor of macrophages called monocytes. Typically, the term white blood cell indicates the macrophages. Macrophages are the general workhorses of the immune system. These are amoeba-like cells that move throughout the body. Unlike many cells of the circulatory and lymphatic system, the macrophages are not confined to capillaries. Instead, they are able to move freely between the circulatory system and the interstitial fluids that bathe the tissues of the body. Macrophage is the collective name for these cells, but they are sometimes called by other names throughout the body (see Table 6.2). Inactive macrophages are monocytes. These may be activated at the site of an infection by a variety of mechanisms. Macrophages are phagocytic cells, meaning that in order to destroy pathogens, macrophages must first ingest them. Phagocytosis involves a budding in of the cell membrane, forming a vesicle inside the cell. Once the pathogen is engulfed, the macrophage can utilize two major mechanisms for destroying the invader. First, the macrophage may merge the pathogencontaining vesicle with another cellular vesicle called a lysosome. The lysosome contains powerful digestive enzymes that effectively “eat” the pathogen, rendering it harmless. A second mechanism involves making the internal environment of the vesicle containing the pathogen extremely toxic. Macrophages can produce free radicals such as nitric oxide and superoxide anion. These chemicals are highly destructive to organic molecules, and quickly destroy the incoming pathogen.

TABLE 6.2 Nomenclature for Macrophages in the Body
Tissue Digestive system (liver) Urinary system (kidney) Connective tissue Respiratory system (lungs) Nervous system (brain) Name Kupffer’s cells Mesangial cells Histocytes Alveolar macrophages Microglial cells

240 Julie McDowell and Michael Windelspecht

Once the pathogen has been destroyed, an interesting change happens in the receptors of the macrophage. The macrophages are nonspecific generalists, but they play an important role in informing the lymphocytes (specific defense) of the presence of a pathogen in the body. Small pieces of the pathogen are moved to receptors on the cell membrane. These receptors, part of the self-identification process (see the next section, “Identification of Self: The Role of Cellular Markers”), act as an activation mechanism for the helper T cells, an important link between the specific and nonspecific responses. Once the macrophage alters the surface receptors, it is then called an antigen-presenting cell (APC). In many ways, the neutrophils are very similar to the macrophages. Both are phagocytic cells that patrol the body looking for pathogenic organisms or viruses. Neutrophils are actually the most abundant type of white blood cell in the body. They are typically found only at the site of an infection, usually because they are attracted by macrophage activity and chemicals released from damaged cells. Unlike the macrophages, which rely almost exclusively on phagocytic activity, the neutrophils have a variety of options available for the destruction of incoming pathogens. Neutrophils may engulf pathogens in a manner similar to the macrophages. However, they also possess a more destructive mechanism. Each neutrophil contains a limited number of internal structures, called granules. These granules contain a variety of substances that are highly toxic to microorganisms. These include oxygen radicals, antimicrobial proteins, peroxynitrate (a nitric oxide compound), and hydrogen peroxide. When a neutrophil reaches the site of an injury or infection, it releases these chemicals into the surrounding environment, killing not only microorganisms, but often cells of the body as well. Each neutrophil only contains a limited arsenal of chemicals, and once depleted, the neutrophil dies. Often, the neutrophil may be destroyed by the very chemicals that it releases. The debris from these dead cells is what forms the pus at a site of a wound or infection. Another form of white blood cell is the eosinophil. The eosinophils are another nonspecific mechanism, but one that is targeted against parasitic organisms, such as intestinal worms, flukes, microscopic nematodes, and even ticks and mites. Eosinophils act by orientating themselves along the surface of the parasitic invader and then releasing chemicals to destroy the membrane or surface of the organism.

The Lymphatic System 241

The last two major types of white blood cells are not directly involved in the destruction of invading organisms, but rather are involved in some of the chemical signaling. These are the basophils and mast cells, which are responsible for the release of a chemical called histamine, an important chemical in the inflammatory response. The role of these cells in histamine production is discussed later in this chapter.

Identification of Self: The Role of Cellular Markers
Before beginning a discussion of cellular markers, it is first important to understand the basic structure of a cell membrane. The membrane of a cell is composed primarily of a molecule called the phospholipid. Phospholipids belong to a class of biomolecules called the lipids and are unique in that they contain both hydrophilic and hydrophobic regions. When these molecules are placed in an aqueous environment, the hydrophilic and hydrophobic regions align to form a double layer, called a lipid bilayer. This lipid bilayer forms the basic structure of the cell membrane, the properties of which effectively block the passage of most molecules into the cell. Located within the phospholipid layer of the cell membrane are a wide variety of proteins. Some of these proteins serve as channels through the membrane, while others act as receptors for chemical signals passing back and forth between the tissues of the body. The proteins of interest in the immune response belong to the glycoproteins, the proteins that have a sugar group attached to their outer surface. Glycoproteins are common on the surface of the cell membrane, but two types of glycoproteins play an important role in the immune response. These are the major histocompatibility complexes (MHC) markers. MHC markers should be considered a form of cellular identification card. All of the cells of the body have the same identification tag, which enables the body to distinguish between “self ” and invading microorganisms and viruses. There are two classes of MHC markers in the cell, called MHC-I and MHC-II. MHC-I markers are more general, and are found on every cell of the body. MHC-II markers are slightly more specific, and are found almost exclusively on cells of the immune system. There is a tremendous amount of variation between individuals in the structure of the MHC markers. While only three genes are responsible for

242 Julie McDowell and Michael Windelspecht

forming an MHC-I protein (all on human chromosome 6), there exists a number of variations, or alleles, for each of these genes. This allele effectively ensures that the MHC signature of one individual is unique.

Chemical Signals in the Lymphatic System
Because the cells of the immune system are not all localized in a single tissue, the system possesses an elaborate series of chemical signals to operate effectively. These signals perform a variety of functions, from the recruitment of nonspecific defense mechanisms to the activation of cells involved in the identification and destruction of specific pathogens. The cytokines are a special group of chemical signals in the immune system. These protein, or peptide, signals are secreted primarily by the T cells of the body to influence the activity of both the specific and nonspecific cells of the immune system. There are currently 13 different types of cytokines that have been identified. The majority of these belong to two major groups, the interferons and the interleukins (Figure 6.3). As their name implies, the interferons are involved in an interference response in the immune system. Several different types of interferons are active in the immune response. Type 1 interferons (also called interferon alpha and interferon beta) are used as a local defense against invading viruses. When a cell is infected with a virus, it secretes interferons into the surrounding interstitial fluids. On neighboring cells, the interferon interacts with a receptor common on the surface of all cells. This causes the cell to activate antiviral protection mechanisms (frequently protease enzymes), which inhibit viral replication in uninfected cells. The type 1 interferons also enhance the development of APCs, and serve to activate NK cells in the area. It is important to note that the secretion of interferons does not protect the infected cell, only those in close proximity to it. It is also nonspecific, meaning that neighboring cells are temporarily protected against any viruses in the area. Another type of interferon is called interferon gamma. This interferon is secreted by selected T cells and is not directly related to the type 1 interferons. The role of this interferon is to activate macrophages near the cytotoxic T cells, thus providing a better coverage in the area of an infection or wound. Interleukins are the second major form of cytokine. There are a number of interleukins in the immune system, the most common of which are

The Lymphatic System 243

Figure 6.3 Interferon Activity. The cell on the left has been infected by a virus. It then produces interferon, which is detected by a nearby cell (on the right), enabling the production of antiviral proteins. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

interleukin-1 (IL-1) and interleukin-2 (IL-2). IL-1 acts as a link between the nonspecific and specific defense systems. After a macrophage has engulfed a pathogen and become an APC, it secretes IL-1 to help activate helper T cells in the area. The helper T cells then communicate directly with cytotoxic T cells and B cells to begin the humoral and cell-mediated responses to the antigen. The second major form of interleukin, IL-2, is basically an activated signal. Secreted by helper T cells, the signal activates B cells to begin antibody production, as well as cytotoxic T cells to begin destruction of infected cells of the body. The loss of helper T cells, as is the case with AIDS, means that this signal is not present, and the specific defense systems are not activated.

244 Julie McDowell and Michael Windelspecht

There are other chemical signals in the immune system besides the interferons and interleukins. In response to injury, basophils and mast cells release a chemical called histamine. Histamine causes the cells of the capillary beds (circulatory system) to dilate, increasing the amount of fluid (but not the amount of red blood cells) flowing out of them. This increase in interstitial fluid increases the pressure, slowing the spread of bacteria and other pathogens into the wound. In addition, clotting proteins can now move more easily to the site of the wound, allowing for a more rapid healing process. Macrophages and NK cells also benefit by the ease of moving into the interstitial spaces, allowing for a more rapid cleanup to begin. Antihistamine medications, such as those used for the common cold, reverse this process and may actually slow the immune response.

An Examination of the Lymph Nodes and Lymphatic Circulation in the Body
One of the primary functions of the lymphatic system is to capture and collect the protein-rich fluid that escapes from the circulatory system’s blood vessels and deposit it back into the tissue network. These proteins cannot be reabsorbed; therefore, the lymphatic circulatory system must fetch them and bring them back. As explained previously, the lymphatic system’s circulatory functions are separate from the cardiovascular system in the human body. However, unlike the cardiovascular system, the lymphatic system’s circulatory processes are focused on returning fluids from other areas of the body, rather than directly supplying the tissues with the nutrients and oxygen that they need to function. This section will begin to look at some of the basic components of the lymphatic system—the lymph nodes and the elements involved in lymphatic circulation, in addition to the system’s primary organs, the bone marrow and the thymus. These aspects of the lymphatic system are important to understand before learning how the more complex functions, such as immunity and autoimmune response, work to protect the body.

Lymphatic Vessels
The cardiovascular, circulatory system and the principal parts of the lymphatic system interact primarily through the lymph nodes, lymphatics,

The Lymphatic System 245

Figure 6.4 The Interaction between the Body’s Lymphatic and Cardiovascular Systems. Tissue fluid is collected by lymph capillaries and is then returned to the blood. The arrows indicate the flow of the lymph and blood. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

and lymph capillaries (Figure 6.4). The lymphatic vessels begin as blindend tubes—called lymph capillaries—that form in the spaces between cells. Lymph capillaries are slightly larger, in addition to being more permeable, than the blood capillaries in the circulatory system. These capillaries can form in most regions of the body, and converge to form larger lymph vessels called lymphatics. These lymphatic vessels have a veinlike appearance, although their walls are thinner and they contain more valves than blood veins. In addition, at various spots in their structure, lymphatics contain lymph nodes.

246 Julie McDowell and Michael Windelspecht

Lymph is the name of the fluid that enters the lymph capillaries. As explained previously, tissue fluid comes from the filtration in the capillaries. While the process of osmosis allows much of this fluid to return to the blood, some of the fluid is lodged in interstitial spaces. The lymphatic vessels return this interstitial fluid to the blood to become plasma again. Without this occurring, blood volume and blood pressure would rapidly decrease, eventually leading to serious health threats, such as a heart attack or stroke. Unlike the circulatory system, there is no pump for the lymph. In the circulatory system, the heart serves as the pump to keep blood moving throughout the body. In the lymphatic system, the lymph is kept mobile through the muscles of the lymph vessels (Figure 6.5). As the smooth muscle layer of the larger lymph vessel constricts, the one-way valvular structure prevents the backflow of the lymph. As the lymph capillaries form lymphatics, the lymphatics eventually merge into two main structures or channels, called the thoracic duct (also called the left lymphatic duct) and the right lymphatic duct. Lymphatic vessels from the left side of the head, neck, and chest, in addition to the left upper extremity and the entire body below the ribs, all converge in front of the lumbar section of the vertebrae to form the cistern chyli vessel, which then continues to creep up the backbone as the thoracic duct. This duct then empties the fluid into the left subclavian vein, where a pair of valves is located to prevent the passage of blood into the thoracic duct. The second channel, the right lymphatic duct, takes the lymph from the right side of the body and then deposits it into the opposite, or left subclavian vein. When doctors need to take a detailed look at the lymphatic vessels and organs, they rely on a procedure known as a lymphangiography. The lymphatic vessels and organs are filled with an opaque substance and then filmed, which produces a lymphangiogram. This image is useful for identifying edemas, carcinomas, and viewing any irregularities of the lymph nodes.

Lymph Nodes
The lymphatics contain structures that are oval in shape called lymph nodes. These bean-like organs can range in size from 0.04 to 1 inch (1 to 25 millimeters). Blood flows into lymph nodes on the way to subclavian

The Lymphatic System 247

Figure 6.5 Primary Groups of Lymph Nodes and the Lymph Vessel System. The right and left subclavian veins return lymph to the body’s blood supply. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

veins. Each lymph node contains a hilum, which is a slight depression on one side where the blood vessels enter and leave the node (Figure 6.6). Three structural elements form the framework of a lymph node: the capsule, the trabeculae, and the hilum. The capsule is made up of fibrous connective tissue that not only covers the node, but also extends into it.

248 Julie McDowell and Michael Windelspecht

Figure 6.6 The Lymph Node. On the left, a cross-section view of a lymph node, with the arrows indicating the lymph flow. On the right, a detailed view of antigen being destroyed within the lymph node. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

These extensions into the node are call trabeculae. Inside the node, the outer cortex is composed of tightly packed lymphocytes organized into lymph nodules. These nodules contain germinal centers, where lymphocytes are actually produced. Then the inner portion of the lymph node is called the medulla, which contains lymphocytes that are organized into strands called medullary cords. Lymph nodes contain two kinds of vessels: afferent and efferent. Lymph leaves the node through one or two efferent vessels, while it enters through one or a couple of afferent vessels. Once the lymph is in the node, any bacteria and other foreign materials it is carrying are phagocytized (consumed) by macrophages. The lymphocytes contain plasma cells that produce antibodies to counteract any pathogens that the lymph brings with it. These antibodies, in addition to the lymphocytes, will eventually travel to the blood. (Antibodies will be discussed later in this chapter.) Once lymph enters the node through the afferent vessels, which are located at various places on the surface of the node, the fluid then enters the node’s sinuses, which are a series of irregular channels. After passing through the afferent vessels, lymph enters the cortical sinuses and then circulates through the medullary sinuses located between the medullary

The Lymphatic System 249

cords. After the lymph passes through these sinuses, it then travels to the efferent vessels, which are located at the node’s hilum structure. While the afferent vessels open only toward the node, the efferent vessels open only outward away from the node, pushing lymph out from the structure. In addition, there are fewer efferent vessels (although the actual vessels are wider) than there are afferent vessels. Macrophages that contain phagocytic cells are located along the sinuses. Lymph travels through the nodes, and is then processed by these phagocytic cells, which work to separate out the bacteria, dirt, and other contaminants from the fluid. In addition, the nodes are where the lymphocytes and plasma cells are produced, which then lead to the formation of antibodies. When too many pathogens and microbes enter the node, it can become infected, causing the node to enlarge and become inflamed. Numerous groups, or chains, of lymph nodes are located along the body’s lymph vessel network, but the three primary groups of nodes classified according to their location in the body—cervical, axillary, and inguinal—are detailed in Table 6.3. Each of these node groups are located at an important junction of the body: the cervical nodes are located near the neck and head junction; the axillary nodes are located near where the arm meets the trunk of the body; and the inguinal nodes are found near where the leg meets the trunk. This is important because the skin is more likely to break in these areas, thus allowing pathogens to enter the body. For example, it is more likely that skin will break in the head, arms, or legs, rather than the

TABLE 6.3 Groupings or Chains of Nodes
Group Deep cervical lymph nodes Axillary lymph nodes Location and function Located along the internal jugular veins, these nodes process lymph from the head and neck. Located in the chest and underarm areas of the body, these nodes process lymph from the skin and chest muscles, which include the breasts. Located in the groin region, these nodes drain lymph from the lower extremities of the body, including the genitals.

Inguinal lymph nodes

250 Julie McDowell and Michael Windelspecht

trunk of the body. Therefore, if pathogens enter the body through any of these locations, the lymph will destroy them before they reach the trunk, and also before the lymph is returned to the blood contained in the subclavian veins. As these lymph nodes are processing the pathogens and bacteria, inflammation and temporary infection can occur. For instance, swollen glands frequently accompany “strep throat,” which is an infection caused by a bacteria called Streptococcus. The glands that are swollen are actually the cervical nodes, which have temporarily enlarged as the macrophages fight off the bacteria in the throat’s lymph. There is also a specific kind of lymphatic tissue found in all mucous membranes, which line those systems of the body that have exterior openings to the environment. These include the respiratory, digestive, urinary, and reproductive tracts. All of these systems are lined with mucous membranes for protection. Located under the epithelial layer of these membranes are small groupings of lymphatic tissue know as lymph nodules. This is an important area for lymph nodules because, while these systems are shielded from some contamination through the mucous membranes, they are still vulnerable to attack by microbes, bacteria, and various pathogens. If bacteria is inhaled and enters the body through the respiratory system, the lymph nodules located in the trachea will counteract that bacteria before it even reaches the blood. Two kinds of lymph nodules are Peyer’s patches (located in the small intestine) and tonsils (located in the pharynx).

Bone Marrow
The three kinds of blood cells—white blood cells (WBCs), red blood cells, (RBCs), and platelets—are produced in two kinds of hemopoietic tissues: red bone marrow (or simply bone marrow), and lymphatic tissue that is found in the spleen, thymus gland (see the “Thymus” section later in this chapter), and lymph nodes. The red bone marrow is spongy tissue found in flat and irregular bones. Basically, the purpose of the RBCs is to carry oxygen throughout the body. Through a protein that they carry called hemoglobin, RBCs are able to bond to oxygen molecules. (The function of the RBCs are covered extensively in Chapter 2 on the circulatory system, and WBCs are extensively covered earlier in this chapter).

The Lymphatic System 251

Before RBCs are produced in the bone marrow, they are stem cells that are constantly changing to form all kinds of blood cells. The rate of RBC production is high; approximately a few million are produced every second. This production rate, however, is regulated by the presence of oxygen. If plenty of oxygen is available in the body, then the bone marrow will produce the RBCs at a normal rate. However, if the body is low on oxygen (or in a state of hypoxia), then the kidneys will begin producing a hormone called erythropoietin, which causes the bone marrow to produce more RBCs, which are then able to carry oxygen through the body. Once the oxygen begins making its way through the circulatory system, the body is no longer in a hypoxic state. A person can become hypoxic following a hemorrhage or other injury that has caused them to lose a lot of blood, or if they spend a significant amount of time in higher altitudes. As stem cells develop into RBCs, they go through a number of stages. The most important stages are the last two: when the cell is a normoblast and then a reticulocyte. The last stage during which the cell actually has a nucleus is the normoblast stage. After this stage, the nucleus disintegrates and the cell becomes a reticulocyte. While a small number of reticulocytes in the blood’s circulation is normal, too many (in addition to the presence of normoblasts) could indicate that not enough mature RBCs are available to transport oxygen. Once again, this could be due to an injury, such as a hemorrhage, or a disease. In order for these stem cells to mature into RBCs, they need a significant amount of nutrients, such as protein and iron. In fact, protein and iron are necessary in order for hemoglobin to synthesize. In addition, vitamins such as folic acid and B12 are needed in order for the stem cells’ genetic material to synthesize in the bone marrow. Two necessary chemical agents, called factors, must be present in order for the stem cells to mature into RBCs: the extrinsic factor and the intrinsic factor. The source for the extrinsic factor, also known as vitamin B12, is, as the name implies, external—food. The intrinsic factor comes from certain cells, called parietal cells, of the stomach lining. This factor then combines with food’s vitamin B12 resources in order to prevent the vitamin’s ingestion in the stomach so it can instead be absorbed in the small intestine. If the body is not getting a sufficient supply of the intrinsic or extrinsic factors, then the person might develop anemia.

252 Julie McDowell and Michael Windelspecht

Once the RBCs are produced, they live for approximately 120 days; past this time, they lose their durability and become fragile. At that point, they are removed from the circulatory system by the tissue macrophage system. Macrophages—which are contained not only in the bone marrow, but also in the liver and the spleen—are the lymphatic system’s consumers. These old and failing RBCs are eaten (phagocytized) and digested by the macrophages. However, the iron in the RBCs is extracted and placed in the blood, eventually returning back to the bone marrow to be synthesized into new hemoglobin. This recycling process is done repeatedly. All excessive amounts of iron are stored in the liver until needed by the bone marrow. But not every aspect of the RBCs can be recycled. As the macrophages are processing the RBCs, they take the “heme” portion of the hemoglobin and convert it into bilirubin. The liver then takes the bilirubin and excretes it into bile. The bile leaves the liver, travels to the small intestine and colon, and eventually leaves the body as the waste product known as feces. A small amount remains in the bloodstream and is responsible for the coloring of the urine. If bilirubin does not leave the body, it stays in the blood and can be a sign that the person is suffering from hepatitis or some other blood-related illness.

Blood Types
There are two kinds of red blood cell types important to the lymphatic system because they involve antigens and antibodies: the ABO group and the Rh factor (see Table 6.4 and Figure 6.7). The ABO group includes A, B,

TABLE 6.4 Blood Types: The ABO Group
Blood type A B AB O What are the antigens on the RBCs? A B Both A and B Neither A nor B What are the antibodies present in the plasma? Anti-B Anti-B Neither anti-A nor anti-B Both anti-A and anti-B

The Lymphatic System 253

Figure 6.7 Blood Types and Antibodies. The column on the left shows red blood cells, and the right column shows plasma. The ABO blood types on the left include antigens, while the plasma includes the presence of antibodies. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

AB, and O blood types. A and B represent the presence of antigens on the RBC membrane. For example, there are A antigens on the RBCs of the patient with type A blood, while there are B antigens on the RBCs of the patient with type B blood. In someone with type AB blood, both antigens are present in the blood, while type O indicates that the person’s blood contains neither A nor B blood. The plasma of each person’s blood contains naturally occurring antibodies for those antigens that are not present in the RBCs. This means that

254 Julie McDowell and Michael Windelspecht

a person with type A blood has anti-B antibodies present in his plasma. In addition, the person with type B blood has anti-A antibodies in his plasma, and a type AB blood classification means that the person has neither A nor B antibodies in his plasma. The type O blood patient will have both anti-A and anti-B antibodies. Blood-typing is extremely important when a blood transfusion is necessary for an operation or other medical procedure. Ideally, a patient should receive only a transfusion of their own blood type, or the procedure will not be successful. For example, if a type A patient needs blood and receives type B blood, then the patient’s anti-B antibodies will bind to the donated blood’s type B antigens. After the antibodies and the antigens are bound together, they would clump (agglutination) and then burst (hemolysis), which would defeat the entire purpose of the transfusion. In more serious circumstances, the RBCs that have ruptured would emit free hemoglobin, which would then clog and block the kidney’s capillaries, eventually leading to renal failure or even damage. Because the type O patients have neither the A nor the B antigens, they are often considered “universal donors” who will not cause a reaction in the recipient. Another important characteristic of RBCs is an antigen known as the Rh factor. While people with the Rh factor are considered Rh positive, those without the factor are called Rh negative, and their bodies do not have natural antibodies to this antigen. Therefore, during a blood transfusion, an Rh-negative patient should receive Rh-negative blood, while the Rh-positive patients should receive Rh-positive blood. If for some reason, an Rh-negative patient receives Rh-positive blood, the body will perceive the Rh factor as foreign, and therefore will then begin producing antibodies during that initial exposure. While there likely will not be a problem following this initial transfusion, subsequent exposures to Rh-positive blood when the anti-Rh-factor antibodies are already present could lead to hemolysis and potentially damage the kidneys.

Thymus
In addition to the bone marrow, the second primary lymphatic organ is the thymus, which is located under the sternum in an adult. In a fetus and an infant, however, the thymus gland is located below the thyroid gland,

The Lymphatic System 255

which is an endocrine gland below the larynx. As the body develops and grows, the thymus actually shrinks and becomes fat tissue, leaving only a small amount of the thymus in adults. The thymus reaches maximum size during puberty. The T lymphocytes or T cells that are vital in the body to prepare the immune system to perform its primary duties are produced in the thymus. In fact, the term “T cell” is derived from “thymus-dependent cells.” The hormone released by the thymic gland prepares the T cells to recognize antigens and other foreign invaders in the body and subsequently provide immunity. During the fetal and infant stages, the immune system is immature, which is why babies are more vulnerable to disease and illness in comparison to children and adults. Early in life, the T cells begin (and the lymphocytes perpetuate) this protection as the immune system develops and matures. When a child is two years old, his or her immune system is typically considered mature and fully functional. While infants are routinely given vaccines to boost their immune systems, some vaccines, such as the measles vaccine, are not recommended for children younger than 18 months, because many medical professionals believe that the child’s immune system would not be strong enough to respond properly, thus putting the child in danger of not getting the full benefit of the vaccine, or even having a reaction.

Secondary Lymphatic Organs
In addition to the lymph nodes, thymus, and the bone marrow, the lymphatic system functions with help from five other important organs: the spleen, tonsils, adenoid, Peyer’s patches, and appendix. This section will describe how these secondary lymphatic organs function and help to protect the body from microbes and other foreign antigens that could lead to illness or cause various kinds of diseases.

Spleen
The spleen is protected from harm by the lower rib cage, which encases the organ behind the stomach and is inferior to the diaphragm. While in the fetal stage, the spleen produces RBCs, although this process is taken over by the bone marrow shortly after birth.

256 Julie McDowell and Michael Windelspecht

There are three primary operations performed by the spleen following birth. One of the spleen’s functions is to produce lymphocytes, which then enter the blood and serve as one of the primary tools for the immune system to fight off antigens. Secondly, the spleen contains plasma cells, which produce antibodies that also ward off foreign antigens and microbes. Finally, the spleen also contains macrophages which have the ability to consume, or phagocytize, foreign materials floating around in the blood. In addition, the spleen’s supply of macrophages serves to destroy old RBCs and produce bilirubin, which is eventually extracted to the liver and excreted from the body as bile. Because of its two-part composition, this organ is often described as two organs. One portion of the spleen is composed of lymphatic sheaths and germinal centers called white pulp. The second portion is known as red pulp, and consists of macrophages. The white pulp’s function is considered immune, while the red pulp’s function is considered phagocytic. The white pulp is in charge of producing the antibodies, and this region is also where B and T cells, in addition to plasma cells, are produced and mature. The red pulp is kind of a cleaning machine; it removes unwanted matter, such as bacteria. In addition, the red pulp also acts as a reservoir for other lymphatic elements such as white blood cells and platelets. Doctors do not consider the spleen a “vital organ,” because it performs the same functions as some other organs. For instance, the liver and bone marrow can remove RBCs from the circulatory system, and the lymph nodes will produce lymphocytes and monocytes, in addition to destroying pathogens. However, doctors and researchers have found that without a spleen, a person is more vulnerable to certain bacterial infections such as pneumonia and meningitis.

Tonsils, Adenoid, and the Peyer’s Patches
Tonsils are a type of lymph nodule found in the throat’s pharynx. Tonsils are oval-shaped, pink masses of lymphatic tissue. There are three kinds of tonsils named for their location in the pharynx. Along the lateral walls of the pharynx are the palantine tonsils, while the adenoid, or the pharyngeal tonsil, are located on the posterior wall. The lingual tonsils are located

The Lymphatic System 257

on the base of the tongue. The tonsils and adenoid are composed of lymphatic tissue, just like the lymph nodes located in the neck, groin, and armpits. The adenoid is a single mass of tissue; therefore, it is incorrect to refer to it as “adenoids.” As explained above, it is located in the upper part of the throat, behind the nose and above a part of the throat called the uvula. This area of the throat is called the nasopharynx. While the tonsils can be seen simply by opening the mouth wide, the adenoid can be viewed only through the use of special mirrors and instruments that are passed through the nose by a doctor or other medical professional. The tonsils form a kind of ring of lymphatic tissue around the pharynx. This is a key location because it is near the entrance to breathing passages, in addition to being where food first enters the mouth. Therefore, the tissue can capture germs and pathogens that are coming into the body through food and air, and it can act as a sort of filter for the lymphatic system. This function is especially important during the initial years of life, but becomes less important as the body and lymphatic system matures. Children who suffer frequent infections of the tonsils (called tonsillitis) may have to have their palatine tonsils and their adenoid removed. Some signs of infected tonsils might be noisy breathing, snoring, difficulty swallowing (especially solid foods), and choking or gasping while sleeping. The surgery to remove the tonsils is known as a tonsillectomy. It is important to note that when children have their tonsils removed, they do not suffer immunity loss, because the body has lined up redundant systems, such as the other lymph nodules, that will serve the same function if the tonsils are surgically removed. In the small intestine, there is an abundance of lymphatic tissue in order to filter out pathogens that might be brought into the body through eating and drinking. One type of lymph nodule grouping, located in the small intestine, is called Peyer’s patches. In the small intestine, the Peyer’s patches work to remove pathogens that are invading the body through the digestive system. There are also single lymph nodules, known as solitary lymph nodules, located in the lower part of the small intestine (see Chapter 3 on the digestive system for more information on how the body breaks down and processes food and other substances).

258 Julie McDowell and Michael Windelspecht

Appendix
A small, blunt-ended tube, the appendix is considered part of the large intestine, even though its walls are rich with lymphatic tissue. However, it is recognized that the appendix is not actually part of the digestive tract because of differences in its tissues from the tissues of the small and large intestine. In some cases, fecal matter or waste can become impacted in the appendix, which can cause it to become inflamed, a condition known as appendicitis. If this occurs, the appendix will be surgically removed, a process known as an appendectomy.

The Immune Response: Cell-Mediated and Antibody-Mediated Responses
In order to maintain good health and homeostasis, the human body must continually protect itself against harmful disease-causing substances. This section will explore how the lymphatic system is able to protect the body by providing immunity, the ability to fight off certain infectious substances that can lead to disease and illness. It takes various elements of the lymphatic system, including lymphocytes and antibodies, which provide a strong defense to counter these disease-producing pathogens. Before each of these lymphatic tools is explained, however, it is important to distinguish between nonspecific and specific defenses. Nonspecific defenses are reactions that involve a variety of pathogens and microbes. These defense reactions occur in the skin, mucous membranes (such as nasal passages), the stomach, and the respiratory tract. For instance, lysozyme is an enzyme produced in the eyes’ lacrimal glands as well as the glands in the mucous membranes of the nose and mouth; it is able to destroy harmful microbes, and thus it is considered one of the body’s nonspecific defenses. Also, stomach lining is able to secrete an appropriate amount of hydrochloric acid in order to kill harmful microbes present in food, although some food-borne pathogens can still be harmful. When one breathes, it is natural to inhale dust particles that then settle in the respiratory tract. Microbes attach themselves to these particles, but thread-like structures called cilia move these microbes up through the respiratory tract to be coughed up or spat out.

The Lymphatic System 259

While the body’s nonspecific defense system is effective against microbes and some pathogens, it needs help to fight, especially against certain toxins produced by pathogens. Therefore, the body is equipped with a second line of defense, known as the specific defenses. The specific defenses involve the production of antibodies, which serve to inactivate substances called antigens (pathogens and their related toxins). Antigens act as chemical markers that identify cells as invasive substances. Human cells have their own antigens, which recognize foreign antigens as dangerous and are subsequently destroyed, thus activating an immune response. Examples of foreign antigens include bacteria, viruses, fungi, protozoa, and malignant cells, which are abnormal cells such as those associated with cancer. The response that results from the antibody-antigen reaction is specific. Only a specific antibody can fight off a particular antigen (this relationship will be explored later in this chapter). Nonspecific and specific immune responses are also referred to as innate and adaptive responses, and both systems work together to identify harmful invaders to the body, and then contain and eliminate them. The innate or nonspecific system is always on alert, and is prepared to react to any and all invaders. While their action is rapid, the innate immune response is also limited, but keeps the harmful pathogens from invading the body to a significant degree. However, the adaptive immune system can come in and is equipped with the powerful, specified tools to completely eliminate the pathogen.

Thymus Gland
It is important to emphasize the vital role that the thymus gland plays in immunity. One of the lymphatic system’s primary organs, scientists and doctors noted in the early years of immune research that children born without this organ could not fight off infection. Research has indicated that the thymus gland is instrumental in structuring and organizing the body’s lymphatic system from the fetal years through the initial years after birth. The primary function of the thymus gland is to prepare lymphocytes to participate in the immune response.

260 Julie McDowell and Michael Windelspecht

Lymphocytes
The lymphatic system’s organs—the lymph nodes, thymus gland, spleen, and bone marrow—all contain lymphoid tissue, which is home to two kinds of lymphocytes that each respond to antigens in different ways: T cells and B cells. In the embryo stage, T cells are produced in the bone marrow and thymus. While passing through the thymus, they mature with the help of the thymic hormones. Scientists believe that the thymus gland alters the lymphocyte’s DNA so they become T cells. These cells then travel to the spleen, lymph nodes, and lymph nodules, where they then are produced following birth. After the initial production, the T cells circulate through the body’s blood network, and then lodge in the lymph nodes and other lymphoid tissue. T cells are small lymphocytes that attach to antigens. Once attached, the T cells secrete certain enzymes that dissolve the antigen’s membrane and digest its contents, which destroy both the antigen and the T cell. These lymphocytes primarily kill antigens produced by fungus cells, viruses, and bacteria that result from slow-developing infections and diseases. T cells are also responsible for the rejection that can result from an organ transplant. The second kind of lymphocyte, the B cell, is produced in the bone marrow during the embryonic stage, although it soon moves into the spleen and lymph nodes and nodules. When B cells come into contact with a specific antigen, they become plasma cells, which produce antibodies that are released into the blood’s circulation. Once these specified B cells are produced after coming into contact with a specific antigen, they can remain in the lymph nodes for years, on alert to attack if the antigen is once again introduced into the body.

Antibodies
As stated earlier, antibodies are proteins that are produced in response to foreign antigens. Also called immunoglobulins or gamma globulins, it is important to note that antibodies in themselves do not destroy foreign antigens. Instead, antibodies attach themselves to foreign antigens, marking these substances so the body knows to destroy them. Also as stated earlier, there is one specific antibody for one specific antigen, which means that if the need occurs, the immune system has the

The Lymphatic System 261

capacity to respond to millions of antigens by producing millions of different antigen-specific antibodies. These millions of antibodies are separated into five classes: IgG, IgA, IgM, IgD, and IgE.

The Immune Response
One of the main goals of the lymphatic system’s immune response is to destroy a harmful pathogen, and the first step to achieve this goal is for the body to recognize the antigen associated with this pathogen as foreign. While both T cells and B cells can provide this recognition function, the immune response is more effective if the antigen is dealt with by macrophages and helper T cells, which are a specialized group of T lymphocytes. This foreign antigen is first consumed, or phagocytized, by a macrophage. Parts of this antigen then become attached to the macrophage’s cell membrane. Also located on this cell membrane are “self ” antigens, which are the safe type of antigens found in other cells throughout the individual. When the helper T cells come into contact with this macrophage, it will detect not only the “self ” (and harmless) antigens, but also the foreign antigens. This helper T cell is then on alert and sensitized to this macrophage that contains parts of the foreign antigen. Cell-Mediated and Humoral Immunity There are two types of specific (or adaptive) immunity: cell-mediated and humoral. T cells are responsible for cellular or cell-mediated immunity, which refers to immune response in which macrophages and T cells participate, while humoral immunity involves B cells, T cells, and macrophages. While T cells are associated with cellular immunity, B cells are responsible for humoral immunity, because the B cells are providing protection as they circulate through the blood and tissues of the body. Humoral immunity protects against more acute diseases than are warded off by T cells, such as pneumonia, staphylococcal infection (staph infection), and streptococcal infection, which is also known as strep throat. Figure 6.8 depicts the cell-mediated immunity process. This process does not produce antibodies, although it is successful against intracellular pathogens, including viruses, fungi, malignant cells, and foreign tissue grafts. The initial step in this process is to activate the T cells, which

262 Julie McDowell and Michael Windelspecht

Figure 6.8 Cell-mediated immune response. (Sandy Windelspecht/ Ricochet Productions)

occurs when the helper T cells and macrophages recognize a foreign antigen. Now, recall that these activated T cells are antigen-specific, meaning individual T cells are successful only against certain antigens. But when these T cells are activated, they divide numerous times into two kinds of cells: memory T cells and cytotoxic (killer) T cells. While the memory T cells can always recall a specific antigen and become sensitized upon its presence in the body, the cytotoxic cells are able to eliminate these foreign antigens by destroying their cell membranes. These cells also produce a certain chemical called a cytokine that attracts

The Lymphatic System 263

macrophages to the area where an antigen is present, and then activates them to consume, or phagocytize, the antigen. The effect of these two types of T cells working together ensures that a harmful antigen, such as a virus, is quickly detected, destroyed, and then prevented from reproducing other virus-infected cells in the body. Another kind of cell, called the suppressor T cell, is also present in this immune system. Once the memory and cytotoxic cells work to eliminate the antigen, the suppressor cells work to stop the immune response once the antigen has been destroyed. However, if the antigen reappears, the memory cells will initiate the immune response. Unlike the cell-mediated immunity, humoral immunity does result in antibody production (Figure 6.9). Once again, the initial step in this immune response is also the recognition of the foreign antigen; the helper T cells, B cells, and macrophages are all involved. The helper T cells recognize the antigen and then alert the B cells, which activate other B cells that might be specialized or specific in combating the antigen. These sensitized B cells go through numerous divisions, which results in the production of two types of cells: memory B cells and plasma B cells. The memory B cells will remember the antigen, while the plasma B cells will produce specific antibodies against this one invading antigen. After these antibodies are produced, they bond to the antigen, which forms an antigen-antibody complex. This complex is then marked, or undergoes opsonization, which means that macrophages or neutrophils will know that this antigen must be phagocytized. The creation of this antigen-antibody complex also begins the process of complement fixation. A complement is a family of about 20 different plasma proteins. These proteins circulate through the body’s blood network until they are activated, or “fixed,” by the formation of the antigen-antibody complex. This fixation process can be complete and thorough, but it can also be partial. Complete fixation is successful if the antigen is cellular, which is often the case with bacterial antigens. In this instance, the complement proteins will bond to the complex and to each other, surrounding the antigen with an enzymatic structure that ultimately inflicts damage on the cells to a destructive degree, thus killing the cell. But only partial complement fixation takes place if the antigen is not cellular, which would occur if the antigen were a virus. In this instance,

264 Julie McDowell and Michael Windelspecht

Figure 6.9 Humoral immune response. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

only some of the complement proteins bond to the antigen-antibody complex, thus prompting the antigen to go under chemotaxis, which is another labeling mechanism that attracts macrophages to phagocytize the antigen.

The Lymphatic System 265

As stated earlier, once the antigen has been eliminated, the suppressor T cells step in and work to halt the immune response. This is vital to the health of the lymphatic system so that the body doesn’t overproduce antibodies, which could trigger an autoimmune response.

Innate Immunity Two important types of innate, or nonspecific, defenses are the inflammation response and the release of interferons. The inflammation of body tissue is a nonspecific response to tissue injury or pathogen invasion. The inflammatory response has three primary goals: the isolation and elimination of the harmful pathogens, the removal of debris from the injury site, and the preparation of the injury site for healing and repair. When a pathogen, such as bacteria, enters the skin by breaking through the external skin wall, the macrophages present in that region of the skin promptly descend and go to work phagocytizing the microbes (Figure 6.10). As the initial line of defense, the macrophages fight infection to some extent, although they are not able to shoulder the work on their own. In fact, they are relatively stationary by nature, although they can travel to other sites near that initial region of invasion if necessary. As the macrophages go to work on the microbes, mast cells in the area of tissue damage release histamine, which prompts vasodilation. As a result of vasodilation, blood vessels expand, delivering an increased amount of blood, phagocytic leukocytes, and plasma proteins to the injury site. In addition, the release of histamine causes capillaries to become more permeable, which causes a capillary’s pores to enlarge. When this occurs, plasma proteins that are normally trapped in the capillaries are able to escape and travel to the inflamed tissue. The arrival of the leukocytes and plasma proteins, along with the accompanying increased amounts of blood, cause fluid to build up in the injured tissue area. This leads to swelling, one characteristic of inflammation, in addition to redness and heat, which are due to the increased flow of warm, arterial blood to the region. These substances also sensitize the afferent neurons in the area, which causes the feelings of pain and tenderness. In addition to inflammation, interferons are another nonspecific immune defense that is important against viral infections. Interferons are

266 Julie McDowell and Michael Windelspecht

Figure 6.10 Inflammation and the Body’s Immune Response. The production of inflammation as part of the body’s immune response. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

not one single chemical or molecule, but rather a family of proteins that interfere, albeit briefly, with a virus’s ability to reproduce in other cells. These proteins derive their name from the ability to interfere with viral replication. When a virus invades a cell, the cell’s genetic components prompt it to produce an interferon, which is then secreted into the extracellular fluid. In this way, the interferon is able to warn nearby healthy cells of the viral presence, thus helping them to prepare for resistance.

The Lymphatic System 267

Once the interferon is in the extracellular fluid, it attaches itself to receptors present on the plasma membranes of these neighboring cells, and even distant cells. While it is important to note that interferons themselves do not have antiviral capabilities, these proteins prompt potential host cells to begin production of virus-blocking enzymes, which can break down the virus’s genetic components (including protein synthesis) that are vital for replication. These antiviral enzymes are dormant unless a virus invades their host cells, in which case the enzymes detect the virus’s genetic material (nucleic acid) and go to work. However, this activation can occur only during a limited amount of time, and therefore, it is only a temporary defense against viral infections. After this time, specified immune responses are needed, such as those that relate to antibody production. In addition to their power against viral replication, interferons also help to boost other immune-related mechanisms, including enhancing the phagocytic behavior of macrophages and the production of antibodies. Because they have been shown to slow cell division and tumor growth, interferons also have anticancer benefits, although the extent of these benefits is still being researched.

Genetic and Acquired Immunity
The human body’s immune system is divided into two categories: genetic immunity and acquired immunity. Genetic immunity is determined by DNA and therefore does not involve antibodies; rather, it is the immune system that we are born with as part of our genetic composition. This is specific to a species, however, which means that some species have immunity to pathogens that are harmful to other species. For example, while the measles virus is harmful to humans, it does not affect dogs and cats because of their genetic immunity to the pathogens associated with the virus. Certain viruses that are dangerous to plants are harmless to humans because our genetic makeup protects our cells and tissues from these pathogens (see Table 6.5). Acquired immunity involves antibody production. Within this category, there are two subcategories: passive and active immunity. While active or

268 Julie McDowell and Michael Windelspecht
TABLE 6.5 Genetic and Acquired Immunity
Type of immunity Genetic Definition Part of the human body’s genetic makeup (DNA); does not involve antibodies; different from other species Involves antibody production Passive (Natural) Transmission of antibodies through placenta from mother to fetus; antibodies from other resources; antibody transmission through breast milk from mother to baby Antibody injection in the form of gamma globulins or immune globulins after prior exposure Production of own antibodies; disease recovery through antibody and memory cell production Antibody and memory cell production as a result of a vaccine Examples

Acquired

Passive (Artificial)

Active (Natural)

Active (Artificial)

“self-generated” immunity involves the production of antibodies, passive or “borrowed” immunity is when antibodies are acquired through the direct transfer of antibodies produced by another person or animal. An example of this transfer includes the IgG antibody movement from mother to fetus through the womb’s placenta. Another example includes breast-feeding, when a mother’s milk is enriched with IgA antibodies. This is important because even though these acquired antibodies are broken down within a month, they provide that initial protection against infections while the newborn begins to develop his own immune response system, because the production of antibodies does not happen until at least one month after birth. (See Table 6.6 for a breakdown of passive and active immunity.) In some cases, passive immunity is used in response to a lethal toxin or dangerous viral-related infectious agent, such as when someone has

The Lymphatic System 269
TABLE 6.6 Active and Passive Immunity
Active immunity Antigen exposure The immune system is exposed to the antigen either naturally as a result of an infection, or artificially as a result of a vaccination. Antibodies are produced by the body’s immune system upon exposure to an antigen. Injection or attenuated antigen is needed for artificial active immunity. Antibody production can occur in several weeks or days. Sometimes lifelong. Passive immunity No antigen exposure is required.

Antibody source

Preformed antibodies are borrowed from another source and introduced into the immune system. For artificial passive immunity, patient is injected with borrowed antibodies. Antibody production is immediate. Only a few weeks.

Administration of antibodies Develop time for resistance Resistance time

been bitten by a dog afflicted with the rabies virus or a snake with poisonous venom. When this occurs, the injected antibodies have been harvested from another, often nonhuman source that has produced antibodies following exposure to the antigen in an attenuated form, which means a less potent or virulent form of the antigen. Some of the most common animals used for passive immunity procedures are horses and sheep. Because the antibody injection (or serum) is a foreign substance, the body’s immune system might launch an attack in response, which would result in an allergic reaction.

Vaccines and Immunity
While active immunity is the production of one’s own antibodies, it may be done naturally, or even stimulated through artificial means. Once a person has recovered from a disease, such as chickenpox, his body now has specific antibodies and memory cells that will activate if that disease’s pathogens enter the body again. This is called naturally acquired active

270 Julie McDowell and Michael Windelspecht

immunity. Vaccines help bring about artificially acquired active immunity, because the mechanism stimulates the production of memory cells in addition to antibodies against a disease. The vaccine mechanism was invented by Edward Jenner, a British physician in 1797, when he found that patients could become immune to the devastating effects of the smallpox disease (which had a mortality rate of 40 percent) through exposing or inoculating patients with small amounts of the cowpox disease, which is a weaker form of the smallpox disease. The goal of vaccination, which begins soon after birth for infants, is to equip the body with active immunity by creating a memory system that calls on B and T cells to defend the body when recognizable diseasecausing agents enter the blood and lymphatic system. Usually injected through a needle, a vaccine contains a weakened, or attenuated, form of a specific disease-causing germ. In some cases, the vaccine will contain an inactivated form of the germ, which will produce the toxins associated with the disease upon entering the bloodstream. Once in the body, the immune system produces antibodies against these germs. Because these germs are weakened or dead, they are often not strong enough to make the patient sick, but just strong enough to stimulate the immune system to produce antibodies. It is important to note, however, that just like any medical procedure, there are risks associated with vaccines. Some people have an allergic or other adverse reaction to certain vaccines, although the chances are minimal. Once these antibodies are floating around in the body, memory cells are formed. Both antibodies and these memory cells are then on alert in case the diseaserelated germ or pathogen invades the body at a later date. Vaccines come in different forms. Some are used in combinations, such as the DTP (diphtheria, tetanus, pertussis) and the MMR (measles, mumps, rubella) vaccines that children receive during their early years to boost their immune systems. Vaccines can be produced from three types of microberelated materials: inactivated (killed), attenuated (live), and synthetic (produced in a laboratory). In the first type, inactivated vaccines are produced by killing the disease-causing microbe through chemical means, making them stable. Most inactivated vaccines stimulate a rather weak immune response in patients; therefore, the vaccines must be given several times. Examples of inactivated vaccines include those for cholera and hepatitis A.

The Lymphatic System 271

Live and synthetic vaccines are produced in a laboratory setting in order to eliminate its viral and disease-causing characteristics. Unlike inactivated forms, these vaccines produce both cell-mediated and antibody-mediated immunity, and usually require only one dose. Examples of these vaccines include those for yellow fever, measles, rubella, and mumps. Another kind of vaccine formulation is a toxoid. A toxoid contains an inactivated form of a toxin, which is the harmful substance produced by a microbe. In general, microbes are not dangerous or disease-causing, although some toxins emitted by microbes can cause illness. For example, in a normal environmental setting with plenty of oxygen, the bacterium associated with tetanus is harmless. But when this bacterium is in an environment without oxygen, the bacterium produces a poisonous toxin. These potent toxins are treated with materials, such as a sterile water and formaldehyde solution called formalin, which inactivates these toxins. Diphtheria and tetanus vaccines use toxoids.

Summary
One of the human body systems’ most important—and difficult—jobs is to protect the body against the myriad of organisms that threaten its health and homeostasis. While each of the human body systems has its own defense mechanisms, the duty to protect the body against dangerous invaders falls primarily to the lymphatic system. This system contains specialized cells called lymphocytes that detect threatening organisms and put into motion an immune response that eliminates them from the body. The immune response also protects the rest of the body against free pathogens and cells that might already have been infected. In addition, this response mechanism actually remembers the infection for future defense purposes; if the invading organism enters the body again, protection will be in place. Unlike other systems in the human body, there are only a few primary and secondary organs in the lymphatic system. The bone marrow and thymus are the primary organs, while the secondary organs include the spleen, tonsils, adenoid, Peyer’s patches, and appendix.

This page intentionally left blank

Glossary

Abduction Withdrawal of a part of the body from the body’s axis. ABO group The name of the genetic system that determines human blood groups. Named for the presence of A and B carbohydrates on the surface of the cell, or the absence of the carbohydrates in the case of the O group. This system uses four possible combinations: A, B, AB, or O. Acetylcholine (ACh) A neurotransmitter released in the central and peripheral nervous system, specifically at neuromuscular joints. Acetyl Coenzyme A (acetyl CoA) A molecule that enters the citric acid cycle to produce energy. The acetyl CoA can come from sugars that have gone through glycolysis, or it can come directly from fats or proteins in the cell. Acidosis An abnormal increase in the acidity of the body’s fluids. Acquired Immunity A type of immunity that is not the result of genetic inheritance, but rather due to the exposure to some antigen and the resulting response by the immune system. Actin One of the major proteins involved in muscle contraction. Actin proteins form a long fiber within the muscle contractile unit. Myosin, the other major protein involved in muscle contraction, attaches to the actin filaments and pulls the muscle shorter. Action Potential A change in the electrical charge of a nerve cell following the transmission of a nerve impulse. Adaptation The state of sensory acclimation in which the sensory awareness diminishes despite the continuation of the stimulus. Adduction Movement of a limb toward the median line of the body.

273

274 Glossary

Adenosine Diphosphate (ADP) A chemical substance produced through digestion and used in cell respiration and energy production. Adenosine Triphosphate (ATP) A chemical substance produced from aerobic cell respiration that is the muscle’s direct source of energy for movement. Adipocytes Cells that have large holes filled with fat. Adipose Capsule The central layer surrounding the kidney, composed of fatty tissue. Adrenal Glands The hormone-releasing glands located above the kidneys. Adrenaline Also known as epinephrine, a hormone produced by the adrenal glands that helps regulate the sympathetic division of the autonomic nervous system. During times of stress or fear, the body produces additional amounts of adrenaline into the bloodstream, causing an increase in blood pressure and cardiac activity. Adrenocorticotropic Hormone (ACTH) Hormone produced by the pituitary gland, which stimulates the release of hormones from the adrenal cortex. Also called corticotropin. Aerobic Anything having to do with acquiring oxygen from the air. Aerobic Cell Respiration A chemical process that allows the cell to produce energy from glucose and oxygen. Aerobic Exercise Exercise in which energy is made by processes involving oxygen. Types of aerobic exercise include swimming, biking, and jogging. Afferent Nerves Fibers coming to the central nervous system from the muscles, joints, skin, or internal organs. Afferent Vessels A form of vessel that brings fluid towards an organ or lymph node. After-image An image of a visual nature that exists even after the visual stimulus has ceased. Agglutination The clumping of blood. This can occur if a patient with a certain blood type is given blood of another type. Agonists Hormones that bind to their receptor and elicit a specific biological response.

Glossary 275

Albumin The most abundant plasma protein. It makes up 55 percent of the total protein content of plasma. It is involved in maintaining blood volume and water concentration. Aldosterone A hormone secreted by the adrenal glands in the kidneys that increases sodium reabsorption. Alkaline A term used to indicate a pH of 7 or greater. Sometimes also called basic. Allele A variation of a gene that encodes for a specific trait. It is usually due to minor variations in the DNA at the molecular level. Allergies Hypersensitive reaction to a particular substance or allergen; symptoms vary in intensity. Alveoli Tiny air sacs in the lungs. They exchange oxygen and carbon dioxide between the lungs and the blood. Amino Acids The building blocks of proteins. Amphiarthrosis Joint that permits only slight movement. Amphiphatic Molecules A term given to a molecule that has both hydrophilic and hydrophobic properties. Anaerobic Exercise Exercise in which energy is made by processes that do not involve oxygen. Types of anaerobic exercise include weight lifting and sprinting. Androgens Male sex hormones produced by the gonads and adrenal cortex. Anemia A reduction in the number of red blood cells in the body, resulting in an insufficient number of hemoglobin molecules to carry oxygen to the tissues of the body. This may result in tissue color changes, weakness, and increased susceptibility to disease. Anions Negatively charged particles. Annulus Fibrosus A ring of fibrous connective tissue that serves as an anchor for the heart muscle and as an almost continuous electrical barrier between the atria and ventricles. Antagonistic Muscle Pair Two muscles that have an opposite action, such as the muscle that bends the arm and the muscle that straightens the arm. The antagonistic pair controls and stabilizes the elbow as it bends and straightens.

276 Glossary

Antagonists Hormones that bind to the receptor but do not trigger a biological response. By occupying the receptor, an antagonist blocks an agonist from binding and thus prevents the triggering of the desired effect within the cell. Anterior Situated in front; at or toward the head end of a person or animal. Anterior Pituitary The lobe of the pituitary that secretes hormones that stimulate the adrenal glands, thyroid gland, ovaries, and testes. Antibody Proteins that attack antigens. Antidiuretic Hormone (ADH) Hormone produced by the pituitary gland that increases the permeability of the kidney ducts to return more fluid to the bloodstream. Also called vasopressin. Antigens Invading organisms and materials that enter the human body. The body may mount a defense with antibodies. Antioxidants Compounds that prevent oxidative damage to organic molecules. Vitamins C and E are examples of antioxidant nutrients, as is the mineral selenium. Aorta The largest artery in the human body. It supplies oxygenated blood from the left ventricle of the heart to the branching arteries, which in turn supply oxygen to all parts of the body. Aortic Arch A large, rounded section of the aorta that occurs above the heart, just after the aorta leaves the right ventricle. Aortic Bodies Chemoreceptors found in the aortic arch, the curved portion between the ascending and descending parts of the aorta. Appendectomy The surgical procedure that is used to remove an inflamed, diseased, or ruptured appendix. Appendicitis An inflammation of the appendix. This is usually caused by an infection of the appendix and results in fever, pain, and loss of appetite. Appendicular Skeleton The skeletal structures composing and supporting the appendages; these include the bones of the shoulder and hip girdles as well as those of the arms and legs.

Glossary 277

Arterial Baroreceptor Reflex The mechanism that provides oversight and maintenance of the blood flow by responding to slight changes in blood pressure. Arterial System The portion of the circulatory system that delivers oxygen-rich blood to the body tissues. Arteries Larger blood vessels that deliver oxygen-rich blood to the body tissues. Arterioles Smaller blood vessels that deliver oxygen-rich blood to the body tissues. Arteriovenous Anastomoses Blood vessels that directly connect arterioles to venules. Commonly, blood travels from arterioles to capillaries to venules. Arteriovenous anastomoses are typically found in only a few tissues. Arthritis An inflammation of the joints. Asexual Reproduction Reproduction in which genetically identical offspring are produced from a single parent. Atherosclerosis Also known as hardening of the arteries. It is a narrowing of arterial walls caused by deposits, collectively called plaque, that create rough, irregular surfaces prone to blood clots. Atria Plural of atrium. Atrium In the human heart, it is one of the heart’s two upper chambers. The plural form is atria. Autocatalytic Process A chemical reaction in which the products of the reaction are responsible for initiating the start of the reaction. Autocrine The action of a hormone on the cells that produced it. Autoimmune A term used to describe an immune response to the patient’s own body. An autoimmune disease is therefore one that attacks part of the patient’s body. Autoimmune Disease This occurs when the immune system incorrectly identifies the tissues of the body as foreign material, and begins an immune response against the cells or tissue. Lupus and forms of diabetes may be caused by an autoimmune response.

278 Glossary

Autonomic Nervous System The part of the nervous system that controls involuntary actions and rules the variations of the heart rate. Axial Skeleton The central supporting portion of the skeleton, composed of the skull, vertebral column, ribs, and breastbone. Axon A single nerve fiber that carries impulses away from the cell body and the dendrites. B Cells Also known as B lymphocytes. They are one of two main types of lymphocyte, and participate in the body’s immune response. B Lymphocytes See B Cells. Baroreceptors Pressure detectors located in the major arteries. Part of the arterial baroreceptor reflex, they sense a dip or spike in blood pressure. Basilar Artery A blood vessel that arises from the vertebral arteries and joins with other cerebral arteries to form the circle of Willis. Basophil A type of granulocyte that appears to be active in the inflammatory process. Bayliss Myogenic Response The mechanism by which smooth muscle cells impart muscle tone to the blood vessels. Bilirubin A waste product produced by the liver that is the result of the breakdown of red blood cells. It is released into the small intestine, but some is reabsorbed back into the blood and excreted with the urine. Binucleate Cell A cell that contains two nuclei. Bioavailability A term of nutritional analysis that indicates how much of a nutrient in a food is actually available to the body for absorption by the gastrointestinal tract. Biomarker A molecular clue indicating the presence of disease or the genetic predisposition for disease. Biomolecule A general classification for any of the four groups of organic molecules that are used in the building of cells—proteins, carbohydrates, lipids, and nucleic acids. Bipedal An animal that walks on two feet. Bladder A hollow, muscular organ that stores urine for elimination.

Glossary 279

Blastocyst An embryonic stage following the morula stage characterized by outer trophoblast cells, an inner cell mass, and a central, fluid-filled cavity. Blood The fluid that contains the plasma, blood cells, and proteins and carries oxygen, carbon dioxide, nutrients, waste products, and other molecules throughout the body. Blood Cells Cells contained in the plasma of the blood. See also Red Blood Cells and White Blood Cells. Blood Pressure The force of the blood against the walls of the blood vessels. Blood Sugar Level The amount of glucose in the blood. Blood Type A form of blood, determined by the presence or absence of chemical molecules on red blood cells. A person may have type A, B, O, or AB blood. Blood Vessels Also known as the vasculature. These are the tubes of the circulatory system that transport the blood throughout the body. Bohr Effect High concentrations of carbon dioxide and hydrogen ions in the capillaries in metabolically active tissue that decrease the affinity of hemoglobin for oxygen and leads to a shift to the right in the oxygen dissociation curve. Bolus The name given to the mass of food that accumulates at the rear of the oral cavity for swallowing. Bone Marrow The site in the body where the cells of the lymphatic system originate. Bowman’s Capsule The bulb surrounding the glomeruli. It provides an efficient transfer site for water and waste products to move from the blood to the urinary system. Brachial Artery The blood vessel in the upper arm that accepts blood from the subclavian artery by way of the axillary artery, and travels down the arm to supply the ulnar, radial, and other arteries of the forearm. Brachial Vein The blood vessel that collects blood from the ulnar vein and empties into the axillary vein.

280 Glossary

Brachiocephalic Artery Also known as the innominate artery. This short blood vessel arises from the aortic arch, and branches into the right common carotid artery and the right subclavian artery. Brachiocephalic Veins Also known as the innominate veins. This pair of veins arises from the convergence of the internal jugular and subclavian veins and flows into the superior vena cava. Brain Other than the spinal cord, the primary organ in the nervous system. Brain Stem This area of the brain connects the cerebrum with the spinal cord and is also the general term for the area between the thalamus and the spinal cord, which includes the medulla and pons. Bronchi The two large air tubes leading from the trachea to the lungs that convey air to and from the lungs. Bronchial Vein One of two main blood vessels that collect newly oxygenated blood from the bronchi and a portion of the lungs, and deliver it through one or more smaller veins to the superior vena cava. Bronchiole Any of the smallest bronchial tubes that end in alveoli. Buccal Cavity Another term commonly used to describe the oral cavity. It technically represents the space between the back of the teeth and gums to the rear of the mouth. Bundle of His A thick, conductive tract located in the heart that transmits the electrical signal from the AV node to the Purkinje fibers in the base of the ventricle wall. Bursa A sac of fluid within a joint. Calcitonin Hormone produced by the thyroid gland that influences calcium and phosphorous levels in the blood. Calcitrol A hormone secreted by the kidneys that increases the levels of calcium and phosphorous in the blood. Calorie A measure of how much energy food contains. Cancellous Bone Bone that has a latticework structure, such as the spongy tissue in the trabecular bone. Capillaries The tiniest blood vessels. They are the sites of exchange: At body tissues, blood in the capillaries delivers oxygen and nutrients, and

Glossary 281

picks up carbon dioxide and waste products; and at the lungs, blood in the capillaries drops off carbon dioxide and picks up oxygen. Carbon Monoxide Poisoning A medical condition arising when a person is exposed to carbon monoxide gas. Prolonged exposure can be fatal. Cardiac (Heart) Muscle The type of muscle found in the heart. Catecholamines A class of hormone (including epinephrine and norepinephrine) synthesized in the adrenal medulla that is involved in the body’s stress response. Cation A positively charged particle. Cell Body Main mass of the neuron that contains the nucleus and organelles. Central Nervous System Division of the nervous system that contains the brain and the spinal cord. Cerebellum Located towards the back of the medulla and pons, this portion of the brain is in charge of many subconscious aspects of skeletal muscle functioning, such as coordination and muscle tone. Cerebral Aqueduct The tunnel that runs through the midbrain, allowing cerebrospinal fluid to travel from the third to the fourth ventricle. Cerebral Cortex This area of the brain is the gray matter located on the surface of the cerebral hemispheres. The cerebral cortex includes the brain’s motor, sensory, auditory, visual, taste, olfactory, speech, and association areas. Cerebrospinal Fluid (CSF) The fluid in the spinal cord’s central canal that serves as the fluid for the central nervous system. This tissue fluid circulates in and around the brain. Cerebrum This is the largest portion of the brain and consists of the left and right cerebral hemispheres. The cerebrum controls movement, sensation, learning, and memory. Chemoreceptors Cells that respond to changes in their chemical environment by creating nerve impulses. Some chemoreceptors in the brain respond to carbon dioxide levels in the blood to help regulate breathing. Chemotaxis The reaction of mobile cells to a chemical gradient; the cells may move either towards or away from the gradient depending on the nature of the chemical being used.

282 Glossary

Chloride Shift Describes the exchange of negatively charged chloride ions for negatively charged bicarbonate ions across an erythrocyte’s cell membrane. Cholesterol A fatlike substance that occurs naturally in the body. Two types exist: high-density lipoprotein (HDL) and low-density lipoprotein (LDL). Chondrocytes Cartilage cells. Chordae Tendineae Tiny tendinous cords located at each of the heart valves. They attach to nearby muscles and prevent blood backflow through the valves. Choroid Plexus This capillary network helps form the cerebrospinal fluid in the brain. Chromatin A diffuse mixture of DNA and proteins that condenses into chromosomes prior to cell division. Chromosomes Cellular structures composed of proteins and DNA that carry the body’s hereditary information. Cilia Hairlike projections from the surface of a cell. In the respiratory system, cilia help filter out foreign particles from the air before they reach the lungs. Circadian Rhythm The body’s 24-hour biological cycle that regulates certain activities, such as sleep, regardless of environmental conditions, including lightness and darkness. Circle of Willis A vascular structure that supplies blood to the brain. It arises from the basilar, internal carotid, and other arteries. Circulatory System The heart, blood vessels, and blood. Circumcision The surgical removal of the foreskin. The term is also sometimes used with reference to females to describe a controversial and excruciating practice of genital mutilation that is common in certain societies around the world. Citric Acid Cycle A chemical reaction that takes place in the mitochondria. The cycle produces some energy for the cell and produces products that can be used to produce large amounts of energy through oxidative phosphorylation.

Glossary 283

Colic Arteries Divided into right, left, and middle colic arteries, all of which branch from either the inferior or superior mesenteric arteries, and feed the colon. Collagen The albumin-like substance in connective tissue, cartilage, and bone. Collecting Duct Where fluid is carried from the distal convoluted tubule (DCT) in the nephron of the kidneys on its way to the minor calyx. Colostrum Nutritious fluids secreted by the breasts shortly before and after a woman gives birth; precedes the production of breast milk. Common Carotid Arteries One of two major blood vessels that supply the head. The left carotid splits directly from the aortic arch between the bases of the two coronary arteries. The right carotid indirectly branches from the aorta via the brachiocephalic artery. Complement The collective term for a variety of beta globulins. See also Globulins. Complement Fixation The process by which complement factors bind to either antibodies or cell surfaces during the immune response. Complementary Base Pair Nucleotide bases (adenine and thymine or guanine and cytosine) that pair up via hydrogen bonds in DNA. Compression Forces Forces that squeeze items together; blows that press against the body. Computed Tomography (CT) Scan A commonly used tool for determining the nature of a stroke. Concentration Gradient The change in solute concentration from one location to another. Unless restricted, solutes will move from a site of higher solute concentration to one of lower solute concentration, leading to an equilibrium between the two sites. Concentric Contraction The type of contraction that occurs when a muscle contracts and grows shorter, such as the biceps muscle when bending the elbow. Conchae Structures or parts that resemble a seashell in shape with three bony ridges or projections—the superior, middle, and inferior conchae— on the surface of the nasal cavity sides.

284 Glossary

Contraceptive An agent that prevents ovulation, kills sperm, or blocks sperm from reaching the ovum for fertilization. Convergence An impulse pathway where a neuron receives impulses from the nerve endings of thousands of other neurons but transmits its message to only a few other neurons. Coronal Plane Divides the body into front and back portions. Coronary Arteries Arising from the base of the aorta, these are the two major arteries that feed the heart muscle. The right coronary artery remains a single, large vessel, but the left coronary artery almost immediately splits into transverse and descending branches. Coronary Circulation The circulatory system of the heart. Corpus callosum A band of white matter connecting the cerebral hemispheres. Corpus luteum Progesterone-secreting tissue that forms from a ruptured Graafian follicle in the mammalian ovary after the egg has been released. Cortex The tissue layer that covers the brain. Cortical Bone The hard, dense bone that forms the outer shell of all bones. Corticotroph Cell in the anterior pituitary gland that secretes corticotropin (ACTH). Cortisol A steroid hormone produced by the adrenal cortex that influences the body’s stress response. Cranial Nerves The brain’s 12 pairs of nerves located in the peripheral nervous system. Craniosacral Division Another name for the parasympathetic division of the autonomic nervous system. In this division, all the cell bodies of preganglionic neurons are located in the brain stem and sacral segments of the spinal cord. Cranium The bones of the skull that house the brain. Creatinine Waste produced by the breakdown of creatine phosphate in muscles.

Glossary 285

Creatine Phosphate A molecule stored in the muscle that can quickly replenish ATP during a sudden burst of exercise. CT Scan See Computed Tomography (CT) Scan. Cuboid Bones Bones in the wrist that are shaped like cubes. Cutaneous Senses The skin’s sensory mechanisms whose receptors are located in the dermis. Cytochromes A class of membrane-bound intracellular hemoprotein respiratory pigments. These enzymes function in electron transport as carriers of electrons. Cytokines Signaling peptides secreted by immune cells and other types of cells in response to infection or other stimuli. Cytoplasm Cellular material located between the nucleus and cell membrane. Daughter Cells Cells arising from mitotic division that are identical to the parent cell. Deglutition Another term used for the act of swallowing. Dehydration Synthesis A form of chemical reaction that involves the removal of water to form a chemical bond. Also called a condensation reaction. Dentin A tissue that is the majority of the mass of a tooth. It consists primarily of minerals (70 percent), with the remainder being water and organic material. Depolarization When the electrical charges in a nerve cell reverse due to a stimulus. The rapid infusion of sodium ions causes a negative charge outside and a positive charge inside the cell membrane. Detrusor Muscle Three layers of smooth muscle surrounding the mucosa of the bladder. Diaphragm A muscle that aids in respiration. It separates the thoracic cavity from the abdominal cavity. Diaphysis The central shaft of a bone. Diastole The heart’s resting period. Diathroses Joints allowing free movement.

286 Glossary

Diffusion The passive flow of molecules from one location to another. Diploid Cells Any organism whose cells contain two copies of each chromosome. The majority of human cells, except sex cells and some liver cells, are diploid. Dislocation Condition when a bone is moved out of a joint. Distal Indicates direction away from the torso. Distal Convoluted Tubule (DCT) Located between the loop of Henle and the collecting duct inside the nephron of the kidney. Diuretic A substance (i.e., caffeine) that increases urine production. Divergence An impulse pathway where a neuron receives impulses from a few other neurons and relays these impulses to thousands of other neurons. DNA A nucleic acid that contains a cell’s genetic or hereditary information. Dopamine A neurotransmitter found in the motor system, limbic system, and the hypothalamus. Dorsal Root The sensory root of a spinal nerve that attaches the nerve to the posterior part of the spinal cord. Dorsal Root Ganglion An enlarged portion of the spinal nerve’s dorsal root that contains the sensory neuron’s cell bodies. Down Syndrome Mental retardation associated with specific chromosomal abnormalities. Dura Mater This fibrous connective tissue is the outermost layer of the brain’s meninges. Eccentric Contraction The type of contraction that occurs when a muscle contracts but the overall muscle grows longer rather than shorter; an eccentric contraction occurs in the biceps which contracts to control the arm as it extends, but the muscle grows longer rather than shorter. Effector A muscle, gland, or other organ that responds after receiving an impulse. Efferent Nerves Fibers leaving the central nervous system carrying messages to the muscles, joints, skin, or internal organs.

Glossary 287

Efferent Neuron Nerve cells that carry impulses and messages away from the spinal cord and brain to the muscles and glands. Efferent Vessels A vessel of the lymphatic or circulatory systems that carries fluid away from an organ or lymph node. Eicosanoids Compounds derived from fatty acids that act like hormones to influence physiologic functions. Elastin A protein of blood vessels that imparts elasticity. Electrocardiogram (ECG or EKG) The product of an electrocardiograph, it is a printout depicting the heart’s electrical activity. An ECG has five parts, each signified with the letter P, Q, R, S, or T, that reflect different phases in the heart activity. Electrocardiograph (ECG or EKG) A device that records the heart’s electrical activity as a jagged line on a sheet of paper, which is called an electrocardiogram. Electrolyte A charged particle like calcium (Ca2+) or magnesium (Mg2+) that may have a number of functions in cells. Electron Transport System A complex sequence found in the mitochondrial membrane that accepts electrons from electron donors and then passes them across the mitochondrial membrane creating an electrical and chemical gradient. Embryogenesis The entire process of cell division and differentiation leading to the formation of an embryo. End-diastolic Volume The amount of blood in a completely filled ventricle. In an adult, this is typically about 0.12 quarts (120 ml). Endocardium The membrane lining the heart. Endocrine System The body’s organ system that controls hormone secretion. Endothelium In blood vessels, it is also known as the tunica intima. The tunica intima forms the innermost layer of blood vessels. Eosinophil A type of granulocyte that appears to be active in the moderation of allergic responses and the destruction of parasites.

288 Glossary

Epiblast The outer layer of a blastocyst before differentiation into the ectoderm, mesoderm, or endoderm. Epidemic A widespread outbreak of an infectious disease that affects a disproportionately large number of people within a given population. Epinephrine See Adrenaline. Epiphysis The portion of bone attached to another bone by a layer of cartilage. Epithelial Cell A type of cell that lines organs and tissues of the body. It specializes in the exchange of materials with the external environment, such as the lumen of the gastrointestinal tract. Epitope The specific area of an antigen to which the B cell receptor binds. Equilibrium Balance mechanisms that are regulated by inner ear structures. Erythroblast An early stage in red blood cell development. Erythrocytes Red blood cells. Erythropoietin A protein hormone produced by the kidneys that stimulates red blood cell production. Estrogen Any of a family of hormones produced by the female ovaries that determine female sexual characteristics and influence reproductive development. Excitatory Nerve/Fiber A nerve fiber that passes impulses on to other fibers. Excitatory Synapse The passing of an impulse transmission to other synapses. Exocrine Glands Glands that utilize ducts to release their secretions to the outside environment. Extension A stretching out, as in straightening a limb. External Urethral Sphincter Ring of voluntary muscle surrounding the end of the urethra, which regulates urine flow out of the body. Extracellular Fluid The water found outside a cell that contains plasma and other tissue fluids. Extrinsic Factors Another term used for vitamin B12 in the diet.

Glossary 289

Facilitated Diffusion A passive process that utilizes a membrane-bound protein to move a compound across a membrane down its concentration gradient. Fascia The connective tissue surrounding an entire muscle. The fascia becomes part of the tendon at either end of the muscle, connecting the muscle to the bone. Fascicle A bundle of muscle fibers within the muscle surrounded by a tissue called the perimysium. Each muscle is made up of many fascicles. Fast-twitch Muscle A type of muscle fiber that is able to contract very quickly. These fibers are predominantly found in muscles that must contract quickly and with great strength but do not need to contract over a long period of time. Femoral Artery Arising from one of the two external iliac arteries, the femoral artery traverses the thigh to the popliteal artery. Femoral Vein A large blood vessel in the thigh that collects blood from the popliteal vein and great saphenous vein and delivers it to the external iliac vein. Fibrinogen A protein in plasma. It functions in blood clotting. Fibular Vein See Peroneal Veins. Flavoproteins The enzymes that contain flavin bound to a protein. Flavoproteins play a major role in biological oxidations. Flexion The bending of a joint or of body parts having joints. Follicle-stimulating Hormone (FSH) A hormone produced by the anterior pituitary gland that triggers sperm production in the testes and stimulates the development of follicles in the ovaries. Fossa A hole or indentation. Fossae The plural form of fossa. Gametes Reproductive cells that, before fusing at fertilization, are haploid—they contain 23 instead of 46 chromosomes. Gas Exchange In the respiratory system, gas exchange refers to the process of acquiring oxygen from the air and eliminating carbon dioxide from the blood.

290 Glossary

Gastric Arteries Blood vessels of the digestive system. The left gastric artery stems from the celiac artery and supplies the stomach and lower part of the esophagus. The right gastric artery stems from the common hepatic artery and eventually connects with the left gastric artery. Gastric Inhibitory Peptide (GIP) The gastrointestinal hormone whose main action is to block the secretion of gastric acid. Gastric Veins Blood vessels of the digestive system. Blood from the stomach exits into the gastric veins, which then empty into a number of other veins that ultimately enter the portal vein (in the case of the left and right gastric veins) or the splenic vein (in the case of the short gastric vein). Gastrin Hormone produced by the gastrointestinal system that regulates stomach acid secretion. Gastroepiploic Arteries Blood vessels of the digestive system. The right gastroepiploic artery branches from the gastroduodenal artery. The left gastroepiploic artery branches from the splenic artery. Both provide blood to the stomach and duodenum. Gene Expression In genetics, a term describing the results of activating of a gene. Gene Transcription The process by which a strand of DNA is copied to form a complementary RNA strand. Genetic Immunity A form of immunity to a pathogen that is inherited. Genetic Imprinting Refers to differences in the way maternal or paternal genes are expressed in the offspring. Genetic Sex Gender determination based on an XX or an XY chromosome configuration. Glia Support cells in the brain. Globulins Plasma proteins that function as transportation vehicles for a variety of molecules, in blood clotting and/or in the body’s immune responses. They are divided into three types alpha, beta, and gamma globulins. Glomerular Capsule A cup-shaped sac that surrounds glomeruli of the nephrons.

Glossary 291

Glomerular Filtrate The product of blood filtration in the nephrons of the kidneys. Glomeruli Clusters of capillaries in the kidneys. Glomerulus The singular form of glomeruli. Glossopharyngeal Nerve The mixed nerve in the throat and salivary glands that contains sensory fibers for the throat and taste from the posterior one-third of the tongue. Glucose A form of sugar that is a necessary component (along with oxygen) in cell respiration. Glucose Tolerance Test A test measuring blood sugar levels that is often used to diagnose diabetes. Glutamate A neurotransmitter associated with pain-related impulses. Glycogen A storage form of carbohydrate. The liver converts fats, amino acids, and sugars to glycogen, which functions as a reserve energy supply for the body. Glycogenolysis The breakdown of glycogen in the liver and in muscle tissue. Glycolysis The process of breaking down glucose into two molecules of pyruvate. Glycolysis produces some energy for the cell and is the primary way of producing energy during anaerobic exercise. Glycoprotein An organic compound composed of a joined protein and carbohydrate. Goblet Cell An epithelial cell that secretes mucus. Gonadotroph A cell in the anterior pituitary gland that secretes luteinizing hormone and follicle-stimulating hormone. Gonadotropins Hormones (luteinizing hormone and follicle-stimulating hormone) released by the anterior pituitary gland that stimulate the ovaries and testes. Graft Rejection The tendency of the immune system to reject transplanted tissue as foreign. Granulocyte The most abundant type of white blood cell. See also Basophil, Eosinophil, and Neutrophil.

292 Glossary

Gray Matter Nerve tissue located in the central nervous system containing cell bodies of neurons. Growth Factors Proteins that act on cells to stimulate differentiation and proliferation. Growth Hormone Hormone secreted by the anterior pituitary gland that promotes bone and muscle growth and metabolism. Growth Hormone-Releasing Hormone (GHRH) A hormone that stimulates the anterior pituitary gland to secrete the growth hormone (GH). Gyri Folds or ridges in the cerebral cortex. H Zone The space between the two sets of actin filaments in the center of the sarcomere. The H zone grows smaller when the sarcomere contracts, and the actin filaments slide toward each other in the center of the sarcomere. Haldane Effect A high concentration of oxygen, such as occurs in the alveolar capillaries of the lungs, that promotes the dissociation of carbon dioxide and hydrogen ions from hemoglobin. HDL See High-density Lipoprotein (HDL). Heart The muscular pump that powers the circulatory system. Heart Attack Also known as a myocardial infarction, this condition happens when the supply of oxygen to a portion of the heart muscle is curtailed to such a degree that the tissue dies or sustains permanent damage. Heart Failure A condition in which the heart can no longer carry out its pumping function adequately, resulting in slow blood circulation, poorly oxygenated cells, and veins that hold more blood. Hematopoeisis The formation and maturation of blood cells. Hematuria Blood in the urine. Heme Group A ringlike chemical structure that is part of hemoglobin. Hemes The deep-red organic pigment that contains iron and other atoms to which oxygen binds in blood hemoglobin. Hemes are found in most oxygen-carrying proteins. Hemoglobin A large chemical compound in red blood cells that imparts their red color and also participates in transporting oxygen and carbon dioxide.

Glossary 293

Hemolysis The rupture and destruction of red blood cells. Hepatic Arteries The blood vessels supplying the liver and other organs. The common hepatic artery arises from the celiac trunk and supplies the right gastric, gastroduodenal, and proper hepatic arteries. The proper hepatic artery supplies the liver by way of the cystic artery. Hepatic Portal System The name given to the portion of the circulatory system that connects the stomach and both intestines to the liver. Hepatic Vein The blood vessel that collects blood from the liver and delivers it to the inferior vena cava. High Blood Pressure A medical condition that arises when the pressure of the blood against the blood vessel walls exceeds normal limits. It results from a narrowing of the arterioles. High-Density Lipoprotein (HDL) Often called the type of cholesterol curtails the accumulation of low-density lipoprotein in blood vessels. Hilius The curved notch on the side of each kidney near the center where blood vessels enter and exit the kidney. Histones Proteins associated with gene expression. Homeostasis The regulation of the body’s internal environment to maintain balance. Homologous In genetics, chromosomes (one from the male parent, one from the female parent) carrying alleles for similar traits, such as eye color, that pair up during meiosis. Hormone A chemical compound, often called a chemical messenger, that the brain and other organs use to communicate with the cells. Huntington’s Chorea A progressive and fatal disease affecting the nervous system. Hydrolysis In chemistry, the breaking of a chemical bond by the addition of water. Hydrophilic A water-loving compound, meaning that it is soluble in water. An example is glucose.

294 Glossary

Hydrophobic A water-fearing compound, meaning that is it generally insoluble in water. Most lipids are hydrophobic, as are some amino acids. Hypernatremia Too much sodium in the extracellular fluid. Hypertension See High Blood Pressure. Hypertrophy The process in which muscles grow larger in response to exercise. Hyperventilation An increased and excessive depth and rate of breathing greater than demanded by the body’s needs; can lead to abnormal loss of carbon dioxide from the blood, dizziness, tingling of the fingers and toes, and chest pain. Hypoblast The inner layer of tissue in a developing embryo that will eventually become the digestive tract and respiratory tract. Hypocalcemia A deficiency of calcium in the blood. Hyponatremia Too little sodium in the extracellular fluid. Hypophysis The pituitary gland. Hypothalamic-Hypophyseal Portal System The circulation system through which neurohormones from the hypothalamus travel directly to the anterior pituitary gland without ever entering the general circulation. Hypothalamic-Pituitary-Target Organ Axis A multiloop feedback system that coordinates the efforts of the hypothalamus, the pituitary gland, and the target gland. Hypothalamus This part of the brain regulates body temperature and pituitary gland secretions. The hypothalamus is located superior to the pituitary gland and inferior to the thalamus. Hypoxia A sudden decrease in the blood’s oxygen content. I Band The region between the Z band at the outside of the sarcomere and the end of the myosin chain that spans the center of the sarcomere. Iliac Arteries These arise at the end of the abdominal artery. The abdominal artery bifurcates into two common iliac arteries, each of which soon divides again into internal and external iliac arteries.

Glossary 295

Iliac Veins Blood from the femoral vein collects in the external iliac vein, which joins the internal iliac vein and carries blood from the pelvis to form the common iliac vein. Immune System A body system that includes the thymus and bone marrow and lymphoid tissues. The immune system protects the body from foreign substances and pathogenic organisms in the form of specialized cellular responses. Immunity The ability of an organism not to be affected by a given disease or pathogen. Immunoglobulins (Ig) Plasma proteins that act as antibodies. The five main types are IgA, IgD, IgE, IgG, and IgM. Inflammatory Mediators Soluble, diffusible molecules that act locally at the site of tissue damage and infection. Inhibin Hormone secreted by the ovaries and testes that inhibits the release of follicle-stimulating hormone (FSH) by the pituitary. Inhibitory Nerve A type of nerve fiber that obstructs impulse transmission to another fiber. Inhibitory Synapse An impulse transmission obstruction due to a chemical inactivator located at the dendrite of the postsynaptic neuron. In-series Blood Circulation Also known as portal circulation. It is blood flow that travels from one organ to another in series. Insertion The end of the muscle that is usually farthest from the center of the body and usually the one that moves when the muscle contracts. Insulin A hormone secreted by the pancreas. It allows the body cells to use energy, specifically glucose. Insulin-like Growth Factors Substances produced in the liver and other tissues that act much like growth hormone, stimulating bone, cartilage, and muscle cell growth and differentiation. Intercalated Disk A disk that separates two muscle fibers in the heart muscle. This disk can conduct the signal to contract from one muscle fiber to the next. With this connection, the entire heart muscle can contract in unison.

296 Glossary

Intercostal Muscles Found under the ribs, these muscles play a role in respiration. Interferons A family of drugs used to regulate the body’s immune system. They may be used for such diseases as multiple sclerosis or cirrhosis of the liver. Interlobar Arteries Blood vessels that branch from the renal artery to disperse blood throughout the kidney and to glomeruli. Intermediate Pituitary A lobe of the pituitary of which only vestiges remain in humans. Intermediolateral Cell Column Located on the thoracic level of the spinal cord, this is an extra cell column where all presynaptic sympathetic nerve cell bodies are located. Internal Urethral Sphincter Ring of involuntary muscle that surrounds the urethra where it meets the bladder and that controls the flow of urine. Intestinal Villi Tiny projections that line the inside wall of the small intestine and the uptake of nutrients by capillaries. Intracapsular Ligaments Ligaments within the capsule at the joint. Intracellular Fluid The water found within a cell. Intrinsic Factors A protein released by the gastrointestinal tract that aids in the absorption of vitamin B12. In Vitro Occurring outside the body, often used to refer to laboratory procedures such as fertilization of ova within a laboratory dish. In Vivo Occurring inside the body. Involuntary Muscle See Smooth Muscle. Ions Any element or compound that loses or gains electrons and in the process changes its net electric charge. Islets of Langerhans Endocrine cells located in the pancreas in which the hormones insulin and glucagon are produced. Isometric Contraction The type of contraction that occurs when a muscle contracts but the joint does not open or close, such as when pushing against a wall or pushing down on a table. Joint The union between two bones.

Glossary 297

Jugular Veins Blood vessels of the head and/or neck. The anterior jugular vein collects blood from veins of the lower face, traverses the front of the neck, and delivers the blood to the external jugular vein. The external jugular vein is a large vein that also receives blood from within the face and around the outside of the cranium, and empties into one of several veins, including the internal jugular. The internal jugular vein is the largest vein of the head and neck, and also drains blood from the brain and neck. It joins the subclavian vein to form the brachiocephalic vein. Ketone Bodies Substances produced from fats when not enough glucose is present, which provide an alternate energy source for the brain and other tissues. Kidneys The two bean-shaped organs that filter wastes, regulate electrolyte balance, and secrete hormones. Kilocalorie The amount of energy required to raise 1,000 grams of water from 14.5° to 15.5° Celsius at standard atmospheric pressure. Lacteals The portion of the lymphatic system that is associated with the gastrointestinal system, specifically the intestines. Lactotroph A cell in the anterior pituitary gland that secretes prolactin. Lateral Situated on a side. LDL See Low-density Lipoprotein (LDL). Leptin A protein hormone that influences metabolism and regulates body fat. Ligament A tough band of connective tissue that connects bones to each other. Lipoproteins Proteins that are connected chemically to lipids and used by the digestive system to transport hydrophobic fats and lipids in the hydrophilic bloodstream. Loop of Henle The U-shaped section between the proximal convoluted tubule and the distal convoluted tubule in the nephron of the kidney. Low-density Lipoprotein (LDL) Often called the “bad” cholesterol. This type of cholesterol can build up on blood-vessel walls and cause health problems.

298 Glossary

Lumbar Veins Blood vessels of the digestive system. Lumbar veins collect blood from the abdominal walls and deliver it to other veins, including the inferior vena cava. Lumen The internal diameter of a blood vessel. It represents the open space in the vessel through which the blood flows. Luteinizing Hormone (LH) A hormone produced and secreted by the anterior pituitary gland that stimulates ovulation and menstruation in women and androgen synthesis by the testes in men. Luteolysis The process by which the corpus luteum in the ovary degenerates when an egg is not fertilized. Lymph Fluid in the vessels of the lymphatic system. It is the interstitial fluid that exits the capillaries and enters surrounding cells during the capillaries’ exchange function. Lymphatic System A series of vessels that shunts excess tissue fluid into the veins. Lymph Node Filters that separate from lymph any invading organisms and other foreign materials. Lymphocyte A type of leucocyte that detects antigens and serves in the body’s immune response. The two main types are B cells and T cells. Macrophage White blood cells that ingest and digest bacteria, other foreign organisms, platelets, and old or deformed red blood cells. Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI) A diagnostic tool for viewing blood flow and locating sites of blood-flow blockage. Major Calyx Openings in the center of the kidneys through which urine flows into the renal pelvis. Malignant A condition that becomes progressively worse or more pronounced over time, and which may lead to death. Medial Toward the midline of the body. Medulla Located above the spinal cord, this part of the brain controls vital functions such as heart rate, respiration, and blood pressure. Medullary Cords Within a lymph node, these are areas of dense lymphatic tissue.

Glossary 299

Meiosis A process of cell division resulting in daughter cells containing half the number of chromosomes contained in the parent cell. In humans, this process is responsible for the generation of the sex cells, oocytes and sperm. Meninges The membrane is composed of connective tissue that covers the brain and spinal cord and lines the dorsal cavity. Mesenteric Arteries Blood vessels of the digestive system. The inferior and superior mesenteric arteries arise from the abdominal aorta and flow into numerous arteries of the large and small intestines, and the rectum. Mesenteric Veins Blood vessels of the digestive system. The superior mesenteric vein drains the small intestine, and the inferior mesenteric collects blood from the colon and rectum. Both deliver their blood to the splenic vein. Mesentery A tissue that suspends the digestive glands within the abdominal cavity. The mesentery connects to the outer layer of the gastrointestinal tract. Metabolism The sum of all of the chemical reactions in a cell, tissue, organ, or organism. In nutritional terms, it frequently applies to the processing of the energy nutrients and generation of energy. Microvilli Small outgrowths covering the intestinal villi. They increase the surface area of the villi, aiding in nutrient uptake by capillaries. Micturition The process in which urine is released from the bladder; urination. Midsagittal plane An imaginary line that passes through the skull and spinal cord, dividing the body into equal halves. Mineralocorticoids A class of hormones produced by the adrenal cortex that regulate mineral metabolism. Minor Calyx A cup-like receptacle attached to each renal pyramid in the kidney. Mitochondria Located in the cell’s cytoplasm, these are organelles where cell respiration takes place and energy is produced. Mitosis A process of cell division resulting in daughter cells containing the same number of chromosomes as the parent cell.

300 Glossary

Monocyte A type of white blood cell. They become macrophages, large cells that engage in phagocytosis. Monozygotic Refers to twins arising from one ovum. Morula A compacted group of embryonic cells at a level of development between the zygote and blastocyst stages. Motilin A gastrointestinal hormone that stimulates intestinal muscle contractions to clean undigested materials from the small intestine. Mucociliary Pertaining to mucus and to the cilia of the epithelial cells in the respiratory system. Mucosa A mucous membrane that lines a body cavity. Multiple Marker Test Testing to screen for various biomarkers of disease. See also Biomarker. Muscle Fiber A muscle unit made up of many muscle cells that have fused together and received the signal to contract from a single nerve. Muscle Spindle Related to the stretch reflex, this receptor responds to the muscle’s passive stretch and contraction. The muscle spindles are parallel with the muscle fibers. Myelin Sheath A substance composed of fatty material that covers most axons and dendrites in the central and peripheral nervous systems in order to electronically insulate neurons from one another. Myofibril The contractile unit within a muscle fiber that is made up of a series of contractile units called sarcomeres. Each muscle fiber contains many myofibrils, all of which contract when the muscle fiber receives a signal from a nerve. Myoglobin A molecule in the muscle that collects oxygen from the blood and delivers it to mitochondria in the muscle fiber. Myosin One of the major contractile proteins making up a muscle fiber. Myosin proteins form chains that pull on actin filaments, causing the muscle fiber to contract. Nephron The filtering unit of the kidney. Nerve A system of neurons with blood vessels and other connective tissue.

Glossary 301

Nerve Fiber The neuron including the axon and the surrounding cells. These fibers branch out at the neuron’s ending, which is known as arborization. Nerve Plexus A combination of neurons from various sections of the spinal cord that serve specific areas of the body. Nerve Tracts A neuron group that performs a common function in the central nervous system. This grouping can be ascending (sensory) or descending (motor). Neurohormone A chemical messenger released by the hypothalamus that signals the pituitary gland to release or inhibit release of its hormones. Neurolemma Essential to the regeneration of damaged neurons in the peripheral nervous system, this is a sheath surrounding peripheral axons and dendrites and is formed by cytoplasm and the nuclei of Schwann cells. Neuron A nerve cell that consists of a cell body, in addition to an axon and dendrites. Neurosecretory Cells Specialized nerve cells that transmit chemical impulses, release hormones, and serve as a link between the endocrine and nervous systems. Neurotransmitter Chemical substances that are emitted through nerve endings to help transmit messages. In the human body, there are about 80 different neurotransmitters. Neutrophil The most common type of granulocyte. Neutrophils are a main bodily defense mechanism against infection, and are particularly suited to engulfing and destroying bacteria, although they can also combat other small invading organisms and materials. Node of Ranvier The cell region located on or between the Schwann cells. Noradrenalin A type of neurotransmitter that transports neurons throughout the various regions in the brain and spinal cord, in addition to increasing the reaction excitability in the CNS and the sympathetic neurons in the spinal cord. Norepinephrine A hormone that causes blood pressure to rise in stressful situations.

302 Glossary

Normoblast The cells of the bone marrow that are responsible for the formation of the red blood cells. Nucleus The cell’s largest organelle that contains chromosomes and hereditary material. Occipital Lobes The most posterior part of the brain, containing the visual areas. Oligodendrocytes A type of neuroglia that forms the neuron’s myelin sheath. Oocytes Ova that have not yet matured in the ovary; they arise from primordial oogonia that develop in the fetus. Oogenesis The formation and development of an egg in the ovary. Oogonia Cells that arise from primordial germ cells and differentiate into oocytes in the ovary. Opposable Thumb In primates including humans, the ability to use the thumb to touch each finger. Opsonization The modification of a bacterium so that it is more easily recognized by the immune system, resulting in an increase in phagocytosis by macrophages. Organelles Primary components in a cell, including the nucleus, chromosomes, cytoplasm, and mitochondria. Organic Molecules Molecules that contain carbon-carbon or carbonhydrogen bonds. Origin The end of the muscle closest to the body. Osmoreceptors Neurons that sense fluid concentrations and send a message to the hypothalamus. Osmosis A process that seeks to equalize the water-to-solute ratio on each side of a water-permeable membrane. Osteology The study of bones, from the Greek word osteon, meaning “bone” and the suffix -ology, meaning “study of.” Ovarian Vein One of a pair of veins serving the female reproductive system. Oxaloacetic acid An acid formed by oxidation of maleic acid, as in metabolism of fats and carbohydrates in the Krebs cycle.

Glossary 303

Oxidation-reduction Reaction A reaction in which there is transfer of electrons from an electron donor (the reducing agent) to an electron acceptor (the oxidizing agent). Also called the redox reaction. In the electron transport system, this reaction results in molecules alternately losing and gaining an electron. Oxidative Phosphorylation The process of combining electrons with oxygen to create water. This process also produces energy for the cell when enough oxygen is present. Oxidization Add oxygen to or combine with oxygen, usually in chemical processes. Oxygen Dissociation Curve A graph that shows the percent saturation of hemoglobin at various partial pressures of oxygen. The curve shifts to the right (the Bohr effect) when less than a normal amount of oxygen is taken up by the blood and shifts to the left (the Haldane effect) when more than a normal amount is taken up. Pacemaker See SA Node. Palmar Indicates the palms of the hands. Pancreatic Polypeptide Hormone secreted by the F cells of the endocrine pancreas that inhibits gallbladder contraction and halts enzyme secretion by exocrine cells in the pancreas. Pandemic An epidemic that occurs over a large geographic area, sometimes throughout the world. Papillary Duct A tube that drains urine from collecting ducts in the nephron and empties it into the minor calyx. Paracrine The action of a hormone on neighboring cells. Parasympathetic Nervous System Also known as the vagal system. It is one of two major divisions of the autonomic nervous system. It functions to inhibit the pacemaker and lower the heart rate. See also Sympathetic Nervous System. Parathyroid Hormone (PTH) A hormone secreted by the parathyroid gland that helps maintain calcium and phosphorous levels in the body. PTH controls the release of calcium from bone, the absorption of calcium in the intestine, and the excretion of calcium in the urine. Also called parathormone.

304 Glossary

Partial Pressure Within the circulatory system, it is a term used to describe the relative oxygen concentration in tissues. For example, hemoglobin has a differential ability to bind oxygen: It picks up oxygen when the partial pressure in surrounding tissues is high, as it is in the lungs, and drops off oxygen when the partial pressure in the surrounding tissues is low, as it is in the tissues. Pathogens Disease-producing agents such as virus, bacterium, or other microorganisms. Peptides A chemical that helps to join amino acids in a protein molecule. Pericardium The two-layered membranous sac around the heart. Perimysium Connective tissue that surrounds the bundle of muscle fibers making up a fascicle. Peripheral Nervous System Division of the nervous system that consists of the spinal and cranial nerves. Peristaltic Action A rhythmic contraction of the muscles of the gastrointestinal tract, most notably in the small intestine, that is responsible for moving nutrients and undigested material through the lumen towards the anus. Peroneal Veins Also known as fibular veins. They drain the lower leg and ankle, and deliver the blood to the posterior tibial vein. pH The acidity of a solution. It is formally the measure of the hydrogen ion concentration of a solution. Phagocytic Cell A type of cell that engulfs external particles, food, or organisms into its cytoplasm; the enclosed material may then be destroyed by digestive enzymes. Phagocytosis The process of engulfing and destroying bacteria and other antigens. Pharynx The rear area of the oral cavity. This area connects the respiratory and digestive systems of the body. Phosphate A chemical related to energy usage and transmission of genetic information in the cell. Phospholipids A class of organic molecules that resemble triglycerides but have one fatty acid chain replaced by a phosphate group.

Glossary 305

Pia Mater The meninges’ innermost layer, made of thin connective tissue located on the surface of the brain and spinal cord. Pituitary Gland An endocrine gland at the base of the brain that sends out growth hormones. Plantar Indicates the soles of the feet. Plasma The liquid portion of blood in which red and white blood cells, platelets, and other blood contents float. Plasminogen A beta globulin that participates in blood clotting. Plasticity The reorganization of the nervous system following an injury or a tissue-damaging disease. Platelets Also known as thrombocytes. They are round or oblong disks in the blood that participate in blood clotting. Pleura A membrane that envelops the lung and attaches the lung to the thorax. There are two pleurae, right and left, that are entirely distinct from each other, and each pleura is made of two layers. The parietal pleura lines the chest cage walls and covers the upper surface of the diaphragm, and the visceral pleura tightly covers the exterior of the lungs. The two layers are actually one continuous sheet of tissue that lines the chest wall and doubles back to cover the lungs. The pleura is moistened with a thin, serous secretion that helps the lungs to expand and contract in the chest. Polarization A chemically charged state when the neuron’s membrane has a positive charge outside and a negative charge inside. Polyploid Cells In humans, each cell has two copies of each chromosome, one maternal and one paternal. Polyploid indicates more than two chromosomes in a cell. Polyspermy The entrance of several sperm into an ovum. Polyunsaturated Fatty Acids Components of dietary fats that contain at least two double bonds. Pons The parts of the brain that are anterior and superior to the medulla. The pons regulate respiration. Popliteal Artery A blood vessel that arises from the femoral artery and traverses the knee before dividing into the posterior and anterior tibial arteries.

306 Glossary

Popliteal Vein A blood vessel that collects blood from the anterior and posterior tibial veins, and empties into the femoral vein. Porphyrin A complex, nitrogen-containing compound that makes up the various pigments found in living tissues. Iron-containing porphyrins are called hemes. Portal Circulation See In-series Blood Circulation. Portal Vein A blood vessel that arises from the splenic vein and superior mesenteric vein. It empties into the liver. Positron Emission Tomography (PET) Scan A type of brain imaging technique that shows the brain in action. In order to obtain this image, a radioactive substance (such as glucose) is injected into the brain and then followed as it moves throughout the brain. Posterior Indicates the back of a person or mammal. Posterior Pituitary Lobe of the pituitary gland that is an extension of the nervous system. Postganglionic Neuron A neuron located in the autonomic nervous system that extends from a ganglion to the visceral effector. Postsynaptic Any impulse event following transmission at the synapse. Preganglionic Neuron A neuron located in the autonomic nervous system that extends from the central nervous system to a ganglion and then synapses with a postganglionic neuron. Pregnenolone A steroid hormone precursor produced from cholesterol. Preprohormone/Prohormone An inactive sequence of amino acids from which an active hormone is released. Progesterone Steroid hormone produced in the adrenal gland, placenta, and corpus luteum that influences sexual development and reproduction. Progestin Female hormone produced by the ovaries that influences sexual development and pregnancy. Proglucagon Precursor molecule from which the hormone glucagon is produced. Proinsulin The inactive precursor molecule from which insulin is formed.

Glossary 307

Projection A sensory occurrence when the sensation is felt in the receptor area. Prolactin A protein hormone secreted by the anterior pituitary that stimulates mammary gland development and milk production. Prostaglandin Fatty acid derivatives that act much like hormones to influence a number of physiological processes throughout the body. Prostate The gland surrounding the top of the urethra in men that contributes nutrients to the seminal fluid. Protease A class of enzyme that is involved in the breakdown of proteins into amino acids. Protein Complex chemical compounds that are essential to life. Prothrombin A beta globulin that participates in blood clotting. Protozoa Single-celled, eukaryotic organisms, including many parasites. Proximal Indicates direction closer to the torso. Proximal Convoluted Tubule (PCT) Tiny tubes in the nephrons of the kidneys through which glomerular filtrate passes and substances necessary to the body (i.e., water, sodium, and calcium) are reabsorbed into the bloodstream. Pulmonary Artery The blood vessel that originates at the right ventricle, then splits into two branches. The left and right pulmonary arteries lead to the left and right lung, respectively. Pulmonary Circulation The transit of blood from the heart to the lungs and back to the heart. Blood picks up oxygen and drops off carbon dioxide in this circulatory route. Pulmonary Semilunar Valve The three-cusped heart valve located between the right ventricle and pulmonary artery. Pulmonary Veins Four blood vessels that flow from the lungs to the left atrium. Purkinje Fibers A mesh of modified muscle fibers located in the base of the ventricle wall. The fibers receive the electrical impulse from the bundle of His and deliver it to the ventricle, which then contracts. Pyruvate The end product of glycolysis.

308 Glossary

Radial Artery A blood vessel in each lower arm that receives blood from the brachial artery and delivers it to numerous arteries of the forearm, wrist, and hand. Radial Vein A blood vessel in each arm that collects blood from veins in the hand. It eventually merges with the ulnar vein into the brachial vein. Receptors Proteins on the surface of cells or within cells that bind to particular hormones. Rectal Vein Blood vessels in the digestive system that drain parts of the rectum. The inferior rectal vein joins the internal pudendal vein, which flows into the internal iliac vein, while the middle rectal vein connects directly to the internal iliac vein. The superior rectal vein flows directly into the inferior mesenteric vein. Red Blood Cells Also known as erythrocytes. These are the cells in the blood that are responsible for gathering and delivering oxygen and nutrients to the body tissues, and for disposing of the tissue’s waste products. Reflex An automatic or involuntary response to a stimulus. Renal Artery A pair of blood vessels that arise from the abdominal aorta. Each feeds a kidney and adrenal gland, and the ureter. Renal Fascia The outermost layer of the kidney, composed of connective tissue that holds the kidney to the abdominal wall. Renal Pelvis A funnel-shaped cavity that collects urine and sends it into the ureter. Renal Pyramids Cone-shaped receptacles inside the medulla of the kidney. Renal Veins A pair of blood vessels that drain the two kidneys. They empty into the inferior vena cava. Renin An enzyme secreted by the kidneys that leads to the production of the hormone aldosterone. Repolarization A chemically charged state following a neuron’s depolarization, when the membrane has a positive charge outside and a negative charge inside due to the outflow of potassium ions. Respiration In the respiratory system, the movement of respiratory gases, such as oxygen and carbon dioxide, into and out of the lungs.

Glossary 309

Reticulocyte Immature red blood cells; these are usually found in the bone marrow. Rh Factor An antigen that is found on the surface of blood cells; it is an independent factor of the ABO group. Rotation Involves turning a body part on an axis. Saggital Plane An imaginary vertical line that divides the body into right and left segments. SA Node Also known as the sinoatrial node, or pacemaker. This is a group of small and weakly contractile modified muscle cells that spontaneously deliver the electrical pulses that trigger the heart’s contraction. Sarcolemma The cell membrane of a muscle fiber. Sarcomere An individual contractile unit within the myofibril that contains actin filaments attached to either end. Myosin chains pull the actin filaments closer together, making the sarcomere grow shorter. Sarcoplasmic Reticulum A network of tubules that runs throughout the muscle fiber. The sarcoplasmic reticulum stores calcium when the fiber is not contracted and releases calcium when the fiber receives a signal to contract. Schwann Cells Located in the peripheral nervous system, these cells form the myelin sheath and neurolemma of the peripheral axons and dendrites. Semilunar Valves Valves, shaped like half-moons, that ensure blood movement in only one direction. They are found in the heart and in large blood vessels. Seminiferous Tubules Tubes in the testes in which sperm are produced. Semipermeable (or Selectively Permeable) Membrane A membrane that allows certain molecules to pass through while restricting others. Sensory Nerves A type of afferent nerve coming in at the back of the spinal cord; also called posterior nerves. Sensory Neurons Also known as afferent neurons, they carry impulses and messages to the spinal cord and brain. Septum A partition, dividing wall, or membrane that separates bodily spaces or masses of tissue. In the respiratory system, septum most often refers to the cartilage separating the two nostrils.

310 Glossary

Serosa The outer layer of the bladder wall. Serotonin A neurotransmitter present throughout the central nervous system. Sertoli Cells Cells in the testes in which sperm is produced. Sesamoid Bone Short bones embedded within a tendon or joint capsule. Sex-linked Inherited Characteristics Traits, such as color-blindness, that are linked to genes on the sex chromosomes, especially the X chromosome. Sickle Cell Anemia A serious autosomal recessive disease characterized by abnormal red blood cells. Sigmoidal Artery A blood vessel that arises from the inferior mesenteric artery and supplies blood to the lower abdominal region. Skeletal Muscle Muscles that are attached to the skeleton and allow the body to move. This is also called voluntary muscle because these are the muscles that move voluntarily. Slow-twitch Muscles A type of muscle fiber that is able to contract very quickly. These are predominantly found in muscles that must contract repeatedly but without much strength. Smooth Muscle Also known as an involuntary muscle. It is a type of muscle that is controlled by the autonomic nervous system, rather than by willful command, as is the striated muscle. Sodium/Potassium Pump A form of active transport that regulates the amount of sodium and potassium in and around the cells. Somatic Neuron A type of sensory neuron located in the skeletal muscle and joints. Somatostatin A hormone produced by the endocrine pancreas and hypothalamus that regulates insulin and glucagon release, and inhibits growth hormone release from the pituitary gland. Somatotroph A cell in the anterior pituitary gland that secretes growth hormone. Spermatogonia Primordial sperm cells that develop in the male fetus.

Glossary 311

Sphincter A skeletal muscle that forms a circular band and that usually controls the size of an opening, such as the mouth or the entrance to the stomach. The muscle contracts to close the opening or relaxes to open it. Spinal Nerves The spine’s 31 pairs of nerves located in the peripheral nervous system. Spinal Reflex An automatic or involuntary reflex related to the spinal cord and in which the brain is not directly involved. Splenic Artery Blood vessel that arises from the celiac trunk and branches into numerous arteries that feed the stomach and peritoneum, pancreas, and spleen. Splenic Vein A large blood vessel that collects blood from the spleen. It joins the superior mesenteric vein to create the portal vein. Stem Cells Undifferentiated cells. They have the genetic potential to mature into specific cell types. Some stems are only able to become one type of cell, while others have the ability to become any number of different cells. Stimulus Any sort of change in a living organism that causes a response or affects a sensory receptor. Stretch Reflex A reflex from the spinal cord in which a muscle will respond to a stretch by contracting. Striated Muscle Also known as voluntary muscle. A person can consciously control the action of striated muscle. Subclavian Arteries Blood vessels that supply the arms, much of the upper body, and the spinal cord. The right subclavian artery branches from the brachiocephalic artery, while the left divides off of the aortic arch. Numerous arteries arise from each. Subclavian Veins Primary blood vessels draining the arms. They collect blood from the axillary vein and later merge with the internal jugular vein to produce the brachiocephalic vein. Substance P Neuropeptide found in the gut and brain that stimulates smooth muscle contraction and epithelial cell growth and that plays a role in both the pain and pleasure responses. Sulci Grooves between the gyri of the cerebellum.

312 Glossary

Superior Direction given to a body part that indicates toward the head. Surfactant A substance that acts on the surface of objects. In the respiratory system, surfactants are secreted by pneumocyte cells into the alveoli and respiratory air passages, helping to make pulmonary tissue elastic in nature. Sympathetic Nervous System One of two major divisions of the autonomic nervous system. It functions to stimulate the pacemaker and boost the heart rate. See also Parasympathetic Nervous System. Symphysis A disk of cartilage where two bones meet fiber that attaches a muscle to a bone. Synapse The junction between two neurons where the axon passes on information to the dendrite. This area is often called a relay because it is here where the information is relayed to the next neuron. Synaptic Gap or Cleft The actual area (which is approximately 10–50 nanometers in width) between the axon and dendrite where the neurons communicate with each other. Synarthroses Nonmoveable joints. Synergist A muscle that works in conjunction with an antagonistic pair to control the movement of a joint. The synergist usually runs beside a joint or diagonally across a joint. Synovial Fluid The clear fluid that is normally present in joint cavities. Systemic Circulation The transit of blood from the heart to the body (except the lungs) and back to the heart. See also Coronary Circulation and Pulmonary Circulation. T Cells Also known as T lymphocytes. They are one of two main types of lymphocyte, and participate in the body’s immune response. T Tubule Tubules that run through muscle fibers carrying the signal to contract. The signal passes from the T tubule to the sarcoplasmic reticulum, which releases calcium and causes the contraction to take place. Target Cells Cells that are responsive to a particular hormone. Tendon A band of connective tissue that connects the muscle to the bone. Terminal Arterioles Arterioles that feed capillaries.

Glossary 313

Testosterone A hormone that produces male characteristics including large muscles. Tetanus Contraction A sustained contraction as a result of many independent signals from a nerve. Thalamus The portion of the brain located superior to the hypothalamus that controls the elements of subconscious sensation. Threshold Level This value in a nerve fiber depends on the composition of the cellular fluid and the number of impulses recently received and conducted. When this level is reached in the nerve fiber’s axon, a reaction results. Thrombocytes See Platelets Thromboplastin A substance released by damaged tissue and platelets. With calcium, it promotes the formation of blood clots. Thyroid-stimulating Hormone (TSH) Hormone produced by the pituitary gland that stimulates the thyroid gland to secrete its hormones, thyroxine (T4) and triiodothyronine (T3). Also called thyrotropin. Thyrotroph Cell in the anterior pituitary gland that secretes thyroidstimulating hormone. Thyrotropin-releasing Hormone (TRH) Hypothalamic neurohormone that triggers the release of thyroid-stimulating hormone (TSH) and prolactin (PRL) from the pituitary gland. Thyroxine (T4) Thyroid hormone that influences metabolism and growth. Tibial Arteries Blood vessels of the lower leg. The posterior and anterior tibial arteries arise from the popliteal artery and supply blood to arteries feeding the lower leg, ankle, and foot. Tibial Veins Blood vessels of the lower leg. The anterior and posterior tibial veins drain the leg, then join together to form the popliteal vein. Tonsils The name given to the lymphatic tissue found at the back of the oral cavity. Toxoid The toxin produced by a bacterium that has been detoxified, but still retains its antigen characteristics. Toxoids are useful in the generation of immunizations.

314 Glossary

Trabeculae Beams that act as strengthening girders of cancellous bone. Trabecular Bone The porous, spongy bone that lines the bone marrow cavity and is surrounded by cortical bone. Transverse Plane An imaginary line passing at right angles to both the front and midsection; a cross section. Trigone A triangular-shaped region located in the bladder floor. Triiodothyronine (T3) The more potent of the two thyroid hormones. Tropomyosin A protein that forms long filaments wrapping around actin within the muscle fiber. Troponin A protein that is associated with actin and tropomyosin within the muscle fiber. Tunica Adventitia Fibrous connective tissue forming the outer of the three layers comprising arteries, arterioles, veins, and venules. See also Tunica Intima and Tunica Media. Tunica Intima Also known as endothelium. It forms the innermost of the three layers comprising arteries, arterioles, veins, and venules. Capillaries are composed of only a single layer of endothelial cells. See also Tunica Adventitia and Tunica Media. Tunica Media Muscular and elastic tissue forming the middle of the three layers comprising arteries, arterioles, veins, and venules. See also Tunica Adventitia and Tunica Intima. Type A Blood Blood containing a certain antigen called “A.” Due to potential antigen reactions, a person with type A blood can receive blood donations of type A and type O, but not type B or type AB. Type AB Blood Blood containing anti-lymphocytes. See also T Cells. Type B Blood Blood containing a certain antigen called “B.” Due to potential antigen reactions, a person with type B blood can receive blood donations of type B and type O, but not type A or type AB. Type O Blood Blood containing neither of the antigens called “A” and “B.” Due to potential antigen reactions, a person with type O blood can receive blood donations of type O, but not type A, type B, or type AB. Tyrosine An amino acid component of protein.

Glossary 315

Ultrasound Scan An imaging method using high-frequency sound waves to form images inside the body. Also called ultrasonography. Urea Waste produced by the breakdown of proteins. Ureter A long tube that delivers urine from the kidney to the bladder. Ureteral Orifices Two holes where the ureters pierce the bladder. Urethra A muscular tube that connects the bladder with the exterior of the body. Uric Acid Waste produced by the breakdown of nucleic acids (DNA and RNA). Urochrome Pigment produced by the breakdown of bile that gives urine its yellow or amber color. Vagus Nerve The 10th of 12 cranial nerves, which originates somewhere in the medulla oblongata in the brainstem and extends down to the abdomen. Vasoconstrictor Nerves Nerves that signal the veins to constrict. Vasodilation The relaxation of the muscles surrounding the vascular tissue; this increases the diameter of the vessel and reduces pressure. Vasopressin A hormone produced by the pituitary gland that increases the permeability of the kidney ducts to return more fluid to the bloodstream. Also called antidiuretic hormone (ADH). Vena Cava One of two large veins, the superior and inferior venae cavae, bringing blood from the body back to the heart. Ventral Root The motor root of a spinal nerve that attaches the nerve to the anterior part of the spinal cord. Ventricle In the human heart, it is one of the heart’s two lower chambers. Vertebral arteries A pair of blood vessels on each side of the neck that arise from the subclavian arteries. They unite at the basilar artery. Vestibule The opening or entrance to a passage, such as the vestibule of the vagina. Vestigial A term for nonfunctional remnants of organs. Virus A nonliving infectious agent that is characterized as having a protein covering and either DNA or RNA as its genetic material; some viruses

316 Glossary

may also have a lipid covering. Viruses are completely dependent on cells for reproduction. Visceral Neuron A type of sensory neuron located in the body’s internal organs. Visceral Organs The body’s internal organs, such as the heart and lungs, that have nerve fibers and nerve endings that conduct messages to the brain and spinal cord. White Blood Cells Also known as leukocytes. These are the cells in the blood that function in the body’s defense mechanism to detect, attack, and eliminate foreign organisms and materials. White Matter The nerve tissue located within the central nervous system that contains myelinated axons and interneurons. Z Band A dense area that separates the sarcomeres. The actin filaments are embedded in the Z band, extending inward into each sarcomere. Zona Fasciculate The middle layer of the adrenal cortex, in which the glucocorticoids (cortisol) are produced. Zona Glomerulosa The outermost layer of the adrenal cortex, in which the mineralocorticoids (aldosterone) are produced. Zona Pellucid The outer covering of an ovum. Zona Reticularis The innermost layer of the adrenal cortex, in which the gonadocorticoids (sex hormones) are produced.
Zygote A diploid cell resulting from fertilization of an egg by a sperm cell.

Select Bibliography

Aaronson, Philip I., and Jeremy P. T. Ward, with Charles M. Wiener, Steven P. Schulman, and Jaswinder S. Gill. The Cardiovascular System at a Glance. Oxford: Blackwell Science Limited, 1999. Abrahams, Peter, ed. How the Body Works, London: Amber Books, 2009. “Acne.” National Institute of Arthritis and Musculoskeletal and Skin Diseases. http://www.niams.nih.gov/Health_Info/Acne/default.asp (accessed June 20, 2010). Adams, Amy. The Muscular System. Westport, CT: Greenwood Publishing, 2004. “Alcohol-Induced Liver Disease.” American Liver Foundation, http:// www.liverfoundation.org/abouttheliver/info/alcohol/ (accessed June 20, 2010). American Academy of Allergy, Asthma and Immunology. http:// www.aaaai.org (accessed June 20, 2010). American Academy of Family Physicians. http://www.familydoctor.org (accessed June 20, 2010). American Academy of Otolaryngology. http://www.entnet.org (accessed June 20, 2010). Asimov, Isaac. The Human Body: Its Structure and Operation. Rev. ed. New York: Mentor, 1992. Bainbridge, David. Making Babies: The Science of Pregnancy. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2001.

317

318 Select Bibliography

“Bariatric Surgery for Severe Obesity.” National Institute of Diabetes and Digestive and Kidney Diseases, Weight-Control Information Network. http://win.niddk.nih.gov/publications/gastric.htm (accessed June 20, 2010). Bastian, Glenn F. An Illustrated Review of the Urinary System. New York: HarperCollins College Publishers, 1994. Berne, Robert M., and Matthew N. Levy. Cardiovascular Physiology. 6th ed. St. Louis, MO: C. V. Mosby-Year Book, 1992. Charlton, C. A. C. The Urological System. Harmondsworth, UK: Penguin Books, 1973. Cornett, Frederick D., and Pauline Gratz. Modern Human Physiology. New York: Holt, Rinehart, and Winston, 1982. “Did You Know . . . Facts about the Human Body.” Health News. http:// www.healthnews.com (accessed June 20, 2010). “Drinking Water.” Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. http:// www.cdc.gov/healthywater/drinking/travel/index.html (accessed June 20, 2010). “Flu.” Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. http://www.flu.gov (accessed June 20, 2010). “Fun Science Facts.” High Tech Science. http://www.hightechscience.org/ funfacts.htm (accessed June 20, 2010). Gilbert, S. F., M. S. Tyler, and R. N. Kozlowski. Developmental Biology, 6th ed. Sunderland, MA: Sinauer Associates, 2000. “Global Water, Sanitation, and Hygiene (WASH).” Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. http://www.cdc.gov/healthywater/global/ index.html (accessed June 20, 2010). Greenspan, Francis S., and David G. Gardner. Basic and Clinical Endocrinology. 6th ed. New York: Lange Medical Books/McGraw-Hill, 2001. “The Heart: An Online Exploration.” http://sln.fi.edu/biosci/heart.html (accessed June 20, 2010). Hess, Dean, and Robert M. Kacmarek. Essentials of Mechanical Ventilation. 2nd ed. New York: McGraw-Hill, Health Professions Division, 2002.

Select Bibliography 319

Hlastala, Michael P., and Albert J. Berger. Physiology of Respiration. 2nd ed. New York: Oxford University Press, 2001. Hollen, Kathryn. The Reproductive System. Westport, CT: Greenwood Publishing, 2004. Holmes, Oliver. Human Neurophysiology: A Student Text. 2nd ed. London: Chapman & Hall Medical, 1993. “How Does Smoking Affect the Heart and Blood Vessels?” National Heart and Lung Institute. http://www.nhlbi.nih.gov/health/dci/ Diseases/smo/smo_how.html (accessed June 20, 2010). “The Human Body.” Teachnology. http://www.teach-nology.com/themes/ science/humanb/ (accessed June 20, 2010). “Interesting Facts about the Human Body.” Random Facts. http:// facts.randomhistory.com/2009/03/02_human-body.html (accessed June 20, 2010). Kelly, Evelyn. The Skeletal System. Westport, CT: Greenwood Publishing, 2004. Knight, Bernard. Discovering the Human Body. New York: Lippincott & Crowell, 1980. “LASIK.” Food and Drug Administration. http://www.fda.gov/Medical Devices/ProductsandMedicalProcedures/SurgeryandLifeSupport/ LASIK/default.htm (accessed June 20, 2010). Lyman, Dale. Anatomy DeMystified. New York: McGraw-Hill, 2004. “Massage Therapy: An Introduction.” National Center for Complementary and Alternative Medicine. http://nccam.nih.gov/health/massage/ (accessed June 20, 2010). McDowell, Julie. The Nervous System and Sensory Organs. Westport, CT: Greenwood Publishing, 2004. McDowell, Julie, and Michael Windelspecht. The Lymphatic System. Westport, CT: Greenwood Publishing, 2004. “Medical References.” University of Maryland Medical Center. http:// www.umm.edu/medref/ (accessed June 20, 2010). Mertz, Leslie. The Circulatory System. Westport, CT: Greenwood Publishing, 2004.

320 Select Bibliography

“National Cholesterol Education Program.” National Heart Lung and Blood Institute. http://www.nhlbi.nih.gov/chd/ (accessed June 20, 2010). “National Diabetes Statistics, 2007.” National Institute of Diabetes and Digestive and Kidney Diseases. http://diabetes.niddk.nih.gov/dm/ pubs/statistics/index.htm#what (accessed June 20, 2010). National Institute of Allergy and Infectious Diseases. http://www .niaid.nih.gov (accessed June 20, 2010). Northwestern University Medical School, Department of Neurology. http://www.neurology.northwestern.edu/ (accessed June 20, 2010). Petechuk, David. The Respiratory System. Westport, CT: Greenwood Publishing, 2004. Phillips, Chandler A., and Jarold S. Petrofsky. Mechanics of Skeletal and Cardiac Muscle. Springfield, IL: Thomas, 1983. Sanders, Tina, and Valerie C. Scanlon. Essentials of Anatomy and Physiology. 3rd ed. Philadelphia: F. A. Davis Company, 1999. Sherwood, Lauralee. Human Physiology: From Cells to Systems. 4th ed. Pacific Grove, CA: Brooks/Cole, 2001. Soloman, Eldra P., Linda R. Berg, Diana W. Martin, et al. Biology. 4th ed. Orlando, FL: Harcourt Brace & Company, 1997. “Spinal Cord Research.” Christopher and Dana Reeve Foundation. http:// www.christopherreeve.org/site/c.ddJFKRNoFiG/b.4343879/k.D323/ Research.htm (accessed June 20, 2010). “Sports Injuries.” National Institute of Arthritis and Musculoskeletal and Skin Diseases. http://www.niams.nih.gov/Health_Info/Sports_Injuries/ default.asp (accessed June 20, 2010). Steele, D. Gentry, and Claude A. Bramblett. The Anatomy and Biology of the Human Skeleton. College Station: Texas A&M University Press, 1988. Takahashi, Takeo. Atlas of the Human Body. New York: HarperCollins Publishers, 1989. Watson, Stephanie. The Endocrine System. Westport, CT: Greenwood Publishing, 2004.

Select Bibliography 321

Watson, Stephanie. The Urinary System. Westport, CT: Greenwood Publishing, 2004. “What Is Coronary Disease?” National Heart and Lung Institute. http:// www.nhlbi.nih.gov/health/dci/Diseases/Cad/CAD_WhatIs.html (accessed June 20, 2010). Windelspecht, Michael. The Digestive System. Westport, CT: Greenwood Publishing, 2004.

This page intentionally left blank

Index

A bands, 339–40 Abdomen, 20–21, 335 Abdominal aorta, 47 Abdominal cavity, 17 Abduction, 557–58 ABO blood type group, 252–54 Abortion, 495–96 Acetabulum, 584–85 Acetylcholine, 195, 342, 394–95, 433–34 Acetyl coenzyme A (acetyl CoA), 354–55, 361, 374, 524 Acetylsalicylic acid, 118 Acidosis, 616 Acinar cells, 148 ACL (anterior cruciate ligament), 595 Acne, 219–20 Acquired immunity, 267–71 ACTH. See Adrenocorticotropic hormone Actin, 338–40, 344–47, 349–50, 369 Action potential, 395, 399 Active immunity, 267–69 Adaptation, 436

Adaptive responses, 258–59 Adduction, 558 Adenine, 9–11, 457 Adenoid, 257 Adenosine diphosphate (ADP), 344, 352, 359, 386, 526 Adenosine monophosphate (AMP), 526 Adenosine triphosphate (ATP) cell respiration and, 6, 386, 521–26 muscle contraction and, 344–48, 351–61, 363–65, 367–68, 374 neurotransmitters, 394, 521 sodium/potassium pump and, 607 ADH. See Antidiuretic hormone Adipocytes, 559 Adipose capsule, 602 Adipose tissue, 7, 14 ADP. See Adenosine diphosphate Adrenal cortex, 188–90 Adrenal glands, 151–52, 185–90, 432 Adrenaline, 393 Adrenal medulla, 185–88

I-1

I-2 Index

Adrenocorticotropic hormone (ACTH), 162, 173, 174, 176, 188 Aerobic exercise, 357–58, 371–77, 514 Aerobic respiration, 89–90, 386 Afferent/efferent nerves/neurons, 383–85, 388–90, 400, 424 Afferent vessels, 248 After-image, 436 Agglutination, 40, 254 Agonists, 161, 333 Albumins, 35, 36 Alcoholic hepatitis, 126 Alcoholism, 126 Aldosterone, 151, 189, 609 Alkaline pH, 110 Alleles, 242, 260 Allergies, 533 Alveoli, 503, 506–8, 515–16, 528, 538 Amines, 394 Amino acid derivatives, 158, 159 Amino acids, 29, 94, 129, 394, 457 Aminopeptidases, 129 Ammonia, 616 Amniocentesis, 488 AMP. See Adenosine monophosphate (AMP) Amphiarthroses, 590–93 Amphipathic molecules, 130–31 Ampulla, 449 Anaerobic cells, 89–90 Anaerobic exercise, 357–58, 368–71, 523 Anaerobic respiration, 523

Anatomy terms, 18 Androgens, 158, 199, 214 Anemia, 251, 559 Angiotensin, 189 Angular joints, 596 Anions, 35 Ankle, 587–89 Annulus fibrosus, 68 ANS. See Autonomic nervous system Antagonists, 161, 333 Anterior cruciate ligament (ACL), 595 Anterior pituitary, 160, 173–78 Anterior/posterior, 552 Antibodies, 233–38, 253–54, 260–61, 261–65, 267–69, 528 Antidiuretic hormone (ADH), 168, 173, 176, 178–79, 412, 606, 615, 617 Antigen-presenting cells (APC), 240, 242 Antigens, 32, 34, 233–34, 236–38, 254, 261–65 Antimicrobial proteins, 229–30 Antioxidants, 96 Antrum, 109, 111, 115–16 Anus, 135, 138 Aorta, 45–47, 66, 68–70, 72, 75–77, 79, 81, 450, 514 Aortic arch, 46, 450 Aortic bodies, 514 APC. See Antigen-presenting cells Appendectomy, 258 Appendicitis, 258 Appendicular skeleton, 576–89

Index I-3

Appendix, 136, 258 Aquaporins, 132 Aqueous humor, 5, 443 Arachnoid membrane, 420 Arachnoid villi, 421 Arbortifacients, 494–95 Arm, 578–80 Arrector pili, 214–15 Arterial anastomoses, 65 Arterial baroreceptor reflex, 64 Arterial system, 41–49, 52, 61–62, 422–23. See also specific arteries, such as Carotid Arterioles, 42, 44, 46, 48, 52–53, 65 Arteriovenous anastomoses, 48 Arthritis, 590 Articular processes, 571 Articulation, 590 Asexual reproduction, 455 Asian flu, 541 Association areas, 418 Asthma, 527, 537–38 Atoms, 4 ATP. See Adenosine triphosphate Atria (atrium), 46, 66, 68, 70, 72–73, 516 Atrioventricular node (AV node), 73 Auditory bones, 446 Auricle, 446 Autocatalytic process, 112 Autocrine action, 155 Autoimmune diseases, 234 Autonomic nervous system (ANS), 75, 382, 423–24, 427–34

Avian flu, 542 AV node, 73 Axial skeleton, 561–76 Axons, 385, 387, 389–92, 394, 396–97, 400, 402, 405–6 Bacteria, 139, 530–31 Balance, 446, 449–50 Baldness, 217 Ball-and-socket joints, 593–94 Bariatric surgery, 114–15 Baroreceptors, 64, 75–76 Basal cells, 503 Basal ganglia, 418 Base pairs, 1, 9–11, 457 Basilar artery, 81–82 Basophils, 32–33, 238–39, 241, 244 Bayliss myogenic response, 64 B cells/lymphocytes, 34, 81, 233–34, 236–38, 260–61, 263, 529 Beta globulins, 36–37 Beta human chorionic gonadotropin (hCG), 484–85 Bicarbonate ions, 30, 520 Bile, 123–24, 130–31, 144 Bile canaliculi, 146 Bilirubin, 124, 138–39, 147 Binocular vision, 444 Binucleate cells, 144 Bioavailability, 97, 133 Biomolecules, 241–42 Bipedal support, 588 Birth control. See Contraceptives Bladder, 610–11

I-4 Index

Blastocyst, 479–80 Blisters, 209–10 Blood arterial system, 41–49, 52, 61–62, 422–23 blood-brain barrier, 82–84 brain and, 421 capillaries, 41, 53–54, 56–60, 63–64, 230–31, 373, 504, 516 cells, 2 cerebral circulation, 81–82 digestive system, 76–78 flow, 60–65, 65–67, 69–72 kidneys and renal system, 79–80 liver and hepatic circulation, 78, 146 overview, 27–28 plasma, 34–37 platelets and blood coagulation, 37–38 pressure, 50, 61–64, 69–70, 75–76, 189, 514 receptors in, 450–51 red blood cells, 27–31, 250–54, 558–59 spleen circulation, 80–81 transfusions, 254 types, 38–40, 252–54 valves, 60, 63, 68–74 venous system, 49–56, 61–63 vessels, 40–41 white blood cells, 27–28, 31–34, 238–41, 250, 558–59 See also Circulatory system; Heart

Blood-brain barrier, 82–84 Blood-sugar levels, 79, 360, 362–63 Body cavities, 16–17 Body heat. See Heat Body parts, 18 Bohr effect, 519 Bolus, 103, 106–8, 111, 113, 115 Bone marrow, 244, 250–52, 559 Bones appendicular system, 576–89 axial skeleton, 561–76 classification of, 553–55 functions of, 550, 558–61 as levers, 555–58 overview, 549 parathyroid hormones and, 184 processes, 563 See also Skeletal system Bony labyrinth, 446 Bound versus free hormones, 159–60 Bowman’s capsule, 80, 605 Brachial pulse, 46 Brachiocephalic artery, 47 Brain anatomy, 409–10 blood-brain barrier, 82–84 blood flow in, 64–65 blood supply, 421–22 cell life of, 2 central nervous system, 382 cerebellum, 411–12 cerebral circulation, 81–82 cerebrospinal fluid, 5, 402, 420–21

Index I-5

cerebrum, 414–15 cranial nerves, 385, 390, 424–27 hypothalamus, 160, 166, 170–72, 412–13, 429, 439, 473 lobes, 415–19 medulla, 106, 117, 410–11, 512–13, 602 memory and learning, 421–23 meninges, 419–20 midbrain, 411 oxygen and, 2 peripheral/autonomic nervous system, 75, 382, 386, 400, 423–24, 427–34, 469–70 pons, 411 senses, 434–51 sex and, 468–69 thalamus, 413–14 Brain stem, 409 Breastbone, 575–76 Breasts, 465–66 Bronchi/bronchioles, 506, 537 Bronchitis, 538 Bruises, 38 Brush border, 122, 127, 129 Buccal cavity, 99–100 Bundle of His, 73 Burns, 212 Bursa, 596 CAD (coronary artery disease), 43, 71 Caffeine, 362 Calcitonin, 169, 181, 608

Calcitrol, 609 Calcium, 3, 133–34, 169, 184–85, 344–48, 350, 559–60, 608 Calfbone, 587 Calluses, 209–10 Calories, 355 Canal of Schlemm, 443 Cancellous bone, 553 Cannon, Walter, 186 Capillaries, 41, 53–54, 56–60, 63–64, 230–31, 373, 504, 516 Carbamino compounds, 520 Carbohydrates, 6–7, 89–91, 125, 127 Carbon, 2, 4 Carbon dioxide in aerobic respiration, 89 in the body, 3–4, 6 capillary movement, 58–60 gas exchange process, 500, 507, 511, 518–26 in red blood cells, 29–30 respiration and, 510–11 Carbonic anhydrase (CA), 520 Carbon monoxide, 30–31 Carbon pathway, 522 Cardiac muscles, 44, 67–69, 332, 340, 343–46, 365–67, 374–76 Cardiac output, 47, 74–75, 80, 82, 376–77 Cardiac sphincter, 108 Carotid arteries, 47, 450, 514 Carotid bodies, 514 Carotid pulse, 46 Carpals, 580–81 Cartilage, 591–93

I-6 Index

Catecholamines, 159, 162, 185–87, 196 Catechol-O-methyl transferase (COMT), 434 Cations, 35 CCK. See Cholecystokinin Cecum, 135–36 Celiac artery, 76 Cell body, 385, 429 Cell-mediated immunity, 261–65 Cell membranes, 11–13, 241–42 Cell organelles, 11–14 Cells anaerobic/aerobic, 89 DNA in, 1 number of, 1 reproduction and, 457–61 types and structures, 11–14 Cellular respiration, 6, 7, 386, 500, 511, 520–22 Central nervous system (CNS), 382. See also Brain; Spinal cord Centrioles, 14 Cerebellum, 411–12 Cerebral aqueduct, 411 Cerebral cortex, 414, 418, 512 Cerebrospinal fluid, 5, 402, 420–21 Cerebrum, 414–15 Ceruminous glands, 220 Cervical nerves, 403–4 Cervical vertebrae, 569–72 Cervix, 463–64 Chemiosmosis, 526 Chemoreceptors, 76, 450, 514

Chemotaxis, 264 Chewing, 102 Chief cells, 110 Chloride shift, 520 Cholecystokinin (CCK), 117–18, 121, 124, 144, 195–97 Cholesterol, 8, 12, 43, 92–93, 123, 158–59, 188 Cholinesterase, 395, 434 Chordae tendineae, 69 Chorionic villus, 488 Choroid layer, 442 Choroid plexus, 410 Chromatin, 457 Chromosomes, 13, 385, 459–60 Chrondrocytes, 177 Chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD), 538 Chylomicrons, 131, 133, 229 Chyme, 115–16, 118, 122–23, 130 Cicadian rhythms, 180 Cigarette smoking, 71, 527, 543–44 Cilia, 14, 502–3 Ciliary body, 442 Ciliary muscle, 444 Circadian rhythms, 413 Circle of Willis, 81 Circulatory system arterial system, 41–49, 52, 61–62, 422–23 blood-brain barrier, 82–84 blood flow, 60–65, 65–67, 69–72 blood type, 38–40 blood vessels, 40–41

Index I-7

capillaries, 41, 53–54, 56–60, 63–64, 230–31, 373, 504, 516 cerebral circulation, 81–82 cigarette smoking and, 71 digestive system, 76–78 facts about, 23–24 kidneys and renal system, 79–80 liver and hepatic system, 78 lymphatic system and, 225, 230 overview, 26–27 plasma, 34–37 platelets and blood coagulation, 37–38 red blood cells, 28–31 spleen, 80–81 venous system, 49–56, 61–63 white blood cells, 27–28, 31–34, 238–41, 250, 558–59 See also Heart Circumcision, 468 Cirrhosis, 126 Citric acid cycle, 89, 354–55, 366, 374, 523–24 Clara cells, 503 Clavicles, 577–78 Cleavage, 479–80 Clitoris, 465 Cloning, 455 Clotting, 37–38 CNS. See Central nervous system Cobalamin, 133 Coccygeal nerves, 403–4 Coccyx, 569–71, 573–74 Cochlea, 447 Coenzyme molecules, 524

Colds, 535–36 Colic artery, 47 Collagen, 44, 213, 590 Collarbones, 577–78 Collateral arteries, 72 Collecting duct, 605 Colon, 135–36, 138–39 Colony stimulating factors, 156 Colostrum, 486 Common carotid arteries, 47 Common cold, 535–36 Communication systems, 154 Complement, 36–37 Complement fixation, 263–64 Complement proteins, 227–28 Compression forces, 552 COMT. See Catechol-O-methyl transferase Concentration gradient, 59–60 Concentric contractions, 349 Conchae, 502, 504 Cones and rods, 442–44 Conjunctiva, 440 Connective tissues, 14 Constant regions. See C regions Continuous capillaries, 57–58 Contraceptives, 494–95 Convergence, 391 COPD. See Chronic obstructive pulmonary disease Cordocentesis, 488 Cornea, 442 Coronal plane, 552 Coronary arteries, 46 Coronary artery disease (CAD), 43, 71

I-8 Index

Coronary circulations, 72 Corpus callosum, 414, 418–19 Corpus luteum, 175, 202, 203–4, 466, 484–85 Cortex, 602 Cortical bone, 553 Corticosteroids, 188–90 Corticotroph, 174 Corticotrophins, 174, 176 Cortisol, 151, 157, 159, 188–90 Cowper’s glands, 467, 474 Coxal bone, 584 Cranial cavity, 17 Cranial nerves, 385, 390, 424–27 Cranial venous sinuses, 421 Cranium, 409, 558, 563–67 Creatine phosphate, 358–61, 366–67 Creatinine, 609 C regions, 234–38 Cristae, 14 Cuboid bones, 554 Cutaneous senses, 436–37 Cystic fibrosis, 539–40 Cytochromes, 525 Cytokines, 156, 242, 262–63 Cytoplasm, 11–14, 385, 522 Cytosine, 9–11, 457 Cytotoxic T cells, 232–33 Daughter cells, 457, 461 DCT (distal convoluted tubule), 605 Deafness, 449

Decidua, 483 Defecation, 138 Deglutition, 105–6 Dehydration, 616 Dehydration synthesis, 90, 94, 98 Dehydroepiandrosterone sulfate (DHEA-S), 176 Dendrites, 385, 387–92, 394–96, 402 Dentin, 103 Deoxyribonucleic acid. See DNA Deoxyribose, 9–11 Depolarization, 397–99 Dermis, 213–20 Detrusor muscle, 610 Dextrin, 127 D genes, 235–36 DHEA-S (dehydroepiandrosterone sulfate), 176 Diabetes, 193–94, 363 Diaphragm, 108, 509–10 Diaphysis, 580 Diarthroses, 590, 593–96 Diastole, 70 Diffusion, 58–60, 507, 606 Diffusion gradient, 515 Digestion enzymatic, 105, 111–12, 138 mechanical, 102–5, 111–13, 115–16 See also Digestive system Digestive system accessory organs, 140–50 cellular/molecular level, 88 circulation, 76–78 energy nutrients, 89–95, 118

Index I-9

facts about, 85–86 lower gastrointestinal tract, 118–39 minerals, 97, 133–35 overview, 87–88 upper gastrointestinal tract, 98–118 vitamins, 96–97, 132–33 water, 97–98, 132 Diglycerides, 9 Dipeptidase, 129 Diploid cells, 144 Disaccharides, 6–7, 91 Discontinuous capillaries, 58 Dislocation, 593–94 Distal convoluted tubule (DCT), 605 Diuretics, 616 Divergence, 391 DNA (deoxyribonucleic acid) gene transcription, 161 in the nucleolus, 13 overview, 9–11 reproduction and, 456–61 in a single cell, 1, 385 Dopamine, 156, 186, 187, 394 Dorsal cavity, 16–17 Dorsal pedal pulse, 46 Dorsal root ganglion, 404 Dorsal roots, 404 Double helix, 11. See also DNA Down syndrome, 487–88 Duct cells, 148 Duodenal glands, 122 Duodenum, 115–18, 120, 122–23, 129, 148

Dura matter, 420 Dynorphin, 394 Ear canal, 446 Eardrum, 446, 568 Eccentric contractions, 350–51 ECF. See Extracellular fluid Eclampsia, 489–90 Ectoderm, 510 Ectopic pacemakers, 73 Ectopic pregnancy, 490 Effectors, 382, 388 Efferent/afferent nerves/neurons, 383–85, 388–90, 424 Efferent vessels, 248 Ehrlich, Paul, 82 Eicosanoids, 156–57 Elastin, 44, 51–52, 213 Electrical activity of the heart, 72–74 Electrolytes, 97, 167–68, 601, 607 Electrons, 4 Electron transport chain (ETC), 89, 355–56, 364–65, 524–25 Elements, 4 Embryo, 481–82 Embryogenesis, 457, 460 Emotions, 413 Emphysema, 538–39 Encapsulated nail endings, 218 Encoding, 457 End-diastolic volume, 70 Endocardium, 45, 68 Endocrine glands adrenal, 151–52, 185–90, 432 anatomy and function, 166–70

I-10 Index

hypothalamus, 160, 166, 170–72, 412–13, 429, 439, 473 pancreas, 123–24, 131–32, 148, 151, 190–92, 195–99 parathyroid, 183–85 pineal, 151, 179–80 pituitary, 160, 170, 172–80, 565 sex glands, 199–206 thyroid, 180–83 See also Endocrine system Endocrine system endocrine disruptors, 151 facts about, 151–52 hormones, 155–66 hypothalamic-pituitary-target organ axis, 156 overview, 154–55 See also Endocrine glands Endoderm, 510 Endolymph, 447 Endometrium, 463 Endorphin, 394 Endothelium, 45, 230 Energy nutrients, 89–95 Enkephalins, 394 Enteroendocrine cells, 120 Enterohepatic circulation, 131 Enterokinase, 129 Enzymatic digestion, 105, 111–12, 138 Enzymes, 9, 94–95, 128–29, 148–49, 229–30, 374, 520 Eosinophils, 32–33, 238–40, 533 Epiblast, 480 Epidemics, 540

Epidermis, 209–12 Epimysium, 335 Epinephrine, 156, 159, 186, 195 Epiphysis, 592 Epistaxis, 530 Epithelial tissues/cells, 14, 107, 121, 209, 503 Epitopes, 34 Eponychium, 218 Equilibrium, 446, 449–50, 559 Erythrocytes, 28, 518, 520, 559. See also Red blood cells Erythropoietin, 156, 251, 609 Esophagus, 107–8 Estrogen, 157, 158, 199, 201–4, 472–73, 484 ETC. See Electron transport chain Ethmoid bone, 566 Ethmoid notch, 566 Ethyl alcohol, 118, 126 Eustacian tubes, 446 Excitatory/inhibitory nerve fibers, 385, 392 Excitatory/inhibitory synapse, 395–96 Exercise, 357–58, 361–64, 367–77, 514, 523 Exhalation/inhalation, 509 Exocrine glands, 148, 166–67, 190 Extension, 557 External respiration, 499, 514–16 External urethral sphincter, 613 Extracellular fluid (ECF), 5, 155, 397 Extrinsic factor, 251 Eye, 440–46

Index I-11

Facial bones, 567–69 Facial nerve, 426 Facial pulse, 45 Facilitated diffusion, 127 FADH2, 354–56, 361, 374, 525 Fallopian tubes, 462–63 Fascia, 335 Fascicles, 335 Fast-twitch muscle fibers, 347–49, 365–67 Fats, 7–9, 89–93, 360–62 Fatty acids, 156 Fatty liver disease, 126 Feedback loops, 163–66, 177, 473 Female reproductive organs, 462–66 Femoral arteries, 48 Femoral pulse, 46 Femoral veins, 54 Femur, 585–86 Fenestrated capillaries, 58 Fertilization, 477, 479 Fetus, 485–86 Fiber, 91 Fibrinogen, 35–37 Fibula, 587 Fibular veins, 54 Fight-or-flight response, 185–88, 430 Flagella, 14 Flat bones, 554 Flavin adenine dinucleotide (FAD), 524 Flavoproteins, 525 Flexion, 557 Flexor, 407

Folate, 133 Follicle-stimulating hormone (FSH), 158, 173, 174–76, 199, 201–3, 470, 473 Foot, 587–89 Foramen magnum, 564–65 Fossa, 563 Fossils, 560–61 Fovea, 442 Free nerve endings, 218 Free versus bound hormones, 159–60 Frontal bone, 564 Frontal lobes, 416–17 Frontal plane, 19–20, 551 Fructose, 127 FSH. See Follicle-stimulating hormone Fundus, 109, 111, 115 Gait analysis, 555 Galactose, 127 Gall bladder, 123–24, 141, 144 Gametes, 461 Gamma aminobutyric acid (GABA), 394–95 Gamma globulins. See Immunoglobulins (Ig) Ganglia, 404, 418, 428–30, 429, 433 Gas exchange process, 500, 507, 511, 518–26 Gastric inhibitory peptide (GIP), 117–18, 121, 195, 198 Gastric juices, 109–11 Gastric lipase, 111, 117 Gastric pits, 109–11

I-12 Index

Gastrin, 111, 117, 123, 156, 195–97 Gastroduodenal artery, 77 Gastroepiploic artery, 47 Gastroepiploic vein, 55 Gastroesophageal sphincter, 108, 111 Gastrointestinal hormones, 196–99 Gastrulation, 481 G cells, 111, 117 Genes, 11, 161, 235–36, 458–59 Genetic immunity, 267–69 Genetic imprinting, 479, 483 Genetic sex, 471 Genome, 1, 459 Gestation. See Pregnancy Gestational diabetes, 488, 490 Ghrelin, 198 GHRH. See Growth hormonereleasing hormone Gingivae, 103 GIP. See Gastric inhibitory peptide Glans, 465 Glia, 409 Gliding joints, 596 Globin proteins, 29–30, 518 Globulins, 35–37 Glomerular capsule, 604–5 Glomerular filtrate, 605, 614 Glomerular filtration rate (GFR), 614 Glomerulus, 47, 604–5, 614 Glossopharyngeal nerve, 427 Glucagon, 162, 191–92, 195–96, 362 Glucocorticoids, 159, 188–90, 196

Glucose, 7, 90–91, 127, 190, 192–96, 362–63, 386, 521 Glucose tolerance test, 488 Glutamic acids, 394 Glycerol, 7–9, 190 Glycogen, 337, 359–61, 432 Glycogenolysis, 187, 192, 195 Glycolysis, 89, 353–59, 363, 365–67, 522–24 Glycoproteins, 158, 237, 241–42 Goblet cells, 121, 502–3 Goiter, 182 Goldman, Edwin, 82 Golgi apparatus, 13 Gomphosis, 592 Gonadotroph, 174 Gonadotropin-releasing hormone (GnRH), 470, 473 Gonadotropins, 175–76, 201, 203 G proteins, 163 Graft rejection, 483 Granulocytes, 31–34 Gray matter, 383–84, 401–2, 405–6, 410 Growth factors, 156 Growth hormone-releasing hormone (GHRH), 412 Growth hormones, 156, 171–74, 176–77, 412–13 G spot, 465 Guanine, 9–11, 457 Gyri, 414 H1N1 flu, 541–42 Hair/hair follicles, 214–16 Haldane effect, 520

Index I-13

Hand, 580–82 Haustra, 137 Haustral contractions, 137, 139 hCG. See Beta human chorionic gonadotropin HDL. See High-density lipoproteins Hearing sense, 446–50 Heart anatomy and blood flow, 65–67 blood flow, 69–72 cardiac muscle, 44, 67–69, 332, 340, 343–46, 365–67, 374–76 cardiac output, 47, 74–75, 376–77 coronary circulation, 72 electrical activity, 72–74 rate, 375–76 receptors, 75–76 See also Circulatory system Heat, 1, 346, 363 Hematopoiesis, 559 Hematopoietic stem cells, 232–34, 238 Hematuria, 615 Heme group, 29–30 Hemes, 518 Hemoglobin, 29–30, 88, 518–20, 559 Hemolysis, 40, 254 Hepatic portal system, 129, 147 Hepatic system, 78 Hepatocytes, 144, 146–47 Heterotrophic organisms, 87 High-density lipoproteins (HDL), 93, 158

Hilius, 605 Hinge joints, 594–95 Hipbone, 583 Hippocampus, 417, 421–22 Histamines, 32, 241, 244, 533 Histones, 457 Homeostasis, 11, 148, 167, 473, 559, 605 Homologous chromosomes, 460 Hormones adrenocorticotropic, 162, 173, 174, 176, 188 amino acid derivatives, 158, 159 antidiuretic, 168, 173, 176, 178–79, 412, 606, 615, 617 bound versus free, 159–60 follicle-stimulating, 158, 173, 174–76, 199, 201–3, 470, 473 gastrointestinal, 196–99 gonadotropin-releasing hormone (GnRH), 470, 473 growth, 156, 171–74, 176–77, 412–13 kidneys and, 609 luteinizing, 158, 162, 173–76, 199, 201–3, 205 muscles and, 362 neurohormones, 171–72, 174 overview, 155–57 parathyroid, 162, 169, 184–85, 608 peptide, 158–59 preprohormones, 158 prohormones, 158, 174 protein and peptide hormones, 158–59

I-14 Index

regulation and secretion, 163–66 reproductive, 470–74 steroids, 7–9, 157–59 target cells and receptors, 160–63 thyroid-stimulating, 158, 162, 173–75, 182 thyrotropin-releasing, 158, 175, 182–83 transport, 159–60 tropic, 164 See also Endocrine glands; Prohormones; specific hormones such as Gastrin Humerus, 578–79 Humoral immunity, 261, 263–65 Hunger sensations, 413, 439 Huntington’s chorea, 459 Hydrochloric acid, 111–12, 122 Hydrocortisone, 188–90 Hydrogen, 2, 4, 522, 525–26 Hydrolysis, 90, 94 Hydrophilic molecules, 125, 130, 133, 241–42 Hydrophobic molecules, 92–93, 130–31, 228, 241–42 Hymen, 465 Hyoid bone, 569 Hypernatremia, 607 Hypertension, 64 Hypertrophy, 369 Hyperventilation, 527 Hypoblast, 480 Hypocalcemia, 184–85 Hypoglossal nerve, 427

Hyponatremia, 607 Hyponchium, 218 Hypophsis, 172 Hypothalamichypophyseal portal system, 160, 171 Hypothalamic-pituitary-target organ axis, 156 Hypothalamus gland, 160, 166, 170–72, 412–13, 429, 439, 473 Hypoxia, 82, 251, 450 H zone, 339–40 I bands, 339 ICAMs. See Intercellular adhesion molecules ICF. See Intracellular fluid Ileocecal valve, 122–23 Ileum, 120, 123, 129 Ilium, 583 Immune response antibodies, 260–61 cell-mediated versus humoral, 261–65 complement proteins, 227–28 genetic versus acquired, 267–69 innate, 265–67 lymphatic cells and, 231–32 nonspecific versus specific, 258–59 respiratory system and, 528 thymus gland, 237, 255, 259 vaccines, 269–71 See also Lymphatic system; Lymphocytes Immune system. See Immune response; Lymphatic system

Index I-15

Immunoglobulins (Ig), 37, 260–61, 268 Incontinence, 618 Incus, 446, 568 Inferior/superior, 552 Inflammation response, 265–66 Inflammatory mediators, 533 Influenza, 540–42 Inhalation/exhalation, 509 Inhibin, 176, 202 Inhibitory/excitatory nerve fibers, 385, 392 Inhibitory/excitatory synapse, 395–96 Innate immunity, 265–67 Innate responses, 258–59 Inorganic chemicals, 3–6 In-series blood circulation, 79 Insertion (of muscles), 335 Insoluble fiber, 91 Insulin, 158, 190–95, 362 Insulin-like growth factor, 177 Integumentary system dermis, 213–20 epidermis, 209–12 facts about, 207–8 overview, 208 Intensity, 435 Intercalated disk, 343 Intercellular adhesion molecules (ICAMs), 536 Intercostal muscles, 509–10 Interferons, 156, 242–44, 265–67 Interleukins, 156, 242–44 Interlobar arteries, 80 Intermediate pituitary, 173

Intermediolateral cell column, 407 Internal respiration, 500, 516–17 Internal urethral sphincter, 613 Interneurons, 386, 389–90 Interstitial fluid, 5, 230–31, 244, 605 Interstitial space, 59 Intestinal glands, 120 Intestinal villi, 77 Intracapsular ligaments, 595 Intracellular fluid (ICF), 5, 168, 397, 605 Intrinsic factor, 251 In vivo/vitro, 458 Involuntary muscles, 67, 332. See also Smooth muscles Iodine, 181–82 Ions, 101, 520 Iris, 442 Iron, 3, 134–35 Irregular bones, 554 Ischium, 583 Islets of Langerhans, 151, 191 Isometric contractions, 349–50 Jawbone, 569 Jejunum, 120, 123, 129 Jenner, Edward, 270 J genes, 235–36 Joints, 554, 589–96 Keratin, 210 Keratinocytes, 209 Ketone bodies, 191–92, 609 Kidneys, 79–80, 168, 184, 602–10 Kilocalories, 89

I-16 Index

Kneecap, 586–87 Krebs cycle, 89, 354–55, 366, 374, 523–25 Kupffer’s cells, 145–46 Labia, 464–65 Lacrimal bones, 568 Lacrimal glands, 440–41 Lacteals, 120, 229 Lactic acid, 523 Lactose, 91, 127 Lactotroph, 176 Laminae, 571 Langerhans cells, 211 Large intestine, 135–39 Laryngitis, 505, 532 Larynx, 504–5 Lateral/medial, 552 LDL (low-density lipoproteins), 93 Leg, 585–87 Leptin, 195 Leukocytes, 31–34, 559. See also White blood cells Leukotrienes, 533 Levers, 555–58 Leydig cells, 205 LH. See Luteinizing hormones Libido, 474–76 Lifespan, 1 Ligaments, 554, 590 Limbic system, 417 Lingual lipase, 105, 111, 117, 130 Lipids, 7–9, 89–93, 129–31, 241–42. See also Fats Lipoproteins, 92–93, 225, 228–29 Liver, 78, 123–24, 126, 144–47

Lobes, 415–19 Long bones, 553 Loop of Henle, 605, 614 Low-density lipoproteins (LDL), 93, 188 Lower gastrointestinal tract, 118–39 Lower respiratory tract, 507–10, 528 Lubricants, 5 Lumbar nerves, 403–4 Lumbar vertebrae, 569–71, 573 Lumen, 57, 62, 65, 112 Lung cancer, 543–44 Lungs, 508, 536–44 Lunula, 218 Luteinizing hormones (LH), 158, 162, 173–76, 199, 201–3, 205, 470, 473 Luteolysis, 202 Lymphatic system appendix, 136, 258 blood types, 252–54 bone marrow, 250–52 cell types, 231–32 cellular markers, 241–42 chemical signals, 242–44 facts, 223 functions, 226–27 lymph, 5, 34, 246–50 lymphatic fluid, 230–31 lymphatic vessels, 244–46 lymph nodes, 246–50 lymph nodules, 250, 257 lymphocytes, 31, 34, 232–38, 242–43, 248, 255, 260–65, 529

Index I-17

natural killer cells, 232–33, 242 organs, 226 overview, 225–26 spleen, 255–56 subcellular components, 227–30 thymus, 223, 237, 254–55, 259 tonsils, adenoid, Peyer’s patches, 250, 256–57 white blood cells, 27–28, 31–34, 238–41, 250, 558–59 See also Immune response Lymphocytes, 31, 34, 232–38, 242–43, 248, 255, 260–65, 529 Lysosomes, 32, 239 Lysozyme, 101, 120, 141, 229, 441 Macrophages, 32, 223, 238–40, 242–44, 248–49, 252, 262–65, 528 Macula lutea, 442 Major calyces, 604 Major histocompatibility complexes (MCH) markers, 241–42 Male reproductive organs, 466–68 Malignant cells, 259 Malleus, 446, 568 Maltose, 91, 127 Mandible, 569 Massage, 334 Masseter muscle, 426 Mass movement, 137 Mast cells, 241, 244, 533 Mastication, 102

Mastication muscles, 426 Maxillae, 567 MCH markers. See Major histocompatibility complexes (MCH) markers Mechanical digestion, 102–5, 111–13, 115–16 Medial/lateral, 552 Median sagittal plane, 19–20, 551 Medulla oblongata, 106, 117, 410–11, 512–13, 602 Medullary cords, 248–49 Megakaryocytes, 38 Meiosis, 460–61 Melanin, 211–12 Melanoctyes, 211 Melatonin, 179–80 Membranes, 561 Membranous labyrinth, 446 Memory and learning, 421–23 Meninges, 17, 419–20 Menstruation, 202, 463, 466 Mesentery membranes, 17, 106 Mesoderm, 510 Messenger ribonucleic acid (mRNA), 158 Metabolism, 87, 191–92 Metacarpals, 581–82 Metatarsals, 589 Micelles, 130–31 Microvilli, 77, 121–22 Micturition, 617 Midbrain, 411 Midsagittal plane, 565 Millimeters of mercury, 515 Mineralocorticoids, 159, 188–89

I-18 Index

Minerals, 97, 133–35 Minor calyces, 602 Miscarriage, 489 Mitochondria aerobic respiration and, 89 in ATP production, 353–56, 374 as a cell organelle, 13–14, 385 creatine phosphate and, 359–60 Krebs cycle and, 523–24 in muscle fibers, 337, 365–67 Mitosis, 460–61 Mixed agonist-antagonist, 161 Molecules, 4 Monocytes, 31, 34, 239 Monomers, 90, 105 Monosaccharides, 6–7, 90–91, 105, 127 Monozygotic twins, 479 Morula, 480 Motilin, 198 Motility, 116–18 Motor nerves/neurons, 384, 386–90, 400, 404, 424–27 Mouth. See Oral cavity mRNA (messenger ribonucleic acid), 158 Mucociliary lining, 527 Mucosa, 107–10, 120, 250, 610 Mucus, 5, 101 Multiple marker test, 488 Muscles action and organization of, 327–31 cardiac, 44, 67–69, 332, 340, 343–46, 365–67, 374–76 contractions, 339–47, 349–51

electron transport, 89, 355–56, 364–65 energy and, 351–55, 358–67 exercise and, 361–64, 367–77, 514, 523 facts about, 323–24 fibers, 336–39, 342, 347–49, 366, 369–70 intercostal, 509–10 layers, 335–37 massage, 334 mastication, 426 overview, 325–27 oxygen and, 356–58 skeletal, 67, 332–35, 339–40, 342–46 smooth, 44–45, 64, 67–69, 331–32, 340–41, 346–47, 367, 376–77 striated, 44, 67, 337 types, 44–45, 326, 331–34 voluntary versus involuntary, 67 Muscle spindles, 407 Muscle tissues, 14 Muscularis externa, 107 Myelin sheath, 389 Myenteric plexus, 107 Myofibrils, 337 Myoglobin, 364–66, 373 Myosin, 338–40, 344–50, 352, 367, 369 NADH, 354–56, 361, 374, 522, 524–25 Nail follicles, 216–18 Nasal bones, 568

Index I-19

Nasal passages, 502, 504 Nasolacrimal duct, 441 Natural killer (NK) cells, 232–33, 242 Nausea and vomiting of pregnancy (NVP), 484 Nephrons, 80, 604 Nerve fibers, 385, 402 Nerve plexusus, 404 Nerves afferent/efferent, 383–85, 388–90, 400 cranial, 385, 390, 424–27 definitions, 383 energy production, 386 glossopharyngeal, 427 hypoglossal, 427 motor, 384, 386–90, 400, 404, 424–27 nerve impulse, 397–400 neurons, 383, 385–90 oculomotor, 425–26 olfactory, 426 sensory, 384, 386–90, 424–27 spinal, 382–83, 402–4 spinal accessory, 427 synapses, 390–93 thoracic, 403–4, 427 trigeminal, 426 vestivulocochlear, 426 See also Nervous system; Neurotransmitters Nerve tissues, 14, 383 Nerve tracts, 383 Nervous system energy production, 386

facts, 379–80 muscles and, 341–43 nerve cells, 383–85 nerve impulses, 397–400 neurons, 386–90 overview, 382–83 peripheral/autonomic, 75, 382, 386, 400, 423–24, 427–34, 469–70 reproductive system and, 468–70 spinal cord, 400–408 synapses, 390–93 See also Brain; Nerves; Neurotransmitters; Spinal cord Neurochemical information, 514 Neuroglia, 389 Neurohormones, 171–72, 174 Neurolemma, 389 Neurons, 383, 385–90, 512. See also Nervous system Neurosecretory cells, 170 Neurotransmitters, 155–56, 170–71, 386, 393–97, 433–34, 469–70 Neutrons, 4 Neutrophils, 32–33, 238–40 Nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide. See NADH Nitrogen, 2, 4 NK cells. See Natural killer (NK) cells Node of Ranvier, 389, 400 Noradrenaline, 394 Norepinephrine, 156, 159, 186, 394, 434

I-20 Index

Normoblasts, 251 Nose/nasal passages, 502, 504 Nuclei, 4, 11–13, 385 Nucleic acids, 9–11, 131–32 Nucleoli, 13 Nucleotides, 352. See also Adenosine triphosphate Nutrients absorption of, 118 carbohydrates, 6–7, 89–91 fats/lipids, 7–9, 89–93 in small intestine, 122–23, 125, 127–35 See also Proteins NVP. See Nausea and vomiting of pregnancy Occipital bone, 564–65 Occipital lobes, 411, 416–18 Oculomotor nerve, 425–26 Olfaction, 438–39 Olfactory nerve, 426 Oligodendrocytes, 389 Oligosaccharides, 6–7 Oocytes, 462 Oogenesis, 200–201 Oogonia, 462 Opposable thumb, 580 Opsonization, 263 Optic chiasma, 444 Optic nerve, 426 Oral cavity, 99–100, 140–41 Orbit, 441 Organelles, 385, 521 Organic chemicals/molecules, 3–4, 6–11, 89

Organismal respiration, 511–17. See also Gas exchange process Organ or Corti, 447 Organs, 14–15 Organ system, 15–16 Orgasm, 475–76 Origin (of muscles), 334–35 Os coxae, 584 Osmoreceptors, 151, 168, 178, 606 Osmosis, 35–36, 132, 246, 606 Ossicles, 568 Osteology, 561 Ovaries, 199–204, 462 Ovulation, 201, 462, 466 Oxaloacetic acid, 524 Oxidation, 524 Oxidation-reduction reaction, 525 Oxidative phosphorylation, 356–59, 364, 368 Oxygen in the body, 2, 4, 6 capillary movement, 58–60 gas exchange process, 500, 507, 511, 518–26 muscles and, 356–58, 371–72 in red blood cells, 29–30, 251 respiration and, 510–11 Oxygen dissociation curve, 519 Oxytocin, 172, 179, 412 Pacemaker, 73, 343–44 Palmar/dorsal, 552 Pancreas, 123–24, 131–32, 148–50, 151, 190–92, 195–99 Pancreatic amylase, 127, 148–49

Index I-21

Pancreatic lipase, 148–49 Pancreatic polypeptide, 191 Pandemics, 540 Paneth cells, 120, 229–30 Papillae, 104–5, 437 Papillary ducts, 605 Papillary layer, 213 Paracrine action, 155 Parasympathetic division of the autonomic nervous system, 382, 428, 433 Parathyroid glands, 183–85 Parathyroid hormone (PTH), 162, 169, 184–85, 608 Parietal bones, 567 Parietal cells, 110–11 Parietal lobes, 416–17 Parietal membranes, 17 Partial agonist–partial antagonist, 161 Partial pressure, 30, 515 Passive immunity, 267–69 Patella, 586–87 Pathogens, 527 PCT. See Proximal convoluted tubule Pectoral girdle, 577–78 Pedicles, 571 Pelvic cavity, 17 Pelvic girdle, 582–85 Penis, 467 Pepsin, 112, 128 Pepsinogen, 110, 112 Peptide bonds, 94, 128–29 Peptide hormones, 158–59 Peptides, 385, 394, 395–96

Pericardial membranes, 17 Pericardium, 68 Perilymph, 446 Perimysium, 335 Perineum, 465 Peripheral nervous system (PNS), 75, 382, 386, 400, 423–24, 427–34, 469–70 Peristaltic action, 107–8, 115, 122–23 Peritoneum, 17 Pes, 587–89 Peyer’s patches, 250, 257 pH, 110 Phagocytic cells, 211, 228, 239 Phagocytosis, 32–34, 120 Phalanges, 582, 589 Phantom pain, 435 Pharyngoesophageal sphincter, 108 Pharynx, 103, 504 pH levels, 512, 514, 604, 608, 616 Phosphate, 169, 386, 459, 522, 526 Phospholipids, 7–9, 12, 92, 93, 124, 241–42 Phosphorus, 559–60 Pia matter, 420 Pineal gland, 151, 179–80 Pinna, 446 Pituitary gland, 160, 170, 172–80, 565 Pivot joints, 595 Placenta, 480, 483–84 Placental insufficiency, 489 Placental separation, 489 Placenta previa, 489 Plane joints, 596

I-22 Index

Planes, 17, 19–20, 550–53 Plantar, 552 Plaque, 43 Plasma, 5, 27–28, 34–37, 246 Plasma cells, 223 Plasminogen, 37 Platelets, 27–28, 37–38, 250 Pleural membranes, 17, 508 PNS. See Peripheral nervous system Polarization, 397, 399 Polymers, 90 Polyploid cells, 144 Polyps, 533 Polysaccharides, 6–7, 91 Polyspermy, 477 Polyunsaturated fatty acids, 156–57 Pons, 106, 411, 512–13 Popliteal pulse, 46 Pores, 220 Porphyrin, 518 Portal circulation, 79 Posterial tibial pulse, 46 Posterior/anterior, 552 Posterior pituitary, 173, 178–79 Postganglionic neurons, 429, 433–34 Postsynaptic neurons, 390–96 Potassium, 168–69, 189, 607 Preeclampsia, 489–90 Preganglionic neurons, 429, 433–34 Pregnancy abortion, 495–96 arbortifacients, 494–95

breasts during, 465–66 complications, 488–91 contraceptives, 491–94 fertilization, 477, 479 first trimester, 478–85 maternal and fetal testing, 487–88 nausea and vomiting of, 484 prenatal care, 486–87 progestins and, 203–4 second and third trimesters, 485–86 twins, 478–79 Pregnenolone, 159 Prenatal care, 486–87 Preprohormones, 158 Pressoreceptors, 450 Presynaptic neurons, 390–95, 407 Primitive streak, 480–81 Primordial germ cells, 462 Processes, 563, 571–72 Progenitor cells, 232–33 Progesterone, 158, 199, 202–4, 484 Progestins, 203–4 Proglucagon, 195 Prohormones, 158, 174 Proinsulin, 192 Projection, 435 Prolactin, 158, 172, 173, 176 Prostacyclines, 156 Prostaglandins, 156, 533 Prostate, 467, 611–12 Proteases, 112, 128–29, 229–30 Protein hormones, 158–59 Proteins antimicrobial, 229–30 in the body, 4, 9

Index I-23

in cell membranes, 12–13, 241–42 complement, 227–28 digestive system and, 89–90, 93–94, 112, 128–29 in DNA/RNA, 11 as energy sources, 361 globin, 29–30 G proteins, 163 growth factors, 156 Proteolytic enzymes, 148–49 Prothrombin, 37 Protons, 4 Protozoa, 34 Proximal convoluted tubule (PCT), 605 Proximal/distal, 552 PTH. See Parathyroid hormone Pubis, 583–84 Pudendum, 465 Pulmonary artery, 516 Pulmonary circulation, 41, 48–49, 56, 61, 515 Pulmonary ventilation, 511–15. See also Gas exchange process; Respiration Pulses, 45–46 Pupil, 442 Purines, 394 Purkinje fibers, 73 Pyloric sphincter, 115–16, 120, 122 Pyruvate, 353–54, 356, 524 Pyruvic acid, 521–22 Radius, 579–80 Receptive relaxation, 115

Receptors in the bloodstream, 450–51 in the heart, 75–76 of the heart, 64 osmoreceptors, 151, 168, 178, 606 sensory pathways and, 434 in the skin, 218, 436–37 stretch, 407 target cells and, 160–63 Rectum, 135–36 Red blood cells, 27–31, 250–54, 558–59. See also Erythrocytes Redox reaction, 525 Reflexes, 401, 406, 407–8, 411 Reflux, 108 Refraction, 444 Refractive surgery, 445–46 Renal capsule, 602 Renal fascia, 602 Renal pyramids, 602 Renal system circulation, 79–80 Renin, 169, 189, 608 Repolarization, 398–99 Reproductive system cell division, 460–61 chromosomes, 459–60 facts about, 453–54 female organs, 462–66 genes, 11, 161, 235–36, 456–59 hormones, 470–74 libido, 474–76 male organs, 466–68 nervous system and, 468–70 sex and, 455–56, 474–76

I-24 Index

sex glands, 199–206 See also Pregnancy Respiration, 500, 510–17, 511–17, 520–22. See also Gas exchange process Respiratory system alveoli, 506–8 asthma, 537–38 bronchi/bronchioles, 506 chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, 538 common cold, 535–36 cystic fibrosis, 539–40 defense mechanisms, 527–29 development, 510 diaphragm, 509–10 emphysema, 538–39 epithelium, 503 facts about, 497–98 functions, 500–501 gas exchange process, 500, 507, 511, 518–26 influenza, 540–42 laryngitis, 532 larynx, 504–5 lung cancer, 543–44 lungs, 508 muscle contractions and, 352–55 nose and nasal passages, 502, 504 overview, 499–500 pharynx, 504 respiration, 500, 510–17, 511–17, 520–22 rhinitis, 532–33 sinusitis, 533–34

sleep apnea, 534–35 smoking and, 527, 543–44 trachea, 505–6 viruses and bacteria, 529–32 Reticulocytes, 251 Retina, 442 Rh factor, 252–54, 490–91 Rhinitis, 532–33 Rhinoviruses, 535–36 Rhodopsin, 444 Rib cage, 574 Ribonucleic acid. See RNA Ribose, 10–11 Ribosomes, 13 Ribs, 575 Rigor mortis, 346 RNA (ribonucleic acid), 9–11, 13, 161, 461 Rods and cones, 442–44 Rotation, 557 Rugae, 115–17 Saccharides, 6–7 Saccule, 447–48 Sacral nerves, 403–4 Sacromeres, 338, 340 Sacroplasmic reticulum, 337, 340–41, 344 Sacrum, 569–71, 573, 584–85 Saddle joints, 596 Sagittal plane, 550 Saliva, 1 Salivary amylase, 101, 105, 111, 117, 125, 141 Salivary glands, 100–101, 105, 140–41

Index I-25

SA node, 73 Sarcolemma, 337, 397–99 Saturated fats, 7–9 Scabs, 38 Scapulae, 577–78 Schwann cells, 389 Sclera, 442 Sebaceous glands, 214 Second messenger system, 162–63 Secretin, 117–18, 195, 197–98 Segmentation, 122 Self-tolerance/identification, 234, 241–42 Semen, 467 Semicircular canals, 447 Seminiferous tubules, 205 Semipermeable membranes, 606 Sensations, 413–14, 425–27, 435–36. See also Senses Senses in the bloodstream, 450–51 cutaneous, 436–37 hearing, 446–50 olfaction, 438–39 overview, 434–36 taste, 104–5, 437–38 visceral, 439 vision, 440–46 See also Sensations Sensory nerves/neurons, 384, 386–90, 424–27 Septum, 46, 502 Serosa, 106–7, 610 Serotonin, 32, 394 Serous membranes, 17 Sertoli cells, 175–76, 205

Sesamoid bones, 554, 581 Sex and reproduction, 455–56 Sex glands, 199–206 Sex-linked inherited characteristics, 460 Shinbone, 587 Short bones, 554 Shoulder blades, 577–78 Sickle cell anemia, 459 Sinoatrial node (SA node), 73 Sinusitis, 533–34 Sinusoidal capillaries, 58 Sinusoids, 146 Size, 1 Skeletal muscles, 67, 332–35, 339–40, 342–46, 561–76. See also Smooth muscles Skeletal system appendicular, 576–89 body planes, 550–53 bone classifications, 553–55 bones as levers, 555–58 facts about, 547–48 functions, 550, 558–61 joints, 554, 589–96 ligaments, 554, 590 overview, 549 synovial fluid, 596–97 tendons, 553, 554, 590 See also Bones Skin acne, 219–20 burns, 212 dermis, 213 epidermis, 208–12 glands, 218, 220

I-26 Index

hair/hair follicles, 214–16 nail follicles, 216–18 sensory receptors, 218, 436–37 Skin grafts, 213 Skull, 409, 561–69 Sleep apnea, 534–35 Sliding filament model, 339–40 Slow-twitch muscle fibers, 347–49, 364–67, 373 Small intestine accessory glands, 123–24 digestive compounds, 125 functions and structure, 119–22 nutrient movement, 122–23 nutrient processing, 125, 127–35 pancreatic enzymes and, 148–50 parathyroid hormones and, 184 See also Duodenum Smoking, 71, 527, 543–44 Smooth muscles, 44–45, 64, 67–69, 331–32, 340–41, 346–47, 367, 376–77 Sodium, 3, 168–69, 189, 607 Sodium bicarbonate, 35, 124, 148 Sodium chloride, 35 Sodium/potassium pump, 607 Soluble fiber, 91 Solutes, 35–36 Solvents, 5 Somatic sensory neurons, 388 Somatostatin, 156, 191, 195–96 Somatotroph, 174 Somatotropin, 176–77 Spanish flu, 541

Specialized fluid, 5 Sperm, 205, 466 Sphenoid bone, 565 Sphincter of Oddi, 124, 144, 146 Sphincters cardiac, 108, 111 digestive system, 335 gastroesophageal, 111 Oddi, 124, 144, 146 pyloric, 115–16, 120, 122 urinary, 613 Spinal accessory nerve, 427 Spinal cavity, 17 Spinal cord, 382–84, 400–408, 569–74 Spinal nerves, 382–83, 402–4 Spinal reflexes, 401 Spinous processes, 571 Spleen, 80–81, 255–56 Stapes, 446, 448, 568 Stem cells, 232–33, 251, 457–59, 462 Sternum, 575–76 Steroids, 7–9, 157–59, 470–71 Sterols, 92–93 Stillbirth, 489 Stimuli, 382 Stomach, 108–18 Stratum corneum, 210–11 Stratum germinativum, 210 Strength, 370–71 Stretch receptors, 407 Stretch reflex, 401 Striated muscles, 44, 67, 337. See also Skeletal muscles Strokes, 38

Index I-27

Stroke volume, 46 Subclavian arteries, 47 Submucosa, 107 Substance P, 199 Sucrose, 91, 127 Sulci, 414 Superior/inferior, 552 Surfactant, 507 Sutures, 561–62, 591 Swallowing reflex, 105–6 Sweat glands, 151, 220 Swine flu, 541–42 Sympathetic division of the autonomic nervous system, 75–76, 116, 382, 428–33 Symphysis, 584, 592 Synapses, 390–93, 433–34 Synaptic gap, 390 Synarthroses, 590–91 Synchondrosis, 592 Syndemosis, 592 Synergist muscles, 333 Synovial fluid, 596–97 Synovial joints, 593–96, 594–95 Systemic capillaries, 516 Systemic circulation, 41, 45–48, 53–56, 61 Systole, 70 Taeniae coli, 137 Target cells, 160–63 Tarsus, 587–89 Taste buds, 104–5, 437–38 TCA cycle. See Tricarboxylic acid (TCA) cycle

T cells/lymphocytes, 34, 81, 232–33, 237–38, 242–43, 255, 260–65, 529 Teeth, 102–3 Temperature, 5, 412 Temporal bones, 567 Temporal lobes, 416–17 Temporal pulse, 45 Tendons, 333, 335, 553, 554, 590 Terminal aterioles, 65 Testes, 199–200, 204–6, 466–67 Testosterone, 157, 158, 199, 205–6, 369, 472 Tetanus contractions, 334 Thalamus, 413–14 Thigh, 585–86 Thirst sensations, 439 Thoracic aorta, 47 Thoracic cavity, 17 Thoracic nerves, 403–4, 427 Thoracic vertebrae, 569–71, 573 Thorax, 574 Threshold level, 392 Throat. See Pharynx Thrombocytes, 37–38. See also Platelets Thromboplastin, 38 Thromboxanes, 156 Thymine, 9–11, 457 Thymus gland, 223, 237, 254–55, 259 Thyroid gland, 180–83 Thyroid hormones, 159, 180–83 Thyroid-stimulating hormone (TSH), 158, 162, 173–75, 182 Thyrotroph, 174

I-28 Index

Thyrotropin, 174 Thyrotropin-releasing hormone (TRH), 158, 175, 182–83 Thyroxine (T4), 159, 174, 180, 182–83 Tibia, 587 Tidal volume, 515 Tissue fluid, 5 Tissues, 14, 550 Titin, 339 TNF (tumor necrosis factors), 156 Tongue, 103–5, 106 Tonsils, 250, 256–57 Total cardiac output. See Cardiac output Touch, sense of, 436–37 Toxoids, 271 Trabeculae, 553 Trachea, 505–6 Transferrin, 135 Transverse plane, 19–20, 550, 551 Transverse processes, 572 TRH. See Thyrotropin-releasing hormone Tricarboxylic acid (TCA) cycle, 354–55 Trigeminal nerve, 426 Triglycerides, 7–9, 92, 111–12, 130–31, 228 Triiodothyronine (T3), 159, 174, 181–83 Trochanter, 585–86 Tropic hormones, 164 Tropomyosin, 339, 344–48 Troponin, 339, 344–48 True fats, 7–9

Trypsin, 129, 149–50 Trypsinogen, 128–29, 149 Tryptophan, 180 TSH. See Thyroid-stimulating hormone T tubules, 337, 343 Tumor necrosis factors (TNF), 156 Tunica adventitia, 42, 44, 51–52 Tunica intima, 42, 45, 51–52 Tunica media, 42, 44, 51–52 Twins, 478–79, 480 Tyrosine, 159 Ulna, 579 Ultrasound, 487–88 Unsaturated fats, 7–9 Upper gastrointestinal tract, 98–118 Upper respiratory tract, 500–507, 528 Uracil, 10–11 Urea, 605, 609 Ureter, 80, 466–67 Ureteral orifices, 610 Urethra, 464, 612–13 Uric acid, 609 Urinary sphincter, 613 Urinary system bladder, 610–11 facts about, 599–600 kidneys, 602–10 overview, 601–2 prostate, 611–12 urethra, 612–13 urinary sphincter, 613 urine, 605, 610–11, 613–18

Index I-29

Urine, 605, 610–11, 613–18 Urochrome, 615 Uterus, 463–64 Utricle, 447–48 Vaccines, 269–71, 374 Vagina, 463–65 Vagus nerve, 427, 513 Valves, 60, 63, 68–74 Vas deferens, 466–67 Vasoactive intestinal polypeptide, 198 Vasoconstrictor nerves, 49–50 Vasodilation, 265 Vasointestinal peptide, 397 Vasopressin, 168, 176, 178–79 Vaso vasorum, 44 Velocity of blood flow, 61–64 Vena cavae, 49–50, 54–56, 66, 69 Venous system, 49–56, 61–63 Ventral cavity, 16–17 Ventral roots, 404 Ventricles, 46, 48–49, 66–70, 72–74, 410, 420–21, 516 Venules, 51–53, 56, 61–62, 65 Vertebrae, 401, 569–74. See also Spinal cord Vertebral arteries, 81–82 Vestibular glands, 464 Vestivulocochlear nerve, 426 V genes, 236 Villi, 58, 77–78, 120–21, 421 Viruses, 232, 530–31, 535–36, 540–42 Visceral membranes, 17 Visceral neurons, 424

Visceral sensations, 439 Visceral sensory neurons, 388–89 Viscosity, 27 Vision, 440–46 Vitamin D, 96, 132, 134, 210 Vitamin K, 37, 96–97, 132 Vitamins, 96–97, 132–33 Vitreous humor, 443 VO2max, 375 Voluntary muscles, 67. See also Skeletal muscles; Striated muscles Vomer, 568–69 Vulva, 465 Water antidiuretic hormones, 168, 173, 176, 178–79 in the blood, 35–36 in the body, 3–6 in cell respiration, 7 in the digestive system, 97–98, 132 endrocrine system and, 167–69 hydrolysis, 90, 94 importance of, 142–43 kidney functions, 79–80, 168 as a nutrient, 97–98 osmoreceptors, 151, 168, 178 urine and, 614–15 Waxes, 93 White blood cells, 27–28, 31–34, 238–41, 250, 558–59 White matter, 383–84, 402, 405–6

I-30 Index

Z bands, 338–40 Zona fasciculata, 188 Zona glomerulosa, 188 Zona pellucida, 477

Zona reticularis, 188 Zygomatic bone, 567 Zygote, 461, 479–80 Zymogens, 227

This page intentionally left blank

Encyclopedia of Human Body Systems

This page intentionally left blank

Encyclopedia of Human Body Systems
VOLUME 2

Julie McDowell, Editor

Copyright 2010 by ABC-CLIO, LLC All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, except for the inclusion of brief quotations in a review, without prior permission in writing from the publisher. Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data McDowell, Julie. Encyclopedia of human body systems / Julie McDowell. p. cm. Includes bibliographical references and index. ISBN 978–0–313–39175–0 (hard copy : alk. paper) — ISBN 978–0–313– 39176–7 (ebook) 1. Human physiology—Encyclopedias. I. Title. QP11.M33 2011 612.003—dc22 2010021682 ISBN: 978–0–313–39175–0 EISBN: 978–0–313–39176–7 14 13 12 11 10 1 2 3 4 5

This book is also available on the World Wide Web as an eBook. Visit www.abc-clio.com for details. Greenwood An Imprint of ABC-CLIO, LLC ABC-CLIO, LLC 130 Cremona Drive, P.O. Box 1911 Santa Barbara, California 93116-1911 This book is printed on acid-free paper Manufactured in the United States of America

Contents

VOLUME ONE About the Editor and Contributors, vii Introduction, ix CHAPTER 1 The Building Blocks of the Human Body, 1 Julie McDowell CHAPTER 2 The Circulatory System, 23 Leslie Mertz CHAPTER 3 The Digestive System, 85 Michael Windelspecht CHAPTER 4 The Endocrine System, 151 Stephanie Watson and Kelli Miller Stacy CHAPTER 5 The Integumentary System, 207 Julie McDowell CHAPTER 6 The Lymphatic System, 223 Julie McDowell and Michael Windelspecht v vi Contents

Glossary, 273 Select Bibliography, 317 Index, I-1–I-30

VOLUME TWO CHAPTER 7 The Muscular System, 323 Amy Adams CHAPTER 8 The Nervous System, 379 Julie McDowell CHAPTER 9 The Reproductive System, 453 Kathryn H. Hollen CHAPTER 10 The Respiratory System, 497 David Petechuk CHAPTER 11 The Skeletal System, 547 Evelyn Kelly CHAPTER 12 The Urinary System, 599 Stephanie Watson Glossary, 619 Select Bibliography, 663 Index, I-1–I-30

7
The Muscular System
Amy Adams

Interesting Facts
• • The body contains roughly 630 skeletal muscles. The skeletal muscles account for roughly 50 percent of the body weight in men, 40 percent of the body weight in women, and 25 percent of a baby’s body weight. After age 50, people lose about 10 percent of their muscle fibers per decade. Resting muscles receive about 20 percent of blood flow. During heavy exercise, the muscles receive from 60 to 85 percent of blood flow. Five to ten percent of a person’s body weight is heart and smooth muscle. A fast-twitch muscle reaches peak contraction in about 1/20 of a second. A slow-twitch muscle reaches peak contraction in about 1/10 of a second. A single motor unit can range from two to three muscle fibers in the larynx to 2,000 fibers in the hamstring.
323

• • • • • • •

324 Amy Adams

• • • • • • •

Each sarcomere shortens between one-half to one-third its total length during a contraction. Muscles use up stored adenosine triphosphate (ATP) in about two seconds. Most pain that occurs the day after exercise is the result of eccentric exercise. Pain following exercise occurs most often in the region of the muscle farthest from the center of the body. Most strains happen at the junction between the muscle and the tendon. The second-most common lethal genetic disease for a child to be born with is muscular dystrophy. One in 3,300 male babies is born with Duchenne muscular dystrophy.

Chapter Highlights
• • • • • • • • • • • Types of muscles Muscle fibers Muscle contractions Role nerves play in muscle function Slide filament model Fast-twitch and slow-twitch muscles How muscles use energy Role of oxygen in muscle function Muscle’s fuel sources Muscle behavior in anaerobic and aerobic exercise Changes to heart and smooth muscle during exercise

The Muscular System 325

Words to Watch For
Acetyl coenzyme A Acetylcholine Actin Aerobic exercise Anaerobic exercise Antagonistic muscle pairs Calorie Cardiac muscle Citric acid cycle Concentric contraction Creatine phosphate Eccentric contraction Fascia Fascicles Fast-twitch muscle fibers Glycogen Glycosis H zone Hypertrophy I band Insertion Insulin Intercalated disk Isometric contraction Mitochondria Muscle fibers Myofibrils Myoglobin Myosin Origin Oxidative phosphorylation Perimysium Pyruvate Sarcolemma Sarcomeres Sarcoplasmic reticulum Skeletal muscle Slow-twitch muscle fibers Smooth muscle Sphincters Synergist T tubules Tendon Testosterone Tetanus contraction Tropomyosin Troponin Z band

Introduction
One characteristic that unites all animals is the ability to move from place to place. Animals walk, crawl, or swim to find food, avoid prey, reproduce, and live out their lives. All of this movement requires muscles. In simple organisms, a few muscles are enough to control how the animal gets around. But in complex animals such as humans, a complex network of different muscle types helps fine-tune our movements. Large, powerful muscles allow us to walk, while delicate muscles give us the ability to make the detailed movements needed to write or play the piano. In addition to helping us navigate the world, muscles are essential to our internal processes. The

326 Amy Adams

heart beats more than one billion times in an average human life, and each of those beats is the result of the heart muscle contracting. Other muscles in the body are responsible for moving food through the digestive system, causing air to rush into and out of the lungs, or directing the blood as it flows through the circulatory system. This chapter provides a detailed overview of the anatomy, physiology, and medical issues affecting the many muscles in our body. Humans have three distinctly different types of muscles: Our roughly 600 skeletal muscles allow us to navigate the world; the heart muscle keeps the heart beating; and smooth muscles line our internal organs, digestive tract, and veins. Although people have been interested in the question of how muscles contract since the era of ancient Greek civilization, not until the invention of the microscope in the mid-1800s did scientists first identify the three different types of muscles. Even then, scientists did not understand how the muscles contracted until 1952, when the newly invented electron microscope revealed the fine details of the muscles. Until that time, scientists had argued about how the proteins within the muscles interact to cause the muscle to contract. Another long-standing question had concerned what gives the muscles a signal to contract. As long ago as the 1500s, early scientists understood that nerves were needed to deliver signals to muscles, but without a detailed understanding of the nervous system and circulatory system, scientists studying the muscles could not fully understand how they function. With all the functions they perform, muscles interact closely with other systems in the body. The blood vessels winding throughout muscles provide food and oxygen while carrying away waste products. Nerves deliver the essential signal that causes the muscles to contract and also play a role in shaping how muscles develop in the growing embryo. Some muscles are critical in order for other body systems to function normally. The digestive system, for example, relies on smooth muscles to push food from one end of the body to the other, and smooth muscles lining the bladder regulate urination. With their widespread functions, muscles are involved in just about every aspect of human physiology. The body’s muscular system is very complex, and this chapter provides an overview of some of the system’s highlights, including the major

The Muscular System 327

muscle groups and the composition of muscles and its fibers. This chapter will also look at how muscles contract, and how muscles use energy from various sources.

Muscle Organization and Actions
Before discussing the specifics of how muscles function, it is important to get an overview of terminology associated with different muscles and their actions. This section will go over how the actions of muscles are described, as well as muscle names and their functions. There are specific terms for the actions of the muscles. These actions are most often grouped in pairs, and describe antagonistic functions (with the exception of rotation), as depicted in Table 7.1. There are different ways to group the body’s muscles, but this chapter will describe them based on four groups: those in the head and neck, the trunk, the shoulder and arm, and the hip and leg. The posterior and anterior illustrations of some of the major muscles are depicted in Figures 7.1 and 7.2. Each of these groups is described in Table 7.2.

TABLE 7.1 Actions of the Muscles
Action Flexion Extension Adduction Abduction Pronation Supination Dorsiflexion Plantar flexion Rotation Description, example Decrease a joint’s angle, such as when lifting a knee up Increase the joint’s angle, such as when lowering a knee that is lifted Moving closer to the body’s middle, such as when moving the arm towards the waist Moving away from the midline, such as when moving the arm up above the shoulders Turning the palm of the hand up Turning the palm of the hand down towards the ground Lifting or elevating the foot Lowering the foot, such as when pointing one’s toes Moving a muscle or bone around its longitudinal axis, such as rotating a shoulder

328 Amy Adams

Figure 7.1 Posterior view of the body’s muscular system. (Linda Bucklin/Dreamstime.com)

The Muscular System 329

Figure 7.2 Anterior view of the body’s muscular system. (Linda Bucklin/ Dreamstime.com)

330 Amy Adams
TABLE 7.2 Major Muscle Groups
Name Major muscles of the head and neck Orbicularis oris Orbicularis oculi Masseter Buccinator Sternocleidomastoic Semispinalis capitis Trunk muscles Trapezius External intercostals Internal intercostals Diaphragm Raises and lowers shoulders Allows inhalation by pulling ribs up and out Forces exhalation by pulling ribs down and in Prepares chest cavity for inhalation by pulling down and flattening, which enlarges the cavity Constricts abdomen Group of deep muscles that extends the vertebral column Helps to abduct the muscles in the lower posterior neck, back of the lower shoulder region Abducts the muscles in the upper anterior of the chest Abducts and extend the muscles in the lower posterior of the back Abducts and extends the muscles in the upper posterior of the back Extends the muscles of the forearm Extends and flexes the muscles of the forearm Flexes the muscles of the femoris (femur), the long bone located in the thigh Gathers and puckers lips Closes lid over eye Shuts jaw Moves corners of mouth Flexes head and neck muscles to turn head towards opposite side Extends head and neck muscles to turn head to the same side Function

Rectus abdominus Sacrospinalis muscles Shoulder and arm muscle group Deltoid

Pectoralis major Latissimus dorsi Teres major Triceps brachii Biceps brachii, brachioradialis Hip and leg muscle group Iliopsoas

The Muscular System 331
TABLE 7.2 (Continued) Name Gluteus maximus Gluteus medius Quadriceps femoris group (rectus femoris, vastus lateralis, vastus medialis, vastus intermedius) Hamstring muscle group (biceps femoris, semimembranosus, semitendinosus) Adductor muscle group Sartorius Gastrocnemius, Soleus Tibialis anterior Function Extends the muscles of the femur or thigh Abducts the femur muscles Flexes femur muscles and extends muscles of the lower leg Extends femur muscles and flexes muscles of the lower leg Adducts femur muscles Flexes lower leg muscles and femur Plantar flexion of the foot (lowering movement) Dorsiflexion of the foot (elevating movement)

Anatomy of the Muscular System
Three basic types of muscles carry out all movement within the body: smooth muscle, cardiac (heart) muscle, and skeletal muscle. Although each of these three types of muscles shares the ability to contract, they are located in different places in the body, contract at different strengths, and look different under a microscope.

Types of Muscles
Smooth Muscle
Smooth muscle lines many of the internal organs. They cause contractions that move food through the intestines, expand and contract the blood vessels to regulate blood supply, and contract to push the baby out of a woman’s uterus. Smooth muscles also control the size of the pupil and are found at the base of hair follicles, where they produce goose bumps when it is cold. Ideally, these goose bumps would raise the hair to trap an insulating layer of air around the body, although few humans have enough hair for goose bumps to serve a practical purpose.

332 Amy Adams

Smooth muscles are also called involuntary muscles because they cannot be controlled voluntarily; one cannot decide to relax the pupil to let in more light any more than a person can stop the spread of a blush across the face. Instead, smooth muscles contract in response to biological conditions such as food passing through the intestine, bright light shining on the eye, cold temperatures, or embarrassment. Smooth muscles contract slowly but with great force, and can hold a contraction without growing tired. They also shorten more when they contract than other muscles do. Whereas most muscles are designed for quick, precise motions, smooth muscles are designed for long-term squeezing. Smooth muscles earned their name by being smooth in appearance under the microscope. The individual cells are long and tapered and tend to form into sheets, such as in the lining of the digestive system. As with most cells in the body, each smooth muscle cell has its own nucleus.

Cardiac Muscle
Cardiac muscle is the muscle that makes up the heart. It is similar to smooth muscle in that (1) each cardiac muscle cell has its own nucleus and (2) the heart muscle cannot be controlled voluntarily. Instead, a region of the brain monitors how much oxygen is in the blood and adjusts how quickly the heart beats accordingly. A runner cannot decide to slow the heart rate, nor can a resting person voluntarily speed up how quickly the heart beats. The cardiac muscle is extremely strong and is unique in that the entire muscle contracts at the same time. Whereas smooth muscles squeeze consistently, the cardiac muscle is unable to sustain a contraction. Instead, the entire muscle contracts forcefully, then relaxes. The cardiac muscle also looks different under the microscope than smooth muscle. Each individual muscle cell is cylindrical in shape and can have many branches. The cells join together to form long, branched tubes, with each cell separated by a disk of cell membrane called the intercalated disk.

Skeletal Muscle
The skeletal muscles are all the muscles that attach to the skeleton and help the body move. These are the 600 or so muscles that you might exercise at the gym and that you use to move around or pick up a book.

The Muscular System 333

They are also the muscles that get strained from exercise and that become diseased in muscular dystrophy. Most of the muscles in the body are skeletal muscles. For that reason, throughout this chapter, the term muscles will refer specifically to skeletal muscles unless stated otherwise. Skeletal muscles generally have both ends anchored to the skeleton with a thick, rope-like tissue called a tendon. When the muscle contracts, it pulls on the tendons, which then pull two skeletal regions closer together. Usually, two ends of the muscles are on either side of a joint. For example, the biceps muscle on the inside of the upper arm is attached to the shoulder at one end and to the forearm at the other end. The muscles on the inside of the joint, such as the biceps, pull two sides of the joint together, causing the joint to bend, while muscles on the outside of a joint contract to pull the joint straight. Most muscles are organized into pairs located on either side of a joint. These two muscles work against each other and are thus called antagonistic pairs. One antagonistic pair might be the biceps muscle that bends the arm and the triceps muscle that straightens it back out. A similar pair is the quadriceps muscle on the front of the thigh that straightens the leg, and the hamstring on the back of the thigh that bends it. In each case, the two muscles have opposing actions and help keep the joint stable and control movement. Another type of muscle helps fine-tune direction of the movement caused by the antagonistic pair. This type of muscle works in synergy with a larger, stronger muscle and is called a synergist. For example, the strong bicep muscle bends the arm at the elbow, but synergist muscles control whether the hand moves directly toward the shoulder, or veers right or left. To understand how agonists and antagonists work, imagine lifting a weight. As one lifts the weight, the biceps contracts, causing the arm to bend, and the triceps relaxes to allow the bend. The triceps does stay somewhat contracted to help control how quickly the arm moves. When one lowers the weight, the triceps contracts to pull the arm straight and the biceps slowly relaxes, allowing the weight to lower (Sidebar 7.1). Skeletal muscle has things in common with both smooth and cardiac muscle, but is unique in that it is the only muscle group that a person can move voluntarily. Like the cardiac muscle, each fiber can only contract once in response to a signal from a nerve. This single contraction is

334 Amy Adams

SIDEBAR 7.1

Therapy for Your Muscles?
Many people rely on massage therapy to ease pain and soreness related to sports injuries, as well as to increase relaxion and reduce stress, anxiety, and depression. In fact, an estimated 18 million adults in the United States are believed to receive massage therapy every year. People use massage for a variety of health-related purposes, such as to relieve pain or rehabilitate sports injuries, as well as to reduce stress, increase relaxation, address anxiety and depression, and aid general wellness. However, the National Institutes of Health’s National Center for Complementary and Alternative Medicine emphasizes that there is limited scientific evidence on massage therapy; therefore, it is not clear what impact massage therapy has on muscles, if it impacts health, and if so, how it influences health. There are various types of massage. Some examples include Swedish, deep tissue, and trigger point massage. In a Swedish massage, the masseuse uses long stroke and deep circular movements, as well as kneading, vibration, and tapping on the muscles. Deep tissue and trigger massage focuses on knots in the muscles that can become painful when pressure is applied, although the massaging works to ease these knots.

called a simple twitch. However, most movements like walking or playing basketball involve smooth, sustained motion that could hardly be achieved by simple twitches. Instead, signals from the nerves come in extremely quick pulses. Rather than resulting in a series of simple twitches, these signals cause a sustained contraction called a tetanus contraction. (The disease tetanus—which is also called lockjaw—causes muscles of the body to contract).

Anatomy of a Skeletal Muscle
Most muscles connect to a bone at either end. The tendons that attach muscles to bones are also part of the bone’s outer coating and part of the muscle’s coating, making the connection extremely strong. One end of the muscle is generally considered to be the origin, while the other end

The Muscular System 335

is the insertion. The origin of the muscle is usually closer to the center of the body and is connected to a bone that does not move much when the muscle contracts. The insertion is usually the end of the muscle that is farther from the middle of the body and is connected to the bone that moves when the muscle contracts. For example, when the biceps muscle flexes, the forearm moves closer to the shoulder. With that in mind, the end that connects to the shoulder is the origin, while the end that connects to the forearm is the insertion. Although most muscles are attached at both ends to a bone, a few muscles are not. These include the facial muscles that allow a person to smile or frown and the many muscles that make up the tongue. These muscles have complex origins and insertions that allow the tongue to do everything from pick food out of the teeth to control whistling and speech. Another group of muscles, such as those in the abdomen, connect to bands of tendons that cross the stomach rather than to any bone. When the muscles contract, they pull those tendons toward each other to bend the stomach. There are also circular bands of muscles called sphincters that help control the flow of food through the digestive system. These sphincters do not connect to muscles, tendons, or skin, but instead form a continuous, circular band of muscles that surround the mouth, the ends of the stomach, and the anus. Puckering the lips for a kiss involves contracting a sphincter muscle. These muscles are especially good at constricting passages, such as at either end of the stomach where they prevent food from leaving until it is fully digested.

Layers of the Muscle
Although a muscle looks like a single, solid mass, it is actually made up of many smaller fibers all bundled together to form one functioning unit. The entire muscle is wrapped in a connective tissue called the fascia, or the epimysium, that holds the muscle together. It is this fascia that forms into tendons and is fused to the bone to make a strong muscle-bone connection. Held within this outer covering are many smaller bundles of fibers called the fascicles. These bundles are also held together with connective tissue called the perimysium. These fascicles cause the stringiness one may notice when eating meat (see Figure 7.3 for an illustration of muscle anatomy).

336 Amy Adams

Figure 7.3 Anatomy of a muscle. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

Within the fascicles are the muscle fibers themselves. These fibers are actually very long cells—each less than the width of a hair—with many nuclei. Most cells only have one nucleus. Muscle cells are a conglomeration of many cells that fuse during development into one long fiber with several nuclei per fiber. The longest single-muscle fibers in humans tend to be about 4.7 inches (12 centimeters). The number of individual fibers in each muscle can range from 10,000 fibers to more than a million fibers, with each fiber spanning only a portion of the muscle’s full length in some long muscles.

The Muscular System 337

Finally, each muscle fiber contains thousands of long units called myofibrils. These myofibrils are what actually contract when the cell receives a contraction signal from a nerve. Running through the muscle between fascicles are nerves and blood vessels. The nerves relay signals that run from the brain, down the spinal column, and through nerve cells to the muscle. When a person decides to move, these nerves relay that signal to the muscle fibers that carry out that decision. The blood vessels deliver food, nutrients, and oxygen to the muscles to help the muscles contract. They also pick up carbon dioxide from the muscle and deliver it to the lungs where it is breathed out in exchange for more oxygen.

Muscle Fiber Anatomy
The individual muscle fibers are surrounded by a cell membrane called the sarcolemma. The sarcolemma both encircles the muscle fiber and sends hollow projections across the fiber. These channels, called T tubules, help the muscle transmit the signal to contract. Just underneath the sarcolemma are granules of a type of sugar called glycogen. This glycogen serves as a food reservoir for the muscle to feed on when it is in heavy use. Along with the glycogen, cellular units called mitochondria also inhabit the space just under the sarcolemma. These mitochondria are referred to as the “powerhouse of the cell.” They convert food from the bloodstream, glycogen, and other sources into energy that the muscle uses in order to contract. Under the mitochondria is a network of hollow tubules called the sarcoplasmic reticulum. The sarcoplasmic reticulum is a repository for calcium, which the muscle uses in the process of contraction. It closely follows the T tubules that cross the fiber and winds throughout the muscle fiber, providing a quick source of calcium.

Ultrastructure of a Muscle Fiber
Skeletal muscle is also called striated muscle, because under a microscope, the myofibrils contain many tiny stripes, or striations. The stripes that can be seen under the microscope are the individual units of the

338 Amy Adams

Figure 7.4 Sarcomere Structure. The structure, when relaxed and contracted. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

muscle fiber, which are called sarcomeres (Figure 7.4). Cardiac muscle also has these striations, though smooth muscle does not. It is bounded on both ends by a vertical band of tissue called a Z band. Looking closely at the sarcomere under a microscope, there are several horizontal stripes of protein filaments. These are made up of the two primary types of protein filaments in a muscle: actin and myosin. There are roughly 1,500 myosin filaments and 3,000 actin filaments per muscle fiber. Emanating from both Z bands are the long, thin filaments of actin. These stick out into the center of the sarcomere like posts, with one end embedded in the Z band. When a muscle is at rest, these two sets of actin filaments do not overlap, leaving a gap in the center of the sarcomere.

The Muscular System 339

Myosin filaments lie parallel to the actin in the center of the sarcomere and overlap with the actin on both ends. These myosin filaments are tethered in place to either Z band by a fine, thread-like filament called titin. The bands of actin and myosin within the sarcomere account for the striations that can be seen under the microscope. The region next to the Z band that contains only actin filaments is called the I band. The region between actin filaments in the center of the sarcomere is called the H zone. The entire span of the myosin is called the A band. The actin filaments are actually made up of three proteins. The globular actin proteins form into two chains that wrap around each other like two strands of twisted pearls. Winding around the actin are long, narrow filaments of a protein called tropomyosin. Tropomyosin fits into the groove between the two actin strands. At intervals, a smaller protein called troponin dots the outside of the actin/tropomyosin complex. Myosin is much thicker than actin and thus is sometimes referred to as the “thick filament.” It looks like a chain of golf clubs twisted around each other. Each golf club represents a single myosin molecule that doubles back on itself at the tip to form the head.

Anatomy of a Contraction
Skeletal Muscle
Each contraction results when a nerve delivers a message to the muscle. The smooth and cardiac muscles respond to nerves that are controlled by automatic reactions in the brain. Skeletal muscles move in response to nerves controlled by a person’s decisions. When a muscle gets a signal to contract, the globular myosin heads attach to the actin and pull, much like a team of people playing tug-ofwar. The heads flex, release, and reattach farther up the actin filament, then flex again. This action works like a ratchet pulling the myosin along the actin filament. Because the actin filaments are attached to the Z bands at both ends of the sarcomere, this action pulls the actin filaments toward each other and pulls the Z bands closer together to shorten the sarcomere. This mechanism is called the sliding filament model for muscle contraction. One result of the filaments sliding past each other is that the actin

340 Amy Adams

filaments overlap in the center of the sarcomere, causing the sarcomere to grow thicker. This overlap is what accounts for the muscle’s bulge when flexed. Although each individual sarcomere contracts only a small amount, when many sarcomeres contract at once, the muscle gets considerably shorter. When a sarcomere contracts, the A band (or myosin) remains the same size in the center of the sarcomere because the myosin does not change length. The H band, which is the gap between the actin filaments in the center of the sarcomere, disappears as the actin filaments are pulled toward the center of the sarcomere. Likewise, the I band disappears during a contraction because the space between the Z band and the myosin filaments grows shorter. Notice that as the sarcomere contracts, the filaments stay the same length, although the distance between the Z bands decreases. The strength of a contraction depends in part on how many muscle fibers (and their associated myofibrils) receive the signal to contract. When only a few fibers receive a signal, the contraction is relatively weak. When many fibers receive a signal, many more sarcomeres will contract, making for a much stronger contraction.

Cardiac Muscle
Cardiac muscle has actin and myosin arranged into striated sarcomeres, much like skeletal muscle, and it has a well-developed sarcoplasmic reticulum. Unlike skeletal muscle, which contains single long fibers, cardiac muscle fibers have many branch points and appear like a complex web. When this muscle contracts, the irregular shape of the branching fibers causes the heart muscle to twist and essentially wring blood out of the heart.

Smooth Muscle
Smooth muscles lack the orderly striations of skeletal and cardiac muscles. Instead, the actin filaments are arranged in a roughly parallel way and are attached to the ends of the cell. Myosin filaments slide the actin past each other and pull the ends of the cell closer together. In smooth muscle, this action causes the entire muscle sheet to contract.

The Muscular System 341

Unlike either skeletal or heart muscle, smooth muscle does not have a well-developed sarcoplasmic reticulum. When a signal from a nerve arrives at the muscle, calcium seeps in from outside the cell. This process is much slower than in the other types of muscles and does not allow as much calcium into the cell. Overall, the contraction takes longer to start and does not pull as hard as the other muscle types.

Contraction Strength
When a nerve sends to a skeletal muscle fiber the signal to contract, that fiber contracts with an all-or-none response. It cannot contract partway. This seems to contradict day-to-day experience, in which the strength of a contraction can be adjusted for the relatively little strength required to pick up a pencil or the large amount of strength needed to pick up a large weight. If each contraction used the muscle’s complete strength, then it would be nearly impossible to pick up a pencil in a controlled manner. It turns out that the amount the muscle contracts has to do with how many fibers receive a signal. One single muscle fiber cannot produce a contraction that is strong enough to do any significant work. For this reason, most single nerves have connections with about 150 fibers, each of which contracts when the nerve sends a signal. These groups of muscle fibers are called motor units. In areas like the hands, where fine control is needed for activities such as writing or playing a musical instrument, the motor units are composed of fewer fibers. Each nerve controls only a few fibers, providing the ability to make miniscule changes in how the muscle contracts. In muscles such as the hamstring, which provides the strength to bend the leg, the motor unit may be composed of a much larger number of fibers. Stimulation from nerves also controls how long a contraction lasts. When a doctor taps the knee to test a person’s reflexes, the leg twitches but does not stay contracted. That is because the muscle receives only a brief stimulation from the nerve. In order to keep the muscle contracted, the nerve sends a rapid volley of signals in quick succession. Although each signal stimulates only a single contraction, they add up so that the muscle can stay flexed to hold a paintbrush steady or hold a dance pose. Some muscles, such as those that help a person stand upright, always have some muscle fibers contracting in order to maintain posture. In order

342 Amy Adams

to prevent one group of muscle fibers from getting tired, the brain sends signals to different motor units so that the groups of fibers share responsibility for holding a person upright. This same rotation takes place if one holds a heavy object for a long time. At first, a few groups of muscle fibers will all get the signal to contract. But over time, if those fibers become tired, the brain recruits a new group of fibers to take over responsibility for contracting. After a long time of standing upright or holding a heavy book, the muscle will become tired, but no one group of muscle fibers is damaged because the motor units shared the load. One final factor that controls the strength of a contraction is the width of a single muscle fiber. Anyone who has been to a gym knows that the more a muscle gets used, the larger it is. This change has to do, in part, with the size of the individual muscle fiber, and therefore how many myofibrils are within the muscle cell. A thick muscle fiber with many myofibrils will respond with more strength in response to a signal from a nerve. In essence, that muscle cell has more myosin heads playing tug-of-war on the actin filaments, allowing that fiber to pull harder. Although the nerve will contact the same number of muscle fibers in a motor unit, the overall contraction will be stronger.

The Nerve/Muscle Connection
Skeletal Muscle
The signal to contract a muscle fiber comes from nerves. Each nerve starts at the spinal column, travels through the body, and then branches out so that the single nerve controls several muscle fibers in a motor unit. When the nerve is stimulated by the brain, an electrical signal travels the length of the nerve and reaches each of the many branched tips. At the tip, the electrical signal causes the nerve to release a chemical called acetylcholine into a gap between the nerve cell and the muscle fiber. The acetylcholine is also called a neurotransmitter because it transmits a signal from the nerve to the muscle. Acetylcholine travels across the space between the nerve and muscle and binds to a protein (called a receptor) located on the muscle cell membrane. The bound acetylcholine triggers a series of reactions to occur that propagate the electrical signal down the muscle fiber in a wave, transmitting the signal throughout the muscle fiber and across the

The Muscular System 343

T tubules almost instantaneously. Where the T tubules and sarcoplasmic reticulum come in close contact, the signal from the T tubules transfers to the sarcoplasmic reticulum. In response, the sarcoplasmic reticulum releases calcium into the muscle fiber. Keep in mind that because the nerve connects to many different muscle fibers, this same reaction takes place in each fiber at exactly the same time.

Heart Muscle
The same general principles hold true between skeletal muscle and heart muscle; however, there are some notable differences. In skeletal muscle, groups of fibers within the muscle contract as they are needed—the entire muscle rarely contracts at once. In the heart, on the other hand, the entire muscle contracts with each heartbeat. For this reason, the heart muscle does not have the web of nerves branching out to connect with each individual muscle fiber. A signal to contract reaches the heart at a specialized group of muscle cells located near the top back side of the heart. This group of cells is called the pacemaker. When a nerve delivers its neurotransmitter to the pacemaker region, these cells spread the signal across muscle cells in the top half of the heart. Unlike skeletal muscle fibers, where the signal stays within the single fiber, heart muscle fibers are connected with an intercalated disk that allows a signal to move easily from one muscle fiber to the next. Because the signal can spread so quickly, all of the fibers in this top region contract at the same time. This first phase of the heartbeat pushes the blood down into the lower portion of the heart, while the upper region refills with blood. When the pacemaker receives a signal to contract, it delivers the message to all the upper muscles and also sends the signal to a group of cells in the lower portion of the heart. This message is delayed slightly to give the upper muscles time to contract. When the lower region receives the message to contract, it spreads the signal to all the muscle fibers of the lower part of the heart. This contraction finishes the heartbeat and pushes blood out to the body. Chapter 2 on the circulatory system has more information about how the heart relays the signal to contract. Unlike the skeletal muscle, heart muscles can beat without a signal from the brain and can continue beating even outside of the body.

344 Amy Adams

Although the pacemaker cells generally relay a signal from a set of nerves, if the heart is disconnected from those nerves or if the nerves fail to fire, the pacemaker will continue sending a signal to contract at a regular rhythm. Mechanical pacemakers can back up the heart’s pacemaker to ensure that the heart continues to beat at a regular rhythm, even if the heart’s natural pacemaker fails to maintain the heartbeat.

Sliding Filament Model of Muscle Contraction
Skeletal and Heart Muscle
Researchers knew as early as 1883 that calcium was required in order for a muscle to contract. However, not until the 1960s did researchers understand what role calcium played when it was released from the sarcoplasmic reticulum. It turns out that when either the skeletal or heart muscle is relaxed, the globular myosin heads cannot attach to the actin filaments. The troponin/ tropomyosin complex blocks access to areas of the actin filament where the myosin head would normally bind. This physical block ensures that the muscle stays relaxed when there is no nerve signal. To prevent the muscle from contracting inappropriately, the muscle fibers actively move calcium from the cell into the sarcoplasmic reticulum, which winds throughout the cell. When a nerve signal sweeps across the muscle fiber and through the T tubules, it is translated to the sacroplasmic reticulum, which responds by releasing the stored calcium. Once in the muscle fiber, calcium binds to the troponin and causes the troponin to change shape. In this new shape, the troponin/tropomyosin complex shifts and reveals the site on the actin filament where myosin binds. Although the myosin can now bind to actin, it takes energy in order for the actin and myosin to pull past each other. This energy comes from a molecule called adenosine triphosphate (ATP) that is normally bound to myosin when the muscle is in a relaxed state. ATP is the form of energy that is produced primarily by the mitochondria. Although ATP itself can do no work, other proteins within the cell can break the ATP into a related molecule called adenosine diphosphate (ADP), and in the process

The Muscular System 345

release some energy. ATP is like a match: it does not release any energy when it sits in a box, but if someone strikes the match, it releases enough energy to burn fingers, melt wax, or heat a small drop of water. When the match is burned out, like ATP, it can no longer be used. In a relaxed muscle, myosin is bound to a molecule of ATP. When calcium enters the cell and troponin changes configuration, the myosin breaks the ATP into two units and in the process releases a small amount of energy. Myosin uses that energy to change shape and stretch out far up the actin molecule. The myosin then binds to the newly revealed binding site on actin and releases the ATP. Without ATP, the myosin relaxes back into a less energetic configuration while still bound to actin. This change in shape pulls the actin past the myosin. A new molecule of ATP then binds myosin, allowing myosin to break its bond with actin and resume its stretched-out shape, reaching farther up the actin filament (Figure 7.5).

Figure 7.5 Myosin-Actin Filament. Myosin slides along the actin filament using ATP. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

346 Amy Adams

The entire process repeats itself when myosin reattaches to the actin, relaxes, pulls the actin farther along, and binds a new molecule of ATP. With many myosin heads all attaching and flexing at different times, the process results in a slow, controlled contraction that lasts as long as ATP and calcium are present in the cell. When a nerve stops firing, calcium stops being released from the sarcoplasmic reticulum, and calcium that is in the muscle fiber is actively transported back into storage. The troponin/tropomycin/actin complex then reverts back to a shape that prohibits myosin attachment. The myosin then cannot reattach, and the contraction ends. The actin filaments slide past the myosin and come back to rest with the Z bands farther apart. One side effect of churning through ATP when a muscle contracts is that the process produces heat. People generally get hot when they exercise or use their muscles heavily; that is because each time myosin breaks ATP, a small amount of heat is released. When a person stops exercising and myosin no longer requires ATP, they eventually cool off. The body takes advantage of this phenomenon by shivering when a person gets cold. Using the muscles in this way acts as an internal heater to help warm the body. However, even with active shivering, the body cannot make enough heat to warm a person when he or she is very cold. Shivering is not considered to be a useful response, because it requires quite a bit of energy to shiver with very little actual heat being produced. Another example of the contraction process comes when an organism dies. After death, the body no longer makes ATP. Remember that ATP is needed in order for myosin to release from the actin filament after it relaxes. Once a muscle has used up its store of ATP, the myosin heads can no longer release from the actin, locking the muscles into a rigid state that is also known as rigor mortis. In this condition, all of the muscles are tightly contracted, and the body is very difficult to bend.

Smooth Muscle
Smooth muscle does not contain the regular sarcomeres of skeletal and heart muscles. Instead, the actin filaments span the length of the entire muscle cell. Myosin pulls on those actin filaments to pull the cell shorter. This alternate form of contraction is also regulated in a different way.

The Muscular System 347

In smooth muscle, the actin filament does not have a troponin/tropomysin complex preventing myosin from binding. Instead, calcium enters the cell and activates a set of enzymes. Those enzymes add a phosphate to myosin, changing its shape and allowing it to bind actin. These intermediary steps slow the time it takes for a smooth muscle to contract. Whereas heart and skeletal muscles contract immediately when calcium enters the muscle fiber, smooth muscle cells can take as long as a second to contract after calcium levels go up in the cell.

Types of Muscle Fibers
Fast-Twitch and Slow-Twitch Fibers
All skeletal muscle fibers have the same basic structure, but they do vary in subtle ways that can dramatically affect the performance of the muscle. Muscles contain two general types of fibers: slow-twitch (type I) and fasttwitch (type II). As their names imply, slow-twitch fibers contract slowly whereas fast-twitch muscles contract quickly after they receive a signal from a nerve. On average, slow-twitch fibers take about one-tenth of a second to reach their peak contraction, while fast-twitch muscles take about half that time. The difference between slow-twitch and fast-twitch muscle fibers lies in how quickly the myosin can cycle through ATP. The more quickly the myosin can use the ATP, the more quickly it can finish one stroke and attach to myosin for another pull. It turns out that myosin itself is basically the same in both types of fibers. The difference between the myosins lies in their ability to break ATP—an enzyme function called an ATPase. Slow-twitch and fasttwitch fibers have myosins with different ATPase activity. As one would imagine, slow-twitch fiber myosins have an ATPase that breaks ATP slowly, while fast-twitch fiber myosins have an ATPase that breaks ATP quickly. The two types of muscle fibers also differ in how quickly the contraction begins. Fast-twitch fibers have a much more extensive sarcoplasmic reticulum network than slow-twitch fibers, allowing these fibers to receive calcium more quickly after a nerve signal than slow-twitch muscles. In the

348 Amy Adams

time it takes a fast-twitch muscle to flood with calcium and begin a contraction, a slow-twitch muscle is still only slowly filling with calcium, and few troponin molecules have changed shape. Sometimes the difference between fast- and slow-twitch fibers is not absolute. Fast-twitch fibers can be classified as type IIa or type IIb. The type IIa fibers have fast myosin ATPase and can contract faster than slow-twitch fibers, but they also have more endurance than fast-twitch fibers. The type IIb fibers are the pure fast-twitch fibers. On average, fast-twitch fibers begin contracting five to six times faster than slow-twitch fibers. With their quick response and fast contractions, it is no surprise that sprinters have a higher percentage of fast-twitch muscle fibers than distance athletes

Roles for Slow-Twitch and Fast-Twitch Muscles
Slow-twitch and fast-twitch fibers play distinctly different roles in a muscle. In an average muscle, slow-twitch fibers make up about half the muscle, while fast-twitch fibers make up the other half. The photo shows a muscle section composed of both slow-twitch fibers (stained dark) and fast-twitch fibers. Keep in mind that people differ dramatically in their muscle composition and that fiber composition can differ even between muscles in a single person. For example, the solius muscle, which is deep inside the calf, is made up of almost exclusively slow-twitch fibers in everyone. Although the fiber composition does vary among individuals, a person who has predominantly fast- or slow-twitch muscles in the legs will have a similar composition in the arms and other muscles. This means that a person who is a particularly good sprinter when running is likely to be a sprinter rather than a distance athlete at swimming and biking as well. When a muscle first starts being used—for example, when a person begins walking—the slow-twitch muscles are the first to be called upon to contract. When these muscles fatigue, or when the contraction needs to be more powerful, the muscle will recruit a subset of the fast-twitch type Ia fibers. Only when both of these types of fibers grow tired or when great strength is needed does the muscle call upon the fast-twitch type IIb fibers. In order to control which type of muscle fiber contracts, each nerve connects to either all fast-twitch or all slow-twitch muscle fibers.

The Muscular System 349

The nerves themselves also differ. Nerves that connect to slow-twitch fibers are smaller and connect to about 10 to 180 fibers in a motor unit. A nerve for fast-twitch fibers is much larger and connects to as many as 300 to 800 fibers in a motor unit. With this arrangement, the muscle can recruit a very small number of slow-twitch muscles at a time, but can signal many more fast-twitch muscle fibers with a single nerve impulse. Because of this, a single fast-twitch motor unit contraction is much stronger than the contraction of a single slow twitch motor unit.

Types of Contractions
In general, when a muscle receives a signal to contract, the muscle grows shorter and causes a joint to either straighten or bend. Although this basic principle holds true, there are other types of muscle contraction. In most activities such as running and jumping, these different types of contraction work smoothly together to create the motion. However, it is worth discussing these actions separately to point out different mechanisms of moving the muscle.

Concentric Action
A concentric contraction is the motion that a person generally associates with muscle contraction. In a concentric action, the muscle contracts and pulls two bones closer together, causing the joint to open or close. Concentric action would occur if one holds a weight in the hand and bends the elbow to flex the biceps. The myosin heads can be thought of as a team of tug-of-war players and actin as their rope. Concentric action would occur when the team pulls and the rope moves toward them.

Isometric (Static) Action
Although people usually think about contracting a muscle to move a joint, there are other types of contractions. Imagine holding a weight that is too heavy to lift. Flexing the biceps muscle, the arm will remain straight even though the muscle is trying to contract. This is an isometric contraction. In an isometric contraction, the nerve sends a signal for the muscle to contract.

350 Amy Adams

The muscle fiber floods with calcium, and the myosin pulls on the actin filaments, but the fiber does not generate enough force to bend the arm. This type of contraction also occurs when holding a weight in a stationary position. The muscle is flexing even though the weight is not moving. Only enough muscle fibers are activated to hold the weight steady. Pushing on a wall is also an isometric action. In the same example, if a person grows tired of holding the weight and decides to lift the weight to a new position, the muscle will recruit extra muscle fibers to help lift the load. These extra fibers then provide enough strength to lift the weight, and the isometric action becomes a concentric action. Isometric action has to do with the weight of the object and the number of muscle fibers recruited to do the work. Going back to that same team of tug-of-war players, an isometric action would occur when the players pull with all their strength, but the rope does not budge. The word isometric is also used to describe a type of exercise. Isometric exercises involve flexing a muscle without moving the joint. Isometric exercises were made popular in the 1950s as part of the Charles Atlas program. Although people did become stronger using this program, their muscles were particularly stronger only when they were bent at the same angle as was used in the isometric exercises. Although isometric exercise is far from perfect, it has the advantage of requiring little equipment or room. For this reason, it is used by astronauts trying to maintain muscle strength in the weightlessness of space.

Eccentric Action
After bending the arm to lift a heavy weight (a concentric action), the arm must then straighten to let the weight down. Straightening the arm requires the biceps to maintain some contraction to control how quickly the arm straightens. This contraction that occurs as the muscle lengthens is called an eccentric contraction. Even though the myosin heads are pulling on the actin filaments, those actin filaments are moving farther away from each other within the sarcomere. In tug-of-war terms, an eccentric action would occur when the players pull with all their strength, but the rope moves away from them and toward the other team.

The Muscular System 351

Eccentric actions tend to damage the muscle fibers. Although this sounds like a bad thing, it can actually have positive results. After a session of exercise with eccentric action, the muscle fibers will become damaged and very sore. But they will adapt to just one session of eccentric exercise by increasing the number of sarcomeres per muscle fiber (essentially making each sarcomere shorter). With more sarcomeres per fiber, each sarcomere has to stretch less for the eccentric action, so the muscle sustains less damage. The other advantage to this is that the muscle will become quicker to respond to a signal because many more sarcomeres are doing the same work. This change lasts about 10 weeks—after that time, the muscle loses the adaptation and will once again be damaged by eccentric action. Most people have experienced pain associated with eccentric action when they run or walk downhill. When a person walks downhill, the thigh muscle contracts as the leg extends in front. Transferring weight onto the other leg, the knee lowers slightly to absorb the shock and in the process stretches the thigh muscle. Stretching the thigh muscle while the muscle contracts is a form of eccentric action that damages the muscle and can lead to pain and weakness over the next two to three days. Walking or running downhill in the next few weeks will cause much less pain in the following days because the muscles have adjusted to the eccentric action.

Energy Use by Muscles
Muscles require energy in the form of adenosine triphosphate (ATP) in order to contract. This ATP is used as an energy source for all the reactions that take place in the body—it is required to conduct signals along the nerves, to translate genes into proteins, to move molecules into and out of a cell, and to contract muscles, among other things. Each cell is self-sufficient when it comes to making ATP. A person cannot eat ATP and have the molecule transported to cells, nor can energy-starved cells take ATP from the bloodstream. Instead, each cell generates its own ATP from sugar, fat, or protein that comes either from the bloodstream or from the cell’s internal stores. For this reason, cells that require large amounts of energy, such as muscle cells, have to be extremely efficient at making ATP and at storing the starting materials.

352 Amy Adams

Chapter 10 on the respiratory system provides detailed information about the process of how cells convert food into ATP. This section focuses on those details of respiration that are important in order to understand how muscles get the energy to contract and what happens as muscle cells use up their energy stores.

Getting Energy from ATP
ATP belongs to a class of molecules called nucleotides—the same molecules that make up DNA. Like other nucleotides, ATP is made up of three parts: a sugar called ribose, a double ring of carbon atoms called adenine, and three phosphates attached like a tail. These phosphates are linked by high-energy bonds. When a cell needs energy, it breaks off one of the phosphates from the ATP to form adenosine diphosphate (ADP) and one free phosphate. Removing that phosphate releases enough energy to drive a cellular reaction such as flexing the myosin head. Because the remaining ADP is not a source of energy, a cell needs to constantly convert ADP back into ATP by adding a phosphate back to the tail—particularly if that cell requires a large amount of ATP to do its job, such as a muscle cell (Figure 7.6).

Figure 7.6 ATP and ADP. Conversion between ATP and ADP. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

The Muscular System 353

It may seem surprising that breaking off a piece of a molecule can result in usable energy. However, the process is similar to how cars get energy out of burning gasoline or how fires produce heat. In each case, breaking the bonds between two atoms releases energy. In a car engine, breaking the bonds of atoms in gasoline makes energy to drive the pistons that turns the motor. In a fire, that energy takes the form of heat; and in ATP, the energy is used for cellular reactions. In each of these examples, oxygen is needed in order to break the bonds in the molecule, and carbon dioxide is released.

Creating ATP
Generating ATP is a several-step process. The first phase takes place in the main cavity of the cell, whereas the second—and most ATP-producing— step takes place in a cellular component called the mitochondria. A mitochondrion is a small, bacteria-shaped component of the cell. Each cell has from one to many mitochondria, depending on how much energy it needs in order to survive. It is no accident that the mitochondria resemble bacteria—researchers think that hundreds of millions of years ago, free-living bacteria entered larger cells. These bacteria received food from the cell, and in return, they provided ATP. Over time, the bacteria lost their ability to exist without their host cell and became the mitochondria that cells have today. Mitochondria still have some remnants of their free-living bacterial ancestors, such as some DNA and genes that make bacterial proteins. The process mitochondria use to make ATP is similar to how free-living bacteria still function.

Glycolysis
The first step of producing ATP—called glycolysis—takes place outside of the mitochondria in the main compartment of the cell. This process requires a sugar called glucose as a starting material. The glucose molecule is a chain of six carbon atoms with some hydrogen and oxygen (C6H12O6). It can either come from the bloodstream, where glucose constantly circulates to feed cells, or from the muscle cell’s internal stores. During the glycolysis process, a series of reactions splits glucose into two halves, each of which is called pyruvate (in fact, the name glycolysis means “sugar splitting”). For each sugar that enters glycolysis, the process

354 Amy Adams

makes two molecules of pyruvate and two molecules of ATP. Although this is a net gain in ATP, two ATP molecules are not enough to fuel extensive exercise.

Citric Acid Cycle
The next step in the ATP-producing pathway takes place within the mitochondria. Because of their critical importance in creating energy for the muscle, mitochondria are located underneath the sarcoplasmic reticulum, overlaying the muscle fibers themselves. In this position, the mitochondria are poised to receive fat or sugar from the blood and convert that into ATP. In most cells, mitochondria exist as individual units that dot the interior of the cell. They are so important to a muscle cell, however, that they fuse to form a single large entity that spans the entire muscle cell. The process that takes place within the mitochondria is called the citric acid cycle—also called the Krebs cycle after Sir Hans Krebs (1900–1981), who first discovered the cycle in the 1930s. The cycle is also sometimes called the tricarboxylic acid (TCA) cycle because of the threecarbon molecule that continually moves through the cycle. The citric acid cycle begins when pyruvate from glycolysis loses one carbon atom, to become a two-carbon molecule called acetyl coenzyme A (acetyl CoA). This acetyl CoA then enters the mitochondria, where it goes through eight individual steps, producing carbon dioxide that gets breathed out, one more molecule of ATP, and two high-energy molecules called NADH and FADH2. These molecules have the most potential to generate ATP. Although each acetyl CoA that enters the citric acid cycle produces one ATP, every glucose produces two molecules of acetyl CoA. This means that the citric acid cycle produces two molecules of ATP per glucose, bringing the total up to four molecules of ATP for each glucose that goes through glycolysis and then into the citric acid cycle. Again, having four molecules of ATP is better than no ATP at all, but it is not enough to sustain long-term exercise such as jogging or swimming. Sugar is the most common fuel for making ATP, but cells can also get energy from fat in the form of free fatty acid in the blood. A fat molecule is a very long chain of carbon atoms. One common fat that is found in the cell is called palmitate, which is a chain of 16 carbons. When a fat

The Muscular System 355

molecule enters the cell, it is broken down in two-carbon units into acetyl CoA—the same molecule that sugar is converted into after glycolysis. This acetyl CoA then goes through the citric acid cycle and produces carbon dioxide, one ATP, and NADH and FADH2. With sugar, scientists can calculate how many ATPs come from each molecule. That is because each sugar has six carbons and sends two acetyl CoA molecules through the pathway. Fat molecules can be different lengths, so it is harder to calculate how many acetyl CoA molecules will be made from one fat molecule and therefore calculate how much ATP will be produced. Regardless, a fat molecule will produce the same amount of ATP, carbon dioxide, NADH, and FADH2 per acetyl CoA as each acetyl CoA from sugar—it is just a matter of how many acetyl CoA molecules can be generated from each fat molecule. The difference in how fat and sugar molecules enter the citric acid cycle helps explain why a gram of fat has so many more calories than a gram of sugar. A calorie is essentially a measure of how much energy that food contains. From each six-carbon sugar, only four carbons go through the Krebs cycle (two molecules of two-carbon acetyl CoA). The remaining two carbons are breathed out as carbon dioxide. With fat, the entire molecule is broken down in two carbon chunks, so the entire molecule is used to create ATP. Because the entire weight of the fat molecule goes to making energy, it can provide more energy per weight than sugar. This translates into more calories per gram on a food label. The benefits of burning fat over burning sugar for energy is not lost on muscle cells. As muscles become highly trained, they also become better at using fat for energy.

Electron Transport
The final phase of ATP production involves the NADH and FADH2 that were made during both the citric acid cycle and glycolysis. These molecules both carry extra electrons that are in a high-energy state. They transfer their electrons to a series of proteins that are lodged in the membrane of the mitochondria. Together, these proteins are called the electron transport chain. They form a continuous path for electrons, picking up the electrons from NADH and FADH2, and transferring them down the chain.

356 Amy Adams

This step leaves the NADH and FADH2 short on electrons. The depleted molecules go back to the citric acid cycle, where they pick up new highenergy electrons that can once again be donated to the electron transport chain. In the final step of the electron transport chain, the electrons combine with oxygen in the mitochondria to form water. Oxygen is essential to this step. Without oxygen, electrons pile up in the electron transport chain, and transport stops. When this happens, the citric acid cycle also grinds to a halt, pyruvate stops being imported into the mitochondria, and all the ATP must be made by glycolysis. The point of moving electrons along the mitochondrial membrane is not simply to convert an oxygen into water—at each step of the chain, the same reaction that transfers the electron to the next protein also transports hydrogen ions from inside the mitochondrial membrane to the outside of the membrane. These hydrogens build up on the outside of the membrane like water behind a dam. When the mitochondria releases the hydrogen ions back inside (through a molecule called the ATP synthetase), those hydrogens do the equivalent of the spinning wheels inside a dam. In dams, the spinning wheels make electricity that powers homes. In a cell, unleashing the dam produces about thirty-two molecules of ATP per sugar molecule. The process of producing ATP through the electron transport chain is called oxidative phosphorylation. The entire process of breaking down sugar in glycolysis, sending pyruvate into the mitochondria, and transporting electrons down the electron transport chain is shown in Figure 7.5.

The Importance of Oxygen
Only 4 of 36 total molecules of ATP come from glycolysis and the citric acid cycle, while the remaining 32 molecules come from oxidative phosphorylation. Oxidative phosphorylation is a rich source of ATP, as long as the mitochondria receive a steady supply of oxygen. The oxygen used in the electron transport chain accounts for why a person’s breathing and pulse increase when they exercise. If a person cannot deliver enough oxygen to the muscles, then the electron transport chain shuts down, and the muscle receives only the paltry amount of

The Muscular System 357

ATP made by glycolysis. For low-level exercise such as gardening, a person will breathe slightly harder than usual in order to provide the muscle cells with enough oxygen for their slightly increased ATP demands. A person in a swimming race, on the other hand, must breathe very hard and pump new oxygen-containing blood to the muscles very quickly to keep up with the muscle’s high demand for ATP (Figure 7.7). Exercise that takes place through ATP made by oxidative phosphorylation is called aerobic exercise (aerobic means “with oxygen”). Exercise that takes place when oxygen is limited and all ATP comes from glycolysis is called anaerobic exercise (anaerobic means “without oxygen”). Once a person is done exercising, his or her breathing and heart rate stay elevated for several minutes even though the muscles are no longer using ATP. This happens because the muscle cells need to replenish their supply of stored-up ATP. A person will continue breathing faster than

Figure 7.7 Overview of energy production from glucose. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

358 Amy Adams

usual until the muscle has enough ATP stored up to act as a buffer against future bursts of exercise.

Sources of Energy
Cells in the body can convert sugars, fat, or protein from the bloodstream into ATP. Although the bloodstream provides a continuous source of fuel, muscles also store their own fuel in the form of molecules called creatine phosphate and glycogen (Figure 7.8).

Creatine Phosphate
Researchers knew from early experiments that a backup energy source must exist in muscles. In these experiments, Eggleton and Eggleton removed a piece of muscle but kept the nerve intact so that it could still stimulate the muscle to contract. When they gave that muscle chemicals

Figure 7.8 ATP Production. ATP produced from glycolysis, the citric acid cycle, and electron transport. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

The Muscular System 359

to prevent either glycolysis or oxidative phosphorylation, and then stimulated the nerve, the muscle could still contract. This result told the researchers that the muscle must have some way to regenerate ATP that did not include either glycolysis or oxidative phosphorylation. In 1927 the researchers identified this short-term energy store as a molecule called creatine phosphate. Creatine phosphate serves as a reservoir for phosphates that can be added to ADP to regenerate ATP. When the cell is at rest and making excess ATP, then the ATP will transfer one phosphate to creatine to make creatine phosphate, converting the ATP to ADP. (The ADP receives a new phosphate through glycolysis or oxidative phosphorylation and is converted back into ATP.) When a person begins exercising—for example, by suddenly standing up and beginning to walk briskly—the muscles do not have enough time to ramp up ATP production. These muscles will use up all the available stored ATP in about two seconds. That is less time than is needed for the muscle to begin producing energy through glycolysis and oxidative phosphorylation. During the lag time between when muscles use up stored ATP and when new ATP can be created, the creatine phosphate donates phosphate back to ADP to regenerate ATP and maintain energy for a contraction. By the time the cell depletes its store of creatine phosphate, the mitochondria have begun churning out a fresh supply of ATP. When the exercise ends, the muscles refill the bank of creatine phosphate to be used at a later time. This refueling can happen on the order of a few minutes, which is why a sprinter or weight lifter can do several repetitions of creatine phosphate–depleting exercise with only a few minutes to recover.

Glycogen
After eating a meal, digestive enzymes in the stomach and small intestine break down food into sugars, protein, and other nutrients that are absorbed into the blood from the small intestine. For about an hour after eating a meal, the blood has a lot of sugar in the form of glucose, which the cells of the body take up and use to produce ATP or store for later use. However, the body eventually uses up all that sugar and must turn to another source of energy.

360 Amy Adams

Cells of the liver and muscle save sugar to use when supplies are limited between meals. They both take up excess sugar when it is plentiful and convert it into chains of six-glucose molecules called glycogen. In the muscle, the sarcoplasmic reticulum serves as a reservoir for this glycogen. When the muscles need energy, they can convert the glycogen back into sugar and feed that sugar into the energy-producing pathway to produce ATP. The liver releases its glycogen as sugar into the blood to keep a steady supply of sugar available to other cells in the body, including the brain. Where creatine phosphate provides a short burst of energy for cells, it is quickly depleted. After the creatine phosphate is used up, the muscles turn to glycogen stores to create new ATP. In most cases, this stored glycogen will provide enough energy for any activity the muscle needs to accomplish, such as walking, running, or housecleaning.

Fat
When blood sugar levels are high after a meal, liver and muscle cells are not the only ones planning ahead. Fat cells take up sugar and convert it into a form of fat called a triglyceride, which the cell stores as a single, large droplet for later use. This fat is a reserve against the future when the body needs fuel and all the creatine phosphate and glycogen are used up. The fat cells then release the stored fat into the blood in a form called a fatty acid, which the mitochondria can convert into ATP. In addition to fatty acids in the blood, muscles cells store tiny droplets of fat that they can use during exercise. Although the muscles use creatine phosphate, glycogen, and fat more or less in sequence, it is important to note that the body almost always has some sugar and some fatty acid present in the blood at any time. Muscles will also use these fuel sources in different quantities under some conditions. As an example, highly trained endurance athletes rely more heavily on fat for energy—an adaptation that makes the muscle far more efficient at getting the most energy out of the lowest-weight fuel source. Moreover, the brain can only survive on sugar, so for normal brain function, there must always be some sugar in the blood.

The Muscular System 361

Protein
Most food is made up of sugars (carbohydrates), fat, and protein. Although the body stores sugar and fat for later use, it does not store excess protein. Instead, the protein subunits (called amino acids) are taken up from the bloodstream and used to build new proteins in cells. Some of that protein can also be taken up by liver cells and converted into sugar that then fuels ATP production in cells or is converted into fat by fat cells. Protein in the bloodstream is very rarely used as an energy source. During starvation, the body may break down existing proteins and use that to fuel the production of ATP. But in a normal situation, protein contributes only about 5 percent of the fuel to make ATP. Some protein subunits can be broken down into acetyl CoA and fed directly into the citric acid cycle. Other subunits feed in partway through the cycle and only produce some of the ATP, NADH, and FADH 2 that are normally made in the process.

Regulating the Fuel Source
Which source of energy the muscle cell uses depends on both what type of work the muscle is performing and what energy source is available. For short, intense work, the muscle will rely on creatine phosphate and muscle glycogen. But for longer work, it may rely on a combination of muscle glycogen, sugar and fatty acids from the blood, and even protein. A number of factors determine what energy source a muscle uses, including diet, caffeine, hormones, and the environment.

Sugar Availability
After exercise that uses up all of the stored glycogen—such as running a 10-kilometer race—it takes about 24 hours before the muscles can refill their glycogen supplies. If the person uses the muscles before they have replenished the glycogen supplies, the muscle will have to rely more heavily on fat for energy. People who eat a high-fat diet will have more fat than sugar available in the blood and will likely use fat more extensively to generate ATP.

362 Amy Adams

Caffeine
One of caffeine’s many side effects is that it causes fat cells to release fatty acids into the blood. With higher blood concentrations of fatty acids, the muscles will rely more on fat and less on stored glycogen for energy. The effect is particularly relevant in the first 20 or so minutes of exercise, when muscles usually use very little fat. By drinking caffeine before an event, athletes can increase their endurance by using fat for energy early on and sparing the muscle glycogen for later.

Hormones
A combination of hormones in the body regulates the sugar and fat supplies to ensure that the muscles have a steady supply of fuel. Hormones such as adrenaline—which the body secretes under times of stress and during exercise—cause the body to release more fatty acids and therefore to use fatty acids for energy in the muscles. Adrenaline also causes the liver to break stored glycogen into glucose and release that into the blood. Two other key hormones regulate how sugar is used by the body. The pancreas releases insulin after a meal when sugar levels are high. During this time, muscles take up sugar to store as glycogen and are more likely to use sugar to make energy. When sugar levels fall, the pancreas stops making insulin and instead makes glucagon. Glucagon causes the fat cells to release fatty acids and the liver cells to release glucose. During exercise, the body produces additional glucagon, which further increases the amounts of fat and sugar that are available to the muscles. For more information about how insulin and glucagon regulate blood sugar levels, see Chapter 4 on the endocrine system. (See also Sidebar 7.2.) With so many hormones all telling the liver to release glucose during exercise, blood glucose levels can be as much as 50 percent higher after a short period of exercise. This phenomenon is in part responsible for why people often do not feel hungry immediately after exercising. For most athletic events, the liver releases glucose at about the same rate that the muscles take it up. But for very long events, the liver may run out of glycogen and not be able to keep pace with the muscle’s glucose demands. At this time, the muscles rely entirely on fat or on food such as energy bars or gels.

The Muscular System 363

SIDEBAR 7.2

Exercise Improves Type 2 Diabetes
To take advantage of the glucose in the bloodstream, muscles that are exercised regularly become better able to take up glucose from the blood. This effect is also why people with type 2 diabetes are encouraged to exercise regularly. In type 2 diabetes, people become increasingly resistant to insulin, which is the hormone that helps cells of the body take up sugar. With the cells not able to take up sugar, blood sugar levels increase and cause damage to the eyes, kidneys, nerves, and blood vessels. Through regular exercise, muscles in people with type 2 diabetes take up more sugar from the blood, lowering blood sugar levels and helping to prevent long-term damage to the organs. Exercise can also cause a person to lose weight, which also helps control type 2 diabetes.

Environment
Heat and altitude can both cause the body to use carbohydrates for energy and to rely more on glycolysis for ATP. At higher altitudes, the air contains less oxygen, and therefore less oxygen is present in a person’s bloodstream. With limited oxygen, the muscles cannot generate enough ATP through oxidative phosphorylation and must instead use glycolysis for the remaining ATP. This effect can leave a person winded and unable to keep exercising as long as would be possible at lower altitudes. A similar phenomenon happens in the heat. The body diverts blood to the skin where it can radiate heat, but this takes blood volume away from the muscles. With less oxygen, fatty acid, and sugar being delivered, the muscles must use stored glycogen to make energy through glycolysis. As with exercise at a high altitude, a person exercising in the heat will have less endurance than on a cooler day when the muscles generate ATP though oxidative phosphorylation.

Energy Use during Sprint and Endurance Exercise
During long-distance events such as a 10-kilometer running race, the muscles receive enough oxygen from the blood and generate ATP through

364 Amy Adams

oxidative phosphorylation. In one study, researchers found that marathon runners rely 99 percent on aerobic forms of generating ATP, whereas in a 100-meter sprint, 90 percent of the energy comes from anaerobic processes. An 800-meter sprint lies between these two extremes, with 60 percent of energy coming from anaerobic means.

Generating Energy in Different Muscle Types
As mentioned earlier, there are two general types of muscle fibers—slow twitch and fast twitch. The slow-twitch fibers are specialized for endurance use, while fast-twitch muscles excel at short, intense bursts of strength. With their respective specialization, the two muscle types differ in how they generate energy and how effectively they use oxygen. (See the previous section, “Energy Use during Sprint and Endurance Exercise.”)

Energy in Slow-Twitch Muscles
Muscles use slow-twitch fibers for sustained exercise such as walking, dancing, or even running a marathon. These activities rarely involve large amounts of strength but do require the muscle to contract repeatedly over a long time. In order to generate enough energy to contract over such a long time period, slow-twitch muscles must be very effective at delivering oxygen so the muscles can maintain oxidative phosphorylation. As mentioned earlier, any type of endurance exercise that requires large amounts of oxygen is called aerobic exercise. Blood vessels threading throughout the slow-twitch muscle fibers ensure that the muscle gets enough oxygen to make ATP effectively. These blood vessels bring oxygen from the lungs and return carbon dioxide created through the citric acid cycle. Blood vessels also take up water that is made in the final step of the electron transport chain. In addition to having blood vessels bring in plenty of oxygen, slow-twitch muscles contain a protein called myoglobin that is extremely effective at removing oxygen from the blood. This myoglobin gives the fiber a red color, which was originally used by physiologists to distinguish between fast- and slow-twitch muscle fibers.

The Muscular System 365

To make the best use of all the oxygen coming in from the blood vessels, slow-twitch muscles contain many more mitochondria than fasttwitch muscles. In fact, in some muscle fibers, these mitochondria make up 20 percent of the muscle fiber volume.

Energy in Fast-Twitch Muscles
Fast-twitch muscles are used for bursts of speed—exercise that ends before the heart can begin beating faster to deliver more oxygen to the muscles. In order to generate enough ATP for the contraction without being able to rely on the electron transport chain, fast-twitch muscle fibers are adapted to be extremely efficient at glycolysis. They have fewer blood vessels and mitochondria than slow-twitch muscles and store more creatine phosphate in order to replenish the ATP supplies. Fast-twitch muscles also contain more of the molecules that carry out the process of glycolysis and store far more glycogen than slow-twitch muscles to ensure a continuous supply of sugar to feed into glycolysis. As discussed earlier, there are two types of fast-twitch muscles—type IIa and type IIb. Type IIb fibers are the ones that are most specialized for fast, sprint-type work. They have the fewest mitochondria, least myoglobin, and most glycolysis enzymes of any muscle fiber. The type IIa fibers are somewhere between the slow-twitch fibers and type IIb fibers. Their myosin heads pull and release the actin filaments quickly, like the IIb fibers, and they are used for sprinting rather than endurance exercise. They have more mitochondria than IIb fibers, however, and are also darker in color because they contain some myoglobin. These fibers often serve as a backup when the slow-twitch muscles become fatigued. Table 7.3 shows the differences between the different muscle types. (See also Sidebar 7.3.)

Energy Use in Cardiac Muscle
The previous material has dealt primarily with how skeletal muscles generate and use energy. However, cardiac and smooth muscles also have characteristic ways of generating ATP. Cardiac muscles resemble slowtwitch skeletal muscles in that they must continuously perform a

366 Amy Adams
TABLE 7.3 Differences between Muscle Fiber Types
Slow-twitch Contraction speed Number of mitochondria Glycolysis enzymes Citric acid cycle enzymes Creative phosphate levels Motor unit strength Endurance Slow High Low High Low Low High Fast-twitch IIa Fast Medium High Medium High High Moderate Fast-twitch IIb High Low High Low High High Low

low-intensity contraction. Each cardiac muscle cell has mitochondria packed between the muscle fibers where they can provide a steady supply of energy. Near the mitochondria, the heart cells also have droplets of fat that the cell uses almost exclusively for energy.

SIDEBAR 7.3

Light and Dark Meat Represent Fast- and Slow-Twitch Muscles
The differences between fast- and slow-twitch muscles are noticeable by the naked eye as light and dark meat in chicken or turkey. The dark meat on the thighs is juicier because of all the fatty membranes around the blood vessels and mitochondria. The difference in color comes from a protein called myoglobin that helps the muscle extract oxygen from the blood. In poultry, the thighs are used all day long for walking and standing, so these muscles have a large number of slow-twitch fibers and are dark in color. The lighter muscle that makes up the breast meat is used for short bursts of flying—exercise that takes a lot of strength but does not last long. This muscle is dryer because it has less fatty cell membranes surrounding the blood vessels and mitochondria and is lighter in color because it has less myoglobin.

The Muscular System 367

The heart absolutely relies on having a steady blood supply to provide oxygen. During a heart attack, one or more of the blood vessels that bring blood to the heart muscles gets blocked. Even a temporary loss of oxygen can prevent the heart from making enough ATP and contracting normally, cutting off the blood supply to other parts of the body including the brain. The heart is unable to compensate for the lack of oxygen by calling on creatine phosphate stores or by making ATP through glycolysis.

Energy Use in Smooth Muscle
Smooth muscle has a different way of contracting than either skeletal or heart muscle. In these cells, the myosin heads cycle through ATP about 10 times more slowly than the myosin in heart and skeletal muscle. This makes the smooth muscle very slow to contract, but once it is contracted, the muscle burns through ATP very slowly and can sustain the contraction for a long time. This quality makes smooth muscle particularly good at squeezing, such as squeezing food through the digestive system or maintaining a blood vessel’s diameter. With its limited ATP needs, smooth muscle has few special adaptations for generating ATP. Like all the cells of the body, smooth muscle cells contain mitochondria that generate ATP from the sugar or fat circulating in the blood. Smooth muscle cells do not store their own energy supplies, nor do they have excess mitochondria. In smooth muscle cells, as in most cells of the body, the mitochondria do tend to congregate near the actin and myosin fibers where the ATP is most needed.

Muscular Adaptation to Exercise
It does not take an exercise physiologist to tell the difference between a person who works out and a person who does not. Those who get regular exercise tend to be leaner and have better-defined muscles than those who do not exercise. The lower weight is a function of burning calories while exercising. But other differences, such as stronger, better-defined muscles, are a result of molecular changes that take place within the

368 Amy Adams

muscle. Some of these changes are visible, but others are invisible adaptations that make the muscles and heart better able to run, bike, row, or lift weights. The muscle fiber type can change, fibers themselves grow larger, muscles contain more ATP-producing enzymes, and the muscles become better able to use oxygen. Remember that there are two types of exercise: anaerobic and aerobic. In aerobic exercise, such as biking, most of the energy comes from oxidative phosphorylation. In anaerobic exercise, such as weight lifting or sprinting, a person cannot deliver enough oxygen to the muscle and so the muscle relies primarily on glycolysis for ATP. Whether a person does aerobic or anaerobic training controls what types of changes take place in the muscle.

Muscle Adaptations to Anaerobic Exercise
Gains in Muscle Strength
Regular anaerobic exercise causes muscles to grow larger and more defined. In the past, researchers thought that the increase in muscle size led directly to an increase in strength. Keep in mind that during this time, most athletes were men who did indeed develop bulky muscles as they gained strength, and weight-lifting champions do have larger muscles than ordinary people. Together, these factors build a compelling case that muscle strength and size are related. To some extent, these observations do hold true—the men’s and women’s weight-lifting champions do all have extremely large muscles. However, studies in women and children show that more is going on than just an increase in muscle size. Even in the first eight weeks of training, when untrained men and women first begin lifting weights, the muscles become much stronger. However, during this time, their muscles do not increase noticeably in size. This is especially true of women and children, who can increase their strength the same percentage as men without showing the same increase in muscle girth. From this, it appears that muscle size does contribute to muscle strength, but that other factors also play a role in determining a muscle’s strength.

The Muscular System 369

Hypertrophy
When a muscle grows large in response to weight training, that gain in size is called hypertrophy. Immediately after exercising, a muscle is filled with fluid and feels pumped up. This hypertrophy lasts only a few hours after exercise. True muscle hypertrophy lasts as long as the muscle is in regular use, but decreases if the muscle is not used regularly.

Increases in Muscle Fiber Size
For a long time, scientists thought that people were born with a certain number of muscle fibers in each muscle and that this number could not change. If that were the case, then all muscle hypertrophy would be due to increases in fiber size, because no new fibers could be formed. One compelling reason to believe this is that scientists can look under a microscope and see larger individual muscle fibers in a person who has trained on weights for many weeks compared to that same person before they began training. The individual fibers grew larger, leading to an overall larger muscle. The addition of new actin and myosin filaments within a muscle fiber happens because the muscles produce new protein. At any given time, a muscle is both building new protein and breaking down old protein. The balance between these processes keeps a muscle at a certain size. Regular strength training increases the amount of new protein that muscles make and decreases the amount of protein that is broken down, leading to a net gain in muscle mass. This balance between protein being made and being broken down is also altered by the hormone testosterone, of which men have much more than women. Testosterone increases the amount of protein that muscles make. This accounts, in part, for why men develop larger muscles than women do. Some experiments lead scientists to think that endurance athletes rely exclusively on increases in muscle fiber size to gain their increases in strength, while sprint athletes rely very little on increases in fiber size. When researchers train animals to press a lever several times to receive food, those animals have the same number of muscle fibers before and after training, but those fibers grew larger. However, they

370 Amy Adams

mainly see this effect in animals who are trained to press light weights and must repeat the movement many times throughout the day—much like endurance training.

Increases in Muscle Fiber Number
Increases in muscle fiber number seem to happen mainly in athletes who train on heavy weights. When cats were trained to press a very heavy lever to get their food, researchers saw muscle fibers in the process of splitting in two, generating new fibers. They also counted the muscle fibers and found more individual fibers after training than before, probably as a result of fibers splitting to create additional fibers. Although it is hard to count the exact number of fibers in a person’s muscle, researchers can look at the overall size of muscle fibers. When they compare muscle fibers in bodybuilders and people who are fit but have done no weight training, they find that the muscle fibers are about the same size. Because the bodybuilder’s overall muscles are much larger, the researchers conclude that the bodybuilders must have more fibers in total. One reason that strength training increases the number of muscle fibers may have to do with how the muscles respond to lifting heavy weights. After a heavy weight-lifting session, muscle fibers have some damage due to the stress of lifting heavy weights. In the process of repairing those damaged cells, new fibers can be formed.

Strength Increases Due to Exercise
Scientists are not precisely sure how muscles become stronger without becoming bigger, such as in the case of women or children or during the early weeks of training in men. Several studies have led exercise physiologists to believe that changes in the nervous system may explain these increases in strength. In one study, participants did strength-training exercises with one arm for eight weeks. At the end of the study, the participants had grown 25 percent stronger in the trained arm, as expected. But these people were also about 15 percent stronger in the untrained arm. This result tells researchers that factors in addition to muscle strength must have changed in response to exercise.

The Muscular System 371

One explanation is that when the muscle of a trained person contracts, more motor units contribute to the contraction. Because a person is using the entire muscle, he or she can lift a heavier weight. This could also explain how people pull off remarkable feats of strength when they are under pressure, such as lifting people out from under cars or freeing themselves when pinned under heavy objects. The muscle may contract all motor units at one time, making the muscle significantly stronger than when only a few motor units contribute to a contraction. Another explanation could be that when a trained muscle flexes, the opposite muscle does not resist as much. For example, when a trained person does an arm curl using the biceps muscle, the opposing triceps muscle relaxes and allows the biceps to flex (see the earlier discussion in this chapter of how muscles work in antagonistic pairs). According to this theory, the triceps muscle in an untrained person does not relax as much, so it takes more strength on the part of the biceps to overcome the resistance. If this explanation were true, then training with one arm causes the brain to alter how it instructs the triceps of both arms. Scientists have also seen changes in the junction between the nerves and the muscle in people who are highly trained. Although they still do not know how those changes relate to muscle strength, it is possible that these changes allow the muscle to contract more strongly in response to a given nerve signal. At this time, scientists do not have enough evidence to figure out which explanation is right. It could be that all of these changes take place to some extent, each contributing to the overall gain in strength.

Muscle Adaptations to Aerobic Exercise
Increased Ability to Use Oxygen
Whereas anaerobic exercise such as weight lifting or sprinting causes the muscles to grow larger, aerobic exercise causes changes in the way the muscle uses energy. Keep in mind that aerobic exercise such as swimming or rowing does not use a muscle’s full strength, but that muscle must be able to contract repeatedly over a long time. The muscles will become

372 Amy Adams

stronger and larger than in a person who does not work out at all, but they never achieve the size or strength of a weight lifter’s muscles. The hurdle for endurance athletes is delivering enough oxygen to the muscles so the muscles can make ATP for contraction. Sidebar 7.4 takes a closer look at when exercise-related muscular injuries.

SIDEBAR 7.4

When Exercising Hurts
With obesity-related diseases on the increase in the United States, more people are staying active and exercising regularly. But according to the National Institute of Arthritis and Musculoskeletal and Skin Diseases, more people are now suffering sports injuries. Those people who overdo a certain exercise or who do not train or warm up properly are particularly vulnerable to sports injuries. Most of these injuries can be treated effectively, and physical activity can resume with proper rest and recovery. In fact, many sports injuries can be avoided with the proper prevention measures. Common sports injuries related to the muscular system often involve sprains and strains, as well as compartment syndrome and Achilles’ tendon injuries. Here are some details on each of these injuries:

Sprain: This injury occurs when there is a stretch or tear in a ligament— a band of connective tissues that connect the ends of bones. Sprains can range in severity. Ligaments can be simply stretched, resulting in inflammation, tenderness, and/or pain. In severe cases, ligaments can be torn, which can make it difficult to move the affected limb or joint. The most areas of the body most vulnerable to sprains are the ankles, knees, and wrists. Strain: This injury involves a muscle or tendon—the connective tissue joining muscles to bones. Strains occur when the muscle or tendon is pulled, twisted, or torn as a result of overstretching or overcontraction. Symptoms of this injury include pain, muscle spasm, and loss of strength.

The Muscular System 373

Compartment Syndrome: A compartment is composed of tough membranes located throughout the body. Within these compartments are muscles, nerves, and blood vessels. When a muscle is injured and becomes inflamed, the swollen muscles can expand, filling the compartment. This swelling can cause interference with the nerves and blood vessels in the compartment, resulting in a painful condition known as compartment syndrome. This can be caused by an acute hit to certain parts of the body, or ongoing overuse injuries that can occur in sports such as long-distance running. Achilles Tendon Injuries: The Achilles tendon connects the calf muscle to the back of the heel. Injuries in this area can occur when the tendon is stretched too far, torn, or irritated in some manner. Achilles tendon injuries can cause severe and sudden pain. These injuries often occur among people who do not warm up properly prior to exercising. There have also been studies linking Achilles tendon injuries to professional athletes who are required to quickly accelerate and jump, such as in football and basketball.

Blood Supply
Capillaries run throughout the muscle fibers, delivering oxygen and nutrients to the muscles. As people train for endurance events, their muscles accumulate more capillaries to meet the energy needs. Over time, trained people can have as many as 15 percent more capillaries in their muscles than untrained people.

Myoglobin
Remember that myoglobin in the muscle takes oxygen from the blood and delivers it to the mitochondria. An increase in capillaries will not do the muscle any good unless that muscle contains enough myoglobin to carry the increase in oxygen. The slow-twitch fibers that are most commonly used for endurance activities already contain more myoglobin than fasttwitch muscles. With training, slow-twitch fibers will contain as much as 75 percent more myoglobin than untrained fibers.

374 Amy Adams

Mitochondria
The mitochondria produce ATP for the cell, using oxygen to manufacture ATP and water. The amount of ATP that can be made in a muscle cell depends, in part, on how many mitochondria that cell contains. As people do aerobic training, both the number of mitochondria within their slowtwitch muscle fibers and the size of those mitochondria increase. Fast-twitch type IIa fibers normally contain some mitochondria, though not as many as in slow-twitch fibers. With aerobic exercise, these type IIa muscle fibers also accumulate more, larger mitochondria. This increase helps those fast-twitch type IIa fibers contribute to the aerobic exercise.

Enzymes
Within the muscle cells, sugars go through glycolysis, which produces pyruvate. This pyruvate is converted into acetyl CoA, which then enters the mitochondria where the citric acid cycle uses that acetyl CoA to generate NADH and FADH2, which eventually leads to ATP production. The end result—producing ATP—relies on the citric acid cycle working at optimal speed. To make sure the cycle can produce enough NADH and FADH2 to meet a muscle fiber’s energy needs, muscles in trained athletes contain more of the enzymes that are used during the citric acid cycle. The activity of these enzymes increases throughout aerobic training. People who get even a small amount of aerobic exercise have much more enzyme activity in their muscles than in people who do not train. Highly trained people can have as much as double the citric acid cycle enzyme activity of untrained people.

Changes to the Heart Muscle during Exercise
With all the changes that take place to skeletal muscle as a result of training, it is easy to overlook the heart muscle. However, the heart plays a key role in a person’s exercise performance and also undergoes some changes through exercise. These changes help the heart pump more blood to the muscles. The regular blood supply is critical—the blood brings oxygen and fuel to the muscle and clears waste and lactic acid. Without sufficient blood flow, the muscles would not be able to maintain their peak contraction.

The Muscular System 375

Heart Size
Through regular training, the heart muscle becomes larger, as do skeletal muscles. The heart is divided into four chambers, of which one (called the left ventricle) is primarily responsible for pumping blood containing oxygen out to the body. The muscles surrounding the left ventricle grow larger in endurance-trained athletes, and the chamber cavity grows larger to accommodate more blood. Resistance-trained athletes also have some increase in left-ventricle muscle thickness, though the chamber size remains about the same as in untrained people. The thickness of a person’s heart muscle directly correlates to their VO2max—endurance-trained athletes with a high VO2max also have thicker heart muscle walls, whereas sedentary people with a low VO2max have thinner heart muscles. A thicker heart muscle means a stronger contraction, pushing blood out to the muscles where it is needed. Many athletes notice this change in heart muscle strength by a lower resting heart rate. Because the heart muscle is stronger, it pumps more blood with each contraction. At rest, the heart can beat fewer times per minute and still distribute the same amount of blood as a weaker heart pumping at a fast rate. Untrained people often have a resting heart rate of between 65 to 80 beats per minute, though extremely sedentary people can have heart rates as high as 100 beats per minute. Trained athletes have been known to have resting heart rates as low as 28 to 40 beats per minute. The larger chamber size also contributes to an athlete’s lower heart rate. Trained athletes have more blood volume than sedentary people, so the chamber fills fuller per beat than in untrained people. The chamber also has more time to fill between the slower beats, further increasing the blood volume in the heart chamber. With these factors combined, athletes force much more blood out to the body with each beat than untrained people. In one study, the total volume of blood forced out by each heartbeat went up by almost 50 percent after a six-month training regime.

Heart Rate during Exercise
During exercise, the heart rate increases to send more blood to the muscles. When an athlete reaches a steady pace, such as the pace for a two-hour bike ride, the heart rate levels off and will stay about the same

376 Amy Adams

for the given amount of exercise. This heart rate is called the steady-state heart rate. If the athlete increases or decreases the pace, the steady-state heart rate will also increase or decrease. People who are in good physical condition will generally have a lower steady-state heart rate for the same amount of exercise as a person who is untrained. This lower heart rate is a result of the heart squeezing out more blood volume per heartbeat in trained people. For all-out exertion, that steady-state heart rate will reach a maximum that the heart cannot exceed. A person can reach the highest maximum heart rate at about age 10 to 15, and that maximum decreases by about one beat per minute per year. A person’s maximum heart rate can be approximated with the formula 220 − age (in years). So, a 40-year-old person would have a maximum heart rate of 220 − 40 = 180, or 180 beats per minute. This formula is simply an estimate—many people have heart rates that fall outside the calculated maximum. The decrease in maximum heart rate seems to happen as a result of how the signal to contract spreads across the heart. Even with regular exercise, which causes the muscle to contract with more force, a person’s maximum heart rate will decrease with age. This does not generally affect a person’s athletic performance for endurance-type events, because in these events, the heart rate rarely reaches its maximum. However, as people age, they may notice their sprint performance declining. People reach their maximum heart rate when sprinting—if the maximum heart rate is lower, a person will tire faster when sprinting.

Changes to Smooth Muscle during Exercise
When a person is resting in a chair, the muscles receive about 20 percent of the total blood flow, with the liver, kidney, and brain making up about 60 percent of the blood flow and the remaining blood distributed through the heart muscle, skin, and other tissues. During heavy exercise, the heart muscle continues to receive about 5 percent of the blood flow, while the skeletal muscle receives 80 to 85 percent of the total blood flow and the other organs receive severely restricted blood flow. This massive redistribution of blood arises due to changes in the smooth muscle lining that surrounds blood vessels.

The Muscular System 377

Blood leaves the heart through large vessels called arteries. These arteries branch out, sending offshoots to all regions of the body. When the blood reaches a tissue, such as a muscle or the kidneys, the arteries branch into a network of tiny vessels called capillaries. These capillaries then feed into veins that return blood from the organs back to the heart. All of these vessels are surrounded by sheets of smooth muscle that regulate the size of the vessel. When the smooth muscles contract, the vessels become narrow and carry less blood. Several signals direct when muscles surrounding blood vessels should contract. One of these is the level of oxygen in the surrounding tissue. Remember that muscles use up more oxygen as they increase their demand for ATP. Where oxygen levels are low, blood vessels open up to allow more blood into the region to supply fresh oxygen and fuel. At the beginning of exercise, signals throughout the body cause smooth muscle surrounding capillaries in the digestive system and other organs to constrict, reducing blood flow. At the same time, signals such as lower oxygen levels instruct capillaries in the muscle to expand, allowing more blood to the region. As exercise continues, more and more blood is redirected to the muscles. The redistribution of blood to the muscles is dependent, in part, on the blood supply needs of other tissues. For example, exercise too soon after a meal can result in not enough blood being directed to the muscles. In studies in both humans and other animals, eating a meal directly before exercise caused a 15–20 percent drop in blood flow to the muscles. This blood was redirected to the intestinal tract, where it was needed to help digest food. Many athletes avoid eating soon before exercise in order to have as much blood flow as possible available to the muscles.

Summary
There are three types of muscles in the human body. The first, the skeletal muscle, helps the body move, as they are attached to the skeleton; the second, smooth muscle, is an integral part of the internal muscles. The third type of muscle, cardiac, works to help the heart to function. Each of these muscles contract differently, and based on messages from different areas of the body. The smooth and cardiac muscles are directed by the

378 Amy Adams

autonomic nervous system, while the skeletal muscles respond to the central nervous system. Muscles require energy to function, and interacts with nerves to contract. Specifically, two types of muscular nerve fibers determine how muscles perform—fast-twitch and slow-twitch fibers. Muscles produce energy and take energy from various sources, including foods and drinks. Muscles also help us to maintain a healthy body through regular exercise. However, muscles adapt differently to anaerobic and aerobic exercising.

8
The Nervous System
Julie McDowell

Interesting Facts
• • • • • The average weight of an adult human brain is between 2.8 and 3.1 pounds (1,300 and 1,400 grams). The average weight of an elephant’s brain is 17.2 pounds (7,800 grams). The average number of neurons in the brain is 100 billion. The length of myelinated nerve fibers in the brain is between 93,200 and 112,000 miles (150,000 and 180,000 kilometers). The difference in the number of neurons in the brain’s left and right hemispheres: 186 million more neurons in the left hemisphere in comparison to the right hemisphere. Total surface area of the human brain’s cerebral cortex: 2.5 square feet (2,500 square centimeters). Total surface area of an elephant’s cerebral cortex: 6.8 square feet (6,300 square centimeters). Total number of neurons in the cerebral cortex: 10 billion.

• • •

379

380 Julie McDowell

• • •

Total volume of cerebrospinal fluid in the human body: 4.2–5.1 fluid ounces (125–150 milliliters). Half life of cerebrospinal fluid: 3 hours. Nerve impulses can travel from the brain at speeds up to 170 miles (274 kilometers) per hour.

Chapter Highlights
• • • • • • • • • • • Central nervous system Nerve cells Cells and energy production Synapses Neurotransmitters Nerve impulses Spinal cord and spinal nerves The brain: lobes and the cerebral cortex Peripheral and autonomic nervous system Sympathetic nervous system The senses

Words to Watch For
Acetycholine Adaptation Adenosine diphosphate (ADP) Adenosine triphosphate (ATP) Adrenaline Aerobic cell respiration Afferent nerves Autonomic nervous system Brain Brain stem Cell body Central nervous system Cerebellum Cerebral aqueduct Cerebral cortex Cerebrospinal fluid

The Nervous System 381

Cerebrum Choroid plexus Chromosomes Circadian rhythm Convergence Corpus callosum Cranial nerves Craniosacral division Cranium Cutaneous senses Cytoplasm Depolarization Divergence DNA Dopamine Dorsal root Dorsal root ganglion Effector Efferent nerve Efferent neuron Endocrine system Equilibrium Excitatory nerve Excitatory synapse Extracellular fluid Glucose Gray matter Growth hormonereleasing hormone Gyri Hypothalamus

Hypoxia Inhibitory nerve Inhibitory synapse Intermediolateral cell column Intracellular fluid Medulla Meninges Mitochondria Muscle spindle Myelin sheath Nerve Nerve fiber Nerve plexus Nerve tracts Neuroglia Neurolemma Neurons Neutrotransmitter Node of Ranvier Noradrenalin Norepinephrine Nucleus Occipital lobes Oligodendrocytes Organelles Parasympathetic division Peptides Peripheral nervous system

Polarization Pons Postganglionic neuron Postsynaptic process Preganglionic neuron Presynaptic process Projection Reflex Repolarization Sarcolemma Schwann cells Sensory nerve Sensory neuron Serotonin Somatic neuron Spinal nerves Spinal reflex Stimulus Stretch flex Sulci Sympathetic division Synapatic gap Synapse Thalamus Threshold level Ventral root Visceral neuron Visceral organs White matter

382 Julie McDowell

Introduction
The human body’s nervous system is divided into two parts: the central nervous system (CNS) and the peripheral nervous system (PNS). The CNS consists of the brain and the spinal cord, and the PNS consists of the cranial nerves (the brain’s 12 pairs of nerves) and the spinal nerves (31 pairs of nerves associated with the spinal cord). Also included in the PNS is the autonomic nervous system (ANS), which controls the “automatic” or involuntary movements of the body’s smooth muscles (found in the walls of tubes and hollow organs), cardiac muscles, and glands (see Figures 8.1 and 8.2 for a general overview of the organization of the nervous system and the somatic nervous system that controls voluntary movement). The two divisions of the ANS are the parasympathetic division, which dominates and controls the body during nonstressful situations, and the sympathetic division, which dominates and controls the body during stressful situations. Information is sent from the PNS to the brain, which serves as the activity headquarters of the CNS. Through the five senses (sight, smell, touch, hearing, and taste), the CNS detects a stimulus, Figure 8.1 The Nervous System. which is a change that prompts a The brain and nerve systems, response in a living organism. The including the spinal cord, make up brain then processes the transmit- the nervous system. While regulating ted information and initiates the movements, the nervous system also appropriate response or responses works to interpret sensory in the effector. An effector is an information. (Sandy Windelspecht/ organ, such as a muscle or gland, Ricochet Productions)

The Nervous System 383

Figure 8.2 The Spinal Cord. There are five categories of spinal nerves noted on top of the figure: the coccygeal, sacral, lumbar, thoracic, and cervical, which total 31 pairs of nerves. (Sandy Windelspecht/ Ricochet Productions)

that responds through some kind of reaction (usually movement) when receiving a stimulus. A nerve is defined as a group of nerve fibers located outside the CNS, and bundles of nerve fibers located within the CNS are called nerve tracts. Nerve fibers make up nerve cells, also known as neurons, which are the building blocks of the entire nervous system. Neurons are the essential conducting unit of the entire nervous system. Before looking at the details of the neuron, it’s important to understand some other important elements that enable the CNS to operate smoothly. Taking a close look at a slice of the spinal cord, one sees that most of it is composed of white material and some of it is composed of a gray substance. These two parts are simply called white matter and gray matter. Whereas the gray matter consists mostly of nerve cell bodies, the white matter is composed mostly of nerve fibers.

Nerve Cells: Foundation of the Nervous System
During the initial stages of growth, nerves develop in the embryo’s CNS and then grow out and spread through the body like tentacles. There are thousands of nerve fibers grouped in large bundles that run to and from the CNS. Afferent

384 Julie McDowell

nerves are those fibers coming to the CNS from the muscles, joints, skin, or internal organs, whereas those leaving the CNS to travel to these areas are known as efferent nerves. The spinal cord has two types of afferent nerves: those coming in at the back are called posterior or sensory; those leaving the spinal cord come out the front and are called anterior or motor. When these afferent nerves reach the spinal cord’s white matter, they divide and branch out to bring their messages to various different areas of the cord (Figure 8.3).

Figure 8.3 Another View of the Spinal Cord. A cross section of the spinal cord displays the white matter, which is the nerve tissue that contains myelinated axons and interneurons, and the gray matter, which is the nerve tissue that contains the neurons’ cell bodies. The spinal roots—the dorsal and ventral roots—are just shown on the right side of the spinal section, although these roots and the corresponding nerve tracts are actually present on both sides of the spinal cord. This figure also shows the path of a reflex arch, with the receptor muscles receiving the impulse, which is processed by the sensory neuron and then transmitted to the motor neuron at the synapse in the spinal cord. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

The Nervous System 385

Most of the branches connect with neurons near the entry region of the nerve fiber and intermediate neurons. These intermediate neurons then connect with the motor neurons, which control muscle movement. Although neurons vary in size, shape, and functions, they all consist of the following four distinct parts: 1. Cell body. This is the main mass of the cell and contains the nucleus and other organelles. The nucleus is the cell’s largest organelle, which contains chromosomes. In these chromosomes, genes carry the body’s hereditary information in the DNA, which allows the cell to reproduce. Neuron cell bodies are found in the CNS or close to it in the trunk of the body so they are protected by bone. The cell body also contains cytoplasm, and an abundance of mitochondria, which are organelles responsible for energy production in the cell. 2. Dendrites. This group of branching nerve fibers carries impulses to the cell body. Small black spots also appear on the dendrites: these represent the nerve endings of other neurons, which pass messages from other neurons. 3. Axon. This single nerve fiber carries impulses away from the cell body and the dendrites. In humans, some axons can be around one meter long, but in larger mammals such as whales and giraffes, these would be much longer. A nerve fiber is the neuron including the axon and the surrounding cells. These fibers branch out at the neuron’s ending (also known as arborization) and can be classified as either excitatory or inhibitory. 4. Transmitting region. The axon carries the impulses to the transmitting region, and from there it leaves the cell body and travels to the CNS. In addition to these four parts, neurons are composed of layers of membranes and microtubules that produce hormones, neurotransmitters, and substances such as peptides and proteins, which will be discussed in detail further in this chapter.

386 Julie McDowell

How Cells Produce Energy
Cells produce energy through aerobic cell respiration. The following equation provides a simple explanation: Glucose (C6H12O6) + 6O2 ! 6CO2 + 6H2O + ATP + heat Each product of cell respiration is vital to the body’s function. The heat regulates body temperature, the water feeds the cells, and the CO2 is the waste that is exhaled through breathing. An important product of cell respiration is ATP (adenosine triphosphate), a neurotransmitter that is the muscle’s direct source of energy for movement. Basically, ATP captures energy from food, breaks it down, and then releases it into cells. Some of this energy resulting from respiration is used by the cell’s mitochondria to produce ATP. Therefore, cellular respiration is a constant, continuing cycle. All cells contain molecules of ADP (adenosine diphosphate) and phosphate. When the body digests food, it breaks down various chemical components to use in cell processes. A form of sugar known as glucose (C6H12O6) is one such substance, and is a necessary component (along with oxygen) in aerobic respiration. Glucose breaks down into CO2 and H2O (water), along with a release of energy. This energy then bonds with the ADP and a third phosphate to form ATP. Energy for cell processes is released and available for use when the bond holding this third phosphate is once again broken down.

Neurons
As mentioned earlier, neurons are nerve cells that are composed of nerve fibers. Neurons are the foundation of the entire nervous system, and are responsible for transmitting messages throughout the body. In the PNS, the neurons are constantly carrying information to and from the CNS. However, neurons can only carry electrical impulses in one direction, making it impossible for impulses to run into each other and cancel each other out. The nervous system is made up of millions of neurons, in addition to the other cells that help support the functions of the spinal cord and brain. Neurons are classified into three groups: sensory, motor, and interneurons. Sensory and motor neurons make up the PNS, and interneurons are found in the CNS.

The Nervous System 387

Figure 8.4 The Sensory Neuron. This neuron structure details a sensory neuron, which carries impulses and messages to the spinal cord and brain. These sensory neurons, which have cell bodies, are located in the CNS and close to the body so they are protected from damage. The axon moves these messages away from the nucleus and cell body, and the dendrites work in reverse to bring the impulses into the cell body. The myelin sheath works as an insulator to protect the neurons from shortcircuiting with each other. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

The sensory or afferent neuron mainly functions in the CNS, and the motor or efferent neuron mainly functions in the PNS. Although both these neurons contain the same physical parts (the cell body, dendrites, axon, and transmitting region), there are some important differences in their composition (Figures 8.4 and 8.5).

388 Julie McDowell

Figure 8.5 The Motor Neuron. This neuron structure details a motor neuron, which carries the impulses from the central nervous system to muscles and glands. Compared to the sensory neuron, this structure features the cell body at the top (rather than the side) and does contain receptors. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

The sensory or afferent neuron carries impulses and messages to the spinal cord and brain. In these neurons, the dendrites act as receptors— they detect external or internal changes, and transmit this information to the CNS. The sensory neuron dendrites may be short or long (sometimes as long as one meter), but they are single and are not branchlike in appearance like in the motor neuron. Once the information is transmitted to the brain and spinal cord, the impulse is interpreted and the CNS stimulates a sensation. Sensory neurons located in the skin, skeletal muscle, and joints are known as somatic, and those in the internal organs are called visceral. The motor (or efferent) neuron carries the impulses from the CNS to muscles and glands, also known as effectors. After the CNS processes an

The Nervous System 389

impulse, the motor neuron will tell muscles to contract or relax and tell glands to secrete. Those motor neurons associated with the skeletal muscle are called somatic, and those associated with the smooth muscle, cardiac muscle, and glands are called visceral. Some axons in both in both the CNS and PNS are layered with a covering called the myelin sheath. Composed of fatty material, the myelin sheath electronically insulates neurons from one another. Without the protection of the myelin sheath, the neurons would short-circuit and thus be unable to transmit electronic impulses. In the motor neurons, the axons and dendrites are wrapped in specialized cells called Schwann cells, which create their myelin sheath. The nucleus and cytoplasm in the Schwann cells are collectively called the neurolemma and are located outside the myelin sheath, physically covering the nerve cell. Schwann cells are located in the PNS. The specialized cells in the CNS are called neuroglia. The node of Ranvier is the space that separates the Schwann cells. These nodes are responsible for depolarizing electrical impulses, which will be explained in greater detail later in this chapter. The neurolemma is important for nerve regeneration. If a nerve or nerves in the PNS is damaged or severed (for example, if a limb is damaged or severed) and then reattached through surgery, the neurolemma allows the axons and dendrites to regenerate and reattach to their proper connections. In addition, the Schwann cells are believed to produce a chemical substance that stimulates regeneration. This regeneration may be a slow process (it could take months or years), but eventually the nerve fibers may restore their functions, therefore reinstating feeling and movement to the limb. Regeneration, however, is not possible in sensory neurons of the spinal cord because there are no Schwann cells. In these neurons, the myelin sheath is formed by the oligodendrocytes, the specialized cells found only in the brain and spinal cord. Because there are no Schwann cells, there is no neurolemma, and thus cell regeneration is impossible. This is why spinal cord damage or severing results in permanent loss of function. The final classification of neurons is called interneurons. These are located entirely within the CNS and combine or integrate the sensory and motor impulses. Some of their functions include thinking, memory,

390 Julie McDowell

and learning. For instance, interneurons might receive impulses from the brain and transmit them to the somatic nervous system that determines movement in voluntary muscles, such as fingers and toes. Cranial nerves, or the nerves located in the brain, contain sensory, motor, and mixed nerve fibers. The sensory nerves carry impulses toward the brain, and the motor nerves carry impulses away from the brain. But most of the cranial nerves and all of the spinal nerves are made up of both sensory and motor fibers, and these are called mixed nerves.

Synapses
Every neuron has dendrites that connect with other neurons. In the CNS, neurons communicate with each other when the axon of one neuron comes into contact with the cell body or dendrite of another neuron. The space or junction between the axon and dendrite of these two neurons is known as a synapse, which comes from the Greek word meaning “to clasp.” This is where the message carried by the neuron is passed on. The synapse is often called a relay because it is here where the information is relayed to the next neuron. More specifically, the actual area (which is between 10 and 50 nm in width) between the axon and dendrite is known as the synaptic gap or cleft. Like a blueprint showing the floor plan and layout of a house, the location and pattern of connections between neurons determine the structure and organization of the CNS. The position of the synapses dictates the route that impulses will follow within and between the brain and spinal cord. The impulse pathways determine what sensations are experienced and how an effector responds to these sensations. Events related to the synaptic process are classified as either presynaptic (before transmission) or postsynaptic (following transmission). It is important to note that neurons conduct impulses in only one direction, depending on if they are afferent or efferent. The synapse transmissions in the CNS are extremely complicated, but Figure 8.6 describes their role in transporting information throughout the CNS at the most basic level. In this illustration are four neurons—A, B, C, and D. A and B are the presynaptic neurons that are carrying information to C and D, the postsynaptic neurons. The A and B axons will make contact with the C and D dendrites, thus creating four synapses.

The Nervous System 391

Figure 8.6 Synaptic Connections. The synapse transmission between the neurons of the CNS. The two presynaptic neurons, A and B, carry impulses and messages to the postsynaptic neurons, C and D. The locations where A and B make contact with C and D are known as synapses, which are numbered 1–4. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

Neurons connect with each other in two ways: (1) a neuron receives impulses from a few other neurons and relays these impulses on to thousands of other neurons—divergence; and (2) a neuron receive impulses from the nerve endings of thousands of other neurons and transmits its message to only a few other neurons—convergence. Convergence and divergence are two types of pathways that impulses can take when traveling from the presynaptic neuron to the postsynaptic neuron, as shown in Figure 8.6. An impulse can travel across synapse 1 to C, or it can go across synapse 2 to D. However, the impulse can also travel along A and cross synapses 1 and 2 to C and D, which is divergence. Convergence is when the impulse travels along to presynaptic neurons to one postsynaptic neuron; for example, if A and B impulses would travel through synapse 1 and converge to postsynaptic neuron C. Of course, in the complex body, any postsynaptic neuron can expect to have hundreds of axons from presynaptic neurons attach to its dendrites.

392 Julie McDowell

A nerve impulse enters the cell body by first attaching itself to that cell’s dendrites. This then alters the neuron’s excitability. The excitatory nerve fiber amplifies the energy from the impulse, but the inhibitory nerve fiber reduces this energy. Although the arrival of the impulse alters the excitability of the neuron, it does not necessarily result in a postsynaptic neuron reaction or firing. A reaction occurs only when the nerve fiber’s axon has reached its threshold level. The value of this threshold varies with each nerve fiber and depends on the composition of the cellular fluid and the number of impulses recently received and conducted. For example, when one touches a warm stove with his or her fingers, the nerve impulse translating the corresponding sensation of warmth attaches itself to the dendrites of the neurons located in the fingertips, thus stimulating the neuron’s excitability. The excitatory and inhibitory nerve fibers process this sensation through amplifying but also inhibiting the energy from the impulse. When the sensation (or warmth) increases beyond the threshold level of the nerve fiber’s axon, a reaction occurs. So if the heat on the stove increases beyond a certain level, the nerve fibers will stimulate a chain of events that produce a reaction, such as pulling the fingers away from the stove. Both excitatory and inhibitory neurons are managed by excitatory and inhibitory nerve fibers. Some postsynaptic neurons fire off most of the time, whereas others fire off less frequently. For example, neurons that work the muscles in the brain and spinal cord are in a constant state of excitability. Because the body’s muscles must always be ready for action, there must be a constant flow of impulses between the brain and spinal cord. But neurons that control breathing are not constantly firing—they operate at a more rhythmic pace. The respiratory and muscular responses are examples of postsynaptic excitation or inhibition because they take place immediately after an impulse transmission at the synaptic gap. Presynaptic excitation or inhibition occurs before the impulse reaches the synaptic gap. If an impulse is transmitted along an inhibitory nerve fiber, it will not deliver its full load of excitability at the synapse. In fact, this nerve fiber can completely block all nerve impulses from reaching the synapse. Synapses can deliver messages either to thousands of neurons or to only a few. The more synaptic exchanges there are in a transmission, the

The Nervous System 393

more opportunities there are for changes or modifications that can be made to that resulting reaction. For example, suppose there are two ways to get from Anytown, USA, to Nowhere, USA. The first route is a straight road with no turnoffs, but the second route has numerous crossings and connects with secondary roads that ultimately lead to Nowhere. Although the first route is faster, there is no chance for changes or modifications. One cannot change the route—it is a straight shot. But the second route, even though it might be slower, has numerous opportunities for change with all its turnoffs and back roads. When a nerve impulse crosses the synaptic gap, each synapse contains substances to create adhesion between the presynaptic and postsynaptic membranes. When contacted by the impulse, the synaptic gap constricts as the width decreases and the concentration of the transmitter increases. Synapses that are not used often tend to cease functioning, but synapses that are used frequently tend to transmit impulses quickly.

Neurotransmitters
In the latter part of the nineteenth century, there was a controversy over whether the vertebrates had a nervous system composed of a continuous network of neurons or of separate neurons. When it was eventually proven that the vertebrate’s body is made up of separate neurons connected with synapses, the question remained about how the neurons related to each other. Because nerve fibers are minute and cover only a small portion of the postsynaptic neuron’s cell body, the amount of impulse and energy it can deliver is diminutive. This might be adequate for organisms such as fish or crustaceans—enough current is delivered to inhibit or excite a postsynaptic neuron in these animals. However, in reptiles and mammals, another mechanism is used to transmit impulses. In the early 1900s, scientists and physiologists had concluded that the endings of nerve fibers emit chemical substances that influence the behavior of postsynaptic neurons. Researchers noticed that by injecting certain nerve tissue with a substance called adrenaline, the sympathetic system (the motor nerve network that operates the blood vessels and sweat glands, along with some of the internal organs) was stimulated. They believed that the body was constantly tapped into a natural supply of adrenaline.

394 Julie McDowell

These landmark discoveries verified that chemical substances are emitted through nerve endings to help transmit messages. These chemicals are called neurotransmitters, or simply transmitters. In the human body, there are about 80 different neurotransmitters. Neurotransmitters are classified into four groups: • • • • Amines: acetylcholine, noradrenalin, serotonin, dopamine Amino acids: glutamic acids, gamma aminobutyric acid (GABA) Purines: adenosine triphosphate (ATP) Peptides: enkephalins, dynorphin, endorphin

Some important neurotransmitters in our body include acetylcholine, dopamine, norepinephrine, and serotonin. Many neurotransmitters have a particularly wide distribution and vital roles. Noradrenalin, for example, transmits neurons from various regions in the brain, such as the cerebral hemispheres, the cerebellum, and the spinal cord. Noradrenalin increases the reaction excitability in the CNS and the sympathetic neurons in the spinal cord. Another major transmitter is serotonin, which is an important distributor for the sensory channels in the CNS and in the expressions of emotion. Medications that alter mood or behavior, such as antidepressants, will be targeted at serotonin and norepinephrine and will affect synapse transmission. Dopamine is an important transmitter in the motor system, limbic system, and the hypothalamus. Parkinson’s disease kills the cells that produce these transmitters, therefore impeding mobility and other motor functions. These transmitters are supplemented using a drug called L-dopa, which improves posture and motility, although it cannot stop the tremors that accompany Parkinson’s disease. In simplistic terms, when a presynaptic neuron receives an electrical impulse, its axon releases a neurotransmitter, which then diffuses across the synapse and combines with the dendrites of the postsynaptic neuron. This generates an electrical impulse, which is then carried to the postsynaptic neuron’s axon to the next synapse and so on. A chemical inactivator

The Nervous System 395

is located at the dendrite of this postsynaptic neuron to counteract the impulse generated by the neurotransmitter. Each neurotransmitter has a specific inactivator. For example, cholinesterase is the inactivator for acetylcholine, a neurotransmitter found in many of the body’s muscular junctions. The inactivator stops the continuous transmission of the impulse unless a new impulse is generated by a neurotransmitter at the first neuron. But let us look at this process more closely to further understand the transmission of a nerve impulse. Neurons produce transmitters either in their nerve endings or in their cell bodies. In the case of peptides, they are made in the cell bodies, and then transported to the nerve endings where they are then converted into transmitters. Some unmyelinated nerves, such as those in the sympathetic system, emit transmitters along the course of the nerve rather than the nerve ending. Transmitters pass through little bulges called varicosities located along the nerve fiber. These varicosities move along the nerve fiber, similar to when a ball moves through a stocking. In other cases, transmitters are stored in tiny vesicles of the nerve endings. When an impulse or action potential affects these endings, calcium (Ca+) ions pass into the endings from the extracellular fluid from the neighboring neutron. This connects the vesicle with the membrane of the nerve ending, and then the transmitter connects with the synaptic cleft. The upper layer of this four-layered membrane is presynaptic membrane, and the synaptic cleft is between this layer and the second layer. After the transmitter leaves the vesicle, it crosses the synaptic cleft and connects with the membrane or receptor site of the postsynaptic neuron. This receptor site is made up of various proteins, and those proteins that are specifically affected by a transmitter are known as receptors or targets of the transmitter. It is important to note that one transmitter can have different effects on different neurons. Acetylcholine can excite one neuron while inhibiting another. However, in vertebrates, GABA is always inhibitory, and glutamate is always excitatory (Figure 8.7). Transmitters must be controlled. If their secretion was not stopped at some points, then rapid changes in excitation and inhibition would not occur, and all activity would be slowed down. Some synapses block impulse transmission rather than pass the impulse on to other synapses (known as an excitatory synapse). A synapse that inhibits impulse

396 Julie McDowell

Figure 8.7 The Neuromuscular System. When the muscle fiber meets the motor neuron at the axon terminals, a movement or reaction results with the aid of neurotransmitters, including acetylcholine and its inactivator, cholinesterase. The sarcolemma contains receptors for the acetylcholine, and the mitochondria are where cell respiration takes place and energy is produced. Muscle contraction begins when the axon terminal receives a nerve impulse, which stimulates the release of acetylcholine. This release causes electrical changes—because of the movement of ions—at the sarcolemma. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

transmission is known as an inhibitory synapse. In this situation, a chemical inactivator located at the dendrite of the postsynaptic neuron inactivates the neuron, which ceases any impulse unless a new impulse from the first neuron releases more of the neurotransmitter. Peptides have been discovered to be transmitters only in the past 20 to 30 years. One example is the parasympathetic nerves that control the salivary glands, which release a transmitter called VIP, also known as

The Nervous System 397

vasointestinal peptide. VIP increases the amount of acetylcholine released by nerve endings and also dilates blood vessels, which brings more blood to the glands so more saliva can be secreted. In addition, because of its ability to dilate blood vessels, it is used in the penis to achieve an erection. Often someone who is impotent has a deficiency of VIP in his genital organs.

Nerve Impulse
The body’s nerve fibers system can be compared to a telegraph wire. Both are electric conduction systems designed to relay messages quickly over long distances. Both transmit messages in the form of pulses that are of a constant size and speed. Both the nerve fiber and the telegraph wire must be insulated for protection. If the wires or the fibers are damaged in any way, they cannot carry the impulses. But the nerve fiber is significantly more complicated than a telegraph wire. The nerve fiber generates the message itself along with transmitting it, whereas the telegraph wire is simply involved in the transmitting. The body is composed of two kinds of fluid: intracellular (ICF) and extracellular (ECF). ICF, the fluid within the cells, contains 65 percent of the body’s total water. ECF, the fluid outside the cells, contains the remaining 35 percent. Both ICF and ECF contain electrolytes—chemicals that dissolve in water to become positive and negative ions. Positive ions are known as cations, while negative ions are called anions. ECF is comprised of a salt and chloride solution—NaCl—that breaks down to become sodium cations (Na+) and chloride anions (Cl−). ICF is composed of potassium cations (K+). Both Na+ and K+ are essential for neurons to conduct impulses throughout the body. In order to understand the electrical changes, look at Figure 8.8. When a neuron is not carrying an impulse, it is considered in a state of polarization (A). This means that Na+ is more abundant outside the cell, and K+ is more abundant inside the cell. In this state, the neuron has a positive charge on the outside of the cell membrane and a negative charge inside. When an axon receives a nerve impulse, it releases the neurotransmitter acetylcholine (ACh). ACh diffuses across the synapse and bonds to the ACh receptors, located on the sarcolemma. The ACh makes the sarcolemma permeable to the Na+ ions. These Na+ ions then rush into the cell membrane and the K+ ions rush out of the cell. The neuron is then in a state of depolarization (B), and the charges acting on the membrane are

398 Julie McDowell

Figure 8.8 Muscular Electrical Charges. Muscle contractions are caused by electrical charges and the ion chemistry at the sarcolemma. Polarization is when the muscle is relaxed, depolarization is when the muscle is responding to the influence of acetylcholine, and repolarization is the process of the ion concentration returning to the polarization state. See also Table 1.1. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

reversed. Therefore, the inside of the cell has a positive charge whereas the outside has a negative charge. In addition, the cholinesterase inactivates the ACh. This is when the impulse is generated and transmitted through the body to prompt a reaction. In order for the neuron to receive another impulse, it must be repolarized (C) and returned to the state it was in before it received the stimulus. Repolarization happens when the body’s sodium pumps return the Na+

The Nervous System 399
TABLE 8.1 Electrical Charges
Polarization (resting potential) • A positive (+) charge is outside the sarcolemma and a negative (−) charge is inside. • Na+ ions are more abundant outside the cell. They diffuse inward until the sodium pump pushes them back outside the cell. • K+ ions are more abundant inside the cell. They diffuse outward until the potassium pump pushes them back inside the cell. Depolarization (action potential) • ACh is released by the neuron when a nerve impulse is received at the axon terminal. • ACh makes the sarcolemma permeable to Na+ ions. • Na+ ions rush into the cell, causing a reversal of charges on the sarcolemma—now the outside is (−) and the inside is (+). • The ACh is then deactivated by cholinesterase. Repolarization • Cell becomes permeable to K+ ions, which rush out of the cell. • Charge restoration takes place—the outside is (+) and the inside is (−). • The Na+ ions return outside via the sodium pumps, and the K+ ions return inside via the potassium pumps. • Muscle fibers now are ready to respond to another nerve impulse received by the axon.

ions outside the cell membrane, and the potassium pumps return the K+ ions inside the membrane. The neuron is then once again in a state of polarization—the Na+ ions are more populous outside and the K+ ions are dominant inside. The neuron is now ready to respond to a stimulus and generate an impulse. Take a look at Table 8.1 for a recap of these processes. The polarization, depolarization, and repolarization cycle is similar to when a crowd of cheering fans at a stadium sporting event begin a “wave.” One section will get up and throw their hands in the air, followed by the neighboring section, and so on, and a wave motion reverberates around the stadium. Just like the neuron’s polarization behavior, the activity of each section influences the activity of the next section. A neuron responds to a stimulus or action potential very quickly—in fact, it is measured in milliseconds. Each neuron has the ability to respond to hundreds of stimuli each second and to generate an electrical impulse.

400 Julie McDowell

Motor neurons are especially efficient because only their nodes of Ranvier depolarize, which is known as salutatory conduction. In these neurons, impulses travel extremely rapidly along the nodes of Ranvier. The neuron’s myelin sheath also increases the rate at which impulses are generated. Once the impulse is generated, neurons are able to transmit the information within milliseconds, even over great distances. For example, when a barefooted man or woman over six feet tall steps on a sharp tack, they will feel pain just as quickly as someone who is only five feet tall. The body can transmit these sensory impulses from the sole of a foot to the brain in under a second. The nerve fibers that actually transmit information to the spinal cord and brain are called primary afferent axons. The speed at which these fibers can transmit messages depends on their thickness—the thicker the fiber, the faster information can travel. These axons are classified into four different groups (in order of decreasing size—thickest to thinnest): • • • • A-alpha carries information related to muscles A-beta carries information related to touch A-delta carries information related to pain and temperature C carries information related to pain, temperature, and itch

For example, if someone stubs her toe on a table, she initially feels the touch sensation when her toe collides with the table. The thick (and therefore fastest) A-beta nerve fiber carries this sensation from her toe to the brain. Because of the speed of this fiber, this sensation reaches the brain first. But shortly after, she feels pain. This is because the information related to pain is carried by the slower and thinner A-delta and C-nerve fiber.

The Spinal Cord
The central nervous system (CNS) is made up of two major organs: the brain and the spinal cord. The spinal cord connects the brain to the peripheral nervous system (PNS)—the nerves associated with the brain and spine. In order for information to travel between the brain and PNS, it must pass through the spinal cord.

The Nervous System 401

Protected by a bony canal, the spinal cord extends down to the end of a column, which is made up of bones called vertebrae. This vertebral column grows at a faster rate than the nerve tissue of the spinal cord, so eventually the lower part of the canal grows longer than the cord. In an adult body, the spinal cord ends a short distance from the lowest rib (between the first and second vertebrae). An adult male’s spinal cord will measure about 45 cm long, and an adult woman’s will grow to about 43 cm long. The nerves that are below the spinal cord run in the vertebral canal—they are known as the cauda equina, which is Latin for “horse tail.”

Function
The spinal cord has three main functions: • Direct reflexes: Examples of a reflex are a knee jerk or pulling one’s hand away from a hot surface. A spinal reflex only passes through the spinal cord and doesn’t involve the brain. Conduct sensory impulses: Transmit sensory information from the afferent neurons to the brain through ascending nerve tracts. Conduct motor impulses: Transmit impulses from the brain through descending nerve tracts to the efferent neurons that communicate with the body’s glands and muscles.

• •

The stretch reflex—when a muscle is stretched and responds by contracting—is the most basic reflex arc in humans. This is basically a synapse between a sensory or afferent neuron and a motor or efferent neuron. Stretch reflexes can be induced by tapping many of the body’s larger muscles, such as the triceps in the arm or the calf muscle in the leg. But most reflexes involve at least three neurons and numerous synapses. Reflex pathways or arcs will be examined more thoroughly later in this chapter.

Structure
Spinal Cord The center of the spinal cord contains H-shaped material—this is the gray matter, which is made up of the cell bodies of the motor neurons and interneurons (Figure 8.9). Surrounding this gray matter and filling out the

402 Julie McDowell

Figure 8.9 Another Cross-Section View of the Spinal Cord. This cross section of the spinal cord shows the gray matter, which contains the cell bodies of the motor neurons and interneurons, and the white matter, which contains the interneurons’ myelinated axons and dendrites. The central canal contains the cerebrospinal fluid. The gray matter coming out the top of the figure is the dorsal root, and the gray matter coming out the bottom is the ventral root. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

remainder of the spinal cord is the white matter—consisting of the interneurons’ myelinated axons and dendrites. These are known as nerve fibers, which are bundled into nerve tracts based on what function they perform. The descending tracts carry motor impulses away from the brain, and the ascending tracts carry impulses to the brain. Also note the central canal—this contains the cerebrospinal fluid (CSF), which circulates in and around the brain and spinal cord. Spinal Nerves The spinal cord contains 31 pairs of spinal nerves (Figure 8.10). Because they are in pairs, they are bilateral, which means the nerves and nerve tracts occupy both sides of the spinal cord. Whereas the spinal cord is considered part of the central nervous system (CNS), the spinal nerves and nerve tracts are part of the peripheral nervous system (PNS).

The Nervous System 403

Figure 8.10 Nerves and Spinal Cord. The CNS’s spinal cord consists of spinal nerves (on the left of the figure) and the spinal nerve plexus network (located on the right of the figure). The purpose of the nerve plexus is to combine neuron networks from various parts of the spinal cord to form nerve systems specific to parts of the body. For example, the arms’ radial and ulnar nerves are part of the brachial plexus. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

As noted in Table 8.2, each pair of spinal nerves is numbered corresponding to the level of the cord and area of the vertebrae where it is attached. In addition, each pair is defined by a letter. For more information on spinal cord-related injuries, read Sidebar 8.1. There are eight cervical pairs, 12 thoracic pairs, five lumbar pairs, five sacral pairs, and one tiny coccygeal pair (see Table 8.2). The first cervical vertebra is called the atlas, inspired by one of the heroes in Greek mythology. After losing an important battle, Atlas was turned to stone

404 Julie McDowell
TABLE 8.2 Spinal Nerves
Nerve group C1–C8 T1–T12 L1–L5 S1–S5 CO1 Name Cervical pairs Thoracic pairs Lumbar pairs Sacral pairs Coccygeal pair Corresponding location Neck Ribs Large vertebrae in the small of the back Base of the spine Pelvic floor

and forced to carry the Earth and heavens on his shoulders. Therefore, this vertebra is called atlas because it carries the weight of the head. Receptors located on the skin send information to the spinal cord through the spinal nerve. In referring to Figure 8.11, notice the dorsal and ventral roots protruding from the spinal cord. These roots attach the nerves to the cord. Dorsal refers to the back or posterior of the body, and ventral refers to the front of the body. The dorsal horns are the gray matter in the dorsal area—this is where sensory information is received through the dorsal root. The ventral horns are the gray matter in the ventral region, and they contain the motor neurons. The axons of these motor neurons leave the spinal cord, travel along the ventral roots, and head directly to the muscles. Each dorsal root contains an enlarged area of gray matter, called the dorsal root ganglion. Because ganglion refers to any collection of nerve cell bodies outside the CNS, the dorsal root ganglion contains the cell bodies of the peripheral sensory neurons, such as the receptors on the skin. All the nerve fibers from all the sensory receptors throughout the body converge in the dorsal root ganglia. The ventral roots contain motor nerve fibers, which connect to voluntary muscles, involuntary muscles, and glands. Cell bodies from these neurons are housed in the gray matter of the spinal cord. Both the dorsal and ventral roots meet in the spinal nerve—therefore creating a network of both sensory and motor nerves. The groupings of nerves on the right side of the body are called nerve plexuses. A nerve plexus is a combination of neurons from various sections of the spinal cord that serve specific areas of the body (see Table 8.2).

The Nervous System 405

SIDEBAR 8.1

Making Advances in Spinal Cord Injury Research
Treating spinal cord injuries and paralysis has presented some of the greatest challenges to medical researchers throughout history. Even as we understand more about the nervous system and how neurons behave, researchers could not uncover a way to re-grow injured nerves in the brain and spinal cord. That was until two important scientific breakthroughs in the 1980s. First, experiments in rats showed that under certain laboratory conditions, many types of injured neurons in the central nervous system could be regenerated. Then, in the late 1980s, as scientists were focused on figuring out what was keeping axons from regrowing in people, they discovered important proteins that were inhibiting this growth. These proteins were produced by the oligodendrocytes. These are the cells that create the myelin sheath that covers nerves. Both of these discoveries reinvigorated an area of research that had been considered beyond hope. Below are three areas where research is currently focused in treating spinal cord injuries:

Promoting Axon Growth: Researchers now know that it is not enough just to regrow a damaged axon. The axon needs to be positioned in the proper area of the spinal cord that will promote its growth and support its function. Even more challenging is that many regions of the adult spinal cord contain chemicals that inhibit the growth of a damaged axon, prompting it to retreat. Scientists are working on changing this environment in order to make it more hospitable to growing axons. Enhancing Compensatory Growth of Uninjured Axons: Studies have shown that when damaged axons undergo treatment, the healthy neurons that surround the damage site begin to grow and support the recovering cells. Scientists are now using this knowledge to try to repair damaged nerve networks, particularly in patients who still have uninjured nerve networks. The hope is that these healthy nerves might be manipulated into taking over the function of the damaged nerves.

406 Julie McDowell

Preventing Scar Formation: Scar tissue that forms over the site of the injury can hamper repair. Scientists have discovered some molecular signals that scar tissue gives off that tries to block growth. Research is now focused on analyzing enzymes that will block these molecules and allow nerves to grow amidst scar tissue.

Figure 8.11 Spinal Roots of the Reflex Arc. A stimulus is applied to the knee, causing the sensory neuron to transmit the impulse to the spinal cord. The impulse is processed, and the instructions for a reaction are carried by the motor neuron, telling the relaxing muscle to contract. This reaction then causes the contracted muscle to relax. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

The Nervous System 407

Differences among Spinal Cord Segments
All the pictures in Figure 8.11 represent a different segment of the spinal cord. Each picture is slightly different. The darker areas in each picture represent the gray matter, which is where the cell bodies of the nerve fibers are located, and the white matter is represented by the lighter areas that surround the gray matter. This is where the spinal cord’s axons are located. In the cervical segment picture, there is a large amount of white matter. The cervical vertebrae fall right below the skull, at the top of the spinal cord. Because of their location, there are many axons traveling up to the brain from all levels of the spinal cord. In addition, there are many axons traveling from the brain to the various segments on the spinal cord. In contrast, the sacral segment (which is the lowest, except for the coccygeal pair) has much less white matter. This is because fewer axons are traveling to and from the brain through this spinal cord segment. To summarize, the amount of white matter in relation to gray matter decreases as one moves down the spinal cord. In addition to the differences in the amount of white matter, there are also differences in the size of the ventral horn, depending on the level of the spinal cord. Motor neurons are abundant and large in the segments controlling limbs, which are the lower cervical (C5–C8), lumbar, and sacral sections. In addition, the thoracic level features an extra cell column called the intermediate or intermediolateral cell column. This cell column is the location of all presynaptic sympathetic nerve cell bodies.

Reflexes
As mentioned earlier in this chapter, a reflex refers to when an incoming signal is processed by the CNS and then reflected to the motor nerve fibers, which then generate movement. But the action is generated from the spinal cord, and the brain is not directly involved. The path that a nerve impulse follows after a signal is processed is known as the reflex arc. Five essential elements are involved in the reflex arc: • • Receptors detect the incoming stimulus and generate an impulse. Impulses are transmitted from receptors to the CNS through sensory neurons.

408 Julie McDowell

• • •

The CNS houses the synapses where the impulse travels through. Impulses are transmitted from the CNS to the effector by motor neurons. The effector performs its distinctive action.

An appropriate example of a reflex arc is the patellar reflex, also known as the knee-jerk reflex. This is often an initial clinical test to determine if there is any neurological damage in the CNS. Doctors will hit the patellar tendon (right below the knee) with a rubber mallet to ensure a patient’s nervous system is working correctly. If the knee quickly rises in response to the stimulus, then the CNS is functioning properly. Any problems with this response might indicate trouble in the thigh muscle or spinal cord. When the leg is raised, the muscle stretches and contracts; this is known as the stretch reflex. In order to understand the patellar reflex, it is helpful to look at the different elements, which collectively happen in under one second. When the stimulus, or rubber mallet, hits the patellar tendon, the stretch receptors detect that the tendon is stretching. These receptors produce impulses that are carried along sensory neurons to the spinal cord. In the spinal cord, the sensory neurons synapse with the motor neurons, which transmit an impulse to the motor neurons in the femoral nerve. These neurons in the femoral nerve then transport impulses back to the quadriceps femoris (known as the effector), which contracts and then causes the lower leg to extend. A closer look at a reflex, such as the patellar or stretch reflex, reveals the important role of the muscle spindle, which is a small group of muscle fibers wrapped in connective tissue that separates it from the rest of the muscle. Connected to an afferent neuron, the muscle spindle actually detects the stretch in the muscle. Another important spinal cord reflex is the flexor, or withdrawal reflex. Once again, the flex reflex is automatic, and the brain is not directly involved in any decision making. This is when the stimulus is potentially harmful, such as touching a hot cooking pan or a sharp needle. The response is to pull one’s hand or finger away. Similar to the patellar reflex, the sensory neurons transmit information to the spinal cord, and then the motor neurons tell the specific muscle to contract.

The Nervous System 409

The Brain
Along with the spinal cord, the brain is the other major organ that makes up the central nervous system (CNS). Weighing approximately 3 pounds, or a little over 1 kilogram, in an average adult, the brain consists of over 100 billion neurons and trillions of glia, or support cells. The brain is covered by fluid, membranes, and bones. Housed in the skull, the brain is enclosed by a total of 14 bones, eight of which make up the cranium (the remaining six bones enclose various other parts of the brain). The skull is important because it protects the brain, and it will be explained more thoroughly later on in this chapter. The brain is made up of many major parts that function as an integrated unit (Figure 8.12). The brain stem is the first major part. This consists of the medulla, pons, and midbrain, which is located just above the medulla. The remaining major parts are the cerebellum, the hypothalamus, the thalamus, and the cerebrum. Although each part is explored individually in the

Figure 8.12 The Right Hemisphere of the Brain, including the Lobes. This hemisphere of the brain is associated with space-related perceptions, facial recognition, visual images, and music. (Sandy Windelspecht/ Ricochet Productions)

410 Julie McDowell

Figure 8.13 The Ventricles in the Brain. The brain’s four ventricles are cavities that contain the choroids plexus, which is important in forming the CNS’s tissue fluid (called the cerebrospinal fluid). (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

following sections, it is important to remember that each part is interconnected and works with each other. In addition to these major parts, the brain consists of four cavities, or ventricles (Figure 8.13). There are two lateral ventricles, as well as a third and fourth ventricle. Within each ventricle is a choroid plexus, a capillary network that forms cerebrospinal fluid (CSF) using blood plasma. This tissue fluid circulates in and around the brain and spinal cord, and will be covered in more detail later in the section about blood circulation in the brain.

Medulla
The medulla is anterior to the cerebellum, and extends between the spinal cord and the pons. Because the medulla contains myelinated nerve fibers and gray matter (or collections of cell bodies), this part of the brain is active in regulating the respiratory and cardiac activities of the body. This means

The Nervous System 411

regulating the body’s heart rate, regulating the blood pressure by controlling the diameters (or width) of the blood vessels, and maintaining respiratory centers that control breathing. In addition, the medulla contains reflex functions that control coughing, sneezing, swallowing, and vomiting.

Pons
Also anterior to the cerebellum, the pons bulge out from the top of the medulla. The pons are also composed mainly of myelinated nerve fibers, which connect the two halves of the cerebellum with the brain stem in addition to the cerebrum above and the spinal cord below. This area of the brain is a vital link between the cerebellum and the rest of the nervous system. Nerve fibers in the pons carry messages to and from areas below it and above it. The pons contain two respiratory centers that work with the medulla to establish a normal breathing rhythm.

Midbrain
The midbrain extends from the pons and encloses the cerebral aqueduct, which is a tunnel that joins the third and fourth ventricles. The upper part of the midbrain is composed of four rounded masses of gray matter. Visual and auditory reflexes—or eye and ear reflexes—are housed in these masses. For example, when a bee comes buzzing toward someone’s nose, he moves his head away. This is a visual reflex, because it involves the coordinated efforts of his eyeballs. When someone whispers near a person’s ear, her first instinct will probably be to move closer to that whisper in order to hear better, which is an example of an auditory reflex. Righting reflexes— which ensure the head is upright and balanced—are also contained in the midbrain.

Cerebellum
The cerebellum is separated from the medulla by the fourth ventricle and cerebral aqueduct and is located below the occipital lobes of the cerebrum. As stated earlier, the cerebellum is connected to the brain stem, cerebrum, and spinal cord by the pons. This part of the brain controls movement, which includes coordination, regulation of muscle tone, and

412 Julie McDowell

maintaining posture and equilibrium in the body. Equilibrium is actually controlled by receptors located in the inner ear. It is important to note that these are all involuntary functions. Because the cerebellum works below conscious thought, the conscious brain is able to function without being overwhelmed. For example, if someone drops a pen while writing, the cerebellum coordinates the impulses that tell her arm, hand, and fingers to pick up that pen. This all happens unconsciously so the brain can focus on tasks that need conscious effort, such as reading or writing.

Hypothalamus
Located at the base of the brain (above the pituitary gland and below the thalamus), the hypothalamus acts as the junction between the nervous system and the endocrine system. The hypothalamus is extremely small—it comprises approximately only 1/300 of the total brain weight. One of its most important jobs is to integrate all the various functions of the autonomic nervous system, which maintains the behavior of organs such as the heart, blood vessels, and intestines. But the hypothalamus has many other important and diverse jobs: • The body’s thermostat: The hypothalamus senses changes in body temperature and then transmits information so the body can adjust accordingly. For example, the hypothalamus will detect an increase in body temperature, which means the body is too hot. A signal will be sent to the skin’s capillaries, telling them to expand to allow the blood to cool faster. Responses such as shivering or sweating are also prompted by the hypothalamus. Oxytocin and antidiuretic hormone (ADH) production: ADH helps to maintain the body’s blood volume by enabling the kidneys to reabsorb water back to the blood. Oxytocin is important for women when they are in labor—it causes contractions that bring about delivery. Stimulating the anterior pituitary gland: The hypothalamus produces growth hormone-releasing hormone (GHRH), which stimulates the anterior pituitary gland to secrete growth hormone (GH). GH helps to encourage body growth throughout childhood—especially in bone and muscle development. But GH is also important in adults





The Nervous System 413

because it processes fats for energy production, increases the rate of cell division and protein synthesis, and speeds up the transportation of amino acids to cells, which enables protein production in the body. • Producing hunger sensations: One of the hypothalamus’s important jobs is to sense changes in blood nutrient levels. When these levels are low, this means that a person needs to eat to replenish nutritional resources. The hypothalamus activates this hunger sensation, so people eat, and blood nutrient levels are raised. This creates the sensation of fullness, so that a person stops eating. Stimulating visceral reactions in emotional situations: When one is feeling intense emotions, such as anger or embarrassment, the hypothalamus detects a change in the emotional state and prompts a response by the autonomic nervous system. People cannot control these visceral responses, and scientific experts still do not fully understand the biological and neurological bases for emotional reactions. Maintaining circadian rhythms: The hypothalamus regulates body rhythms, sleep cycles, and accompanying changes in mood and mental alertness. Our circadian rhythm and biological clock ensure that people are awake and alert during the day and tired at night. When people sleep, the hypothalamic biological clock is reset, and they are able to be awake for the day. If someone gets too little sleep, his clock might not be completely reset, and he will feel tired the next day.





Thalamus
The third ventricle passes through both the hypothalamus and thalamus. Located above the hypothalamus, the thalamus focuses on sensations. Almost all sensory impulses travel through the thalamus. With the exception of smell, the sensory impulses initially enter the brain through neurons in the thalamus. Eventually, these impulses are transmitted to the cerebrum, where they are processed (which eventually leads to perception), but initially, the thalamus categorizes and integrates these impulses. For example, when someone holds a glass of ice water, her body feels impulses related to coolness and the feel of the glass, including its texture and shape, which is perceived by sensory receptors in her muscles. She does not feel

414 Julie McDowell

these sensations separately because the thalamus integrates them before sending them to the cerebrum, where they are interpreted and felt. The thalamus can also block minor sensations, causing one not to be distracted while intensely focused on a particular task. For example, when someone is engrossed in a good book or television program, he might not notice someone coming into the room or speaking to him. The thalamus allows the cerebrum to focus on that book or television program by suppressing these distracting sensations.

Cerebrum
The largest part of the brain, the cerebrum is divided into two halves called hemispheres, which are separated by a deep groove or longitudinal fissure. The hemispheres are also connected by a bundle of nerves called the corpus callosum, found at the base of the longitudinal fissure. A band of 200 million neurons, the corpus callosum allows the right and left hemispheres to communicate with each other. The brain stem connects the cerebrum with the spinal cord. As stated earlier, it is also the general term for the area between the thalamus and the spinal cord, which includes the medulla and pons. The outer layer of the cerebrum is called the cerebral cortex, which is a sheet of gray matter tissue, about 2 to 6 mm in thickness. The word “cortex” comes from the Latin word for “bark.” The cerebral cortex is similar to the bark of a tree—it serves the same protective function. The gray matter is composed of the cell bodies of neurons, which carry out the many functions of the cerebrum. White matter is also located inside of the gray matter. Consisting of myelinated axons and dendrites, the white matter connects the cerebrum’s lobes to one another and to other parts of the brain (the brain’s lobes will be discussed shortly). The cerebral cortex is folded many, many times in the brain. In humans, the cerebral cortex looks like it has many bumps and grooves. These folds or bumps are known as convolutions or gyri (plural of gyrus), and the grooves between them are called fissures or sulci (plural of sulcus). Because of this extensive folding, millions and millions of neurons are located on the cerebral cortex. The degree or extent of folding corresponds with the brain’s capabilities. In an animal such as a cat or a dog, the cerebral cortex does

The Nervous System 415

not have nearly the amount of folding as in a human; therefore, animals cannot do many things that humans do—such as read, speak, or talk.

Lobes
Certain areas of the brain are associated with specific functions. In addition, the cerebral cortex is divided into lobes, which are also associated with certain brain activities. Each hemisphere is separated into a frontal lobe, parietal lobe, temporal lobe, and occipital lobe (Figure 8.14). Table 8.3 shows a summary of each lobe’s functions.

Figure 8.14 Views of the Brain. The longitudinal fissure separates the brain’s left and right hemispheres. The pons, which are visible in the bottom view, help to regulate breathing, and the cerebellum regulates movement. The brain stem contains the pons, along with the medulla and midbrain. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

416 Julie McDowell
TABLE 8.3 Lobes of the Brain
Frontal lobe Parietal lobe Temporal lobe Occipital lobe Motor areas: Control movement Sensory areas: Perceive touch, pressure, temperature, and pain Auditory and olfactory areas: Hearing and smelling; speech areas and hippocampus Visual areas: Vision, spatial distances

The frontal lobes contain the motor areas of the brain—here, impulses are generated for voluntary motor activity and movement. The left motor area (in the left brain hemisphere) controls movement on the right side of the body, and the right motor area (on the right brain hemisphere) controls movement on the left side of the body (Figure 8.15). When someone has a

Figure 8.15 Functional Areas of the Brain. These areas work to regulate speech, cognition, sensory association, motor abilities, and visual processes, among others. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

The Nervous System 417

stroke, also known as a cerebrovascular accident, either (or both) of their motor areas might be damaged, causing muscular paralysis. If the right motor area is damaged, then the left side of the body might be paralyzed. In addition to movement, the frontal lobe is involved in reasoning, planning, emotions, and problem solving. The frontal lobe in the human brain is relatively larger than in any other organism. General sensory areas are located in the parietal lobes. This area focuses on receiving impulses relating to touch, pressure, temperature, and pain. Like the motor areas, the left area of the brain works with the right area of the body and vice versa. Skin receptors transmit impulses to the parietal lobes, where they are felt and interpreted. This area of the brain is also involved with stretch receptors in muscles and with taste— taste receptors, or taste buds, send their impulses to the taste areas of the parietal lobes. Taste areas overlap the parietal and temporal lobes. Auditory (hearing) areas and olfactory (smelling) areas are located in the temporal lobes. Receptors for hearing are located in the inner ear, and olfactory receptors are located in the nasal cavity. In addition, temporal and parietal lobes in the left hemisphere contain speech areas that are involved with the actual thinking that precedes speech. Many people explain away an embarrassing slip of the tongue by exclaiming, “I spoke without thinking,” but in reality, this is impossible. The hippocampus, located in the temporal lobe and on the floor of the lateral ventricle, is involved with memory. Although little is known about how the brain actually stores and processes memories, it is believed that the hippocampus will collect information from many areas of the cerebral cortex, such as people’s names or places where one has visited. If someone’s hippocampus is damaged, they can only form memories that last a few seconds. This is evident in someone who suffers from Alzheimer’s disease. Brain neurons are destroyed with this disease, followed by a loss of memory and the individual’s personality. In addition to the memory functions, the hippocampus is also part of a group of structures known as the limbic system, which is important for controlling emotional responses, such as laughing and crying. The last lobe area of the brain, the occipital lobe, is where the visual centers are located. Visual impulses received by the retinas in the eyes travel along the optic nerves to this area of the brain, where the brain

418 Julie McDowell

processes and interprets what has been seen. Spatial relationships—such as judging distance and viewing in three dimensions—are processed in the occipital lobe. Many areas in the cerebral cortex are not involved with movement or sensations. These are called association areas, and are believed to give people individuality and personality, including a sense of humor and the ability to learn and use reason and logic. See Table 8.4 for more details on the association areas of the cerebral cortex. Two remaining important parts of the brain are the basal ganglia and the corpus callosum, which was mentioned earlier in this chapter. Grouped masses of gray matter within the white matter of the cerebral hemispheres, the basal ganglia regulate certain subconscious aspects of voluntary movement. Examples include movements such as hand gestures while talking or arm movements from front to back when walking. Parkinson’s disease involves an impairment of the basal ganglia.

TABLE 8.4 The Cerebral Cortex
Cortex area Prefrontal Motor association Primary motor Primary somatosensory Sensory association Visual association Visual Wernicke’s area Auditory association Auditory Speech center, or Broca’s area Function Emotion, problem solving, complex thought Complex movement Stimulates voluntary movement Receives tactile (touch) sensory information Processes multisensory information Processes complex visual information Receives simple visual information Comprehends language Processes complex auditory information Processes sound qualities, such as loudness or softness Produces and articulates speech

This part of the cerebrum is in charge of many high-level functions, including language and learning, although language is managed in the left cerebral hemisphere.

The Nervous System 419

Figure 8.16 Cross-Section of the Skull and Brain. The scalp, pericranium, and skull all form the brain’s coverings. (Sandy Windelspecht/ Ricochet Productions)

The corpus callosum is a band of nerve fibers that connects the left and right hemispheres of the brain and allows them to communicate and know each other’s behavior (Figure 8.16). This creates a sort of “division of labor” in the brain, because each hemisphere performs functions the other does not. For example, the left hemisphere contains the body’s speech centers. Because the right hemisphere does not, it has to be able to communicate with the left hemisphere through the corpus callosum to know what these centers are “talking about.” See Table 8.5 for a summary of each hemisphere’s functions.

Meninges
Because the brain is such an important organ, it needs a lot of protection. The initial layer of protection is the scalp, or skin layer, which contains the hair follicles. Right beneath the scalp is the skull, which is followed by

420 Julie McDowell
TABLE 8.5 Hemispheres of the Brain
Left hemisphere Language Math Logic Right hemisphere Spatial abilities and perceptions Facial recognition Visual imagery, music

In general, each hemisphere of the brain is dominant for certain behaviors, although the information is shared through the corpus callosum.

three layers of connective tissues call meninges. Meningitis—a nervous system disease involving the brain—is an infection of the meninges. The outermost layer of the meninges is made up of thick fibrous tissue called the dura mater, which lines the skull. Because of its thickness, the dura mater keeps the brain from moving too much in the skull, which could cause blood vessels to stretch and tear. The next layer is the arachnoid membrane. Arachnids are spiders, so arachnoid is an appropriate name for this layer because it is made up of web-like strands of connective tissue. Finally, the innermost layer is called the pia mater, which is closest to the brain and spinal cord. An easy way to remember these layers is, “The meninges PAD the brain”—“P,” pia mater; “A,” arachnoid membrane; and “D,” dura mater. Between the arachnoid and the pia mater is the subarachnoid space, which contains the clear, colorless liquid called cerebrospinal fluid, or CSF.

CSF and the Ventricular System
Remember that the brain contains four ventricles, or cavities—the two lateral ventricles, and a third and fourth ventricle. Within each ventricle, there is a choroid plexus, a capillary network where CSF is formed from cellular secretions and filtration of the blood, also known as blood plasma. CSF flows from the lateral and third ventricles through the fourth ventricle. Then it continues to the central canal of the spinal cord, then to the cranial and spinal subarachnoid spaces. CSF is reabsorbed into the blood as more is produced. It is through this continuous process that it flows in and around the CNS. When CSF is in the

The Nervous System 421

cranial subarachnoid spaces, it is reabsorbed through the arachnoid villi into large veins within the dura mater called cranial venous sinuses. After this reabsorption, the CSF becomes blood plasma again. The rate of reabsorption usually equals the rate of production. Total daily production of CSF is normally about 13.53–16.91 fluid ounces (400–500 milliliters) and the total volume of CSF remains around 4.28–5.07 fluid ounces (125– 150 milliliters). The CSF is vital to the brain and spinal cord, and has many functions: • Protection: CSF cushions the brain, especially if the brain is impacted by a blow to the head. However, the CSF can only provide so much protection—sharp or heavy blows will injure the brain. Buoyancy: Pressure at the brain’s base is reduced because it is immersed in CSF, reducing the net weight of the brain from about 52.91 ounces to 1.76 ounces (1,500 grams to 50 grams). Waste product elimination: The CSF takes harmful substances and toxins away from the brain. Hormone transportation: The CSF transports hormones to all areas of the brain.



• •

Blood Supply
Blood brings necessities such as oxygen, carbohydrates, amino acids, fats, hormones, and vitamins to the brain. In addition, blood removes carbon dioxide, ammonia, and lactate from the brain (Figure 8.17). The brain occupies about 2 percent of the total body weight in humans, but it receives about 15 percent of the blood supply. The brain has priority over all other organs in the human body for blood, because it needs blood to survive. Cells in the brain will die without oxygen, and it is the blood vessels within and on the surface of the brain that transport food and oxygen. Blood vessels bring their goods to the brain holes in the skull called foramina.

Memory and Learning
Memory is the mental ability to remember ideas and experiences. As stated earlier, scientists believe the hippocampus is responsible for

422 Julie McDowell

Figure 8.17 Arterial Networks of the Brian. The posterior communicating artery, internal carotid artery, and middle cerebral artery form the circle of Willis, which provides the brain with blood if one of the internal carotid arteries or one of the vertebral arteries gets blocked. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

forming, sorting, and then storing memories. The hippocampus is also responsible for connecting new memories with related ones, thus giving them meaning. For example, one might remember the first baseball game she played by associating it with the smell of the grass on the field, the feel of the uniform she was wearing, and the sound of the crowd cheering for her. Each of these is an individual memory that relates to an overall recollection of that particular experience. The initial stage of memory processing involves recognizing visual and auditory (sights and sounds) sensory signals that are stored for only a minute or fractions of a second. This short-term memory retains these bits of information only for a short time, and they are lost if not reinforced or repeated. When stored information is recalled at a later time, this is called long-term memory. Memories become more ingrained in the mind

The Nervous System 423

the more often they are repeated. Therefore, a short-term memory can become a long-term memory. In addition, the memory becomes stronger and more impressed in the brain the more often it is recalled—this is referred to as memorization. For example, say someone is studying a history book on the Revolutionary War for an upcoming test. The more times he reads this book and processes the information, the easier it will be for him to recall what he reads when it comes time to take the test. Certain facts, such as dates of battles, will be imprinted on his memory; the deeper that imprint, the easier and quicker it will be for him to remember these facts. Studies have shown that someone who is wide awake and mentally alert memorizes far better than someone who is tired. Additional studies have shown that the brain is able to organize new information where similar information is stored. If, next month, that same person reads a book about George Washington becoming the first president of the United States, his memory will sort and file these new facts in the same area where it stored what he learned about the Revolutionary War. The memory will relate the new information on George Washington to what he learned about him during the Revolutionary War.

Peripheral and Autonomic Nervous System
As mentioned earlier, the human body’s nervous system is separated into two divisions: the central nervous system (CNS) and the peripheral nervous system (PNS). The previous sections of this chapter explored the brain and spinal cord, the two primary components of the CNS. Through cranial and spinal nerves, the PNS transmits information to the CNS, where the brain processes it and responses are initiated. The internal or visceral organs in the body, such as the heart and lungs, have nerve fibers and nerve endings that conduct messages to the brain and spinal cord. However, people are not aware that many of these messages reach their brain, although they do know that they happen or they would not be functioning. In other words, these impulses never reach their consciousness. These impulses are processed or translated into reflex responses without ever reaching the conscious areas of the brain. For

424 Julie McDowell

example, people do not notice when their blood vessels expand or their heart rates increase; they happen involuntarily. These efferent or visceral neurons are grouped together in the autonomic nervous system (ANS), which falls under the direction of the PNS. This is where visceral neurons, which are neurons associated with the body’s internal organs, relay information to the glands in addition to the smooth and cardiac muscles. Through nerve networks, the ANS facilitates communication between sensory impulses from the blood vessels, heart, and organs located in the chest, abdomen, and pelvis to various parts of the brain (especially the medulla, pons, and hypothalamus). Bypassing the consciousness, these impulses elicit mostly automatic reflex responses in the heart, vascular system, and bodily organs that control temperature, posture, food intake, and reactions to stressful feelings (such as anger or fear), among other processes.

Cranial Nerves
The ANS consists of 12 pairs of cranial nerves, which originate in the midbrain, the pons, and the medulla of the brain stem (Figure 8.18). The pairs are numbered using Roman numerals—beginning in the front and ending in the back—that are based on the nerves’ connection with the brain. These cranial nerves are divided into sensory, motor, or mixed nerves depending on their function. Some of these nerves transport information from the sensory organs to the brain, and other cranial nerves work to control muscles. Some other cranial nerves control glands and internal organs, such as the ear and lung. Mixed nerves, which contain at least one sensory (or afferent) and one motor (or efferent) nerve, originate in more than one nucleus. In some cases, a single nucleus can produce more than one nerve. One example is the sense of taste, which comes from one nucleus even though its function is spread across two nerves. Based on the sensory or motor functions of the cranial nerves, each pair is further defined by one of the following four categories: 1. Special sensory impulses: Senses relating to smelling, tasting, seeing, and hearing. 2. General sensory impulses: Senses relating to pain, touch, temperature, deep muscle sense, pressure, and vibrations.

The Nervous System 425

Figure 8.18 The Cranial Nerve Network. The distribution of the brain’s cranial nerve network. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

3. Somatic motor impulses: These relate to voluntary control of the skeletal muscles. 4. Visceral motor impulses: These relate to involuntary reactions of glands and involuntary muscles such as the cardiac muscle. Nerve pairs I, II, and VIII contain only sensory fibers, whereas III, IV, VI, XI, and XII contain mostly motor fibers. Pairs numbered V, VII, IX, and X contain mixed nerves. Following is an examination of the cranial nerves based on their functions. Optical Sensations and Eye Muscles Nerves III, IV, and VI are motor nerves that help the external eye muscles to operate. The oculomotor nerve, or Nerve III, controls blinking and pupil dilation. When one’s pupils are dilated at the optometrist’s office, the person

426 Julie McDowell

receives eye drops, which are actually an acetylcholine blocker that inhibits the body’s parasympathetic system, which will be explained later in this chapter. Once this happens, the pupils dilate, or expand, and the doctor can look inside the eye lens. However, the patient will not be able to read or focus on close objects because the parasympathetic system is being restrained. The sensory aspect of this category involves Nerve II, the optic nerve, which transmits visual impulses from the eye to the brain. The other two cranial nerves in this category are motor nerves—the trochlear (Nerve IV) and the abducens (Nerve VI) control eyeball movement. Face and Mouth Sensations Nerve V is a mixed nerve that controls all sensations and movements from the face and mouth. For example, this nerve, also called the trigeminal nerve, controls chewing by carrying motor fibers from the face and mouth to the mastication muscles. Another example is getting a hard knot in the cheek when clenching the teeth. This happens when the trigeminal nerve stimulates the masseter muscle. The sensory functions of this nerve include carrying impulses such as pain, touch, and temperature to the brain. For example, when someone is hit in the face, this nerve senses the onset of pain and changes in touch and transmits these impulses to the brain. Another nerve in this category, Nerve VII, is simply known as the facial nerve. All of the muscles involved with facial expression are controlled by this nerve. However, the facial nerve is mixed because it also carries sensory impulses for taste from the tongue to the brain. Taste fibers, which originate from the taste buds, are predominantly located on the anterior two-thirds of the tongue. However, the touch and pain sensations related to the tongue come from Nerve V. Also classified in this category is the olfactory nerve, or Nerve I. This sensory nerve gathers sensations relating to smell from the nasal mucosa (the membrane located in the nose’s interior that produces mucus) to the brain. Hearing and Balance The vestibulocochlear nerve, or Nerve VIII, carries auditory or acoustic information relating to sound from the ear to the brain. In addition to hearing, this sensory nerve controls balance.

The Nervous System 427

Throat and Salivary Glands Nerve IX, or the glossopharyngeal nerve, is a mixed nerve that contains sensory fibers for the throat and for taste from the posterior one-third of the tongue. The tongue’s movement is controlled by the hypoglossal nerve, or Nerve XII. Also located in this category are the motor nerves that control swallowing in the throat. In addition, this nerve contains sensory fibers that control secretions from the salivary gland in the throat. The spinal accessory nerve, or Nerve XI, also controls the throat muscles, in addition to the two major neck muscles. Thoracic Nerve Thoracic refers to the rib area of the spinal cord. Nerve X is the longest cranial nerve. Also known as the vagus nerve, it is a mixed nerve that controls most of the thoracic and abdominal organs, such as the glands, digestion (including the production of digestive juices), and the body’s heart rate. In addition, the vagus nerve contains motor fibers that control the voicebox.

Autonomic Nervous System
An important part of the PNS, the ANS is made up of the motor elements of the cranial and spinal nerves. The ANS consists of visceral motor neurons that connect with smooth muscle, cardiac muscle, and glands. These areas are known as visceral effectors; they receive the impulses from the neurons through the nerve pathways and produce involuntary responses. For example, upon receiving impulses, the heart beats, muscles contract or relax, and glands secrete. There are two divisions in the ANS: sympathetic and parasympathetic (Figure 8.19). In most cases, one will function in opposition to the other. The afferent nerves working for both divisions transmit impulses from sensory organs, smooth muscles, and the circulatory system, in addition to all the body’s organs, to the vital centers of the brain. Then efferent impulses are conveyed from these centers to all parts of the body by way of the parasympathetic and sympathetic nerves, which will be discussed shortly. Basically, the sympathetic division operates in stressful situations, and the parasympathetic controls the body in non-stressful situations. However, both divisions operate under the direction of the hypothalamus. As

428 Julie McDowell

Figure 8.19 Sympathetic and Parasympathetic Nervous System. The left side of the figure details the sympathetic system, along with the preganglionic and postganglionic neurons and the chain of sympathetic ganglia that connects the nerves to their effectors. On the right side is the parasympathetic system, which has various ganglia that connect the nerves to effectors. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

The Nervous System 429

mentioned earlier, the hypothalamus is the part of the brain located right below the thalamus and above the pituitary gland. The hypothalamus has many functions, including regulating body temperature and ensuring that the visceral effectors (smooth muscle, cardiac muscle, and glands) respond appropriately to the impulses transmitted by the visceral motor neurons. It is important to point out the role of autonomic pathways in the PNS. Impulses travel from the CNS along the autonomic nerve pathway to visceral effectors. Along this nerve pathway are located two motor neurons that synapse outside the CNS in a ganglion, which is a group of neuron cell bodies. The first motor neuron is called the preganglionic neuron, which connects the CNS to the ganglion, and the second neuron is called the postganglionic neuron, which connects the ganglion to the visceral effector. The ganglion is made of cell bodies of the postganglionic neuron. Fibers of the preganglionic neuron are short and myelinated, which means parts are covered with a myelin sheath that provides electrical insulation and increases the speed at which an impulse is transmitted. In contrast, fibers of the postganglionic neuron are long and unmyelinated. These ganglia are like relay stations in the body. An impulse or message is transferred at the synapse (located in the ganglion) from the preganglionic neuron to the postganglionic neuron and then to the muscle or gland. This is in contrast to the voluntary nervous system, where the motor nerve fiber functions by beginning at the spinal cord and extending to the skeletal muscle without a synapse. Through these processes of the autonomic pathways, stimuli is transmitted through the body, eliciting unconscious, automatic reflex responses such as the stomach and intestinal digestion, respiration rate and depth, pupil dilation, and blood rate regulation through the expansion or contraction of blood vessels.

Sympathetic Nervous System
The cell bodies of the sympathetic division’s preganglionic neurons originate in the thoracic and some of the lumbar segments of the spinal cord, which are located at the small (or lower area) of the back. Because of this, the sympathetic division is often called the thoracolumbar division. The ganglia of this division are located in two chains right outside of the spinal column. The sympathetic ganglia connect with them on these two chains. The ganglia

430 Julie McDowell

are home to the synapses between the preganglionic and postganglionic neurons. After receiving an impulse, a preganglionic neuron synapses with a postganglionic neuron to initiate a response in an effector. It is important to note, however, that one preganglionic neuron often synapses with many postganglionic neurons, and thus many effectors. This allows the simultaneous responses among many effectors—a vital function of the ANS. When a person becomes angry or afraid, or falls under any kind of stress, the sympathetic division of the ANS becomes dominant in the body (this also includes during exercise). This was essential for the survival of humans’ ancient or prehistoric ancestors. Their lifestyle included hunting live animals for food and protecting themselves and their families from enemies such as animals and other humans. This demanded intense physical activity and endurance. This division of the ANS is often referred to as the “fight-or-flight response,” which was obviously an important inner navigating tool for avoiding danger and defending family and property. Even thousands and thousands of years later, the human nervous system is not much different than that of its prehistoric forefathers. The fight-or-flight response still helps the body to determine the appropriate behavior when it feels afraid or anxious. Table 8.6 shows how some of the body’s organs respond when in a stressful situation. The heart rate increases, and breathing becomes heavier because the bronchial muscles are contracting and the bronchioles are dilating, allowing for increased air intake. In other words, the breathing rate increases. A person might feel more powerful because the liver is changing glycogen to glucose, which supplies the body with more energy. Blood vessels associated with the visceral organs and the skin constrict, thus forcing more blood to vital organs such as the heart, muscles, and brain. But not all organs move at a faster rate. Stomach digestion is not important in stressful situations; therefore, secretion of digestive juices decreases along with peristalsis, the waves of muscle contractions that move food through the stomach muscle. All of these responses enabled prehistoric ancestors to stay and fight or run away from potential danger. People often find themselves in stressful situations that are not life-threatening, such as when they are studying for an important history exam or interviewing for a new job. But the body is prepared to react appropriately when circumstances escalate from everyday stress to life-threatening danger. See Sidebar 8.2

The Nervous System 431
TABLE 8.6 Autonomic Nervous System: Visceral Effectors
Effector Eye muscle (also known as an iris) Salivary glands Nasal and oral mucus (mucosa) Heart Lungs Stomach Small intestine Large intestine Kidney Bladder Liver Sweat glands Skin and viscera blood vessels Skeletal muscle blood vessels Adrenal glands What happens when the sympathetic division is activated? Pupils dilate What happens when the parasympathetic division is activated? Pupils contract

Saliva production decreases Mucus production decreases Heart rate increases Bronchial muscle relaxes Peristalsis reduces Digestion processes slow down Movement and contractions slow down Urine secretion decreases Organ wall relaxes and sphincter closes Glycogen changes to glucose Production of sweat increases Constrict Dilate Secretion of epinephrine and norepinephrine increases

Saliva production increases Mucus production increases Heart rate decreases Bronchial muscle contracts Peristalsis increases, gastric (or digestive) juices are secreted Digestion processes increase Secretions increase, along with movement and contractions Urine secretion increases Organ wall contracts and sphincter relaxes or opens None None None None None

to read how hormones enable the body to react appropriately in these situations. An example of an everyday stress relieved by the sympathetic division is when the body temperature rises when one is sitting by the pool or on the beach. When someone is in a warm environment, this external stimuli can drain the body’s heat reserves. Within the sympathetic division, thermal receptors send messages to the brain through the sympathetic nerve systems. One result of these messages is the expansion of cutaneous blood

432 Julie McDowell

SIDEBAR 8.2

How the Adrenal Medulla Helps Us Fight
The body’s endocrine system controls glands that produce or secrete chemical messengers, known as hormones, into the bloodstream. One of these glands, which is stimulated by the ANS, is the adrenals. The adrenals are located right above the kidneys, and each is made of two small glands that operate independently. The inner area is called the medulla, and the outer area is called the cortex. The two main hormones released by the adrenal medulla, epinephrine (also known as adrenaline) and norepinephrine, are related to reactions to stressful situations also known as the “fight-or-flight response.” Once these hormones are released, some of the effects include an increase in the heart rate, rate at which the body cells metabolize; dilation of the lungs’ bronchioles, so the breathing rate can increase; and the conversion of glycogen (which is stored in the liver) to glucose. Through the blood, this glucose is sent to the voluntary muscles, enabling them to handle an increased workload.

vessels, which reside right below the skin’s surface. The expansion or dilation of these blood vessels enables more blood to flow to the body’s surface, where heat has been lost. This dilation also may cause oozing of certain fluids from the capillaries, causing dependent limbs to swell, which is why people sometimes swell in the heat. This increase in blood flow ensures that all necessary organs are receiving the proper amount of blood. Otherwise, the blood might concentrate in the lower limbs and not get to the brain, which leads to fainting spells. If an organ receives both sympathetic and parasympathetic impulses, the responses are opposite. Note that some effectors can only receive sympathetic impulses (liver, sweat glands, many blood vessels, and adrenal glands). In these cases, an opposite response happens when there is a decrease in the sympathetic impulse. Another important way the sympathetic division responds to excessive heat is by forcing the body to sweat. The brain’s hypothalamus senses a great increase in temperature and conveys this information to the sweat

The Nervous System 433

glands via the sympathetic nerves, which causes one to sweat. Through the evaporation of sweat (sometimes aided by a cool breeze), the body cools down. Once again, this is all involuntary. However, one can cool the body by jumping in a pool or cool shower or even sitting in an airconditioned room, which lowers the environmental temperature.

Parasympathetic Division
Another name for the parasympathetic division is the craniosacral division. In this division, the cell bodies of preganglionic neurons are located in the brain stem and sacral segments of the spinal cord. The axons of these preganglionic neurons are contained in cranial nerve pairs III, VII, and IX in addition to some sacral nerves. These axons extend to the parasympathetic ganglia, which are located in or extremely close to the visceral effector. The postganglionic cell bodies are actually located in the effector, and their very short axons connect with the cells of the effector. Unlike in the sympathetic division, one preganglionic neuron synapses with only a few postganglionic neurons and then to only one effector. This aspect of the parasympathetic division enables single-organ responses, or very localized responses. As stated earlier, this division dominates the body during nonstressful and relaxed situations, allowing several organ systems to function at a normal level and rate. For example, digestion is efficient through increased secretions and peristalsis. Urination and defecation occurs, and the heart rate will be at the normal resting rate.

Neurotransmitters in the ANS
As mentioned, there are two kinds of synapses in the ANS that bring about a reaction in a visceral effector: one between preganglionic and postganglionic neurons, and another between postganglionic neurons and the effectors. In order for nerve impulses to cross synapses, they need the help of neurotransmitters. Acetylcholine is the neurotransmitter released by all preganglionic neurons in both the sympathetic and parasympathetic divisions. A chemical inactivator is located at the dendrite of each postsynaptic neuron to defuse

434 Julie McDowell

the impulse generated by the neurotransmitter. This is because transmitters must be controlled and inactivated—if their secretion was not stopped at some point, then rapid changes in excitation and inhibition would not occur, and all activity would be slowed down. Acetylcholine’s inactivator is cholintesterase, which is located in postganglionic neurons. However, in the parasympathetic division, postganglionic neurons also release acetylcholine right before they connect with their visceral effectors. In addition, most postganglionic neurons in the sympathetic division also release the neurotransmitter norepinephrine when they synapse with effector cells. Norepinephrine’s inactivator is catechol-O-methyl transferase, or COMT.

The Senses
The central nervous system’s five senses—seeing, hearing, touching, tasting, and smelling—allow the body to maintain homeostasis, which is when the internal environment is stabilized despite what constant changes are occurring in the external environment. The senses also protect people by providing information about what is going on inside and outside the body. For example, smelling and tasting might tell someone that something she is about to eat could be dangerous. Our touch sensation tells someone that a stove is too hot and will burn his skin on contact. The information collected by the senses is transmitted through pathways and stimulates electrical nerve impulses. There are four important components of these sensory pathways: • Receptors: Changes, or stimuli, are detected by receptors. All receptors respond to stimuli by generating electrical nerve impulses. However, depending on location, each receptor only responds to certain sensory changes. For example, receptors in the retina detect light rays, while nasal cavity receptors detect airborne chemicals. When the specific stimuli is detected, an impulse is generated. Sensory neurons: These neurons take the impulses produced by the receptors and transmit them to the central nervous system. Although the sensory neurons are located in the spinal and cranial nerves, each carries impulses from only one type of receptor. For example, separate networks of these neurons serve the eyes, nose, ears, skin, and mouth.



The Nervous System 435



Sensory tracts: Impulses are transmitted to a specific part in the brain through sensory tracts in white matter located in the brain or spinal cord. White matter is defined as nerve tissue composed of myelinated axons and dendrites. Sensory area: This is where the impulses, or sensations, are felt or perceived and interpreted. Located in the cerebral cortex, this area functions without a person’s conscious awareness.



Breakdown of Sensations
Sensations have several important characteristics that enable people to feel, see, hear, smell, and taste. The first characteristic is projection. When a hand pets a furry cat, it seems like the sensation is located in the hand. However, receptors located in the hand collect information associated with the cat’s fur and transmit it to the cerebral cortex or the brain, where it is interpreted as soft and fluffy. The brain projects what it feels to the hand. This aspect is evident in patients who have had a limb amputated. Often, patients say that even though their hand has been removed, they feel as if that hand is still there. Even though the hand’s receptors have been removed with the severed limb, the nerve endings associated with those receptors still continue to generate impulses. The brain continues to behave as it did when the hand was still present. When the impulses from these severed nerve endings travel through sensory pathways to the brain, these impulses are interpreted and projected. The brain projects the sensation or feeling of the hand as still present. This feeling is known as phantom pain, and generally diminishes as the severed nerve endings heal. Another important sensory characteristic is intensity, which is how strongly sensations are felt. A weak stimulus, such as a soft hum or dim light, will affect only a small number of receptors. However, a strong stimulus, such as a loud bang or bright light, will affect many more receptors, causing an increased amount of impulses to travel to the brain’s sensory area. Based on the number of impulses received, the brain will respond accordingly. The more impulses received, the more intense the brain’s sensory projection.

436 Julie McDowell

The brain’s interpretations also allow it to contrast previous and current stimulations and allow for inflated or diminished sensations. For example, when someone takes a hot shower, the brain will compare the water temperature to those previously experienced. If the water is hotter than experienced before, the brain will most likely cause one to jump away from the water. But if the water is cooler than usual, the brain will tell one to make it hotter. A third characteristic of the senses is adaptation, or when the body adjusts to a continuing stimulus. Receptors are always ready to detect changes to the body’s external environment, but if the stimulus continues, it becomes less of a change. Therefore, the receptors will generate fewer impulses to the brain, which adapts itself to the stimulus. For example, many people wear jewelry on hands and arms, such as rings or watches. The presence of a ring is a continuous stimulus from the moment it is put on in the morning until it is taken off before bed. However, because it is on all day, the cutaneous or skin senses adapt to the presence of the ring, and the wearer becomes unaware that it is on his finger. Only when there is a change, such as when the ring comes off before bedtime, do the receptors detect a change. After-image is the final characteristic of the senses. This is when a sensation remains in the conscious memory even after the stimulus has ceased. One example is a flashbulb from a camera, which often stays in the memory for a few minutes after a picture is taken. Because the flashbulb produces such a bright light, the receptors in the retina generate many impulses that are interpreted by the brain as an intense sensation. The sensation is so strong that it lasts a bit longer than the stimulus from which it was generated.

Cutaneous Senses
As mentioned earlier, cutaneous senses are those related to the skin (Figure 8.20). The cutaneous senses tell what is happening in and to the immediate external environment, including what is happening to the skin. For instance, an annoying mosquito bite on the knee often produces an itching sensation. This is actually a mild form of the pain sensation. The brain interprets sensory impulses in the parietal lobes. The largest part of this sensory area is reserved for the parts of the skin with the most receptors, which are the hands and face.

The Nervous System 437

Figure 8.20 The Cutaneous Senses. The cutaneous receptors of the skin include the Merkel’s disc, the Pacinian corpuscle, the Ruffini corpuscle, and the free nerve endings. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

Sensations related to touch, pressure, pain, and temperature (heat and cold) are produced by receptors located in the skin’s inner layer, or dermis. Pain receptors, also called free nerve endings, react to any intense stimulus. This means intense extremes of temperature applied to the skin, whether cold or hot, will be felt as pain. Encapsulated nerve endings are the receptors for the other cutaneous senses. This means that these nerve endings are surrounded by a cellular structure.

Taste and Smell Senses
Taste-specific receptors are located in taste buds, which are found in the papillae area of the tongue (Figure 8.21). In general, experts believe there are four types of taste receptors: sweet, sour, salty, and bitter. The papillae’s taste receptors (or chemoreceptors) decipher chemicals from food that have dissolved in the mouth’s solution, also known as saliva. A moist mouth full of saliva is necessary for taste distinction—if the mouth is dry, even the most flavorful food, such as a grilled steak, will have little taste.

438 Julie McDowell

Figure 8.21 Smell and Taste Senses. This midsagittal section of the brain shows the smell and taste nerves and sensory components. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

Most foods contain a variety of the four general flavors and stimulate different combinations of receptors. For example, one bite of a peanut butter and jelly sandwich will stimulate both sweet (from the jelly) and salty (from the peanut butter) taste combinations. The smell of food also contributes to food perception. Impulses relating to taste sensations are transmitted through the facial and glossopharyngeal nerves, which are the seventh and ninth cranial nerves, to the parietal-temporal cortex of the brain where the taste areas are located. Food scientists have found evidence of a genetic link in some taste preferences. For example, people who have an above-average number of taste buds tend to find broccoli bitter and unpleasant, whereas those with an average number of taste buds might like this vegetable’s taste. Olfaction, or the sense of smell, functions through chemoreceptors located in the upper nasal cavities. These receptors detect vaporized chemicals and then generate impulses that travel through the first cranial

The Nervous System 439

or olfactory nerves on the ethmoid bone. From there, these impulses move on to olfactory bulbs and then on to the olfactory areas of the brain’s temporal lobes. Scientists believe there are at least 1,000 different smells. In comparison to other animals, humans have a poor sense of smell. For instance, dogs have a far greater sense of smell—they are believed to smell 200 times better than humans. The olfactory sense has a rapid adaptation rate, which is why pleasant smells tend to be acute and sharp at first but then quickly fade away. As mentioned above, the taste sense is greatly influenced by smell, which is why food can lose its taste when someone has a cold and the nasal cavities are clogged.

Visceral Sensations
Visceral refers to anything that involves the body’s internal organs, such as the glands and the smooth and cardiac muscle. Visceral sensations are the result of internal changes. Two important visceral sensations are hunger and thirst. The receptors that detect hunger and thirst are believed to be specialized cells located in the brain’s hypothalamus. Hunger receptors function by detecting deficiencies in blood nutrient levels, and thirst receptors look for deficiencies in the body’s water content, or the body fluid’s water-salt proportion. People are not conscious of the hypothalamus detecting hunger and thirst because the brain projects these sensations. Thirst is projected to the mouth and throat, which will feel dry because less saliva is produced. Hunger is projected to the stomach, which contracts and feels empty. Usually people satisfy both sensations by eating and drinking. However, if hunger is not addressed with food, eventually the brain adapts and the hunger gradually decreases in intensity. This is because even though blood nutrient levels will decrease and prompt the hunger sensation, these levels eventually stabilize as fat from certain body tissues is converted to energy. Once this stabilization occurs, there are few changes for the receptors to detect, and hunger diminishes. However, the brain does not adapt if the thirst sensation is ignored. The body has no ability to stabilize as the water content decreases. Without stabilization, changes and fluctuations continue, which receptors continue to detect. The thirst sensation increases, and dehydration may result.

440 Julie McDowell

Vision
Vision receptors are located in the eye, along with a refracting system that directs light rays to the vision receptors located in the retina. The eyeball is protected by eyelids and lashes. Eyelids are able to open and close over the eye because they are made of skeletal muscle. Eyelashes border the eyelids and keep dust and other debris from the eyelids. In addition, there is a thin membrane called the conjunctiva that lines the interior of each eyelid. Many eye infections are forms of conjunctivitis, in which the conjunctiva becomes infected and inflamed, making the eyes red and itchy. Located on the upper outer corner of the eyeball are the lacrimal glands, which produce tears that cleanse the eyes and keep them moist (Figure 8.22). Tears are taken to the eye’s anterior region through small ducts.

Figure 8.22 The Lacrimal Apparatus. The lacrimal apparatus is an important protection for the eye. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

The Nervous System 441

Blinking spreads the tears and allows them to wash the eye. Composed mostly of water, tears also contain an enzyme called lysozyme, which prevents bacteria from producing on the eye’s surface. In the outer portion of the middle of the eye are the superior and inferior lacrimal canals, which are ducts that transport tears to the lacrimal sac. Located in the lacrimal bone, the lacrimal sac leads to the nasolacrimal duct, which empties tears into the nasal cavity. This is what causes a runny nose when someone cries. The orbit is a cavity in the skull that protects and surrounds the eyeball. There are six muscles that extend from the socket to the surface of the eyeball. These six muscles include four rectus muscles, which move the eyeball up and down and side to side. The remaining two oblique muscles allow the eye to rotate (Figure 8.23). These muscles function through the third, fourth, and sixth cranial nerves (oculomotor, trochlear, and abducens).

Figure 8.23 The Eye Muscle. This view of the eye displays vital muscles, in addition to the optic nerve. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

442 Julie McDowell

When examining the eyeball’s anatomy, it is important to note the eyeball’s three layers—the outer sclera, the middle choroid layer, and the inner retina. Composed of fibrous tissue known as the white of the eye, the sclera is the thickest layer. The cornea is located on the anterior of the sclera, and is unique from the rest of this layer because it is transparent and has no capillaries. This allows it to be the first part of the eye to bend (or refract) light rays. The second layer of the eyeball, the choroid layer, is made up of blood vessels. In addition, this layer prevents glare by absorbing a certain amount of light within the eyeball. The outer portion of this layer contains the iris and the ciliary body, a circular muscle that is connected to the lens’s edge by suspensory ligaments. Similar to the cornea, the lens is transparent and has no capillaries. The ciliary muscle allows the eye to focus light from objects near and far by changing the shape of the lens. At the front of the lens is located the circular iris, which is known as the colored portion of the eye. The iris’s opening is called the pupil. The pupil’s diameter is controlled by two sets of muscle fibers. When the radial fibers contract, the pupil dilates or expands, which is a sympathetic response. The pupil constricts or reduces in size when the circular fibers contract, which is a parasympathetic response of the oculomotor nerves. This automatic or reflexive response is a protective mechanism because it prevents too much intense light from entering the retina. It also allows more precise near vision, which allows people to read books and other materials that are close to their eyes. Another important part of the eye’s anatomy is the retina, which is located on the interior of the choroid level (although it covers only twothirds of the eye). The retina houses the visual receptors, called the rods and cones (Figure 8.24). Whereas rods only detect light, cones detect colors, which are actually made up of varying wavelengths of visible light. The macula lutea is abundant with cones and is located in the center of the retina behind the lens. The area known for the best color vision is the fovea, a small depression located in the macula lutea that contains only cones. Towards the edge of the retina is where the most rods reside. When light is dim, such as in a dark room or at night, we can best see through the periphery or sides of our visual fields, because this is where most of the rods are located.

The Nervous System 443

Figure 8.24 The anatomical elements of the eye. (Sandy Windelspecht/ Ricochet Productions)

Inside the eyeball are two cavities. Located between the lens and the retina, the larger posterior cavity contains a semisolid substance called vitreous humor. The retina is kept in place by the vitreous humor. However, if the eyeball is injured and the vitreous humor is lost, the retina can become detached. The second cavity, the anterior cavity, is between the front of the lens and the cornea. This cavity contains the aqueous humor, the eyeball’s tissue fluid formed by capillaries in the ciliary body. Aqueous humor flows through the eye’s pupil and is absorbed by small veins called the canal of Schlemm, located where the iris and cornea join together. Because the lens and cornea have no capillaries, they need the nourishment from the aqueous humor.

How the Eye Perceives Light
The vision process begins when the eye’s receptors—the rods and cones— detect light and generate impulses. These impulses are then transported to

444 Julie McDowell

the brain’s cerebral cortex, where they are processed. An important part of the vision process is the refraction of light, which is when a light ray is bent or deflected as it passes from one object into another of greater or smaller density (Sidebar 8.3). In the eye, the refraction of light begins with the cornea, then the aqueous humor, the lens, and finally the vitreous humor. Adjustments can only be made in the lens and depend on the ciliary muscle. When the eye is trying to focus on a distant object, the ciliary muscle will be relaxed, making the lens thin out. But when trying to focus on closer objects, the ciliary muscle contracts, causing the lens to recoil and bulge in the middle, which gives the lens greater refractive abilities. Problems with the lens and ciliary muscle can be addressed with corrective lenses or glasses. The next step in the vision process happens when light hits the retina, causing chemical reactions to occur in the rods and cones. The rods contain a chemical called rhodopsin. During a chemical reaction, rhodopsin breaks down into scotopsin and retinal, a derivative form of vitamin A. An electrical impulse is generated as a result of this chemical reaction. The chemical reactions in the cones also involve retinal and generate an electrical impulse. However, cones are also absorbing various wavelengths of light during this time. There are three types of cones: red absorbing, blue absorbing, and green absorbing. Every ray of light is taken in by one of these types of cones. Dysfunctions of the cones and rods can lead to night and color blindness. The impulses from the rods and cones are carried by ganglion neurons to the optic disc, where they converge to become the optic nerve and exit the eyeball. Because the optic disc contains no rods or cones, it is sometimes called the eye’s “blind spot.” However, the eye is constantly moving and rotating to compensate for this blind spot. The optic nerves from the left and right eye join together at the optic chiasma, located right in front of the pituitary gland. Fibers from each eye’s optic nerve cross to the other side, allowing each side to capture visual impulses from both eyes. In the brain, the visual areas are located in the occipital lobes of the cerebral cortex. These visual areas integrate the slightly different picture transmitted by each eye into a single picture, which is called binocular vision. In addition, the image on the retina is actually upside down, but these visual areas correct this so people see the image right side up.

The Nervous System 445

SIDEBAR 8.3

Correcting Vision Problems through Refractive Surgery
Vision problems are caused by errors of refraction. Normal vision is referred to as 20/20, which means that the eye can clearly see an object 20 feet away. If someone is nearsighted, or has myopia, the eyes can see near objects but not distant ones. For example, if someone has 20/80 vision, this means that the normal eye can see objects clearly at 80 feet away, but the nearsighted eye can only see that object if it is brought within 20 feet. Focusing of images by the nearsighted eye is done in front of the retina because the eyeball is too long or the lens is too thick. This can be corrected with glasses with concave lenses that spread out the light before it hits the eye. When an eye sees distant objects well, it is farsighted, or hyperopic. For instance, vision might be 20/10, which means that it can see at 20 feet what a normal eye can see at 10 feet. This eye will focus images behind the retina due to a short eyeball or too thin lens. To correct hyperopia, glasses with convex lenses are used to unite light rays before they hit the eye. Contact lenses are also used to correct vision problems. In addition to glasses and contact lenses, there are surgical procedures that improve the focusing power of the eye. These are a more permanent approach to vision correction. Here are some details on a few of these surgeries:

LASIK (Laser-assisted In Situ Keratomileusis): Using a laser, this procedure permanently changes the shape of the cornea. The initial step is to cut a flap in the cornea using a blade or laser. This flap is folded back, exposing the midsection of the cornea known as the stroma. Then the laser is focused on the cornea, vaporizing part of the stroma. The flap is then replaced over the cornea. Radial Keratotomy (RK) or Photorefractive Keratectomy (PK): Both of these procedures also reshape the cornea. RK uses a knife to cut slits in the cornea. Like LASIK, PRK uses a laser (the procedure was developed prior to LASIK). While a flap is cut to expose the stromal layer in the LASIK procedure, the PRK exposes this layer

446 Julie McDowell

through the epithelium, which is the top layer of the cornea. The epithelium is actually scraped away to completely expose the stroma. Thermokeratoplasty: This type of refractive surgery uses heat to reshape the cornea. While the source of heat can be a laser, the laser used is different from that used in LASIK and PRK. Another type of refractive surgery is in which heat is used to reshape the cornea.

Hearing
There are three main areas in the ear: the outer ear, the middle ear, and the inner ear (Figure 8.25). Receptors for hearing and equilibrium, or balance, are both found in the inner ear. The auricle (or pinna) and ear canal make up the outer ear. Composed of skin-covered cartilage, the auricle is not important to humans, although it acts as a sound funnel for many animals, such as dogs and cats. Wearing glasses would be uncomfortable without an auricle, but it has no impact on hearing. The second part of the outer ear, the ear canal, acts as a tunnel into the temporal bone and middle ear. The eardrum, also called the tympanic membrane, stretches across the end of the ear canal and produces vibrations when hit with sound waves. These vibrations are transmitted to the three auditory bones called the malleus, incus, and stapes. This last bone, the stapes, transports vibration to the oval window through the inner ear. Air enters and leaves the middle ear through the eustachian tube, also called the auditory tube, which extends from the middle ear to the nasopharynx. In order for the eardrum to function and vibrate, the air pressure in the middle ear must be equal to the pressure outside the ear. Ears often tend to “pop” when the air pressure is unequal, such as when in an airplane or when driving to a different elevation. The “popping” is caused when the eustachian tubes are trying to expand in order to equalize the pressure. The inner ear is located within the temporal bone and encases a bone cavity known as the bony labyrinth. Lined with a membrane called the membranous labyrinth, this cavity contains fluid called perilymph, which is found between the temporal bone and the membrane.

The Nervous System 447

Figure 8.25 The inner, middle, and outer ear structures. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

Endolymph is the fluid found within the inner ear structures—the cochlea (important in hearing) and the utricle, saccule, and semicircular canals (all important in equilibrium). The cochlea looks like a snail shell and is made up of two and a half turns that give it a coiled appearance. The cochlea is divided into three canals filled with fluid. The medial canal is known as the cochlear duct and encases the hearing receptors in the spiral organ, or organ of Corti. These receptors are known as hair cells, although they are not hair at all. These cells contain nerve endings from the cochlear branch of the eighth cranial nerve. Hearing involves the reception of vibrations, the transmission of vibrations, and then the generation of nerve impulses (Figure 8.26). After sound waves enter the ear canal, they are transmitted to the ear structures according to the following sequence: eardrum, malleus, incus, stapes, the inner ear’s oval window, the cochlea’s perilymph and endolymph, and finally the organ of Corti’s hair cells. Vibrations reach these hair cells,

448 Julie McDowell

Figure 8.26 Inner Ear Structures. The inner ear structures are shown with details indicating the direction in which vibrations move during hearing. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

which bend and then generate impulses that travel to the brain through the eighth cranial nerve. Sounds are heard and processed in the auditory areas of the brain, which are located in the temporal lobes of the cerebral cortex. The hair cells are protected by the round window, which is found just below the oval window. The structure pushes out when the stapes pushes in through the oval window, thus relieving pressure and preventing damage to the hair cells. (Sidebar 8.4 contains an explanation of hearing loss.) Two other inner ear structures, the utricle and saccule, are located in the vestibule between the cochlea and semicircular canals. These structures are actually hair cells surrounded in a gelatinous membrane with otoliths, which are tiny crystals of calcium carbonate. When the head changes position, gravity pulls down on these otoliths and bends the hair cells, thus generating impulses. The vestibular portion of the eighth cranial nerve then transmits these impulses to the cerebellum, midbrain, and temporal lobes of the cerebrum. At the subconscious level, the cerebellum and

The Nervous System 449

SIDEBAR 8.4

Deafness
There are three different types of deafness (the inability to hear properly): conduction deafness, nerve deafness, and central deafness. Conduction deafness is when one of the ear’s structures cannot transmit vibrations properly. This can be caused by a punctured eardrum, an auditory bone arthritis, or a middle ear infection in which an excess amount of fluid fills the middle ear cavity. Nerve deafness occurs when there is damage to the eighth cranial nerve or the hearing receptors located in the cochlea. Some antibiotics can damage this cranial nerve. In addition, some viral infections, such as mumps or rubella, can also cause nerve damage. Nerve deafness often occurs in the elderly when hair cells in the cochlea become damaged from years and years of exposure to noise; this hair cell damage is accelerated by chronic exposure to loud noise. Central deafness is when the auditory areas of the brain’s temporal lobes become damaged. This can be caused by a brain tumor or other nervous system disorder.

midbrain interpret and process these impulses to maintain equilibrium. The cerebrum informs us of the head’s position. The last inner ear structure consists of three semicircular canals, which are also involved in stabilizing equilibrium. Each of these membranes is oriented in a separate plane and filled with fluid. At the bottom of each structure is the ampulla, an enlarged portion that contains hair cells sensitive to movement. When the body moves forward, the hair cells are initially bent backward and then straighten. Impulses are generated when these cells bend, and are also transmitted to the cerebellum, midbrain, and temporal lobes of the cerebrum via the vestibular branch of the eighth cranial nerve. The interpretation of these impulses is associated with stopping or starting, accelerating or decelerating, and changing directions. In general, the semicircular canals provide information while the body is in motion, and the utricle and saccule provide information while

450 Julie McDowell

the body is at rest. The brain synthesizes all this information to create a unified sense of body position.

Receptors in the Bloodstream
Two of the heart’s arteries, the aorta and carotid, have receptors to detect changes in the bloodstream. Blood pumped by the left ventricle is fed through the aortic arch, which works its way over the top of the heart. The carotid arteries are the left and right branches of the aortic arch that transport blood through the neck and then on to the brain (Figure 8.27). Both of these blood vessel systems contain receptors. The pressoreceptors are located in the carotid and aortic sinuses and detect changes in blood pressure; the chemoreceptors are located in the carotid and aortic bodies and detect changes in the oxygen and carbon dioxide content of blood. Rather than stimulate sensations, these receptors generate impulses that regulate breathing and circulation. For example, if there is a sudden decrease in the blood’s oxygen content (known as hypoxia), this

Figure 8.27 Regulation of the Heart by the Brain and Spinal Cord. The brain and spinal cord work to regulate various elements of the heart. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

The Nervous System 451

change will be detected by the carotid and aortic chemoreceptors. These impulses are then transmitted through the ninth and 10th cranial nerves (glossopharyngeal and vagus) to the medulla. As a result of the sensory interpretation in the medulla, the respiratory rate and the heart rate will increase to collect and circulate more oxygen. This allows the body to maintain stable levels of oxygen and carbon dioxide in the bloodstream and maintain normal blood pressure.

Summary
The human body’s nervous system has two divisions, the central nervous system (CNS) and the peripheral nervous system (PNS). The brain and the spinal cord make up the CNS, which is where the five senses are processed. The CNS detects a stimulus and facilitates the appropriate response in the effector organ or muscle. The PNS includes the cranial and spinal nerves, as well as the autonomic nervous system (ANS). The ANS has two divisions, the parasympathetic and the sympathetic divisions. Involuntary movements of the body’s smooth muscle system are controlled by the ANS. The foundations of the nervous system are the nerves and nerve fibers, which make up neurons. Neurons are the true activity hub of the nervous system—through the neurons, impulses and related messages are communicated throughout the entire nervous system.

This page intentionally left blank

9
The Reproductive System
Kathryn H. Hollen

Interesting Facts
• The proportions of a developing fetus change dramatically as it grows. The size of its head at the ninth week of development is almost onehalf the total length of its body; an adult’s, in comparison, is only about one-eighth the total length of its body. Increased age in women increases their likelihood of having twins because the zona pellucida tends to be harder in older women and causes the inner cell mass to break into clumps as it “hatches.” About 50 percent of conceptions fail between fertilization and implantation due to abnormalities in the specialized cells required for implantation. A fetus can detect light coming from outside the mother’s body; it will turn to follow a light moving outside and across the abdomen. The first successful vaginal hysterectomy for the cure of uterine prolapse was self-performed by a peasant woman in the seventeenth century. She slashed off the prolapse with a sharp knife, surviving the hemorrhage to live out the rest of her life. The brain of a child malnourished in the womb and in infancy may be 60 percent smaller than that of a normal child.





• •



453

454 Kathryn H. Hollen

• •

Babies in the womb dream, which contributes to brain development. Several theories surround the discrepancy in size between the sperm and the egg. One is that the egg is larger because it contributes most of the bulk to the embryo while the small sperm must be an agile, mobile hunter of the ovum. Another suggests that sperm have to be tiny to be produced in quantity; the more produced, the greater the likelihood that only superior sperm will reach the egg.

Chapter Highlights
• • • • • • • • Sex and reproduction Genetics Cell division Reproductive organs: female and male Endocrine system and sex differentiation Pregnancy: what happens in each trimester Prenatal Care: testing and pregnancy-related complications Preventing pregnancy

Words to Watch For
Alleles Asexual reproduction Blastocyst Chromatin Circumcision Colostrum Complementary base pairs Contraceptives Daughter cells Down syndrome Embryogenesis Epiblast Gametes Gene expression Genetic imprinting Genetic sex Glucose tolerance test Graft rejection Histones Homologous Huntington’s chorea Hypoblast In vitro In vivo Meiosis Mitosis Monozygotic Morula

The Reproductive System 455

Multiple marker test Oocytes Oogonia Phosphates Polyspermy

Sex-linked inherited characteristics Sickle cell anemia Spermatogonia Ultrasound scan

Ureters Vestibule Vestigial Zona pellucida Zygote

Introduction
The systems that animate the human body do not operate independently of one another. They are united by a network of blood, nerves, and tissues that give them substance and function, and, in this respect, the reproductive system is no different from its counterparts. But in another respect, it is unique, for it is the only system in the body dedicated exclusively to the continuation of the species. This single fact dictates a dual direction for the material in this chapter. On the one hand, it must address the biology of the reproductive system that keeps the human race going. On the other, it must also consider, albeit much more briefly, how tapping into human DNA can so transform genetic identity that the definition of what it means to be human may unravel.

Sex and Reproduction
Human beings have sex to reproduce, but there is another reason that is critical to the vitality of the species—and to that of other species as well. In fact, sex is a fundamental feature of the reproductive life of most animals, although some of them engage in it differently from humans. The frog, for example, lays her eggs near a river or stream for later fertilization by any compatible male frog that happens by, while humans customarily have reproductive sex together, at the same time. People are very different from frogs in another way, too, in that human sex can result in serious consequences such as unwanted pregnancy, disease, social disgrace, moral or religious disapproval, or legal difficulties. Asexual reproduction or cloning would likely be easier; hydra and sponges are able to grow buds genetically identical to themselves with far fewer consequences. Flatworms and sea stars reproduce by generating new organisms from their own detached parts. Why do people complicate their lives with sex and all that it entails?

456 Kathryn H. Hollen

The answer is simple: genetic diversity, the mingling of genes from two different parents to create genetically unique offspring. This is the very definition of sexual reproduction, a means of propagation that, unlike the asexual method, reduces the chance that harmful mutations will be passed on because the normal gene from one parent can dominate the defective gene from the other parent. Since not all mutations are bad, however, sexual reproduction is also an avenue for passing on beneficial traits, such as genetic adaptations that might, for example, improve one’s resistance to environmental pathogens. And just in case the species neglects to engage in the reproductive activity that biology has so thoughtfully designed for it, renewed motivation arises from the persistent nudging of the libido—that compelling drive that, some would argue, is second only to the need for food and water in the urgency of its demand. In a strictly biological sense, sex is fundamental to reproduction in humans, as in many other species, because the offspring gain genetic resistance to disease and threatening mutations are minimized or purged.

Genes
Genes, the human genome, genetic engineering, sequencing the genome— most people have heard and read a great deal about these subjects in recent years. Genes determine the characteristics that define the species as human: creatures who walk erect, who are born with two legs and arms and hands, and who are capable of learning to read and write. Genes also determine if a person’s legs will be short or long, his nose large or small, his hair blond or black; each of these traits makes every person unique, even though 99.999 percent of nearly all humans’ genes are same. (Identical siblings like twins, however, start out in life with 100 percent of the same genes.) When deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) replicates and accidentally drops a critical molecule from the gene during transcription, or when environmental assaults such as exposure to cigarette smoke accumulate in the cells’ DNA, the damage can be serious enough that, later in life, the affected twin might develop a genetically related disease while the other does not. Although it is generally understood that every person is the product of unique combinations of parental genes, not everyone understands the

The Reproductive System 457

intricate details: what genes are made of, where they reside in the cell, and how cell division ensures genetic diversity in the species. Like all living things, the human body is made up of chemicals, tiny molecules such as the four amino acids comprising genes. Called bases, these amino acids (adenine, cytosine, guanine, thymine) reside in the cell as part of the coiling DNA that forms diffuse nuclear matter known as chromatin. Two bases, adenine and thymine (A and T), always form one pair, and cytosine and guanine (C and G) always form the other. These are complementary base pairs that, held loosely together by hydrogen bonds, construct the “rungs” of DNA’s familiar ladder or spiraling double helix. When a cell begins to divide, DNA twists and condenses out of chromatin to organize into chromosomes and to replicate. This is how the cell’s copy will receive the same DNA—that is, the same chromosomes and genes. In turn, as these daughter cells divide, they produce exact replicas of themselves. Thus, all the genetic information of the first cell is transferred to every descendant. Although the word “gene” is a singular noun, a gene actually represents the components of a given piece of DNA that act as a single unit to direct an activity. The genes utilize 20 different amino acids that, in turn, can construct about 250,000 different proteins. This is known as encoding; that is, the gene encodes for a protein, an enzyme perhaps, which in turn unleashes a cascade of chemical reactions triggering cellular activity. The gene that initiated this activity is said to have been expressed—that it has been “switched on.” Recent research indicates that proteins called histones embedded within DNA represent epigenetic information that tells genes when to turn on or off. In embryogenesis, the early stages of human development in the womb, they are switched on to tell the cells what kind of tissue to become—transforming a cell into a muscle cell, for instance, and instructing the new cell how to do its job. Every muscle cell division thereafter will produce a muscle cell, but it was a series of genes that told the first cell what to become (Figure 9.1). Cells in muscle tissue look different from those in epithelial tissue, just as both of these look very different from a neuron, a type of brain. How the cells are instructed to become different kinds of cells and thus to take on different functions is a subject of intense interest, not just within the research community, but among the lay public, politicians,

458 Kathryn H. Hollen

Figure 9.1 Cells and Tissues. Epithelial cells give rise to epithelial tissue, which forms the inside and outside surfaces of many organs; the muscle cell depicted here produces smooth muscle tissue, which comprises involuntary muscles like those of the intestines; and neurons (nerve cells) like these feature dendrites, branching arms reaching out from the body of the neuron to receive impulses from the nervous system. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

bioethicists, and the medical establishment. Because that first cell, called a stem cell, has the ability to differentiate into any other kind of cell the genes so order, its therapeutic promise is tantalizing. Researchers are developing techniques to cultivate the cells in the laboratory and to manipulate their differentiation with the goal of growing human organs—in vivo or in vitro—to replace diseased ones. But before therapeutic breakthroughs of this kind are likely to be commonplace, a significant ethical hurdle must be addressed: the stem cells with the greatest potential for differentiation are generally obtained from human embryos, although current research is looking into

The Reproductive System 459

the exciting possibilities of “reverse programming” differentiated cells back into stem cells. Adult stem cells can be harvested for therapeutic purposes from certain portions of the body, but most scientists find them of limited value. Sequencing the human genome simply means mapping all the genes— each specific group of bases that, once switched on, directs the manufacture of the proteins that drive cellular functions. While it is tempting to assign one function to one gene, it is usually not that simple, although there are instances, such as in Huntington’s chorea or sickle cell anemia, in which one causative gene can be identified. Usually, however, it appears that different genes may interact with external features in the environment, or may combine to predispose someone to a disease, or, conversely, to confer resistance to it. Nevertheless, links can be made between the influence of specific genes on specific characteristics or diseases, and some of these will be discussed later in this chapter. Interestingly, although the human genome contains roughly three billion base pairs, scientists disagree about how many of these are genes. Researcher believes that there is a great deal of excess DNA, called introns or “junk DNA,” whose role puzzles scientists. Many believe that these non-coding sequences, probably enough in each person’s 100 trillion cells to reach the sun and back, are made up of meaningless pieces of viruses and other genetic debris whose sole value lies in providing an evolutionary fossil record of human ancestry. Others maintain that they may represent crucial coding sequences that control other genes in as-yetundetermined ways and thus multiply the effect of all.

Chromosomes
The DNA “ladder” has two spiraling “uprights” made up of phosphates, sugars, and bases. One phosphate, sugar, and base form a nucleotide that matches up to its complement, another group of three molecules; if one piece of the DNA is made of phosphate, sugar, and adenine (one of the four bases), its counterpart would be attached at the rung to thymine, sugar, and phosphate. In every cell (except mature red blood cells, which discard their nuclei during human development to carry more oxygen throughout the blood), about six feet (180 centimeters) of DNA resolve

460 Kathryn H. Hollen

out of chromatin into 46 coiled chromosomes that form 23 pairs. Each pair is comprised of two homologous chromosomes—that is, they carry essentially the same genes, but one chromosome is from the mother and one chromosome is from the father. An example is the gene for eye color. Suppose a person inherited a gene for blue eyes from her mother and a gene for brown eyes from her father. The genes for eye color in this case are called alleles because, while they are essentially the same gene—they both transmit eye color characteristics—one encodes for one color on the mother’s chromosome and the other for a different color on the father’s. Thus alleles are different expressions of the same gene on homologous chromosomes. So, 23 chromosomes from one parent pair up with their homologs from the other parent. Each chromosome pair, however, is different from every other pair. Twenty-two of these pairs are called autosomes; the 23rd pair comprises the sex chromosomes, so called because they determine the sex of the offspring and carry the genes for sex-linked inherited characteristics like color-blindness. In women, the sex chromosome is called an X chromosome; in men, it is a Y chromosome.

Cell Division: Meiosis and Mitosis
Humans have two kinds of cells: body (somatic) cells, which form all of their tissues, and sex (germ) cells, which in women are eggs and in men are sperm. Although a human being’s body cells are building and repairing tissues like heart muscle or bones throughout that person’s life, sex cells have prepared themselves for one thing only—reproduction. The decision about which cells became body cells and which became sex cells was a differentiation decision made early in embryogenesis. While it is true that all but the red blood cells contain exactly the same 46 chromosomes, there comes a time when the sex cells must decrease their number to 23, or a haploid (n) number, so that, once male and female sex cells unite in fertilization, the original diploid number of chromosomes, 46 (or 2n), will be restored in the new organism. Sex cells divest themselves of half of their chromosomes, and chromosomes mix up their genes to impart diversity to new cells, during a special type of cell division called meiosis, or meiotic division. Like regular cell

The Reproductive System 461

division, meiosis relies partially on ribonucleic acid (RNA), a chemical closely related to DNA that might be, some suggest, DNA’s evolutionary precursor. In humans, RNA carries out essential missions such as relaying messages from the genes to the cells and replicating DNA so there is a copy available for the new cell. The function of meiosis is to mix both parents’ genes and to reduce the number of chromosomes in the resulting cells by half; whereas, in mitosis (mitotic division), the full complement of chromosomes from the parent cell is passed on to the daughter cell with no change in genetic material. Thus, meiosis ensures the progeny will receive a diverse set of genes and, at the end of meiotic division, the germ cells will have become gametes, reproductive cells containing only 23 chromosomes. When meiosis is completed, the zygote will inherit traits from both mother and father because the nucleus of its father’s sperm contained 23 chromosomes that were comprised of genes the father received from his mother and father, and the nucleus of its mother’s egg also contained, at fertilization, 23 chromosomes that carry genes she received from her mother and father. In this way, the zygote received 46 chromosomes’ worth of its parents’ (and their parents’, and so on) genetic material. Someday, as a sexually mature adult, what is now the zygote may contribute 23 of its chromosomes to its own child. In the male, there is always a sufficient supply of sperm maturing in the testes, because meiotic division has already been completed and four haploid sperm cells from each germ cell reside there. In the female, however, a specific number of egg cells are produced only by mitotic division early in the development of the female embryo, and it is not until the maturing female reaches puberty that, at ovulation, one egg a month will complete its first meiotic division and discharge excess chromosomes not into a second egg, but into a polar body, a poor cousin to the ovum. Meiosis is arrested at that point, and not until fertilization will the ovum complete its second meiotic division, retaining most of the original cellular cytoplasm for itself while the extra chromosomes and remaining cellular material are consigned to another polar body or two, all of which are nonfunctional and will simply degenerate. Immediately after fertilization, the pronuclei of the sperm and egg cells merge and become the nucleus—now with 46 chromosomes—of the newly conceived organism, the zygote.

462 Kathryn H. Hollen

The Reproductive Organs
The last section briefly discussed differentiation—how certain cells become nerve cells, others become muscle cells, and still others become sex cells. In the early embryo, the latter are called primordial germ cells. They migrate to an undifferentiated area of tissue called the genital ridge where they multiply, becoming oogonia in the female embryo’s developing ovaries or spermatogonia in the male’s developing testes, or testicles. The essence of human life, they are poised to complete their development whenever the body summons them.

Female Reproductive Organs
Although several million primordial germ cells are produced during the embryo’s development in the womb, hundreds of thousands die en route to the ovary and afterwards, during a girl’s growth. This is due to apoptosis, or cell suicide, the body’s normal biological response to excessive cell proliferation. A female born with about 2 million eggs in her ovaries is left at puberty with 300,000 to 500,000. Of these, she will use only 400 to 500 throughout her reproductive life. Until recently, scientists believed that women cease egg production forever at menopause. Intriguing new findings in mice, however, suggest that ovarian stem cells continue to produce eggs throughout the animals’ lives. If the same is true in humans, it could have profound implications for infertility and aging in women. The ovaries housing the eggs are two almond-shaped organs, one on either side of the pelvis in the lower abdomen, attached to the uterus by ligaments (Figure 9.2). At any one time, oocytes may be maturing in the ovaries in preparation for eventual fertilization. Regulated by hormones, follicles form around each of the oocytes, one of which matures into a Graafian follicle containing what is by then a secondary oocyte. At ovulation, the mature ovum bursts from the ovary and the next follicle begins to mature (Figure 9.3). Once the egg is released, it is drawn into the Fallopian tube, or oviduct, that leads into the uterus. Each oviduct, about 5 inches (12.7 centimeters) long, has fringelike projections called fimbria that help direct the egg. New studies suggest that the egg’s location in the Fallopian tube is a slightly warmer area than surrounding tissue, and that sperm have heat sensors to guide them to the site. If the

The Reproductive System 463

Figure 9.2 Female internal reproductive organs. (Sandy Windelspecht/ Ricochet Productions)

egg is fertilized, it completes the meiotic division that was arrested at ovulation. Fine hairs called cilia coordinate with the contractions of the oviduct to propel the egg down to the uterus, or womb, the upside-down pear-shaped organ that will house the developing fetus. If the egg is not fertilized, the uterus sheds its endometrium, a special lining that thickens in preparation for the fertilized ovum, and expels it during menstruation along with the egg. Powerfully muscular, the uterus is capable of expanding to the size of a basketball during pregnancy. Its wall has three principal layers: the endometrium; the myometrium, the complex of muscles that surrounds the uterus to contract in childbirth and to help reduce uterine size afterwards; and the perimetrium, the outer layer of connective tissue. The lower third of the uterus narrows into the cervix and the vagina. An organ about one inch in circumference, the cervix protrudes into the upper cavity of the vagina and dilates during childbirth to permit the infant’s head to emerge. Its opening into the vagina, the external os, is

464 Kathryn H. Hollen

Figure 9.3

Ovulation. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

covered with cervical mucus that changes with the cycling of the menstrual cycle. During pregnancy, it thickens, forming a plug to keep out threatening pathogens. Also known as the birth canal, the vagina is a muscular cavity 3 to 5 inches (7.6 to 12.7 centimeters) long that is ordinarily narrow and collapsed on itself, but it expands and lubricates to admit the erect penis during intercourse. If pregnancy occurs, it stretches much more to accommodate the fetus during childbirth. While it is not technically part of the genitalia, the urethra is so intimately associated with both the female and the male reproductive tracts that it merits a brief description here. In the female, urine produced by the kidneys flows down the ureters into the bladder, which stores and then releases it through the urethra to exit the body at the vestibule. There are hidden but important glands on either side of the vagina called the lesser and greater vestibular glands (Bartholin’s glands) that secrete fluids into the labia to help lubricate them during sexual arousal. There are

The Reproductive System 465

two pairs of labia; the labia majora, or larger lips, are the fleshy outer lips that cover the more sensitive, hairless labia minora, or smaller lips. Just behind the urethra, tucked within the labia, is the vaginal opening, which in young girls is partially covered by a thin membrane called the hymen. Although this tissue is usually present in those who have never had intercourse, some girls are born without it or unknowingly tear it during physical activity or with the repeated use of tampons. The small expanse of skin between the vaginal opening and anus is called the perineum. Each female is born with an organ devoted entirely to sexual pleasure, the clitoris. Comparable to the penis in terms of sensation, the exquisitely sensitive clitoris is hooded by a prepuce (a membranous, protective tissue capable of sliding back, or retracting). The glans is the tip of the clitoris that can be seen at the upper junction of the labia minora. The rest of its body is the shaft, which disappears into the pelvis and consists of two cavities that fill with blood during sexual excitement. Some insist there is a knot of tissue ¨ within the vagina known as the Grafenberg spot or “G spot,” a controversial subject because recent evidence suggests it does not exist. But others believe it to be a sensitive site of female pleasure located an inch or so into the vagina on the front wall, adjacent to the urethra and bladder and behind the pubic bone. The external female genitals are referred to collectively as either the vulva or the pudendum. Both terms include the mons veneris or mons pubis, the mound of tissue lying over the pubic bone that in sexually mature women is covered with pubic hair. The breasts are mammary glands that, despite their undeniable sexual significance, evolved primarily to feed the young. The nipples’ so-called erectile tissue—although susceptible to stimulation—is altogether different from that of the penis or clitoris. Smooth muscles within the areola, the differently colored tissue surrounding the nipples, are responsible for the erectility, which probably helps infants find and grasp the nipples more easily. When she enters puberty, a young girl’s breasts begin to accumulate fat and grow. A radiating series of lobes in each breast that reduces to smaller lobules and ends in tiny sacs called alveoli drain into lactiferous ducts carrying milk to the nipples. During pregnancy, high levels of estrogen and progesterone cause the alveoli to fill with proteins and other fluids. When the infant is born, the breasts release these nutrients, or colostrum, which impart the mother’s immunities to the newborn. Within just a few more days, the

466 Kathryn H. Hollen

breasts begin to lactate (produce milk). Nursing not only feeds the child; it also triggers powerful contractions in the mother’s uterus that help it revert to its normal size. When ovulation occurs, the Graafian follicle from which the secondary oocyte erupts is transformed into a corpus luteum, a body that produces the hormones estrogen and progesterone to prepare the uterus for implantation of the fertilized egg. These hormones, under the direction of the pituitary gland, orchestrate the phases of a woman’s monthly menstrual cycle, 28 days long on average. At mid-cycle, ovulation, the lining of the uterus thickens and new blood vessels grow. Ten to fourteen days afterwards, if the egg is not fertilized, the corpus luteum ceases hormone production and degenerates; in response, the endometrium breaks down and is expelled from the body in the form of menstrual blood and tissue. The monthly menstrual cycle begins anew with the maturation of another primary oocyte in one of the ovaries. Although nature’s choice of which ovary is released from the ovum each month is entirely random, evidence indicates an equal distribution of labor—each ovary seems to contribute about half of the total eggs ovulated during a woman’s reproductive life.

Male Reproductive Organs
Spermatogonia, or immature sperm, also undergo changes before they are capable of fertilizing an egg (Figure 9.4). They reside in some 800 feet (24,000 centimeters) of seminiferous tubules, subsequently dividing by meiosis to become spermatids. Then, under the direction of specialized Sertoli cells, they differentiate and mature into spermatozoa, or sperm, several hundred million of which will be made in the testes daily from puberty onward. Since sperm must be kept at the right temperature to remain alive and healthy, the testes are nestled within a pouch of skin, the scrotum, suspended outside the body. In cold weather, the scrotum contracts to pull the testicles closer to the body for warmth. Too much heat can also damage sperm; tight clothing that restricts air circulation or regular bathing in water that is too hot can kill enough sperm to imperil fertilization. At ejaculation, mature sperm stored in testicular ducts called the epididymides enter the vasa deferentia (singular form: vas deferens) that extend up into the body and behind the bladder. There they meet the seminal vesicles,

The Reproductive System 467

Figure 9.4 Male external and internal reproductive organs. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

glandular structures that narrow with the vasa deferentia into ureters, and form ejaculatory ducts. Sitting just below the bladder and surrounding the ureters is the prostate, a gland that contracts during ejaculation and secretes fluids into the urethra. This fluid combines with sperm and the secretions of the seminal vesicles and the bulbourethral, or Cowper’s, glands to make semen, the whitish fluid ejaculated through the urethra at the end of the penis. Like the clitoris, the penis contains spongy tissue whose vessels become engorged with blood during sexual arousal; this causes an erection that allows the penis to penetrate the vagina and deposit semen during ejaculation. Semen protects sperm in several ways: it provides a safe and fluid environment, it helps neutralize harmful acids in the male urethra and female vagina, and it supplies sperm with needed energy to swim up and into the uterus, a journey that must be completed within 12 to 72 hours before they die. Although millions of sperm are contained in a teaspoon or two of semen (the average amount in each ejaculate), fewer than 1,000 will reach the Fallopian tubes.

468 Kathryn H. Hollen

Circumcision
Males and females alike are born with a prepuce that covers the glans of the penis and clitoris, respectively. In males, the prepuce is also called the foreskin. It is attached to the glans but usually, by the time boys are of school age, the foreskin has naturally separated from the penis except for one anchoring point at the frenulum from which it can retract. Many males undergo a procedure to remove the foreskin surgically at birth; this is known as circumcision. Within certain societies around the world, girls and women are circumcised too, in what is usually an excruciatingly painful and mutilating process carried out to allow males lifetime power over female sexuality. Male Circumcision Male circumcision was first performed centuries before the beginning of the common era (BCE), and many cultures since have continued the practice for hygienic, cultural, or religious reasons. Although the procedure is performed nowadays in a clean environment by a trained person, there is a great deal of controversy surrounding it. Because circumcision usually takes place with no anesthesia when one is an infant and has no say in the matter, and because the absence of a foreskin may deprive men of significant sexual pleasure, many regard it as an unnecessarily cruel procedure akin to mutilation. On the other hand, there is evidence that uncircumcised men are more vulnerable to urinary tract infections and sexually transmitted diseases (STDs) than their circumcised counterparts, and they bear a slightly increased risk of penile cancer as well.

The Nervous System
The Brain and Spinal Cord The brain is the most important sexual organ in the human body. Partnered with the spinal cord to make up the central nervous system, it not only supervises the nervous and the hormonal, or endocrine, systems that regulate the physiology of sexual response (what happens chemically and physically in the body), it is also the repository of the images, thoughts, and feelings that humans associate with sex. The oldest neural tissue in the human brain, the reptilian brain is mediated by the influence of mankind’s thinking brain, or neocortex. A third area, the limbic brain, may be thought of as a bridge between the two, and the

The Reproductive System 469

place where emotions and sexual impulses reign. The brain is much more complicated than this; brain structures are coordinated in unaccountably complex ways to balance human instincts and emotions with appropriate behavior. There is nevertheless compelling evidence that some aspects of sexuality are “wired” into the brain. Evolution has etched into humans’ unconscious many of the characteristics that are desirable in a mate, and these traits subtly influence how they choose one another. Men may look for the “right” proportions in women, a certain waist-to-hip ratio that suggests a suitable physique for pregnancy and sufficient fat deposits to nourish the young. Women, on the other hand, may tend to seek men who are tall, perhaps because their increased height once conferred hunting advantages and thus meant they would be better providers for the family. In most cases, men and women are not consciously aware of making these choices; they know only that they find someone sexually attractive.

The Peripheral Nervous System and Neurotransmitters The first arm of the nervous system, the brain and spinal cord combination, works in concert with a second arm, the peripheral nervous system, made up of neural networks that thread throughout the body. It is divided into two parts, the somatic and the autonomic. The somatic sends sensory signals to the brain and activates certain kinds of motor activity, but in human reproduction, the autonomic nervous system (ANS) is the main player. It is always working, orchestrating involuntary functions outside of one’s control. Very simply put, its sympathetic system makes preparations for the body to go into action, and its parasympathetic system reverses the preparations. (A third part of the ANS is the enteric system, which influences certain functions such as digestion.) When sexual arousal occurs, the sympathetic system increases pulse rate and saliva production, quickens breathing, and raises blood pressure; as excitement ebbs, the parasympathetic system slows pulse rate and breathing, lowers blood pressure, and decreases glandular secretions. But this is by no means the whole story. Communication among the cells of the body is an extraordinarily complex process that relies on chemical messengers. Some of these are neurotransmitters, made by nerve cells to carry messages in the form of impulses across the synapses, or gaps, that separate them. They convey emotions, thoughts, ideas—all the neural

470 Kathryn H. Hollen

processing that animates humans—and help regulate the secretion of hormones. Some are called the “feel-good” neurotransmitters: dopamine, acetylcholine, and the endorphins, known as natural painkillers. These, along with other biochemicals like norepinephrine and serotonin that act as neurotransmitters in the brain, seem to have major roles in sexuality and reproductive functions, probably due to their regulatory effects on mood. An imbalance or deficiency in any one of these neurotransmitters can result in depression, lethargy, insomnia, anxiety, or difficulty with concentration. The body carefully governs this delicate mix primarily through the hypothalamus. The hypothalamus is a regulatory organ in the brain that maintains conditions in the body like temperature, metabolism, and blood pressure, and oversees the limbic system, where emotions such as aggression and rage reside. It also issues critical instructions to the pituitary, the master gland that, directly or indirectly, dispenses the body’s hormones.

Hormones
Hormones are another kind of biochemical messenger. There are two types, steroid and nonsteroid, that are secreted by glands throughout the body that comprise the endocrine and exocrine systems (Figures 9.5 and 9.6). By means of a biofeedback mechanism, the hypothalamus is alerted to abnormal biochemical levels; in response, it secretes neurohormones to tell the anterior and posterior lobes of the pituitary to increase or decrease the relevant hormones (Sidebar 9.1). For example, when the hypothalamus releases the neurohormone gonadotropin-releasing hormone (GnRH) to the anterior pituitary, it is telling the gland to produce both folliclestimulating hormone (FSH) and luteinizing hormone (LH), chemicals that the ovaries and the testes require to support egg and sperm development. Once the pituitary delivers the message, the ovaries and testes begin to do the work to which they have been hormonally assigned. An example of a hormone produced by the posterior pituitary is oxytocin, related to uterine contractions, milk production, and emotional bonding. Steroid hormones are made by the adrenal glands in both males and females. These chemicals are converted primarily to estrogen in women and, to a lesser degree, to testosterone; in men, they are converted primarily to testosterone and, to a lesser degree, to estrogen. These, along with

The Reproductive System 471

Figure 9.5 Glands of the human body. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

progesterone, are called the sex hormones because they are also produced in the ovaries and testes and are fundamental to reproductive biology. The Role of Hormones in Embryonic Sex Differentiation When fertilization occurs, the chromosomal arrangement of the merged gametes determines the genetic sex of the child. An X ovum fusing with a Y sperm yields an XYembryo, or a male. An X ovum fusing with an X sperm yields a girl. But the “default” embryo—the newly conceived embryo that has not yet developed sexual organs or produced hormones—is generally considered female until other steps involved in sex differentiation take place. It is critical that each step occurs at the right time, or normal development will go awry. A seven-week-old XY embryo already has testicular tissue identifying him, at the level of his gonads, as male, just as an XX embryo has ovarian tissue identifying her as female. Both embryos have two ducts, the Wolffian ¨ and the Mullerian, that will be transformed into the reproductive structures

472 Kathryn H. Hollen

Figure 9.6 Biomechanical pathways. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

of either the male or the female, respectively. Scientists believe that a gene expressed only in the embryonic male brain triggers the development of testes; the early testicular tissue secretes testosterone, the transforming agent ¨ that causes the Mullerian duct to degenerate and prompts the male genitourinary tract to develop. In contrast, without that testosterone acting on the ¨ XX embryo, the Wolffian duct degenerates, leaving the Mullerian to give rise to the female’s reproductive organs. Just as hormones are associated with the differentiation of the gonads and external reproductive organs, so are they associated with sex differentiation in the brain. Once again, testosterone plays an especially critical role. Remember that the brain of the embryo is still that of the “default” gender, even though male sexual organs may have begun development.

The Reproductive System 473

SIDEBAR 9.1

The Hypothalamus and Mechanisms of Feedback
Also known as the body’s “guardian,” the hypothalamus ensures homeostasis, or equilibrium, within the body. It provides a link between the nervous and endocrine systems to regulate temperature; maintain appropriate hormone levels; signal sensations of hunger, fullness, and thirst; juggle aggression, fear, and rage; and set circadian (sleeping versus waking) rhythms. In reproduction, it triggers the pituitary to prompt sex hormone production by the ovaries and testes. While it is not completely understood how the hypothalamus receives all of its input, it is known that several afferent pathways carry neurotransmitters and biochemicals into the organ from the brain and body. To help regulate reproductive functions, it relies on a feedback system; negative feedback is a function of hormone levels. For example, reduced blood concentrations of estrogen and progesterone that result from the degeneration of the corpus luteum after ovulation alert the hypothalamus to a low level of these essential hormones. The hypothalamus releases GnRH that instructs the pituitary to secrete FSH and LH to stimulate ovarian production. As blood levels of the newly produced hormones then rise, the hypothalamus stops triggering their secretion. This mechanism is illustrated in Figure 9.6.

To masculinize the brain, a certain amount of estrogen (testosterone that has been converted in the male’s body) must pass through the brain barrier. It is not entirely clear why it is the primarily “female” hormone estrogen that is required, but one thing is very clear—estrogen must not be permitted to penetrate the female’s brain barrier at this stage. A protein the female embryo produces, called alpha-fetoprotein, erects a barrier of its own that successfully blocks the estrogen’s entry. This process does not mean that estrogen is responsible for every “male” thought a man possesses. While it seems likely that hormones regulating sex differentiation are responsible for some of the structural differences between the male and female brain, it is also clear that social

474 Kathryn H. Hollen

or cultural factors affect its fundamental development as well. During their youth, boys and girls are bombarded with input that will shape their individual sexual identities. General attitudes as well as individual experiences can influence them; today’s “ideal” woman is thin, for instance, but before World War I, with a few exceptions, the plumper, rounded female figure was widely favored. However, there is consensus that even if a given input has no intrinsic sexual content, it could be integrated differently by a male brain than by a female brain, simply because their neurological networks are different. Analyzing what this means in terms of human behavior is not the focus of this chapter, but the implications offer a tantalizing glimpse into how profoundly the brain affects human sexuality and how differently it shapes male and female perceptions.

The Libido and the Physiology of Sexual Response
The sex drive, or libido, is one of the most compelling drives in human experience, in part because it ensures continuation of the species. It is a source of great pleasure and fulfillment, but it can also be responsible for great heartbreak and loss—even, in extreme cases, violence. People under its influence have jeopardized marriages, parental rights, job security, economic status, national or international prestige, and countless other symbols of stability and respectability for what is sometimes only a “one-night fling.” The first phase, excitement, is the period when sexual stimulation activates the sympathetic nervous system to increase heart rate, produce hormonal secretions, and develop tissue swelling and erection. When someone responds to stimuli, the sympathetic arm of the ANS instructs the Cowper’s glands in the male to secrete fluid; it tells the arterioles, the blood vessels that carry blood from the heart, to dilate, opening them wider to allow greater blood flow. At the same time, it orders the venules, small veins carrying blood back to the heart, to constrict and thus prevent too much blood from returning; in this way, blood accumulates in the genitals and, in the male, engorges spongy tissue in his penis to cause an erection. Similarly, in the female, engorgement causes her clitoris to become erect while her vestibular glands secrete lubricating fluid and her pulse rate and blood pressure rise. In addition, her breasts and the outer portion of her vagina may swell as her labia become darker in color.

The Reproductive System 475

The second phase, plateau, is an intensification of excitement; vascular congestion in the genitals is at its peak, flushing of the skin might occur, and muscles of the thighs and buttocks tighten. Interestingly, the clitoris retracts under its prepuce in this phase and shortens by up to 50 percent, a phenomenon that seems to signal the onset of female orgasm. The third phase is orgasm, or climax. The male reaches ejaculatory inevitability, or “the point of no return” at which he can no longer delay powerful spasms that originate in the epididymides and pulse through the vasa deferentia and prostate. The entire nervous system becomes involved; this is the height of his pleasure, and the moment that sexual tension is discharged amid strong contractions that ordinarily lead to ejaculation. But not always. Men may also have a “dry orgasm,” an orgasm with no expulsion of seminal fluid. This syndrome can accompany certain neurological conditions or diabetes, it can occur in perfectly healthy males who have ejaculated frequently over a recent period of time, and, most commonly, it happens to young boys nearing puberty when they are experiencing sexual pleasure but their semen-producing organs have not fully matured. Retrograde ejaculation, when semen backs up into the bladder, is another reason for dry orgasm. In the absence of disease, this is a normal phenomenon following several episodes of arousal that do not result in orgasm; fluids quite literally back up into the bladder and subsequently must be released during urination. Physiologically, the female’s orgasm is similar to the male’s in terms of buildup and the point at which contractions begin. These are overwhelmingly pleasurable, pulsing through her uterus and vagina in wavelike patterns. Although her orgasm is not necessary for fertilization, uterine spasms in the outer third of the vagina can dip the cervix into contact with sperm and may even help draw sperm up into the cervix, increasing the chance of fertilization. Because she produces no sperm, however, her pleasure and orgasm are almost incidental to the biology of human reproduction; if her menstrual cycle deems her ready for fertilization, there is every possibility she will be impregnated even as a result of rape, no matter how brutal her experience. Some schools of thought hold that there are two types of female orgasm, vaginal and clitoral, the latter, according to Freudian psychoanalytic theory, being the more “immature,” and that an individual woman is capable of experiencing only one kind. Others maintain that the same woman,

476 Kathryn H. Hollen

depending in part on how and where she is stimulated, can experience both. Some women report that an orgasm felt deeply in the vagina is the more intense of the two, triggering stronger uterine and vaginal contractions, while other women say that sensations arising from clitoral stimulation are more pleasurable. All must agree, however, that it is actually the brain that reigns supreme in the sexual response department, for only the brain can trigger a spontaneous orgasm. A sleeping person receiving none of the physical or external stimulation on which arousal normally relies can have an orgasm simply because his or her brain created some exciting imagery. In fact, so complete is the brain’s mastery over arousal that some women can fantasize to orgasm while fully conscious, using nothing for stimulation but the rich material her neural activity evokes. The final period of a sexual encounter is called resolution, when the parasympathetic system begins to reverse the excitement that its counterpart ignited and allows blood from engorged genitals to ebb. Norepinephrine, one of the feel-good hormones, is released, adding to the overall sense of well-being and relaxation that the participants enjoy.

From Sex to Pregnancy—or Not
Despite scientists’ sophisticated understanding of human reproductive biology, conception, the beginning of life, cannot be defined. Just because a sperm has penetrated an ovum does not mean fertilization has taken place; that occurs only when the pronuclei of the sperm and egg (two gametes, each with 23 chromosomes) fuse to create a zygote, whose nucleus will then contain 46 chromosomes. Some view fertilization as the moment of conception. Others feel that fertilization merely launches cell division, producing a nondescript cluster of cells that is not alive until it implants in the womb, establishes a nourishing blood supply, and begins to differentiate into human tissue; these events, they believe, represent conception. So to avoid any misunderstanding, fertilization, rather than conception, is used here to describe the beginning stages of embryogenesis. Most biological processes build on one another and balance complex cellular and hormonal activity with split-second timing. Nowhere is this more evident than in a human being’s first three months in the womb.

The Reproductive System 477

Developments during the last six months are much less dramatic but are equally important, because they represent organ maturation and growth necessary for life outside the mother’s body. Every parent hopes for a normal pregnancy that ends with the birth of a healthy child, and the following describes how such a pregnancy might unfold in the context of a hospital or home delivery attended by physicians or midwives. In addition, prenatal care, fetal and maternal screening, and frequent medical issues pregnant women encounter are discussed. Many women choose not to have children. In recent decades, thanks to dependable contraceptives and safe, legal abortion, a decision to postpone or avoid parenthood entirely can easily be made. This section concludes with a description of the methods used to prevent or terminate unwanted pregnancies.

The First Trimester
Fertilization Given the long and dangerous journey each sperm makes, from the upper vault of the vagina through the cervix and uterus and into the Fallopian tubes where it encounters the ovum, it is surprising that fertilization occurs at all. But out of the millions of sperm ejaculated during intercourse, a few hundred or so do indeed survive the journey and, in as little as 15 minutes or as much as 72 hours, reach the upper Fallopian tubes where the ovum awaits, abundantly covered with sperm receptors. Normally, only one sperm can penetrate the ovum; the moment its surface enzymes digest a path through the ovum’s outer layer, the zona pellucida, the ovum dispenses enzymes of its own that break down its receptors and harden its outer layer to make it impenetrable. In a rare event known as polyspermy, more than one sperm breaks through. Because this leads to altered chromosome numbers that would result in abnormal development, the ovum fails to develop and is expelled (see Sidebar 9.2). Although fertilization occurs just after ovulation, the medical community usually calculates pregnancy, or gestation, to begin at the start of a woman’s most recent period and to last 280 days (rather than the 266 days elapsing between fertilization and childbirth). The 280 days or 40 weeks are divided into three trimesters, the first spanning the weeks between

478 Kathryn H. Hollen

SIDEBAR 9.2

The Question of Twins
Polyspermy raises the question of twins: if only one sperm can fertilize an egg, how do twins develop? The twofold answer lies in the difference between fraternal and identical twins.

Fraternal Twins These children are not identical and may be male and female; they result from two different eggs being fertilized by two different sperm. In a given month, a female may ovulate from both ovaries; each of her two Fallopian tubes contains a mature ovum awaiting fertilization. After intercourse, a different sperm fertilizes each. So two genetically distinct siblings— brother-brother, sister-sister, or brother-sister—will become embryos. They are no different from any other sibling combination except that they were nurtured in the womb at the same time rather than, typically, a few years apart. Fraternal twins are often referred to as double-egg twins, and these are the types of twins that tend to run in families. Identical Twins These two, on the other hand, developed from the same egg and the same sperm and therefore have the same genetic makeup. How do two (or, in the case of triplets or quadruplets, three or four) identical children emerge from one egg? It is because a single fertilized egg, when it begins to divide by mitosis and grow, produces daughter cells identical to itself; rather than staying attached to one another in a single ball, they may split into two (or more) groups. Each group has the same genetic makeup, and each begins to grow at the same rate. Two groups of daughter cells produce identical twins, three groups produce identical triplets, and so on. Many mistakenly believe that identical twins can be male and female. Their identical genes clearly make this impossible. Moreover, this socalled “single-egg” twinning does not appear to run in families. What many may not realize is that twins are not truly identical, even though they have just been described as such. If the twins implant in the uterus at different places, they will receive substances from the mother’s

The Reproductive System 479

bloodstream differently; one twin may be exposed to a greater concentration of certain bacteria than the other. Their genetic makeup can change slightly after the blastocyst splits into two groups, because a few of one twin’s genes may be damaged during subsequent cell division while the other’s are not. After birth, they are exposed to environmental influences that will affect the genetic makeup of each twin differently. Then there is genetic imprinting, the process by which certain genes are turned “on” or “off” based on which parent they came from; because this somewhat random gene activation will occur differently in each twin, their tissues—some imprinted, some not—will develop somewhat differently. For this reason, many scientists prefer “monozygotic” to “identical,” and nowhere is the reason for this preference better illustrated than in forensic investigation. If a monozygotic twin is suspected of a crime, DNA evidence cannot identify which twin is the culprit because current analytic techniques cannot discern the tiny mutations and variations that differentiate the two. So for now, investigators must hope the guilty twin left some fingerprints behind because, surprisingly, the fingertips of monozygotic twins are not the same. In an excellent example of how environment literally shapes development, the different whorl patterns of identical twins’ fingerprints arise in part from the amniotic fluid surrounding them as well as their contact with each other, themselves, and the walls of the uterus.

the last menstrual period through the end of the 12th week. The second trimester is almost four months, covering the 13th week through the 27th; and the third occurs between the 28th week and the 40th. Another system for marking pregnancy’s passage, used during the 10-week-long first trimester, pinpoints 23 stages of embryogenesis beginning with fertilization at Stage 1, quickly followed by cleavage at Stage 2. Cleavage Fertilized at the upper end of the Fallopian tube, the zygote must make its way to the uterus, implant, and begin developmental growth. As it migrates, it undergoes cleavage, or cell division. The resulting daughter cells divide

480 Kathryn H. Hollen

every few hours, creating a cluster that is the multicelled embryo. The cells then flatten to form tighter junctions, compacting into a rounded morula that enters the uterus about the fifth day after fertilization. At Stage 3, the morula develops fluid at the center and becomes a blastocyst. As fluid accumulates, the blastocyst for the first time begins to display signs of cell differentiation. There is an inner cell mass that represents the embryo-to-be; a discernible outermost collection of trophoblast cells that later contributes to the placenta, an organ that supplies nutrients to the fetus and removes waste products such as carbon dioxide; and the umbilical cord, a network of blood vessels that connects the embryo to the placenta. The fluid-filled center is contained by the amnion, a membrane surrounding the embryo that suspends it in amniotic fluid. Identical twins can result from cleavage if daughter cells split and implant at different sites in the uterus, each developing its own amnion and placenta. These cases account for about 10 percent of identical twins. Another 70 percent or more are formed when the inner cell mass splits, forming two embryos and two amniotic sacs. Or, both may share an amniotic sac; if the cells fail to separate completely, the embryos will be conjoined (or Siamese) twins. Twins sharing an amniotic sac and placenta are at high risk. Nearly a week after fertilization, the zygote is ready to implant in a uterus already prepped by the pituitary’s hormonal directives. At Stage 4, the cluster of cells erupts from the still-intact zona pellucida to land on the blood-rich endometrium of the uterus, where it burrows aggressively and initiates physiological changes in its maternal host that she will soon be unable to ignore. The Primitive Streak and Gastrulation About this time, Stages 5 through 8, a placenta forms and becomes anchored to the uterine wall by means of chorionic villi, or “fingers,” that infiltrate the endometrium. The blastocyst’s inner cell mass divides into an epiblast that forms the embryo and a hypoblast that forms the yoke sac, a structure that supplies early nutrients in other animal embryos but may be vestigial in humans. A groove called the primitive streak forms along the back of the inner cell mass. Cells along this groove migrate inward in a process called gastrulation, during which they differentiate into three rudimentary tissues (embryonic germ layers) that in turn give rise to

The Reproductive System 481

different organs and body systems: the outer ectoderm, cells that will form the nervous system, outer tissues like skin, hair, mouth, and anus, and the lenses of the eyes; the endoderm (sometimes called the gastroderm), an innermost layer that will become the linings of glands and internal organs comprising the digestive, respiratory, and endocrine systems; and the middle layer known as the mesoderm that will develop into the reproductive system, heart, lungs, and blood, and whose cells will develop segmented tissues called somites to become muscles and bones. The notocord, a rodlike structure that orients the organism to top and bottom, front and back, left and right, and forms the basis of the backbone, will also emerge from the mesoderm, followed by primitive development of the nervous system in Stage 8. Occurring close to the third week of embryogenesis, gastrulation is a pivotal point of development in the first trimester because it marks the beginning of organ formation. This is a critical time for the embryo, since certain viruses or drugs or inadequate nutrition can gravely imperil its development and is one of the many reasons prenatal care is so important early in pregnancy.

The Embryo The embryo’s first three months of life are characterized by the most dramatic changes a human organism ever experiences. With a developing notochord serving as an axis, the three cellular layers curl under themselves to form a tube with a hollow “gut” through the middle. The body plan is taking shape, and primitive blood vessel networks are developing. Already elongating, the embryo’s lumpy body indicates accelerating tissue differentiation. Thickened circles along its upper sides suggest the eyes that are to come and, nearby, puckered areas reveal the sites of future ears. By Stage 9, its primitive heart begins to beat and blood vessels grow, even as a large forebrain starts to dominate the embryonic structure. In Stages 10 through 12 (weeks 3 and 4), changes become more marked. The embryo curls into a “C” shape, displaying budlike limbs. Digestive organs and glands start to develop, and the early division of the heart into distinct sections begins when blood circulation is established and heart valves are more defined. Extensive groundwork for central nervous system

482 Kathryn H. Hollen

development occurs during these stages. A thin layer of skin forms over facial features that are beginning to distinguish themselves; nasal pits are visible, and the depression that will become the mouth appears. Stages 13 through 18, during weeks 5 through 7, are characterized by the appearance of a fully developed umbilical cord, lengthening appendages, and a lobed heart. Digestive organs can be seen now, especially the intestines, which have grown so quickly they temporarily reside outside the abdominal cavity. The esophagus develops out of the trachea, and the lungs form. The embryo’s trunk straightens to hold its head more erect, and its bones become harder. Fingers and toes are becoming more distinguishable, and genital membranes primed for male or female devel¨ opment reveal the influence of the Wolffian and Mullerian ducts described earlier in this chapter. An increase in brain size, the growth of vocal cords, and progression of organ development characterize the next three weeks of the first trimester, Stages 19 through 23. Male or female genitalia become distinct as the testes begin their slow descent into the scrotum or the ovaries relocate to the pelvic region. The embryo’s chin sharpens. The pancreas begins to secrete insulin, hands display dexterity, and both body hair and fingernails grow. By the end of the eighth week, when its facial features are recognizably human, the embryo becomes a fetus (Figure 9.7). Only one inch (2.54 centimeters) long, it appears to swallow, even hiccup, and in its tiny mouth are 32 buds that will become permanent teeth. The muscles function more smoothly and the fetus makes random movements, although its mother cannot yet detect them. The Mother It is very unlikely the mother is having any symptoms of her pregnancy this early, but already her body is undergoing radical changes to accommodate a bundle of cells that her body regards as foreign—in this case, the embryo, whose genetic material is different from hers. Human immune systems do not accept alien invasions gracefully; they make very sharp distinctions between “self” and “nonself,” and the mother’s system would immediately identify this stranger as “nonself.” But just as her system poses a problem, it provides a solution. First, before the fertilized ovum descends all the way down the Fallopian tube,

The Reproductive System 483

Figure 9.7

Full-term fetus. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

the mother’s uterine mucus lining forms a membrane called the decidua so that, when the embryo implants, the decidua wraps over the organism to separate it from the inner wall of the uterus. This prevents the mother’s immune system from “seeing” the embryo. Second, because there must be some kind of connection between her uterus and her child if the embryo is to survive, a placenta begins to develop from both the decidua and the fetal chorion, a layer of tissue that lies between the embryo and the decidua. This becomes the critical passageway for the transfer of nutrients and wastes between mother and child. Life-sustaining chemicals pass back and forth between the two: from the embryo to and from the placenta via the umbilical cord, and from the mother to and from the placenta via its attachment to her uterine wall. This vital activity escapes the surveillance of the immune system because the blood systems of mother and embryo do not touch. How, then, do they make the exchange? There are complex theories that genetic imprinting and graft rejection molecules are involved, but to what degree is not known. What is known is that the biochemicals exchanged by mother and fetus rely on the placenta, where osmosis and diffusion make the transfer.

484 Kathryn H. Hollen

The placenta also produces hormones, initially just enough to prevent the degeneration of the ovary’s corpus luteum that is keeping the endometrial lining richly supplied with blood. When the placenta is capable of producing enough hormones on its own, usually after the first three months, the corpus luteum begins to disintegrate. The yolk sac usually disappears by the seventh or eighth week. Much of the embryo’s very early development occurs before the mother even realizes she is pregnant. If she becomes aware of anything unusual, it might be that her menstrual period is a day or two late, but even in this she could be misled by the light vaginal bleeding or “spotting” that many pregnant women experience during embryonic implantation. (To add to the confusion, some women actually continue to have periods throughout their pregnancy, but this is rare.) Her breasts may be sore too, the kind of tenderness that just precedes her period. So, unless she is consciously awaiting confirmation that she is pregnant, she is oblivious to her condition. That will change by the time her period is four weeks late. The embryo’s primitive heart has been beating for two weeks, and the mother will have developed symptoms such as fatigue, lightheadedness verging on fainting, and “morning sickness.” The latter is a misnomer; the syndrome is more properly known as “pregnancy sickness,” or the “nausea and vomiting of pregnancy” (NVP) because the nausea can occur anytime, even in the middle of the night, and may range from slight queasiness to persistent vomiting and dehydration. If the nausea is severe (hyperemesis gravidarum), medical intervention is required, but for the usually mild-to-moderate sickness associated with the first trimester of normal pregnancy, small but frequent meals, avoidance of certain foods, and plenty of fluids will often alleviate symptoms. Although the causes of NVP are not fully understood, the most common hypothesis points to elevated hormones. The reasoning is that higher hormone levels seem to support a healthier pregnancy; women with healthier pregnancies—those who miscarry less frequently—have more NVP. Others believe that NVP is an evolutionary adaptation to prevent mothers from eating foods that are potentially toxic to the embryo. The high levels of hormones a pregnant woman produces are due in part to the corpus luteum producing more estrogen and progesterone by order of the beta human chorionic gonadotropin (ß-hCG or hCG) hormone. The placenta produces hCG once the embryo embeds in the uterine wall, and

The Reproductive System 485

the hormone’s increased level is one measure by which pregnancy is confirmed. The additional estrogen, which incidentally causes the mother’s breasts to become sore, is needed in the development of the embryo’s placenta, bones, and sexual characteristics. Progesterone, initially produced by the corpus luteum to build up the endometrial lining before ovulation, normally decreases after ovulation, so the lining will disintegrate and be expelled in menstrual fluid. In pregnancy, however, the uterine lining must be sustained, so the progesterone released by the stimulus of the corpus luteum, which in turn is nudged by hCG, ensures that the hormone levels remain high. The woman continues to produce hCG throughout her pregnancy at sufficient levels to prevent uterine contractions, to stimulate breast tissue growth, and to help support the placenta. She also produces human placental lactogen (hPL), both to help her breasts prepare for nursing and to regulate her insulin levels to compensate for some of the nutritional demands the baby is making. As the mother approaches her second trimester, the fetus, whose basic organs systems are now in place, will begin to make rapid gains in size and weight.

The Second and Third Trimesters
The Fetus As the fetus lengthens through the torso, its physical features are melding into position; its eyes are moving forward, and its ears are close to their permanent location. It can hear, and its reflexes have matured. As the weeks pass and it continues to strengthen, its limbs and torso grow larger to achieve proportion with its head. It is covered in a downy coating called lanugo that it will shed before birth. Its heart is pumping more blood, and its limbs move rapidly. Between the sixth and seventh months, the fetus has immature lungs, and only with very sophisticated support could it survive outside the womb, but as it develops the capacity to breathe on its own, its rapidly growing brain takes over many of its body’s functions. Its testes, if it is male, or ovaries if female, are fully formed, and hair is growing on its head. It is so large now it must bring its knees up into the fetal position to have room in its mother’s uterus. By the ninth month, the fetal lungs have matured and it has built up significant body fat under its skin, which has thickened. Its gastrointestinal

486 Kathryn H. Hollen

system, though immature, is fully functioning, and its nervous system reacts reflexively. Toward the end of the month, when it weighs between 6 and 9 pounds (4.1 and 5.7 kilograms) and is about 20 inches (50.8 centimeters) long, it is ready to be born. The Mother A pregnant woman usually feels better during the second trimester than during the first. Nausea and fatigue often vanish early in the fourth month, and she may be suffused with a sense of contentment and well-being. But she may also begin to feel clumsy and overweight. Growing pressure compresses her bladder, making her urinate frequently; she sometimes has backaches; hormonal changes and the pressure from the baby’s growth may have made her constipated and given her hemorrhoids. She might have noticed swollen veins in her legs and stretch marks over her abdomen and breasts. Colostrum, the nutrient her breasts produce for the child’s first postnatal day or two, leaks from her breasts, which are sore and tender. Unlike the nausea of the first trimester, she might have food cravings that she is compelled to satisfy even though she knows she must not gain too much more weight. Headaches are sometimes a problem, as is indigestion (acid reflux) due to the pressure of the baby pushing against the valve that separates her stomach and esophagus. Her uterus is so large now it displaces her diaphragm, making her short of breath, and she has frequent pelvic pain as her bones and joints withstand the growing baby’s activity in her womb. All of these symptoms are normal, although not everyone experiences them. But there are other, more serious, conditions that can arise during pregnancy that require careful medical attention, and this is why prenatal care to help avert them is so important.

Medical Issues Surrounding Pregnancy
Prenatal Care Any woman contemplating pregnancy should be sure she is in good health, both for her own well-being and for that of the child. She should quit smoking, drinking alcohol, and taking illegal or prescription drugs (unless the latter are approved by her physician) for at least three months before she conceives.

The Reproductive System 487

If the father is a smoker, he should quit smoking as well to prevent secondhand smoke from endangering the infant. Once she knows she is pregnant, a woman should see her physician or arrange an appointment at a clinic where health care personnel will take her medical history, perform a physical examination, and analyze her urine and blood to determine the state of her overall health. Specific information they seek includes her blood type, Rhesus factor (see “Complications of Pregnancy” below), the presence of infection, anemia, or sexually transmitted diseases, and whether she is immune to the German measles (rubella) virus that endangers normal fetal development. Other risks to the fetus about which pregnant women should be informed include • • • • The dangers of smoking Fetal alcohol syndrome Parasitic, bacterial, and viral infections, such as toxoplasmosis, puerperal fever, or chickenpox Dietary insufficiencies

The physician or midwife who oversees the pregnancy will set up regular appointments in which to check the mother’s weight, blood pressure, and urine, and to feel her abdomen to evaluate the progression of the pregnancy. Under normal conditions, only one or two visits are required during the first trimester. They increase to one visit every four weeks in the second trimester and to one visit every two weeks in the third. From the 14th week on, the baby’s heartbeat will be monitored as well, and its size checked from about the 20th week on. Maternal and Fetal Testing Several screening and diagnostic procedures are recommended at various stages throughout pregnancy to evaluate the progress of mother and child. Some are routine, and others are repeated or introduced when there is reason for concern. • The ultrasound scan is routine and is normally done around 12 weeks to screen for Down syndrome and again at 18 to 20 weeks to verify

488 Kathryn H. Hollen

fetal growth is occurring normally. If the scan captures a view of the external genitalia, it reveals the child’s gender. • A multiple marker test done at 15 to 18 weeks consists of blood analysis. Additional screening tests are performed in the first and second trimesters if specific complications or disorders are suspected based on the mother’s history, symptoms, or the results of the ultrasound; these also detect chromosomal abnormalities and alpha-fetoprotein levels, which can be implicated in Down syndrome or neurological disorders. A glucose tolerance test will probably be administered to check for gestational diabetes. Amniocentesis is a diagnostic procedure usually performed only on mothers age 37 or older because of the small risk of miscarriage it poses. A sample of amniotic fluid is removed from the uterus and examined for fetal cells. These can yield valuable information like the sex of the fetus, its metabolic health, and whether there are chromosomal irregularities indicative of Down syndrome or other disabilities. Chorionic villus sampling is a less common diagnostic procedure than amniocentesis but can be done at an earlier stage of fetal development to detect genetic problems or blood abnormalities. This test is normally performed only if specific disorders are suspected. Umbilical vein sampling or cordocentesis elicits a great deal of information from fetal blood such as biochemical imbalances that may lead to slowed or retarded development, the presence of infection, and the Rhesus factor. If necessary, the umbilical cord can serve as the route of intrauterine blood transfusion.

• •





Complications of Pregnancy Despite early detection capabilities and the remarkable sophistication of today’s screening and diagnostic tools, not all the complications associated with pregnancy can be avoided, nor can they be successfully treated once they pose a threat.

The Reproductive System 489



Miscarriage and stillbirth are the death of the fetus. Miscarriages usually occur in the first trimester, often because of embryonic abnormalities too severe to allow survival. Stillbirth refers to death of the fetus after 24 weeks. Sometimes hormones fail to support the pregnancy, sometimes infections or illnesses compromise it, and sometimes the mother’s uterus or cervix have impairments or irregularities that do not allow pregnancy to continue. Although nearly 25 percent of women experience some vaginal bleeding early in pregnancy, only half of those are likely to miscarry. Bleeding in the second and third trimesters, however, can be very serious and may indicate the placenta is involved. Placental separation occurs when the placenta becomes detached from the uterine wall, and the condition can have very severe consequences. In the first or second trimester, it means almost certain death of the fetus; in the third trimester, if the extent of the separation is not so great as to place the mother’s life in danger from excessive bleeding, a Caesarean section can usually rescue the fetus. Placenta previa is a life-threatening development for the fetus because the placenta lies in the path of the baby through the birth canal, and if it is dislodged during the child’s passage, it will cease to provide needed oxygen. Fortunately, the condition can be diagnosed early and, if the mother receives proper bed rest and specialized medical supervision up to her 37th week, she could deliver a healthy baby by Caesarean section. Placental insufficiency is just that; for unknown reasons, the placenta is occasionally unable to transfer nutrients and waste products with enough efficiency to sustain the fetus. Ultrasound imaging and detecting less-than-normal maternal weight gain can lead to a diagnosis of this condition, which may require the induction of labor or a Caesarean section. Preeclampsia and eclampsia are very serious conditions with unknown causes. They arise from the placenta and are somehow related to an inadequate blood supply. Preeclampsia, which is symptomless, is detected with blood pressure readings and urine









490 Kathryn H. Hollen

tests during prenatal checkups. It rarely occurs before the 20th week, but when it does, the only treatment beyond stabilizing the mother is delivery of the fetus and placenta. If preeclampsia develops near term and the mother receives expert medical attention, she may be able to deliver her baby normally. In any event, the condition must be monitored constantly because it could suddenly lead to eclampsia, a worsening of the condition that results in seizures, kidney failure, coma, and, if not treated immediately as the medical emergency it is, death of the baby. • An ectopic pregnancy means the embryo has implanted in a Fallopian tube where it promptly begins to grow. The discomfort and pain this causes usually alerts the mother by the 6th to 10th week of her pregnancy that something is very wrong. This is the subacute form of ectopic pregnancy in which the Fallopian tube is still intact and the embryo can be destroyed by an injection. The acute form, by contrast, comes on suddenly and is an extreme emergency. The tube ruptures and severe pain, shock, and falling blood pressure imperil the life of the mother. Immediate surgery to remove the tube and the fetus can save her life, but she may have difficulty conceiving again or may even be left infertile. Gestational diabetes is diabetes that begins in pregnancy and, in many cases, disappears after the baby is born. Diabetic mothers require careful monitoring, because maintaining proper blood sugar levels is critical to fetal health. Often they must deliver by Caesarean section because their children tend to be large; this is due to the increased sugar in the mother’s system that crosses the placental barrier and becomes converted in the fetus into larger organs. With careful management, mothers who develop the disease during pregnancy should expect to deliver healthy children. The Rhesus factor (Rh factor) is simply an antigen or protein-like substance that appears in the red blood cells of about 85 percent of people; this makes them Rh positive. The other 15 percent of people are missing the antigen and are Rh negative. It becomes important when the blood of an Rh-negative mother mixes with that of her Rh-positive baby





The Reproductive System 491

during delivery. No harm is done at that time except that the mother’s immune system reacts to the presence of the baby’s Rh-positive blood by producing anti-Rh-positive antibodies. If she gets pregnant again with an Rh-positive baby, the antibodies her system has produced will seek out and begin to destroy the baby’s red blood cells. Monitoring the mother’s blood for antibodies during the pregnancy allows physicians to evaluate the fetus and, if it is in distress, transfuse it through the umbilical cord. • A Group B strep test is usually administered at the 35th to 37th week to determine whether the mother is carrying an infection that could be transmitted to her baby. She will also be examined to determine whether the baby is in the normal (head down) or breech (buttocks down) position for delivery, and may have her cervix checked to see if it has dilated in preparation for childbirth.

Preventing and Terminating Pregnancy
Since humans first made the connection between sex and pregnancy, they have sought ways to have the pleasure of the former without the consequence of the latter. They have often succeeded, although there were millions of unplanned pregnancies along the way. That does not have to be the case now, because there are several birth control methods that, if used properly, are nearly 100 percent effective in preventing pregnancy. Disease is another matter, however. Only condoms can help prevent sexually transmitted diseases. Given the differing viewpoints about when life begins, it is important to distinguish between contraceptives and abortifacients. Contraceptives are agents that prevent ovulation, kill sperm, or block it from reaching the ovum. Abortifacients are agents that intervene after fertilization to prevent implantation of the blastocyst in the uterus and cause the embryo to be aborted. For this reason, contraceptives and combinations of contraceptives and abortifacients are discussed separately in the following sections. If an unwanted pregnancy does occur, millions of women turn to abortion. The U.S. Supreme Court has ruled that abortion is legal up to the 24th week of pregnancy, but many states have imposed limits on the procedure. Some require parental notification or consent for minors, others

492 Kathryn H. Hollen

require waiting periods, and still others have pushed the date of fetal viability to earlier than 24 weeks. New laws restricting abortion and court challenges to that legislation are pending in many states. Because abortion is defined as the premature delivery of a human embryo or fetus that cannot survive outside the womb, the use of abortifacients is sometimes referred to as abortion. Contraceptives The famous—or infamous—withdrawal method, or coitus interruptus, is hardly a birth control method at all because it fails so frequently. It amounts to the male withdrawing from the vagina immediately before he ejaculates. But even if he does, the lubricating fluids his glands produce during sex can be loaded with sperm well before he ejaculates. The rhythm method is a natural birth control measure endorsed by the Catholic Church. (Other natural contraceptive practices like the body temperature method, described in the following paragraph, are presumably allowed as well, but the Catholic Church specifically bans any artificial means of contraception.) The rhythm method relies on the partners’ avoidance of intercourse at exactly the time of month the ovum would be poised for fertilization in the Fallopian tube. Its effectiveness, if very carefully timed, approaches 80 percent. Like Catholicism, many religions, such as Orthodox Judaism and very traditional factions within Hinduism, Islam, and Christianity, impose restrictions on birth control except in certain cases, while some modern branches of these religions favor a more liberal approach to contraceptive use. In many cultures, opponents of contraception view it as a license for immorality, while proponents view it as essential to worldwide health and avoidance of many threats posed by overpopulation. The Billings method and body temperature method are techniques in which a woman relies on her body to tell her when she is most fertile. In the Billings method, she carefully observes her vaginal discharge for a few critical days, watching for sticky, opaque cervical mucus that tells her she is ovulating. Some women may need informal training to be sure they can recognize the characteristic discharge. In the body temperature method, she simply takes her temperature during those same critical days

The Reproductive System 493

to discern the slight elevation that occurs right after ovulation. These methods at best are 80 percent effective. The cervical cap and diaphragm are “barrier” methods in that they block the entry of sperm into the uterus. The cap fits snugly over the cervix itself; the diaphragm is larger and is placed in the upper vagina in front of the cervix. Both devices must be fitted by a doctor, and both should be used with an over-the-counter spermicide to improve their effectiveness. They must be kept in place for several hours after intercourse, then removed and cleaned for reuse before having intercourse again. They are inexpensive and safe to use, although some spermicides irritate genital tissue, and the flexible ring surrounding the diaphragm can put enough pressure on the bladder to cause a uterine infection. Even with proper use, these are only about 80 percent effective, although that rate rises a few points if spermicides are conscientiously used as well. A new contraceptive technique now on the market is a tiny springlike device implanted into the Fallopian tube near its entrance into the uterus. This blocks sperm from reaching the ovum where fertilization can occur. Considered permanent contraception, it cannot be reversed, so it is primarily aimed at older women who have had their families and want no more children. One advantage is that, unlike tubal ligation, the device is inserted vaginally through the uterus in a physician’s office under local anesthesia. It requires no surgery, and recovery from the procedure is almost immediate. Condoms are thin, flexible sheaths that fit over the erect penis and catch the sperm during ejaculation, blocking it from reaching the cervix. Condoms are effective only if they do not leak and should be checked carefully for cracks or holes before use. They are available in pharmacies and grocery stores everywhere and are often manufactured with a spermicide lubricant or packaged with a printed recommendation to use a spermicide for greater effectiveness. So far, there are no other male contraceptives on the market except the condom, but research trials are underway to develop a hormone-based agent that suppresses sperm production. There is also a female condom, a pouch that fits inside the vagina and performs the same function as the male condom. Male condoms are

494 Kathryn H. Hollen

slightly more effective than female, 85 percent versus about 80 percent, respectively. The spermicidal sponge, foam, cream, jelly, and suppositories are different products with the same mode of action. Any one of them can be inserted into the vagina before intercourse. They are safe and comfortable to use unless either partner is allergic to an ingredient in the spermicide. The sponge must be removed and disposed of after intercourse. Effectiveness can range from 80 percent to 85 percent, but if a woman has been pregnant before, the effectiveness of the sponge is reduced to about 60 percent. Contraceptive-Abortifacient Combinations The contraceptive pill, or “the pill” as it is generally known, created a revolution in birth control in the 1960s. It gave women complete control over their reproductive destiny for the first time and, many believe, spawned the sexual revolution of the 1960s by freeing women to explore their sexuality exempt from pregnancy. In the 45-plus years since, the pill’s estrogen and progestin levels have been decreased to deliver effective contraception with minimal hormones. It works by suppressing ovulation, but it has a backup mechanism, in case the first fails, that irritates the uterine lining to prevent implantation of the embryo. Taken cyclically, it is fairly safe, but risks increase greatly for older women and those who smoke. It is about 95 percent effective. While the pill must be taken daily, implants are small rods or capsules placed underneath the skin of the upper arm that are fully effective 24 hours after insertion. Like the pill, they deliver estrogen and progesterone to suppress oocyte development, prevent implantation, and thicken cervical mucus to interfere with the penetration of sperm. The implants, 95 percent to 99 percent effective in preventing pregnancy, can remain in place for three to five years, at which time they must be replaced. In recent years, a new birth control pill was introduced that reduces a woman’s menstrual period from once a month to once every three months. Although its mode of action is similar to that of the original pill, the active ingredient in the new product is taken for 84 days rather than 20. Injections given periodically at a doctor’s office are convenient, but can cause irritation at the site of injection. Depending on their formulation, they give one to three months’ protection that is 99 percent effective.

The Reproductive System 495

Abortifacients The “mini-pill” is another kind of birth control pill, but has only one hormone, progesterone, which inflames the uterine lining and makes it inhospitable to the fertilized ovum. It is about 88 percent to 99 percent effective. The intrauterine device (IUD) or intrauterine system (IUS) is a small device that a doctor inserts into the uterus. Although some IUDs are treated with a spermicide, their primary mode of action is to irritate the uterine lining. They last for up to five years, are very affordable, and are effective up to 99 percent, but they can cause cramping and heavy bleeding. The vaginal ring, inserted by the user into the vagina for three weeks, releases hormones that confer 95 percent to 99 percent effectiveness. The ring can be awkward to remove. The patch, which may cause skin irritation where it is applied on the body, is a hormonal delivery system changed weekly, with three weeks on and one off. It is 95 percent to 99 percent effective. Significant research is underway to develop a contraceptive vaccine, renewable with “boosters,” that harnesses the immune system. Studies are particularly focused on producing antibodies that block the hormones supporting pregnancy or that make sperm and eggs resistant to fusing at fertilization. Much more research is needed to establish the efficacy of these agents and to confirm that normal fertility returns after the antibodies diminish in the body.

Surgical Abortions
In the first trimester, the most frequent procedure is vacuum abortion performed in a doctor’s office or clinic in a single visit. The doctor widens the cervix by inserting a series of tapered rods, then suctions out the contents of the uterus. To prevent damaging the uterus, this procedure should not be performed before the sixth week of pregnancy. In the second trimester, pregnancy may be terminated by inducing labor. Known as the induction or instillation method, an injection is given in a hospital setting that will cause the pregnant woman to go into labor and expel the fetus a few hours later. Another procedure, usually done with anesthesia on an outpatient basis, is a dilation and evacuation (D&E). This is similar to the aspiration method except that the cervical dilation must be

496 Kathryn H. Hollen

greater and the contents of the uterus, which are larger, must not only be suctioned but scraped out with a curette as well. A similar procedure is dilation and curettage (D&C), which may or may not involve suctioning. Abortion is rarely performed in the third trimester, and then only when the mother has a severe medical problem that prevents her from carrying the child to term, or when there is a gross fetal abnormality that would not permit the child to live. When an abortion must be performed at this stage, it is one of two kinds: dilation and extraction (D&X) or hysterotomy. The former is a partial-birth abortion, so called because the dead fetus is delivered vaginally. Hysterotomy, the alternative procedure, is very similar to a Caesarean section. Although there are a few mild side effects associated with the contraceptives listed here, the contraceptive-abortifacients and the abortifacients, because they are formulated with hormones, can have side effects ranging from mild to serious and can pose significant risk to certain women. The IUDs and IUSs, because they involve devices that are placed inside the uterus, can cause infection and, if they perforate other organs, serious bleeding and damage. Anyone considering these birth control measures should educate herself about these side effects and risks and discuss her concerns with her healthcare professionals.

Summary
Throughout this encyclopedia, the interaction of all the systems has been emphasized. Each of the systems cannot function properly with the other. While the reproductive system is no different, it is the only system whose primary purpose is the continuation of the species. Sexual reproduction represents not only mixing the gene pool to pass along the genetic material that determines characteristics, but also imparting resistance to mutations that can threaten the species. Females and males each have a distinct set of reproduction organs—an internal and external set. The female organs produce an egg, which results in pregnancy if successfully fertilized by the sperm produced by the male reproductive organs. However, there are methods to avoid pregnancy—some more successful than others. Currently, the most reliable forms of birth control are contraceptives, which include the birth control pill for women and condoms for men.

10
The Respiratory System
David Petechuk

Interesting Facts
• At rest, we breathe 15 to 20 times a minute and exchange nearly 17 fluid ounces (about 500 milliliters) of air with each complete breath in and out. Approximately 5 fluid ounces (about 150 milliliters) of the air we breathe in with each breath fills the passageways of the trachea, bronchi, and bronchioles. We breathe over 5,000 times a day, taking in enough air throughout a lifetime to fill 10 million balloons. The average set of human lungs has approximately 600 million alveoli (300 million per lung), creating a respiratory surface about the size of a singles tennis court or a square about 27 to 28 feet long on each side. At birth, an infant’s lung is estimated to have approximately 20 to 30 million alveoli and 1,500 miles of airway passages. The right lung is slightly larger than the left. The capillaries in the lungs would extend 1,600 meters, or about one mile, if placed end to end.



• •

• • •

497

498 David Petechuk

• •

Every minute, 1.3 gallons (5 liters) of blood is pumped through the pulmonary capillaries and around the alveoli. Overall, blood takes approximately one second to pass through the lung capillaries, during which time it becomes nearly 100 percent saturated with oxygen, while losing all of its excess carbon dioxide. As a result of goblet cells and fine hair-like structures called cilia that help to filter foreign particles out of the air before they can enter the lungs, air breathed in through the nose is cleaner than air entering through the mouth.



Chapter Highlights
• Basics of the respiratory system, including major cells and components: nose and nasal cavity, pharynx, larynx, trachea, bronchi, alveoli, and lungs Development of respiratory system Respiration process How gases are transported Cellular respiration Respiratory diseases and disorders

• • • • •

Words to Watch For
Aerobic Allergies Alveoli Antibodies Aorta Aortic bodies Bohr effect Bronchi Bronchioles Capillaries Carbamino compounds Carotid arteries Carotid bodies Chemoreceptors Chloride shift Cilia Conchae Cytochromes Cytoplasm Electron transport system Epidemics Erythrocytes Flavoproteins Gas exchange Glycolysis

The Respiratory System 499

Goblet cells Haldane effect Hemes Hyperventilation Immune system response Inflammatory mediators Intercostal muscles

Macrophages Mucociliary Oxaloacetic acid Oxidation-reduction reaction Oxidization Oxygen dissociation curve Pandemics

Pathogens Plasma Pleura Porphyrin Respiration Septum Surfactant Vagus nerve

Introduction
When the aging vaudeville entertainer Sophie Tucker was asked what the key to long life was, she replied, “Keep breathing.” Although Tucker was making a joke, her answer was also correct in the most fundamental biological way. Although all of the human body’s various systems are integral to life, none of them—from the cardiovascular to the nervous systems— would be able to function without the respiratory system. It is the respiratory system that garners the body’s most basic fuel in the form of oxygen that we breathe in from the air. Every cell in our body uses oxygen to produce energy from food and drink. In fact, every chemical process throughout the body ultimately needs oxygen to take place. It is also through the respiratory system that the body eliminates carbon dioxide waste from cell metabolism. If the respiratory system ceases to function, death occurs within minutes as carbon dioxide rapidly reaches toxic levels in the blood. When most people think of the respiratory system, they generally think of the relatively simple concept of breathing in and out, which is called respiration. But the respiratory system is a complex assemblage of organs and tissues that are integral to three different types of respiration. Breathing begins with nerve impulses that stimulate the breathing process, moving air into and out of the lungs through a series of passages from the nose down through the throat and into the lungs. Once the oxygen-rich air reaches the lungs, gas exchange (oxygen for carbon dioxide) occurs between the lungs and the blood. This process is called external respiration. Then, working in concert with the circulatory system, the now oxygen-rich blood

500 David Petechuk

is transported to all of the body’s tissues where the gas exchange process occurs once again, this time between the blood and cells, with the blood passing oxygen into the cells and carrying away carbon dioxide to be eliminated via the lungs and expiration. This respiratory process is called internal respiration. Once the oxygen reaches the cells, it is used for a variety of specific energy-producing activities within the cells. This third form of respiration is called cellular respiration. The respiratory system, especially the lungs, is unique from other systems in that it is in close and constant contact with the outside environment via the air we breathe. As a result, it is exposed to a wide variety of potentially harmful substances, from naturally occurring bacteria and viruses to pollutants produced by humans and modern society. Largely because of these exposures, respiratory diseases and illnesses—from the common cold to asthma to lung cancer—are among the most prevalent forms of sickness and disease in human beings. This chapter provides an overview of the respiratory system, from the basic anatomy and functioning of the system, as well as touching briefly on related diseases and treatments. Breathing is an amazing and intricate process, and the respiratory system is the very foundation of life.

Components and Development
From the day we are born and take our first breath, we have set into motion the continuous and essential process of acquiring oxygen (O2) from the air and eliminating carbon dioxide (CO2) from the blood. This exchange of gases is called respiration. The spontaneous and rhythmic process of breathing is made possible by a complex, finely tuned system of organs, tissues, and passages called the respiratory system. Working in conjunction with the cardiovascular system, which pumps 1.3 gallons (5 liters) of blood through the lungs every minute, the respiratory system provides oxygen for the body’s cells to produce energy and removes the carbon dioxide waste by-product created by cellular metabolism. In addition to gas exchange, the respiratory system has other functions. For example, the respiratory tract is lined from the nasal cavities to its smallest branches within the lung with sticky, mucous-secreting cells. These cells help defend the body from environmental pollutants by trapping

The Respiratory System 501

and eliminating dust, allergy-causing pollens, and other airborne particles. The respiratory system also helps to maintain the body’s temperature from 97° to 100°F by releasing warm, moist air during exhalation, and it plays a part in balancing the blood’s acid-base alkaline composition. Nevertheless, the system’s primary function is respiration for gas exchange. There are two distinct modes of respiration: organismal (sometimes referred to as external) respiration (involving the lungs) and cellular respiration (involving chemical reactions within the cells). All of the respiratory system’s functions begin with a specialized system of structures and organs.

The Components
The respiratory system can be broken down into two portions, each of which performs distinct functions. The conductive portions are composed of structures that act as ducts and pathways connecting the lungs to the outside environment. These include the nasal cavity, pharynx, and other structures. The respiratory portion, which includes the lung and lung structures, facilitates the gas exchange process. In addition, the respiratory system includes ventilating mechanisms, which are the various chest structures and muscles that help to move air in and out of the lungs. The entire respiratory system can also be broken down into two sections: the upper and lower respiratory tracts. The primary components of the upper respiratory tract are: • • • Nose and nasal cavity (passage) Pharynx (throat) Larynx (voice box)

The primary components of the lower respiratory tract are the: • • • • Trachea (windpipe) Bronchi Alveoli Lungs

502 David Petechuk

The Nose and Nasal Passages
Although we sometimes breathe through our mouths (for example, when we run or do strenuous work, or when we have a sinus infection), human inspiration (taking in air) and expiration (expelling air) usually takes place through the nose and nasal cavity, which joins the nose and the pharynx. The nasal wall, or septum, divides the nasal cavity into two sides. The bottom portion of the nasal cavity is called the hard palate, and three bony ridges or projections, called nasal conchae, are on the surface of the cavity sides. The nasal structure also includes the paranasal sinuses. These hollow cavities in the bones of the head connect to the nasal airways via a small passageway in the conchae called a meatus. It is unclear what function the paranasal sinuses perform. They may help provide resonance for vocal sounds and lighten the skull. Another theory is that the sinuses may have once aided humans in the ability to smell, as they still do for some lower animals. However, since they no longer perform this function in humans, the paranasal sinuses may be a leftover component that no longer serves an important functional purpose. Air enters through the external openings of the nose, called the nostrils or external nares. It then passes into the pharynx or throat through interior openings called the internal nares. The nasal passages and sinuses between the external and internal nares are lined with mucus-secreting epithelial cells called goblet cells and fine hair-like structures called cilia (see Sidebar 10.1). Together, these components help to filter foreign particles out of the air before these particles can enter the lungs. This filtering process is achieved when the sticky mucous membrane traps foreign particles, which are then swept by the waving microscopic cilia into the back of the throat, or pharynx, much like seaweed or sea grass buffeted back and forth by the waves. These particles are swallowed and eventually broken down by hydrochloric acid in the stomach and eliminated by the digestive system. The cough reflex can also expel them into the air. As a result of this process, air entering through the nose is cleaner than air entering through the mouth. The nose and nasal cavities also serve as the body’s air conditioner. The nasal passages and mucous membrane warm and humidify air before it enters the lower part of the respiratory system; this function is essential

The Respiratory System 503

SIDEBAR 10.1

Major Cells of the Respiratory System
Epithelial cells typically form sheets covering the surface of the body and lining cavities, tubular organs, and blood vessels. They play a major role in the respiratory system. Pseudostratified columnar epithelium cells line the conducting portion of the respiratory tract, from the trachea to the mid-size bronchioles. They are called pseudostratified columnar because this sheet of columnar cells (cells that are taller than they are wide) look like they are stratified in layers. However, the “pseudo” prefix means “fake,” and these cells are not actually multilayered. Cells making up the pseudostratified columnar epithelium include: • • Ciliated cells that have moving cilia to “sweep up” particulate matter Goblet cells that produce and secrete mucous coverings (primarily in the trachea and bronchi), help humidify the air, and trap foreign particles Basal cells in the bronchi and bronchioles that may serve as stem, or progenitor, cells to create other cell types, including ciliated and goblet cells Clara cells that secrete extracellular lining fluid and surfactant proteins





In addition, two essential types of epithelial cells are found in the alveoli: • Type I pneumocyte (Alveolar type I) cells are very thin, flat squamous cells that cover about 95 percent of the alveolar surface and form part of the blood-gas barrier for gas exchange in the alveoli. Type II pneumocyte (Alveolar type II) cells are situated at the junctions between alveoli and synthesize and secrete phospholipidrich surfactant; they also proliferate in response to lung injury acting as a progenitor, or precursor, for the type I cells.



504 David Petechuk

to help prevent harm to other, more fragile linings within the system, such as the lining of the lungs. Several features facilitate this process. Humidification takes place partially because of moisture secreted by the mucous membrane. The nose is also partitioned into two halves by the nasal septum, which is supported by bone and cartilage, thus providing a greater surface area for warming air. Capillaries (small blood vessels) that line the nose and cavities also give off heat, and the nasal conchae folds increase surface area and create turbulence that further “conditions” the air.

Pharynx
The pharynx, commonly referred to as the throat, is the funnel-shaped opening leading from the nose and mouth to both the lower respiratory tract and the digestive system. While food passes through the pharynx into the esophagus and stomach for digestion, air passes through the nose and pharynx and on into the larynx and trachea, which leads directly into the lungs. The pharynx, which is about five inches long, is typically divided into three segments, called the nasopharynx (upper), oropharynx (middle), and laryngopharynx (lower). (The nasopharynx serves exclusively as part of the respiratory tract. The oropharynx and laryngopharynx also help guide food into the alimentary tract. On swallowing, a muscular flap called the soft palate closes the nasopharynx off from the oropharynx. The laryngopharynx connects the oropharynx with the esophagus.) Lined with mucous secreting epithelial cells to help remove foreign particles, the pharynx also helps to warm and humidify air before it reaches the lungs.

Larynx
Composed of bone, cartilage, and muscle, the larynx is a valve-like structure that separates the trachea from the upper respiratory tract and connects the pharynx and trachea. It includes the large thyroid cartilage that can protrude from the front of the neck, commonly called the “Adam’s apple.” Although often referred to as the “voice box” because it contains the vestibular (vocal) folds and chords needed for human speech, the larynx serves important regulating functions during respiration. Both the vestibular folds and the epiglottis, a flap-like tissue composed of elastic

The Respiratory System 505

cartilage that sits above the larynx, act similar to trap doors that open to allow air to enter and close to prevent aspiration (food from entering the lower respiratory tract). The larynx, which is also lined with mucosal epithelium, also helps the respiratory system rid itself of impurities through the coughing mechanism activated by nerves that are extremely sensitive to touch. Laryngitis develops when mucosal epithelium on the vocal chords become inflamed.

Trachea
The trachea, commonly referred to as the windpipe, is a tube-like structure stabilized by 15 to 20 C-shaped pieces of cartilage (Figure 10.1). It is typically 4 to 5 inches (10 to 12 centimeters) long and around one inch

Figure 10.1 Upper Respiratory Tract. The upper respiratory tract, with the upper portion of the trachea and esophagus included. (Sandy Windelspecht/Ricochet Productions)

506 David Petechuk

(2.5 centimeters) in diameter. In addition to serving as the primary passageway of